Мануал suzuki bandit 1250

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Suzuki Manuals
  4. Motorcycle
  5. GSF1250

Manuals and User Guides for Suzuki GSF1250. We have 2 Suzuki GSF1250 manuals available for free PDF download: Service Manual, Owner’s Manual

Suzuki GSF1250 Service Manual

Suzuki GSF1250 Service Manual (685 pages)

Brand: Suzuki
|
Category: Motorcycle
|
Size: 55.77 MB

Table of Contents
  • Section 1 Engine

    65

    • General Information

      16

    • Fuel and Oil Recommendation

      19

    • Vehicle Identification Number

      19

    • Cylinder Identification

      20

    • Maintenance and Lubrication

      32

    • Scheduled Maintenance

      32

    • Lubrication Points

      33

    • Table of Contents

      65

    • Precautions

      69

      • Precautions for Engine

        69

    • Engine General Information and Diagnosis

      70

    • General Description

      70

      • Injection Timing Description

        70

      • Self-Diagnosis Function

        71

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      73

      • FI System Wiring Diagram

        73

      • Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler

        74

    • Component Location

      75

      • FI System Parts Location

        75

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      76

      • Engine Symptom Diagnosis

        76

      • Self-Diagnostic Procedures

        80

      • Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures

        82

      • Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at the Time of DTC)

        83

      • SDS Check

        84

      • DTC Table

        87

      • Fail-Safe Function Table

        89

      • FI System Troubleshooting

        90

      • Malfunction Code and Defective Condition Table

        91

        • DTC «C12» (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

          94

        • DTC «C13» (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.1) Circuit Malfunction

          97

        • DTC «C14» (P0120-H/L): TP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

          106

        • DTC «C15» (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

          114

        • DTC «C17» (P1750-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.2) Circuit Malfunction

          121

        • DTC «C21» (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

          129

        • DTC «C23» (P1651-H/L): to Sensor Circuit Malfunction

          136

        • DTC «C24» (P0351), «C25» (P0352), «C26» (P0353) or «C27» (P0354): Ignition System Malfunction

          142

        • DTC «C28» (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction

          142

        • DTC «C29» (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction

          146

        • DTC «C31» (P0705): GP Switch Circuit Malfunction

          154

        • DTC «C32» (P0201), «C33» (P0202), «C34» (P0203) or «C35» (P0204): Fuel Injector Circuit Malfunction

          156

        • DTC «C40» (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): ISC Valve Circuit Malfunction

          160

        • DTC «C41» (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit Malfunction

          166

        • DTC «C41» (P2505): ECM Power Input Signal Malfunction

          169

        • DTC «C42» (P1650): IG Switch Circuit Malfunction

          171

        • DTC «C44» (P0130/P0135): HO2 Sensor (HO2S) Circuit Malfunction

          171

        • DTC «C49» (P1656): PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction

          177

        • DTC «C60» (P0480): Cooling Fan Relay Circuit Malfunction

          180

    • Specifications

      183

      • Service Data

        183

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      184

      • Special Tool

        184

    • Emission Control Devices

      185

    • Precautions

      185

      • Precautions for Emission Control Devices

        185

    • General Description

      185

      • Fuel Injection System Description

        185

      • Crankcase Emission Control System Description

        186

      • Exhaust Emission Control System Description

        187

      • Noise Emission Control System Description

        187

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      188

      • PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram

        188

    • Repair Instructions

      189

      • Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and Installation

        189

      • Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Inspection

        189

      • PAIR Reed Valve Removal and Installation

        190

      • PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation

        190

      • PAIR System Inspection

        190

      • Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose Inspection

        192

      • Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover / Separator Removal and Installation

        192

      • Crankcase Breather (PCV) Cover Inspection

        193

    • Specifications

      194

      • Service Data

        194

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        194

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      194

      • Recommended Service Material

        194

      • Special Tool

        194

    • Engine Electrical Devices

      195

    • Precautions

      195

      • Precautions for Engine Electrical Device

        195

    • Component Location

      195

      • Engine Electrical Components Location

        195

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      195

      • Engine Symptom Diagnosis

        195

    • Repair Instructions

      195

      • ECM Removal and Installation

        195

      • CKP Sensor Inspection

        195

      • IAP Sensor (No.1) Removal and Installation

        196

      • IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Inspection

        196

      • IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Removal and Installation

        196

      • ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

        196

      • ECT Sensor Inspection

        197

      • TO Sensor Removal and Installation

        197

      • TO Sensor Inspection

        197

      • STP Sensor Inspection

        197

      • STP Sensor Adjustment

        198

      • STP Sensor Removal and Installation

        198

      • STV Actuator Inspection

        199

      • STV Actuator Removal and Installation

        199

      • ISC Valve Inspection

        199

      • ISC Valve Removal and Installation

        199

      • ISC Valve Preset and Opening Initialization

        200

      • HO2 Sensor Inspection

        200

      • HO2 Sensor Removal and Installation

        200

      • GP Switch Inspection

        200

      • GP Switch Removal and Installation

        200

    • Specifications

      201

      • Service Data

        201

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        202

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      202

      • Recommended Service Material

        202

      • Special Tool

        202

    • Engine Mechanical

      203

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      203

      • Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram

        203

      • Throttle Cable Routing Diagram

        204

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      205

      • Engine Mechanical Symptom Diagnosis

        205

      • Compression Pressure Check

        205

    • Repair Instructions

      206

      • Engine Components Removable with the Engine in Place

        206

      • Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation

        208

      • Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning

        208

      • Air Cleaner Box Removal and Installation

        208

      • Throttle Cable Removal and Installation

        208

      • Throttle Cable Inspection

        209

      • Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment

        209

      • Throttle Body Components

        209

      • Throttle Body Construction

        210

      • Throttle Body Removal and Installation

        211

      • Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly

        212

      • Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning

        217

      • Throttle Valve Synchronization

        217

      • Engine Assembly Removal

        219

      • Engine Assembly Installation

        223

      • Tightening Torque

        224

      • Engine Top Side Disassembly

        226

      • Engine Top Side Assembly

        230

      • Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment

        238

      • Camshaft Inspection

        238

      • Camshaft Sprocket Inspection

        240

      • Camshaft Sprocket Removal and Installation

        240

      • Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection

        241

      • Cam Chain Guide Removal and Installation

        241

      • Cam Chain Guide Inspection

        241

      • Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection

        242

      • Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly

        242

      • Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection

        246

      • Valve Guide Replacement

        249

      • Valve Seat Repair

        250

      • Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly

        250

      • Cylinder Inspection

        252

      • Piston Ring Removal and Installation

        253

      • Piston and Piston Ring Inspection

        254

      • Engine Bottom Side Disassembly

        255

      • Engine Bottom Side Assembly

        263

      • Crank Balancer Disassembly and Assembly

        274

      • Crank Balancer Inspection

        275

      • Conrod Removal and Installation

        276

      • Conrod and Crankshaft Inspection

        277

      • Conrod Crank Pin Bearing Inspection and Selection

        278

      • Crankshaft Journal Bearing Inspection and Selection

        280

      • Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Inspection and Selection

        282

    • Specifications

      285

      • Service Data

        285

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        286

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      287

      • Recommended Service Material

        287

      • Special Tool

        288

    • Engine Lubrication System

      291

    • Precautions

      291

      • Precautions for Engine Oil

        291

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      292

      • Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram

        292

      • Oil Pan

        292

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      293

      • Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis

        293

      • Oil Pressure Check

        293

    • Repair Instructions

      294

      • Engine Oil and Filter Replacement

        294

      • Engine Oil Level Inspection

        294

      • Oil Pan / Oil Strainer / Oil Pressure Regulator Removal and Installation

        294

      • Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer Inspection

        296

      • Oil Cooler Removal and Installation

        297

      • Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation

        297

      • Oil Pressure Switch Inspection

        298

      • Oil Jet Removal and Installation

        298

      • Oil Gallery Jet Removal and Installation

        300

      • Oil Jet / Oil Gallery Jet Inspection

        300

      • Oil Pump Removal and Installation

        301

      • Oil Pump Inspection

        303

    • Specifications

      303

      • Service Data

        303

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        303

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      304

      • Recommended Service Material

        304

      • Special Tool

        304

    • Engine Cooling System

      305

    • Precautions

      305

      • Precautions for Engine Cooling System

        305

      • Precautions for Engine Coolant

        305

    • General Description

      305

      • Engine Coolant Description

        305

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      306

      • Cooling Circuit Diagram

        306

      • Water Hose Routing Diagram

        307

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      308

      • Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis

        308

    • Repair Instructions

      308

      • Cooling Circuit Inspection

        308

      • Radiator Cap Inspection

        309

      • Radiator Inspection and Cleaning

        309

      • Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor Removal and Installation

        309

      • Water Hose Inspection

        310

      • Water Hose Removal and Installation

        311

      • Radiator Reservoir Tank Inspection

        311

      • Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal and Installation

        312

      • Cooling Fan Inspection

        312

      • Cooling Fan Relay Inspection

        313

      • ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

        313

      • ECT Sensor Inspection

        313

      • Thermostat Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation

        313

      • Thermostat Inspection

        315

      • Water Pump Components

        316

      • Water Pump Construction

        316

      • Water Pump Removal and Installation

        317

      • Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly

        318

      • Water Pump Related Parts Inspection

        321

    • Specifications

      322

      • Service Data

        322

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        322

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      323

      • Recommended Service Material

        323

      • Special Tool

        323

    • Fuel System

      324

    • Precautions

      324

      • Precautions for Fuel System

        324

    • General Description

      325

      • Fuel System Description

        325

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      326

      • Fuel Tank Drain Hose and Breather Hose Routing Diagram

        326

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      327

      • Fuel System Diagnosis

        327

    • Repair Instructions

      328

      • Fuel Pressure Inspection

        328

      • Fuel Pump Inspection

        328

      • Fuel Discharge Amount Inspection

        329

      • Fuel Pump Relay Inspection

        330

      • Fuel Hose Inspection

        330

      • Fuel Level Gauge Inspection

        330

      • Fuel Level Indicator Inspection

        330

      • Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor) Inspection

        330

      • Fuel Tank Construction

        331

      • Fuel Tank Removal and Installation

        332

      • Fuel Pump Components

        333

      • Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and Installation

        334

      • Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly

        335

      • Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection and Cleaning

        337

      • Fuel Injector / Fuel Delivery Pipe / T-Joint Removal and Installation

        337

      • Fuel Injector Inspection and Cleaning

        337

    • Specifications

      338

      • Service Data

        338

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        338

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      339

      • Recommended Service Material

        339

      • Special Tool

        339

    • Ignition System

      340

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      340

      • Ignition System Diagram

        340

      • Ignition System Components Location

        340

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      341

      • Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis

        341

      • No Spark or Poor Spark

        342

    • Repair Instructions

      343

      • Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation

        343

      • Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning

        344

      • Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Inspection

        344

      • CKP Sensor Inspection

        346

      • CKP Sensor Removal and Installation

        347

      • Engine Stop Switch Inspection

        347

      • Ignition Switch Inspection

        348

      • Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

        348

    • Specifications

      350

      • Service Data

        350

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        350

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      350

      • Special Tool

        350

    • Starting System

      351

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      351

      • Starting System Diagram

        351

    • Component Location

      351

      • Starting System Components Location

        351

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      351

      • Starting System Symptom Diagnosis

        351

      • Starter Motor will Not Run

        352

      • Starter Motor Runs but Does Not Crank the Engine

        352

    • Repair Instructions

      353

      • Starter Motor Components

        353

      • Starter Motor Removal and Installation

        354

      • Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly

        355

      • Starter Motor Inspection

        356

      • Starter Relay Removal and Installation

        357

      • Starter Relay Inspection

        357

      • Turn Signal / Side-Stand Relay Removal and Installation

        358

      • Side-Stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts Inspection

        358

      • Starter Clutch Removal and Installation

        360

      • Starter Clutch Inspection

        362

      • Starter Button Inspection

        363

    • Specifications

      363

      • Service Data

        363

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        363

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      364

      • Recommended Service Material

        364

      • Special Tool

        364

    • Charging System

      365

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      365

      • Charging System Diagram

        365

    • Component Location

      365

      • Charging System Components Location

        365

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      365

      • Charging System Symptom Diagnosis

        365

      • Battery Runs down Quickly

        366

    • Repair Instructions

      367

      • Battery Current Leakage Inspection

        367

      • Regulated Voltage Inspection

        367

      • Generator Inspection

        367

      • Generator Removal and Installation

        368

      • Regulator / Rectifier Construction

        372

      • Regulator / Rectifier Inspection

        372

      • Battery Components

        373

      • Battery Charging

        373

      • Battery Removal and Installation

        376

      • Battery Visual Inspection

        376

    • Specifications

      377

      • Service Data

        377

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        377

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      378

      • Recommended Service Material

        378

      • Special Tool

        378

    • Exhaust System

      379

    • Precautions

      379

      • Precautions for Exhaust System

        379

    • Repair Instructions

      380

      • Exhaust System Construction

        380

      • Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation

        381

      • Exhaust System Inspection

        384

    • Specifications

      384

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        384

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      384

      • Recommended Service Material

        384

  • Section 2 Suspension

    385

    • Precautions

      386

      • Precautions for Suspension

        386

    • Suspension General Diagnosis

      387

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      387

      • Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis

        387

    • Repair Instructions

      388

      • Front Fork Components

        388

      • Front Fork Removal and Installation

        389

      • Front Fork Inspection

        390

      • Front Fork Adjustment

        391

      • Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly

        391

      • Front Fork Parts Inspection

        396

    • Front Suspension

      388

    • Specifications

      397

      • Service Data

        397

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        397

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      398

      • Recommended Service Material

        398

      • Special Tool

        398

    • Rear Suspension

      399

    • Repair Instructions

      399

      • Rear Suspension Components

        399

      • Rear Suspension Assembly Construction

        400

      • Rear Shock Absorber Removal and Installation

        401

      • Rear Suspension Inspection

        401

      • Rear Shock Absorber Inspection

        402

      • Rear Suspension Adjustment

        402

      • Rear Shock Absorber Disposal

        402

      • Cushion Lever Removal and Installation

        403

      • Cushion Lever Inspection

        404

      • Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and Installation

        404

      • Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and Installation

        405

      • Swingarm Related Parts Inspection

        407

      • Swingarm Bearing Removal and Installation

        408

    • Specifications

      410

      • Service Data

        410

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        410

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      411

      • Recommended Service Material

        411

      • Special Tool

        411

    • Wheels and Tires

      412

    • Precautions

      412

      • Precautions for Wheel and Tire

        412

    • Repair Instructions

      413

      • Front Wheel Components

        413

      • Front Wheel Assembly Construction

        415

      • Front Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

        417

      • Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection

        419

      • Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation

        420

      • Rear Wheel Components

        423

      • Rear Wheel Assembly Construction

        425

      • Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

        427

      • Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection

        428

      • Rear Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation

        429

      • Tire Removal and Installation

        431

      • Wheel / Tire / Air Valve Inspection and Cleaning

        432

      • Air Valve Removal and Installation

        433

      • Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment

        434

    • Specifications

      434

      • Service Data

        434

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        435

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      435

      • Recommended Service Material

        435

      • Special Tool

        435

  • Section 3 Driveline / Axle

    437

    • Precautions

      438

      • Precautions for Driveline / Axle

        438

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      439

      • Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom Diagnosis

        439

    • Repair Instructions

      439

      • Drive Chain Related Components

        439

      • Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation

        440

      • Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal and Installation

        442

      • Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection

        443

      • Sprocket Mounting Drum Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation

        444

      • Drive Chain Replacement

        445

    • Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft

      439

    • Specifications

      448

      • Service Data

        448

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        448

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      449

      • Recommended Service Material

        449

      • Special Tool

        449

  • Section 4 Brake

    451

    • Precautions

      453

      • Precautions for Brake System

        453

      • Brake Fluid Information

        453

    • Brake Control System and Diagnosis

      454

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      454

      • Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram

        454

      • Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram

        458

    • Repair Instructions

      460

      • Brake Pedal Height Inspection and Adjustment

        460

      • Front Brake Light Switch Inspection

        460

      • Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection

        461

      • Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection and Adjustment

        461

      • Brake Fluid Level Check

        461

      • Brake Hose Inspection

        461

      • Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit

        461

      • Brake Fluid Replacement

        463

      • Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation

        465

      • Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation

        466

      • Front Brake Master Cylinder Components

        467

      • Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation

        467

      • Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Disassembly and Assembly

        468

      • Front Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

        470

      • Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components

        471

      • Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation

        471

      • Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly

        472

      • Rear Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

        473

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      460

      • Brake Symptom Diagnosis

        460

    • Specifications

      474

      • Service Data

        474

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        474

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      475

      • Recommended Service Material

        475

      • Special Tool

        475

    • Front Brakes

      476

    • Repair Instructions

      476

      • Front Brake Components

        476

      • Front Brake Pad Inspection

        477

      • Front Brake Pad Replacement

        477

      • Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

        478

      • Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly

        479

      • Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

        481

      • Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation

        482

      • Front Brake Disc Inspection

        482

    • Specifications

      483

      • Service Data

        483

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        483

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      484

      • Recommended Service Material

        484

      • Special Tool

        484

    • Repair Instructions

      485

      • Rear Brake Components

        485

      • Rear Brake Pad Inspection

        486

      • Rear Brake Pad Replacement

        486

      • Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

        488

      • Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly

        488

      • Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

        490

      • Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation

        491

      • Rear Brake Disc Inspection

        491

    • Rear Brakes

      485

    • Specifications

      492

      • Service Data

        492

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        492

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      493

      • Recommended Service Material

        493

      • Special Tool

        493

    • Precautions

      494

      • Precautions for ABS

        494

      • ABS Information

        494

    • General Description

      494

      • Wheel Speed Sensor Description

        494

      • ABS Control Unit Description

        495

      • Hydraulic Unit (HU) Description

        497

      • Self-Diagnosis Function and ABS Indicator Light Description

        498

      • Fail-Safe Function Description

        499

    • Abs

      494

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      500

      • ABS Wiring Diagram

        500

      • ABS Unit Diagram

        501

      • Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

        502

      • Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

        504

    • Component Location

      505

      • ABS Components Location

        505

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      506

      • ABS Troubleshooting

        506

      • Pre-Diagnosis Inspection

        508

      • ABS Indicator Light Inspection

        510

      • DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output

        516

      • DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting

        518

      • SDS Check

        522

      • Active Control Inspection

        523

      • DTC Table

        527

        • DTC «13» (C1613): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction

          528

        • DTC «14» (C1614): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction

          530

        • DTC «22» (C1622): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction

          532

        • DTC «23» (C1623): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction

          534

        • DTC «25» (C1625): Wheel Speed Sensor Related Malfunction

          536

        • DTC «35» (C1635): ABS Motor Malfunction

          538

        • DTC «41» (C1641): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

          540

        • DTC «42» (C1642): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open

          542

        • DTC «43» (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short

          546

        • DTC «44» (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

          548

        • DTC «45» (C1645): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open

          550

        • DTC «46» (C1646): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short

          554

        • DTC «47» (C1647): Supply Voltage (Increased)

          556

        • DTC «48» (C1648): Supply Voltage (Decreased)

          558

        • DTC «55» (C1655): ABS Control Unit Malfunction

          560

        • DTC «61» (C1661): ABS Solenoid Malfunction

          562

    • Repair Instructions

      563

      • ABS Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect

        563

      • Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

        564

      • Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

        564

      • Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation

        565

      • Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation

        566

      • Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor Inspection

        567

      • ABS Control Unit/Hu Removal and Installation

        567

    • Specifications

      569

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        569

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      569

      • Special Tool

        569

  • Section 5 Transmission / Transaxle

    571

    • Precautions

      572

      • Precautions for Transmission / Transaxle

        572

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      573

      • Manual Transmission Symptom Diagnosis

        573

    • Manual Transmission

      573

    • Repair Instructions

      574

      • Transmission Components

        574

      • Transmission Removal

        575

      • Transmission Installation

        577

      • Transmission Construction

        580

      • Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear Disassembly and Assembly

        581

      • Transmission Related Parts Inspection

        584

      • Gear Position (GP) Switch Inspection

        584

      • Gear Position (GP) Switch Removal and Installation

        584

      • Gearshift Lever Construction

        585

      • Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation

        586

      • Gearshift Lever Height Inspection and Adjustment

        586

      • Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Components

        586

      • Gearshift Construction

        587

      • Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Removal and Installation

        587

      • Gearshift Linkage Inspection

        590

      • Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation

        591

    • Specifications

      592

      • Service Data

        592

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        592

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      593

      • Recommended Service Material

        593

      • Special Tool

        593

    • Precautions

      594

      • Precautions for Clutch System

        594

      • Clutch Fluid (Brake Fluid) Information

        594

    • Clutch

      594

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      595

      • Clutch Hose Routing Diagram

        595

    • Repair Instructions

      596

      • Clutch Lever Position Switch Inspection

        596

      • Clutch Fluid Level Check

        596

      • Clutch Hose Inspection

        596

      • Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit

        597

      • Clutch Fluid Replacement

        597

      • Clutch Hose Removal and Installation

        598

      • Clutch Control System Components

        599

      • Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation

        600

      • Clutch Master Cylinder / Clutch Lever Disassembly and Assembly

        601

      • Clutch Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

        603

      • Clutch Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and Installation

        603

      • Clutch Push Rod (Left) Inspection

        604

      • Clutch Release Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly

        604

      • Clutch Release Cylinder Inspection

        604

      • Clutch Components

        605

      • Clutch Removal

        606

      • Clutch Installation

        607

      • Clutch Parts Inspection

        611

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      596

      • Clutch System Symptom Diagnosis

        596

    • Specifications

      612

      • Service Data

        612

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        612

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      613

      • Recommended Service Material

        613

      • Special Tool

        613

  • Section 6 Steering

    615

    • Precautions

      616

      • Precautions for Steering

        616

    • Steering General Diagnosis

      617

    • Diagnostic Information and Procedures

      617

      • Steering Symptom Diagnosis

        617

    • Repair Instructions

      618

      • Handlebar Components

        618

      • Handlebar Construction

        619

      • Handlebar Removal and Installation

        620

      • Handlebars Inspection

        621

      • Steering Components

        622

      • Steering Removal and Installation

        623

      • Steering Related Parts Inspection

        626

      • Steering System Inspection

        626

      • Steering Stem Bearing Removal and Installation

        626

      • Steering Tension Adjustment

        627

    • Steering / Handlebar

      618

    • Specifications

      628

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        628

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      629

      • Recommended Service Material

        629

      • Special Tool

        629

  • Section 9 Body and Accessories

    631

    • Precautions

      633

      • Precautions for Electrical System

        633

    • Component Location

      633

      • Electrical Components Location

        633

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      634

      • Wiring Diagram (GSF1250)

        634

      • Wiring Diagram (GSF1250S)

        636

      • Wiring Diagram (GSF1250A)

        638

      • Wiring Diagram (GSF1250SA)

        639

      • Wiring Harness Routing Diagram

        641

    • Wiring Systems

      634

    • Specifications

      644

      • Service Data

        644

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        644

    • Repair Instructions

      645

      • Headlight Components

        645

      • Headlight Removal and Installation

        646

      • Headlight Bulb Replacement

        647

      • Headlight Beam Adjustment

        649

      • Rear Combination Light Components

        649

      • Rear Combination Light Construction

        650

      • Rear Combination Light Removal and Installation

        650

      • Brake Light Bulb / Taillight Bulb Replacement

        651

      • License Plate Light Components

        651

      • License Plate Light Removal and Installation

        652

      • License Plate Light Bulb Replacement

        652

      • Turn Signal Light Components

        653

      • Front Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation

        653

      • Rear Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation

        654

      • Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement

        654

      • Reflex Refractor Construction

        654

      • Turn Signal / Side-Stand Relay Inspection

        655

      • Turn Signal / Side-Stand Relay Removal and Installation

        655

      • Hazard Switch Inspection

        655

      • Turn Signal Switch Inspection

        655

      • Passing Light Switch Inspection

        656

      • Dimmer Switch Inspection

        656

    • Lighting Systems

      645

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      657

      • Special Tool

        657

    • Specifications

      657

      • Service Data

        657

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        657

    • Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn

      658

    • General Description

      658

      • Combination Meter System Description

        658

    • Repair Instructions

      659

      • Combination Meter Components

        659

      • Combination Meter Removal and Installation

        661

      • Combination Meter Disassembly and Assembly

        661

      • Combination Meter Inspection

        662

      • Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light Inspection

        662

      • Engine Coolant Temperature Removal and Installation

        663

      • Fuel Level Indicator Inspection

        663

      • Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor) Inspection

        664

      • Fuel Level Gauge Inspection

        665

      • Speedometer Inspection

        665

      • Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

        665

      • Speed Sensor Inspection

        666

      • Oil Pressure Indicator Inspection

        666

      • Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation

        667

      • Ignition Switch Inspection

        667

      • Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

        667

      • Horn Inspection

        667

      • Horn Removal and Installation

        668

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      669

      • Special Tool

        669

    • Specifications

      669

      • Service Data

        669

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        669

    • Exterior Parts

      670

    • Schematic and Routing Diagram

      670

      • Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram

        670

    • Repair Instructions

      671

      • Exterior Parts Construction

        671

      • Front Fender Construction

        673

      • Frame Cover Cushion Construction

        673

      • Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion Construction

        674

      • Fastener Removal and Installation

        674

      • Exterior Parts Removal and Installation

        675

      • Seat Height Adjustment

        678

    • Body Structure

      679

    • Repair Instructions

      679

      • Body Frame Construction

        679

      • Engine Mounting Bracket Bushing Replacement

        679

        • Engine Mount Bushing Replacement

          680

        • Front Footrest Bracket Construction

          680

        • Side-Stand Construction

          681

        • Side-Stand Removal and Installation

          682

        • Center Stand Construction

          682

        • Center Stand Removal and Installation

          682

    • Specifications

      683

      • Tightening Torque Specifications

        683

    • Special Tools and Equipment

      683

      • Recommended Service Material

        683

Advertisement

Suzuki GSF1250 Owner's Manual

Suzuki GSF1250 Owner’s Manual (60 pages)

Brand: Suzuki
|
Category: Motorcycle
|
Size: 36.41 MB

Table of Contents
  • Break-In (Running-In)

    2

  • Table of Contents

    3

  • Table of Contents

    4

  • Consumer Information

    4

  • Accessory Information and Precaution Safety Tips

    5

  • Modification

    6

  • Safe Riding Recommendation for Motorcycle Riders

    6

  • Serial Number Location

    6

  • Noise Control System (Australia Only)

    7

    • Location of Parts

      8

    • Vehicle View and Parts Identification

      8

    • Ignition Switch

      9

    • Instrument Panel

      10

      • Fuel Meter

        11

      • Odometer

        11

      • Tachometer

        11

      • Trip Meters

        11

      • Clock

        12

      • Fuel Injection System Indicator «FI»

        12

      • Coolant Temperature Indicator Light

        13

      • High Beam Indicator Light

        13

      • Oil Pressure Indicator Light

        13

      • Turn Signal Indicator Light

        13

      • Clutch Lever Adjustment

        14

      • Hazard Warning Switch

        14

      • Left Handlebar

        14

      • Turn Signal Light Switch

        14

      • Electric Starter Button

        15

      • Engine Stop Switch

        15

    • Right Handlebar

      15

    • Throttle Grip

      15

    • Fuel Tank Cap

      16

    • Gearshift Lever

      16

    • Rear Brake Pedal

      16

    • Seat Lock and Helmet Holders

      17

    • Stands

      17

      • Damping Force Adjustment

        18

      • Spring Pre-Load Adjustment

        18

    • Suspension Adjustment

      18

    • Fuel, Engine Oil and Coolant Recommendations

      19

    • Seat Height Adjustment

      19

    • Fuel Octane Rating

      20

    • Oxygenated Fuel Recommendation

      20

    • Engine Oil

      20

    • SAE Engine Oil Viscosity

      20

    • Coolant

      21

    • Anti-Freeze

      21

    • Required Amount of Water/Coolant

      21

    • Jaso T903

      21

    • Break-In (Running-In) and Inspection before Riding

      22

    • Maximum Engine Speed Recommendation

      23

    • Breaking in the New Tires

      23

    • Initial Service

      23

    • Riding Tips

      24

    • Starting the Engine

      25

    • Starting off

      25

    • Using the Transmission

      26

    • Riding on Hills

      26

    • Stopping and Parking

      26

    • Shifting Up/Down Schedule

      26

    • Inspection and Maintenance

      27

    • Maintenance Schedule

      28

    • Tool Kit Location

      29

    • Fuel Tank Removal

      29

    • Lubrication Points

      30

    • Battery

      31

    • Air Cleaner

      31

    • Air Cleaner Drain Tube

      32

    • Spark Plugs Removal

      33

    • Spark Plug Inspection

      33

    • Spark Plug Replacement Guide

      33

    • Engine Oil Level Check

      34

    • Fuel Hose

      34

    • Spark Plug Installation

      34

    • Engine Oil and Filter Change

      35

    • Engine Idle Speed Inspection

      36

    • Throttle Cable Adjustment

      37

    • Clutch

      37

    • Coolant Level

      38

    • Coolant Change

      38

    • Drive Chain

      38

    • Drive Chain Cleaning and Oiling

      39

    • Drive Chain Adjustment

      39

    • Brakes

      40

    • Brake Fluid

      40

    • Brake Pads

      40

    • Tires

      41

    • Rear Brake Light Switch

      41

    • Rear Brake Pedal Adjustment

      41

    • Tire Pressure and Loading

      42

    • Tire Condition and Type

      42

    • Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

      42

    • Side Stand/Ignition Interlock Switch

      43

    • Front Wheel Removal

      44

    • Rear Wheel Removal

      45

    • Light Bulb Replacement

      46

    • Headlight/Position Light

      46

    • Brake Light/Taillight

      47

    • Headlight Beam Adjustment

      48

    • License Plate Light

      48

    • Turn Signal Light

      48

    • Fuses

      49

    • Troubleshooting

      50

    • Fuel Supply Check

      51

    • Ignition System Check

      51

    • Engine Stalling

      51

    • Cleaning

      53

    • Washing the Motorcycle

      53

    • Waxing the Motorcycle

      53

    • Inspection after Cleaning

      53

    • Storage

      54

    • Procedure for Returning to Service

      54

    • Specifications

      55

    • Index

      56

Advertisement

Related Products

  • Suzuki GSF1250A

  • Suzuki GSF1250S

  • Suzuki GSF1250SA

  • Suzuki GSF1200 2001

  • Suzuki GSF1200S 2001

  • Suzuki bandit gsf 1200v 1997

  • Suzuki bandit gsf 1200sv 1997

  • Suzuki GSF1200

  • Suzuki GSF1200S

  • Suzuki GSF1200SK6

Suzuki Categories

Motorcycle

Automobile

Motorcycle Accessories

Musical Instrument

Offroad Vehicle

More Suzuki Manuals

Материал из BikesWiki — энциклопедия японских мотоциклов

Перейти к: навигация, поиск

Suzuki GSF 1250 S Bandit

Ниже представлены прямые ссылки на скачку сервисной документации.

Для Suzuki GSF 1250 Bandit

  • Сервисный мануал (Service Manual) на Suzuki GSF 1250 Bandit

Обзор модели

  • Suzuki GSF 1250 Bandit

Источник — «https://bikeswiki.ru/index.php?title=Suzuki_GSF1250_Bandit:_мануалы&oldid=9819»

Категория:

  • Сервисная документация
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Suzuki Manuals
  4. Motorcycle
  5. GSF1250
  6. Service manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Related Manuals for Suzuki GSF1250

Summary of Contents for Suzuki GSF1250

  • Page 1
    9 9 5 0 0 — 3 9 3 0 0 — 0 1 E…
  • Page 2
    FOREWORD This manual contains an introductory description on the SUZUKI GSF1250/S/A/SA and procedures for its inspec- tion/service and overhaul of its main components. Other information considered as generally known is not included. Read the GENERAL INFORMATION section to familiarize yourself with the motorcycle and its maintenance. Use this section as well as other sections to use as a guide for proper inspection and service.
  • Page 3
    TABLE OF CONTENTS Precautions…………… 00-i Precautions …………00-1 General Information ……….. 0-i General Information ……….0A-1 Maintenance and Lubrication ……… 0B-1 Service Data…………0C-1 Engine …………….. 1-i Precautions ………….. 1-1 Engine General Information and Diagnosis … 1A-1 Emission Control Devices ……..1B-1 Engine Electrical Devices……..1C-1 Engine Mechanical……….1D-1 Engine Lubrication System ……..
  • Page 5
    Table of Contents 00- i Section 00 Precautions CONTENTS Precautions ……….00-1 General Precautions ……….. 00-1 Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service …. 00-2 Precautions…………00-1 Warning / Caution / Note……..00-1…
  • Page 6
    CAUTION Indicates a potential hazard that could result • If parts replacement is necessary, replace in death or injury. the parts with Suzuki Genuine Parts or their equivalent. CAUTION • When removing parts that are to be reused, keep them arranged in an orderly manner…
  • Page 7
    Precautions: 00-2 • Use a torque wrench to tighten fasteners • Before refitting the sealed coupler, make sure its seal to the specified torque. Wipe off grease rubber is positioned properly. The seal rubber may and oil if a thread is smeared with them. possibly come off the position during disconnecting work and if the coupler is refitted with the seal rubber •…
  • Page 8
    00-3 Precautions: Switch • Check the male connector for bend and female connector for excessive opening. Also check the Never apply grease material to switch contact points to coupler for locking (looseness), corrosion, dust, etc. prevent damage. ECM / ABS control unit / HU / Various sensors •…
  • Page 9
    Precautions: 00-4 • Be careful not to touch the electrical terminals of the electronic parts (ECM, ABS control unit/HU, etc.). The static electricity from your body may damage them. I649G1000005-02 Battery • Battery connection in reverse polarity is strictly prohibited. Such a wrong connection will damage the I310G1000008-01 components of the FI and ABS systems instantly •…
  • Page 10
    00-5 Precautions: • Before measuring voltage at each terminal, check to 1) Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery. make sure that battery voltage is 11 V or higher. 2) Check each connector/coupler at both ends of the Terminal voltage check with a low battery voltage will circuit being checked for loose connection.
  • Page 11
    Precautions: 00-6 Continuity check 3) Also, if measured values are as listed following, a resistance (abnormality) exists which causes the 1) Measure resistance across coupler “B” (between “A” voltage drop in the circuit between terminals “A” and and “C” in figure). “B”.
  • Page 12
    3) Measure resistance between terminal at one end of Using The Multi-Circuit Testers circuit (“A” terminal in figure) and body ground. If • Use the Suzuki multi-circuit tester set. continuity is indicated, there is a short circuit to • Use well-charged batteries in the tester.
  • Page 13
    Precautions: 00-8 • After using the tester, turn the power off. Special tool : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) I649G1000002-02 NOTE • When connecting the multi-circuit tester, use the needle pointed probe to the back side of the lead wire coupler and connect the probes of tester to them.
  • Page 14
    00-9 Precautions:…
  • Page 15
    Symbols ………….. 0A-1 Evaporative Emission Control System Abbreviations …………0A-1 Inspection (E-33 Only) ……..0B-10 SAE-to-Former SUZUKI Term ……0A-2 Engine Oil and Filter Replacement ….0B-10 Vehicle Side View ……….0A-3 Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Vehicle Identification Number ……0A-4 Adjustment …………0B-12…
  • Page 16: General Information

    Apply oil. Use engine oil unless otherwise specified. Apply molybdenum oil solution. (Mixture of engine oil and SUZUKl MOLY PASTE in a ratio of 1:1). Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE “A” or equivalent. 99000-25010 Apply SUZUKI MOLY PASTE or equivalent. 99000-25140 Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE or equivalent.

  • Page 17
    J1930 terms and abbreviations which may be used in this manual in compliance with SAE recommendations, Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM): — as well as their former SUZUKI names. Pulsed Secondary Air Injection (PAIR): Pulse Air Ex. SAE term (Abbreviation): Former SUZUKI term…
  • Page 18
    Volume Air Flow (VAF): Air Flow I718H1010003-01 Left Side Vehicle Side View B718H10101003 NOTE Difference between illustration and actual motorcycles may exist depending on the markets. SUZUKI GSF1250 (2007-model) Right Side I718H1010004-02 SUZUKI GSF1250A (2007-model) Right Side I718H1010001-01 Left Side I718H1010005-01 I718H1010002-02…
  • Page 19: Vehicle Identification Number

    PERFORMANCE 4 MOTOR OIL or equivalent engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil. If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select and alternative according to the chart.

  • Page 20: Cylinder Identification

    3 250 ml (3.4/2.9 US/Imp qt) oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil. For engine coolant mixture information, refer to “Engine If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select an Coolant Description in Section 1F (Page 1F-1)”.

  • Page 21
    General Information: 0A-6 Country and Area Codes B718H10101008 The following codes stand for the applicable country(-ies) and area(-s). Code Country or Area Effective Frame No. GSF1250 K7 (E-02) U.K. JS1CH122200100001 – GSF1250 K7 (E-19) E.U. JS1CH122100100001 – GSF1250S K7 (E-02) U.K.
  • Page 22
    0A-7 General Information: Warning, Caution and Information Labels Location B718H10101010 12, 13 I718H1010016-02 GSF1250/A GSF1250S/SA 1. Noise label — For E-03, 24, 33 2. Information label — For E-03, 28, 33 3. Vacuum hose routing label — For E-33 4. Fuel caution label…
  • Page 23
    General Information: 0A-8 Component Location Electrical Components Location B718H10103001 I718H1010014-03 1. Fuel pump relay 6. Fuel level gauge 11. Mode selection switch coupler 2. Starter relay/Main fuse 7. Ignition coil/plug cap 12. ISC valve 3. Cooling fan relay 8. PAIR control solenoid valve 13.
  • Page 24
    0A-9 General Information: I718H1010015-04 15. IAP sensor (No.1) 21. Turn signal/side-stand relay 27. GP switch 16. Fuel injector 22. Horn 28. Starter motor 17. IAP/TP/IAT sensor 23. Cooling fan 29. Speed sensor 18. STP sensor 24. CKP sensor 30. HO2 sensor 19.
  • Page 25
    General Information: 0A-10 Specifications Specifications (GSF1250/S) B718H10107001 NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice. Dimensions and dry mass Item Specification Remark Overall length 2 130 mm (83.9 in) Overall width 790 mm (31.1 in) 1 095 mm (43.1 in)
  • Page 26
    Generator Three-phase A.C. generator Main fuse 30 A Fuse 10/10/15/15/10/15 A 12 V 60/55 W (H4) GSF1250 Headlight 12 V 55 W (H7) + 12 V 55 W (H7) GSF1250S 12 V 5 W GSF1250 Position light 12 V 5 W x 2…
  • Page 27
    General Information: 0A-12 Specifications (GSF1250A/SA) B718H10107002 NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice. Dimensions and dry mass Item Specification Remark Overall length 2 130 mm (83.9 in) Overall width 790 mm (31.1 in) 1 095 mm (43.1 in) GSF1250A Overall height 1 235 mm (48.6 in)
  • Page 28
    0A-13 General Information: Chassis Item Specification Remark Front suspension Telescopic, coil spring, oil damped Rear suspension Link type, coil spring, oil damped Front suspension stroke 130 mm (5.1 in) Rear wheel travel 136 mm (5.4 in) Steering angle 35° (right & left) Caster 25°…
  • Page 29
    General Information: 0A-14 Special Tools and Equipment Special Tool B718H10108002 09900–06107 09900–06108 09900–18740 09900–20102 09900–20202 Snap ring pliers Snap ring pliers Hexagon socket (24 Vernier calipers (1/20 Micrometer (1/100 mm, 200 mm) mm, 25 – 50 mm) 09900–20204 09900–20205 09900–20530 09900–20602 09900–20605 Micrometer (75 –…
  • Page 30
    0A-15 General Information: 09915–40610 09915–40611 09915–63311 09915–64512 09915–74521 Oil filter wrench Oil filter wrench Compression gauge Compression gauge Oil pressure gauge attachment hose 09915–74540 09915–77331 09916–10911 09916–14510 09916–14521 Oil pressure gauge Meter (for high Valve lapper set Valve spring Valve spring attachment pressure) compressor…
  • Page 31
    General Information: 0A-16 09923–74511 09924–84510 09924–84521 09930–10121 09930–11920 Bearing remover Bearing installer set Bearing installer set Spark plug wrench set Torx bit (JT40H) 09930–11940 09930–11950 09930–30104 09930–34970 09930–44530 Bit holder Torx wrench Rotor remover slide Rotor remover set Rotor holder shaft 09930–82710 09930–82720…
  • Page 32: Maintenance And Lubrication

    0B-1 Maintenance and Lubrication: Maintenance and Lubrication General Information Precautions Precautions for Maintenance B718H10200001 The “Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart” lists the recommended intervals for all the required periodic service work necessary to keep the motorcycle operating at peak performance and economy. Maintenance intervals are expressed in terms of kilometers, miles and months for your convenience.

  • Page 33: Lubrication Points

    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-2 Interval 1 000 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 Item miles 4 000 7 500 11 000 14 500 months — Brake fluid Replace every 2 years. Tires — Steering — — Front forks —…

  • Page 34
    0B-3 Maintenance and Lubrication: Repair Instructions Air Cleaner Element Replacement Cleaning B718H10206001 1) Remove the air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Replace air cleaner element Cleaner Element Removal and Installation in Section Every 18 000 km (11 000 miles, 36 months) 1D (Page 1D-6)”.
  • Page 35
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-4 Exhaust Pipe Bolt and Muffler Bolt Inspection Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning B718H10206005 B718H10206004 Tighten exhaust pipe bolts, muffler bolt and nut Inspect spark plug Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) thereafter.
  • Page 36
    IN.: 0.10 – 0.20 mm (0.004 – 0.008 in) and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. EX.: 0.20 – 0.30 mm (0.008 – 0.012 in) 2) Remove the frame head covers. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 37
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-6 NOTE • The cam must be at positions, “A” or “B”, when checking or adjusting the valve “D” clearance. Clearance readings should not “C” be taken with the cam in any other position than these two positions. •…
  • Page 38
    0B-7 Maintenance and Lubrication: 11) Turn the crankshaft clockwise 360° (one full rotation) 2) Remove the tappet (1) and shim (2) by fingers or and align the match mark on the crankshaft with the magnetic hand. mating surfaces of crankcases. Also, position the notches “E”…
  • Page 39
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-8 (INTAKE SIDE) I718H1020003-02…
  • Page 40
    0B-9 Maintenance and Lubrication: (EXHAUST SIDE) I718H1020004-02…
  • Page 41
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-10 Engine Oil and Filter Replacement 6) Install the camshafts and cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly in Section 1D B718H10206008 (Page 1D-28)”. Replace engine oil Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every 7) Rotate the engine so that the tappet is depressed 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.
  • Page 42
    MOTORCYCLE OIL FILTER. Other manufacturer’s oil filters may differ in thread specifications (thread diameter and pitch), filtering performance and durability which may lead to engine damage or oil leaks. Also, do not use a genuine Suzuki automobile oil filter on this motorcycle.
  • Page 43
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-12 4) Install a new oil filter. Turn it by hand until you feel 1) Loosen the lock-nut (1) of the throttle pulling cable that the oil filter O-ring contacts the oil filter mounting (2). surface. Then, tighten the oil filter two full turns (or to 2) Turn the adjuster (3) in or out until the throttle cable specified torque) using the special tool.
  • Page 44
    0B-13 Maintenance and Lubrication: 3) Check the engine coolant level by observing the full 3) Drain engine coolant by disconnecting the water and lower lines on the engine coolant reservoir tank. pump outlet hose (2). If the level is below the lower line, add engine coolant to the full line from the engine coolant reservoir tank filler.
  • Page 45
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-14 Clutch System Inspection 5) Slowly swing the motorcycle, right and left, to bleed the air trapped in the cooling circuit. B718H10206013 Inspect clutch hose and clutch fluid 6) Add engine coolant up to the thermostat connector Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) inlet.
  • Page 46
    0B-15 Maintenance and Lubrication: 3) Inspect the clutch hose for crack, damage or clutch 2) Visually check the drive chain for the possible fluid leakage. If it is damaged, replace the clutch defects listed as follows. If any defects are found, the hose with a new one.
  • Page 47
    “drive chain oil”. Such oil can damage the O-rings. Drive chain slack “a” • The standard drive chain is a RK Standard 20 – 30 mm (0.8 – 1.2 in) GB50GSVZ3. SUZUKI recommends to use this standard drive chain as a replacement. “A” “A” I718H1020037-02 I718H1020038-01 “a”…
  • Page 48
    0B-17 Maintenance and Lubrication: Brake System Inspection B718H10206019 Inspect brake system Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter. Inspect brake hose and brake fluid Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) WARNING •…
  • Page 49
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-18 GSF1250A/SA only Front and Rear Brake Hose Inspection 1) Remove the seat, right frame cover and fuel tank. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Exterior Parts Construction in Section 9D (Page 9D-2)” and “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.
  • Page 50
    0B-19 Maintenance and Lubrication: Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit Tire Pressure Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section If the tire pressure is too high or too low, steering will be 4A (Page 4A-8)”. adversely affected and tire wear increased. Therefore, maintain the correct tire pressure for good roadability or Rear Brake Light Switch Adjustment shorter tire life will result.
  • Page 51
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-20 Steering System Inspection Rear Suspension Inspection B718H10206025 B718H10206027 Inspect steering system Inspect rear suspension Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) thereafter. Inspect the rear shock absorbers for oil leakage and Steering should be adjusted properly for smooth turning check that there is no play in the swingarm.
  • Page 52
    0B-21 Maintenance and Lubrication: Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection B718H10206028 Tighten chassis bolt and nut Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter. Check that all chassis bolts and nuts are tightened to their specified torque.
  • Page 53
    Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-22 I718H1020058-01 I718H1020061-02 13. Front fork lower clamp bolt 7. Brake hose union bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 21. Front footrest bolt 22. Rear brake master cylinder mounting bolt 23. Rear brake master cylinder rod lock-nut 24.
  • Page 54
    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H10208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Brake fluid DOT 4 — (Page 0B-14) /…
  • Page 55
    Service Data: 0C-1 Service Data General Information Specifications Service Data B718H10307001 Valve + Guide Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit 31 (1.22) — Valve diam. 27 (1.06) — 0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008) — Valve clearance (when cold) 0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.012) —…
  • Page 56
    0C-2 Service Data: Cylinder + Piston + Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit 1 000 kPa Compression pressure 1 300 – 1 700 kPa (13 – 17 kgf/cm , 185 – 242 psi) (10 kgf/cm , 142 psi) 200 kPa Compression pressure difference —…
  • Page 57
    Service Data: 0C-3 Oil Pump Item Standard Limit 100 – 400 kPa (1.0 – 4.0 kgf/cm , 14 – 57 psi) Oil pressure (at 60 °C, 140 °F) — at 3 000 r/min Clutch Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit Clutch drive plate thickness No.1, 2, 3 3.72 –…
  • Page 58
    0C-4 Service Data: Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator Item Specification Note 11 – 13 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F) Injector resistance Fuel pump discharge amount 166 ml (5.6/5.8 US/lmp oz) and more/10 sec. Fuel pressure regulator operating set Approx.
  • Page 59
    30 A ABS motor (GSF1250A/ 20 A SA only) ABS valve (GSF1250A/ 15 A SA only) Wattage Unit: W Specification Item GSF1250/A GSF1250S/SA Headlight ← Position/Parking light 5 x 2 ← Brake light/Taillight 21/5 ← Turn signal light 21 x 4 ←…
  • Page 60
    Front fork oil level (Without spring, GSF1250S/ outer tube fully compressed) 144 (5.7) Front fork oil type SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or an equivalent fork oil — GSF1250/A 472 ml (16.0/16.6 US/lmp oz) — Front fork oil capacity (Each leg) GSF1250S/ 471 ml (15.9/16.6 US/lmp oz)
  • Page 61
    Service Data: 0C-7 Fuel + Oil Item Specification Note Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane (R/2 + M/2) or 91 octane or higher rated by the research method. Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less E-03, 28, 33 Fuel type than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with…
  • Page 62
    0C-8 Service Data: Item N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft Oil pressure switch lead wire bolt 0.15 (initial) [M6] (Final) Crankcase bolt (initial) 11.0 [M8] (Final) 19.0 (initial) 13.0 Crankshaft journal bolt [M9] (Final) 23.0 [M6] [M8] Oil gallery plug [M12] 11.0 [M16] 25.5 Oil gallery bolt Oil gallery jet…
  • Page 63
    Service Data: 0C-9 Chassis Item N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft Steering stem head nut 47.0 Tighten 45 N⋅m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 Ib-ft) then turn back 1/2 – Steering stem nut 1/4. Front fork upper clamp bolt 16.5 Front fork lower clamp bolt 16.5 Front fork cap bolt 16.5…
  • Page 64
    0C-10 Service Data: Tightening Torque Chart For other bolts and nuts not listed in the preceding page, refer to this chart: Bolt Diameter Conventional or “4” marked bolt “7” marked bolt “a” (mm) N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft 0.15 0.23 0.45 0.55…
  • Page 65: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents 1- i Section 1 Engine CONTENTS Precautions ……….1-1 DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction….1A-73 Precautions…………. 1-1 DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Precautions for Engine………. 1-1 Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction..1A-77 Engine General Information and DTC “C31”…

  • Page 66
    1-ii Table of Contents PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and Compression Pressure Check ……1D-3 Installation …………1B-6 Repair Instructions ……….1D-4 PAIR System Inspection ……..1B-6 Engine Components Removable with the Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose Inspection..1B-8 Engine in Place ……….1D-4 Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover / Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation ..1D-6 Separator Removal and Installation ….
  • Page 67
    Table of Contents 1-iii Schematic and Routing Diagram……1E-2 Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly ..1F-14 Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram ..1E-2 Water Pump Related Parts Inspection ….1F-17 Diagnostic Information and Procedures…. 1E-3 Specifications …………. 1F-18 Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis ….. 1E-3 Service Data…………
  • Page 68
    1-iv Table of Contents CKP Sensor Removal and Installation ….1H-8 Charging System ……..1J-1 Engine Stop Switch Inspection……1H-8 Schematic and Routing Diagram ……1J-1 Ignition Switch Inspection……..1H-9 Charging System Diagram ……..1J-1 Ignition Switch Removal and Installation…..1H-9 Component Location ……….. 1J-1 Specifications………….1H-11 Charging System Components Location…..
  • Page 69: Precautions

    Precautions: Precautions Engine Precautions Precautions for Engine B718H11000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page 00-2)”.

  • Page 70: Engine General Information And Diagnosis

    1A-1 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Engine General Information and Diagnosis Engine General Description Injection Timing Description B718H11101001 Injection Time (Injection Volume) The factors to determine the injection time include the basic fuel injection time, which is calculated on the basis of the intake air pressure, engine speed and throttle opening angle, and various compensations.

  • Page 71: Self-Diagnosis Function

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-2 Compensation of Injection Time (Volume) The following different signals are output from the respective sensors for compensation of the fuel injection time (volume). Signal Descriptions ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR When engine coolant temperature is low, injection time (volume) SIGNAL is increased.

  • Page 72
    1A-3 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: For Example: The ignition switch is turned ON, and the engine stop switch is turned OFF. In this case, the speedometer does not receive any signal from the ECM, and the panel indicates “CHEC”. If CHEC is indicated, the LCD does not indicate the trouble code.
  • Page 73: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-4 Schematic and Routing Diagram FI System Wiring Diagram B718H11102001 I718H1110249-04…

  • Page 74: Terminal Alignment Of Ecm Coupler

    1A-5 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler B718H11102002 I718H1110004-02 TERMINAL NO. CIRCUIT TERMINAL NO. CIRCUIT STVA signal (STVA, 2A) CKP sensor signal (CKP-) STVA signal (STVA, 1A) Serial data for self-diagnosis EVAP page control valve [E-33 only] Power source for fuel injector (VM) —…

  • Page 75: Component Location

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-6 Component Location FI System Parts Location B718H11103001 “B” “J” “I” “C” “H” “D” “E” “F” I718H1110146-04 “A”: ECM “C”: Cooling fan relay “E”: ISC valve “G”: Cooling fan “I”: PAIR control solenoid valve “B”: TO sensor “D”: STV actuator “F”: HO2 sensor “H”: Ignition coil…

  • Page 76: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    1A-7 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Diagnostic Information and Procedures Engine Symptom Diagnosis B718H11104001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine will not start or is Valve clearance out of adjustment. Adjust. hard to start Worn valve guides or poor seating of Repair or replace.

  • Page 77
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-8 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine stalls often Defective IAP sensor or circuit. Repair or replace. (Incorrect fuel/air mixture) Clogged fuel filter. Clean or replace. Defective fuel pump. Replace. Defective fuel pressure regulator. Replace.
  • Page 78
    1A-9 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine noisy (Noise Worn or damaged impeller shaft. Replace. seems to come from Worn or damaged mechanical seal. Replace. water pump) Contact between pump case and Replace. impeller.
  • Page 79
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-10 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine lacks power Low fuel pressure. Repair or replace. (Defective control circuit Defective TP sensor. Replace. or sensor) Defective IAT sensor. Replace. Defective CKP sensor. Replace. Defective GP sensor. Replace.
  • Page 80: Self-Diagnostic Procedures

    1A-11 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Self-Diagnostic Procedures 5) Check the DTC to determine the malfunction part. B718H11104005 Refer to “DTC Table (Page 1A-18)”. Use of Mode Select Switch Special tool NOTE (A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch) • Do not disconnect coupler from ECM, the battery cable from the battery, ECM ground wire harness from the engine or main fuse before confirming DTC (Diagnostic Trouble…

  • Page 81
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-12 Use of SDS NOTE • Do not disconnect the coupler from ECM, the battery cable from the battery, ECM ground wire harness from the engine or main fuse before confirming DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) stored in memory.
  • Page 82: Use Of Sds Diagnosis Reset Procedures

    1A-13 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 3) Check the DTC. 4) Start the engine or crank the engine for more than 4 seconds. 4) The previous malfunction history code (Past DTC) 5) Check the DTC to determine the malfunction part. still remains stored in the ECM.

  • Page 83: Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data At The Time Of Dtc)

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-14 Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at the Time of DTC) B718H11104008 Use of SDS ECM stores the engine and driving conditions (in the form of data as shown in the figure) at the moment of the detection of a malfunction in its memory.

  • Page 84: Sds Check

    1A-15 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 2) Click the drop down button (2), either “Failure #1” or “Failure #2” can be selected. I718H1110270-01 SDS Check B718H11104009 Using SDS, sample the data at the time of new and periodic vehicle inspections. After saving the sampled data in the computer, file them by model and by user.

  • Page 85
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-16 Sample Data sampled from cold starting through warm-up Check the engine r/min. 1 200 r/min. Check the water temperature. 50 ˚C and more Check the manifold absolute pressure. XXX kPa I718H1110149-01 Data at 3 000 r/min under no load Approx.
  • Page 86
    1A-17 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Data at the time of racing Throttle: Quick wide open Throttle: Slowly open Secondary throttle valve opens closes in according with the throttle valve opening PAIR control solenoid valve OFF in according with the throttle valve opens closes I718H1110151-01 Data of intake negative pressure during idling (100 °C)
  • Page 87: Dtc Table

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-18 Example of Trouble Three data; value 1 (current data 1), value 2 (past data 2) and value 3 (past data 3); can be made in comparison by showing them in the graph. Read the change of value by comparing the current data to the past data that have been saved under the same condition, then you may determine how changes have occurred with the passing of time and identify what problem is currently occurring.

  • Page 88
    1A-19 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Code Malfunction Part Remarks C26 (P0353) Ignition signal #3 (IG coil #3) For #3 cylinder (Page 1A-73) C27 (P0354) Ignition signal #4 (IG coil #4) For #4 cylinder (Page 1A-73) C28 (P1655) Secondary throttle valve actuator (STVA) (Page 1A-73) C29 (P1654-H/L) Secondary throttle position sensor (STPS)
  • Page 89: Fail-Safe Function Table

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-20 Fail-Safe Function Table B718H11104003 FI system is provided with fail-safe function to allow the engine to start and the motorcycle to run in a minimum performance necessary even under malfunction condition. Item Fail-Safe Mode Starting Ability Running Ability Intake air pressure is fixed to 101 kPa (760…

  • Page 90: Fi System Troubleshooting

    1A-21 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: FI System Troubleshooting B718H11104004 Customer Complaint Analysis Record details of the problem (failure, complaint) and how it occurred as described by the customer. For this purpose, use of such an inspection form such as following will facilitate collecting information to the point required for proper analysis and diagnosis.

  • Page 91: Malfunction Code And Defective Condition Table

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-22 Visual Inspection Prior to diagnosis using the mode select switch or SDS, perform the following visual inspections. The reason for visual inspection is that mechanical failures (such as oil leakage) cannot be displayed on the screen with the use of mode select switch or SDS.

  • Page 92
    1A-23 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Malfunction Detected Item Detected Failure Condition Check For Code The sensor should produce following voltage. 0.5 V ≤ sensor voltage < 4.85 V IAP sensor (No.2), lead wire/ In other than the above range, C17 (P1750) is coupler connection indicated.
  • Page 93
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-24 Malfunction Detected Item Detected Failure Condition Check For Code C32/C33 CKP sensor (pickup coil) signal is produced, C34/C35 but fuel injector signal is interrupted 4 times or Primary fuel injector, wiring/ Fuel injector more continuously. In this case, the code C32 coupler connection, power P0201/P0202 (P0201), C33 (P0202), C34 (P0203) or C35…
  • Page 94: Dtc «C12» (P0335): Ckp Sensor Circuit Malfunction

    1A-25 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit Malfunction B718H11104011 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause The signal does not reach ECM for 3 sec. or more, after • Metal particles or foreign material being stuck on the receiving the starter signal.

  • Page 95
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-26 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the CKP sensor with a new one. 2) Check the CKP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then measure the CKP sensor resistance. I718H1110154-02 3) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler and measure the resistance.
  • Page 96
    1A-27 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Crank the engine several seconds with the starter motor, • G/Y or Br wire open • Inspect that metal and measure the CKP sensor peak voltage at the or shorted to the particles or foreign coupler.
  • Page 97: Dtc «C13» (P0105-H/L): Iap Sensor (No.1) Circuit Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-28 DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.1) Circuit Malfunction B718H11104012 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause IAP sensor (No.1) voltage is not within the • Clogged vacuum passage between throttle body and following range.

  • Page 98
    1A-29 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: C13 for IAP sensor No.1 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 4. • Loose or poor contacts on the ECM 2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank coupler.
  • Page 99
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-30 P0105-H for IAP sensor (No.1) (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 1 data. I718H1110161-02 Approx.
  • Page 100
    1A-31 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler. Go to Step 4. W/Bl wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open. 5) Check the continuity between the B wire and W/Bl wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.
  • Page 101
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-32 P0105-L for IAP sensor (No.1) (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 1 data. I718H1110163-02 Approx.
  • Page 102
    1A-33 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler. Go to Step 3. B and W/Bl wire open, W/Bl wire shorted to the 5) Check the continuity between the W/Bl wire and ground. ground. Also, check the continuity between the W/Bl wire and B/ Br wire.
  • Page 103
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-34 Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler. Go to Step 4. Open or short circuit in the B wire or B/Br wire. 2) Turn the ignition switch ON. 3) Measure the input voltage at the B wire and ground with the needle pointed probes.
  • Page 104
    1A-35 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 5. • Check the vacuum hose for crack or 2) Connect the ECM coupler and IAP sensor (No.1) damage. coupler. • Open or short circuit 3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.
  • Page 105
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-36 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • B, W/Bl or B/Br wire If check result is not open or shorted to satisfactory, replace the 2) Remove the IAP sensor (No.1). Refer to “IAP Sensor the ground, or poor IAP sensor (No.1) with a (No.1) Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-…
  • Page 106: Dtc «C14» (P0120-H/L): Tp Sensor Circuit Malfunction

    1A-37 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C14” (P0120-H/L): TP Sensor Circuit Malfunction B718H11104013 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause Output voltage is not within the following • TP sensor maladjusted. range. • TP sensor circuit open or short. Difference between actual throttle opening •…

  • Page 107
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-38 C14 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 4. • Loose or poor contacts on the ECM 2) Check the TP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. coupler.
  • Page 108
    1A-39 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P0120-H (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the throttle position data. I718H1110169-01 ° Throttle position approx. 125 and more OK? 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 109
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-40 Step Action 4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. Go to Step 4. P/B wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open. 5) Check the continuity between the P/B wire and R wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.
  • Page 110
    1A-41 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P0120-L (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the throttle position data. I718H1110172-01 ° Throttle position approx. 0 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 111
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-42 Step Action 5) Check the continuity between the P/B wire and ground. Go to Step 3. R and P/B wire open, or Also, check the continuity between the P/B wire and B/Br P/B wire shorted to the wire.
  • Page 112
    1A-43 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler. Turn the ignition switch Open or short circuit in OFF and go to Step 4. the R or B/Br wire. 2) Turn the ignition switch ON. 3) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground. If OK, the measure the input voltage at the R and B/Br wire.
  • Page 113
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-44 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • P/B, R or B/Br wire If check result is not open or shorted to satisfactory, replace TP 2) Connect the ECM coupler and TP sensor coupler. the ground, or poor sensor with a new one.
  • Page 114: Dtc «C15» (P0115-H/L): Ect Sensor Circuit Malfunction

    1A-45 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Malfunction B718H11104014 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause Output voltage is not with in the following • ECT sensor circuit open or short. range. • ECT sensor malfunction. 0.15 V ≤…

  • Page 115
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-46 C15 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 3. • Loose or poor contacts on the ECM 2) Check the ECT sensor coupler for loose or poor coupler.
  • Page 116
    1A-47 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P0115-H (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the engine coolant/oil temperature data. I718H1110175-01 ° ° Approx. –30 C (–22 F) and less OK?
  • Page 117
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-48 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 3. B/Bl or B/Br wire open. 2) Check the ECT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then check the ECT sensor lead wire continuity. I718H1110174-02 3) Disconnect the ECT coupler.
  • Page 118
    1A-49 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P0115-L (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the engine coolant/oil temperature data. I718H1110176-01 ° ° Approx. 120 C (248 F) and more OK? 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 119
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-50 Step Action 4) Check the continuity between the B/Bl wire and ground. Go to Step 3. • B/Bl wire shorted to If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit the ground. condition is OK.
  • Page 120
    1A-51 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • B/Bl or B/Br wire Replace the ECT open or shorted to sensor with a new one. 2) Connect the ECM coupler. the ground, or poor Refer to “ECT Sensor 3) Remove the regulator/rectifier.
  • Page 121: Dtc «C17» (P1750-H/L): Iap Sensor (No.2) Circuit Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-52 DTC “C17” (P1750-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.2) Circuit Malfunction B718H11104030 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause IAP sensor (No.2) voltage is not within the • Clogged vacuum passage. following range. • IAP sensor (No.2) circuit open or shorted to the ground. 0.5 V ≤…

  • Page 122
    1A-53 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: NOTE • After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures (Page 1A-13)”. • IAP sensor (No.2) is incorporated in the TP sensor/IAT sensor. C17 for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 123
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-54 P1750-H for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 2 data. I718H1110181-03 Approx.
  • Page 124
    1A-55 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 6) Check the continuity between the R and G/B wire. Go to Step 4. W/Bl wire shorted to If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit Vcc, or B/Br wire open. condition is OK.
  • Page 125
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-56 P1750-L for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 2 data. I718H1110183-02 Approx.
  • Page 126
    1A-57 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 3) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler. Go to Step 3. R and G/B wire open, W/Bl wire shorted to the 4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. ground.
  • Page 127
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-58 Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler. Go to Step 4. Open or short circuit in the R wire or B/Br wire. 2) Turn the ignition switch ON. 3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. 4) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground with the needle pointed probes.
  • Page 128
    1A-59 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • G/B, R or B/Br wire • Open or short circuit open or shorted to in the G/B wire. 2) Connect the ECM coupler and IAP sensor (No.2) the ground, or poor coupler.
  • Page 129: Dtc «C21» (P0110-H/L): Iat Sensor Circuit Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-60 DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction B718H11104015 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause Output voltage is not with in the following • IAT sensor circuit open or short. range. • IAT sensor malfunction. 0.15 V ≤…

  • Page 130
    1A-61 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: C21 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 3. • Loose or poor contacts on the ECM 2) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. coupler.
  • Page 131
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-62 P0110-H (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the intake air temperature data. I718H1110184-02 ° ° Approx. –30 C (–22 F) and less OK?
  • Page 132
    1A-63 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect the ECM Dg or B/Br wire open. coupler and go to Step 2) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then check the IAT sensor lead wire continuity. I718H1110168-03 3) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler.
  • Page 133
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-64 P0110-L (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the intake air temperature data. I718H1110185-02 ° ° Approx. 125 C (257 F) and more OK? 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 134
    1A-65 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. Go to Step 3. • Dg wire shorted to the ground. 5) Check the continuity between the Dg wire and ground. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit •…
  • Page 135
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-66 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Dg or B/Br wire open Replace the IAT sensor or shorted to the with a new one. Refer to 2) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler. ground, or poor “27”…
  • Page 136: Dtc «C23» (P1651-H/L): To Sensor Circuit Malfunction

    1A-67 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit Malfunction B718H11104016 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause The sensor voltage should be the • TO sensor circuit open or short. following for 2 sec. and more, after ignition •…

  • Page 137
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-68 C23 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the TO sensor with a new one. Refer to 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and “TO Sensor Removal Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 138
    1A-69 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P1651-H (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. B wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open. 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 139
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-70 Step Action 8) Check the continuity between the B wire “B” and terminal Go to Step 2. B wire shorted to Vcc, or “22”. Also, check the continuity between B/Br wire “C” B/Br wire open. and terminal “29”.
  • Page 140
    1A-71 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 4) Disconnect the TO sensor coupler. Go to Step 2. R or B wire open, or B wire shorted to the 5) Check the continuity between the B wire “B” and ground. ground.
  • Page 141
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-72 Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler and TO sensor coupler. • R, B or B/Br wire • Loosen or poor open or shorted to contacts on the ECM 2) Dismount the TO sensor from its bracket. Refer to “TO the ground, or poor coupler.
  • Page 142: Dtc «C24» (P0351), «C25» (P0352), «C26» (P0353) Or «C27» (P0354): Ignition System Malfunction

    1A-73 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C24” (P0351), “C25” (P0352), “C26” (P0353) or “C27” (P0354): Ignition System Malfunction B718H11104017 NOTE Refer to “No Spark or Poor Spark in Section 1H (Page 1H-3)” for details. DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction B718H11104018 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition…

  • Page 143
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-74 Step Action 1) Remove the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator / Go to Step 2. • Loose or poor Rectifier Construction in Section 1J (Page 1J-8)”. contacts on the coupler. 2) Check the STVA lead wire coupler for loose or poor contacts.
  • Page 144
    1A-75 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • W/B, P/W, G and B/ • Loose or poor Lg wire open or contacts on the ECM 2) Move the throttle body right side. Refer to “Throttle Body shorted to the coupler.
  • Page 145
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-76 Active Control Inspection 1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.) 2) Turn the ignition switch ON. 3) Click “Secondary throttle operating control” (1). I718H1110247-01 4) Click each button (2). At this time, if an operation sound is heard from the STVA, the function is normal.
  • Page 146: Dtc «C29» (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (Stps) Circuit Malfunction

    1A-77 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction B718H11104019 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause Signal voltage is not within the following • STP sensor maladjusted. range. • STP sensor circuit open or short. Difference between actual throttle opening •…

  • Page 147
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-78 C29 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 4. • Loose or poor contacts on the ECM 2) Check the STP sensor coupler for loose or poor coupler.
  • Page 148
    1A-79 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P1654-H (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the secondary throttle actuator position sensor data. I718H1110198-01 Secondary throttle position approx. 100% and more OK? 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 149
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-80 Step Action 3) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler. Go to Step 4. Y/W wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open. 4) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire and R wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.
  • Page 150
    1A-81 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P1654-L (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Click the data monitor button (1). Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. I718H1110251-01 2) Check the secondary throttle actuator position sensor data. I718H1110199-01 Secondary throttle position approx. 0% OK? 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.
  • Page 151
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-82 Step Action 4) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire and ground. Go to Step 3. R or Y/W wire open, or Also, check the continuity between the Y/W wire and B/ Y/W wire shorted to the Br wire.
  • Page 152
    1A-83 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler. Go to Step 4. Open or short circuit in the R or B/Br wire. 2) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler. 3) Turn the ignition switch ON. 4) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground. Also, measure the input voltage at the R wire and B/Br wire.
  • Page 153
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-84 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • R, Y/W or B/Br wire If check result is not open or shorted to satisfactory, replace the 2) Connect the ECM coupler and STP sensor coupler. the ground, or poor STP sensor with a new 3) Move the air cleaner box backward.
  • Page 154: Dtc «C31» (P0705): Gp Switch Circuit Malfunction

    1A-85 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C31” (P0705): GP Switch Circuit Malfunction B718H11104020 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause No Gear Position switch voltage • Gear position switch circuit open or short. Switch voltage is not within the following range. •…

  • Page 155
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-86 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • P wire open or • P or B/W wire open, shorted to the or P wire shorted to 2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts ground.
  • Page 156: Dtc «C32» (P0201), «C33» (P0202), «C34» (P0203) Or «C35» (P0204): Fuel Injector Circuit Malfunction

    1A-87 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C32” (P0201), “C33” (P0202), “C34” (P0203) or “C35” (P0204): Fuel Injector Circuit Malfunction B718H11104021 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause CKP signal is produced but fuel injector signal is • Injector circuit open or short. interrupted by 4 times or more continuity.

  • Page 157
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-88 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the injector with a new one. Refer to 2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank “Throttle Body Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.
  • Page 158
    1A-89 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 5) If OK, then check the continuity between each terminal Go to Step 2. Replace the injector and ground. with a new one. Refer to “Throttle Body Special tool Disassembly and (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Assembly in Section 1D Injector continuity (Page 1D-10)”.
  • Page 159
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-90 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch ON. • Gr/W wire open or Open circuit in the Y/R shorted to the wire. 2) Measure the injector voltage between the Y/R wire and ground, or poor “44” ground.
  • Page 160: Dtc «C40» (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): Isc Valve Circuit Malfunction

    1A-91 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C40” (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): ISC Valve Circuit Malfunction B718H11104022 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause The circuit voltage of motor drive is • ISC valve circuit open or shorted to the ground. C40/P0505 unusual.

  • Page 161
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-92 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Lbl, W/Y, Dgr or Lg wire open. 2) Check the ISC valve coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then check the ISC valve lead wire continuity. I718H1110208-02 3) Disconnect the ISC valve coupler and ECM coupler.
  • Page 162
    1A-93 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Move the throttle body right side. Refer to “Throttle Body If wire is OK, Replace the ISC valve Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-9)”. intermittent trouble or with a new one. Refer to faulty ECM.
  • Page 163
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-94 ACTIVE CONTROL INSPECTION (ISC RPM CONTROL) Check 1 1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.) 2) Check that the engine is running. 3) Click the “Active control”. 4) Click the “ISC rpm control”…
  • Page 164
    1A-95 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Check 2 1) Click the button (4) and decrease the “Spec” (2) to 1 100 rpm slowly. 2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (2). At the same time, check that the number of steps (5) in the ISC valve position decreases.
  • Page 165
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-96 Check 4 1) Click the button (6) and increase the “Spec” (2) to 1 400 rpm. 2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is approx. 1 400 rpm. 3) Check that the “Engine speed” (7) is close to 1 400 rpm. NOTE Be careful not to increase the “Spec”…
  • Page 166: Dtc «C41» (P0230-H/L): Fp Relay Circuit Malfunction

    1A-97 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: DTC “C41” (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit Malfunction B718H11104023 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause No voltage is applied to fuel pump • Fuel pump relay circuit open or short. although fuel pump relay is turned ON, or •…

  • Page 167
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-98 C41 (Use of mode select switch) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • ECM power input Replace the FP relay signal malfunction. with a new one. 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Refer to “DTC “C41”…
  • Page 168
    1A-99 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: P0230-L (Use of SDS) Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Y/B wire open or poor Replace the FP relay “38” connection. with a new one. 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 169: Dtc «C41» (P2505): Ecm Power Input Signal Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-100 DTC “C41” (P2505): ECM Power Input Signal Malfunction B718H11104031 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause No voltage is applied to the ECM, • Lead wire/coupler connection of ECM terminal to fuel although FP relay is turned ON.

  • Page 170
    1A-101 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Fuel pump relay Open or short circuit in circuit malfunction. the R/Bl wire. 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Refer to “DTC “C41” Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 171: Dtc «C42» (P1650): Ig Switch Circuit Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-102 DTC “C42” (P1650): IG Switch Circuit Malfunction B718H11104024 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause Ignition switch signal is not input in the ECM. • Ignition system circuit open or short. • ECM malfunction. Troubleshooting NOTE •…

  • Page 172
    1A-103 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Troubleshooting (When Indicating C44/P0130:) CAUTION When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend. NOTE After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool.
  • Page 173
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-104 Step Action 6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal Go to Step 2. W/G wire shorted to the and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”. power source, or W/G or B/Br wire open. 7) Check the continuity between the W/G wire “A”…
  • Page 174
    1A-105 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Connect the ECM coupler and HO2 sensor coupler. • W/G or B/Br wire Replace the HO2 open or shorted to sensor with a new one. 2) Warm up the engine enough. the power source, or Refer to “Heated 3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.
  • Page 175
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-106 Troubleshooting (When Indicating C44/P0135:) NOTE After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures (Page 1A-13)”. Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the HO2 sensor with a new one.
  • Page 176
    1A-107 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Connect the HO2 sensor coupler. • O/W or W/B wire • Open or short circuit open or shorted to in the W/B wire or O/ 2) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler. the ground, or poor W wire.
  • Page 177: Dtc «C49» (P1656): Pair Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-108 DTC “C49” (P1656): PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction B718H11104028 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause PAIR control solenoid valve ampere is not input to ECM. • PAIR control solenoid valve circuit open or short. •…

  • Page 178
    1A-109 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the PAIR control solenoid with a 2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and new one. Refer to “PAIR Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.
  • Page 179
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-110 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch ON. • B/G wire open or Open or short circuit in shorted to the the O/W wire. 2) Measure the voltage between the O/W wire and ground. ground, or poor “39”…
  • Page 180: Dtc «C60» (P0480): Cooling Fan Relay Circuit Malfunction

    1A-111 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 4) Click each button (2). At this time, if an operating sound is heard from the PAIR control solenoid valve, the function is normal. I718H1110236-01 DTC “C60” (P0480): Cooling Fan Relay Circuit Malfunction B718H11104029 Detected Condition and Possible Cause Detected Condition Possible Cause…

  • Page 181
    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-112 Troubleshooting CAUTION When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend. NOTE After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.
  • Page 182
    1A-113 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Active Control Inspection NOTE Cooling fan relay and cooling fan motor operation can be checked until the engine coolant temperature is less than 100 °C (212 °F) after starting the engine. 1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to SDS operation manual for further details.) 2) Start the engine and run it in idling condition.
  • Page 183: Specifications

    Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-114 Specifications Service Data B718H11107001 Injector Item Specification Note 11 – 13 Ω at 20 °C (68 F°) Injector resistance — FI Sensors Item Specification Note 90 – 150 Ω CKP sensor resistance CKP sensor peak voltage 2.0 V and more When cranking IAP sensor input voltage (No.1)

  • Page 184: Special Tools And Equipment

    1A-115 Engine General Information and Diagnosis: Special Tools and Equipment Special Tool B718H11108001 09900–25008 09900–25009 Multi-circuit tester set Needle pointed probe set (Page 1A-26) / (Page 1A-107) / (Page 1A-27) / (Page 1A-31) / (Page 1A-29) / (Page 1A-33) / (Page 1A-109) / (Page 1A-35) / (Page 1A-110) /…

  • Page 185: Emission Control Devices

    Fuel Injection System Description B718H11201001 GSF1250 motorcycles are equipped with a fuel injection system for emission level control. This fuel injection system is precision designed, manufactured and adjusted to comply with the applicable emission limits. With varying engine conditions, all of the fuel injection volumes are precisely controlled by the programmed injection maps in the ECM to reduce CO, NOX and HC.

  • Page 186: Crankcase Emission Control System Description

    1B-2 Emission Control Devices: Crankcase Emission Control System Description B718H11201002 The engine is equipped with a PCV system to prevent discharging crankcase emissions into the atmosphere. Blow-by gas in the engine is constantly drawn into the crankcase, which is returned to the combustion chamber through the PCV (breather) hose, air cleaner and throttle body.

  • Page 187: Exhaust Emission Control System Description

    Emission Control Devices: 1B-3 Exhaust Emission Control System Description B718H11201003 The exhaust emission control system is composed of the PAIR system, HO2 sensor, catalyst system and ISC system. The fresh air is drawn into the exhaust port through the PAIR control solenoid valve and PAIR reed valve. The PAIR control solenoid valve is operated by the ECM, which is controlled according to the signals from TPS, ECTS, IATS, IAPS and CKPS.

  • Page 188: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    1B-4 Emission Control Devices: Schematic and Routing Diagram PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram B718H11202001 “B” “ a” “C” “B” “a” “B” “A” “a” “A” “A” “ a” “a” “C” I718H1120043-01 1. PAIR control solenoid valve “A”: Marking (Yellow) “C”: To air cleaner box 2.

  • Page 189: Repair Instructions

    Emission Control Devices: 1B-5 Repair Instructions Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and 6) Remove the HO2 sensor (3). Installation B718H11206005 Removal WARNING Do not remove the HO2 sensor while it is hot. CAUTION • Be careful not to expose the HO2 sensor to excessive shock.

  • Page 190: Pair Reed Valve Removal And Installation

    1B-6 Emission Control Devices: PAIR Reed Valve Removal and Installation B718H11206008 Removal 1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. 2) Drain engine coolant and remove the thermostat connector. Refer to “Thermostat Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation in Section 1F (Page 1F-9)”.

  • Page 191
    Emission Control Devices: 1B-7 PAIR Control Solenoid Valve 2) Inspect the hoses for wear or damage. If it is worn or damaged, replace the PAIR hose with a new one. NOTE Refer to “PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram (Page 1B-4)”. PAIR control solenoid valve can be checked without removing it from the motorcycle.
  • Page 192: Crankcase Breather (Pcv) Hose Inspection

    1B-8 Emission Control Devices: 4) Check the resistance between the terminals of the PAIR control solenoid valve. Special tool : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication Resistance (Ω) PAIR control solenoid valve resistance 18 – 22 Ω at 20 – 30 °C (68 – 86 °F) I718H1120036-01 4) Remove the PCV hose (1).

  • Page 193: Crankcase Breather (Pcv) Cover Inspection

    • Connect the PCV hose (2) securely. Pay attention to the following points: • Apply bond to the mating surface of the breather cover. : Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or equivalent) NOTE • Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

  • Page 194: Specifications

    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Sealant SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or P/No.: 99000–31110 (Page 1B-9)

  • Page 195: Engine Electrical Devices

    Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-1 Engine Electrical Devices Engine Precautions Precautions for Engine Electrical Device B718H11300001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page 00-2)”. Component Location Engine Electrical Components Location B718H11303001 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

  • Page 196: Iap Sensor (No.1) Removal And Installation

    1C-2 Engine Electrical Devices: IAP Sensor (No.1) Removal and Installation ECT Sensor Removal and Installation B718H11306035 B718H11306011 Removal Removal 1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal 1) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

  • Page 197: Ect Sensor Inspection

    Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-3 ECT Sensor Inspection TO Sensor Removal and Installation B718H11306010 B718H11306019 Refer to “DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Removal Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-45)”. 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal Inspect the ECT sensor in the following procedures: and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 198: Stp Sensor Adjustment

    1C-4 Engine Electrical Devices: STP Sensor Adjustment 6) Loosen the STP sensor mounting screw adjust the B718H11306025 STP sensor (2) until the output voltage comes within Adjust the STP sensor in the following procedures: the specified value and tighten the STP sensor 1) Remove the air cleaner cover and air cleaner mounting screw.

  • Page 199: Stv Actuator Inspection

    “A” if necessary. coupler at least 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF. If the ECM coupler or : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) ISC valve coupler is disconnected within 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to…

  • Page 200: Isc Valve Preset And Opening Initialization

    1C-6 Engine Electrical Devices: ISC Valve Preset and Opening Initialization NOTE B718H11306036 The leaned value of the ISC valve is set at When removing or replacing the ISC valve, set the ISC Preset position. valve to the following procedures: 1) Turn the ignition switch ON. 2) Set up the SDS tool.

  • Page 201: Specifications

    Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-7 Specifications Service Data B718H11307001 FI Sensors Item Specification Note 90 – 150 Ω CKP sensor resistance CKP sensor peak voltage 2.0 V and more When cranking IAP sensor input voltage (No.1) 4.5 – 5.5 V IAP sensor output voltage (No.1) Approx.

  • Page 202: Tightening Torque Specifications

    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11308001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1C-5)

  • Page 203: Engine Mechanical

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-1 Engine Mechanical Engine Schematic and Routing Diagram Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram B718H11402001 I718H1140393-01…

  • Page 204: Throttle Cable Routing Diagram

    1D-2 Engine Mechanical: Throttle Cable Routing Diagram B718H11402002 “A” “ a” “ a ” I718H1140308-03 1. Wiring harness 4. Throttle cable No.2 7. Ignition switch lead wire 2. Cable guide (GSF1250S/SA only) 5. Handlebar switch lead wire (L) “a”: 0 mm (0 in) 3.

  • Page 205: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    Low compression pressure can indicate any of 3) Remove the frame head covers, left and right. the following conditions: (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and • Excessively worn cylinder walls Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. • Worn piston or piston rings 4) Remove all the spark plugs.

  • Page 206: Repair Instructions

    1D-4 Engine Mechanical: Repair Instructions Engine Components Removable with the Engine in Place B718H11406001 Engine components which can be removed while the engine is installed on the frame are as follows. For the installing and removing procedures, refer to respective paragraphs describing each component. Center of Engine Item Removal…

  • Page 207
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-5 Engine Right Side Item Removal Inspection Installation Refer to “Clutch Removal in Refer to “Clutch Installation Clutch cover — Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”. in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”. Refer to “Clutch Parts Refer to “Clutch Removal in Refer to “Clutch Installation Clutch plates Inspection in Section 5C…
  • Page 208: Air Cleaner Element Removal And Installation

    1D-6 Engine Mechanical: Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation 3) Release the drain hose from the clamp (1). B718H11406034 Removal 1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. 2) Remove the air cleaner cover screws. 3) Remove the air cleaner cover (1).

  • Page 209: Throttle Cable Inspection

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-7 Throttle Cable Inspection Installation Install the throttle cables in the reverse order of removal. B718H11406038 Check that the throttle grip moves smoothly from full Pay attention to the following points: open to full close. If it does not move smoothly, lubricate •…

  • Page 210: Throttle Body Construction

    1D-8 Engine Mechanical: Throttle Body Construction B718H11406041 Upper Upper Air cleaner side Engine side “A” “B” I718H1140314-01 1. Clamp (Air cleaner side) “B”: Clamp the drain hose at mark position. : After tighten the clamp band #2, 3 and tighten the clamp band #1, 4. 2.

  • Page 211: Throttle Body Removal And Installation

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-9 Throttle Body Removal and Installation 7) Loosen the throttle body clamp screws and B718H11406042 disconnect the ISC valve hose (6). Removal 8) Move the air cleaner box backward. 1) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to “Battery Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-12)”.

  • Page 212: Throttle Body Disassembly And Assembly

    1D-10 Engine Mechanical: Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly Installation Install the throttle body in the reverse order of removal. B718H11406043 Refer to “Throttle Body Removal and Installation Pay attention to the following points: (Page 1D-9)”. • Connect the throttle pulling cable (1) and throttle returning cable (2) to the throttle cable drum.

  • Page 213
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-11 3) Remove the fuel delivery pipe assembly (6). 6) Remove the plates and joint pipes (10). CAUTION Be careful not to twist the fuel delivery pipe’s T-joint (7), when disconnecting the fuel feed hose or removing the fuel delivery pipes, or joint part “A”…
  • Page 214
    1D-12 Engine Mechanical: 9) Remove the STP sensor (13). CAUTION NOTE Never remove the throttle valve (15) and secondary throttle valve (16). Prior to disassembly, mark sensor’s original position with a paint or scribe for accurate reinstallation. Special tool : 09930–11950 (Torx wrench) I718H1140333-03 CAUTION These adjusting screws (17), (18) are factory-…
  • Page 215
    ISC valve mounting screw (a): 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgf- with the groove “B” of STP sensor. m, 2.5 lb-ft) • Apply grease to the secondary throttle shaft end “A” if necessary. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) Special tool : 09930–11950 (Torx wrench) Tightening torque STP sensor mounting screw: 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgf-…
  • Page 216
    1D-14 Engine Mechanical: • Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the new cushion seal • Install the fuel injector (5) by pushing it straight to the (2) and the O-ring (3). delivery pipe (6). CAUTION CAUTION Replace the cushion seal and O-ring with the Never turn the injector while pushing it.
  • Page 217: Throttle Body Inspection And Cleaning

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-15 • Tighten the fuel delivery pipe mounting screws to the Inspection specified torque. Check following items for any defects or clogging. Replace the throttle body if necessary. Tightening torque • O-ring Fuel delivery pipe mounting screw (a): 3.5 N·m ( •…

  • Page 218
    1D-16 Engine Mechanical: 3) Connect the respective vacuum tester hoses to each vacuum nipple on the throttle body. I718H1140382-01 8) Click “Active control”. 9) Click “ISC air volume control” (2). I718H1140389-01 4) Start the engine. 5) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.) 6) Click “Data monitor”.
  • Page 219: Engine Assembly Removal

    9D (Page 9D-6)”. 17) After compleating the throttle valve synchronization, 3) Remove the frame head covers (GSF1250/A) or clear the DTC and reset the ISC learned valve using cowling (GSF1250S/SA). Refer to “Exterior Parts SDS tool. Refer to “ISC Valve Preset and Opening Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D- Initialization in Section 1C (Page 1C-6)”.

  • Page 220
    1D-18 Engine Mechanical: 4) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal 11) Remove the throttle body assembly (5). Refer to and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. “Throttle Body Removal and Installation (Page 1D- 9)”. 5) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.
  • Page 221
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-19 15) Disengage the gearshift link arm by removing the 20) Loosen the rear axle nut (12) and chain adjusters bolt. (13) to provide additional chain slack. NOTE Mark the gearshift shaft head at which the gearshift link arm slit is set for correct reinstallation.
  • Page 222
    1D-20 Engine Mechanical: 23) Disconnect the engine ground wire coupler (18) and 27) Remove the frame down tube (23) by removing their oil pressure switch coupler (19). bolts and nuts. I718H1140366-01 I718H1140369-01 24) Disconnect the GP switch coupler (20) and starter 28) Remove the engine mounting brackets, No.1 (24) motor lead wire (21).
  • Page 223: Engine Assembly Installation

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-21 Engine Assembly Installation B718H11406003 Reinstall the engine in the reverse order of engine removal. Pay attention to the following points: • Insert the two mounting bolts from left side, and tighten their nuts. NOTE The engine mounting nuts are self-locking. Once the nuts have been removed, they are no longer of any use.

  • Page 224: Tightening Torque

    1D-22 Engine Mechanical: • Tighten all engine mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque, as shown in the following illustration. Left Right Left Right “a” “ c ” “b” “c” 2 “b” I718H1140375-02 1. Engine mounting bolt (Front upper) “a”: 215 mm (8.5 in) : 47 N⋅m (4.7 kgf-m, 34.0 lb-ft) 2.

  • Page 225
    Tightening torque Speed sensor rotor bolt (h): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft) • Before installing the engine sprocket inner cover, apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the clutch push rod. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1140377-01 •…
  • Page 226: Engine Top Side Disassembly

    Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G- I718H1140007-01 9)”. PAIR System 3) Remove the frame head covers (3) (GSF1250/A) or 1) Disconnect the PAIR hoses and lead wire coupler. cowling (GSF1250S/SA). Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in 2) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve (1).

  • Page 227
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-25 Camshaft 4) Remove the throttle body (2). Refer to “Throttle Body Removal and Installation (Page 1D-9)”. 1) Remove the right crankshaft cover (1). I718H1140022-01 I718H1140011-01 5) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt (3) 2) Remove all of the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil and spring.
  • Page 228
    1D-26 Engine Mechanical: 3) Remove the water hoses (3). I718H1140035-01 8) Remove the intake (7) and exhaust camshafts (8). I718H1140037-01 9) Remove the dowel pins. 4) Remove the cylinder head bolts (L65) (4). 5) Remove the cylinder head bolts (L175) and washers. NOTE When loosening the cylinder head bolts, loosen each bolt little by little diagonally.
  • Page 229
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-27 Cam Chain No.1 Guide 3) Remove the cylinder (3). Remove the cam chain No.1 guide (1). NOTE If the cylinder does not come off easily, lightly tap it using a plastic hammer. I718H1140041-01 Cylinder 1) Disconnect the water hoses (1). I718H1140044-02 4) Remove the cylinder gasket (4) and dowel pins.
  • Page 230: Engine Top Side Assembly

    1D-28 Engine Mechanical: 3) Draw out each piston pin (2) and remove the pistons • Place a clean rag over the cylinder base so as not to (3). drop the piston pin circlips (1) into the crankcase. • Install the piston pin circlips (1). NOTE Scribe the cylinder number on the piston CAUTION…

  • Page 231
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-29 • Position the piston ring gaps as shown. Before • Install each special tool to the #2 and #3 pistons. inserting each piston into its cylinder, check that the NOTE gaps are properly positioned. Do not overtighten the bands, or piston installation into the cylinders will be difficult.
  • Page 232
    1D-30 Engine Mechanical: Cam Chain No.1 Guide • Place the cylinder head (3) on the cylinder. • Pull the cam chain out of the cylinder and install the NOTE cam chain guide (1). When installing the cylinder head (3), keep CAUTION the cam chain taut.
  • Page 233
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-31 Water Hose • Install the water hoses (1). Refer to “Water Hose Routing Diagram in Section 1F (Page 1F-3)”. “B” “A” I718H1140062-02 • Before replacing the camshafts on cylinder head, apply engine oil to their journals and cam faces. •…
  • Page 234
    1D-32 Engine Mechanical: • The other arrow marked “2” “D” should now be • Install the camshaft journal holders. pointing straight up. Starting from the roller pin that is CAUTION directly above the arrow marked “2” “D”, count out 16 roller pins (from the exhaust camshaft side going Damage to head or camshaft journal holder towards the intake camshaft side).
  • Page 235
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-33 • Install the oil pipe and tighten the mounting bolts to • Install the cam chain tension adjuster (3) and tighten specified torque. its mounting bolts. Tightening torque NOTE Cam chain tension adjuster mounting bolt (a): 10 Fit the washer (1) to each oil pipe mounting N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) bolt.
  • Page 236
    • After installing the cam chain tension adjuster, rotate Right Crankshaft Cover the crankshaft (some turns), and recheck the • Apply SUZUKI BOND lightly to the mating surfaces at positions of the camshafts. the parting line between the upper and lower crankcases as shown.
  • Page 237
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-35 • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the cam end caps of the PAIR System gasket as shown. • Install the PAIR component parts. Refer to “PAIR Reed Valve Removal and Installation in Section 1B : Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond (Page 1B-6)”.
  • Page 238: Valve Clearance Inspection And Adjustment

    1D-36 Engine Mechanical: Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment Camshaft Runout B718H11406008 Measure the runout using the dial gauge. Replace the Refer to “Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in camshaft if the runout exceeds the limit. Section 0B (Page 0B-5)”. Special tool (A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 Camshaft Inspection mm))

  • Page 239
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-37 3) Install each camshaft journal holder to its original 7) If the camshaft journal oil clearance exceeds the position. Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly limit, measure the inside diameter of the camshaft (Page 1D-28)”. journal holder and the outside diameter of the camshaft journal.
  • Page 240: Camshaft Sprocket Inspection

    1D-38 Engine Mechanical: Camshaft Sprocket Inspection Installation B718H11406010 1) Set the camshaft sprocket to the camshafts. Inspect the camshaft sprocket in the following procedures: NOTE 1) Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts. Refer to Align the arrow mark “3” on camshaft “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

  • Page 241: Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-39 Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection 3) Remove the cylinder head. Refer to “Engine Top B718H11406012 Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”. The cam chain tension adjuster is maintained at the 4) Remove the cam chain No.1 guide (2). proper tension by an automatically adjusted. 1) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster.

  • Page 242: Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection

    1D-40 Engine Mechanical: Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly B718H11406015 B718H11406016 Inspect the cam chain tensioner in the following Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”. procedures: Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”. 1) Separate the crankcases, upper and lower. Refer to CAUTION “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D-53)”.

  • Page 243
    Oil gallery plug (cylinder head) (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) • Apply grease to O-ring of the intake pipe. CAUTION Replace the O-rings with new ones. I718H1140103-01 : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER 8) Remove the intake pipes. GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1140105-01 I718H1140109-01…
  • Page 244
    1D-42 Engine Mechanical: NOTE • Install the valve spring seat. • Apply engine oil to the oil seal (1), and press-fit it into • When replacing the intake pipes, identify position. the different intake pipes according to each I.D. code “A”. CAUTION (1-18H0 for cylinder #1 and #4) Do not reuse the removed oil seal.
  • Page 245
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-43 • Install the valve spring with the small-pitch portion “B” • Be sure that the rounded lip “F” of the cotter fits snugly facing cylinder head. into the groove “G” in the stem end. “F” “E” “D” “C”…
  • Page 246: Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection

    1D-44 Engine Mechanical: Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection Valve Head Radial Runout B718H11406017 Place the dial gauge at a right angle to the valve head Refer to “Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly face and measure the valve head radial runout. If it (Page 1D-40)”.

  • Page 247
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-45 NOTE Valve Stem Deflection Lift the valve about 10 mm (0.39 in) “a” from the valve If valve guides have to be removed for seat. Measure the valve stem deflection in two replacement after inspecting related parts, directions, “X”…
  • Page 248
    1D-46 Engine Mechanical: 4) Check that the transferred red lead (blue) on the valve face is uniform all around and in center of the “ a” valve face. If the seat width “a” measured exceeds the standard value, or seat width is not uniform reface the seat “b”…
  • Page 249: Valve Guide Replacement

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-47 Valve Guide Replacement 5) Cool down the new valve guides in a freezer for B718H11406018 about one hour and heat the cylinder head to 100 – 1) Remove the cylinder head. Refer to “Engine Top 150 °C (212 – 302 °F) with a hot plate. Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

  • Page 250: Valve Seat Repair

    1D-48 Engine Mechanical: 8) After installing the valve guides, refinish their guiding CAUTION bores using the reamer. Be sure to clean and oil the • The valve seat contact area must be guides after reaming. inspected after each cut. NOTE •…

  • Page 251
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-49 3) Remove the water jacket plugs (4). I718H1140136-01 • Apply engine coolant to O-ring of water inlet I718H1140133-01 connector. CAUTION Replace the O-ring with a new one. I718H1140134-01 Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: •…
  • Page 252: Cylinder Inspection

    1D-50 Engine Mechanical: • Apply engine oil to O-ring and install the oil jet. Cylinder Bore Measure the cylinder bore diameter at six places. If any • Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque. one of the measurements exceed the limit, overhaul the CAUTION cylinder and replace the piston with an oversize piston.

  • Page 253: Piston Ring Removal And Installation

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-51 Piston Ring Removal and Installation B718H11406022 Removal “A” 1) Draw out the piston pin and remove the piston. Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”. 2) Carefully spread the ring opening with your thumbs and then push up the opposite side of the 1st ring (2) to remove it.

  • Page 254: Piston And Piston Ring Inspection

    1D-52 Engine Mechanical: 2) Position the gaps of the three rings and side rails as Piston-to-cylinder Clearance shown. Before inserting piston into the cylinder, Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder bore check that the gaps are so located. diameter. If the piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds the service limit, replace both the cylinder and the piston.

  • Page 255: Engine Bottom Side Disassembly

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-53 Piston Ring Free End Gap and Piston Ring End Gap Measure the piston ring free end gap using vernier calipers. Next, fit the piston ring squarely into the cylinder and measure the piston ring end gap using the thickness gauge.

  • Page 256
    1D-54 Engine Mechanical: 3) Remove the water hoses (2) and regulator/rectifier Clutch bracket (3). Remove the clutch component parts (1). Refer to “Clutch Removal in Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”. I718H1140005-01 I718H1140160-01 Engine Top Side Disassemble the engine top side (1). Refer to “Engine Oil Pump Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.
  • Page 257
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-55 Generator 6) Remove the pin (8) and washer (9). Remove the generator component parts (1). Refer to NOTE “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J Do not drop the pin (8) and washer (9) into (Page 1J-4)”. the crankcase.
  • Page 258
    1D-56 Engine Mechanical: Gear Position Switch Oil Filter Remove the gear position switch (1). Remove the oil filter (1) with the special tool. Special tool (A): 09915–40610 (Oil filter wrench) I718H1140169-01 Crankcase Breather Cover I718H1140172-01 Remove the crankcase breather cover (1) and oil breather separator (2).
  • Page 259
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-57 Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer 3) Draw out the balancer shaft (3) and remove the crank balancer assembly (4). 1) Remove the oil pressure regulator (1). 2) Remove the oil strainer (2). NOTE 3) Remove the O-rings (3). Disassemble the crank balancer assembly if necessary.
  • Page 260
    1D-58 Engine Mechanical: 3) Loosen the crankcase bolts evenly by shifting the Crankshaft / Conrod / Cum Chain wrench in the descending order of numbers. 1) Remove the crankshaft assembly (1) from the upper crankcase. 2) Remove the thrust bearings (2). NOTE The crankshaft thrust bearings (2) are located between the crankshaft assembly and upper…
  • Page 261
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-59 Transmission 3) Remove the oil gallery jet (2) from the upper Remove the transmission component. Refer to crankcase. “Transmission Removal in Section 5B (Page 5B-3)”. I718H1140190-01 4) Remove the oil jet (for transmission) from the lower I718H1140187-01 crankcase.
  • Page 262
    1D-60 Engine Mechanical: NOTE 2) Remove the oil gallery plugs (2) from the lower crankcase. • Do not remove the crankshaft journal bearings unless absolutely necessary. • Make a note of where the crankshaft journal bearings are removed from so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.
  • Page 263: Engine Bottom Side Assembly

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-61 Engine Mount Bushing Remove the engine mount bushings (1) if necessary. I718H1140201-01 I718H1140199-02 Engine Bottom Side Assembly B718H11406025 Assemble the engine bottom side in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: NOTE Apply engine oil to each running and sliding part before reassembling.

  • Page 264
    1D-62 Engine Mechanical: Oil Jet • Fit the new O-ring (1) to each piston cooling oil jet as shown and apply engine oil to them. CAUTION Use the new O-rings to prevent oil pressure leak. I718H1140206-02 • Install the oil jets, (2) and (3). I718H1140204-01 •…
  • Page 265
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-63 • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the • Before installing the crankshaft assembly, apply engine oil to each crankshaft journal bearing. lower crankcase as follows. • Install the crankshaft assembly along with the cam NOTE chain into the upper crankcase.
  • Page 266
    1D-64 Engine Mechanical: • Tighten the other crankcase bolts a little at a time to • After the crankshaft journal bolts and crankcase bolts equalize the pressure. have been tightened, check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly. CAUTION • Also check that the driveshaft and countershaft rotate Fit new gasket washer to the bolt “A”.
  • Page 267
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-65 • Hold the crankshaft and install the crank balancer • Install the balancer shaft arm. assembly. • Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the balancer shaft arm bolt and tighten it to the specified NOTE torque.
  • Page 268
    1D-66 Engine Mechanical: “C” “a” “D” I718H1140227-02 • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the oil pan. I718H1140401-03 “a”: 1.5 – 2 graduations NOTE Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer / Oil Pan • Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.
  • Page 269
    Replace the O-ring with a new one. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1140232-01 Oil Pressure Switch • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the thread part of oil pressure switch and tighten oil pressure switch to the specified torque. NOTE I718H1140230-02 Be careful not to apply SUZUKI BOND to the •…
  • Page 270
    “a”: 20° ± 10° Replace the O-ring with a new one. Crankcase Breather Cover NOTE • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the Align the gear position switch pin “A” with breather cover. the gearshift cam hole “B”.
  • Page 271
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-69 Water Pump Generator • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring. • Install the generator component parts (1). Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J CAUTION (Page 1J-4)”. Replace the O-ring with a new one.
  • Page 272
    1D-70 Engine Mechanical: • Install the gearshift cam stopper plate (5). NOTE Align the gearshift cam pin “B” with the gearshift cam stopper plate hole “C”. I718H1140247-02 • Install the gearshift shaft assembly (7) and washer (8) as shown. “B” “C”…
  • Page 273
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-71 Oil Pump • Install the oil pimp driven gear (3). • Install the O-ring to the oil pump and apply SUZUKI • Install the snap ring (4). SUPER GREASE to it. CAUTION CAUTION Never reuse a snap ring.
  • Page 274: Crank Balancer Disassembly And Assembly

    1D-72 Engine Mechanical: • Install the spacer (7). Engine Top Side • Assemble the engine top side. Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”. “C” I718H1140255-01 Clutch I718H1140258-01 • Install the clutch component parts (1). Refer to “Clutch Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”. Water Hose •…

  • Page 275: Crank Balancer Inspection

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-73 Disassembly • Apply engine oil to the bearings, spacer and washers. 1) Remove the washers (1), bearings (2) and spacer (3) from the crank balancer. I718H1140262-01 Crank Balancer Inspection I718H1140260-01 B718H11406033 2) Remove the balancer gear (4) along with the Refer to “Crank Balancer Disassembly and Assembly dampers (5) from the crank balancer.

  • Page 276: Conrod Removal And Installation

    1D-74 Engine Mechanical: Balancer Shaft Inspect the balancer shaft for wear or damage. Replace the balancer shaft if there is anything unusual. I718H1140269-01 Installation 1) When installing the bearings into the conrod cap and conrod, be sure to install the tab “A” first, and then press in the opposite side of the bearing.

  • Page 277: Conrod And Crankshaft Inspection

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-75 4) Apply engine oil to the conrod cap bolts. 5) Tighten the conrod cap bolt by using a 10 mm, 12 point socket wrench in the following two steps. Tightening torque Conrod cap bolt: 21 N⋅m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.0 Ib-ft) then turn in 1/4 (90°) turn.

  • Page 278: Conrod Crank Pin Bearing Inspection And Selection

    1D-76 Engine Mechanical: Crankshaft Runout 2) Place the plastigauge axially along the crank pin, Support the crankshaft using V-blocks as shown, with avoiding the oil hole, as shown. the two end journals resting on the blocks. Set up the Special tool dial gauge as shown, and rotate the crankshaft slowly to (A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 — read the runout.

  • Page 279
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-77 4) Remove the conrod caps and measure the width of 2) Check the corresponding crank pin O.D. code the compressed plastigauge using the envelope numbers ([1], [2] or [3]) “B”. scale. This measurement should be taken at the widest part of the compressed plastigauge.
  • Page 280: Crankshaft Journal Bearing Inspection And Selection

    1D-78 Engine Mechanical: Crankshaft Journal Bearing Inspection and 4) Select the specified bearings from the bearing selection table. Selection B718H11406029 Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D- CAUTION 53)”. The bearings should be replaced as a set. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”. Inspection Bearing selection table 1) Inspect each upper and lower crankcase bearing for…

  • Page 281
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-79 2) Install the plastigauge onto each crankshaft journal 5) Remove the lower crankcase and measure the width as shown. of compressed plastigauge using the envelope scale. This measurement should be taken at the Special tool widest part of the compressed plastigauge. If the oil (A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 –…
  • Page 282: Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Inspection And Selection

    1D-80 Engine Mechanical: 2) Check the corresponding crankshaft journal O.D. 4) Select the specified bearings from the bearing codes ([A], [B] or [C]) “B”, which are stamped on the selection table. crankshaft. Bearing selection table Crankshaft O.D. “B” Code Green Black Brown Crankcase…

  • Page 283
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-81 2) Measure the thrust clearance “a” between the left- Selection side thrust bearing and crankshaft using the 1) Remove the right-side thrust bearing and measure thickness gauge. If the thrust clearance exceeds the its thickness using the micrometer. If the thickness of standard range, adjust the thrust clearance.
  • Page 284
    1D-82 Engine Mechanical: 4) Select a left-side thrust bearing from the selection table. NOTE Right-side thrust bearing has the same specification as the GREEN (12228-17E00-0D0) of left-side thrust bearing. Left-side thrust bearing selection table Clearance before inserting Color “A” (Part No.) Thrust bearing thickness Thrust clearance the left-side thrust bearing…
  • Page 285: Specifications

    Engine Mechanical: 1D-83 Specifications Service Data B718H11407001 Valve + Guide Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit 31 (1.22) — Valve diam. 27 (1.06) — 0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008) — Valve clearance (when cold) 0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.012) —…

  • Page 286: Tightening Torque Specifications

    1D-84 Engine Mechanical: Item Standard Limit Piston pin bore 18.002 – 18.008 (0.7087 – 0.7090) 18.030 (0.7098) Piston pin O.D. 17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087) 17.980 (0.7079) Conrod + Crankshaft Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit Conrod small end I.D. 18.010 –…

  • Page 287: Special Tools And Equipment

    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11408001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1D-13) /…

  • Page 288: Special Tool

    1D-86 Engine Mechanical: Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER P/No.: 99000–32030 (Page 1D-22) / 1303 or equivalent (Page 1D-38) / (Page 1D-70) THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER P/No.: 99000–32110 (Page 1D-62) / 1322 or equivalent…

  • Page 289
    Engine Mechanical: 1D-87 09900–20803 09900–21304 Thickness gauge V-block (100 mm) (Page 1D-44) / (Page 1D-36) / (Page 1D-50) / (Page 1D-44) / (Page 1D-52) / (Page 1D-44) / (Page 1D-53) / (Page 1D-76) (Page 1D-75) / (Page 1D-81) / (Page 1D-81) 09900–22301 09900–22302 Plastigauge (0.025 –…
  • Page 290
    1D-88 Engine Mechanical: 09916–43211 09916–43230 Valve guide remover/ Attachment installer (Page 1D-47) / (Page 1D-47) (Page 1D-47) 09916–74521 09916–74550 Holder body Band (Piston diam.: 73 – 85 (Page 1D-29) (Page 1D-29) 09916–84511 09930–10121 Valve adjuster driver Spark plug wrench set (Page 1D-40) / (Page 1D-25) (Page 1D-43)
  • Page 291: Engine Lubrication System

    Engine Lubrication System: 1E-1 Engine Lubrication System Engine Precautions Precautions for Engine Oil B718H11500001 Refer to “Fuel and Oil Recommendation in Section 0A (Page 0A-4)”.

  • Page 292: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    1E-2 Engine Lubrication System: Schematic and Routing Diagram Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram B718H11502002 EXHAUST CAMSHAFT EXHAUST CAMSHAFT JOURNAL HOLDER (B) CAMSHAFT JOURNALS, CAMFACES, TAPPETS INTAKE CAMSHAFT EXHAUST CAMSHAFT INTAKE CAMSHAFT JOURNAL HOLDER (D) JOURNAL HOLDER (A) OIL JET (#8) CAMSHAFT JOURNALS, CAMFACES, TAPPETS CAM CHAIN…

  • Page 293: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    Engine Lubrication System: 1E-3 Diagnostic Information and Procedures Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis B718H11504001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine overheats. Insufficient amount of engine oil. Check level and add. Defective oil pump. Replace. Clogged oil circuit. Clean. Clogged oil cooler Clean or replace.

  • Page 294: Repair Instructions

    1E-4 Engine Lubrication System: 6) Stop the engine and remove the oil pressure gauge and attachment. 7) Reinstall the main oil gallery plug and tighten it to the specified torque. CAUTION Use a new gasket to oil leakage. Tightening torque Main Oil gallery plug (M16) (a): 35 N·m (3.5 kgf- m, 25.5 lb-ft) I718H1150020-01…

  • Page 295
    Oil gallery plug (M12) (a): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 11.0 lb-ft) I718H1150064-01 7) Remove the oil gallery plug (6) from the oil pan. I718H1150026-01 • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-rings and install them. I718H1150024-02 CAUTION 8) Remove the O-rings (7), oil pressure regulator (8) and oil strainer (9).
  • Page 296: Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer Inspection

    Use a new gasket washer to prevent oil leakage. “B” “A” I718H1150029-01 • Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the oil pan. I718H1150032-01 NOTE • After installing the removed parts, pour engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Use of SUZUKI BOND is as follows: Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”…

  • Page 297: Oil Cooler Removal And Installation

    Install the oil cooler in the revers order of removal. Pay Inspect the oil strainer body for damage. If necessary, attention to the following points: replace it with a new one. • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring. CAUTION Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage. NOTE When installing the oil cooler, fit the concave part “A”…

  • Page 298: Oil Pressure Switch Inspection

    Oil Jet Removal and Installation Installation B718H11506018 Oil Jet (For Cam Chain Tension Adjuster) 1) Install the oil pressure switch, apply the SUZUKI Removal BOND to its thread and tighten it to the specified 1) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to torque.

  • Page 299
    Engine Lubrication System: 1E-9 Installation 3) Remove the crankshaft assembly. Refer to “Engine Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay Bottom Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D- attention to the following points: 53)”. • Apply engine oil to the O-ring. 4) Remove the piston cooling oil jets (1) from the upper crankcase.
  • Page 300: Oil Gallery Jet Removal And Installation

    1E-10 Engine Lubrication System: • Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the bolts and tighten them to the specified torque. : Thread lock cement 99000–32110 (THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent) Tightening torque Piston cooling oil jet bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) I718H1150051-02 Oil Jet / Oil Gallery Jet Inspection…

  • Page 301: Oil Pump Removal And Installation

    5) Remove the thrust washer (4) and washer (5). I718H1150057-01 Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring. CAUTION Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage. I718H1150056-01 : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER…

  • Page 302
    1E-12 Engine Lubrication System: • Install the oil pump. NOTE Set the oil pump shaft end “A” to the water pump shaft. “A” I718H1150060-01 • Install the washer (5) and thrust washer (6) onto the countershaft. NOTE The chamfer side “B” of thrust washer faces inside.
  • Page 303: Oil Pump Inspection

    Engine Lubrication System: 1E-13 Oil Pump Inspection B718H11506014 Inspect the oil pump in the following procedures: 1) Remove the oil pump. Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation (Page 1E-11)”. 2) Rotate the oil pump by hand and check that it moves smoothly.

  • Page 304: Special Tools And Equipment

    1E-14 Engine Lubrication System: Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11508001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1E-5) / (Page 1E- equivalent 7) / (Page 1E-11) Sealant SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or P/No.: 99000–31110…

  • Page 305: Engine Cooling System

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-1 Engine Cooling System Engine Precautions Precautions for Engine Cooling System B718H11600001 WARNING • You can be injured by boiling fluid or steam if you open the radiator cap when the engine is hot. After the engine cools, wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow pressure to escape and then turn the cap all the way off.

  • Page 306: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    1F-2 Engine Cooling System: Schematic and Routing Diagram Cooling Circuit Diagram B718H11602004 RESERVOIR TANK THERMOSTAT CONNEECTOR CYLINDER HEAD THERMOSTAT ECT SENSOR CYLINDER COOLER RADIATOR WATER PUMP I718H1160029-03…

  • Page 307: Water Hose Routing Diagram

    “L”: The clamp screw head should face upward. 4. Radiator heat shield “M”: The clamp screw head should face left upward. 5. Radiator cover molding (GSF1250/A only) “N”: The clamp screw head should face right side. 6. Tape (GSF1250/A only) “O”: The clamp screw head should face left side.

  • Page 308: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    1F-4 Engine Cooling System: Diagnostic Information and Procedures Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis B718H11604001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine overheats Not enough engine coolant. Add engine coolant. Radiator core clogged with dirt or scale. Clean. Faulty cooling fan. Repair or replace.

  • Page 309: Radiator Cap Inspection

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-5 Radiator Cap Inspection Radiator Cleaning B718H11606013 Blow out any foreign matter that is stuck in the radiator Inspect the radiator cap in the following procedures: fins using compressed air. 1) Remove the radiator cap. Refer to “Cooling Circuit CAUTION Inspection (Page 1F-4)”.

  • Page 310: Water Hose Inspection

    1F-6 Engine Cooling System: 4) Disconnect the cooling fan motor coupler (2), water 7) Remove the spacers (7) and mounting bolt. bypass hose (3) and radiator outlet hose (4). 8) Remove the cooling fan motor from the radiator (8). I718H1160034-01 I718H1160037-02 5) Remove the radiator assembly (5) by removing the 9) Remove the radiator covers (9), left and right.

  • Page 311: Water Hose Removal And Installation

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-7 Water Hose Removal and Installation 3) Any leakage from the connecting section should be corrected by proper tightening. Refer to “Water Hose B718H11606016 Removal Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”. 1) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

  • Page 312: Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal And Installation

    1F-8 Engine Cooling System: 2) Inspect the radiator reservoir tank cooling leaks. If Installation any defects are found, replace the radiator reservoir Install radiator reservoir tank in the reverse order of tank with a new one. removal. Pay attention to the following points: •…

  • Page 313: Cooling Fan Relay Inspection

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-9 2) Test the cooling fan motor for load current with an 3) First check the insulation between “A” and “B” ammeter connected as shown in the figure. terminals with tester. Then apply 12 volts to “C” and If the fan motor does not turn, replace the cooling fan “D”…

  • Page 314
    1F-10 Engine Cooling System: 5) Remove the thermostat connector (1) along with 8) Remove the thermostat (9). bracket (7). I718H1160050-01 I718H1160004-02 Installation 6) Remove the bracket (7) from the thermostat Install the thermostat in the reverse order of removal. connector (1). Pay attention to the following points: •…
  • Page 315: Thermostat Inspection

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-11 • Connect the water hoses securely. Refer to “Water 5) Heat the water by placing the beaker on a stove and Hose Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”. observe the rising temperature on a thermometer (2). • Pour engine coolant and bleed air from the cooling circuit.

  • Page 316: Water Pump Components

    1F-12 Engine Cooling System: Water pump Components B718H11606026 I718H1160062-01 1. Water pump case 4. Mechanical seal : 6 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-n, 4.5 Ib-ft) : Apply engine coolant. 2. O-ring 5. Oil seal : 13 N⋅m (1.3 kgf-n, 9.5 Ib-ft) : Do not reuse. 3.

  • Page 317: Water Pump Removal And Installation

    If engine oil is leaking, visually inspect the oil seal and O-ring. If engine : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER coolant is leaking, visually inspect the GREASE A or equivalent) mechanical seal and seal washer. Refer to •…

  • Page 318: Water Pump Disassembly And Assembly

    1F-14 Engine Cooling System: Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly 6) Remove the impeller shaft (6) and washer (7). B718H11606029 Refer to “Water Pump Removal and Installation (Page 1F-13)”. Disassembly 1) Remove the air vent bolt (1) if necessary. 2) Remove the water pump case (2). I718H1160014-01 7) Remove the mechanical seal with the special tool.

  • Page 319
    : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1160059-01 4) Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the impeller shaft. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) 5) Install the impeller shaft and washer (1) to the water I718H1160057-01 pump body.
  • Page 320
    1F-16 Engine Cooling System: 6) Install the rubber seal (2) into the impeller. 10) Install a new O-ring (7) and apply engine coolant to 7) After wiping off the oily or greasy matter from the mechanical seal ring (3), install it into the impeller. CAUTION NOTE Use a new O-ring to prevent engine coolant…
  • Page 321: Water Pump Related Parts Inspection

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-17 Water Pump Related Parts Inspection Seal Washer B718H11606030 Visually inspect the seal washer for damage, with Refer to “Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly particular attention given to the sealing face. (Page 1F-14)”. Replace the seal washer that shows indications of leakage.

  • Page 322: Specifications

    1F-18 Engine Cooling System: Specifications Service Data B718H11607001 Thermostat + Radiator + Fan + Coolant Item Specification Note Approx. 82 °C (180 °F) Thermostat valve opening temperature — 8 mm (0.31 in) and over at 95 °C (203 °F) Thermostat valve lift —…

  • Page 323: Special Tools And Equipment

    Engine Cooling System: 1F-19 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11608001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1F-13) / equivalent (Page 1F-15) / (Page 1F-15) Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER P/No.: 99000–32110…

  • Page 324: Fuel System

    1G-1 Fuel System: Fuel System Engine Precautions Precautions for Fuel System B718H11700001 WARNING • Keep away from fire or spark. • During disassembling, use care to minimize spillage of gasoline. • Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately. • Work in a well-ventilated area. CAUTION •…

  • Page 325: General Description

    Fuel System: 1G-2 General Description Fuel System Description B718H11701002 Fuel System The fuel delivery system consists of the fuel tank (1), fuel pump (2), fuel filter (3), fuel feed hose (4), fuel delivery pipe (5) (including fuel injectors) and fuel pressure regulator (6). There is no fuel return hose. The fuel in the fuel tank (1) is pumped up by the fuel pump (2) and pressurized fuel flows into the injector (8) installed in the fuel delivery pipe (5).

  • Page 326: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    1G-3 Fuel System: Schematic and Routing Diagram Fuel Tank Drain Hose and Breather Hose Routing Diagram B718H11702002 “a” “C” “A” “ b ” “B” “D” I718H1170040-02 1. Fuel tank drain hose 8. Clamp : Clamp end should face inside. Tip of clamp should face downward. 2.

  • Page 327: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    Fuel System: 1G-4 Diagnostic Information and Procedures Fuel System Diagnosis B718H11704001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine will not start or is Clogged fuel filter or fuel hose. Clean or replace. hard to start (No fuel Defective fuel pump. Replace.

  • Page 328: Repair Instructions

    1G-5 Fuel System: Repair Instructions Fuel Pressure Inspection 4) Turn the ignition ON and check for fuel pressure. B718H11706042 Fuel pressure WARNING Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm , 43.5 psi) • Keep away from fire or spark. If the fuel pressure is lower than the specification, •…

  • Page 329: Fuel Discharge Amount Inspection

    Fuel System: 1G-6 Fuel Discharge Amount Inspection 5) Disconnect the fuel pump lead wire coupler (3). B718H11706028 WARNING • Keep away from fire or spark. • Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately. • Work in a well-ventilated area. Inspect the fuel discharge amount in the following procedures: I718H1170043-01 1) Lift and support the fuel tank.

  • Page 330: Fuel Pump Relay Inspection

    1G-7 Fuel System: Fuel Pump Relay Inspection Fuel Hose Inspection B718H11706029 B718H11706030 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A Refer to “Fuel Line Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B- (Page 0A-8)”. 10)”. Inspect the fuel pump relay in the following procedures: Fuel Level Gauge Inspection 1) Remove the seat.

  • Page 331: Fuel Tank Construction

    Fuel System: 1G-8 Fuel Tank Construction B718H11706001 “A” I718H1170020-03 1. Fuel tank rear cushion 3. Rear bracket cushion : Be careful not to mistake the assembling position and direction. : Be careful not to mistake the assembling position and direction. 2.

  • Page 332: Fuel Tank Removal And Installation

    1G-9 Fuel System: Fuel Tank Removal and Installation 4) Disconnect the fuel tank breather hose (2) and drain B718H11706002 hose (3). 5) Disconnect the fuel pump lead wire coupler (4). Removal 6) Remove the fuel tank. WARNING • Keep away from fire or spark. •…

  • Page 333: Fuel Pump Components

    Fuel System: 1G-10 Fuel Pump Components B718H11706033 I718H1170002-03 1. Vessel 5. Thermistor : Apply grease. 2. Fuel mesh filter 6. Fuel level gauge : Do not reuse. 3. Fuel pump 7. O-ring : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) 4. Fuel pressure regulator assembly : Apply engine oil.

  • Page 334: Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal And Installation

    1G-11 Fuel System: Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge 4) Remove the fuel level gauge (3) while pushing the pawl end “A”. Removal and Installation B718H11706034 CAUTION Removal Do not pull the lead wire when removing the fuel gauge. WARNING •…

  • Page 335: Fuel Pump Disassembly And Assembly

    Refer to “Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge CAUTION Removal and Installation (Page 1G-11)”. Replace the O-ring with a new one. Disassembly : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER 1) Remove the vessel (1). GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1170029-01 I718H1170027-02 2) Remove the fuel mesh filter (2).

  • Page 336
    1G-13 Fuel System: 5) Remove the cup cover (6) and fuel pump (7) from 8) Disconnect the lead wire (BI) (11) and remove the the reservoir cup. fuel level gauge coupler (12). I718H1170032-02 I718H1170036-03 6) Remove the fuel pressure regulator assembly (8). 9) Disconnect the lead wire (W) (13) and remove the thermistor (14).
  • Page 337: Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection And Cleaning

    Fuel System: 1G-14 2) If the fuel mesh filter is clogged with foreign particles, it hinders smooth gasoline flow resulting in loss of engine power. Such a filter should be cleaned by blowing with compressed air. NOTE When the fuel mesh filter is dirtied excessively, replace the fuel filter cartridge with a new one.

  • Page 338: Specifications

    1G-15 Fuel System: Specifications Service Data B718H11707001 Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator Item Specification Note 11 – 13 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F) Injector resistance — Fuel pump discharge amount 166 ml (5.6/5.8 US/lmp oz) and more/10 sec. —…

  • Page 339: Special Tools And Equipment

    Fuel System: 1G-16 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11708001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1G-12) equivalent NOTE Required service material is also described in the following. “Fuel Pump Components (Page 1G-10)”…

  • Page 340: Ignition System

    1H-1 Ignition System: Ignition System Engine Schematic and Routing Diagram Ignition System Diagram B718H11802001 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. Engine stop switch Side-stand relay Fuse sensor Ignition switch Fuse Battery sensor sensor switch I718H1180001-02 Ignition System Components Location B718H11802002 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

  • Page 341: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    Ignition System: 1H-2 Diagnostic Information and Procedures Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis B718H11804001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Spark plug not sparking Damaged spark plug. Replace. Fouled spark plugs. Clean or replace. Wet spark plugs. Clean and dry or replace. Defective ignition coil/plug caps.

  • Page 342: No Spark Or Poor Spark

    1H-3 Ignition System: No Spark or Poor Spark B718H11804002 Troubleshooting NOTE Check that the transmission is in neutral and the engine stop switch is in the “RUN” position. Grasp the clutch lever. Check that the fuse is not blown and the battery is fully-charged before diagnosing. Step Action Check the ignition system couplers for poor connections.

  • Page 343: Repair Instructions

    1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”. 3) Remove the frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 344: Spark Plug Inspection And Cleaning

    1H-5 Ignition System: Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Inspection • Install the ignition coil/plug caps and connect their lead wire couplers. B718H11806004 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”. CAUTION Do not hit the ignition coil/plug cap with a Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage plastic hammer when installing it.

  • Page 345
    Ignition System: 1H-6 5) Insert the needle pointed probe to the lead wire 7) Measure the ignition coil primary peak voltage in the coupler. following procedures. NOTE WARNING Use the special tool, to prevent the rubber of Do not touch the tester probes and spark the water proof coupler from damage.
  • Page 346: Ckp Sensor Inspection

    1H-7 Ignition System: CKP Sensor Inspection Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Resistance B718H11806008 1) Remove the ignition coil/plug caps. Refer to “Ignition Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and (Page 0A-8)”. Installation (Page 1H-4)”.

  • Page 347: Ckp Sensor Removal And Installation

    Inspect the engine stop switch in the following procedures: 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 3) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1).

  • Page 348: Ignition Switch Inspection

    I718H1180021-03 10) Using a center punch, remove the ignition switch mounting bolts. 11) Remove the ignition switch (6) from the upper bracket. I718H1180018-01 4) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (GSF1250/S) or brake hose joint bolt (2) (GSF1250A/SA). I718H1180022-01 I718H1180019-01…

  • Page 349
    Ignition System: 1H-10 Installation • Tighten the handlebar holder set nuts (3) to the Install the ignition switch in the reverse order of removal. specified torque. Pay attention to the following points: Tightening torque • Install the ignition switch and new bolts. Handlebar holder set nut (c): 45 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, •…
  • Page 350: Specifications

    1H-11 Ignition System: Specifications Service Data B718H11807001 Electrical Unit: mm (in) Item Specification Note 1 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 4 ⋅ 3 Firing order NGK: CR7E Type DENSO: U22ESR-N Spark plug 0.7 – 0.8 (0.028 – 0.031) Spark performance Over 8 (0.3) at 1 atm. 90 –…

  • Page 351: Starting System

    Starting System: 1I-1 Starting System Engine Schematic and Routing Diagram Starting System Diagram B718H11902001 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. Ignition Engine stop switch switch Fuse (30 A) Bl/B Gear B/Bl Fuse position Starter Starter (15 A) switch button motor…

  • Page 352: Starter Motor Will Not Run

    1I-2 Starting System: Starter motor will not run B718H11904002 NOTE Make sure the fuses are not blown and the battery is fully-charged before diagnosing. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Shift the transmission into neutral. Go to step 2. Go to step 3. 2) Grasp the clutch lever, turn on the ignition switch with the engine stop switch in the “RUN”…

  • Page 353: Repair Instructions

    Starting System: 1I-3 Repair Instructions Starter Motor Components B718H11906001 I718H1190038-03 1. O-ring 5. O-ring : 5 N⋅m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.5 lb-ft) 2. Housing end (Inside) 6. Starter motor case : Apply grease to sliding surface. 3. O-ring 7: Housing end assembly (Outside) : Apply moly past to sliding surface.

  • Page 354: Starter Motor Removal And Installation

    Install the starter motor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: • Apply grease to the starter motor O-ring. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1190002-01 4) Remove the regulator/rectifier bracket mounting CAUTION bolts.

  • Page 355: Starter Motor Disassembly And Assembly

    • Apply a small quantity of moly paste to the armature battery (–) lead wire. Refer to “Wiring Harness shaft. Routing Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”. : Moly paste 99000–25140 (SUZUKI Moly paste or equivalent) I718H1190008-01 I718H1190011-01 Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly •…

  • Page 356: Starter Motor Inspection

    1I-6 Starting System: Starter Motor Inspection Armature Coil B718H11906004 Measure for continuity between each segment. Measure Refer to “Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly for continuity between each segment and the armature (Page 1I-5)”. shaft. If there is no continuity between the segments or there is Carbon Brush continuity between the segments and shaft, replace the Inspect the carbon brushes for abnormal wear, cracks or…

  • Page 357: Starter Relay Removal And Installation

    Starting System: 1I-7 Starter Relay Removal and Installation Starter Relay Inspection B718H11906005 B718H11906006 Removal Inspect the starter relay in the following procedures: 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1) Remove the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay Removal and Installation (Page 1I-7)”. 2) Remove the seat.

  • Page 358: Turn Signal / Side-Stand Relay Removal And Installation

    1I-8 Starting System: Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts 3) Measure the relay coil resistance between the terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the Inspection resistance is not within the specified value, replace B718H11906008 Check the interlock system for proper operation. If the the starter relay with a new one.

  • Page 359
    Starting System: 1I-9 5) Connect the side-stand switch coupler. 4) Install the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to “Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation 6) Install the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts (Page 1I-8)”. Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D- 6)”.
  • Page 360: Starter Clutch Removal And Installation

    1I-10 Starting System: Gear Position Switch 7) Measure the voltage between Pink and Black/White lead wires using the multi-circuit tester when shifting 1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts the gearshift lever from low to top. Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D- 6)”.

  • Page 361
    Starting System: 1I-11 3) Remove the idle gear shaft (2) and starter idle gear 7) Remove the one way clutch (7) from the guide (8). (3). 4) Remove the generator rotor assembly (4). Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-4)”.
  • Page 362: Starter Clutch Inspection

    1I-12 Starting System: Starter Clutch Inspection • Install the guide (2) to the generator rotor. B718H11906011 Refer to “Starter Clutch Removal and Installation NOTE (Page 1I-10)”. The arrow mark “B” must face to the generator rotor side. Starter Clutch 1) Install the starter driven gear onto the starter clutch. 2) Turn the starter driven gear by hand to inspect the starter clutch for a smooth movement.

  • Page 363: Starter Button Inspection

    If any abnormality is found, replace the right handle Inspect the starter button in the following procedures: switch assembly with a new one. Refer to 1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) “Handlebar Removal and Installation in Section 6B Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in (Page 6B-3)”.

  • Page 364: Special Tools And Equipment

    1I-14 Starting System: Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11908001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 1I-4) / (Page 1I-5) equivalent Moly paste SUZUKI Moly paste or equivalent P/No.: 99000–25140…

  • Page 365: Charging System

    Charging System: 1J-1 Charging System Engine Schematic and Routing Diagram Charging System Diagram B718H11A02001 Regulator/Rectifier Ignition switch Generator I718H11A0001-01 Component Location Charging System Components Location B718H11A03001 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”. Diagnostic Information and Procedures Charging System Symptom Diagnosis B718H11A04001 Condition…

  • Page 366: Battery Runs Down Quickly

    1J-2 Charging System: Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Battery overcharges Faulty regulator/rectifier. Replace. Faulty battery. Replace. Poor contact of generator lead wire Repair. coupler. Battery runs down quickly Trouble in charging system. Check the generator, regulator/rectifier and circuit connections and make necessary adjustments to obtain specified charging operation.

  • Page 367: Repair Instructions

    Charging System: 1J-3 Repair Instructions Battery Current Leakage Inspection Regulated Voltage Inspection B718H11A06001 B718H11A06002 Inspect the battery current leakage in the following Inspect the regulated voltage in the following procedures: procedures: 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 368: Generator Removal And Installation

    1J-4 Charging System: 2) Measure the resistance between the three lead 2) Start the engine and keep it running at 5 000 r/min. wires. 3) Using the multi-circuit tester, measure the voltage If the resistance is out of specified value, replace the between three lead wires.

  • Page 369
    Charging System: 1J-5 5) Remove the generator cover (4). 8) Hold the generator rotor with the special tool. Special tool (A): 09930–44530 (Rotor holder) 9) Loosen the generator rotor bolt. NOTE When loosen the rotor bolt, do not remove it. The rotor bolt is used in conjunction with the rotor remover when removing the rotor.
  • Page 370
    1J-6 Charging System: 12) Remove the generator stator (10) along with the • Degrease the tapered portion “A” of generator rotor CKP sensor (11). and also the crankshaft “B”. Use nonflammable cleaning solvent to wipe off oily or greasy matter and make these surfaces completely dry.
  • Page 371
    • Install the generator cover and tighten the generator line between the upper and lower crankcases as cover bolts. shown. WARNING : Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI BOND Be careful not to pinch the finger between the No.1207B or equivalent) generator cover and the crankcase. CAUTION Fit new gasket washer to the bolt (4).
  • Page 372: Regulator / Rectifier Construction

    1J-8 Charging System: Regulator / Rectifier Construction B718H11A06013 I718H11A0002-01 1. Regulator/rectifier 3. Regulator/rectifier bracket No.2 5. Engine sprocket inner cover 2. Regulator/rectifier bracket No.1 4. Breather cover : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) Regulator / Rectifier Inspection 3) Disconnect the regulator/rectifier couplers (1). B718H11A06012 Inspect the regulator/rectifier in the following procedures: 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

  • Page 373: Battery Components

    Charging System: 1J-9 4) Measure the voltage between the terminals using the multi-circuit tester as indicated in the following table. If the voltage is not within the specified value, replace the regulator/rectifier with a new one. Refer to “Regulator / Rectifier Construction (Page 1J-8)”.

  • Page 374
    1J-10 Charging System: 1) Remove the aluminum tape (1) which seals the 5) Make sure that air bubbles (4) rise to the top of each battery filler holes “A”. electrolyte container, and leave in this position for about more than 20 minutes. “A”…
  • Page 375
    Charging System: 1J-11 6) After confirming that the electrolyte has entered the Charging battery completely, remove the electrolyte containers For initial charging, use the charger specially designed from the battery. for MF battery. 7) Wait for about 20 minutes. CAUTION 8) Insert the caps (2) into the filler holes, pressing in firmly so that the top of the caps do not protrude •…
  • Page 376: Battery Removal And Installation

    1J-12 Charging System: 3) After recharging, wait at least 30 minutes and then 5) Remove the battery (4) from the motorcycle. measure the battery voltage using the multi-circuit tester. If the battery voltage is less than 12.5 V, recharge the battery again. If the battery voltage is still less than 12.5 V after recharging, replace the battery with a new one.

  • Page 377: Specifications

    Charging System: 1J-13 Specifications Service Data B718H11A07001 Battery CAUTION Never use anything except the specified battery. Item Specification Note Type designation FT12A-BS Capacity 12 V, 36.0 kC (10 Ah)/10HR 1.330 at 20 °C (68 °F) Standard electrolyte S.G. Generator Item Specification Note 0.2 –…

  • Page 378: Special Tools And Equipment

    1J-14 Charging System: Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11A08001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Sealant SUZUKI BOND No.1207B or P/No.: 99000–31140 (Page 1J-7) equivalent Special Tool B718H11A08002 09900–25008 09930–34970 Multi-circuit tester set Rotor remover set (Page 1J-3) /…

  • Page 379: Exhaust System

    Exhaust System: 1K-1 Exhaust System Engine Precautions Precautions for Exhaust System B718H11B00001 WARNING To avoid the risk of being burned, do not touch the exhaust system when the system is hot. Any service on the exhaust system should be performed when the system is cool. CAUTION Make sure that the exhaust pipes and muffler have enough clearance from the rubber parts and plastic parts to avoid melting.

  • Page 380: Repair Instructions

    1K-2 Exhaust System: Repair Instructions Exhaust System Construction B718H11B06001 “A” “B” I718H11B0001-03 1. Exhaust pipes 5. Exhaust pipe mounting bolt “A”: Chamfer : 25 N⋅m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft) 2. Muffler 6. Muffler connecting bolt “B”: Apply exhaust gas sealer. : Do not reuse.

  • Page 381: Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal And Installation

    Exhaust System: 1K-3 Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation 5) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler (4) and clamps. B718H11B06002 Removal 1) Loosen the muffler connecting bolts (1). 2) Remove the muffler (3) by removing the mounting bolt (2) and nut. NOTE Support the muffler to prevent it from falling.

  • Page 382
    1K-4 Exhaust System: 7) Remove the HO2 sensor (6) from the exhaust pipe. • Install the exhaust pipe gaskets (1) and connector (2). CAUTION CAUTION Replace the gaskets and connector with new • Be careful not to expose it to an excessive ones.
  • Page 383
    Exhaust System: 1K-5 • Tighten the exhaust pipe bolts and exhaust pipe • Route the HO2 sensor lead wire. Refer to “Throttle mounting bolt to the specified torque. Body Construction in Section 1D (Page 1D-8)” and “Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A Tightening torque (Page 9A-8)”.
  • Page 384: Exhaust System Inspection

    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H11B08001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Exhaust gas sealer PERMATEX 1372 (commercially — (Page 1K-4)

  • Page 385
    Table of Contents 2- i Section 2 Suspension CONTENTS Precautions ……….2-1 Swingarm Related Parts Inspection ….2C-9 Swingarm Bearing Removal and Installation ..2C-10 Precautions…………. 2-1 Specifications ………….2C-12 Precautions for Suspension ……..2-1 Service Data…………2C-12 Suspension General Diagnosis….2A-1 Tightening Torque Specifications……2C-12 Special Tools and Equipment ……2C-13 Diagnostic Information and Procedures….2A-1 Recommended Service Material …….2C-13…
  • Page 386: Precautions

    2-1 Precautions: Precautions Suspension Precautions Precautions for Suspension B718H12000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”. WARNING All suspensions, bolts and nuts are an important part in that it could affect the performance of vital parts. They must be tightened to the specified torque periodically and if the suspension effect is lost, replace it with a new one.

  • Page 387: Suspension General Diagnosis

    Suspension General Diagnosis: 2A-1 Suspension General Diagnosis Suspension Diagnostic Information and Procedures Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis B718H12104001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Wobbly front wheel Distorted wheel rim. Replace. Worn front wheel bearings. Replace. Defective or incorrect tire. Replace.

  • Page 388: Front Suspension

    2B-1 Front Suspension: Front Suspension Suspension Repair Instructions Front Fork Components B718H12206001 I718H1220001-04 1. Front fork protector 10. Front axle pinch bolt 19. Spring seat 2. Dust seal 11. Inner tube 20. Spacer 3. Oil seal stopper ring 12. Inner tube slide metal 21.

  • Page 389: Front Fork Removal And Installation

    3) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (2). Hold the front fork by the hand to prevent 4) Remove the front fender by removing the bolts (3), sliding out of the steering stem. left and right. GSF1250/S I718H1220005-03 I718H1220003-03 Installation GSF1250A/SA 1) Set the front fork to the front fork lower bracket temporarily by tightening the lower clamp bolts (1).

  • Page 390: Front Fork Inspection

    2B-3 Front Suspension: 2) Tighten the front fork cap bolt (2) to the specified 7) Set the front fender plate nut to the front fender. torque with the special tool. NOTE Tightening torque Face the triangle mark on the front fender Front fork cap bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 brace to the front side “A”.

  • Page 391: Front Fork Adjustment

    Front Suspension: 2B-4 Front Fork Adjustment 2) Remove the front fork cap bolt (3) from the outer B718H12206006 tube. Turn the adjustment (1) to the desired position. 3) Remove the spring seat (2). CAUTION 4) Remove the front fork cap bolt (3) with spring adjuster by loosening the inner rod lock-nut (4).

  • Page 392
    2B-5 Front Suspension: 8) Remove the dust seal (8). 12) Remove the oil lock piece (12). I649G1220013-03 I649G1220017-03 9) Remove the oil seal stopper ring (9). 13) Remove the oil seal by slowly pulling out the inner tube. NOTE Be careful not to damage the inner tube. I649G1220014-03 10) Remove the damper rod bolt (10).
  • Page 393
    2B-6 Assembly • Apply fork oil to the inner tube slide metal. Assemble the front fork in the reverse order of : Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: SS-08 or equivalent) CAUTION The outer and inner tube’s slide metals must be replaced along with the oil seal and dust seal when assembling the front fork.
  • Page 394
    : Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or equivalent) Capacity (each leg) GSF1250/A: 472 ml (16.0/16.6 US/lmp oz) GSF1250S/SA: 471 ml (15.9/16.0 US/lmp oz) I649G1220024-02 • Apply thread lock to the damper rod bolt and tighten it to the specified torque with a 6-mm hexagon wrench and special tools.
  • Page 395
    When adjusting the fork oil level, remove the fork spring and compress the inner tube fully. Special tool (A): 09943–74111 (Fork oil level gauge) Fork oil level “a” GSF1250/A: 143 mm (5.6 in.) I649G1220031-04 GSF1250S/SA: 144 mm (5.7 in) “ a ” I649G1220029-03…
  • Page 396: Front Fork Parts Inspection

    • Apply fork oil lightly to the O-ring (3). Inner and Outer Tubes Inspect the inner tube sliding surface and outer tube CAUTION sliding surface for scuffing. Use a new O-ring (3) to prevent oil leakage. : Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or equivalent) I649G1220035-03 I718H1220016-01…

  • Page 397: Specifications

    Front fork inner tube O.D. 43 (1.7) — Front fork spring free length 390.4 (15.37) 382 (15.0) Front fork oil level (without spring, GSF1250/A 143 (5.6) — outer tube fully compressed ) GSF1250S/SA 144 (5.7) Front fork spring adjuster 3rd groove from top —…

  • Page 398: Special Tools And Equipment

    2B-11 Front Suspension: Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H12208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or P/No.: 99000–99001– (Page 2B-6) / (Page 2B- equivalent 6) / (Page 2B-7) / (Page 2B-9) Thread lock cement THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER P/No.: 99000–32110…

  • Page 399: Rear Suspension

    Rear Suspension: 2C-1 Rear Suspension Suspension Repair Instructions Rear Suspension Components B718H12306001 I718H1230001-01 1. Rear shock absorber 7. Chain case : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) 2. Rear shock absorber mounting nut 8. Swingarm : 78 N⋅m (7.8 kgf-m, 56.5 lb-ft) 3.

  • Page 400: Rear Suspension Assembly Construction

    2C-2 Rear Suspension: Rear Suspension Assembly Construction B718H12306002 Left Right I718H1230042-01 1. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Upper) 5. Cushion lever mounting nut : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m 72.5 lb-ft) 2. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Lower) 6. Swingarm pivot nut : Apply grease to the bearing.

  • Page 401: Rear Shock Absorber Removal And Installation

    Rear Suspension: 2C-3 Rear Shock Absorber Removal and Installation Installation B718H12306003 Install the rear shock absorber in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: Removal • Temporary install the rear shock absorber and 1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand and cushion lever.

  • Page 402: Rear Shock Absorber Inspection

    7 provides the stiffest. damper unit since it can explode or oil can splash hazardously. STD position • When discarding the rear cushion unit, be GSF1250/A: 3rd position sure to release gas pressure from the unit GSF1250S/SA: 4th position following the procedures. I649G1230006-03…

  • Page 403: Cushion Lever Removal And Installation

    Rear Suspension: 2C-5 Cushion Lever Removal and Installation 1) Mark the drill center at the location “A” using a center punch. B718H12306008 Removal 1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand and support the motorcycle with a jack to be no load for the cushion lever.

  • Page 404: Cushion Lever Inspection

    2C-6 Rear Suspension: Cushion Lever Inspection Cushion Rod B718H12306009 Refer to “Swingarm Related Parts Inspection (Page 2C- Refer to “Cushion Lever Removal and Installation 9)”. (Page 2C-5)”. Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and Spacer Installation 1) Remove the spacers from the cushion lever. B718H12306010 2) Inspect the spacers for any flaws or other damage.

  • Page 405: Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal And Installation

    I718H1230017-01 3) Remove the brake hose clamps. I718H1230014-02 2) Apply grease to the bearings. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1230018-01 4) Remove the cushion lever (2) and rear shock absorber (3). Refer to “Cushion Lever Removal and Installation (Page 2C-5)”…

  • Page 406
    2C-8 Rear Suspension: 5) Remove the pivot shaft end caps (4), left and right. Installation Install the swingarm in the reverse order of removal. Pay 6) Remove the swingarm by removing the pivot shaft attention to the following points: nut (5) and washer. •…
  • Page 407: Swingarm Related Parts Inspection

    Rear Suspension: 2C-9 Swingarm Related Parts Inspection • Tighten the cushion lever, cushion rod and rear shock absorber mounting nut to the specified torque. B718H12306012 Refer to “Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and Tightening torque Installation (Page 2C-7)”. Cushion rod mounting nut (b): 78 N·m (7.8 kgf-m, 56.5 lb-ft) Spacers Cushion lever mounting nut (c): 78 N·m (7.8 kgf-…

  • Page 408: Swingarm Bearing Removal And Installation

    2C-10 Rear Suspension: Swingarm Bearing Removal and Installation Swingarm Inspect the swingarm for damage. If any defect is found, B718H12306013 replace the swingarm with a new one. Removal 1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D (Page 2D-16)”.

  • Page 409
    Special tool (A): 09924–84521 (Bearing installer set) I649G1230039-04 4) Apply grease to the bearings. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1230036-01 I718H1230038-03 5) Install the swingarm. Refer to “Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and Installation (Page 2C-7)”.
  • Page 410: Specifications

    2C-12 Rear Suspension: Specifications Service Data B718H12307001 Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit Rear shock absorber spring GSF1250/A 3rd position adjuster GSF1250S/SA 4th position — Rear shock absorber damping Rebound 1-1/4 turns out from stiffest position — force adjuster Rear wheel travel 136 (5.4)

  • Page 411: Special Tools And Equipment

    Rear Suspension: 2C-13 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H12308001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 2C-7) / (Page 2C- equivalent NOTE Required service material is also described in the following.

  • Page 412: Wheels And Tires

    2D-1 Wheels and Tires: Wheels and Tires Suspension Precautions Precautions for Wheel and Tire B718H12400001 WARNING • Proper tire pressure and proper tire loading are important factors. Over loading tire can lead to tire failure and loss of motorcycle control. •…

  • Page 413: Repair Instructions

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-2 Repair Instructions Front Wheel Components B718H12406015 GSF1250/S I718H1240050-02 1. Front axle 7. Front wheel : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 2. Brake disc bolt 8. Collar : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft) 3. Brake disc 9.

  • Page 414
    2D-3 Wheels and Tires: GSF1250A/SA I718H1240001-04 1. Front axle 8. Wheel speed sensor rotor : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 2. Brake disc bolt 9. Sensor rotor bolt : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft) 3. Brake disc 10. Wheel speed sensor bracket : Apply grease.
  • Page 415: Front Wheel Assembly Construction

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-4 Front Wheel Assembly Construction B718H12406002 GSF1250/S Left Right “a” I718H1240044-02 1. Brake disc bolt “a”: Clearance : Apply grease. 2. Brake caliper mounting bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : Apply thread lock to thread part.

  • Page 416
    2D-5 Wheels and Tires: GSF1250A/SA Right Left “a” “b ” I718H1240002-02 1. Brake disc bolt 5. Front wheel speed sensor : 26 N⋅m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft) 2. Brake caliper mounting bolt “a”: Clearance : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft) 3.
  • Page 417: Front Wheel Assembly Removal And Installation

    3) Remove the brake calipers. Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation in Section 4B I718H1240006-02 (Page 4B-3)”. 8) Remove the collar (4) (GSF1250/S) or front wheel speed sensor bracket (5) (GSF1250A/SA). CAUTION GSF1250/S Do not operate the brake lever while removing the caliper.

  • Page 418
    2D-7 Wheels and Tires: Installation 3) Install the front wheel with the front axle and tighten the front axle bolt temporarily. 1) Install the collar (1) (GSF1250/S) or front wheel speed sensor bracket (2) (GSF1250A/SA) into the WARNING right side of the wheel.
  • Page 419: Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-8 Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection 6) Tighten two axle pinch bolts on the right fork leg to the specified torque. B718H12406004 Refer to “Front Wheel Assembly Removal and Tightening torque Installation (Page 2D-6)” Front axle pinch bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) Tire Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-19)”.

  • Page 420: Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal And Installation

    2D-9 Wheels and Tires: Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Wheel Installation 1) Remove the brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake Pad B718H12406005 Replacement in Section 4B (Page 4B-2)”. 2) Make sure that the wheel runout checked as shown Removal does not exceed the service limit.

  • Page 421
    Special tool be replaced with new ones. (A): 09924–84510 (Bearing installer set) 1) Apply grease to the wheel bearings. CAUTION : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER The sealed cover of the bearing must face GREASE A or equivalent) outside. I649G1240019-02 I649G1240020-03…
  • Page 422
    2D-11 Wheels and Tires: 3) Install the dust seals with the special tool. 4) Apply grease to the lip of dust seals. Special tool : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER (B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1240021-01 I718H1240022-01 5) Install the front wheel speed sensor rotor as the letters “50T”…
  • Page 423: Rear Wheel Components

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-12 Rear Wheel Components B718H12406006 GSF1250/S I718H1240024-03 1. Spacer 10. Bearing : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft) 2. Rear sprocket 11. Dust seal : 60 N⋅m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft) 3. Dust seal 12. Collar : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 4.

  • Page 424
    2D-13 Wheels and Tires: GSF1250A/SA I718H1240025-03 1. Spacer 10. Bearing 19. Tire 2. Rear sprocket 11. Dust seal 20. Wheel balancer 3. Dust seal 12. Collar : 100 N⋅m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft) 4. Bearing 13. Wheel speed sensor rotor : 60 N⋅m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft) 5.
  • Page 425: Rear Wheel Assembly Construction

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-14 Rear Wheel Assembly Construction B718H12406018 GSF1250/S Left Right “a” I718H1240027-03 1. Rear sprocket nut “a”: Clearance : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 2. Rear axle nut : 60 N⋅m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft) : Apply grease.

  • Page 426
    2D-15 Wheels and Tires: GSF1250A/SA Right Left “b” “ a” I718H1240026-07 1. Rear sprocket nut “a”: Clearance : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 2. Rear axle nut “b”: 0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in) : Apply grease. 3.
  • Page 427: Rear Wheel Assembly Removal And Installation

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-16 Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation 6) Remove the spacer (2) and collar (3). B718H12406008 Removal 1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand. CAUTION Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely. 2) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor by removing the mounting bolts.

  • Page 428: Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection

    2D-17 Wheels and Tires: 5) Install the rear wheel speed sensor mounting bolts. Wheel Axle (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Rear Wheel Speed Using a dial gauge, check the wheel axle for runout, If Sensor Removal and Installation in Section 4E the runout exceeds the limit, replace the axle shaft. (Page 4E-71)”.

  • Page 429: Rear Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal And Installation

    (1) from the rear wheel. I718H1240040-03 6) Remove the spacer. Installation CAUTION I718H1240052-02 The removed dust seals and bearings must be replaced with new ones. 1) Apply grease to the wheel bearings. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I649G1240019-02…

  • Page 430
    (B): 09924–84510 (Bearing installer set) CAUTION The sealed cover of the bearing must face outside. I718H1240042-01 4) Apply grease to the dust seal lip. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I649G1240030-02 Left Right I718H1240043-01 5) Install the rear wheel speed sensor rotor.
  • Page 431: Tire Removal And Installation

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-20 Tire Removal and Installation Installation B718H12406011 Removal CAUTION The most critical factor of a tubeless tire is the seal Do not reuse the valve which has been once between the wheel rim and the tire bead. For this removed.

  • Page 432: Wheel / Tire / Air Valve Inspection And Cleaning

    2D-21 Wheels and Tires: Wheel / Tire / Air Valve Inspection and Cleaning 3) Bounce the tire several times while rotating. This makes the tire bead expand outward to contact the B718H12406012 Refer to “Tire Removal and Installation (Page 2D-20)”. wheel, thereby facilitating air inflation.

  • Page 433: Air Valve Removal And Installation

    Wheels and Tires: 2D-22 Air Valve Installation Inspect the air valve for peeling and damage. If any Install the air valve in the reverse order of removal. Pay defect is found, replace the air valve with a new one. attention to the following points: Refer to “Air Valve Removal and Installation (Page 2D- •…

  • Page 434: Wheel Balance Check And Adjustment

    2D-23 Wheels and Tires: Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment 4) When installing the balancer weight to the wheel, set B718H12406014 the balancer weight on center rib of the wheel. Check and adjust the wheel balance in the following procedures: 1) Removal the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)”…

  • Page 435: Tightening Torque Specifications

    For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”. Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H12408001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 2D-10) /…

  • Page 436
    2D-25 Wheels and Tires: 09913–50121 09913–70210 Oil seal remover Bearing installer set (Page 2D-9) / (Page 2D- (Page 2D-11) / (Page 2D-19) 09921–20240 09924–84510 Bearing remover set Bearing installer set (Page 2D-9) / (Page 2D- (Page 2D-10) / (Page 2D-19) 09941–34513 Steering race installer (Page 2D-19)
  • Page 437
    Table of Contents 3- i Section 3 Driveline / Axle CONTENTS Precautions ……….3-1 Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal and Installation ……3A-4 Precautions…………. 3-1 Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection ….3A-5 Precautions for Driveline / Axle ……3-1 Sprocket Mounting Drum Dust Seal / Bearing Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft…
  • Page 438: Precautions

    • Lubricate the drive chain with a heavy weight motor oil. Wipe off any excess oil or chain lubricant. Do not use any oil sold commercially as “drive chain oil”. Such oil can damage the O-rings. • The standard drive chain is RK GB50GSVZ3. Suzuki recommends to use this standard drive chain as a replacement.

  • Page 439: Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft

    Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-1 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft Driveline / Axle Diagnostic Information and Procedures Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom Diagnosis B718H13104001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Noisy Drive Chain Worn sprocket.

  • Page 440: Engine Sprocket Removal And Installation

    3A-2 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation 5) Remove the speed sensor (3). B718H13106002 6) Remove the engine sprocket inner cover (4) along with the clutch release cylinder. Removal 1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand. 2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

  • Page 441
    Speed sensor rotor bolt (b): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft) • Before installing the engine sprocket inner cover, apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the clutch push rod. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1310023-05 12) Remove the engine sprocket (10).
  • Page 442: Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal And Installation

    • Apply grease to the contacting surface between the rear sprocket (1) from its mounting drum (2). rear wheel hub and the mounting drum. 3) Draw out the mounting drum (2) from the wheel hub. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1310014-03 I718H1310036-01…

  • Page 443: Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection

    Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-5 • Tighten the rear sprocket nuts to the specified torque. Bearing Inspect the play of the sprocket mounting drum bearings Tightening torque by hand while they are in the wheel and drum. Rotate Rear sprocket nut (a): 60 N·m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb- the inner race by hand to inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation.

  • Page 444: Sprocket Mounting Drum Dust Seal / Bearing Removal And Installation

    Refer to “Rear Sprocket / 1) Apply grease to the bearing before installing. Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal and : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER Installation (Page 3A-4)”. GREASE A or equivalent) 2) Remove the retainer (1).

  • Page 445: Drive Chain Replacement

    Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-7 4) Install the rear sprocket mounting drum. NOTE 5) Install the rear sprocket mounting drum assembly to The tip of pin remover (1) should be rear wheel hub. Refer to “Rear Sprocket / Rear positioned inside “a”…

  • Page 446
    3A-8 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 6) Remove the joint pin (9) of the other side of joint Joint plate installation plate. 1) Set up the special tool as shown in the illustration. CAUTION Never reuse joint pins, O-rings and plates. (C50) I718H1310027-03 1.
  • Page 447
    Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-9 5) Set the drive chain on the tool as illustrated and turn Joint pin staking in the adjuster bolt (5) to secure the wedge holder 1) Set up the special tool as shown in the illustration. and wedge pin (4).
  • Page 448: Specifications

    3A-10 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3) Adjust the drive chain slack, after connecting it. Refer to “Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”. “a” I649G1310036-03 Specifications Service Data B718H13107001 Drive Chain Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit…

  • Page 449: Special Tools And Equipment

    Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-11 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H13108001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 3A-3) / (Page 3A- equivalent 4) /…

  • Page 450
    3A-12 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:…
  • Page 451
    Table of Contents 4- i Section 4 Brake CONTENTS Precautions ……….4-1 Front Brakes ……….4B-1 Precautions…………. 4-1 Repair Instructions ……….4B-1 Precautions for Brake System ……4-1 Front Brake Components ……..4B-1 Brake Fluid Information ……… 4-1 Front Brake Pad Inspection………4B-2 Front Brake Pad Replacement……4B-2 Brake Control System and Diagnosis …
  • Page 452
    4-ii Table of Contents ABS Control Unit Description ……4E-2 DTC “43” (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor Hydraulic Unit (HU) Description ……4E-4 Circuit Short (F)……….4E-53 Self-diagnosis Function and ABS Indicator DTC “44” (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor Light Description ……….4E-5 Signal Malfunction (R)……..4E-55 Fail-safe Function Description……
  • Page 453: Precautions

    Precautions: Precautions Brake Precautions Precautions for Brake System B718H14000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”. Brake Fluid Information B718H14000002 WARNING • This brake system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid, such as silicone-based or petroleum-based.

  • Page 454: Brake Control System And Diagnosis

    4A-1 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Brake Control System and Diagnosis Brake Schematic and Routing Diagram Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram B718H14102001 GSF1250 (c ) I718H1410001-04 1. Front brake hose No.1 6: Clamp : Insert the clamp to the hole of the front fender fully.

  • Page 455
    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-2 GSF1250S I718H1410002-05 1. Front brake hose No.1 6: Clamp : Insert the clamp to the hole of the front fender fully. 2. Front brake hose No.2 7: Front brake hose No.1 : Pass the front brake hose No.1 to the brake hose guide. 3: Stopper : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.
  • Page 456
    4A-3 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: GSF1250A “A” “B” “C” 42 49 I718H1410003-07 1. Brake hose No.1 (ABS) “A”: Clamp white paint part of brake hose. 2. Brake hose No.2 (ABS) “B”: White paint 3. Rubber cushion “C”: Yellow paint 4.
  • Page 457
    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-4 GSF1250SA “A” “B” “C” I718H1410004-05 1. Brake hose No.1 (ABS) 9. Clamp :After positioning the clamp with the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt. 2. Brake hose No.2 (ABS) 10. Clamp :Insert the clamp to the hole of the fender fully. 3.
  • Page 458: Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram

    4A-5 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram B718H14102002 GSF1250/S “B” “A” I718H1410062-03 1. Brake hose clamp “B”: White paint : Brake hose clamp ends should face forward. 2. Brake hose clamp : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : Brake hose clamp ends should face backward.

  • Page 459
    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-6 GSF1250A/SA “B” “A” I718H1410005-03 1. Brake hose clamp “B” : White paint : Brake hose clamp ends should face forward. 2. Brake hose clamp : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : Brake hose clamp ends should face backward. 3: Stopper : 6 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) : After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.
  • Page 460: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    4A-7 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Diagnostic Information and Procedures Brake Symptom Diagnosis B718H14104001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Insufficient brake power Leakage of brake fluid from hydraulic Repair or replace. system. Worn pads and disc. Replace. Oil adhesion on friction surface of pads. Clean disc and pads. Air in hydraulic system.

  • Page 461: Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection

    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-8 Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection and 2) Inspect the switch for continuity with a tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the front brake Adjustment light switch with a new one. Refer to “Front Brake B718H14106004 Check the rear brake light switch so that the brake light Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Disassembly and…

  • Page 462
    4A-9 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Front Brake 5) Close the air bleeder valve, pump and squeeze the lever, and open the valve. 1) Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the top of the inspection window. Place the reservoir cap to 6) Repeat this process until the fluid flowing into the prevent dirt from entering.
  • Page 463: Brake Fluid Replacement

    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-10 Brake Fluid Replacement Rear Brake Bleed air from the rear brake system as the same B718H14106008 CAUTION manner of front brake. Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts NOTE chemically with paint, plastic, rubber The only difference of bleeding operation materials, etc.

  • Page 464
    4A-11 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 7) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect the clear Rear Brake hose. 1) Place the motorcycle on a level surface. Tightening torque 2) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D Air bleeder valve (Front brake) (a): 7.5 N·m (0.75 (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 465: Front Brake Hose Removal And Installation

    Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation The seal washers should be replaced with the B718H14106009 new ones to prevent fluid leakage. GSF1250/S Removal 1) Install the front brake hose as shown in the front 1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement brake hose routing diagram.

  • Page 466: Rear Brake Hose Removal And Installation

    4A-13 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation GSF1250A/SA B718H14106019 Removal GSF1250/S 1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Removal Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D 1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 467: Front Brake Master Cylinder Components

    3) Place a rag underneath the brake hose union bolt (2) on the master cylinder to catch any spilt brake fluid. 4) Remove the brake hose union bolt (2) and disconnect the brake hose. I718H1410048-04 5) Remove the right rear view mirror. (GSF1250/A)

  • Page 468: Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Disassembly And Assembly

    4A-15 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Installation • After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, Install the front brake master cylinder in the reverse tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: CAUTION •…

  • Page 469
    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-16 2) Remove the reservoir cap (3), plate (4) and Assembly diaphragm (5). Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: CAUTION • Wash the master cylinder components with new brake fluid before reassembly.
  • Page 470: Front Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

    • Apply grease to the contact point between piston and Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever brake lever. Disassembly and Assembly (Page 4A-15)”. : Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone Master Cylinder Grease or equivalent) Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches or other damage.

  • Page 471: Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components

    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-18 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components B718H14106015 I649G1410029-06 1. Reservoir tank 4. Master cylinder : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) : Apply brake fluid. 2. Brake hose union bolt 5. Piston/Cup set : 18 N⋅m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft) : Do not reuse.

  • Page 472: Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly And Assembly

    4A-19 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4) Place a rag underneath the brake hose union bolt (2) • Adjust the brake pedal height. Refer to “Brake System on the master cylinder to catch any spilt brake fluid. Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-17)”. 5) Remove the brake hose union bolt (2) and Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly and disconnect the brake hose.

  • Page 473: Rear Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

    Master Cylinder Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches or other damage. I649G1410036-02 • Apply grease to the push rod end. : Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone Grease or equivalent) I649G1410038-02 Piston Inspect the piston surface for any scratches or other damage.

  • Page 474: Specifications

    4A-21 Brake Control System and Diagnosis: Specifications Service Data B718H14107001 Brake Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit Rear brake pedal height 50 – 60 (2.0 – 2.4) — Front 14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529) — Master cylinder bore Rear 14.000 –…

  • Page 475: Special Tools And Equipment

    Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-22 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H14108001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Brake fluid DOT 4 — (Page 4A-10) / (Page 4A-11) / (Page 4A-16) / (Page 4A-20) Grease SUZUKI Silicone Grease or P/No.: 99000–25100…

  • Page 476: Front Brakes

    4B-1 Front Brakes: Front Brakes Brake Repair Instructions Front Brake Components B718H14206001 I649G1420001-05 1. O-ring 6. Front brake disc : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 2. Piston seal : 7.5 N⋅m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft) : Apply thread lock to thread part. 3.

  • Page 477: Front Brake Pad Inspection

    Front Brakes: 4B-2 Front Brake Pad Inspection 2) Remove the brake pads (2) by removing the pad B718H14206002 mounting pin (3). The extent of brake pads wear can be checked by observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pads. When NOTE the wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the When removing the pads, push the piston all…

  • Page 478: Front Brake Caliper Removal And Installation

    4B-3 Front Brakes: 5) Tighten the pad mounting pin to the specified torque. 3) Remove the brake caliper by removing the caliper mounting bolts (2). Tightening torque Front brake pad mounting pin (a): 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft) I718H1420014-01 Installation I718H1420013-01 Install the brake caliper in the reverse order of removal.

  • Page 479: Front Brake Caliper Disassembly And Assembly

    Front Brakes: 4B-4 • Check the brake fluid leakage and brake operation. 3) Remove the O-ring. WARNING Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe running and discolor painted surfaces. Check the brake hose and hose joints for cracks and fluid leakage. Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly B718H14206005 Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation…

  • Page 480
    4B-5 Front Brakes: Assembly • Apply the brake fluid to piston seals (1) and dust seals Assemble the caliper in the reverse order of (2). disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: CAUTION • Wash the caliper bores and pistons with specified Replace the piston seals (1) and dust seals brake fluid.
  • Page 481: Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

    Front Brakes: 4B-6 • Temporarily tighten the brake caliper housing bolts. Brake Caliper Piston Inspect the brake caliper piston surface for any CAUTION scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the piston with a new one. After installing the brake caliper to the front fork, tighten the brake caliper housing bolts to the specified torque.

  • Page 482: Front Brake Disc Removal And Installation

    4B-7 Front Brakes: Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation Front Brake Disc Inspection B718H14206007 B718H14206008 Brake Disc Thickness Removal Check the brake disc for damage or cracks and measure the thickness using the micrometer. 1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Replace the brake disc if the thickness is less than the Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section service limit or if defect is found.

  • Page 483: Specifications

    Front Brakes: 4B-8 Specifications Service Data B718H14207001 Brake Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Limit Brake disc thickness Front 4.8 – 5.2 (0.189 – 0.205) 4.5 (0.18) Brake disc runout — 0.30 (0.012) Leading 27.050 – 27.126 (1.0650 – 1.0680) — Brake caliper cylinder bore Front Trailing…

  • Page 484: Special Tools And Equipment

    4B-9 Front Brakes: Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H14208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Brake fluid DOT 4 — (Page 4B-5) / (Page 4B- Thread lock cement Thread Lock Cement Super 1360 or P/No.: 99000–32130 (Page 4B-7)

  • Page 485: Rear Brakes

    Rear Brakes: 4C-1 Rear Brakes Brake Repair Instructions Rear Brake Components B718H14306001 I649G1430001-05 1. Rear caliper bracket : 6.0 N⋅m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft) : Apply silicone grease to sliding surface. 2. Piston : 27 N⋅m (2.7 kgf-m, 19.5 lb-ft) : Apply thread lock to thread part.

  • Page 486: Rear Brake Pad Inspection

    4C-2 Rear Brakes: Rear Brake Pad Inspection 2) Loosen the pad mounting pin (2). B718H14306002 3) Remove the caliper mounting bolt (3). The extent of brake pads wear can be checked by observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pads. When CAUTION the wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the Do not operate the brake pedal while…

  • Page 487
    Rear Brakes: 4C-3 5) Clean up the caliper, especially around the caliper 8) Tighten the caliper mounting bolt (7) and pad piston. mounting pin (8) to the specified torque. 6) Assemble the new brake pad (4), insulator (5) and Tightening torque shim (6).
  • Page 488: Rear Brake Caliper Removal And Installation

    4C-4 Rear Brakes: Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation • After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, B718H14306004 tighten the union bolt (2) to the specified torque. Removal CAUTION 1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement The seal washers should be replaced with the in Section 4A (Page 4A-10)”.

  • Page 489
    Rear Brakes: 4C-5 2) Remove the pad spring (3). 6) Remove the dust seal (7) and piston seal (8). I649G1430014-02 I649G1430017-02 3) Remove the spacer (4) and rubber boot (5) from the Assembly caliper. Assemble the caliper in the reverse order of 4) Remove the slide pin (6).
  • Page 490: Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

    Brake Caliper Piston • Apply grease to the inside of the boot. Inspect the brake caliper piston surface for any : Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the piston with a new one.

  • Page 491: Rear Brake Disc Removal And Installation

    Rear Brakes: 4C-7 Boot and Spacer Installation Inspect the boots and spacer for damage and wear. If Install the rear brake disc in the reverse order of any defects are found, replace them with new ones. removal. Pay attention to the following points: •…

  • Page 492: Specifications

    4C-8 Rear Brakes: Brake Disc Runout 1) Dismount the rear brake caliper. Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4C- 4)”. 2) Measure the runout using the dial gauge. Replace the disc if the runout exceeds the service limit.

  • Page 493: Special Tools And Equipment

    Rear Brakes: 4C-9 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H14308001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Brake fluid DOT 4 — (Page 4C-5) / (Page 4C- Grease SUZUKI Silicone Grease or P/No.: 99000–25100 (Page 4C-6) / (Page 4C-…

  • Page 494: Abs

    4E-1 ABS: Brake Precautions Precautions for ABS • Be sure to route the brake hoses correctly. B718H14500001 • The ABS does not shorten the motorcycle’s braking Refer to “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in distance. When riding down slopes or on wet or Section 00 (Page 00-2)”.

  • Page 495: Abs Control Unit Description

    ABS: 4E-2 ABS Control Unit Description B718H14501002 ABS control unit (1) calculates signals input from each one of front and rear wheel speed sensors, monitors the slipping conditions of the wheels and, at the same time, sends control signal to Hydraulic Unit (HU) (2). This ABS control unit/HU can not be disassembled.

  • Page 496
    4E-3 ABS: ABS Control Unit Calculating Process The ABS controls and its calculations, in addition to the self-diagnosing and the fail-safe processes, occur during the ABS control unit calculating process. ABS control is performed in one cycle every 10/1 000 seconds. In addition, if a malfunction is detected by the self-diagnosis function, the brake stops being controlled by the ABS and a diagnostic trouble code is stored.
  • Page 497: Hydraulic Unit (Hu) Description

    ABS: 4E-4 Hydraulic Unit (HU) Description B718H14501003 The hydraulic unit operates the solenoid valves based upon the signal which is output from the ABS control unit. The brake fluid pressure is then adjusted accordingly. The hydraulic unit controls the front and rear brake systems individually by operating separate components for the front and the rear, except for the pump drive motor, which is shared by both systems.

  • Page 498: Self-Diagnosis Function And Abs Indicator Light Description

    4E-5 ABS: Self-diagnosis Function and ABS Indicator • If an ABS malfunction has occurred, the ABS indicator light keeps lighting up. Light Description B718H14501006 The ABS control unit performs the self-diagnosis and can store any electronically detected malfunctions as diagnostic trouble codes. If a malfunction has occurred, the indicator light lights up to inform the rider of the malfunction.

  • Page 499: Fail-Safe Function Description

    ABS: 4E-6 Stored DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) As for the diagnostic trouble code, the code of the first malfunction occurred during one ignition ON period will be stored. Pay attention to the fact that even though there may occur several malfunctions in one ON-period, only one code will be stored.

  • Page 500: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    4E-7 ABS: Schematic and Routing Diagram ABS Wiring Diagram B718H14502001 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. I718H1450020-06…

  • Page 501: Abs Unit Diagram

    ABS: 4E-8 ABS Unit Diagram B718H14502002 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. I718H1450021-04 “A”: Rear brake solenoid OUT “C”: Front brake solenoid OUT “E”: Fail safe (+) B “G”: Motor (+) B “B”: Rear brake solenoid IN “D”: Front brake solenoid IN “F”: Motor relay (+) B…

  • Page 502: Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

    4E-9 ABS: Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram B718H14502003 GSF1250A “B” “C” “D” “E” “I” “F” “H” “A” “G” I718H1450022-03 1. Clamp 7: Clamp “E”: Clamp the sensor lead wire sleeve with the brake : Clamp the sensor lead wire at the white marking. hose.

  • Page 503
    ABS: 4E-10 GSF1250SA “B” “C” “D” “E” “I” “F” “H” “A” “G” I718H1450023-03 1. Clamp 7: Clamp “E”: Clamp the sensor lead wire sleeve with the brake : Clamp the sensor lead wire at the white marking. hose. 2. Guide 8.
  • Page 504: Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

    4E-11 ABS: Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram B718H14502004 “G” “ a ” “C” “B” “F” “E” “A” “D” I718H1450118-03 1. Rear wheel speed sensor “A”: Outside mark “E”: Pass through the sensor lead wire on the brake hose. 2. Brake hose No.2 “B”: After the clamp has contacted to the “F”: Clamp the sensor lead wire upper side of brake hose.

  • Page 505: Component Location

    ABS: 4E-12 Component Location ABS Components Location B718H14503001 I718H1450119-02 1. ABS control unit/HU 4. Front wheel speed sensor 7. Rear wheel speed sensor rotor 2. Mode select coupler 5. Front wheel speed sensor rotor 3. SDS coupler 6. Rear wheel speed sensor…

  • Page 506: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    4E-13 ABS: Diagnostic Information and Procedures ABS Troubleshooting 4) and inspect the wiring. Refer to “ABS Wiring B718H14504001 Diagram (Page 4E-7)” and “ABS Unit Diagram Many of the ABS malfunction diagnosing operations are (Page 4E-8)”. performed by checking the wiring continuity. Quick and accurate detection of malfunctions within the complex CAUTION circuitry assures the proper operation of the ABS.

  • Page 507
    ABS: 4E-14 EXAMPLE: CUSTOMER PROBLEM INSPECTION FORM User name: Model: VIN: Date of issue: Date Reg. Date of problem: Mileage: PROBLEM SYMPTOMS ABS operation Past malfunctions and repairs ABS does not work ABS works so often with Too long stopping distance Other CONDITION WHEN MALFUNCTION OCCURED ABS indicator light…
  • Page 508: Pre-Diagnosis Inspection

    55ZR17M/C (73W) for rear. The use of tires other than those specified may cause instability. It is highly recommended to use a SUZUKI Genuine Tire. • Replace the tire as a set, otherwise the DTC “25” (C1625) may be stored.

  • Page 509
    ABS: 4E-16 ABS Component ABS control unit/HU ground wire inspection Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. inspection 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal Inspect the clearance between the wheel speed sensor and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.
  • Page 510: Abs Indicator Light Inspection

    4E-17 ABS: 7) Check for continuity between “24” (B/W) at the coupler and the battery (–) terminal, also “25” (B/W) at the coupler and the battery (–) terminal. Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication Continuity ( ABS control unit coupler (Harness end) I718H1450125-01 I718H1450030-03…

  • Page 511
    ABS: 4E-18 Step Action (The ABS indicator light does not light up) Go to Step 4. Replace the ignition fuse. 1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 2) Remove the fuse box (1) by removing the mounting bolt. I718H1450034-01 3) Open the fuse box and inspect the ignition fuse (2).
  • Page 512
    4E-19 ABS: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 5. Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition 2) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler. Refer to “ABS or ground wire) Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E- 70)”.
  • Page 513
    ABS: 4E-20 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Replace the ABS Inspect the wire control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty ground 2) Check for continuity between “24” (B/W) at the coupler wire) and body ground, also “25” (B/W) at the coupler and body ground.
  • Page 514
    4E-21 ABS: Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 9. Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition 2) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler. Refer to “ABS or ground wire) Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E- 70)”…
  • Page 515
    ABS: 4E-22 Step Action 10 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Replace the ABS Inspect the wire control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty mode 2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts select switch wire) Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 3) Short the mode select coupler terminals (O –…
  • Page 516: Dtc (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output

    4E-23 ABS: DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output 4) Switch the special tool to ON. B718H14504021 NOTE • Even through the ABS is operating correctly, a DTC is memorized in any of the following conditions. – If the motorcycle is put on its centerstand, the engine is started and only the rear wheel is rotated.

  • Page 517
    ABS: 4E-24 Understanding the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) A two-digit DTC is shown through the flashing pattern of the ABS indicator light. A number between 1 and 9 is represented by the number of times that the ABS indicator light lights up in interval of 0.4 seconds and the separation between the tens and ones are indicated by the light staying off for 1.6 seconds.
  • Page 518: Dtc (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting

    4E-25 ABS: 1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior 3) Read the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and show Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D data when trouble (displaying data at the time of (Page 9D-6)”. DTC) according to instructions displayed on SDS. 2) Set up the SDS tool.

  • Page 519
    ABS: 4E-26 4) In the DTC deletion mode, switch the ABS test 3) While the DTCs are being output, set the special tool to OFF. switch from OFF to ON three times, each time leaving it at ON for more than 1 second. CAUTION The DTC deletion mode starts 12.5 seconds after the switch is set to OFF.
  • Page 520
    4E-27 ABS: Use of SDS 5) Click the “DTC inspection” button (2). 1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 2) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition switch and turn ON again. 3) Set up the SDS tool.
  • Page 521
    ABS: 4E-28 8) Follow the displayed instructions. 9) Check that both “Current DTC” (4) and “Past DTC” (5) are deleted (NIL). I705H1110006-01 I718H1450057-01 10) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF. 11) Disconnect the SDS tool and install the left frame cover.
  • Page 522: Sds Check

    4E-29 ABS: SDS Check B718H14504023 Using SDS, take the sample of data from the new motorcycle and at the time of periodic maintenance at your dealer. Save the data in the computer or by printing and filing the hard copies. The saved or filed data are useful for troubleshooting as they can be compared periodically with changes over time or failure conditions of the motorcycle.

  • Page 523: Active Control Inspection

    ABS: 4E-30 Active Control Inspection 4) Click “Active control” (2). B718H14504024 1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.) 3) Click “ABS”…

  • Page 524
    4E-31 ABS: 6) Click “Next” according to the screen indication. Return Next Cancel Help Return Next Cancel Help I718H1450060-02 NOTE Skip this screen as this vehicle is not equipped with parking brake. Return Next Cancel Help I718H1450121-01…
  • Page 525
    ABS: 4E-32 NOTE • If the front wheel is selected, place the motorcycle on the center stand and lift the front wheel off the ground using a jack. • Two operators are needed in this work; One should apply a rotational force to the front wheel. Return Next Cancel…
  • Page 526
    4E-33 ABS: Return Finish Cancel Help I718H1450062-01 NOTE • Inspect the rear brake in the same manner of front brake. • If the ABS does not function, the cause may lie in the ABS control unit/HU. • In checking the rear brake at the time of pressure reduction drive (4/7), “brake lever” appears on the screen.
  • Page 527: Dtc Table

    ABS: 4E-34 DTC Table B718H14504002 Indicator Malfunction cause Reference status None Normal ON * — Refer to “DTC “13” (C1613): Wheel 13 (C1613) Wheel speed sensor rotor malfunction (F) Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction (F) (Page 4E-35)”. Refer to “DTC “14” (C1614): Wheel 14 (C1614) Wheel speed sensor rotor malfunction (R) Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction…

  • Page 528: Dtc «13» (C1613): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction

    4E-35 ABS: CAUTION When disconnecting couplers and turning the ignition switch ON, disconnect the ABS control unit coupler in order to prevent a DTC from being stored. Each time a resistance is measured, the ignition switch should be set to OFF. DTC “13”…

  • Page 529
    ABS: 4E-36 Step Action 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted Go to Step 4. Tighten the mounting securely. bolts or replace the bracket if necessary. I718H1450066-01 Is the sensor mounted securely? 1) Inspect the front tire and wheel. Replace the ABS Adjust or replace the control unit/HU.
  • Page 530: Dtc «14» (C1614): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction

    4E-37 ABS: DTC “14” (C1614): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction (R) B718H14504004 Possible Cause • Rear wheel speed sensor rotor distortion • Faulty rear wheel speed sensor or wiring discontinuity, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Inspect the clearance between the rear wheel speed Go to Step 2.

  • Page 531
    ABS: 4E-38 Step Action 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted Go to Step 4. Tighten the mounting securely. bolts or replace the bracket if necessary. I718H1450068-01 Is the sensor mounted securely? 1) Inspect the rear tire and wheel. Replace the ABS Adjust or replace the control unit/HU.
  • Page 532: Dtc «22» (C1622): Abs Actuator Circuit Malfunction

    4E-39 ABS: DTC “22” (C1622): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction (F) B718H14504005 Possible Cause • Wire harness discontinuity • Front wheel locking, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Raise the front wheel off the ground and support the Inspect the front brake Go to step 2.

  • Page 533
    ABS: 4E-40 Step Action 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted Replace the ABS Tighten the mounting securely. control unit/HU. bolts or replace the bracket if necessary. I718H1450066-01 Is the sensor mounted securely?
  • Page 534: Dtc «23» (C1623): Abs Actuator Circuit Malfunction

    4E-41 ABS: DTC “23” (C1623): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction (R) B718H14504006 Possible Cause • Wire harness discontinuity • Rear wheel locking, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Support the motorcycle with its center stand. Inspect the rear brake Go to step 2. master cylinder and the 2) Inspect the dragging of the rear brake.

  • Page 535
    ABS: 4E-42 Step Action 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted Replace the ABS Tighten the mounting securely. control unit/HU. bolts or replace the bracket if necessary. I718H1450068-01 Is the sensor mounted securely?
  • Page 536: Dtc «25» (C1625): Wheel Speed Sensor Related Malfunction

    4E-43 ABS: DTC “25” (C1625): Wheel Speed Sensor Related Malfunction B718H14504007 Possible Cause • Incorrect tire size, poor tire pressure • Deformed wheel, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Check that the specified tires are installed. Go to Step 2. Use the specified tires. Tire type and size Front: DUNLOP D218FT 120/70ZR17M/C (58W) Rear: DUNLOP D218N 180/55ZR17M/C (73W)

  • Page 537
    ABS: 4E-44 Step Action 1) Inspect both wheel speed sensor rotors for damage and Go to Step 4. Clean or replace the check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor rotor. openings. I718H1450064-01 Are the rotors OK? 1) Inspect the clearances of the front and rear wheel speed Replace the ABS Adjust the clearance.
  • Page 538: Dtc «35» (C1635): Abs Motor Malfunction

    4E-45 ABS: DTC “35” (C1635): ABS Motor Malfunction B718H14504008 Possible Cause • Faulty HU motor • Faulty wiring, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Inspect if the pump motor makes turning noise by setting •…

  • Page 539
    ABS: 4E-46 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Replace the ABS Inspect the wire control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty motor 2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts power supply or ground Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. wire) 3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt.
  • Page 540: Dtc «41» (C1641): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

    4E-47 ABS: DTC “41” (C1641): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction (F) B718H14504009 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Inspect the clearance between the front wheel speed Go to Step 2.

  • Page 541
    ABS: 4E-48 Step Action 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted Go to DTC “42” Tighten the mounting securely. (C1642). (Refer to “DTC bolts or replace the “42” (C1642): Wheel bracket if necessary. Speed Sensor Circuit Open (F) (Page 4E- 49)”.) I718H1450066-01 Is the sensor mounted securely?
  • Page 542: Dtc «42» (C1642): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open

    4E-49 ABS: DTC “42” (C1642): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open (F) B718H14504010 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action…

  • Page 543
    ABS: 4E-50 Step Action 1) Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor coupler. Inspect the wire Faulty front wheel harness. (Faulty B/R speed sensor 2) Measure the resistance between “A” (Black) and ground wire) at the front wheel speed sensor coupler. Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication…
  • Page 544
    4E-51 ABS: Step Action 1) Measure the resistance between “B” (White) and ground Inspect the wire Faulty front wheel at the front wheel speed sensor coupler. harness. (Faulty W/R speed sensor wire) Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication Resistance (Ω) Normal value (“B”…
  • Page 545
    ABS: 4E-52 Step Action 1) Check for continuity between “3” (W/R) on the ABS Go to Step 7. Inspect the wire control unit coupler and “D” (W/R) on the front wheel harness. (Faulty W/R speed sensor coupler. wire) Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) (B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set) Tester knob indication…
  • Page 546: Dtc «43» (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short

    4E-53 ABS: DTC “43” (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short (F) B718H14504011 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action…

  • Page 547
    ABS: 4E-54 Step Action 1) Check for continuity between “2” (B/Y) and “3” (W/R) at • Inspect the wire Go to Step 3. the coupler. harness. (Faulty sensor wire) Special tool • Faulty front wheel (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) speed sensor Tester knob indication Continuity (…
  • Page 548: Dtc «44» (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

    4E-55 ABS: DTC “44” (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction (R) B718H14504012 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Inspect the clearance between the rear wheel speed Go to Step 2.

  • Page 549
    ABS: 4E-56 Step Action 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted Go to DTC “45” Tighten the mounting securely. (C1645). (Refer to “DTC bolts or replace the “45” (C1645): Wheel bracket if necessary. Speed Sensor Circuit Open (R) (Page 4E- 57)”.) I718H1450068-01 Is the sensor mounted securely?
  • Page 550: Dtc «45» (C1645): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open

    4E-57 ABS: DTC “45” (C1645): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open (R) B718H14504013 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action…

  • Page 551
    ABS: 4E-58 Step Action 1) Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor coupler. Inspect the wire Replace the rear wheel harness. (Faulty B/Y speed sensor. 2) Measure the resistance between “A” (Black) and ground wire) at the rear wheel speed sensor coupler. Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication…
  • Page 552
    4E-59 ABS: Step Action 1) Measure the resistance between “B” (White) and ground Inspect the wire Replace the rear wheel at the rear wheel speed sensor coupler. harness. (Faulty W/Y speed sensor. wire) Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Tester knob indication Resistance (Ω) Normal value (“B”…
  • Page 553
    ABS: 4E-60 Step Action 1) Check the continuity between “18” (W/Y) on the ABS Go to Step 7. Inspect the wire control unit coupler and “D” (W/Y) on the rear wheel harness. (Faulty W/Y speed sensor coupler. wire) Special tool (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) (B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set) Tester knob indication…
  • Page 554: Dtc «46» (C1646): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short

    4E-61 ABS: DTC “46” (C1646): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short (R) B718H14504014 Possible Cause • Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler • Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action…

  • Page 555
    ABS: 4E-62 Step Action 1) Check for continuity between “12” (B/R) and “18” (W/Y) • Inspect the wire Go to Step 3. at the coupler. harness. (Faulty sensor wire) Special tool • Faulty wheel speed (A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) sensor Tester knob indication Continuity (…
  • Page 556: Dtc «47» (C1647): Supply Voltage (Increased)

    4E-63 ABS: DTC “47” (C1647): Supply Voltage (Increased) B718H14504015 Possible Cause • Faulty regulator/rectifier • Faulty ABS control unit • Faulty wire harness, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Go to Step 2.

  • Page 557
    ABS: 4E-64 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Replace the ABS Inspect the wire control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty ignition 2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts or ground wire) Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt.
  • Page 558: Dtc «48» (C1648): Supply Voltage (Decreased)

    4E-65 ABS: DTC “48” (C1648): Supply Voltage (Decreased) B718H14504016 Possible Cause • Faulty generator or regulator/rectifier • Faulty ABS control unit • Faulty wire harness, etc. Wiring Diagram Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”. Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Go to Step 2.

  • Page 559
    ABS: 4E-66 Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Replace the ABS Inspect the wire control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty ignition 2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts or ground wire) Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt.
  • Page 560: Dtc «55» (C1655): Abs Control Unit Malfunction

    4E-67 ABS: DTC “55” (C1655): ABS Control Unit Malfunction B718H14504017 Possible Cause Faulty ABS control unit Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Inspect the clearances of the front and rear wheel speed Go to Step 2. Adjust the clearance. sensor – sensor rotor using the thickness gauge. Special tool (A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge) (B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

  • Page 561
    ABS: 4E-68 Step Action 1) Check that the front and rear wheel speed sensors are Go to Step 4. Tighten the mounting mounted securely. bolts or replace the bracket if necessary. I718H1450097-01 Are the sensors mounted securely? 1) Delete DTCs and repeat the code output procedure. Replace the ABS Intermittent trouble.
  • Page 562: Dtc «61» (C1661): Abs Solenoid Malfunction

    4E-69 ABS: DTC “61” (C1661): ABS Solenoid Malfunction B718H14504018 Possible Cause Faulty solenoid valve or relay Troubleshooting Step Action 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Go to Step 2. Replace the ABS solenoid valve fuse. 2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 563: Repair Instructions

    ABS: 4E-70 Step Action 1) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor Replace the ABS Inspect the wire contacts. control unit/HU. harness. (Faulty If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler. solenoid or ground wire) 2) Measure the voltage between “8” (R/Bl) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

  • Page 564: Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal And Installation

    4E-71 ABS: Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor Installation Inspection (Page 4E-74)”. B718H14506004 CAUTION Install the front wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: •…

  • Page 565: Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal And Installation

    ABS: 4E-72 3) Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor coupler (1). • Check the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge Special tool (A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge) (B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge) Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance 0.3 –…

  • Page 566: Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal And Installation

    4E-73 ABS: Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor Installation Inspection (Page 4E-74)”. B718H14506007 CAUTION Install the front wheel speed sensor rotor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points: •…

  • Page 567: Wheel Speed Sensor And Sensor Rotor Inspection

    ABS: 4E-74 • Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear Wheel Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D 1) Raise the wheel off the ground and support the (Page 2D-16)”. motorcycle with a jack or wooden block. •…

  • Page 568
    4E-75 ABS: 1) Remove the seat and frame covers. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 2) Remove the battery (1). Refer to “Battery Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-12)”. 3) Remove the starter relay (2) from the battery case. 4) Remove the cooling fan relay (3) and fuel pump relay (4) from the battery case.
  • Page 569: Specifications

    ABS: 4E-76 Specifications Tightening Torque Specifications B718H14507001 Tightening torque Fastening part Note N⋅m kgf-m lb-ft Brake pipe flare nut 11.5 (Page 4E-75) Reference: For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”.

  • Page 570
    4E-77 ABS: 09900–25008 09900–25009 Multi-circuit tester set Needle pointed probe set (Page 4E-15) / (Page 4E-49) / (Page 4E-17) / (Page 4E-50) / (Page 4E-19) / (Page 4E-51) / (Page 4E-19) / (Page 4E-52) / (Page 4E-20) / (Page 4E-52) / (Page 4E-21) / (Page 4E-57) / (Page 4E-21) /…
  • Page 571
    Table of Contents 5- i Section 5 Transmission / Transaxle CONTENTS Precautions ……….5-1 Clutch …………5C-1 Precautions…………. 5-1 Precautions…………5C-1 Precautions for Transmission / Transaxle….. 5-1 Precautions for Clutch System……5C-1 Clutch Fluid (Brake Fluid) Information….5C-1 Manual Transmission……5B-1 Schematic and Routing Diagram ……5C-2 Diagnostic Information and Procedures….5B-1 Clutch Hose Routing Diagram……5C-2 Manual Transmission Symptom Diagnosis ..
  • Page 572: Precautions

    5-1 Precautions: Precautions Transmission / Transaxle Precautions Precautions for Transmission / Transaxle B718H15000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

  • Page 573: Manual Transmission

    Manual Transmission: 5B-1 Manual Transmission Transmission / Transaxle Diagnostic Information and Procedures Manual Transmission Symptom Diagnosis B718H15204001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine is noisy (Noise Worn or rubbing gear. Replace. seems to come from the Worn countershaft spline. Replace countershaft.

  • Page 574: Repair Instructions

    5B-2 Manual Transmission: Repair Instructions Transmission Components B718H15206001 I718H1520076-02 1. 1st driven gear 9. 5th drive gear 17. Gearshift cam plate 2. 5th driven gear 10. 3rd/4th drive gear 18. Gear position switch 3. 4th driven gear 11. 6th drive gear 19.

  • Page 575: Transmission Removal

    Manual Transmission: 5B-3 Transmission Removal 2) Remove the bearing pin (2). B718H15206002 NOTE 1) Remove the engine assembly from the frame. Refer to “Engine Assembly Removal in Section 1D Do not lose the bearing pin (2). (Page 1D-17)”. 2) Disassemble the engine top side (1). Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-24)”.

  • Page 576
    5B-4 Manual Transmission: 4) Remove the No.3 gearshift fork (5). 2) Remove the countershaft bearing (3) with the special tool. Special tool (A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) I718H1520009-01 Countershaft Assembly 1) Remove the bearing retainer (1). I718H1520013-01 3) Remove the snap ring (4). Special tool : 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers) I718H1520010-01…
  • Page 577: Transmission Installation

    (A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) Pay attention to the following points: • Apply grease to the oil seal lip. Bearing / Oil Seal : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER CAUTION GREASE A or equivalent) Replace the removed oil seal, bearings and snap ring with new ones.

  • Page 578
    • Apply grease to the O-rings. • Install the No.3 gearshift fork (1) as shown. CAUTION Replace the O-rings (1) with new ones. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1520022-03 • Install the gearshift cam (2) with the bearing fitted.
  • Page 579
    Manual Transmission: 5B-7 • Apply thread lock to the screws and tighten them to • Install the driveshaft assembly on the upper the specified torque. crankcase. : Thread lock cement 99000–32110 NOTE (THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or • Align the gearshift forks (2) with their equivalent) grooves.
  • Page 580: Transmission Construction

    5B-8 Manual Transmission: Transmission Construction B718H15206004 “ a” I718H1520071-04 1. Counter shaft 2. Drive shaft 3. Snap ring “a”: 0.2 mm (0.008 in) :Assemble snap ring with sharp edge side out.

  • Page 581: Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear Disassembly And Assembly

    Manual Transmission: 5B-9 Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear • Remove the countershaft bearing (8) along with the housing (9), using the hydraulic press. Disassembly and Assembly B718H15206005 Refer to “Transmission Removal (Page 5B-3)” and “Transmission Installation (Page 5B-5)”. Disassembly CAUTION Identify the position of each removed part.

  • Page 582
    • Before installing the oil seal, apply grease to the oil seal lip. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) • When installing a new snap ring (1), pay attention to I718H1520035-01 its direction.
  • Page 583
    Manual Transmission: 5B-11 • When installing the gear bushing onto the driveshaft, • Install the countershaft bearing (1) to the countershaft, align the shaft oil hole “A” with the bushing oil hole “B”. using the hydraulic press and special tool. Special tool (A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) “A”…
  • Page 584: Transmission Related Parts Inspection

    5B-12 Manual Transmission: Transmission Related Parts Inspection Gearshift Fork Thickness B718H15206007 Measure the gearshift fork thickness using the vernier Refer to “Transmission Removal (Page 5B-3)”, calipers. “Transmission Installation (Page 5B-5)” and Special tool “Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear Disassembly and (A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, Assembly (Page 5B-9)”.

  • Page 585: Gearshift Lever Construction

    Replace the O-ring with a new one. NOTE Align the gear position switch pin “A” with “A” the gearshift cam hole “B”. “a ” : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) “B” “A” I718H1520074-02 1. Gearshift lever “a”: 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in) 2.

  • Page 586: Gearshift Lever Removal And Installation

    5B-14 Manual Transmission: Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation 3) Loosen the lock-nuts (1). B718H15206017 4) Turn the gearshift link rod (2) until the gearshift lever Removal is 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in.) below the top of the 1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand.

  • Page 587: Gearshift Construction

    Manual Transmission: 5B-15 Gearshift Construction 3) Remove the clutch components. Refer to “Clutch B718H15206015 Removal in Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”. 4) Remove the snap ring (1) from the gearshift shaft. Special tool : 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers) I718H1520002-02 1. Gearshift shaft 2.

  • Page 588
    5B-16 Manual Transmission: 7) Remove the gearshift cam plate bolt (11) and • Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the gearshift gearshift cam plate (12). arm stopper and tighten it to the specified torque. 8) Remove the gearshift cam stopper (13). : Thread lock cement 99000–32030 (THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1303 or equivalent)
  • Page 589
    Manual Transmission: 5B-17 • Check the gearshift cam stopper moves smoothly. • Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the gearshift shaft end bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. • Locate the gearshift cam in the neutral position. •…
  • Page 590: Gearshift Linkage Inspection

    5B-18 Manual Transmission: Gearshift Linkage Inspection • Install the gearshift shaft assembly (6) and washers (7) as shown. B718H15206012 Refer to “Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Removal and Installation (Page 5B-15)”. NOTE Pinch the gearshift arm stopper (8) with Gearshift Shaft return spring ends “F”.

  • Page 591: Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal And Installation

    (B): 09930–30104 (Rotor remover slide shaft) I718H1520066-01 • Install the oil seal with the special tool. Special tool (A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set) • Apply grease to the oil seal lip. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) I718H1520065-01 I718H1520067-01…

  • Page 592: Specifications

    5B-20 Manual Transmission: Specifications Service Data B718H15207001 Transmission + Drive Chain Unit: mm (in) Except ratio Item Standard Limit Primary reduction ratio 1.537 (83/54) — Final reduction ratio 2.388 (43/18) — 3.076 (40/13) — 2.058 (35/17) — 1.550 (31/20) — Gear ratios 1.304 (30/23) —…

  • Page 593: Special Tools And Equipment

    Manual Transmission: 5B-21 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H15208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 5B-5) / (Page 5B- equivalent 6) / (Page 5B-10) / (Page 5B-13) /…

  • Page 594: Clutch

    5C-1 Clutch: Clutch Transmission / Transaxle Precautions Precautions for Clutch System B718H15300001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”. Clutch Fluid (Brake Fluid) Information B718H15300002 WARNING • This clutch system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid such as silicone-based or petroleum-based.

  • Page 595: Schematic And Routing Diagram

    Clutch: 5C-2 Schematic and Routing Diagram Clutch Hose Routing Diagram B718H15302001 “A” “B” “C” “D” I718H1530005-05 1. Wiring harness 9. Clutch hose No.3 clamp : After positioning the clamp with stopper, tighten the bolt. 2. Clutch hose 10. Grommet : Install the grommet of the clutch hose to the clutch hose guide properly.

  • Page 596: Diagnostic Information And Procedures

    5C-3 Clutch: Diagnostic Information and Procedures Clutch System Symptom Diagnosis B718H15304001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Engine is noisy (Noise Worn countershaft spline. Replace countershaft. seems to come from the Worn clutch hub spline. Replace clutch hub. clutch). Worn clutch plate teeth.

  • Page 597: Air Bleeding From Clutch Fluid Circuit

    Clutch: 5C-4 Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit 6) Loosen the bleeder valve by turning it a quarter of a B718H15306004 turn so that the fluid runs into the receptacle; this will CAUTION remove the tension of the clutch lever causing it to touch the handlebar grip.

  • Page 598: Clutch Hose Removal And Installation

    5C-5 Clutch: 6) Connect a clear hose to the air bleeder valve and Clutch Hose Removal and Installation insert the other end of hose into a receptacle. B718H15306006 Removal 1) Drain clutch fluid. Refer to “Clutch Fluid Replacement (Page 5C-4)”. 2) Remove the fuel tank.

  • Page 599: Clutch Control System Components

    8. Clutch release cylinder set : Apply brake fluid. 3. Clutch hose 9. Air bleeder : Apply grease. 4. Reservoir cap [A]: For GSF1250/A : Apply silicone grease. 5. Plate [B]: For GSF1250S/SA : Do not reuse. 6. Diaphragm : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

  • Page 600: Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly Removal And Installation

    “A” 4) Remove the clutch hose union bolt (2) and I718H1530020-01 disconnect the clutch hose. “C” “B” I718H1530018-01 5) Remove the left rear view mirror. (GSF1250/A) “A” “a” 6) Remove the master cylinder assembly. I718H1530073-01 “C”: “UP” mark “a”: Clearance…

  • Page 601: Clutch Master Cylinder / Clutch Lever Disassembly And Assembly

    Clutch: 5C-8 • After setting the clutch hose union to the stopper, 2) Remove the reservoir cap (3), plate (4) and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque. diaphragm (5). CAUTION The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

  • Page 602
    • Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder I649G1530018-02 bore and to all of the master cylinder • Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE to the clutch lever components to be inserted into the bore. pivot bolt when installing. : Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone…
  • Page 603: Clutch Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

    Pay attention to the following points: CAUTION The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage. • Apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE “A” to the push rod. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent)

  • Page 604: Clutch Push Rod (Left) Inspection

    5C-11 Clutch: Clutch Push Rod (Left) Inspection Assembly B718H15306019 Assemble the clutch cylinder in the reverse order of Inspect the push rod in the following procedures: disassembly. Pay attention to the following points: 1) Remove the clutch push rod. Refer to “Clutch •…

  • Page 605: Clutch Components

    Clutch: 5C-12 Clutch Components B718H15306014 6 / 7 6 / 7 I718H1530067-03 1. Clutch pressure plate 6. No.1 driven plate (0 – 2 pcs) 11. Primary driven gear assembly : The No.1 and No.2 driven plates are 8 in total. 2.

  • Page 606: Clutch Removal

    5C-13 Clutch: Clutch Removal 5) Remove the clutch drive plates (4) and driven plates B718H15306016 (5). 1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”. 2) Remove the clutch cover (1). I718H1530033-01 6) Remove the spring washer (6) and its seat (7). I718H1530029-01 3) Remove the gasket (2) and dowel pins.

  • Page 607: Clutch Installation

    Clutch: 5C-14 8) Remove the clutch push rod (11). 12) Remove the conical spring washer (12), washer (13) and clutch sleeve hub (14). NOTE If it is difficult to pull out the push rod (11), use a magnetic hand or a wire. I718H1530040-01 13) Remove the thrust washer (15), spacer (16) and bearing (17).

  • Page 608
    5C-15 Clutch: 2) Install the spacers (2) and bearing (3), and apply 5) Hold the clutch sleeve hub with the special tools. engine oil to them. Special tool (A): 09920–53740 (Clutch sleeve hub holder) : 09920–31020 (Extension handle) 6) Tighten the clutch sleeve hub nut to the specified torque.
  • Page 609
    Clutch: 5C-16 9) Install the clutch push piece (9), bearing (10) and 11) Insert the clutch drive plates and driven plates one thrust washer (11) to the countershaft. by one into the clutch sleeve hub in the prescribed order. NOTE NOTE Thrust washer (11) is located between the pressure plate and bearing (10).
  • Page 610
    18) Pour engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”. I718H1530072-01 14) Apply a light coat of the SUZUKI BOND “1207B” to the clutch cover gasket mating surface as shown. : Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond…
  • Page 611: Clutch Parts Inspection

    Clutch: 5C-18 Clutch Parts Inspection Measure each driven plate for distortion with a thickness B718H15306018 gauge and surface plate. Refer to “Clutch Removal (Page 5C-13)” and “Clutch Replace driven plates which exceed the limit. Installation (Page 5C-14)”. Special tool (B): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge) Clutch Drive and Driven Plate Clutch driven plate distortion NOTE…

  • Page 612: Specifications

    5C-19 Clutch: Clutch Sleeve Hub and Primary Driven Gear Push Rod (Right) Inspect the push rod for wear and damage. Assembly If any defects are found, replace the push rod with a new Inspect the slot of the clutch sleeve hub and primary one.

  • Page 613: Special Tools And Equipment

    Clutch: 5C-20 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H15308001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Brake fluid DOT 4 — (Page 5C-4) / (Page 5C- 9) / (Page 5C-11) Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 5C-10)

  • Page 614
    5C-21 Clutch:…
  • Page 615
    Table of Contents 6- i Section 6 Steering CONTENTS Precautions ……….6-1 Handlebars Inspection ……..6B-4 Steering Components ………6B-5 Precautions…………. 6-1 Steering Removal and Installation ……6B-6 Precautions for Steering ……..6-1 Steering Related Parts Inspection…….6B-9 Steering General Diagnosis….6A-1 Steering System Inspection ……..6B-9 Steering Stem Bearing Removal and Diagnostic Information and Procedures….6A-1 Installation …………6B-9…
  • Page 616: Precautions

    6-1 Precautions: Precautions Steering Precautions Precautions for Steering B718H16000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

  • Page 617: Steering General Diagnosis

    Steering General Diagnosis: 6A-1 Steering General Diagnosis Steering Diagnostic Information and Procedures Steering Symptom Diagnosis B718H16104001 Condition Possible cause Correction / Reference Item Heavy Steering Over tightened steering stem nut. Adjust. Broken bearing in steering stem. Replace. Distorted steering stem. Replace.

  • Page 618: Steering / Handlebar

    6B-1 Steering / Handlebar: Steering / Handlebar Steering Repair Instructions Handlebar Components B718H16206001 “A” I718H1620037-01 1. Throttle grip 5. Handle expander “A”: Apply handle grip bond. 2. Handlebars 6. Handle balancer expander : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 3. Handlebar holder (Upper) 7.

  • Page 619: Handlebar Construction

    Steering / Handlebar: 6B-2 Handlebar Construction B718H16206013 “A” “A” “a” “B” “B” “A” “A” I718H1620040-01 1. Clutch master cylinder “A”: Punch mark : 10 N⋅m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft) 2. Front brake master cylinder “B”: UP mark : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 3.

  • Page 620: Handlebar Removal And Installation

    3) Remove the caps and handlebar holder bolts. B718H16206002 Removal 1) Remove the following parts from the left handlebar. a) Rear view mirror (GSF1250/A) b) Clutch master cylinder/clutch lever (1) CAUTION Do not turn the clutch master cylinder upside down.

  • Page 621: Handlebars Inspection

    Steering / Handlebar: 6B-4 • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the end of the • Insert the projection “E” of the left handlebar switch throttle cables and cable pulley. box into the hole of the handlebars. : Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent) •…

  • Page 622: Steering Components

    2. Handlebar holder (Upper) 9. Handlebar holder set nut 16. Headlight housing bracket 3. Handlebars 10. Steering stem nut [A]: For GSF1250/A 4. Handlebar holder (Lower) 11. Dust seal : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 5. Steering stem head nut 12.

  • Page 623: Steering Removal And Installation

    7) Dismount the handlebars and steering upper B718H16206005 bracket. Refer to “Ignition Switch Removal and Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-9)”. Removal GSF1250/A NOTE 1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden If necessary, remove the ignition switch from block.

  • Page 624
    6B-7 Steering / Handlebar: GSF1250S/SA 7) Remove the steering stem nut using the special tool. 1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden NOTE block. When loosening the stem nuts, hold the 2) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front steering stem lower bracket to prevent it from Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section falling.
  • Page 625
    • Loosen the steering stem nut 1/4 – 1/2 turn “a”. Bearing NOTE • Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the bearings, races and dust seals before remounting the steering This adjustment will vary from motorcycle to stem.
  • Page 626: Steering Related Parts Inspection

    6B-9 Steering / Handlebar: Handlebars If any abnormal points are found, replace defective parts with new ones. • Tighten the handlebar holder set nuts to the specified torque. Tightening torque Handlebar holder set nut (a): 45 N·m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft) I718H1620026-02 I718H1620035-04 Inspection after installation…

  • Page 627: Steering Tension Adjustment

    Steering / Handlebar: 6B-10 3) Remove the steering stem lower bearing and inner Inner race race using a chisel. • Press in the lower inner race and bearing using the special tool. Special tool (A): 09941–74911 (Steering bearing installer) I649G1620033-02 4) Remove the steering stem upper and lower bearing races using the special tools.

  • Page 628: Specifications

    6B-11 Steering / Handlebar: b) Tighten the steering stem nut, stem head nut and 4) Do the same on the other grip end. front fork upper and lower clamp bolts to the 5) If the initial force read on the scale when the specified torque and recheck the initial force with handlebar starts turning is either too heavy or too the spring scale according to the previously…

  • Page 629: Special Tools And Equipment

    Steering / Handlebar: 6B-12 Special Tools and Equipment Recommended Service Material B718H16208001 Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification Note Grease SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 (Page 6B-4) / (Page 6B- equivalent Handle grip bond Handle Grip Bond (commercially —…

  • Page 630
    6B-13 Steering / Handlebar:…
  • Page 631
    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn.. 9C-1 Wiring Systems……..9A-1 General Description ……….9C-1 Schematic and Routing Diagram……9A-1 Combination Meter System Description….9C-1 Wiring Diagram (GSF1250)……… 9A-1 Repair Instructions ……….9C-2 Wiring Diagram (GSF1250S) ……9A-3 Combination Meter Components ……9C-2 Wiring Diagram (GSF1250A) ……9A-5 Combination Meter Removal and Installation ..9C-4…
  • Page 632
    9-ii Table of Contents Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion Engine Mount Bushing Replacement….9E-2 Construction …………9D-5 Front Footrest Bracket Construction ….9E-2 Fastener Removal and Installation……9D-5 Side-stand Construction……..9E-3 Exterior Parts Removal and Installation ….9D-6 Side-stand Removal and Installation….9E-4 Seat Height Adjustment ……..9D-9 Center Stand Construction……..9E-4 Center Stand Removal and Installation….9E-4 Body Structure ………9E-1…
  • Page 633: Precautions

    Precautions: Precautions Body and Accessories Precautions Precautions for Electrical System B718H19000001 Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page 00-2)”. Component Location Electrical Components Location B718H19003001 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

  • Page 634: Wiring Systems

    9A-1 Wiring Systems: Wiring Systems Body and Accessories Schematic and Routing Diagram Wiring Diagram (GSF1250) B718H19102001 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

  • Page 635
    Wiring Systems: 9A-2 For E-02, 19 I718H1910901-10…
  • Page 636: Wiring Diagram (Gsf1250S)

    9A-3 Wiring Systems: Wiring Diagram (GSF1250S) B718H19102004 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. For E-02, 19 I718H1910902-09…

  • Page 637
    Wiring Systems: 9A-4 For E-03, 24, 28 I718H1910903-12…
  • Page 638: Wiring Diagram (Gsf1250A)

    9A-5 Wiring Systems: Wiring Diagram (GSF1250A) B718H19102005 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. For E-02, 19 I718H1910905-12…

  • Page 639: Wiring Diagram (Gsf1250Sa)

    Wiring Systems: 9A-6 Wiring Diagram (GSF1250SA) B718H19102006 Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”. For E-02, 19 I718H1910906-10…

  • Page 640
    9A-7 Wiring Systems: For E-03, 24, 28 I718H1910915-02…
  • Page 641: Wiring Harness Routing Diagram

    9. Brake hose (ABS) (GSF1250A/SA only) 2. EVAP purge control valve (E-33 only) 10. Rear wheel speed sensor coupler (GSF1250A/SA only) 3. Clamp (GSF1250/A only) 11. Clamp : Pass through the speed meter lead right side of ignition switch. : Clamp the lead wire and ABS brake hose (GSF1250A/SA).

  • Page 642
    5. Frame 16. Clamp : Clamp the lead wire inside of clutch hose. 6. Wiring harness (GSF1250/A) “A”: Pass the regulator/rectifier lead wire behind hose. 7. Wiring harness (GSF1250S/SA) “B”: Set the generator lead wire between starter motor and sprocket inner cover.
  • Page 643
    Wiring Systems: 9A-10 “a ” “b” “A” I718H1910913-02 1. Oil pressure lead wire : 6.5 N⋅m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 lb-ft) : Be careful not to slacken the oil pressure lead wire. 2. Generator cover : 1.5 N⋅m (0.15 kgf-m, 1.0 lb-ft) 3.
  • Page 644: Specifications

    9A-11 Wiring Systems: Specifications Service Data B718H19107001 Electrical Item Specification Note 10 A Headlight 10 A Fuel 10 A Ignition 15 A Signal 15 A Fuse size 15 A Main 30 A ABS motor 20 A (GSF1250A/SA only) ABS valve 15 A (GSF1250A/SA only) Tightening Torque Specifications…

  • Page 645: Lighting Systems

    Lighting Systems: 9B-1 Lighting Systems Body and Accessories Repair Instructions Headlight Components B718H19206001 GSF1250/A I718H1920047-02 1. Headlight rim 3. Headlight bulb (12 V 60/55 W, H4) 5. Position light bulb (12 V 5 W) 2. Headlight unit 4. Headlight housing…

  • Page 646: Headlight Removal And Installation

    Installation 3) Remove the front brake hose clamp bolt (3) Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay (GSF1250) or front brake hose joint mounting bolt attention to the following point: (4) (GSF1250A). • After installing, be sure to inspect the headlight beam.

  • Page 647: Headlight Bulb Replacement

    5) Replace the headlight bulb (6) by unhooking the bulb When you touch the bulb with your bare holder spring (5). hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol or soap water to prevent premature bulb failure. GSF1250/A 1) Remove the headlight mounting screws. I718H1920016-01 I718H1920006-01…

  • Page 648
    9B-4 Lighting Systems: 6) Reassemble the headlight. 4) Remove the headlight bulb/socket (Low beam) (4) by unhooking the bulb holder spring (5). 7) Install the headlight assembly so that the hook “A” on the headlight bezel engages with “B” of the housing. “B”…
  • Page 649: Headlight Beam Adjustment

    Lighting Systems: 9B-5 Headlight Beam Adjustment GSF1250S/SA B718H19206026 1) Insert 5 mm hexagon wrench as shown and adjust GSF1250/A the Low and High headlight beam horizontally. Adjust the headlight beam, both horizontally and vertically. NOTE NOTE To adjust the headlight beam, adjust the beam horizontally first, then vertically.

  • Page 650: Rear Combination Light Construction

    9B-6 Lighting Systems: Rear Combination Light Construction B718H19206006 I649G1920018-02 1. Seat tail cover 2. Cushion 3. Rear combination light : 2.0 N⋅m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 lb-ft) Rear Combination Light Removal and Installation Install the rear combination light in the reverse order of Installation removal.

  • Page 651: Brake Light Bulb / Taillight Bulb Replacement

    Lighting Systems: 9B-7 Brake Light Bulb / Taillight Bulb Replacement 3) Remove the bulb socket by turning it B718H19206008 counterclockwise. CAUTION When you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol or soap water to prevent premature bulb failure.

  • Page 652: License Plate Light Removal And Installation

    9B-8 Lighting Systems: License Plate Light Removal and Installation License Plate Light Bulb Replacement B718H19206010 B718H19206011 Removal 1) Remove the license plate light. Refer to “License 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal Plate Light Removal and Installation (Page 9B-8)”. and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 653: Turn Signal Light Components

    GSF1250S/SA Installation Removal B718H19206013 1) Remove the wind screen and upper panel. Refer to GSF1250/A “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section Removal 9D (Page 9D-6)”. 1) Remove the headlight housing. Refer to “Headlight 2) Disconnect the turn signal light coupler and clamp.

  • Page 654: Rear Turn Signal Light Removal And Installation

    9B-10 Lighting Systems: Rear Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement B718H19206014 B718H19206015 Removal CAUTION 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”. When you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened 2) Remove the tool set (1) and disconnect the turn with alcohol or soap water to prevent…

  • Page 655: Turn Signal / Side-Stand Relay Inspection

    B718H19206019 Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A Inspect the hazard switch in the following procedures: (Page 0A-8)”. 1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in NOTE Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 656: Passing Light Switch Inspection

    Section 6B (Page 6B-3)”. B718H19206022 Inspect the dimmer switch in the following procedures: Special tool 1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) : 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Tester knob indication Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 657: Specifications

    Lighting Systems: 9B-13 Specifications Service Data B718H19207001 Wattage Unit: W Specification Item GSF1250/A GSF1250S/SA Headlight ← Parking or position light 5 x 2 ← Brake light/Taillight 21/5 ← Turn signal light 21 x 4 ← License plate light Tightening Torque Specifications…

  • Page 658: Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn

    9C-1 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn Body and Accessories General Description Combination Meter System Description B718H19301001 This combination meter mainly consists of the stepping motor, LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and LED (Light Emitting Diode).

  • Page 659: Repair Instructions

    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-2 Repair Instructions Combination Meter Components B718H19306001 GSF1250/A I718H1930046-03 1. Upper case 2. Combination meter 3. Lower case 4. Cover 5. Bracket…

  • Page 660
    9C-3 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: GSF1250S/SA I718H1930047-02 1. Upper case 2. Combination meter 3. Lower case…
  • Page 661: Combination Meter Removal And Installation

    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-4 Combination Meter Removal and Installation 2) Disconnect the combination meter coupler and B718H19306002 remove the combination meter assembly. GSF1250/A Removal 1) Remove the combination meter mounting bolts. I718H1930018-01 3) Remove the combination meter (1). I718H1930057-01 2) Remove the headlight.

  • Page 662: Combination Meter Inspection

    9C-5 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: Combination Meter Inspection 2) With the adjuster switch (1) pressed, turn the ignition B718H19306004 switch on. LED Inspection 3) Release the adjuster switch (1), 3 to 5 seconds after Check that the LEDs (FI indicator light, ABS indicator turning the ignition switch on.

  • Page 663: Engine Coolant Temperature Removal And Installation

    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-6 Fuel Level Indicator Inspection 2) Connect the variable resistor (2) between the terminals. B718H19306030 Inspect the fuel level indicator in the following procedures: 1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand. 2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”…

  • Page 664: Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor) Inspection

    9C-7 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor) 5) Turn the ignition switch ON. Inspection 6) Check the display of fuel level indicator (LCD) as B718H19306031 shown. Inspect the fuel level indicator switch in the following If any abnormality is found, replace the combination procedures: meter with a new one.

  • Page 665: Fuel Level Gauge Inspection

    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-8 Fuel Level Gauge Inspection Speed Sensor Removal and Installation B718H19306006 B718H19306021 Inspect the fuel level gauge in the following procedures: Removal 1) Remove the fuel level gauge. Refer to “Fuel Pump 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 666: Speed Sensor Inspection

    9C-9 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: Installation 3) Move a screwdriver back and forth across the pick- Install the speed sensor in the reverse order of removal. up surface of the speed sensor. The voltage readings should cycle as follows (0 V → 12 V or 12 V Pay attention to the following points: →…

  • Page 667: Oil Pressure Switch Removal And Installation

    B718H19306025 NOTE Inspect the ignition switch in the following procedures: 1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) If the horn sound condition is normal, it is not Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in necessary to inspect the horn button Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

  • Page 668: Horn Removal And Installation

    9C-11 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 3) Inspect the horn button for continuity with a tester. 2) Connect a 12 V battery to terminal “A” and terminal If any abnormality is found, replace the left “B”. If the sound is not heard from the horn, replace handlebar switch assembly with a new one.

  • Page 669: Specifications

    Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-12 Specifications Service Data B718H19307001 Wattage Unit: W Specification Item GSF1250/A GSF1250S/SA ← Speedometer light ← Tachometer light ← Turn signal indicator light LED x 2 ← High beam indicator light ← Neutral position indicator light ←…

  • Page 670: Exterior Parts

    9D-1 Exterior Parts: Exterior Parts Body and Accessories Schematic and Routing Diagram Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram B718H19402001 I718H1940028-01 1. Screw 2. Seat lock cable 3. Seat lock 4. Plate…

  • Page 671: Repair Instructions

    Exterior Parts: 9D-2 Repair Instructions Exterior Parts Construction B718H19406006 GSF1250/A I718H1940033-01 1. Frame head cover 2. Headlight housing cover 3. Headlight housing stay…

  • Page 672
    9D-3 Exterior Parts: GSF1250S/SA I718H1940026-02 1. Cowling body 3. Cowling brace 5. Upper panel 7. Head pipe 2. Wind screen 4. Lower panel 6. Meter panel lid 8. Bolt (Except E-33)
  • Page 673: Front Fender Construction

    Exterior Parts: 9D-4 Front Fender Construction B718H19406007 I718H1940029-01 1. Front fender 2. Fender plate nut 3. Front fork Frame Cover Cushion Construction B718H19406002 I718H1940030-01 1. Frame cover 2. Cushion : Clean an adhesive surface before adhering the tape cushion.

  • Page 674: Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion Construction

    9D-5 Exterior Parts: Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion Construction B718H19406008 I718H1940031-01 1. Engine sprocket outer cover cushion 2. Engine sprocket outer cover : Clear adhesive surface before adhering the tape cushion. Fastener Removal and Installation Installation B718H19406003 1) Let the center piece stick out toward the head so that Removal the pawls “A”…

  • Page 675: Exterior Parts Removal And Installation

    Exterior Parts: 9D-6 2) Insert the fastener into the installation hole. Frame Cover Removal NOTE Remove the frame covers (1), left and right. To prevent the pawl “A” from damage, insert the fastener all the way into the installation hole. 3) Push in the head of center piece until it becomes flush with the fastener outside face.

  • Page 676
    9D-7 Exterior Parts: 5) Disconnect the brake light/taillight lead wire coupler Headlight Housing Cover (GSF1250/A) (2). Removal Remove the headlight housing cover (1). 6) Unhook the seat lock cable (3). Refer to “Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram (Page 9D-1)”. 7) Remove the seat tail cover (4).
  • Page 677
    Exterior Parts: 9D-8 4) Remove the wind screen (2) and upper panel (3). 7) Remove the lower panel (6) from the cowling (5). I718H1940012-01 I718H1940017-01 5) Remove the turn signal lights (4), left and right. Refer 8) Disconnect the headlight and position light couplers. to “Front Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation 9) Remove the headlight assembly (7).
  • Page 678: Seat Height Adjustment

    9D-9 Exterior Parts: Seat Height Adjustment 5) Reinstall the front seat and adjust the seat height B718H19406005 adjuster position “A” or “B”. Adjust the seat height in the following procedures: 1) Remove the seat assembly. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation (Page 9D-6)”. 2) Remove the seat height adjusting dampers.

  • Page 679: Body Structure

    Body Structure: 9E-1 Body Structure Body and Accessories Repair Instructions Body Frame Construction B718H19506001 I718H1950003-08 1. Frame 4. Bracket mounting bolt : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) 2. Frame down tube bolt 5. Engine mounting bracket bushing : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft) 3.

  • Page 680: Engine Mount Bushing Replacement

    Engine Mount Bushing Replacement B718H19506003 Replace the engine mount bushing if necessary, as shown in the body frame construction. Refer to “Body Frame Construction (Page 9E-1)”. Front Footrest Bracket Construction B718H19506005 GSF1250/S I718H1950001-04 1. Frame 2. Footrest bracket 3. Washer 4. Bolt : 23 N⋅m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

  • Page 681: Side-Stand Construction

    Body Structure: 9E-3 Side-stand Construction B718H19506006 I718H1950005-05 1. Side-stand : 50 N⋅m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft) : Apply grease to sliding surface. 2. Spring : 40 N⋅m (4.0 kgf-m, 29.0 lb-ft)

  • Page 682: Side-Stand Removal And Installation

    9E-4 Body Structure: Side-stand Removal and Installation B718H19506007 Removal 1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand. 2) Remove the side-stand as shown in the side-stand construction. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”. Installation Install the side-stand as shown in the side-stand construction. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”. Center Stand Construction B718H19506008 I718H1950002-02…

  • Page 683: Specifications

    Body Structure: 9E-5 Specifications Tightening Torque Specifications B718H19507001 NOTE The specified tightening torque is also described in the following. “Body Frame Construction (Page 9E-1)” “Front Footrest Bracket Construction (Page 9E-2)” “Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)” Reference: For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section 0C (Page 0C-7)”.

  • Page 684
    Prepared by December, 2006 Part No. 99500-39300-01E Printed in Japan…
  • Page 685
    Printed in Japan…

TOP

GSF1250/S/A/SA

9 9 5 0 0 — 3 9 3 0 0 — 0 1 E

Printed in Japan

K7

No.7761 GSF1250/S/A/SA 99500-39300-01E Cover14 for PS printing (30 mm) 2006.12.29

BOTTOM

DIC216

FOREWORD

This manual contains an introductory description on the SUZUKI GSF1250/S/A/SA and procedures for its inspection/service and overhaul of its main components.

Other information considered as generally known is not included.

Read the GENERAL INFORMATION section to familiarize yourself with the motorcycle and its maintenance. Use this section as well as other sections to use as a guide for proper inspection and service.

This manual will help you know the motorcycle better so that you can assure your customers of fast and reliable service.

* This manual has been prepared on the basis of the latest specifications at the time of publication. If modifications have been made since then, differences may exist between the content of this manual and the actual motorcycle.

* Illustrations in this manual are used to show the basic principles of operation and work procedures. They may not represent the actual motorcycle exactly in detail.

* This manual is written for persons who have enough knowledge, skills and tools, including special tools, for servicing SUZUKI motorcycles. If you do not have the proper knowledge and tools, ask your authorized

SUZUKI motorcycle dealer to help you.

!

WARNING

Inexperienced mechanics or mechanics without the proper tools and equipment may not be able to properly perform the services described in this manual.

Improper repair may result in injury to the mechanic and may render the motorcycle unsafe for the rider and passenger.

© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Precautions……………………………………………………… 00-i

Precautions …………………………………………………… 00-1

General Information …………………………………………… 0-i

General Information ……………………………………….. 0A-1

Maintenance and Lubrication …………………………… 0B-1

Service Data…………………………………………………..0C-1

Engine ………………………………………………………………. 1-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 1-1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis ……….. 1A-1

Emission Control Devices ……………………………….. 1B-1

Engine Electrical Devices…………………………………1C-1

Engine Mechanical………………………………………….1D-1

Engine Lubrication System ……………………………… 1E-1

Engine Cooling System…………………………………… 1F-1

Fuel System …………………………………………………..1G-1

Ignition System……………………………………………….1H-1

Starting System………………………………………………. 1I-1

Charging System……………………………………………..1J-1

Exhaust System …………………………………………….. 1K-1

Suspension……………………………………………………….. 2-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 2-1

Suspension General Diagnosis………………………… 2A-1

Front Suspension …………………………………………… 2B-1

Rear Suspension…………………………………………….2C-1

Wheels and Tires ……………………………………………2D-1

Driveline / Axle ………………………………………………….. 3-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 3-1

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft ………………. 3A-1

Brake ………………………………………………………………… 4-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 4-1

Brake Control System and Diagnosis ……………….. 4A-1

Front Brakes………………………………………………….. 4B-1

Rear Brakes …………………………………………………..4C-1

ABS ……………………………………………………………… 4E-1

Transmission / Transaxle …………………………………… 5-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 5-1

Manual Transmission ……………………………………… 5B-1

Clutch ……………………………………………………………5C-1

Steering…………………………………………………………….. 6-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 6-1

Steering General Diagnosis …………………………….. 6A-1

Steering / Handlebar ………………………………………. 6B-1

Body and Accessories……………………………………….. 9-i

Precautions …………………………………………………….. 9-1

Wiring Systems ……………………………………………… 9A-1

Lighting Systems……………………………………………. 9B-1

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn………………9C-1

Exterior Parts …………………………………………………9D-1

Body Structure ………………………………………………. 9E-1

4

5

2

3

6

00

0

1

9

Section 00

Precautions

CONTENTS

Table of Contents 00- i

00

Precautions ………………………………………..00-1

Precautions………………………………………………….. 00-1

Warning / Caution / Note………………………………. 00-1

General Precautions ……………………………………. 00-1

Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service ………… 00-2

00-1 Precautions:

Precautions

Precautions

Warning / Caution / Note

B718H10000001

Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully. To emphasize special information, the symbol and the words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE have special meanings. Pay special attention to the messages highlighted by these signal words.

!

WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or injury.

!

CAUTION

Indicates a potential hazard that could result in motorcycle damage.

NOTE

Indicates special information to make maintenance easier or instructions clearer.

Please note, however, that the warnings and cautions contained in this manual cannot possibly cover all potential hazards relating to the servicing, or lack of servicing, of the motorcycle. In addition to the

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS stated, you must use good judgement and basic mechanical safety principles. If you are unsure about how to perform a particular service operation, ask a more experienced mechanic for advice.

General Precautions

!

WARNING

• Proper service and repair procedures are important for the safety of the service mechanic and the safety and reliability of the motorcycle.

• When 2 or more persons work together, pay attention to the safety of each other.

• When it is necessary to run the engine indoors, make sure that exhaust gas is forced outdoors.

• When working with toxic or flammable materials, make sure that the area you work in is well ventilated and that you follow all of the material manufacturer’s instructions.

• Never use gasoline as a cleaning solvent.

Precautions

B718H10000002

• To avoid getting burned, do not touch the engine, engine oil, radiator and exhaust system until they have cooled.

• After servicing the fuel, oil, water, exhaust or brake systems, check all lines and fittings related to the system for leaks.

!

CAUTION

• If parts replacement is necessary, replace the parts with Suzuki Genuine Parts or their equivalent.

• When removing parts that are to be reused, keep them arranged in an orderly manner so that they may be reinstalled in the proper order and orientation.

• Be sure to use special tools when instructed.

• Make sure that all parts used in reassembly are clean. Lubricate them when specified.

• Use the specified lubricant, bond, or sealant.

• When removing the battery, disconnect the negative (–) cable first and then the positive (+) cable.

• When reconnecting the battery, connect the positive (+) cable first and then the negative (–) cable, and replace the terminal cover on the positive (+) terminal.

• When performing service to electrical parts, if the service procedures do not require use of battery power, disconnect the negative (–) cable the battery.

• When tightening the cylinder head or case bolts and nuts, tighten the larger sizes first. Always tighten the bolts and nuts diagonally from the inside toward outside and to the specified tightening torque.

• Whenever you remove oil seals, gaskets, packing, O-rings, locking washers, selflocking nuts, cotter pins, circlips and certain other parts as specified, be sure to replace them with new ones. Also, before installing these new parts, be sure to remove any left over material from the mating surfaces.

• Never reuse a circlip. When installing a new circlip, take care not to expand the end gap larger than required to slip the circlip over the shaft. After installing a circlip, always ensure that it is completely seated in its groove and securely fitted.

• Use a torque wrench to tighten fasteners to the specified torque. Wipe off grease and oil if a thread is smeared with them.

• After reassembling, check parts for tightness and proper operation.

• To protect the environment, do not unlawfully dispose of used motor oil, engine coolant and other fluids: batteries, and tires.

• To protect Earth’s natural resources, properly dispose of used motorcycle and parts.

Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service

B718H10000003

When handling the electrical parts or servicing the FI and

ABS systems, observe the following points for the safety of the systems.

Electrical Parts

Connector / Coupler

• When connecting a connector, be sure to push it in until a click is felt.

Precautions: 00-2

• Before refitting the sealed coupler, make sure its seal rubber is positioned properly. The seal rubber may possibly come off the position during disconnecting work and if the coupler is refitted with the seal rubber improperly positioned, it may result in poor water sealing.

I310G1000002-01

• Inspect each lead wire circuit for poor connection by shaking it by hand lightly. If any abnormal condition is found, repair or replace.

I310G1000001-01

• With a lock type coupler, be sure to release the lock when disconnecting, and push it in fully to engage the lock when connecting.

• When disconnecting the coupler, be sure to hold the coupler body and do not pull the lead wires.

• Inspect each terminal on the connector/coupler for looseness or bending.

• Push in the coupler straightly. An angled or skewed insertion may cause the terminal to be deformed, possibly resulting in poor electrical contact.

• Inspect each terminal for corrosion and contamination. The terminals must be clean and free of any foreign material which could impede proper terminal contact.

I310G1000003-02

• When taking measurements at electrical connectors using a tester probe, be sure to insert the probe from the wire harness side (rear) of the connector/coupler.

2

1

I649G1000013-02

1. Coupler 2. Probe

• When connecting meter probe from the terminal side of the coupler (where connection from harness side not being possible), use extra care not to force and cause the male terminal to bend or the female terminal to open. Connect the probe as shown to avoid opening of female terminal. Never push in the probe where male terminal is supposed to fit.

00-3 Precautions:

• Check the male connector for bend and female connector for excessive opening. Also check the coupler for locking (looseness), corrosion, dust, etc.

4

“A”

3

4

I649G1000030-02

“A”: Where male terminal fits 3. Coupler 4. Probe

Clamp

• Clamp the wire harness at such positions as indicated in “Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A

(Page 9A-8)”.

• Bend the clamp properly so that the wire harness is clamped securely.

• In clamping the wire harness, use care not to allow it to hang down.

• Do not use wire or any other substitute for the band type clamp.

CORRECT INCORRECT

Switch

Never apply grease material to switch contact points to prevent damage.

ECM / ABS control unit / HU / Various sensors

• Since each component is a high-precision part, great care should be taken not to apply any severe impacts during removal and installation.

I310G1000007-01

I649G1000003-02

I718H1000001-02

Fuse

• When a fuse is blown, always investigate the cause to correct it and then replace the fuse.

• Do not use a fuse of different capacity.

• Do not use wire or any other substitute for the fuse.

I649G1000001-02

Precautions: 00-4

• Be careful not to touch the electrical terminals of the electronic parts (ECM, ABS control unit/HU, etc.). The static electricity from your body may damage them.

I310G1000008-01

• When disconnecting and connecting the coupler, make sure to turn OFF the ignition switch, or electronic parts may get damaged.

I649G1000005-02

Battery

• Battery connection in reverse polarity is strictly prohibited. Such a wrong connection will damage the components of the FI and ABS systems instantly when reverse power is applied.

1

I649G1000031-02

1. Ignition switch

• Never allow dust or water to contact the ABS control unit/HU.

I718H1000004-01

• Removing any battery terminal of a running engine is strictly prohibited. The moment such removal is made, damaging counter electromotive force will be applied to the electronic unit which may result in serious damage.

I649G1000004-02

• The ABS control unit/HU cannot be disassembled.

Replace the whole unit with a new one.

I310G1000011-01

00-5 Precautions:

• Before measuring voltage at each terminal, check to make sure that battery voltage is 11 V or higher.

Terminal voltage check with a low battery voltage will lead to erroneous diagnosis.

1) Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.

2) Check each connector/coupler at both ends of the circuit being checked for loose connection. Also check for condition of the coupler lock if equipped.

“A”

“A”

ECM

1

I310G1000012-02

• Never connect any tester (voltmeter, ohmmeter, or whatever) to the electronic unit when its coupler is disconnected. Otherwise, damage to electronic unit may result.

• Never connect an ohmmeter to the electronic unit with its coupler connected. If attempted, damage to ECM or sensors may result.

• Be sure to use a specified voltmeter/ohmmeter.

Otherwise, accurate measurements may not be obtained and personal injury may result.

Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedure

While there are various methods for electrical circuit inspection, described here is a general method to check for open and short circuit using an ohmmeter and a voltmeter.

Open circuit check

Possible causes for the open circuit are as follows. As the cause can exist in the connector/coupler or terminal, they need to be checked carefully.

• Loose connection of connector/coupler

• Poor contact of terminal (due to dirt, corrosion or rust, poor contact tension, entry of foreign object etc.)

• Wire harness being open.

• Poor terminal-to-wire connection.

When checking system circuits including an electronic control unit such as ECM, ABS control unit/HU, etc., it is important to perform careful check, starting with items which are easier to check.

1. Sensor

I718H1000005-02

“A”: Check for loose connection

3) Using a test male terminal, check the female terminals of the circuit being checked for contact tension.

Check each terminal visually for poor contact

(possibly caused by dirt, corrosion, rust, entry of foreign object, etc.). At the same time, check to make sure that each terminal is fully inserted in the coupler and locked.

If contact tension is not enough, rectify the contact to increase tension or replace. The terminals must be clean and free of any foreign material which could impede proper terminal contact.

“B”

“C”

I649G1000027-02

“B”: Check contact tension by inserting and removing.

“C”: Check each terminal for bend and proper alignment.

4) Using continuity inspect or voltage check procedure as described below, inspect the wire harness terminals for open circuit and poor connection.

Locate abnormality, if any.

“D”

“E”

“F”

”D”: Looseness of crimping

“E”: Open

“F”: Thin wire (A few strands left)

I649G1000028-02

Continuity check

1) Measure resistance across coupler “B” (between “A” and “C” in figure).

If no continuity is indicated (infinity or over limit), the circuit is open between terminals “A” and “C”.

“A”

“B”

ECM

Precautions: 00-6

3) Also, if measured values are as listed following, a resistance (abnormality) exists which causes the voltage drop in the circuit between terminals “A” and

“B”.

Voltage between

“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V

“B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V – 2 V voltage drop

“C” and body ground: 3 V – 2 V voltage drop

“A”

“C”

ECM

I705H1000006-02

2) Disconnect the coupler “B” and measure resistance between couplers “A” and “B-1”.

If no continuity is indicated, the circuit is open between couplers “A” and “B-1”. If continuity is indicated, there is an open circuit between couplers

“B-2” and “C” or an abnormality in coupler “B-2” or coupler “C”.

“A”

“B-2”

ECM

“B”

“C”

5V

“B”

“B-1”

“C”

I705H1000010-02

Voltage check

If voltage is supplied to the circuit being checked, voltage check can be used as circuit check.

1) With all connectors/couplers connected and voltage applied to the circuit being checked, measure voltage between each terminal and body ground.

2) If measurements were taken as shown in the figure and results were listed in the following, it means that the circuit is open between terminals “A” and “B”.

Voltage between

“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V

“B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V

“C” and body ground: 0 V

“A”

0V

5V

5V

“B” “C”

I705H1000007-01

Short circuit check (Wire harness to ground)

1) Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.

2) Disconnect the connectors/couplers at both ends of the circuit to be checked.

NOTE

If the circuit to be checked branches to other parts as shown, disconnect all connectors/ couplers of those parts. Otherwise, diagnosis will be wrong.

00-7 Precautions:

3) Measure resistance between terminal at one end of circuit (“A” terminal in figure) and body ground. If continuity is indicated, there is a short circuit to ground between terminals “A” and “C”.

“A”

“B”

“D”

ECM

Using The Multi-Circuit Testers

• Use the Suzuki multi-circuit tester set.

• Use well-charged batteries in the tester.

• Be sure to set the tester to the correct testing range.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(A)

“C”

“A” “C”

“E”

5V

I705H1000008-01

“D”: To other parts “E”: Other parts

4) Disconnect the connector/coupler included in circuit

(coupler “B”) and measure resistance between terminal “A” and body ground. If continuity is indicated, the circuit is shorted to the ground between terminals “A” and “B”.

“A”

“D”

ECM

I649G1000024-03

Using the testers

• Incorrectly connecting the (+) and (–) probes may cause the inside of the tester to be burned.

• If the voltage and current are not known, make measurements using the highest range.

• When measuring the resistance with the multi-circuit tester (1),

will be shown as 10.00 M

and “1” flashes in the display.

• Check that no voltage is applied before making the measurement. If voltage is applied the tester may be damaged.

“B”

“C”

I705H1000009-02

“D”: To other parts

• After using the tester, turn the power off.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

I649G1000002-02

NOTE

• When connecting the multi-circuit tester, use the needle pointed probe to the back side of the lead wire coupler and connect the probes of tester to them.

• Use the needle pointed probe to prevent the rubber of the water proof coupler from damage.

• When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

(A)

I649G1000025-03

Precautions: 00-8

00-9 Precautions:

Section 0

General Information

CONTENTS

Table of Contents 0- i

0

General Information ………………………….. 0A-1

General Description ………………………………………0A-1

Symbols …………………………………………………….. 0A-1

Abbreviations ……………………………………………… 0A-1

SAE-to-Former SUZUKI Term ………………………. 0A-2

Vehicle Side View ……………………………………….. 0A-3

Vehicle Identification Number ……………………….. 0A-4

Fuel and Oil Recommendation ……………………… 0A-4

Engine Coolant Recommendation …………………. 0A-5

BREAK-IN Procedures…………………………………. 0A-5

Cylinder Identification…………………………………… 0A-5

Country and Area Codes ……………………………… 0A-6

Wire Color Symbols …………………………………….. 0A-6

Warning, Caution and Information Labels

Location …………………………………………………… 0A-7

Component Location …………………………………….0A-8

Electrical Components Location ……………………. 0A-8

Specifications……………………………………………..0A-10

Specifications (GSF1250/S)………………………… 0A-10

Specifications (GSF1250A/SA) …………………….0A-12

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………0A-14

Special Tool ………………………………………………0A-14

Maintenance and Lubrication…………….. 0B-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..0B-1

Precautions for Maintenance ………………………… 0B-1

General Description ………………………………………0B-1

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants…………….. 0B-1

Scheduled Maintenance ………………………………..0B-1

Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart……………. 0B-1

Lubrication Points ……………………………………….. 0B-2

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….0B-3

Air Cleaner Element Replacement…………………. 0B-3

Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning …. 0B-3

Exhaust Pipe Bolt and Muffler Bolt Inspection …. 0B-4

Spark Plug Replacement ……………………………… 0B-4

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning ……………….0B-4

Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment ……0B-5

Fuel Line Inspection ……………………………………0B-10

Evaporative Emission Control System

Inspection (E-33 Only) ………………………………0B-10

Engine Oil and Filter Replacement ……………….0B-10

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and

Adjustment ………………………………………………0B-12

Throttle Valve Synchronization …………………….0B-12

PAIR System Inspection ……………………………..0B-12

Cooling System Inspection…………………………..0B-12

Clutch System Inspection…………………………….0B-14

Clutch Hose Replacement …………………………..0B-15

Clutch Fluid Replacement ……………………………0B-15

Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment …………0B-15

Drive Chain Cleaning and Lubricating……………0B-16

Brake System Inspection …………………………….0B-17

Tire Inspection……………………………………………0B-19

Steering System Inspection …………………………0B-20

Front Fork Inspection ………………………………….0B-20

Rear Suspension Inspection ………………………..0B-20

Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection …………………..0B-21

Compression Pressure Check ……………………..0B-22

Oil Pressure Check …………………………………….0B-22

SDS check ………………………………………………..0B-22

Specifications……………………………………………..0B-23

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….0B-23

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………0B-23

Recommended Service Material …………………..0B-23

Special Tool ………………………………………………0B-23

Service Data ……………………………………… 0C-1

Specifications……………………………………………….0C-1

Service Data………………………………………………..0C-1

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………0C-7

0A-1 General Information:

General Information

General Information

General Description

Symbols

B718H10101001

Listed in the table below are the symbols indicating instructions and other information necessary for servicing.

The meaning of each symbol is also included in the table.

Symbol Definition

Torque control required.

Data beside it indicate specified torque.

Apply oil.

Use engine oil unless otherwise specified.

Apply molybdenum oil solution.

(Mixture of engine oil and SUZUKl MOLY PASTE in a ratio of 1:1).

Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE “A” or equivalent.

99000-25010

Apply SUZUKI MOLY PASTE or equivalent.

99000-25140

Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE or equivalent.

99000-25100

Apply SUZUKI BOND “1207B” or equivalent.

99000-31140

Apply SUZUKI BOND “1215” or equivalent.

99000-31110

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1303” or equivalent.

99000-32030

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1322” or equivalent.

99000-32110

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1360” or equivalent.

99000-32130

Use engine coolant or equivalent.

99000-99032-11X

Use fork oil or equivalent.

99000-99001-SS8

Apply or use brake fluid.

Use special tool.

Do not reuse.

Note on reassembly.

Abbreviations

B718H10101002

A:

ABDC:

After Bottom Dead Center

ABS:

Anti-lock brake system

AC:

Alternating Current

ACL:

Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Box

API:

American Petroleum Institute

ATDC:

After Top Dead Center

A/F:

Air Fuel Mixture

B:

BBDC:

Before Bottom Dead Center

BTDC:

Before Top Dead Center

B+:

Battery Positive Voltage

C:

CKP Sensor:

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS)

CKT:

Circuit

CLP Switch:

Clutch Lever Position Switch (Clutch

Switch)

CO:

Carbon Monoxide

CPU:

Central Processing Unit

D:

DC:

Direct Current

DMC:

Dealer Mode Coupler

DOHC:

Double Over Head Camshaft

DRL:

Daytime Running Light

DTC:

Diagnostic Trouble code

E:

ECM:

Engine Control Module Engine Control Unit

(ECU) (FI Control Unit)

ECT Sensor:

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

(ECTS)

Water Temp. Sensor (WTS)

F:

FI:

Fuel Injection, Fuel Injector

FP:

Fuel pump

FPR:

Fuel Pressure Regulator

FP Relay:

Fuel Pump Relay

G:

GEN:

Generator

GND:

Ground

GP Switch:

Gear Position Switch

H:

HC:

Hydrocarbons

HO2 sensor:

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

I:

IAP Sensor:

Intake Air Pressure Sensor (IAPS)

IAT Sensor:

Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS)

IG:

Ignition

ISC Valve:

Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV)

J:

JASO:

Japanese Automobile Standards Organization

L:

LCD:

Liquid Crystal Display

LED:

Light Emitting Diode (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

LH:

Left Hand

M:

MAL-CODE:

Malfunction Code (Diagnostic Code)

Max:

Maximum

MIL:

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (LED)

Min:

Minimum

N:

NOx:

Nitrogen Oxides

O:

OHC:

Over Head Camshaft

OPS:

Oil Pressure Switch

P:

PAIR:

Pulsed Secondary Air Injection

PCV:

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Crankcase

Breather)

R:

RH:

Right Hand

ROM:

Read Only Memory

S:

SAE:

Society of Automotive Engineers

SDS:

Suzuki Diagnosis System

STC System:

Secondary Throttle Control System

(STCS)

STP Sensor:

Secondary Throttle Position Sensor

(STPS)

ST Valve:

Secondary Throttle Valve (STV)

STV Actuator:

Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator

(STVA)

T:

TO Sensor:

Tip-over Sensor (TOS)

TP Sensor:

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

SAE-to-Former SUZUKI Term

B718H10101012

This list shows SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers)

J1930 terms and abbreviations which may be used in this manual in compliance with SAE recommendations, as well as their former SUZUKI names.

Ex. SAE term (Abbreviation): Former SUZUKI term

A:

Air Cleaner (ACL):

Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Box

B:

General Information: 0A-2

Battery Positive Voltage (B+):

Battery Voltage, +B

C:

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP Sensor):

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS), Crank Angle

D:

Data Link Connector (DLC):

Dealer Mode Coupler

Diagnostic Test Mode (DTM):

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC):

Diagnostic Code,

Malfunction Code

E:

Electronic Ignition (EI):

Engine Control Module (ECM):

Engine Control

Module (ECM), Fl Control Unit, Engine Control Unit

(ECU)

Engine Coolant Level (ECL):

Coolant Level

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT):

Coolant

Temperature, Engine Coolant Temperature, Water

Temperature

Engine Speed (RPM):

Engine Speed (RPM)

Evaporative Emission (EVAP):

Evaporative Emission

Evaporative Emission Canister (EVAP Canister):

(Canister)

F:

Fan Control (FC):

Fuel Level Sensor:

Fuel Level Sensor, Fuel Level

Gauge

Fuel Pump (FP):

Fuel Pump (FP)

G:

Generator (GEN):

Generator

Ground (GND):

Ground (GND, GRD)

H:

Hydrocarbons (HC):

Hydrocarbons

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S):

Heated Oxygen

Sensor (HO2S), O2 sensor

I:

Ignition Control Module (ICM):

Intake Air Temperature (IAT):

Intake Air Temperature

(IAT), Air Temperature

Idle Speed Control (ISC):

Ignition Control (IC):

Electronic Spark Advance (ESA)

Ignition Control Module (ICM):

Intake Air Temperature (IAT):

Intake Air Temperature

M:

(IAT), Air Temperature

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL):

LED Lamp,

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP):

Intake Air

Pressure (IAP), Intake Vacuum

Mass Air Flow (MAF):

Air Flow

O:

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD):

Self-Diagnosis Function,

Diagnostic

Open Loop (OL):

P:

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM):

Pulsed Secondary Air Injection (PAIR):

Pulse Air

Control (PAIR)

Purge Valve (Purge Valve):

Purge Valve (SP Valve)

R:

Random Access Memory (RAM):

0A-3 General Information:

Read Only Memory (ROM):

ROM

S:

Secondary Air Injection (AIR):

Secondary Throttle Control System (STCS):

STC

System (STCS)

Secondary Throttle Valve (STV):

ST Valve (STV)

Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA):

STV

Actuator (STVA)

T:

Throttle Body (TB):

Throttle Body (TB)

Throttle Body Fuel Injection (TBI):

Throttle Body Fuel

Injection (TBI)

Throttle Position Sensor (TP Sensor):

TP Sensor

(TPS)

V:

Voltage Regulator (VR):

Voltage Regulator

Volume Air Flow (VAF):

Air Flow

Vehicle Side View

B718H10101003

NOTE

Difference between illustration and actual motorcycles may exist depending on the markets.

SUZUKI GSF1250 (2007-model)

Right Side

SUZUKI GSF1250S (2007-model)

Right Side

Left Side

I718H1010003-01

I718H1010004-02

SUZUKI GSF1250A (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010001-01

Left Side

I718H1010005-01

I718H1010002-02

Left Side

SUZUKI GSF1250SA (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010006-01

General Information: 0A-4

Vehicle Identification Number

B718H10101004

The frame serial number or V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification

Number) “A” is stamped on the right side of the steering head pipe. The engine serial number “B” is located on the right side of the crankcase. These numbers are required especially for registering the machine and ordering spare parts.

“A”

I718H1010011-03

Left Side

“B”

I718H1010009-02

I718H1010010-03

I718H1010012-03

Fuel and Oil Recommendation

B718H10101005

Fuel (For USA and Canada)

Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane

(R/2 + M/2) or 91 octane or higher rated by the research method.

Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.

Fuel (For Other Countries)

Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane (Research

Method) or higher. Unleaded gasoline is recommended.

Engine Oil (For USA)

Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and life. Always select good quality engine oil.

Suzuki recommends the use of SUZUKI

PERFORMANCE 4 MOTOR OIL or equivalent engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO.

Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil.

If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select and alternative according to the chart.

0A-5 General Information:

Engine Oil (For Other Countries)

Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and life. Always select good quality engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO.

Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil.

If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select an alternative according to the chart.

I310G1010005-01

Brake Fluid

Specification and classification: DOT 4

!

WARNING

Since the brake system of this motorcycle is filled with a glycol-based brake fluid by the manufacturer, do not use or mix different types of fluid such as silicone-based and petroleum-based fluid for refilling the system, otherwise serious damage will result.

Do not use any brake fluid taken from old or used or unsealed containers.

Never reuse brake fluid left over from a previous servicing, which has been stored for a long period.

Front Fork Oil

Use fork oil SS8 or an equivalent fork oil.

Engine Coolant Recommendation

B718H10101011

Engine Coolant

Use an anti-freeze/engine coolant compatible with an aluminum radiator, mixed with distilled water only.

Water for mixing

Use distilled water only. Water other than distilled water can corrode and clog the aluminum radiator.

Anti-freeze/Engine coolant

The engine coolant perform as a corrosion and rust inhibitor as well as anti-freeze. Therefore, the engine coolant should be used at all times even though the atmospheric temperature in your area does not go down to freezing point.

Suzuki recommends the use of SUZUKI COOLANT antifreeze/engine coolant. If this is not available, use an equivalent which is compatible with an aluminum radiator.

Liquid amount of water/Engine coolant

Solution capacity (total)

3 250 ml (3.4/2.9 US/Imp qt)

For engine coolant mixture information, refer to “Engine

Coolant Description in Section 1F (Page 1F-1)”.

!

CAUTION

Mixing of anti-freeze/engine coolant should be limited to 60%. Mixing beyond it would reduce its efficiency. If the anti-freeze/engine coolant mixing ratio is below 50%, rust inhabiting performance is greatly reduced.

Be sure to mix it above 50% even though the atmospheric temperature does not go down to the freezing point.

BREAK-IN Procedures

B718H10101006

During manufacture only the best possible materials are used and all machined parts are finished to a very high standard but it is still necessary to allow the moving parts to “BREAK-IN” before subjecting the engine to maximum stresses. The future performance and reliability of the engine depends on the care and restraint exercised during its early life. The general rules are as follows.

1) Keep to these break-in engine speed limits:

Speed limits

Initial 800 km (500 miles): Below 4 500 r/min

Up to 1 600 km (1 000 miles): Below 7 000 r/min

Over 1 600 km (1 000 miles): Below 9 500 r/min

2) Upon reaching an odometer reading of 1 600 km (1

000 miles) you can subject the motorcycle to full throttle operation. However, do not exceed 9 500 r/ min at any time.

Cylinder Identification

B718H10101007

The four cylinders of this engine are identified as #1, 2, 3 and #4 cylinder, as counted from left to right (as viewed by the rider on the seat).

# 1 # 2 # 3 # 4

I718H1010013-01

General Information: 0A-6

Country and Area Codes

The following codes stand for the applicable country(-ies) and area(-s).

Code

GSF1250 K7 (E-02)

GSF1250 K7 (E-19)

GSF1250S K7 (E-02)

GSF1250S K7 (E-03)

GSF1250S K7 (E-19)

GSF1250S K7 (E-24)

GSF1250S K7 (E-28)

GSF1250S K7 (E-33)

GSF1250A K7 (E-02)

GSF1250A K7 (E-19)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-02)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-03)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-19)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-24)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-28)

GSF1250SA K7 (E-33)

Country or Area

U.K.

E.U.

U.K.

U.S.A (Except for

California)

E.U.

Australia

Canada

California (U.S.A)

U.K.

E.U.

U.K.

U.S.A (Except for

California)

E.U.

Australia

Canada

California (U.S.A)

Wire Color Symbols

Lbl

Lg

O

P

R

W

Y

B/Bl

Symbol

B

Bl

Br

Dbr

Dg

G

Gr

B/Br

B/G

B/Lg

B/O

B/R

B/W

B/Y

Bl/B

Bl/G

Bl/W

Wire Color

Black

Blue

Brown

Dark brown

Dark green

Green

Gray

Light blue

Light green

Orange

Pink

Red

White

Yellow

Black with Blue tracer

Black with Brown tracer

Black with Green tracer

Black with Light green tracer

Black with Orange tracer

Black with Red tracer

Black with White tracer

Black with Yellow tracer

Blue with Black tracer

Blue with Green tracer

Blue with White tracer

Gr/Y

O/G

O/R

O/W

O/Y

P/B

P/W

R/B

Symbol

Bl/Y

Br/B

G/B

G/Y

Gr/B

Gr/R

Gr/W

R/Bl

W/B

W/Bl

W/G

W/R

W/Y

Y/B

Y/Bl

Y/R

Y/W

Effective Frame No.

JS1CH122200100001 –

JS1CH122100100001 –

JS1CH111200100001 –

JS1GW72A 72100001 –

JS1CH111100100001 –

JS1CH111300100001 –

JS1GW72A 72100001 –

JS1GW72A 72100001 –

JS1CH124200100001 –

JS1CH124100100001 –

JS1CH113200100001 –

JS1GW72B 72100001 –

JS1CH113100100001 –

JS1CH113300100001 –

JS1GW72B 72100001 –

JS1GW72B 72100001 –

B718H10101008

Wire Color

Blue with Yellow tracer

Brown with Black tracer

Green with Black tracer

Green with Yellow tracer

Gray with Black tracer

Gray with Red tracer

Gray with White tracer

Gray with Yellow tracer

Orange with Green tracer

Orange with Red tracer

Orange with White tracer

Orange with Yellow tracer

Pink with Black tracer

Pink with White tracer

Red with Black tracer

Red with Blue tracer

White with Black tracer

White with Blue tracer

White with Green tracer

White with Red tracer

White with Yellow tracer

Yellow with Black tracer

Yellow with Blue tracer

Yellow with Red tracer

Yellow with White tracer

B718H10101009

0A-7 General Information:

Warning, Caution and Information Labels Location

[B]

9

[C]

12, 13

[D]

7

B718H10101010

3

6

[A]

1

2

11

1. Noise label

2. Information label

3. Vacuum hose routing label

4. Fuel caution label

5. Manual notice label

6. Screen label

7. Screen label

8. Warning steering label

9. Tire information label

10. General warning label

11. ICES Canada label

12. I.D. plate

13. Safety plate

[A]: Frame head (Left side)

[B]: Chain cover

[C]: Frame side tube (Right side)

[D]: Cowling body

10

8

GSF1250/A

For E-02

For E-02, 19

For E-02, 19

For E-02, 19

4

GSF1250S/SA

For E-03, 24, 33

For E-03, 28, 33

For E-33

For E-02, 24

For E-03, 33

For E-03, 19, 24, 28, 33

For E-28

For E-03, 19, 24, 28, 33

For E-03, 19, 24, 28, 33

For E-03, 19, 24, 28, 33

For E-28

For E-02, 19, 24

For E-03, 28, 33

5

I718H1010016-02

Electrical Components Location

Component Location

4

1

5

2

3

6

General Information: 0A-8

B718H10103001

8

7

7

10

9

11

1. Fuel pump relay

2. Starter relay/Main fuse

3. Cooling fan relay

4. Battery

5. Fuel pump

13

6. Fuel level gauge

7. Ignition coil/plug cap

8. PAIR control solenoid valve

9. TO sensor

10. ECM

12

14

11. Mode selection switch coupler

12. ISC valve

13. STV actuator

14. Oil pressure switch

I718H1010014-03

0A-9 General Information:

15

16

16

17

19

18

20

21

22

23

24

28

26

27

25

15. IAP sensor (No.1)

16. Fuel injector

17. IAP/TP/IAT sensor

18. STP sensor

19. ECT sensor

20. Fuse box

21. Turn signal/side-stand relay

22. Horn

23. Cooling fan

24. CKP sensor

25. Generator

26. Regulator/rectifier

31

27. GP switch

28. Starter motor

29. Speed sensor

30. HO2 sensor

31. Side-stand switch

29

30

I718H1010015-04

Specifications

Specifications (GSF1250/S)

NOTE

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions and dry mass

Item

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Ground clearance

Seat height

Dry mass

Specification

2 130 mm (83.9 in)

790 mm (31.1 in)

1 095 mm (43.1 in)

1 235 mm (48.6 in)

1 485 mm (58.5 in)

135 mm (5.3 in)

785/805 mm (30.9/31.7 in)

222 kg (489 lbs)

225 kg (496 lbs)

Engine

Item

Type

Number of cylinders

Bore

Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Carburetor

Air cleaner

Starter system

Lubrication system

Idle speed

Drive train

Item

Clutch

Transmission

Gearshift pattern

Primary reduction ratio

Gear ratios

Low

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

Top

Final reduction ratio

Drive chain

Specification

4-stroke, liquid-cooled, DOHC

4

79.0 mm (3.110 in)

64.0 mm (2.519 in)

1 255 cm 3 (76.6 cu. in)

10.5 : 1

Fuel injection

Non-woven fabric element

Electric

Wet sump

1 200

±

100 r/min

Specification

Wet multi-plate type

6-speed constant mesh

1-down, 5-up

1.537 (83/54)

3.076 (40/13)

2.058 (35/17)

1.550 (31/20)

1.304 (30/23)

1.160 (29/25)

1.071 (30/28)

2.388 (43/18)

RK GB50GSVZ3, 118 links

General Information: 0A-10

B718H10107001

Remark

GSF1250

GSF1250S

Low/High

GSF1250

GSF1250S

Remark

Remark

0A-11 General Information:

Chassis

Item

Front suspension

Rear suspension

Front suspension stroke

Rear wheel travel

Steering angle

Caster

Tail

Turning radius

Front brake

Rear brake

Front tire size

Rear tire size

Specification

Telescopic, coil spring, oil damped

Link type, coil spring, oil damped

130 mm (5.1 in)

136 mm (5.4 in)

35

°

(right & left)

25

°

20’

104 mm (4.09 in)

2.8 m (9.2 ft)

Disc brake, twin

Disc brake

120/70ZR17M/C (58W), tubeless

180/55ZR17M/C (73W), tubeless

Electrical

Ignition type

Ignition timing

Spark plug

Battery

Generator

Main fuse

Fuse

Headlight

Item

Position light

Turn signal light

Brake light/Taillight

License plate light

Speedometer light

Tachometer light

Neutral indicator light

High beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator light

Oil pressure indicator light

Coolant temperature indicator light

Fuel injection indicator light

Capacities

Fuel tank

Engine oil

Item

Including reserve

Oil change

With filter change

Overhaul

Coolant

Specification

Electronic ignition (Transistorized)

8

°

B.T.D.C. at 1 200 r/min

NGK CR7E or DENSO U22ESR-N

12 V 36 kC (10 Ah)/10 HR

Three-phase A.C. generator

30 A

10/10/15/15/10/15 A

12 V 60/55 W (H4)

12 V 55 W (H7) + 12 V 55 W (H7)

12 V 5 W

12 V 5 W x 2

12 V 21 W

12 V 21/5 W

12 V 5 W

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

Specification

18.5 L (4.9/4.1 US/lmp gal)

19.0 L (5.0/4.2 US/lmp gal)

3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

3 500 ml (3.7/3.1 US/lmp qt)

3 700 ml (3.9/3.3 US/lmp qt)

3.3 L (3.5/2.9 US/lmp gal)

Remark

Remark

GSF1250

GSF1250S

GSF1250

GSF1250S

Remark

E-33

Others

Specifications (GSF1250A/SA)

NOTE

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions and dry mass

Item

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheelbase

Ground clearance

Seat height

Dry mass

Specification

2 130 mm (83.9 in)

790 mm (31.1 in)

1 095 mm (43.1 in)

1 235 mm (48.6 in)

1 485 mm (58.5 in)

135 mm (5.3 in)

785/805 mm (30.9/31.7 in)

226 kg (498 lbs)

229 kg (504 lbs)

Engine

Item

Type

Number of cylinders

Bore

Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Carburetor

Air cleaner

Starter system

Lubrication system

Idle speed

Drive train

Item

Clutch

Transmission

Gearshift pattern

Primary reduction ratio

Gear ratios

Low

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

Top

Final reduction ratio

Drive chain

Specification

4-stroke, liquid-cooled, DOHC

4

79.0 mm (3.110 in)

64.0 mm (2.519 in)

1 255 cm 3 (76.6 cu. in)

10.5 : 1

Fuel injection

Non-woven fabric element

Electric

Wet sump

1 200

±

100 r/min

Specification

Wet multi-plate type

6-speed constant mesh

1-down, 5-up

1.537 (83/54)

3.076 (40/13)

2.058 (35/17)

1.550 (31/20)

1.304 (30/23)

1.160 (29/25)

1.071 (30/28)

2.388 (43/18)

RK GB50GSVZ3, 118 links

General Information: 0A-12

B718H10107002

Remark

GSF1250A

GSF1250SA

Low/High

GSF1250A

GSF1250SA

Remark

Remark

0A-13 General Information:

Chassis

Item

Front suspension

Rear suspension

Front suspension stroke

Rear wheel travel

Steering angle

Caster

Tail

Turning radius

Front brake

Rear brake

Front tire size

Rear tire size

Specification

Telescopic, coil spring, oil damped

Link type, coil spring, oil damped

130 mm (5.1 in)

136 mm (5.4 in)

35

°

(right & left)

25

°

20’

104 mm (4.09 in)

2.8 m (9.2 ft)

Disc brake, twin

Disc brake

120/70ZR17M/C (58W), tubeless

180/55ZR17M/C (73W), tubeless

Electrical

Ignition type

Ignition timing

Spark plug

Battery

Generator

Main fuse

Fuse

Headlight

Item

Position light

Turn signal light

Brake light/Taillight

License plate light

Speedometer light

Tachometer light

Neutral indicator light

High beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator light

Oil pressure indicator light

Coolant temperature indicator light

Fuel injection indicator light

ABS indicator light

Capacities

Fuel tank

Engine oil

Item

Including reserve

Oil change

With filter change

Overhaul

Coolant

Specification

Electronic ignition (Transistorized)

8

°

B.T.D.C. at 1 200 r/min

NGK CR7E or DENSO U22ESR-N

12 V 36 kC (10 Ah)/10 HR

Three-phase A.C. generator

30 A

10/10/15/15/15/10/20/15 A

12 V 60/55 W (H4)

12 V 55 W (H7) + 12 V 55 W (H7)

12 V 5 W

12 V 5 W x 2

12 V 21 W

12 V 21/5 W

12 V 5 W

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

Specification

18.5 L (4.9/4.1 US/lmp gal)

19.0 L (5.0/4.2 US/lmp gal)

3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

3 500 ml (3.7/3.1 US/lmp qt)

3 700 ml (3.9/3.3 US/lmp qt)

3.3 L (3.5/2.9 US/lmp gal)

Remark

Remark

GSF1250A

GSF1250SA

GSF1250A

GSF1250SA

Remark

E-33

Others

Special Tool

Special Tools and Equipment

General Information: 0A-14

B718H10108002

09900–06107

Snap ring pliers

09900–06108

Snap ring pliers

09900–18740

Hexagon socket (24 mm)

09900–20102

Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, 200 mm)

09900–20202

Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 – 50 mm)

09900–20204

Micrometer (75 – 100 mm)

09900–20205

Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)

09900–20530

Cylinder gauge set

09900–20602

Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 mm)

09900–20605

Dial calipers (1/100 mm, 10 – 34 mm)

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm,

10 mm)

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

09900–20805

Tire depth gauge

09900–20806

Thickness gauge

09900–21304

V-block (100 mm)

09900–22301

Plastigauge (0.025 –

0.076 mm)

09900–22302

Plastigauge (0.051 –

0.152 mm)

09900–22403

Small bore gauge (18

– 35 mm)

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

09904–41010

SDS set

09910–60611

Universal clamp wrench

09913–50121

Oil seal remover

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

0A-15 General Information:

09915–40610

Oil filter wrench

09915–40611

Oil filter wrench

09915–63311

Compression gauge attachment

09915–64512

Compression gauge

09915–74521

Oil pressure gauge hose

09915–74540

Oil pressure gauge attachment

09915–77331

Meter (for high pressure)

09916–10911

Valve lapper set

09916–14510

Valve spring compressor

09916–14521

Valve spring compressor attachment

09916–33210

Valve guide reamer

(4.5 mm)

09916–34542

Reamer handle

09916–34580

Valve guide reamer

(10.8 mm)

09916–43211

Valve guide remover/ installer

09916–43230

Attachment

09916–74521

Holder body

09916–74550

Band (Piston diam.: 73

– 85 mm)

09916–84511

Valve adjuster driver

09917–47011

Vacuum pump gauge

09920–31020

Extension handle

09920–53740

Clutch sleeve hub holder

09921–20210

Bearing remover

09921–20240

Bearing remover set

09922–22711

Drive chain cutting and joining tool

09923–73210

Bearing remover

General Information: 0A-16

09923–74511

Bearing remover

09924–84510

Bearing installer set

09924–84521

Bearing installer set

09930–10121

Spark plug wrench set

09930–11920

Torx bit (JT40H)

09930–11940

Bit holder

09930–11950

Torx wrench

09930–30104

Rotor remover slide shaft

09930–34970

Rotor remover set

09930–44530

Rotor holder

09930–82710

Mode select switch

09930–82720

Mode select switch

09940–14911

Steering stem nut wrench

09940–40211

Fuel pressure gauge adapter

09940–40220

Fuel pressure gauge hose attachment

09940–52841

Inner rod holder

09940–52861

Front fork oil seal installer

09940–92720

Spring scale

09941–34513

Steering race installer

09941–54911

Bearing outer race remover

09941–74911

Steering bearing installer

09943–74111

Fork oil level gauge

99565–01010–010

CD-ROM Ver.10

0B-1 Maintenance and Lubrication:

General Information

Maintenance and Lubrication

Precautions

Precautions for Maintenance

B718H10200001

The “Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart” lists the recommended intervals for all the required periodic service work necessary to keep the motorcycle operating at peak performance and economy. Maintenance intervals are expressed in terms of kilometers, miles and months for your convenience.

NOTE

More frequent servicing may be required on motorcycles that are used under severe conditions.

General Description

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

B718H10201001

Refer to “Fuel and Oil Recommendation in Section 0A (Page 0A-4)”. and “Engine Coolant Recommendation in Section

0A (Page 0A-5)”.

Scheduled Maintenance

Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart

Item

Air cleaner element

Exhaust pipe bolts, muffler bolts and nut

Valve clearance

Spark plugs

Fuel line

Evaporative emission control system (E-33 only)

Engine oil

Engine oil filter

Throttle cable play

km miles months

Throttle valve synchronization

PAIR (air supply) system

Engine coolant

Radiator hose

Clutch hose

Clutch fluid

Drive chain

Brakes

Brake hose

B718H10205001

NOTE

I = Inspect and clean, adjust, replace or lubricate as necessary.

R = Replace.

T = Tighten.

1 000

600

2

T

Interval

6 000 12 000

4 000

12

I

I

7 500

24

I

T

R

18 000

11 000

36

R

I

I

R

R

I

I

(E-33 only)

I

R

I

I

I

R

I

I

R

R

I

I

— I

I

I

I

— I

Replace every 2 years.

I

I I

I

— I

Replace every 4 years.

I I

I I

Replace every 2 years.

I I

Clean and lubricate every 1 000 km (600 miles).

I

I

I

I

Replace every 4 years.

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

24 000

14 500

48

I

R

I

T

I

I

R

I

Item

Brake fluid

Tires

Steering

Front forks

Rear suspension

Chassis bolts and nuts

km miles months

1 000

600

2

I

T

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-2

I

T

Interval

6 000

4 000

12

I

12 000

7 500

24

I

18 000

11 000

Replace every 2 years.

36

I

I

I

I

I

T

I

T

24 000

14 500

48

I

I

I

I

I

T

Lubrication Points

Proper lubrication is important for smooth operation and long life of each working part of the motorcycle.

Major lubrication points are indicated as follows.

B718H10205002

NOTE

• Before lubricating each part, clean off any rusty spots and wipe off any grease, oil, dirt or grime.

• Lubricate exposed parts which are subject to rust, with a rust preventative spray whenever the motorcycle has been operated under wet or rainy conditions.

1

7

6

5

2

4

3

1. Clutch lever holder

2. Gearshift lever pivot

3. Side-stand pivot and spring hook

4. Center stand pivot and spring hook

5. Footrest pivot

8

6. Drive chain

7. Brake lever holder

8. Brake pedal pivot and footrest pivot

: Apply oil.

: Apply grease.

I718H1020006-02

0B-3 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Repair Instructions

Air Cleaner Element Replacement

B718H10206001

Replace air cleaner element

Every 18 000 km (11 000 miles, 36 months)

Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-6)”.

Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning

B718H10206002

Inspect air cleaner element

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

Inspection

1) Remove the air cleaner element. Refer to “Air

Cleaner Element Removal and Installation in Section

1D (Page 1D-6)”.

2) Inspect the air cleaner element for clogging. If it is clogged with dirt, replace it with a new one.

!

CAUTION

If driving under dusty conditions, clean the air cleaner element more frequently. The surest way to accelerate engine wear is to operate the engine without the element or to use a torn element. Make sure that the air cleaner is in good condition at all times. Life of the engine depends largely on this component.

Cleaning

1) Remove the air cleaner element. Refer to “Air

Cleaner Element Removal and Installation in Section

1D (Page 1D-6)”.

2) Carefully use compressed air to clean the air cleaner element.

!

CAUTION

Always apply compressed air to the inside of the air cleaner element. If compressed air is applied to the outside, dirt will be forced into the pores of the air cleaner element, restricting air flow through the air cleaner element.

I718H1020010-01

3) After cleaning the air cleaner element, reinstall the removed parts.

4) Drain water from the air cleaner by removing the drain plug.

I718H1020009-01

3) After finishing the air cleaner element inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

5) Reinstall the drain plug.

I718H1020011-01

Exhaust Pipe Bolt and Muffler Bolt Inspection

B718H10206005

Tighten exhaust pipe bolts, muffler bolt and nut

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) thereafter.

Check the exhaust pipe bolts, muffler bolts and nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,

16.5 lb-ft)

Muffler connecting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Muffler mounting bolt (d): 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

(d)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-4

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning

B718H10206004

Inspect spark plug

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

Heat Range

1) Remove the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

2) Check spark plug heat range by observing electrode color.

If it appears white or glazed, replace the spark plug with colder type one.

Heat range

NGK

Standard

CR7E

DENSO U22ESR-N

Cold type

CR8E

U24ESR-N

Hot type

CR6E

U20ESR-N

3) After finishing the spark plug inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Carbon Deposits

1) Remove the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

2) Check carbon deposits on the spark plug.

If carbon is deposited, remove it using a spark plug cleaner machine or carefully use a tool with a pointed end.

(c)

(b)

(a)

I718H1020007-04

Spark Plug Replacement

Replace spark plug

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

B718H10206003

Refer to “Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug

Removal and Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

I649G1020010-02

3) After finishing the spark plug inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

0B-5 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Spark Plug Gap

1) Remove the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

2) Measure the spark plug gap using a thickness gauge.

Adjust the spark plug gap if necessary.

Spark plug gap

0.7 – 0.8 mm (0.028 – 0.030 in)

3) Move the cowling by removing the screws.

(GSF1250S/SA)

(A)

I649G1020011-04

3) After finishing the spark plug inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Electrodes Condition

1) Remove the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

2) Check to see the worn or burnt condition of the electrodes.

If it is extremely worn or burnt, replace the plug. And also replace the plug if it has a broken insulator, or damaged thread.

3) After finishing the spark plug inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment

B718H10206006

Inspect valve clearance

Initially every 24 000 km (14 500 miles, 48 months).

Inspection

Valve clearance adjustment must be checked and adjusted, a) at the time of periodic inspection, b) when the valve mechanism is serviced, and c) when the camshafts are removed for servicing.

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the frame head covers. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

I718H1020012-01

4) Drain a small amount of engine coolant and remove the thermostat connector. Refer to “Thermostat

Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation in

Section 1F (Page 1F-9)”.

5) Remove the ignition coil/caps (1) and spark plugs.

Refer to “Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug

Removal and Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-

4)”.

6) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve (2) and reed valves (3). Refer to “PAIR Control Solenoid

Valve Removal and Installation in Section 1B

(Page 1B-6)” and “PAIR Reed Valve Removal and

Installation in Section 1B (Page 1B-6)”.

3

2

3

1

1

I718H1020013-02

7) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to “Engine

Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-24)”.

NOTE

The valve clearance specification is different for both intake and exhaust valves.

Valve clearance (When cold)

IN.: 0.10 – 0.20 mm (0.004 – 0.008 in)

EX.: 0.20 – 0.30 mm (0.008 – 0.012 in)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-6

NOTE

• The cam must be at positions, “A” or “B”, when checking or adjusting the valve clearance. Clearance readings should not be taken with the cam in any other position than these two positions.

• The valve clearance should be taken when each cylinder is at Top Dead Center (TDC) of compression stroke.

• The clearance specification is for COLD state.

• To turn the crankshaft for clearance checking, be sure to use a wrench, and rotate in the normal running direction.

“B”

“A” “B”

“C”

“D”

I718H1020014-01

“E”

“E”

I718H1020015-02

“F” “F”

8) Remove the right crankshaft cover (1).

I718H1020001-03

1

I718H1140011-01

9) Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the match mark “C” on the crankshaft with the mating surfaces

“D” of the crankcases. Also, position the notches “E” on the right end of each camshaft as shown. Then, measure the following valve clearances “F”.

• Cylinder #1: Intake and exhaust valve clearances

• Cylinder #2: Exhaust valve clearance

• Cylinder #3: Intake valve clearance

“F”

“F”

Notch “E” position faces outside

“F”

I718H1020016-01

Camshaft position

Measuring position

10) Insert the thickness gauge between the tappet and the cam. If the clearance is out of specification, adjust it to the specified range.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(A)

I718H1020017-01

0B-7 Maintenance and Lubrication:

11) Turn the crankshaft clockwise 360

°

(one full rotation) and align the match mark on the crankshaft with the mating surfaces of crankcases. Also, position the notches “E” on the right end of each camshaft as shown. Then, measure the following valve clearances “G”.

• Cylinder #2: Intake valve clearance

• Cylinder #3: Exhaust valve clearance

• Cylinder #4: Intake and exhaust valve clearances

12) Measure the valve clearances of the remaining valves “E” and adjust them if necessary.

“E”

“E”

2) Remove the tappet (1) and shim (2) by fingers or magnetic hand.

1

2

I718H1020019-01

3) Check the figures printed on the shim. These figures indicate the thickness of the shim, as illustrated.

“G” “G”

“G”

“G”

I718H1020020-01

Camshaft position

Measuring position

Notch “E” position faces inside

“G”

Adjustment

The clearance is adjusted by replacing the existing tappet shim with a thicker or thinner shim.

1) Remove the intake or exhaust camshafts. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-24)”.

I718H1020018-02

I310G1020023-01

4) Select a replacement shim that will provide a clearance within the specified range. For the purpose of this adjustment, a total of 21 sizes of tappet shim are available ranging from 1.20 to 2.20 mm in steps of 0.05 mm.

!

CAUTION

Both the right and left valve clearances should be as closely as possible.

5) Fit the selected shim (2) to the valve stem end, with numbers toward tappet. Be sure to check shim size with micrometer to ensure its size.

NOTE

• Be sure to apply engine oil to tappet shim top and bottom faces.

• When seating the tappet shim, be sure the figure printed surface faces the tappet.

2

I718H1020002-02

(INTAKE SIDE)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-8

I718H1020003-02

0B-9 Maintenance and Lubrication:

(EXHAUST SIDE)

I718H1020004-02

6) Install the camshafts and cam chain tension adjuster.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-28)”.

7) Rotate the engine so that the tappet is depressed fully. This will squeeze out oil trapped between the shim and the tappet that could cause an incorrect measurement, then check the clearance again to confirm that it is within the specified range.

8) After finishing the tappet clearance adjustment, reinstall the removed parts. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-28)”.

Fuel Line Inspection

B718H10206007

Inspect fuel line

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

Inspect the fuel line in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank mounting bolts. Refer to “Fuel

Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G

(Page 1G-9)”.

3) Lift up the fuel tank.

4) Inspect the fuel feed hose for damage and fuel leakage. If any defects are found, the fuel feed hose must be replaced.

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-10

Engine Oil and Filter Replacement

B718H10206008

Replace engine oil

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.

Replace oil filter

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

18 000 km (11 000 miles, 36 months) thereafter.

Oil should be changed while the engine is warm. Oil filter replacement at the above intervals, should be done together with the engine oil change.

Engine Oil Replacement

1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand.

2) Place an oil pan below the engine, and drain engine oil by removing the oil drain plug (1) and filler cap

(2).

1

I718H1020021-02

I718H1020008-07

5) After finishing the Fuel feed hose Inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Evaporative Emission Control System

Inspection (E-33 Only)

B718H10206034

Inspect evaporative emission control system

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

Inspect the evaporative emission control system periodically (E-33 only).

2

I718H1020022-01

0B-11 Maintenance and Lubrication:

3) Tighten the oil drain plug (1) to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Replace the gasket washer with a new one.

Tightening torque

Oil drain plug (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

3) Turn off the engine and wait about three minutes, then check the oil level through the inspection window (1). If the level is below mark “L”, add oil to

“F” level. If the level is above mark “F”, drain oil to “F” level.

1

1

(a)

I718H1020023-02

4) Pour new oil through the oil filler. When performing an oil change (without oil filter replacement), the engine will hold about 3.0 L (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt) of oil.

Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO.

5) Start up the engine and allow it to run for several minutes at idling speed.

6) Turn off the engine and wait about three minutes, then check the oil level through the inspection window (3). If the level is below the “L” mark, add oil to the “F” mark. If the level is above the “F” mark, drain the oil until the level reaches the “F” mark.

I718H1020027-01

Oil Filter Replacement

1) Drain engine oil as described in the engine oil replacement procedure.

2) Remove the oil filter (1) using the special tool.

NOTE

• Remove the oil filter wrench once the oil filter has come loose.

• Remove the oil filter from the left side of the vehicle. Push the radiator hose aside if it interferes with the removal operation.

Special tool

(A): 09915–40611 (Oil filter wrench)

3

1

(A)

I718H1020024-02

Oil Level Inspection

1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand.

2) Start up the engine and allow it to run for several minutes at idle speed.

I718H1020025-03

3) Apply engine oil lightly to the O-ring of new oil filter, before installation.

!

CAUTION

ONLY USE A GENUINE SUZUKI

MOTORCYCLE OIL FILTER.

Other manufacturer’s oil filters may differ in thread specifications (thread diameter and pitch), filtering performance and durability which may lead to engine damage or oil leaks. Also, do not use a genuine Suzuki automobile oil filter on this motorcycle.

4) Install a new oil filter. Turn it by hand until you feel that the oil filter O-ring contacts the oil filter mounting surface. Then, tighten the oil filter two full turns (or to specified torque) using the special tool.

NOTE

To properly tighten the oil filter, use the special tool. Never tighten the oil filter by hand only.

Special tool

(A): 09915–40611 (Oil filter wrench)

Tightening torque

Oil filter (a): 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.5 lb-ft)

1

(a)

(A)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-12

1) Loosen the lock-nut (1) of the throttle pulling cable

(2).

2) Turn the adjuster (3) in or out until the throttle cable play “a” (at the throttle grip) is between 2 – 4 mm

(0.08 – 0.16 in).

3) Tighten the lock-nut (1) while holding the adjuster

(3).

2

1

3

I718H1020026-01

5) Add new engine oil and check the oil level is as described in the engine oil replacement procedure.

Necessary amount of engine oil

Oil change: 3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

Oil and filter change: 3 500 ml (3.7/3.1 US/lmp qt)

Engine overhaul: 3 700 ml (3.9/3.3 US/lmp qt)

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment

B718H10206009

Inspect throttle cable play

Initially at 1 000 km (6 000 miles, 2 months) and every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.

Inspect and adjust the throttle cable play “a” as follows.

Throttle cable play “a”

2.0 – 4.0 mm (0.08 – 0.16 in)

“ a ”

I718H1020064-02

!

WARNING

After the adjustment is completed, check that handlebar movement does not raise the engine idle speed and that the throttle grip returns smoothly and automatically.

Throttle Valve Synchronization

B718H10206011

Inspect throttle valve synchronization

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

Inspect the throttle valve synchronization periodically.

Refer to “Throttle Valve Synchronization in Section 1D

(Page 1D-15)”.

PAIR System Inspection

Inspect PAIR system

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

B718H10206012

Inspect the PAIR (air supply) system periodically. Refer to “PAIR System Inspection in Section 1B (Page 1B-6)”.

Cooling System Inspection

B718H10206031

Inspect cooling system

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 6 months)

Replace engine coolant

Every 2 years

Engine Coolant Level Inspection

1) Keep the motorcycle upright with the center stand.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Construction in Section 9D (Page 9D-2)”.

I718H1020063-01

0B-13 Maintenance and Lubrication:

3) Check the engine coolant level by observing the full and lower lines on the engine coolant reservoir tank.

If the level is below the lower line, add engine coolant to the full line from the engine coolant reservoir tank filler.

L

F

3) Drain engine coolant by disconnecting the water pump outlet hose (2).

2

I718H1020065-02

4) Reinstall the seat.

Engine Coolant Change

Refer to “Engine Coolant Description in Section 1F

(Page 1F-1)”.

!

WARNING

Do not open the radiator cap when the engine is hot, as you may be injured by escaping hot liquid or vapor. Engine coolant may be harmful if swallowed or if it comes in contact with skin or eyes. If engine coolant gets into the eyes or in contact with the skin, flush thoroughly with plenty of water. If swallowed, induce vomiting and call physician immediately.

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the radiator cap (1).

I718H1020030-01

4) Flush the radiator with fresh water if necessary.

5) Reconnect the water pump outlet hose.

6) Pour the specified engine coolant up to the thermostat connector inlet.

Engine coolant capacity (excluding reservoir)

3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

7) Bleed air from the cooling circuit.

8) After changing engine coolant, reinstall the removed parts.

Air Bleeding From the Cooling Circuit

1) Support the motorcycle upright with the center stand.

2) Lift up the fuel tank by removing the mounting bolts.

Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in

Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Place a rag under the thermostat connector.

4) Pour engine coolant up to the thermostat connector inlet.

1

I718H1020031-02

I718H1020029-01

5) Slowly swing the motorcycle, right and left, to bleed the air trapped in the cooling circuit.

6) Add engine coolant up to the thermostat connector inlet.

7) Start up the engine and bleed air from the thermostat connector inlet completely.

8) Add engine coolant up to the thermostat connector inlet.

9) Repeat the 6), 7) procedures until no air bleeds from the thermostat connector inlet.

10) Close the radiator cap securely.

11) After warming up and cooling down the engine several times, add the engine coolant up to the full level of the reservoir.

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the radiator is filled with engine coolant up to the reservoir full level.

12) Reinstall the removed parts.

Radiator Hose Inspection

Check the radiator hoses for crack, damage or engine coolant leakage. If any defect is found, replace the radiator hose with a new one.

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-14

Clutch System Inspection

B718H10206013

Inspect clutch hose and clutch fluid

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

!

WARNING

The clutch system of this motorcycle is filled with a glycol-based brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid such as siliconebased or petroleum-based. Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid left over from the last servicing or stored for a long period of mine. Check the clutch hose and hose joints for cracks and fluid leakage.

Clutch Fluid Level Check

1) Keep the motorcycle upright and place the handlebars straight.

2) Check the clutch fluid level by observing the lower limit line on the clutch fluid reservoir.

When the clutch fluid level is below the lower limit line, replenish with clutch fluid that meets the following specification.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

I718H1020032-01

I718H1020034-01

Clutch Hose Inspection

1) Remove the seat and left frame cover. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

I718H1020033-01

0B-15 Maintenance and Lubrication:

3) Inspect the clutch hose for crack, damage or clutch fluid leakage. If it is damaged, replace the clutch hose with a new one.

I718H1020035-01

4) After finishing the clutch hose inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Clutch Hose Replacement

B718H10206014

Replace clutch hose

Every 4 years

Refer to “Clutch Hose Removal and Installation in

Section 5C (Page 5C-5)”.

Clutch Fluid Replacement

B718H10206016

Replace clutch fluid

Every 2 years

Refer to “Clutch Fluid Replacement in Section 5C

(Page 5C-4)”.

Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit

Refer to “Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit in Section

5C (Page 5C-4)”.

Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment

B718H10206017

Inspect drive chain

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.

Drive Chain Visual Check

1) With the transmission in neutral, support the motorcycle using the center-stand and turn the rear wheel slowly by hand.

2) Visually check the drive chain for the possible defects listed as follows. If any defects are found, the drive chain must be replaced. Refer to “Drive Chain

Replacement in Section 3A (Page 3A-7)”.

• Loose pins

• Damaged rollers

• Dry or rusted links

• Kinked or binding links

• Excessive wear

• Improper chain adjustment

• Missing O-ring seals

NOTE

When replacing the drive chain, replace the drive chain and sprockets as a set.

2

1

I649G1020032-02

1. O-ring seal 2. Grease

Drive Chain Length Inspection

1) Loosen the axle nut (1).

2) Loosen the chain adjuster lock-nuts (2).

3) Give tension to the drive chain fully by turning both chain adjuster bolts (3).

3

2

1

3

2

I718H1020036-02

4) Count out 21 pins (20 pitches) on the chain and measure the distance between the two points. If the distance exceeds the service limit, the chain must be replaced.

Drive chain 20-pitch length

Service limit: 319.4 mm (12.57 in)

1 2 3 19 20 21

I649G1020034-02

5) After finishing the drive chain length inspection, adjust the drive chain slack.

Drive Chain Slack Adjustment

1) Place the motorcycle on its center stand for fine adjustment.

2) Loosen the axle nut (1).

3) Loosen the chain adjuster lock-nuts (2).

4) Loosen or tighten both chain adjuster bolts (3) until there is 20 – 30 mm (0.8 – 1.2 in) “a” of slack at the middle of the chain between the engine and rear sprockets as shown.

!

CAUTION

The reference marks “A” on both sides of the swingarm and the edge of each chain adjuster must be aligned to ensure that the front and rear wheels are correctly aligned.

Drive chain slack “a”

Standard 20 – 30 mm (0.8 – 1.2 in)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-16

5) After adjusting the drive chain, tighten the axle nut

(1) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear axle nut: 100 N·m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

6) Tighten both chain adjuster lock-nuts (2) securely.

7) Recheck the drive chain slack after tightening the axle nut.

Drive Chain Cleaning and Lubricating

B718H10206018

Clean and lubricate drive chain

Every 1 000 km (600 miles)

Clean and lubricate the drive chain in the following procedures:

1) Clean the drive chain with kerosine. If the drive chain tends to rust quickly, the intervals must be shortened.

!

CAUTION

Do not use trichloroethylene, gasoline or any similar solvent.

These fluids have too great a dissolving power for this chain and they can damage the

O-rings. Use only kerosine to clean the drive chain.

2) After cleaning and drying the chain, oil it with a heavyweight motor oil.

!

CAUTION

• Do not use any oil sold commercially as

“drive chain oil”. Such oil can damage the

O-rings.

• The standard drive chain is a RK

GB50GSVZ3. SUZUKI recommends to use this standard drive chain as a replacement.

2

2

“A”

“A”

3

1

3

I718H1020037-02

I718H1020038-01

“a”

I649G1020036-02

0B-17 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Brake System Inspection

B718H10206019

Inspect brake system

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.

Inspect brake hose and brake fluid

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

!

WARNING

• The brake system of this motorcycle is filled with a glycol-based brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid such as silicone-based and petroleum-based fluids. Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers.

Never reuse brake fluid left over from the last servicing or stored for a long period of time.

• Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe running and immediately discolor painted surfaces. Check the brake hoses and hose joints for cracks and oil leakage before riding.

Brake Fluid Level Check

1) Keep the motorcycle upright and place the handlebars straight.

2) Check the brake fluid level by observing the lower limit lines on the front and rear brake fluid reservoirs.

When the brake fluid level is below the lower limit line, replenish with brake fluid that meets the following specification.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

I718H1020040-01

Brake Pads Check

The extent of brake pad wear can be checked by observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pad. When the wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads with new ones. Refer to “Front Brake Pad Replacement in Section 4B (Page 4B-2)” and “Rear Brake Pad

Replacement in Section 4C (Page 4C-2)”.

!

CAUTION

Replace the brake pad as a set, otherwise braking performance will be adversely affected.

“A”

I718H1020041-01

I718H1020039-01

“A”

I718H1020042-01

Front and Rear Brake Hose Inspection

1) Remove the seat, right frame cover and fuel tank.

(GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Exterior Parts

Construction in Section 9D (Page 9D-2)” and “Fuel

Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G

(Page 1G-9)”.

2) Inspect the brake hoses and hose joints for crack, damage or brake oil leakage. If any defects are found, replace the brake hose with a new one. Refer to “Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation in

Section 4A (Page 4A-12)” and “Rear Brake Hose

Removal and Installation in Section 4A (Page 4A-

13)”.

I718H1020043-01

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-18

GSF1250A/SA only

I718H1020046-01

3) Reinstall the removed parts. (GSF1250A/SA)

Brake Pedal Height Inspection and Adjustment

1) Inspect the brake pedal height “a” between the pedal top face and footrest.

Adjust the brake pedal height if necessary.

Brake pedal height “a”

Standard: 50 – 60 mm (2.0 – 2.4 in)

2) Loosen the lock-nut (1).

3) Turn the push rod (2) until the brake pedal becomes

50 – 60 mm (2.0 – 2.4 in.) “a” below the top of the footrest.

4) Tighten the lock-nut (1) securely.

Tightening torque

Rear master cylinder rod lock-nut (a): 18 N·m (

1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

2

“ a ”

I718H1020044-01

1

(a)

GSF1250A/SA only

I718H1020045-01

I718H1020066-07

Brake Hose Replacement

Replace brake hose

Every 4 years

Refer to “Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation in

Section 4A (Page 4A-12)” and “Rear Brake Hose

Removal and Installation in Section 4A (Page 4A-13)”.

Brake Fluid Replacement

Replace brake fluid

Every 2 years

Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement in Section 4A

(Page 4A-10)”.

0B-19 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit

Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section

4A (Page 4A-8)”.

Rear Brake Light Switch Adjustment

Refer to “Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection and

Adjustment in Section 4A (Page 4A-8)”.

Tire Inspection

B718H10206024

Inspect tire

Every 6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months)

Tire Tread Condition

Operating the motorcycle with excessively worn tires will decrease riding stability and consequently invite a dangerous situation. It is highly recommended to replace a tire when the remaining depth of tire tread reaches the following specification.

Special tool

: 09900–20805 (Tire depth gauge)

Tire tread depth (Service limit)

Front: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

Rear: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

I310G1020068-02

Tire Pressure

If the tire pressure is too high or too low, steering will be adversely affected and tire wear increased. Therefore, maintain the correct tire pressure for good roadability or shorter tire life will result. Cold inflation tire pressure is as follows.

Cold inflation tire pressure

Solo riding kPa kgf/cm 2

Front 250

Rear 290

2.50

2.90

Dual riding psi kPa kgf/cm 2

36 250

42 290

2.50

2.90

psi

36

42

I310G1020069-02

!

CAUTION

The standard tire fitted on this motorcycle is

120/70 ZR17 M/C (58W) for front and 180/55

ZR17 M/C (73W) for rear. The use of tires other than those specified may cause instability. It is highly recommended to use the specified tires.

Tire type

DUNLOP

• Front: D218FT

• Rear: D218N

Steering System Inspection

B718H10206025

Inspect steering system

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months) thereafter.

Steering should be adjusted properly for smooth turning of handlebars and safe running. Overtighten steering prevents smooth turning of the handlebars and too loose steering will cause poor stability.

1) Check that there is no play in the front fork.

2) Support the motorcycle so that the front wheel is off the ground, with the wheel facing straight ahead, grasp the lower fork tubes near the axle and pull forward.

If play is found, readjust the steering. Refer to

“Steering Tension Adjustment in Section 6B

(Page 6B-10)”.

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-20

Rear Suspension Inspection

Inspect rear suspension

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

B718H10206027

Inspect the rear shock absorbers for oil leakage and check that there is no play in the swingarm.

Replace any defective parts, if necessary. Refer to “Rear

Shock Absorber Removal and Installation in Section 2C

(Page 2C-3)”, “Cushion Lever Removal and Installation in Section 2C (Page 2C-5)” and “Swingarm / Cushion

Rod Removal and Installation in Section 2C (Page 2C-

7)”.

I718H1020050-01

I718H1020048-03

Front Fork Inspection

Inspect front fork

Every 12 000 km (7 500 miles, 24 months)

B718H10206026

Inspect the front forks for oil leakage, scoring or scratches on the outer surface of the inner tubes.

Replace any defective parts, if necessary. Refer to

“Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly in Section 2B

(Page 2B-4)”.

I718H1020051-01

I718H1020049-01

0B-21 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection

B718H10206028

Tighten chassis bolt and nut

Initially at 1 000 km (600 miles, 2 months) and every

6 000 km (4 000 miles, 12 months) thereafter.

Check that all chassis bolts and nuts are tightened to their specified torque.

1

(a)

1

(a)

1. Frame down tube

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

1

(a)

I718H1020052-01

3

(c)

3

(c)

2

(b)

2. Steering stem head nut

3. Handlebar holder bolt

: 65 N

⋅ m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020053-01

4

(c)

8. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Upper)

9. Cushion rod mounting nut

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

: 78 N

⋅ m (7.8 kgf-m, 56.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020056-01

11

(f)

12

(f)

10

(a)

10. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Lower)

11. Cushion lever mounting nut

12. Cushion rod mounting nut

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

: 78 N

⋅ m (7.8 kgf-m, 56.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020057-01

5

(d)

4. Front fork upper clamp bolt

5. Handlebar holder set nut

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 45 N

⋅ m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020054-02

7

(c)

6

(e)

6. Front brake master cylinder mounting bolt

7. Brake hose union bolt

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1020055-02

8

(a)

9

(f)

Maintenance and Lubrication: 0B-22

13

(c)

13. Front fork lower clamp bolt

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020058-01

16

(c)

15

(c)

18

(i)

17

(h)

7

(c)

23

22

(i)

(c)

24

(g)

21

(k)

7. Brake hose union bolt

21. Front footrest bolt

22. Rear brake master cylinder mounting bolt

23. Rear brake master cylinder rod lock-nut

24. Swingarm pivot nut

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 18 N

⋅ m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

: 35 N

⋅ m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)

I718H1020061-02

7

(c)

14

(g)

15

(c)

25

(g)

I718H1020059-01

7. Brake hose union bolt

14. Front axle bolt

15. Brake disc bolt (Front)

16. Front axle pinch bolt

17. Front brake caliper mounting bolt

18. Air bleeder valve (Front brake)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

: 7.5 N

⋅ m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

19

(j)

7

(c)

20

(c)

20

7. Brake hose union bolt

19. Air bleeder valve (Rear brake)

20. Brake disc bolt (Rear)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 6 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

(c)

I718H1020060-01

I718H1020062-02

25. Rear axle nut

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

Compression Pressure Check

B718H10206029

Refer to “Compression Pressure Check in Section 1D

(Page 1D-3)”.

Oil Pressure Check

B718H10206030

Refer to “Oil Pressure Check in Section 1E (Page 1E-

3)”.

SDS check

B718H10206033

Refer to “SDS Check in Section 1A (Page 1A-15)”.

0B-23 Maintenance and Lubrication:

Specifications

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Exhaust pipe bolt

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt

Muffler connecting bolt

Muffler mounting bolt

Oil drain plug

Oil filter

Rear axle nut

Rear master cylinder rod lock-nut

N

m

23

23

23

26

23

20

100

18

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.3

2.0

10.0

1.8

lb-ft

16.5

16.5

16.5

19.0

16.5

14.5

72.5

13.0

B718H10207001

Note

) (Page 0B-4)

) (Page 0B-4)

) (Page 0B-4)

) (Page 0B-4)

) (Page 0B-11)

) (Page 0B-12)

) (Page 0B-16)

) (Page 0B-18)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection (Page 0B-21)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Recommended Service Material

Special Tools and Equipment

Material

Brake fluid

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

DOT 4 —

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Lubrication Points (Page 0B-2)”

Special Tool

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

) (Page 0B-6)

09900–20805

Tire depth gauge

) (Page 0B-19)

Note

) (Page 0B-14) /

) (Page 0B-17)

B718H10208001

B718H10208002

09915–40611

Oil filter wrench

) (Page 0B-11) /

) (Page 0B-12)

General Information

Service Data

Service Data

Valve + Guide

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Valve diam.

Valve clearance (when cold)

Valve guide to valve stem clearance

Valve stem deflection

Valve guide I.D.

Valve stem O.D.

Valve stem runout

Valve head thickness

Valve seat width

Valve head radial runout

Valve spring free length

Valve spring tension

IN.

EX.

IN.

EX.

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

Specifications

Standard

31 (1.22)

27 (1.06)

0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008)

0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.012)

0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015)

0.030 – 0.057 (0.0012 – 0.0022)

4.500 – 4.512 (0.1772 – 0.1776)

4.475 – 4.490 (0.1762 – 0.1768)

4.455 – 4.470 (0.1754 – 0.1760)

0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043)

Approx. 147 N (15.0 kgf, 33.1 lbs) at length 36.0 mm (1.42 in)

Camshaft + Cylinder Head

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Cam height

Camshaft journal oil clearance

Camshaft journal holder I.D.

Camshaft journal O.D.

Camshaft runout

Cam chain pin (at arrow “3”)

Cylinder head distortion

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

Standard

35.28 – 35.33 (1.389 – 1.391)

34.18 – 34.23 (1.346 – 1.348)

0.032 – 0.066 (0.0013 – 0.0026)

24.012 – 24.025 (0.9454 – 0.9459)

23.959 – 23.980 (0.9433 – 0.9441)

16th pin

Service Data: 0C-1

Limit

34.98 (1.377)

33.88 (1.334)

0.150 (0.0059)

0.10 (0.004)

0.20 (0.008)

B718H10307001

Limit

0.35 (0.014)

0.05 (0.002)

0.5 (0.02)

0.03 (0.001)

39.6 (1.56)

0C-2 Service Data:

Cylinder + Piston + Piston Ring

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Compression pressure

Compression pressure difference

Piston-to-cylinder clearance

Cylinder bore

Piston diam.

Cylinder distortion

Piston ring free end gap

Piston ring end gap

Piston ring-to-groove clearance

Piston ring groove width

Standard

1 300 – 1 700 kPa (13 – 17 kgf/cm 2 , 185 – 242 psi)

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

0.025 – 0.035 (0.0010 – 0.0014)

79.000 – 79.015 (3.1102 – 3.1108)

78.970 – 78.985 (3.1090 – 3.1096)

Measure 15 mm (0.6 in) from the skirt end.

IN

N

IN

N

Approx. 9 (0.35)

Approx. 9.5 (0.37)

0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008)

0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008)

1.01 – 1.03 (0.040 – 0.041)

Oil

1st

2nd

0.81 – 0.83 (0.032 – 0.033)

1.51 – 1.53 (0.059 – 0.060)

0.97 – 0.99 (0.038 – 0.039)

0.77 – 0.79 (0.030 – 0.031)

18.002 – 18.008 (0.7087 – 0.7090)

17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087)

Piston ring thickness

Piston pin bore I.D.

Piston pin O.D.

Conrod + Crankshaft

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Conrod small end I.D.

Conrod big end side clearance

Conrod big end width

Crank pin width

Conrod big end oil clearance

Crank pin O.D.

Crankshaft journal oil clearance

Crankshaft journal O.D.

Crankshaft thrust clearance

Crankshaft thrust bearing thickness

Crankshaft runout

Right side

Left side

Standard

18.010 – 18.018 (0.7091 – 0.7094)

0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008)

20.95 – 21.00 (0.825 – 0.827)

21.10 – 21.15 (0.831 – 0.833)

0.032 – 0.056 (0.0013 – 0.0022)

37.976 – 38.000 (1.4951 – 1.4961)

0.016 – 0.040 (0.0006 – 0.0016)

33.976 – 34.000 (1.3376 – 1.3386)

0.055 – 0.110 (0.0022 – 0.0043)

2.425 – 2.450 (0.0955 – 0.0965)

2.350 – 2.500 (0.0925 – 0.0984)

Limit

1 000 kPa

(10 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi)

200 kPa

(2 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi)

0.120 (0.0047)

Nicks or Scratches

78.880 (3.1055)

0.20 (0.008)

7.2 (0.28)

7.6 (0.30)

0.5 (0.020)

0.5 (0.020)

0.180 (0.0071)

0.150 (0.0059)

18.030 (0.7098)

17.980 (0.7079)

Limit

18.040 (0.7102)

0.30 (0.012)

0.080 (0.0031)

0.080 (0.0031)

0.05 (0.002)

Service Data: 0C-3

Oil Pump

Item

Oil pressure (at 60

°

C, 140

°

F)

Standard

100 – 400 kPa (1.0 – 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 14 – 57 psi) at 3 000 r/min

Clutch

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Clutch drive plate thickness

Clutch drive plate claw width

Clutch driven plate distortion

Clutch spring free length

Clutch master cylinder bore

Clutch master cylinder piston diam.

Clutch release cylinder bore

Clutch release cylinder piston diam.

Clutch fluid type

Transmission + Drive Chain

Unit: mm (in) Except ratio

Item

Primary reduction ratio

Final reduction ratio

Gear ratios

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

Shift fork to groove clearance

Shift fork groove width

Shift fork thickness

5th

Top

Drive chain

Drive chain slack (on center stand)

Gearshift lever height

No.1, 2, 3

No.1, 2, 3

Type

Links

20-pitch length

Standard

3.72 – 3.88 (0.146 – 0.153)

13.9 – 14.0 (0.547 – 0.551)

65.0 (2.56)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5511 – 0.5529)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505)

38.08 – 38.13 (1.500 – 1.501)

Brake fluid DOT 4

Standard

1.537 (83/54)

2.388 (43/18)

3.076 (40/13)

2.058 (35/17)

1.550 (31/20)

1.304 (30/23)

1.160 (29/25)

1.071 (30/28)

0.1 – 0.3 (0.004 – 0.012)

5.0 – 5.1 (0.197 – 0.201)

4.8 – 4.9 (0.189 – 0.193)

RK GB50GSVZ3

118 links

20 – 30 (0.8 – 1.2)

45 – 55 (1.8 – 2.2)

Thermostat + Radiator + Fan + Coolant

Item

Thermostat valve opening temperature

Thermostat valve lift

Standard/Specification

Approx. 82

°

C (180

°

F)

ECT sensor resistance

Radiator cap valve opening pressure

Cooling fan operating temperature

Engine coolant type

Engine coolant

20

°

C

(68

°

F)

8 mm (0.31 in) and over at 95

°

C (203

°

F)

Approx. 2.45 k

50

°

C

(122

°

F)

80

°

C

(176

°

F)

110

°

C

(230

°

F)

Approx. 0.811 k

Approx. 0.318 k

Approx. 0.142 k

OFF

ON

93 – 123 kPa (0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm

ON

OFF

2 , 13.2 – 17.5 psi)

Approx. 105

°

C (221

°

F)

Approx. 100

°

C (212

°

F)

Use an antifreeze/coolant compatible with aluminum radiator, mixed with distilled water only, at the ratio of 50:50.

Reservoir tank side

Engine side

Approx. 250 ml (0.3/0.2 US/lmp qt)

Approx. 3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

Limit

Limit

3.42 (0.135)

13.1 (0.52)

0.10 (0.004)

61.8 (2.43)

Limit

0.5 (0.02)

319.4 (12.75)

Note

0C-4 Service Data:

Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator

Item

Injector resistance

Fuel pump discharge amount

Fuel pressure regulator operating set pressure

Specification

11 – 13

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

166 ml (5.6/5.8 US/lmp oz) and more/10 sec.

Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2 , 43 psi)

Note

FI Sensors + Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator

Item

CKP sensor resistance

CKP sensor peak voltage

IAP sensor input voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor input voltage (No.2)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.2)

TP sensor input voltage

TP sensor output voltage

Closed

Opened

ECT sensor input voltage

ECT sensor output voltage

ECT sensor resistance

IAT sensor input voltage

IAT sensor output voltage

IAT sensor resistance

TO sensor resistance

Normal

TO sensor voltage

Leaning

Standard/Specification

90 – 150

2.0 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.7 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

2.0 – 3.0 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 1.1 V

Approx. 4.3 V

4.5 – 5.5 V

0.15 – 4.85 V

Approx. 2.45 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.4 V at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 2.56 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

16.5 – 22.3 k

0.4 – 1.4 V

3.7 – 4.4 V

GP switch voltage

Injector voltage

Ignition coil primary peak voltage

STP sensor input voltage

STP sensor output voltage

STV actuator resistance

ISC valve resistance

HO2 sensor resistance

HO2 sensor output voltage

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

EVAP purge control valve

Closed

Opened

0.6 V and more

Battery voltage

80 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 0.6 V

Approx. 4.5 V

Approx. 7.0

Approx. 20

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 8

at 23

°

C (73

°

F)

0.3 V and less at idle speed

0.6 V and more at 3 000 r/min

18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

Approx. 32

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Throttle Body

Item

Bore size

I.D. No.

Idle r/min.

Fast idle r/min.

Throttle cable play

Specification

1 200

36 mm

18H1 (For E-33), 18H0 (For the others)

±

100 r/min.

1 200 – 2 000 r/min. (When cold engine)

2.0 – 4.0 mm (0.08 – 0.16 in)

Note

When cranking

When leaning

65

°

From 1st to Top

When cranking

E-33 only

Service Data: 0C-5

Electrical

Unit: mm

Item

Firing order

Spark plug

Spark performance

CKP sensor resistance

CKP sensor peak voltage

Ignition coil resistance

Ignition coil primary peak voltage

Generator coil resistance

Generator maximum output

Generator no-load voltage (When engine is cold)

Regulated voltage

Starter motor brush length

Starter relay resistance

Type designation

Battery Capacity

Standard electrolyte S.G.

Headlight

HI

LO

Fuse size

Fuel

Ignition

Signal

Fan

Main

ABS motor (GSF1250A/

SA only)

ABS valve (GSF1250A/

SA only)

Wattage

Unit: W

Item

Headlight

HI

LO

Position/Parking light

Brake light/Taillight

Turn signal light

License plate light

Speedometer light

Tachometer light

Turn signal indicator light

High beam indicator light

Neutral position indicator light

Oil pressure indicator light

FI indicator light

Engine coolant temp. indicator light

ABS indicator light (GSF1250A/SA only)

Type

Specification

1

2

4

3

NGK: CR7E

DENSO: U22ESR-N

Gap

Primary

Secondary

0.7 – 0.8 (0.028 – 0.031)

Over 8 (0.3) at 1 atm.

90 – 150

2.0 V and more

1.1 – 1.9

10.8 – 16.2 k

80 V and more

0.2 – 0.8

Approx. 400 W at 5 000 r/min

60 V (AC) and more at 5 000 r/min

14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min

Standard 12.0 (0.47)

Limit

3 – 6

6.5 (0.26)

FT12A-BS

12 V 36 kC (10 Ah)/10 HR

1.330 at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

10 A

10 A

10 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

30 A

20 A

15 A

GSF1250/A

60

55

5

21/5

21 x 4

5

LED

LED

LED x 2

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

Specification

Note

When cranking

Terminal – Terminal

Plug cap – Terminal

GSF1250S/SA

55

5 x 2

0C-6 Service Data:

Brake + Wheel

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Rear brake pedal height

Brake disc thickness

Brake disc runout

Master cylinder bore

Master cylinder piston diam.

Brake caliper cylinder bore

Brake caliper piston diam.

Brake fluid type

Wheel rim runout

Wheel axle runout

Wheel rim size

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Axial

Radial

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Standard

50 – 60 (2.0 – 2.4)

4.8 – 5.2 (0.189 – 0.205)

4.8 – 5.2 (0.189 – 0.205)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

Leading 27.050 – 27.126 (1.0650 – 1.0680)

Trailing 30.280 – 30.356 (1.1921 – 1.1951)

38.180 – 38.230 (1.5031 – 1.5051)

Leading

Trailing

26.920 – 26.970 (1.0598 – 1.0618)

30.150 – 30.200 (1.1870 – 1.1890)

38.080 – 38.130 (1.4992 – 1.5012)

DOT 4

17 M/C x MT3.50

17 M/C x MT5.50

Tire

Item

Cold inflation tire pressure

(Solo riding)

Cold inflation tire pressure

(Dual riding)

Tire size

Tire type

Tire tread depth

(Recommended depth)

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Standard

250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm 2 , 42 psi)

250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm 2 , 42 psi)

120/70 ZR17 M/C (58 W)

180/55 ZR17 M/C (73 W)

DUNLOP D218FT

DUNLOP D218N

Suspension

Unit: mm (in)

Front fork stroke

Item

Front fork inner tube O.D.

Front fork spring free length

Front fork oil level (Without spring, outer tube fully compressed)

Front fork oil type

Front fork oil capacity (Each leg)

Front fork spring adjuster

Rear shock absorber spring adjuster

Rear shock absorber damping force adjuster

Rear wheel travel

Swingarm pivot shaft runout

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/

143 (5.6)

SA

144 (5.7)

SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or an equivalent fork oil

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/

SA

472 ml (16.0/16.6 US/lmp oz)

471 ml (15.9/16.6 US/lmp oz)

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/

SA

Standard

130 (5.1)

43 (1.7)

390.4 (15.37)

3rd groove from top

3rd position

4th position

Rebound 1-1/4 turns out from stiffest position

136 (5.4)

Limit

4.5 (0.18)

4.5 (0.18)

0.30 (0.012)

2.0 (0.08)

2.0 (0.08)

0.25 (0.010)

0.25 (0.010)

Limit

1.6 mm (0.06 in)

2.0 mm (0.08 in)

Limit

382 (15.0)

0.3 (0.01)

Service Data: 0C-7

Fuel + Oil

Fuel type

Item

Fuel tank capacity

Engine oil type

Engine oil capacity

Specification

Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane (R/2

+ M/2) or 91 octane or higher rated by the research method.

Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.

Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane or higher. An unleaded gasoline type is recommended.

Including reserve

18.5 L (4.9/4.1 US/lmp gal)

19 L (5.0/4.2 US/lmp gal)

SAE 10 W-40, API SF/SG or SH/SJ with JASO MA

Change 3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

Filter change

Overhaul

3 500 ml (3.7/3.1 US/lmp qt)

3 700 ml (3.9/3.3 US/lmp qt)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Engine

Exhaust pipe bolt

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt

Item

Muffler connecting bolt

Muffler mounting nut

Speed sensor rotor bolt

Speed sensor bolt

Engine sprocket nut

Engine mounting nut

Front upper

Rear upper

Rear lower

Center lower Engine mounting bolt

Engine mounting No.1 bracket bolt

Engine mounting No.2 bracket bolt

Cylinder head cover bolt

Spark plug

Camshaft journal holder bolt

Oil pipe mounting bolt

Camshaft sprocket bolt

Initial

Final

Cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt

Cam chain tension adjuster mounting bolt

Cylinder head bolt

[L: 175]

Initial

Final

[L: 65]

Water jacket plug

Water inlet connector bolt

Balancer shaft arm bolt

Balancer shaft mounting bolt

PAIR reed valve cover bolt

Clutch sleeve hub nut

Clutch spring set bolt

Starter clutch bolt

Generator rotor bolt

Generator stator set bolt

Gearshift cam stopper bolt

Gearshift cam stopper plate bolt

Gearshift arm stopper

Gearshift lever bolt

Gearshift shaft end bolt

Oil pressure switch

10

11

150

10

10

30

10

10

23

10

25

42

10

10

16

25

13

19

40

10

14

25

120

11

10

23

23

14

11

55

88

88

47

N

m

23

23

23

26

25

6.5

115

1.0

3.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.1

15.0

1.0

2.3

1.0

2.5

4.2

1.0

1.0

1.6

2.5

2.5

12.0

1.1

1.0

1.3

1.9

4.0

1.0

1.4

2.3

2.3

1.4

1.1

5.5

8.8

8.8

4.7

kgf-m

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.6

2.5

0.65

11.5

Note

E-03, 28, 33

Others

E-33

Others

B718H10307002

7.0

21.5

7.0

7.0

7.0

8.0

108.5

7.0

7.0

7.0

11.5

18.0

16.6

7.0

18.0

30.5

18.0

87.0

8.0

7.0

9.5

13.5

29.0

7.0

10.0

40.0

63.5

63.5

34.0

16.5

16.5

10.0

8.0

lb-ft

16.5

16.5

16.5

19.0

18.0

4.7

83.0

0C-8 Service Data:

Item

Oil pressure switch lead wire bolt

Crankcase bolt

Crankshaft journal bolt

Oil gallery plug

Oil gallery bolt

Oil gallery jet

Oil drain plug

Piston cooling oil jet bolt

Oil pump mounting bolt

Conrod cap bolt

Gearshift fork shaft retainer screw

Countershaft bearing retainer screw

Push rod oil seal bolt

Oil filter

Oil cooler union bolt

Starter motor lead wire mounting bolt

Starter motor housing bolt

FI System and Intake Air System

Item

CKP sensor mounting bolt

Fuel delivery pipe mounting screw

Fuel pump mounting bolt

STPS mounting screw

ISC valve mounting screw

GP switch mounting bolt

HO2 sensor

Cooling System

Impeller securing bolt

Water pump case screw

Water pump mounting bolt

Water pump air vent bolt

Water hose clamp bolt

ECT sensor

Thermostat cover bolt

Item

[M6]

[M8]

[M9]

[M6]

[M8]

(initial)

(Final)

[M12]

[M16]

(initial)

(Final)

(initial)

(Final) initial

Final

35

10

22

23

32

10

10

15

N

m

1.5

6

11

15

26

18

10

10

21

10

12

12

20

70

5

5

N

m

11

3.5

10

3.5

3.5

6.5

25

N

m

8

6

10

13

2

18

10

23.0

7.0

7.0

11.0

25.5

7.0

16.0

16.5

lb-ft

1.1

4.5

8.0

11.0

19.0

13.0

7.0

7.0

15.0

7.0

8.5

8.5

14.5

50.5

3.5

3.5

lb-ft

8.0

2.5

7.0

2.5

2.5

4.7

18.0

lb-ft

6.0

4.5

7.0

9.5

1.5

13.0

7.0

3.2

1.0

1.0

1.5

3.5

1.0

2.2

2.3

kgf-m

0.15

0.6

1.1

1.5

2.6

1.8

1.0

1.0

2.1

90

°

(1/4 turn)

1.0

1.2

1.2

2.0

7.0

0.5

0.5

kgf-m

1.1

0.35

1.0

0.35

0.35

0.65

2.5

kgf-m

0.8

0.6

1.0

1.3

0.2

1.8

1.0

Service Data: 0C-9

Chassis

Item

Steering stem head nut

Steering stem nut

Front fork upper clamp bolt

Front fork lower clamp bolt

Front fork cap bolt

Front fork damper rod bolt

Inner rod lock-nut

Front axle bolt

Front axle pinch bolt

Handlebar holder bolt

Handlebar holder set nut

Master cylinder mounting bolt (Front brake and Clutch)

Front brake caliper housing bolt

Front brake caliper mounting bolt

Front brake pad mounting pin

Brake hose union bolt

Brake pipe flare nut (GSF1250A/SA only)

Air bleeder valve (Front brake caliper)

Air bleeder valve (Rear brake caliper)

Air bleeder valve (Clutch)

Side-stand bolt

Side-stand nut

Side-stand switch mounting bolt

Rear combination light mounting bolt

Brake disc bolt (front and Rear)

Front footrest bolt

Swingarm pivot nut

Rear shock absorber mounting nut (upper and Lower)

Cushion lever mounting nut

Cushion rod mounting nut

Rear brake caliper mounting bolt

Rear brake caliper sliding pin

Rear brake pad mounting pin

Pad pin plug

Rear brake master cylinder mounting bolt

Rear brake master cylinder rod lock-nut

Rear footrest bracket mounting bolt

Rear axle nut

Rear sprocket nut

Frame down tube bolt

Brake lever pivot bolt

Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut

Clutch lever pivot bolt

Clutch lever pivot bolt lock-nut

Licence light mounting bolt

Front reflex refractor (For E-03, 24, 28, 33)

Front side refractor bolt (For E-03, 24, 28, 33)

Rear side refractor nut (For E-03, 28, 33)

6

6

5

1.8

60

50

6

6

4.5

4.5

22

27

18

2.5

23

18

23

100

100

50

78

78

14

2

23

35

6.0

6.0

50

40

16

23

16

7.5

N

m kgf-m lb-ft

65 6.5

47.0

Tighten 45 N

⋅ m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 Ib-ft) then turn back 1/2 –

1/4.

23

23

23

20

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.0

16.5

16.5

16.5

14.5

45

10

22

26

20

100

23

23

2.0

10.0

2.3

2.3

4.5

1.0

2.2

2.6

14.5

72.5

16.5

16.5

32.5

7.0

16.0

19.0

1.6

2.3

1.6

0.75

0.6

0.6

5.0

4.0

1.4

0.2

2.3

3.5

10.0

5.0

7.8

7.8

10.0

1.5

16.5

25.5

72.5

36.0

56.5

56.5

11.5

16.5

11.5

5.5

4.5

4.5

36.0

29.0

6.0

5.0

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.5

0.18

0.45

0.45

2.2

2.7

1.8

0.25

2.3

1.8

2.3

10.0

43.5

36.0

4.5

4.5

4.5

4.5

3.5

1.3

3.25

3.25

16.0

19.5

13.0

1.8

16.5

13.0

16.5

72.5

0C-10 Service Data:

Tightening Torque Chart

For other bolts and nuts not listed in the preceding page, refer to this chart:

Bolt Diameter

“a” (mm)

4

5

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

Conventional or “4” marked bolt

N

m kgf-m lb-ft

1.5

3

5.5

13

29

45

65

105

160

0.15

0.3

0.55

1.3

2.9

4.5

6.5

10.5

16.0

1.0

2.0

4.0

9.5

21.0

32.5

47.0

76.0

115.5

N

m

2.3

4.5

10

23

50

85

135

210

240

“7” marked bolt kgf-m

0.23

0.45

1.0

2.3

5.0

8.5

13.5

21.0

24.0

lb-ft

1.5

3.0

7.0

16.5

36.0

61.5

97.5

152.0

173.5

3

“ a ”

1

“ a ”

1. Conventional bolt 2. “4” marked bolt

2

“ a ”

3. “7” marked bolt

I649G1030001-04

Table of Contents 1- i

Section 1

Engine

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….1-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 1-1

Precautions for Engine…………………………………… 1-1

Engine General Information and

Diagnosis …………………………………………. 1A-1

General Description ………………………………………1A-1

Injection Timing Description………………………….. 1A-1

Self-Diagnosis Function ……………………………….. 1A-2

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………1A-4

FI System Wiring Diagram ……………………………. 1A-4

Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler………………. 1A-5

Component Location …………………………………….1A-6

FI System Parts Location……………………………… 1A-6

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………1A-7

Engine Symptom Diagnosis………………………….. 1A-7

Self-Diagnostic Procedures ………………………… 1A-11

Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures………1A-13

Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at the Time of DTC) ……………………………………..1A-14

SDS Check ……………………………………………….1A-15

DTC Table…………………………………………………1A-18

Fail-Safe Function Table ……………………………..1A-20

FI System Troubleshooting ………………………….1A-21

Malfunction Code and Defective Condition

Table ……………………………………………………… 1A-22

DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-25

DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.1)

Circuit Malfunction ……………………………………1A-28

DTC “C14” (P0120-H/L): TP Sensor Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-37

DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-45

DTC “C17” (P1750-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.2)

Circuit Malfunction ……………………………………1A-52

DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-60

DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-67

DTC “C24” (P0351), “C25” (P0352), “C26”

(P0353) or “C27” (P0354): Ignition System

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-73

DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle

Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction……………..1A-73

DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle

Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction….1A-77

DTC “C31” (P0705): GP Switch Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-85

DTC “C32” (P0201), “C33” (P0202), “C34”

(P0203) or “C35” (P0204): Fuel Injector

Circuit Malfunction…………………………………….1A-87

DTC “C40” (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): ISC

Valve Circuit Malfunction……………………………1A-91

DTC “C41” (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit

Malfunction………………………………………………1A-97

DTC “C41” (P2505): ECM Power Input Signal

Malfunction…………………………………………….1A-100

DTC “C42” (P1650): IG Switch Circuit

Malfunction…………………………………………….1A-102

DTC “C44” (P0130/P0135): HO2 Sensor

(HO2S) Circuit Malfunction ………………………1A-102

DTC “C49” (P1656): PAIR Control Solenoid

Valve Circuit Malfunction………………………….1A-108

DTC “C60” (P0480): Cooling Fan Relay

Circuit Malfunction…………………………………..1A-111

Specifications……………………………………………1A-114

Service Data…………………………………………….1A-114

Special Tools and Equipment …………………….1A-115

Special Tool …………………………………………….1A-115

Emission Control Devices …………………. 1B-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..1B-1

Precautions for Emission Control Devices ……….1B-1

General Description ………………………………………1B-1

Fuel Injection System Description…………………..1B-1

Crankcase Emission Control System

Description ………………………………………………..1B-2

Exhaust Emission Control System

Description ………………………………………………..1B-3

Noise Emission Control System Description…….1B-3

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………1B-4

PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram ……………..1B-4

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….1B-5

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and

Installation …………………………………………………1B-5

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Inspection ……..1B-5

PAIR Reed Valve Removal and Installation……..1B-6

1

1-ii Table of Contents

PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………1B-6

PAIR System Inspection ……………………………….1B-6

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose Inspection…….1B-8

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover /

Separator Removal and Installation ………………1B-8

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Cover Inspection …..1B-9

Specifications……………………………………………..1B-10

Service Data………………………………………………1B-10

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….1B-10

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………1B-10

Recommended Service Material …………………..1B-10

Special Tool ………………………………………………1B-10

Engine Electrical Devices………………….. 1C-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..1C-1

Precautions for Engine Electrical Device …………1C-1

Component Location …………………………………….1C-1

Engine Electrical Components Location ………….1C-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………1C-1

Engine Symptom Diagnosis …………………………..1C-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….1C-1

ECM Removal and Installation……………………….1C-1

CKP Sensor Inspection …………………………………1C-1

CKP Sensor Removal and Installation …………….1C-1

IAP Sensor (No.1) Inspection…………………………1C-1

IAP Sensor (No.1) Removal and Installation…….1C-2

IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Inspection ……………………1C-2

IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………1C-2

ECT Sensor Removal and Installation …………….1C-2

ECT Sensor Inspection …………………………………1C-3

TO Sensor Removal and Installation ………………1C-3

TO Sensor Inspection …………………………………..1C-3

STP Sensor Inspection …………………………………1C-3

STP Sensor Adjustment………………………………..1C-4

STP Sensor Removal and Installation …………….1C-4

STV Actuator Inspection ……………………………….1C-5

STV Actuator Removal and Installation …………..1C-5

ISC Valve Inspection…………………………………….1C-5

ISC Valve Removal and Installation………………..1C-5

ISC Valve Preset and Opening Initialization …….1C-6

HO2 Sensor Inspection …………………………………1C-6

HO2 Sensor Removal and Installation …………….1C-6

GP Switch Inspection ……………………………………1C-6

GP Switch Removal and Installation ……………….1C-6

Specifications……………………………………………….1C-7

Service Data………………………………………………..1C-7

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………1C-8

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………..1C-8

Recommended Service Material …………………….1C-8

Special Tool ………………………………………………..1C-8

Engine Mechanical ……………………………. 1D-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………1D-1

Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram …….1D-1

Throttle Cable Routing Diagram……………………..1D-2

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………1D-3

Engine Mechanical Symptom Diagnosis………….1D-3

Compression Pressure Check ……………………….1D-3

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….1D-4

Engine Components Removable with the

Engine in Place ………………………………………….1D-4

Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation ….1D-6

Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning ….1D-6

Air Cleaner Box Removal and Installation………..1D-6

Throttle Cable Removal and Installation ………….1D-6

Throttle Cable Inspection ………………………………1D-7

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and

Adjustment ………………………………………………..1D-7

Throttle Body Components ……………………………1D-7

Throttle Body Construction…………………………….1D-8

Throttle Body Removal and Installation …………..1D-9

Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly……..1D-10

Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning ………….1D-15

Throttle Valve Synchronization …………………….1D-15

Engine Assembly Removal ………………………….1D-17

Engine Assembly Installation ……………………….1D-21

Engine Top Side Disassembly ……………………..1D-24

Engine Top Side Assembly ………………………….1D-28

Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment ….1D-36

Camshaft Inspection …………………………………..1D-36

Camshaft Sprocket Inspection ……………………..1D-38

Camshaft Sprocket Removal and Installation …1D-38

Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection………..1D-39

Cam Chain Guide Removal and Installation …..1D-39

Cam Chain Guide Inspection ……………………….1D-39

Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection………………….1D-40

Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly ……1D-40

Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection ………..1D-44

Valve Guide Replacement …………………………..1D-47

Valve Seat Repair ………………………………………1D-48

Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly …………….1D-48

Cylinder Inspection……………………………………..1D-50

Piston Ring Removal and Installation ……………1D-51

Piston and Piston Ring Inspection ………………..1D-52

Engine Bottom Side Disassembly …………………1D-53

Engine Bottom Side Assembly……………………..1D-61

Crank Balancer Disassembly and Assembly ….1D-72

Crank Balancer Inspection …………………………..1D-73

Conrod Removal and Installation ………………….1D-74

Conrod and Crankshaft Inspection………………..1D-75

Conrod Crank Pin Bearing Inspection and

Selection …………………………………………………1D-76

Crankshaft Journal Bearing Inspection and

Selection …………………………………………………1D-78

Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Inspection and

Selection …………………………………………………1D-80

Specifications ……………………………………………..1D-83

Service Data………………………………………………1D-83

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….1D-84

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………1D-85

Recommended Service Material …………………..1D-85

Special Tool ………………………………………………1D-86

Engine Lubrication System ……………….. 1E-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..1E-1

Precautions for Engine Oil …………………………….1E-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram…………………… 1E-2

Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram ……… 1E-2

Diagnostic Information and Procedures………… 1E-3

Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis …………. 1E-3

Oil Pressure Check ……………………………………… 1E-3

Repair Instructions ………………………………………. 1E-4

Engine Oil and Filter Replacement ………………… 1E-4

Engine Oil Level Inspection ………………………….. 1E-4

Oil Pan / Oil Strainer / Oil Pressure Regulator

Removal and Installation…………………………….. 1E-4

Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer

Inspection…………………………………………………. 1E-6

Oil Cooler Removal and Installation……………….. 1E-7

Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation …. 1E-7

Oil Pressure Switch Inspection ……………………… 1E-8

Oil Jet Removal and Installation ……………………. 1E-8

Oil Gallery Jet Removal and Installation ……….. 1E-10

Oil Jet / Oil Gallery Jet Inspection ………………… 1E-10

Oil Pump Removal and Installation ……………….1E-11

Oil Pump Inspection ……………………………………1E-13

Specifications…………………………………………….. 1E-13

Service Data …………………………………………….. 1E-13

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….1E-13

Special Tools and Equipment ……………………… 1E-14

Recommended Service Material………………….. 1E-14

Special Tool ………………………………………………1E-14

Engine Cooling System ………………………1F-1

Precautions………………………………………………….. 1F-1

Precautions for Engine Cooling System………….. 1F-1

Precautions for Engine Coolant …………………….. 1F-1

General Description ……………………………………… 1F-1

Engine Coolant Description ………………………….. 1F-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram…………………… 1F-2

Cooling Circuit Diagram ……………………………….. 1F-2

Water Hose Routing Diagram ……………………….. 1F-3

Diagnostic Information and Procedures………… 1F-4

Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis………………. 1F-4

Repair Instructions ………………………………………. 1F-4

Cooling Circuit Inspection …………………………….. 1F-4

Radiator Cap Inspection ………………………………. 1F-5

Radiator Inspection and Cleaning………………….. 1F-5

Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor Removal and

Installation………………………………………………… 1F-5

Water Hose Inspection…………………………………. 1F-6

Water Hose Removal and Installation…………….. 1F-7

Radiator Reservoir Tank Inspection……………….. 1F-7

Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal and

Installation………………………………………………… 1F-8

Cooling Fan Inspection ………………………………… 1F-8

Cooling Fan Relay Inspection ……………………….. 1F-9

ECT Sensor Removal and Installation ……………. 1F-9

ECT Sensor Inspection ………………………………… 1F-9

Thermostat Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation………………………………………….. 1F-9

Thermostat Inspection ……………………………….. 1F-11

Water pump Components …………………………… 1F-12

Water Pump Construction…………………………… 1F-12

Water Pump Removal and Installation………….. 1F-13

Table of Contents 1-iii

Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly ……… 1F-14

Water Pump Related Parts Inspection ………….. 1F-17

Specifications…………………………………………….. 1F-18

Service Data……………………………………………… 1F-18

Tightening Torque Specifications…………………. 1F-18

Special Tools and Equipment ……………………… 1F-19

Recommended Service Material ………………….. 1F-19

Special Tool ……………………………………………… 1F-19

Fuel System ……………………………………… 1G-1

Precautions…………………………………………………. 1G-1

Precautions for Fuel System ………………………… 1G-1

General Description …………………………………….. 1G-2

Fuel System Description ……………………………… 1G-2

Schematic and Routing Diagram………………….. 1G-3

Fuel Tank Drain Hose and Breather Hose

Routing Diagram ………………………………………. 1G-3

Diagnostic Information and Procedures……….. 1G-4

Fuel System Diagnosis ……………………………….. 1G-4

Repair Instructions ……………………………………… 1G-5

Fuel Pressure Inspection …………………………….. 1G-5

Fuel Pump Inspection …………………………………. 1G-5

Fuel Discharge Amount Inspection ……………….. 1G-6

Fuel Pump Relay Inspection ………………………… 1G-7

Fuel Hose Inspection ………………………………….. 1G-7

Fuel Level Gauge Inspection ……………………….. 1G-7

Fuel Level Indicator Inspection …………………….. 1G-7

Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor)

Inspection………………………………………………… 1G-7

Fuel Tank Construction ……………………………….. 1G-8

Fuel Tank Removal and Installation………………. 1G-9

Fuel Pump Components ……………………………. 1G-10

Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge

Removal and Installation………………………….. 1G-11

Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly……….. 1G-12

Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection and Cleaning…….. 1G-14

Fuel Injector / Fuel Delivery Pipe / T-joint

Removal and Installation………………………….. 1G-14

Fuel Injector Inspection and Cleaning………….. 1G-14

Specifications……………………………………………. 1G-15

Service Data…………………………………………….. 1G-15

Tightening Torque Specifications………………… 1G-15

Special Tools and Equipment …………………….. 1G-16

Recommended Service Material …………………. 1G-16

Special Tool …………………………………………….. 1G-16

Ignition System…………………………………. 1H-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………1H-1

Ignition System Diagram ……………………………….1H-1

Ignition System Components Location…………….1H-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………1H-2

Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis……………….1H-2

No Spark or Poor Spark ………………………………..1H-3

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….1H-4

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug

Removal and Installation……………………………..1H-4

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning ……………….1H-5

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Inspection ………………….1H-5

CKP Sensor Inspection …………………………………1H-7

1-iv Table of Contents

CKP Sensor Removal and Installation …………….1H-8

Engine Stop Switch Inspection……………………….1H-8

Ignition Switch Inspection………………………………1H-9

Ignition Switch Removal and Installation………….1H-9

Specifications……………………………………………..1H-11

Service Data………………………………………………1H-11

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….1H-11

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………1H-11

Special Tool ………………………………………………1H-11

Starting System ………………………………….. 1I-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………. 1I-1

Starting System Diagram ………………………………. 1I-1

Component Location …………………………………….. 1I-1

Starting System Components Location……………. 1I-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………. 1I-1

Starting System Symptom Diagnosis………………. 1I-1

Starter motor will not run ……………………………….. 1I-2

Starter Motor Runs but Does not Crank the

Engine ………………………………………………………. 1I-2

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….. 1I-3

Starter Motor Components…………………………….. 1I-3

Starter Motor Removal and Installation……………. 1I-4

Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly ……….. 1I-5

Starter Motor Inspection………………………………… 1I-6

Starter Relay Removal and Installation……………. 1I-7

Starter Relay Inspection………………………………… 1I-7

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………. 1I-8

Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts

Inspection………………………………………………….. 1I-8

Starter Clutch Removal and Installation…………. 1I-10

Starter Clutch Inspection……………………………… 1I-12

Starter Button Inspection……………………………… 1I-13

Specifications……………………………………………… 1I-13

Service Data………………………………………………. 1I-13

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….. 1I-13

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………. 1I-14

Recommended Service Material …………………… 1I-14

Special Tool ………………………………………………. 1I-14

Charging System ………………………………..1J-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram …………………… 1J-1

Charging System Diagram ……………………………. 1J-1

Component Location ……………………………………. 1J-1

Charging System Components Location…………. 1J-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures ………… 1J-1

Charging System Symptom Diagnosis……………. 1J-1

Battery Runs Down Quickly ………………………….. 1J-2

Repair Instructions ………………………………………. 1J-3

Battery Current Leakage Inspection……………….. 1J-3

Regulated Voltage Inspection ……………………….. 1J-3

Generator Inspection……………………………………. 1J-3

Generator Removal and Installation……………….. 1J-4

Regulator / Rectifier Construction ………………….. 1J-8

Regulator / Rectifier Inspection ……………………… 1J-8

Battery Components ……………………………………. 1J-9

Battery Charging …………………………………………. 1J-9

Battery Removal and Installation …………………. 1J-12

Battery Visual Inspection…………………………….. 1J-12

Specifications …………………………………………….. 1J-13

Service Data……………………………………………… 1J-13

Tightening Torque Specifications…………………. 1J-13

Special Tools and Equipment ……………………… 1J-14

Recommended Service Material ………………….. 1J-14

Special Tool ……………………………………………… 1J-14

Exhaust System………………………………… 1K-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..1K-1

Precautions for Exhaust System …………………….1K-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….1K-2

Exhaust System Construction ………………………..1K-2

Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and

Installation …………………………………………………1K-3

Exhaust System Inspection……………………………1K-6

Specifications ……………………………………………….1K-6

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………1K-6

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………..1K-6

Recommended Service Material …………………….1K-6

Precautions: 1-1

Engine

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Engine

B718H11000001

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00

(Page 00-2)”.

1A-1 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Engine

Engine General Information and Diagnosis

General Description

Injection Timing Description

B718H11101001

Injection Time (Injection Volume)

The factors to determine the injection time include the basic fuel injection time, which is calculated on the basis of the intake air pressure, engine speed and throttle opening angle, and various compensations. These compensations are determined according to the signals from various sensors that detect the engine and driving conditions.

I718H1110268-03

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-2

Compensation of Injection Time (Volume)

The following different signals are output from the respective sensors for compensation of the fuel injection time

(volume).

Signal

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

SIGNAL

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL

BATTERY VOLTAGE SIGNAL

ENGINE RPM SIGNAL

STARTING SIGNAL

ACCELERATION SIGNAL/ DECELERATION

SIGNAL

Descriptions

When engine coolant temperature is low, injection time (volume) is increased.

When intake air temperature is low, injection time (volume) is increased.

Air/fuel ratio is compensated to the theoretical ratio from density of oxygen in exhaust gasses. The compensation occurs in such a way that more fuel is supplied if detected air/fuel ratio is lean and less fuel is supplied if it is rich.

ECM operates on the battery voltage and at the same time, it monitors the voltage signal for compensation of the fuel injection time (volume). A longer injection time is needed to adjust injection volume in the case of low voltage.

At high speed, the injection time (volume) is increased.

When starting engine, additional fuel is injected during cranking engine.

During acceleration, the fuel injection time (volume) is increased, in accordance with the throttle opening speed and engine rpm.

During deceleration, the fuel injection time (volume) is decreased.

Injection Stop Control

Signal

TIP-OVER SENSOR SIGNAL (FUEL SHUT-OFF)

OVER-REV. LIMITER SIGNAL

Descriptions

When the motorcycle tips over, the tip-over sensor sends a signal to the ECM. Then, this signal cuts OFF current supplied to the fuel pump, fuel injectors and ignition coils.

The fuel injector stops operation when engine rpm reaches rev. limit rpm.

Self-Diagnosis Function

B718H11101002

The self-diagnosis function is incorporated in the ECM. The function has two modes, “User mode” and “Dealer mode”.

The user can only be notified by the LCD (DISPLAY) panel and LED (FI indicator light). To check the function of the individual FI system devices, the dealer mode is provided. In this check, the special tool is necessary to read the code of the malfunction items.

User Mode

“YES”

Malfunction

“NO”

Engine can start

Engine can not start

LCD (display) indication

“A”

Odometer *1

“FI” letters

*3

FI indicator light indication “B”

Odometer (*1) and “FI” letters

*2

FI indicator light turns ON.

FI indicator light turns ON and blinks.

Indication mode

Each 2 sec. Odometer (*1) and “FI” is indicated alternately.

“FI” is indicated continuously.

*1

Current letter displayed any one of the odometer or tripmeter.

*2

When one of the signals is not received by ECM, the fail-safe circuit works and injection is not stopped. In this case,

“FI” and odometer (*1) are indicated in the LCD panel and motorcycle can run.

*3

The injection signal is stopped, when the crankshaft position sensor signal, tip-over sensor signal, ignition signal, #1,

#2, #3 and #4 injector signals, fuel pump relay signal or ignition switch signal is not sent to ECM. In this case, “FI” is indicated in the LCD panel. Motorcycle does not run.

“CHEC”:

The LCD panel indicates “CHEC” when no communication signal from the ECM is received for 5 seconds and more.

1A-3 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

For Example:

The ignition switch is turned ON, and the engine stop switch is turned OFF. In this case, the speedometer does not receive any signal from the ECM, and the panel indicates “CHEC”.

If CHEC is indicated, the LCD does not indicate the trouble code. It is necessary to check the wiring harness between

ECM and speedometer couplers.

The possible cause of this indication is as follows:

Engine stop switch is in OFF position. Side-Stand/ignition inter-lock system is not working. Ignition fuse is burnt.

NOTE

Until starting the engine, the FI light turns ON.

FI

“B” “A”

I718H1110002-03

Dealer Mode

The defective function is memorized in the computer. Use the special tool’s coupler to connect to the mode select switch. The memorized malfunction code is displayed on LCD (DISPLAY) panel. Malfunction means that the ECM does not receive signal from the devices. These affected devices are indicated in the code form.

!

CAUTION

Before checking the malfunction code, do not disconnect the ECM coupler.

If the coupler from the ECM is disconnected, the malfunction code memory is erased and the malfunction code can not be checked.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)

(A)

(A)

Malfunction

“NO”

“YES”

LCD (display) indication

C00

C** code is indicated from small numeral to large one.

I718H1110143-03 I718H1110144-01

FI light indication Indication mode

FI indicator light turns OFF.

For each 2 sec., code is indicated.

FI System Wiring Diagram

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-4

Schematic and Routing Diagram

B718H11102001

44 43 42 41

39 3 53 23 36 49

I718H1110249-04

1A-5 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Terminal Alignment of ECM Coupler

B718H11102002

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

TERMINAL NO.

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

CIRCUIT

STVA signal (STVA, 2A)

STVA signal (STVA, 1A)

EVAP page control valve [E-33 only]

Serial data for speedometer

TP sensor signal (TP)

IAP sensor signal No.2 (IAP, 2)

ECT sensor signal (ECT)

Power source for sensors (Vcc)

HO2 sensor signal (HO2S)

Tachometer

CKP sensor signal (CKP+)

Cooling fan relay (FAR)

Power source for back-up

Power source

STVA signal (STVA, 2B)

STVA signal (STVA, 1B)

STP sensor (STP)

Ignition switch signal

TO sensor signal (TOS)

GP sensor signal (GP)

IAP sensor signal No.1 (IAP, 1)

IAT sensor signal (IAT)

Sensors ground (E2)

Mode select switch

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

50

51

52

53

46

47

48

49

TERMINAL NO.

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

I718H1110004-02

CIRCUIT

CKP sensor signal (CKP-)

Serial data for self-diagnosis

Power source for fuel injector (VM)

ECM ground (E1)

ISC signal (ISC, 2A)

ISC signal (ISC, 1A)

Fuel pump relay (FP Relay)

PAIR control solenoid valve (PAIR)

HO2 sensor heater (HO2, H)

Fuel injector #4 (#4, 1)

Fuel injector #3 (#3, 1)

Fuel injector #2 (#2, 1)

Fuel injector #1 (#1, 1)

Ignition coil #3

Ignition coil #2

Ignition coil #1

ISC signal (ISC, 2B)

ISC signal (ISC, 1B)

Neutral switch

Starter relay

Clutch position switch

Ground

Ground for ignition system

Ignition coil #4

FI System Parts Location

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-6

Component Location

B718H11103001

“A”

“B”

“C”

“J”

“D” “E”

“H”

“I”

“G”

“F”

“A”: ECM

“B”: TO sensor

“C”: Cooling fan relay

“D”: STV actuator

“E”: ISC valve

“F”: HO2 sensor

“G”: Cooling fan

“H”: Ignition coil

I718H1110146-04

“I”: PAIR control solenoid valve

“J”: IAP sensor (No.1)

“U”

“T”

“R”

“Q”

“O”

“P”

“N”

“M”

“S”

“L”

“K”

“A”

“A”: ECM

“K”: Fuel pump relay

“L”: GP switch

“M”: CKP sensor

“N”: ECT sensor

“O”: IAP/TP/IAT sensor

“P”: STP sensor

“Q”: Fuel injector

“R”: Fuel pump

I718H1110147-03

“S”: Speed sensor

“T”: EVAP purge control valve (E-33 only)

“U”: Speedometer

1A-7 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Engine will not start or is hard to start

(Compression too low)

Possible cause

Valve clearance out of adjustment.

Worn valve guides or poor seating of valves.

Mistimed valves.

Excessively worn piston rings.

Worn-down cylinder bores.

Starter motor cranks too slowly.

Engine will not start or is hard to start (Plugs not sparking)

Engine will not start or is hard to start (No fuel reaching the intake manifold)

Engine will not start or is hard to start (Incorrect fuel/air mixture)

Engine idles poorly

Poor seating of spark plugs.

Blown cylinder head gasket.

Fouled spark plugs.

Wet spark plugs.

Defective ignition coil/plug cap.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Open-circuited wiring connections.

Clogged fuel filter or fuel hose.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Defective fuel injectors.

Defective fuel pump relay.

Defective ECM.

Open-circuited wiring connections.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective IAP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Defective ECT sensor.

Defective IAT sensors.

Dirty throttle body.

Defective ISC valve.

Valve clearance out of adjustment.

Poor seating of valves.

Defective valve guides.

Worn down camshafts.

Too wide spark plug gaps.

Defective ignition coil/plug caps.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective fuel pump.

Imbalanced throttle valve.

Dirty throttle body.

Damaged or cranked vacuum hose.

Sucking air from intake pipe joint.

Damaged or clogged ISC valve.

ISC bad leaning.

B718H11104001

Correction / Reference Item

Adjust.

Repair or replace.

Adjust.

Replace.

Replace.

Refer to “Starting System Diagram in Section

1I (Page 1I-1)”.

Retighten.

Replace.

Clean.

Clean and dry.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Clean or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Check and repair.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean.

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace or repair.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Clean.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace.

Reset learned value.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-8

Condition

Engine stalls often

(Incorrect fuel/air mixture)

Engine stalls often (Fuel injector improperly operating)

Engine stalls often

(Control circuit or sensor improperly operating)

Engine stalls often

(Engine parts improperly operating)

Engine noisy (Excessive valve chatter)

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from piston)

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from timing chain)

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from crankshaft)

Possible cause

Defective IAP sensor or circuit.

Clogged fuel filter.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Damaged or cracked vacuum hose.

Defective ECT sensor.

Correction / Reference Item

Repair or replace.

Clean or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Defective thermostat.

Defective IAT sensors.

Defective ISC valve.

Defective fuel injectors.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

No injection signal from ECM.

Open or short circuited wiring

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace.

connection.

Defective battery or low battery voltage.

Replace or recharge.

Defective ECM.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective IAT sensors.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECT sensor.

Defective fuel pump relay.

Defective ISC valve.

ISC bad learning.

Fouled spark plugs.

Defective CKP sensor or ECM.

Clogged fuel hose.

Out of adjustment tappet clearance.

Dirty throttle body.

Too large tappet clearance.

Weakened or broken valve springs.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Reset learned value.

Clean.

Replace.

Clean.

Adjust.

Clean.

Adjust.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean.

Worn tappet or cam surface.

Worn and burnt camshaft journal.

Worn down pistons or cylinders.

Combustion chambers fouled with carbon.

Worn piston pins or piston pin bores.

Worn piston rings or ring grooves.

Stretched chain.

Worn sprockets.

Tension adjuster not working.

Rattling bearings due to wear.

Worn and burnt big-end bearings.

Worn and burnt journal bearings.

Worm bearings.

Rattling bearings due to wear.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace thrust bearing.

Replace.

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from balancer)

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from clutch)

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from transmission)

Worn splines of countershaft or hub.

Worn teeth of clutch plates.

Distorted clutch plate, driven and drive.

Worn clutch release bearing.

Weakened clutch dampers.

Worn or rubbing gears.

Worn splines.

Worn or rubbing primary gears.

Worn bearings.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace the primary driven gear.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

1A-9 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Condition

Engine noisy (Noise seems to come from water pump)

Engine runs poorly in high speed range

(Defective engine internal/ electrical parts)

Engine runs poorly in high speed range

(Defective air flow system)

Engine runs poorly in high speed range

(Defective control circuit or sensor)

Engine lacks power

(Defective engine internal/ electrical parts)

Possible cause

Worn or damaged impeller shaft.

Worn or damaged mechanical seal.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Contact between pump case and impeller.

Too much play on pump shaft bearing.

Replace.

Weakened valve springs.

Replace.

Worn camshafts.

Valve timing out of adjustment.

Too narrow spark plug gap.

Ignition not advanced sufficiently due to

Replace.

Adjust.

Adjust.

Replace ECM.

poorly working timing advance circuit.

Defective ignition coil/plug gap.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Clogged air cleaner element.

Clogged fuel hose, resulting in inadequate fuel supply to injector.

Defective fuel pump.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean.

Clean and prime.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Clogged air cleaner element.

Defective throttle valves.

Defective ISC valve.

Sucking air from throttle body joint.

Defective ECM.

Imbalancing throttle valve

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean or replace.

Adjust or replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

synchronization.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Low fuel pressure.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective IAT sensors.

Defective IAP sensor.

Defective ECM.

TP sensor out of adjustment.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Defective GP sensor.

Defective CKP sensor.

Loss of tappet clearance.

Weakened valve springs.

Valve timing out of adjustment.

Worn piston rings or cylinders.

Poor seating of valves.

Fouled spark plugs.

Incorrect spark plugs.

Clogged fuel injectors.

Defective TP sensor.

Clogged air cleaner element.

Sucking air from throttle valve or vacuum hose.

Too much engine oil.

Defective fuel pump or ECM.

Defective CKP sensor and ignition coil/ plug caps.

Imbalancing throttle valve synchronization.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace.

Repair.

Clean or replace.

Adjust or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean.

Retighten or replace.

Drain out excess oil.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-10

Condition

Engine lacks power

(Defective control circuit or sensor)

Engine overheats

(Defective engine internal parts)

Engine overheats (Lean fuel/air mixture)

Engine overheats (The other factors)

Dirty or heavy exhaust smoke

Possible cause

Low fuel pressure.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective IAT sensor.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective GP sensor.

Defective IAP sensor.

Correction / Reference Item

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Defective ECM.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Replace.

Replace.

Heavy carbon deposit on piston crown.

Clean.

Not enough oil in the engine.

Add oil.

Defective oil pump or clogged oil circuit.

Replace or clean.

Use of incorrect engine oil.

Change.

Sucking air from intake pipe.

Defective cooling system.

Retighten or replace.

Refer to “Cooling Circuit Diagram in Section 1F

Short-circuited IAP sensor/lead wire.

Short-circuited IAT sensor/lead wire.

Sucking air from intake pipe joint.

Defective fuel injector.

Defective ECT sensor.

Ignition timing too advanced due to defective timing advance system (ECT sensor, CKP sensor, GP sensor and

ECM.)

Drive chain is too tight.

ISC bad learning.

Worn piston rings or cylinders.

Too much engine oil in the engine.

Worn valve guides.

Scored or scuffed cylinder walls.

Worn valves stems.

Defective stem seals.

Worn oil ring side rails.

(Page 1F-2)”.

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Reset learned value.

Replace.

Check and drain excess oil.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

1A-11 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Self-Diagnostic Procedures

Use of Mode Select Switch

B718H11104005

NOTE

• Do not disconnect coupler from ECM, the battery cable from the battery, ECM ground wire harness from the engine or main fuse before confirming DTC (Diagnostic Trouble

Code) stored in memory. Such disconnection will erase memorized information in ECM memory.

• DTC stored in ECM memory can be checked by the special tool.

• Before checking DTC, read self-diagnosis function “User mode and dealer mode”

(Refer to “Self-Diagnosis Function

(Page 1A-2)”.) carefully to have good understanding as to what functions are available and how to use it.

• Be sure to read “Precautions for Electrical

Circuit Service” (Refer to “Precautions for

Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00

(Page 00-2)”.) before inspection and observe what is written there.

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Connect the special tool to the mode select switch at the wiring harness.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)

(A)

3) Start the engine or crank the engine for more than 4 seconds.

4) Turn the special tool’s switch ON.

I718H1110145-02

5) Check the DTC to determine the malfunction part.

Refer to “DTC Table (Page 1A-18)”.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82720 (Mode select switch)

(A)

I718H1110006-04

I718H1110144-01

6) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition switch and turn ON again. If DTC is indicated (C00), the malfunction is cleared.

NOTE

• Even though DTC (C00) is indicated, the previous malfunction history DTC still remains stored in the ECM. Therefore, erase the history DTC memorized in the

ECM using SDS.

• DTC is memorized in the ECM also when the wire coupler of any sensor is disconnected. Therefore, when a wire coupler has been disconnected at the time of diagnosis, erase the stored history DTC using SDS. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis

Reset Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

7) Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the special tool from the mode select switch.

8) Reinstall the right frame cover.

Use of SDS

NOTE

• Do not disconnect the coupler from ECM, the battery cable from the battery, ECM ground wire harness from the engine or main fuse before confirming DTC

(Diagnostic Trouble Code) stored in memory. Such disconnection will erase the memorized information in ECM memory.

• DTC stored in ECM memory can be checked by the SDS.

• Be sure to read “Precautions for Electrical

Circuit Service in Section 00 (Page 00-2)” before inspection and observe what is written there.

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Set up the SDS tools. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

Special tool

(A): 09904–41010 (SDS Set)

(B): 99565–01010–010 (CD-ROM Ver.10)

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-12

(A)

(B)

3) Click the DTC inspection button (1).

I705H1110116-03

(A)

1

I718H1110148-02

I705H1110003-01

1A-13 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

4) Start the engine or crank the engine for more than 4 seconds.

5) Check the DTC to determine the malfunction part.

Refer to “DTC Table (Page 1A-18)”.

NOTE

• Read the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and show data when trouble (displaying data at the time of DTC) according to instructions displayed on SDS.

• Not only SDS is used for detecting

Diagnostic Trouble Codes but also for reproducing and checking on screen the failure condition as described by customers using the trigger. (Refer to

“Show Data When Trouble (Displaying

Data at the Time of DTC) (Page 1A-14)”.)

• How to use trigger. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

6) After repairing the trouble, clear to delete history code (Past DTC). Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis

Reset Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

7) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

8) Disconnect the SDS tool and install the right frame cover.

Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset Procedures

B718H11104007

NOTE

The malfunction code is memorized in the

ECM also when the wire coupler of any sensor is disconnected. Therefore, when a wire coupler has been disconnected at the time of diagnosis, erase the stored malfunction history code using SDS.

1) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition switch and turn ON again.

2) Click the DTC inspection button (1).

3) Check the DTC.

4) The previous malfunction history code (Past DTC) still remains stored in the ECM. Therefore, erase the history code memorized in the ECM using SDS tool.

5) Click “Clear” (2) to delete history code (Past DTC).

6) Follow the displayed instructions.

2

I705H1110005-01

I705H1110006-01

I705H1110009-01

7) Check that both “Current DTC” (3) and “Past DTC”

(4) are deleted (NIL).

1

3

4

I705H1110003-01

I705H1110008-01

8) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

9) Disconnect the SDS tool and install the right frame cover.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-14

Show Data When Trouble (Displaying Data at the Time of DTC)

B718H11104008

Use of SDS

ECM stores the engine and driving conditions (in the form of data as shown in the figure) at the moment of the detection of a malfunction in its memory. This data is called “Show data when trouble”.

Therefore, it is possible to know engine and driving conditions (e.g., whether the engine was warm or not, where the motorcycle was running or stopped) when a malfunction was detected by checking the show data when trouble. This show data when trouble function can record the maximum of two Diagnostic Trouble Codes in the ECM.

Also, ECM has a function to store each show data when trouble for two different malfunctions in the order of occurrence as the malfunction is detected. Utilizing this function, it is possible to know the order of malfunctions that have been detected. Its use is helpful when rechecking or diagnosing a trouble.

1) Click “Show data when trouble” (1) to display the data.

1

I718H1110269-02

I705H1110010-01

1A-15 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

2) Click the drop down button (2), either “Failure #1” or “Failure #2” can be selected.

2

I718H1110270-01

SDS Check

B718H11104009

Using SDS, sample the data at the time of new and periodic vehicle inspections.

After saving the sampled data in the computer, file them by model and by user.

The periodically filed data help improve the accuracy of troubleshooting since they can indicate the condition of vehicle functions that has changed with time.

For example, when a vehicle is brought in for service but the troubleshooting of a failure is not easy, comparing the current data value to past filed data value at time of normal condition can allow the specific engine failure to be determined.

Also, in the case of a customer vehicle which is not periodically brought in for service with no past data value having been saved, if the data value of a good vehicle condition have been already saved as a master (STD), comparison between the same models helps to facilitate the troubleshooting.

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

Special tool

: 09904–41010 (SDS set)

: 99565–01010–010 (CD-ROM Ver.10)

NOTE

• Before taking the sample of data, check and clear the Past DTC.

• A number of different data under a fixed condition as shown should be saved or filed as sample.

Sample

Data sampled from cold starting through warm-up

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-16

Check the engine r/min.

1 200 r/min.

Check the water temperature.

50 ˚C and more

Check the manifold absolute pressure.

XXX kPa

I718H1110149-01

Data at 3 000 r/min under no load

Approx. 3 000 r/min.

Check the water temperature.

XX ˚C

Check the manifold absolute pressure #1.

I718H1110150-01

1A-17 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Data at the time of racing

Data of intake negative pressure during idling (100

°

C)

Throttle: Quick wide open

Throttle: Slowly open

Secondary throttle valve opens closes in according with the throttle valve opening

PAIR control solenoid valve

ON OFF in according with the throttle valve opens closes

I718H1110151-01

Check the manifold absolute pressure #1.

Check the water temperature.

Approx. 100 ˚C

I718H1110152-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-18

Example of Trouble

Three data; value 1 (current data 1), value 2 (past data 2) and value 3 (past data 3); can be made in comparison by showing them in the graph. Read the change of value by comparing the current data to the past data that have been saved under the same condition, then you may determine how changes have occurred with the passing of time and identify what problem is currently occurring.

NOTE

With DTC not output, if the value of engine coolant temperature is found to be lower than the data saved previously, the possible cause may probably lie in a sensor circuit opened, ground circuit opened or influence of internal resistance value changes, etc.

Unstable idling speed

Abnormal curve of graph

Abnormal value of engine coolant temperature

No. DTC output

I718H1110153-03

DTC Table

Code

C00

C12 (P0335)

) (Page 1A-25)

C13 (P0105-H/L)

) (Page 1A-28)

C14 (P0120-H/L)

) (Page 1A-37)

C15 (P0115-H/L)

) (Page 1A-45)

C17 (P1750/-H/L)

) (Page 1A-52)

C21(P0110-H/L)

) (Page 1A-60)

C23 (P1651-H/L)

) (Page 1A-67)

C24 (P0351)

) (Page 1A-73)

C25 (P0352)

) (Page 1A-73)

None

Malfunction Part

Crankshaft position sensor (CKPS)

Intake air pressure sensor No.1 (IAPS)

Throttle position sensor (TPS)

Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS)

Intake air pressure sensor No.2 (IAPS)

Intake air temperature sensor (IATS)

Tip-over sensor (TOS)

Ignition signal #1 (IG coil #1)

Ignition signal #2 (IG coil #2)

Remarks

No defective part

Pick-up coil signal, signal generator

B718H11104002

For #1 cylinder

For #2 cylinder

1A-19 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Code

C26 (P0353)

)

(Page 1A-73)

C27 (P0354)

)

(Page 1A-73)

C28 (P1655)

)

(Page 1A-73)

C29 (P1654-H/L)

)

(Page 1A-77)

C31 (P0705)

)

(Page 1A-85)

C32 (P0201)

)

(Page 1A-87)

C33 (P0202)

)

(Page 1A-87)

C34 (P0203)

)

(Page 1A-87)

C35 (P0204)

)

(Page 1A-87)

C40 (P0505/P0506/

P0507)

)

(Page 1A-91)

C41 (P0230-H/L,

P2505)

)

(Page 1A-97) /

)

(Page 1A-100)

C42 (P1650)

)

(Page 1A-102)

C44 (P0130,

P0135)

)

(Page 1A-102)

C49 (P1656)

)

(Page 1A-108)

C60 (P0480)

)

(Page 1A-111)

C62 (P0443)

Malfunction Part

Ignition signal #3 (IG coil #3)

Ignition signal #4 (IG coil #4)

Secondary throttle valve actuator (STVA)

Secondary throttle position sensor (STPS)

Gear position signal (GP switch)

Injector signal #1 (FI #1)

Injector signal #2 (FI #2)

Injector signal #3 (FI #3)

Injector signal #4 (FI #4)

Idle speed control valve (ISC valve)

Fuel pump control system (FP control system),

ECM/PCM power input signal

Ignition switch signal (IG switch signal)

Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S)

PAIR control solenoid valve

Cooling fan control system

EVAP system purge control valve (E-33 only)

For #3 cylinder

For #4 cylinder

For #1 cylinder

For #2 cylinder

For #3 cylinder

For #4 cylinder

Remarks

Fuel pump, Fuel pump relay

Anti-theft

Cooling fan relay

In the LCD (DISPLAY) panel, the malfunction code is indicated from small code to large code.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-20

Fail-Safe Function Table

B718H11104003

FI system is provided with fail-safe function to allow the engine to start and the motorcycle to run in a minimum performance necessary even under malfunction condition.

Item

IAP sensor (No.1)

IAP sensor (No.2)

TP sensor

ECT sensor

IAT sensor

Fail-Safe Mode

Intake air pressure is fixed to 101 kPa (760 mmHg).

Intake air pressure is fixed to 101 kPa (760 mmHg).

The throttle opening is fixed to full open position.

Ignition timing is also fixed.

Engine coolant temperature value is fixed to

80

°

C (176

°

F).

Intake air temperature value is fixed to 40

°

C

(104

°

F).

Starting Ability

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

Running Ability

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

Ignition signal

#1 Fuel – cut

#2 Fuel – cut

#3 Fuel – cut

#4 Fuel – cut

“YES” “YES”

#2, #3 & #4 cylinder can run.

“YES” “YES”

#1, #3 & #4 cylinder can run.

“YES” “YES”

#1, #2 & #4 cylinder can run.

“YES” “YES”

#1, #2 & #3 cylinder can run.

Secondary throttle valve actuator

STP sensor

Gear position signal

HO2 sensor

PAIR control solenoid valve

ISC valve

EVAP purge control valve (E-

33 only)

When motor disconnection or lock occurs, power from ECM is shut off.

Secondary throttle valve is fixed to full close position.

Gear position signal is fixed to 6th gear.

Feedback compensation is inhibited. (Air/ fuel ratio is fixed to normal.)

ECM stops controlling PAIR control solenoid valve.

When motor disconnection or lock occurs, power from ECM is shut off.

ECM stops controlling EVAP purge control valve.

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

“YES”

The engine can start and can run even if the signal in the table is not received from each sensor. But, the engine running condition is not complete, providing only emergency help (by fail-safe circuit). In this case, it is necessary to bring the motorcycle to the workshop for complete repair.

When two ignition signals or two injector signals are not received by ECM, the fail-safe circuit can not work and ignition or injection is stopped.

1A-21 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

FI System Troubleshooting

B718H11104004

Customer Complaint Analysis

Record details of the problem (failure, complaint) and how it occurred as described by the customer. For this purpose, use of such an inspection form such as following will facilitate collecting information to the point required for proper analysis and diagnosis.

NOTE

This form is a standard sample. The form should be modified according to conditions and characteristic of each market.

EXAMPLE: CUSTOMER PROBLEM INSPECTION FORM

User name:

Date of issue:

Model:

Date Reg.:

VIN:

Date of problem: Mileage:

Malfunction indicator light condition (LED)

Malfunction display/code

(LCD)

†

Always ON /

†

Sometimes ON /

†

Always OFF /

†

Good condition

User mode:

†

No display /

†

Malfunction display ( )

Dealer mode:

†

No code /

†

Malfunction code ( )

†

†

†

†

†

†

Difficult Starting

No cranking

No initial combustion

No combustion

Poor starting at

(

†

cold /

Other

†

warm /

†

always)

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS

†

Poor Driveability

†

Hesitation on acceleration

†

Back fire /

†

After fire

†

Lack of power

†

Surging

†

Abnormal knocking

†

Engine rpm jumps briefly

†

Other

†

Poor Idling

†

Poor fast Idle

†

Abnormal idling speed

(

†

High /

†

Low) ( r/min)

†

Unstable

†

Hunting ( r/min to r/min)

†

Other

†

OTHERS:

†

Engine Stall when

†

Immediately after start

†

Throttle valve is opened

†

Throttle valve is closed

†

Load is applied

†

Other

Weather

Temperature

Frequency

Road

MOTORCYCLE/ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION WHEN PROBLEM OCCURS

Environmental condition

†

Fair /

†

Cloudy /

†

Rain /

†

Snow /

†

Always /

†

Other

†

Hot /

†

Warm /

†

Cool /

†

Cold (

°

C /

°

F) /

†

Always

†

Always /

†

Sometimes ( times / day, month) /

†

Only once

†

Under certain condition

†

Urban /

†

Suburb /

†

Highway /

†

Mountainous (

†

Uphill /

†

Downhill)

†

Tarmacadam /

†

Gravel /

†

Other

Engine condition

Motorcycle condition

†

Cold /

†

Warming up phase /

†

Warmed up /

†

Always /

†

Other at starting

†

Immediately after start /

†

Racing without load /

†

Engine speed ( r/min)

Motorcycle condition During driving:

†

Constant speed /

†

Accelerating /

†

Decelerating

†

Right hand corner /

†

Left hand corner

†

At stop /

†

Motorcycle speed when problem occurs ( km/h, mile/h)

†

Other:

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-22

Visual Inspection

Prior to diagnosis using the mode select switch or SDS, perform the following visual inspections. The reason for visual inspection is that mechanical failures (such as oil leakage) cannot be displayed on the screen with the use of mode select switch or SDS.

• Engine oil level and leakage. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

• Engine coolant level and leakage. Refer to “Cooling Circuit Inspection in Section 1F (Page 1F-4)”.

• Fuel level and leakage. Refer to “Fuel Line Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

• Clogged air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning in Section 0B (Page 0B-3)”.

• Battery condition.

• Throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

• Vacuum hose looseness, bend and disconnection.

• Broken fuse.

• FI light operation. Refer to “Combination Meter Inspection in Section 9C (Page 9C-5)”.

• Each warning light operation. Refer to “Combination Meter Inspection in Section 9C (Page 9C-5)”.

• Speedometer operation. Refer to “Speedometer Inspection in Section 9C (Page 9C-8)”.

• Exhaust gas leakage and noise. Refer to “Exhaust System Inspection in Section 1K (Page 1K-6)”.

• Each coupler disconnection.

• Clogged radiator fins. Refer to “Radiator Inspection and Cleaning in Section 1F (Page 1F-5)”.

Malfunction Code and Defective Condition Table

Malfunction

Code

C00

C12

Detected Item

NO FAULT

P0335

CKP sensor

C13

P0105

C14

P0120

C15

P0115

H

IAP sensor (No.1)

L

H

TP sensor

L

H

ECT sensor

L

B718H11104010

Detected Failure Condition Check For

The signal does not reach ECM for 3 sec. or more, after receiving the starter signal.

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

CKP sensor wiring and mechanical parts

CKP sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

The sensor should produce following voltage.

0.5 V

sensor voltage < 4.85 V

In other than the above range, C13 (P0105) is indicated.

IAP sensor (No.1), lead wire/ coupler connection

IAP sensor (No.1) circuit open or shorted to Vcc or ground circuit open

IAP sensor (No.1) circuit shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open

The sensor should produce following voltage.

0.2 V

sensor voltage < 4.8 V

In other than the above range, C14 (P0120) is indicated.

TP sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

TP sensor circuit shorted to

Vcc or ground circuit open

TP sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open

The sensor voltage should be the following.

0.15 V

sensor voltage < 4.85 V

In other than the above range, C15 (P0115) is indicated.

ECT sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

ECT sensor circuit open or ground circuit open

ECT sensor circuit shorted to the ground

1A-23 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Malfunction

Code

C17

P1750

C17/P1750

C21

P0110

C23

P1651

H

L

TO sensor

C24/C25

C26/C27

P0351/P0352

P0353/P0354

Ignition signal

C28

P1655

Secondary throttle valve actuator

C29

P1654

C31

P0705

H

L

H

L

H

L

Detected Item

IAP sensor (No.2)

IAT sensor

STP sensor

Gear position signal

Detected Failure Condition Check For

The sensor should produce following voltage.

0.5 V

sensor voltage < 4.85 V

In other than the above range, C17 (P1750) is indicated.

IAP sensor (No.2), lead wire/ coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

IAP sensor (No.2) circuit open or shorted to Vcc or ground circuit open

IAP sensor (No.2) circuit shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open

If the pressure variation (voltage variation) does not exist even under the engine operating condition, this malfunction code is output.

The sensor voltage should be the following.

0.15 V

sensor voltage < 4.85 V

In other than the above range, C21 (P0110) is indicated.

Make sure to check that IAP sensor (No.2) is securely installed on the throttle body.

IAT sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

IAT sensor circuit open or ground circuit open

IAT sensor circuit shorted to the ground

The sensor voltage should be the following for

2 sec. and more, after ignition switch is turned

ON.

0.2 V

sensor voltage < 4.8 V

In other than the above value, C23 (P1651) is indicated.

TO sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

TO sensor circuit shorted to

Vcc or ground circuit open

TO sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open

CKP sensor (pick-up coil) signal is produced, but signal from ignition coil is interrupted 8 times or more continuously. In this case, the code C24 (P0351), C25 (P0352), C26 (P0353) or C27 (P0354) is indicated.

When no actuator control signal is supplied from the ECM, communication signal does not reach ECM or operation voltage does not reach STVA motor, C28 (P1655) is indicated.

STVA can not operate.

The sensor should produce following voltage.

0.15 V

sensor voltage < 4.85 V

In other than the above range, C29 (P1654) is indicated.

Ignition coil, wiring/coupler connection, power supply from the battery

STVA motor, STVA lead wire/ coupler

STP sensor, lead wire/coupler connection

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

STP sensor circuit shorted to

Vcc or ground circuit open

STP sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open

Gear position signal voltage should be higher than the following for 3 seconds and more.

Gear position sensor voltage > 0.6 V

If lower than the above value, C31 (P0705) is indicated.

GP switch, wiring/coupler connection, gearshift cam, etc.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-24

Malfunction

Code

C32/C33

C34/C35

P0201/P0202

P0203/P0204

C40 /P0505

C40 /P0506

C40 /P0507

C41

P0230

C42

P1650

C49

P1656

C60

P0480

C62

P0443

H

L

C41/P2505

C44/P0130

C44/P0135

Detected Item

Fuel injector

ISC valve

Fuel pump relay

ECM/PCM power input signal

Ignition switch

HO2 sensor (HO2S)

PAIR control solenoid valve

Cooling fan relay

EVAP purge control valve (E-33 only)

Detected Failure Condition Check For

CKP sensor (pickup coil) signal is produced, but fuel injector signal is interrupted 4 times or more continuously. In this case, the code C32

(P0201), C33 (P0202), C34 (P0203) or C35

(P0204) is indicated.

Primary fuel injector, wiring/ coupler connection, power supply to the injector.

The circuit voltage of motor drive is unusual.

Idle speed is lower than the desired idle speed.

Idle speed is higher than the desired idle speed.

No voltage is applied to the fuel pump, although fuel pump relay is turned ON, or voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump relay is turned OFF.

Voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump relay is turned OFF.

No voltage is applied to the fuel pump, although fuel pump relay is turned ON.

No voltage is applied to the ECM, although FP relay is turned ON.

Ignition switch signal is not input to the ECM.

ISC valve circuit open or shorted to the ground

Air passage clogged

ISC valve fixed

ISC valve preset position is incorrect

ISC valve hose connection

ISC valve is fixed

ISC valve preset position is incorrect

Fuel pump relay, lead wire/ coupler connection, power source to fuel pump relay and fuel injectors

Fuel pump relay switch circuit shorted to power source

Fuel pump relay (switch side)

Fuel pump relay circuit open or short

Fuel pump relay (coil side)

Lead wire/coupler connection of ECM terminal to fuel fuse,

Fuel fuse, Power source of speedometer shorted to ground

Ignition switch, lead wire/ coupler, etc.

HO2 sensor output voltage is not input to ECM during engine operation and running condition.

(Sensor voltage > 1.0 V)

In other than the above value, C44 (P0130) is indicated.

HO2S lead sensor circuit open or shorted to the power source,

HO2 sensor lead wire/coupler connection

The Heater can not operate so that heater operation voltage is not supply to the oxygen heater circuit, C44 (P0135) is indicated.

PAIR control solenoid valve ampere is not input to ECM.

Cooling fan relay signal is not input to ECM.

EVAP purge control valve voltage is not input to ECM

HO2 sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground

Battery voltage supply to the

HO2 sensor

PAIR control solenoid valve, lead wire/coupler

Cooling fan relay, lead wire/ coupler connection

EVAP purge control valve, lead wire/coupler

1A-25 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C12” (P0335): CKP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

The signal does not reach ECM for 3 sec. or more, after receiving the starter signal.

B718H11104011

Possible Cause

• Metal particles or foreign material being stuck on the

CKP sensor and rotor tip.

• CKP sensor circuit open or short.

• CKP sensor malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

CKP sensor

Bl/Y

G

B/Y

B/R

14 CKP

31

CKP

To regulator/rectifier

Generator

I718H1110262-01

ECM coupler (Harness side)

Troubleshooting

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

I718H1110240-01

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the CKP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the CKP sensor resistance.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-26

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Replace the CKP sensor with a new one.

I718H1110154-02

3) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler and measure the resistance.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

CKP sensor resistance

90 – 150

(Bl /Y– G)

(A)

I718H1110156-03

4) If OK, then check the continuity between each terminal and ground.

CKP sensor continuity

∞ Ω

(Infinity) (Bl/Y – Ground, G – Ground)

(A)

Are the resistance and continuity OK?

I718H1110157-05

1A-27 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step

2 1) Crank the engine several seconds with the starter motor, and measure the CKP sensor peak voltage at the coupler.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

CKP sensor peak voltage

2.0 V and more

((+) terminal: Bl/Y – (–) terminal: G)

(A)

Peak volt adaptor

Yes

• G/Y or Br wire open or shorted to the ground.

No

• Inspect that metal particles or foreign material stuck on the

CKP sensor and rotor tip.

• Loose or poor contacts on the CKP sensor coupler or

ECM coupler

(terminal “14” or

“31”).

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• If there are no metal particles and foreign material, then replace the CKP sensor with a new one. Refer to

“CKP Sensor

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

I718H1110158-03

2) Repeat the 1) test procedures several times and measure the highest peak voltage.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

Is the voltage OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-28

DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.1) Circuit Malfunction

NOTE

• Clogged vacuum passage between throttle body and

IAP sensor (No.1).

Possible Cause

B718H11104012

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

IAP sensor (No.1) voltage is not within the following range.

0.5 V

Sensor voltage < 4.85 V

• Air being drawn from vacuum passage between throttle body and IAP sensor (No.1).

• IAP sensor (No.1) circuit open or shorted to the ground.

C13

Note that atmospheric pressure varies depending on weather conditions as well as altitude.

Take that into consideration when inspecting voltage.

• IAP sensor (No.1) malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

P0105

H

L

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

Wiring Diagram

• IAP sensor (No.1) circuit is open or shorted to Vcc or ground circuit open.

• IAP sensor (No.1) circuit is shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open.

ECM

IAP sensor (No.1)

W/Bl

B/Br

B

26

29

IAP (No.1)

E2

11 Vcc

I718H1110017-08

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

1A-29 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

C13 for IAP sensor No.1 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the IAP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the IAP sensor (No.1) input voltage.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the B wire or B/Br wire.

I718H1110257-01

4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler.

5) Turn the ignition switch ON.

6) Measure the voltage at the B wire and ground.

If OK, then measure the voltage at the B wire and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

IAP sensor (No.1) input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: B – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: B

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

I718H1110258-01

Is the voltage OK?

P0105-H for IAP sensor (No.1) (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-30

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 1 data.

I718H1110161-02

Approx. 146 kPa (1.46 kgf/cm 3 , 21 psi) and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAP sensor (No.1) lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 4.

W/Bl wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110257-01

1A-31 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the B wire and W/Bl wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Yes

Go to Step 4.

(A)

No

W/Bl wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110259-01

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

8) Check the continuity between the W/Bl wire “C” and terminal “26”.

If OK, then check the continuity between the B/Br wire

“B” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“B”

“C”

(A) )

(B)

“26”

“29”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110024-03

P0105-L for IAP sensor (No.1) (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-32

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 1 data.

I718H1110163-02

Approx. –20 kPa (–0.2 kgf/cm 3 , –2.8 psi) and less OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAP sensor (No.1) lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 3.

R and W/Bl wire open,

W/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

I718H1110257-01

1A-33 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the W/Bl wire and ground.

Also, check the continuity between the W/Bl wire and B/

Br wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

(A)

B and W/Bl wire open,

W/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

No

I718H1110260-02

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

8) Check the continuity between the B wire “A” and terminal

“11”. Also, check the continuity between the W/Bl wire

“C” and terminal “26”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

“C” “A”

(A)

(B)

“26”

Is the continuity OK?

“11”

I718H1110241-01

Step Action

3 1) Connect the ECM coupler.

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Measure the input voltage at the B wire and ground with the needle pointed probes.

If OK, the measure the input voltage at the B wire and B/

Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-34

No

Open or short circuit in the B wire or B/Br wire.

IAP sensor input voltage (No.1)

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: B – (–) terminal: Ground,(+) terminal: B

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

Yes

Go to Step 4.

(A)

I718H1110258-01

Is the voltage OK?

1A-35 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

4 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Connect the ECM coupler and IAP sensor (No.1) coupler.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

4) Start the engine at idle speed and measure the IAP sensor (No.1) output voltage at the wire side coupler between the W/Bl wire and B/Br wire.

Yes

Go to Step 5.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

IAP sensor (No.1) output voltage

Approx. 2.7 V at idle speed

((+) terminal: W/Bl – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

(B)

I718H1110261-01

Is the voltage OK?

• Check the vacuum hose for crack or damage.

No

• Open or short circuit in the W/Bl wire.

• If vacuum hose and wire is OK, replace the IAP sensor (No.1) with a new one. Refer to “IAP Sensor (No.1)

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-2)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-36

Step Action

5 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the IAP sensor (No.1). Refer to “IAP Sensor

(No.1) Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-

2)”.

3) Connect the vacuum pump gauge to the vacuum port of the IAP sensor (No.1).

Yes

• B, W/Bl or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“11”, “26” or “29” connection.

4) Arrange 3 new 1.5 V batteries in series (1) (check that total voltage is 4.5 – 5.0 V) and connect (–) terminal to the ground terminal “B” and (+) terminal to the Vcc terminal “A”.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

5) Check the voltage between Vout terminal “C” and ground. Also, check if voltage reduces when vacuum is applied by using vacuum pump gauge.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

Special tool

(A): 09917–47011 (Vacuum pump gauge)

(B): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

“C”

“B”

(A)

No

If check result is not satisfactory, replace the

IAP sensor (No.1) with a new one. Refer to “IAP

Sensor (No.1) Removal and Installation in

Section 1C (Page 1C-

2)”.

“A”

(B)

1

I718H1110030-02

ALTITUDE (Reference) ft

0 – 2 000

2 001 – 5 000

5 001 – 8 000

8 001 – 10 000 m

0 – 610

611 – 1 524

1 525 – 2 438

2 439 – 3 048

ATOMOSPHERIC

PRESSURE mmHg kPa

760 – 707

707 – 634

634 – 567

567 – 526

100 – 94

94 – 85

85 – 76

76 – 70

OUTPUT

VOLTAGE

V

3.4 – 4.0

3.0 – 3.7

2.6 – 3.4

2.4 – 3.1

I718H1110167-02

Is the voltage OK?

1A-37 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C14” (P0120-H/L): TP Sensor Circuit Malfunction

Possible Cause

• TP sensor maladjusted.

• TP sensor circuit open or short.

• TP sensor malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

B718H11104013

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C14

P0120

H

L

Detected Condition

Output voltage is not within the following range.

Difference between actual throttle opening and opening calculated by ECM is larger than specified value.

0.2 V

Sensor voltage < 4.8 V

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

• TP sensor circuit is shorted to Vcc or ground circuit is open.

• TP sensor circuit is open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit is open.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

TP sensor

B/Br

P/B

R

29

8

11

E2

TP

Vcc

I718H1110031-05

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

• TP sensor is incorporated in the IAP sensor/IAT sensor.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-38

C14 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the TP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the TP sensor input voltage.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the R or B/Br wire.

I718H1110168-03

3) Disconnect the TP sensor coupler.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground.

If OK, then measure the input voltage at the R wire and

B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

TP sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: R – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

(B)

I718H1110035-03

Is the voltage OK?

1A-39 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P0120-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

2) Check the throttle position data.

I718H1110251-01

I718H1110169-01

Throttle position approx. 125

°

and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the TP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the TP sensor lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 4.

P/B wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

3) Disconnect the TP sensor coupler.

I718H1110168-03

Step Action

2 4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-40

No

P/B wire shorted to Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

5) Check the continuity between the P/B wire and R wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

(A)

(B)

I718H1110170-02

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Check the continuity between the P/B wire “B” and terminal “8”. Also, check the continuity between the B/Br wire “C” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

“C”

“B”

?

(A)

(B)

“8”

“29”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110171-02

1A-41 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P0120-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

2) Check the throttle position data.

I718H1110251-01

I718H1110172-01

Throttle position approx. 0

°

OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the TP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the TP sensor lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 3.

R and P/B wire open, or

P/B wire shorted to the ground.

I718H1110168-03

3) Disconnect the TP sensor coupler.

4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-42

Step Action

2 5) Check the continuity between the P/B wire and ground.

Also, check the continuity between the P/B wire and B/Br wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Yes

Go to Step 3.

R and P/B wire open, or

P/B wire shorted to the ground.

No

(A)

(B)

I718H1110040-03

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Check the continuity between the P/B wire “B” and terminal “8”. Also, check the continuity between the R wire “A” and terminal “11”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

“B”

“A”

(A)

(B)

“8”

“11”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110041-03

1A-43 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

3 1) Connect the ECM coupler.

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground.

If OK, the measure the input voltage at the R and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

TP sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: R – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

Yes

Turn the ignition switch

OFF and go to Step 4.

No

Open or short circuit in the R or B/Br wire.

(A)

(B)

I718H1110035-03

Is the voltage OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-44

Step Action

4 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Connect the ECM coupler and TP sensor coupler.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

Yes

• P/B, R or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“8”, “11” or “29” connection.

5) Measure the TP sensor output voltage at the P/B wire and B/Br wire by turning the throttle grip.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

TP sensor output voltage

Throttle valve is closed: Approx. 1.1 V

Throttle valve is opened: Approx. 4.3 V

((+) terminal: P/B – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

No

If check result is not satisfactory, replace TP sensor with a new one.

Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-10)”.

Is the voltage OK?

(B)

I718H1110173-03

1A-45 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

P0115

H

L

• ECT sensor circuit shorted to the ground.

B718H11104014

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C15

Detected Condition

Output voltage is not with in the following range.

0.15 V

Sensor voltage < 4.85 V

Possible Cause

• ECT sensor circuit open or short.

• ECT sensor malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

• ECT sensor circuit is open or ground circuit open.

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

Wiring Diagram

ECT sensor

ECM

B/Bl

B/Br

10

ECT

29 E2

I718H1110046-02

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-46

C15 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the ECT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the ECT sensor input voltage at the wire side coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

wire.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the B/Bl or B/Br

I718H1110174-02

3) Disconnect the coupler and turn the ignition switch ON.

4) Measure the input voltage between the B/Bl wire terminal and ground.

If OK, then measure the input voltage between the B/Bl wire terminal and B/Br wire terminal.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

ECT sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: B/Bl – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: B/Bl – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

I718H1110048-03

Is the voltage OK?

1A-47 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P0115-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 3.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the engine coolant/oil temperature data.

Approx. –30

°

C (–22

°

F) and less OK?

I718H1110175-01

Step Action

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the ECT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the ECT sensor lead wire continuity.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-48

Yes

Go to Step 3.

No

B/Bl or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110174-02

3) Disconnect the ECT coupler.

4) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Check the continuity between the B/Bl wire “A” and terminal “10”. Also, check the continuity between the B/

Br wire “B” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“A”

(B)

“10”

“29”

Is the continuity OK?

“B”

(A)

I718H1110051-02

1A-49 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P0115-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 3.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the engine coolant/oil temperature data.

I718H1110176-01

Approx. 120

°

C (248

°

F) and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the ECT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the ECT sensor lead wire.

Go to Step 3.

• B/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire is OK, go to

Step 3.

3) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler.

I718H1110174-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-50

Step

2 4) Check the continuity between the B/Bl wire and ground.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Yes

Go to Step 3.

No

• B/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire is OK, go to

Step 3.

(A)

I718H1110054-03

5) Connect the ECT sensor coupler.

6) Remove the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator /

Rectifier Inspection in Section 1J (Page 1J-8)”.

7) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

8) Turn the ignition switch ON.

9) Measure the output voltage between the B/Bl wire and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

ECT sensor output voltage

0.15 – 4.85 V

((+) terminal: B/Bl – (–) terminal: Ground)

(A)

(B)

Are the continuity and voltage OK?

I718H1110177-05

1A-51 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Connect the ECM coupler.

3) Remove the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator /

Rectifier Inspection in Section 1J (Page 1J-8)”.

4) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler.

5) Measure the ECT sensor resistance.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

ECT sensor resistance

Approx. 2.45 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

(Terminal – Terminal)

(A)

Yes

• B/Bl or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“10” or “29” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

Replace the ECT sensor with a new one.

Refer to “ECT Sensor

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-2)”.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

I718H1110178-03

NOTE

Refer to “ECT Sensor Inspection in Section 1C

(Page 1C-3)” for details.

Is the resistance OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-52

DTC “C17” (P1750-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.2) Circuit Malfunction

B718H11104030

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

IAP sensor (No.2) voltage is not within the following range.

0.5 V

Sensor voltage < 4.85 V

Possible Cause

• Clogged vacuum passage.

• IAP sensor (No.2) circuit open or shorted to the ground.

• IAP sensor (No.2) malfunction.

NOTE

• ECM malfunction.

C17

Note that atmospheric pressure varies depending on weather conditions as well as altitude.

Take that into consideration when inspecting voltage.

P1750

H

L

C17/P1750

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

When the sensor has unfastened (or being unfastened) from the throttle body or the pressure variation (voltage variation) cannot be detected, this malfunction code is output.

• IAP sensor (No.2) circuit is open or shorted to Vcc or ground circuit open.

• IAP sensor (No.2) circuit is shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open.

• Loosen the IAP sensor (No.2) mounting.

• IAP sensor (No.2) malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

IAP sensor (No.2)

G/B

B/Br

R

9

29

IAP (No.2)

E2

11 Vcc

I718H1110179-04

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

1A-53 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

NOTE

• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

• IAP sensor (No.2) is incorporated in the TP sensor/IAT sensor.

C17 for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of mode select switch)

Step

1

Action

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the IAP sensor (No.2) input voltage.

Yes

Go to Step 4 (or P1750 for IAP sensor No.2

(Use of SDS)).

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the R or B/Br wire.

I718H1110168-03

3) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Measure the voltage at the R wire and ground.

If OK, then measure the voltage at the R wire and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

IAP sensor (No.2) input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: B – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

(B)

I718H1110180-03

Is the voltage OK?

P1750-H for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-54

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 2 data.

I718H1110181-03

Approx. 126 kPa (1.26 kgf/cm 3 , 18 psi) and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAP sensor (No.2) lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 4.

W/Bl wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110168-03

4) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

1A-55 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step

2 6) Check the continuity between the R and G/B wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Yes

Go to Step 4.

(A)

No

W/Bl wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

(B)

I718H1110023-03

7) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

8) Check the continuity between the G/B wire “C” and terminal “9”.

If OK, then check the continuity between the B/Br wire

“B” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“C” “B”

(A)

(B)

“9”

“29”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110182-02

P1750-L for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-56

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the manifold absolute pressure 2 data.

I718H1110183-02

Approx. 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm 3 , 0 psi) and less OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAP sensor (No.2) lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 3.

R and G/B wire open,

W/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

I718H1110168-03

1A-57 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 3) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.2) coupler.

4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the G/B wire and ground.

Also, check the continuity between the G/B wire and B/

Br wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

(A)

R and G/B wire open,

W/Bl wire shorted to the ground.

No

(B)

I718H1110027-04

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Check the continuity between the R wire “A” and terminal “11”. Also, check the continuity between the G/B wire “C” and terminal “9”.

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

“C”

“A”

(A)

?

(B)

“9”

“11”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110028-03

Step Action

3 1) Connect the ECM coupler.

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

4) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground with the needle pointed probes.

If OK, the measure the input voltage at the R wire and B/

Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-58

No

Open or short circuit in the R wire or B/Br wire.

IAP sensor (No.2) input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: R – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

Yes

Go to Step 4.

(A)

(B)

I718H1110180-03

Is the voltage OK?

1A-59 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

4 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Connect the ECM coupler and IAP sensor (No.2) coupler.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

Yes

• G/B, R or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“9”, “11” or “29” connection.

4) Starter the engine at idle speed and measure the IAP sensor (No.2) output voltage at the wire side coupler between G/B wire and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

IAP sensor (No.2) output voltage

2.0 – 3.0 V at idle speed

((+) terminal: G/Bl – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

No

• Open or short circuit in the G/B wire.

• If wire is OK, replace the IAP sensor (No.2) with a new one. Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section

1D (Page 1D-10)”.

(B)

I718H1110173-03

Is the voltage OK?

P1750 for IAP sensor No.2 (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Check the IAP sensor (No.2) is installed securely on the throttle body.

Yes

Intermittent trouble.

No

• Retighten the IAP sensor (No.2).

• Replace the IAP sensor (No.2) with a new one. Refer to

“Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section

1D (Page 1D-10)”.

Is the IAP sensor (No.2) installed securely?

I718H1110242-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-60

DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L): IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction

P0110

H

L

• IAT sensor circuit shorted to the ground.

B718H11104015

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C21

Detected Condition

Output voltage is not with in the following range.

0.15 V

Sensor voltage < 4.85 V

Possible Cause

• IAT sensor circuit open or short.

• IAT sensor malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

• IAT sensor circuit open or ground circuit open.

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

IAT sensor

Dg

B/Br

27

IAT

29 E2

I718H1110056-04

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

• IAT sensor is incorporated in the IAP sensor/TP sensor.

1A-61 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

C21 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the IAT sensor input voltage.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the Dg or B/Br wire.

I718H1110252-02

3) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler and turn the ignition switch ON.

4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

5) Measure the voltage between the Dg wire terminal and ground.

If OK, then measure the input voltage between the Dg wire terminal and B/Br wire terminal.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

IAT sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: Dg – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal:

Dg – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

(B)

Is the voltage OK?

I718H1110057-04

P0110-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-62

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 3.

2) Check the intake air temperature data.

I718H1110251-01

Approx. –30

°

C (–22

°

F) and less OK?

I718H1110184-02

1A-63 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAT sensor lead wire continuity.

Connect the ECM coupler and go to Step

3.

Yes No

Dg or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110168-03

3) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler.

4) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Check the continuity between the Dg wire “B” and terminal “27”. Also, check the continuity between the B/

Br wire “A” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“B”

“A”

(A)

(B)

“27”

“29”

Is the continuity OK?

I718H1110060-03

P0110-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-64

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 3.

2) Check the intake air temperature data.

I718H1110251-01

I718H1110185-02

Approx. 125

°

C (257

°

F) and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the IAT sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the IAT sensor lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 3.

• Dg wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire is OK, go to

Step 3.

3) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler.

I718H1110168-03

1A-65 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 4) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

5) Check the continuity between the Dg wire and ground. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

(A)

No

• Dg wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire is OK, go to

Step 3.

(B)

I718H1110063-03

6) Connect the IAT sensor coupler.

7) Turn the ignition switch ON.

8) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

9) Measure the output voltage between the Dg wire and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

IAT sensor output voltage

2.4 V at 23

°

C (68

°

F)

((+) terminal: Dg – (–) terminal: Ground)

(A)

(B)

Are the continuity and voltage OK?

I718H1110238-03

Step Action

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Disconnect the IAT sensor coupler.

3) Measure the IAT sensor resistance.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

IAT sensor resistance

Approx. 2.56 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

(Terminal – Terminal)

(A)

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-66

Yes

• Dg or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “27” or “29” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

Replace the IAT sensor with a new one. Refer to

“Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-10)”.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

I718H1110186-02

Is the resistance OK?

1A-67 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit Malfunction

Possible Cause

• TO sensor circuit open or short.

• TO sensor malfunction.

B718H11104016

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C23

P1651

H

L

Detected Condition

The sensor voltage should be the following for 2 sec. and more, after ignition switch is turned ON.

0.2 V

Sensor voltage < 4.8 V

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

• ECM malfunction.

• TO sensor circuit open or ground circuit open.

• TO sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

TO sensor

R

B

11 Vcc

22 TOS

29

E2

B/Br

I718H1110066-02

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-68

C23 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the TO sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the TO sensor resistance.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Replace the TO sensor with a new one. Refer to

“TO Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 1C (Page 1C-

3)”.

I718H1110187-02

4) Disconnect the TO sensor coupler and dismount the TO sensor. Refer to “TO Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 1C (Page 1C-3)”.

5) Measure the resistance between terminal “A” and terminal “C”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

TO sensor resistance

16.5 – 22.3 k

(Terminal “A” – Terminal “C”)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

(A)

Is the resistance OK?

“C” “A”

I718H1110188-02

1A-69 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P1651-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the TO sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the TO sensor lead wire continuity.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

B wire shorted to Vcc, or

B/Br wire open.

I718H1110187-02

4) Disconnect the TO sensor coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the R wire “A” and B wire

“B”. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“A”

“B”

(A)

I718H1110070-02

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-70

Step

1 8) Check the continuity between the B wire “B” and terminal

“22”. Also, check the continuity between B/Br wire “C” and terminal “29”.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

B wire shorted to Vcc, or

B/Br wire open.

“B” “C”

(A)

(B)

“22”

“29”

I718H1110071-02

Is the continuity OK?

P1651-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the TO sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the TO sensor lead wire continuity.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

R or B wire open, or B wire shorted to the ground.

No

I718H1110187-02

1A-71 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

1 4) Disconnect the TO sensor coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the B wire “B” and ground.

Also, check the continuity between the B wire “B” and B/

Br wire “C”. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

(A)

“B”

“C”

R or B wire open, or B wire shorted to the ground.

No

I718H1110073-02

6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

7) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

8) Check the continuity between the R wire “A” and terminal “11”. Also, then check the continuity between B wire “B” and terminal “22”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“B”

(A)

(B)

“A”

“22”

“11”

I718H1110074-02

Is the continuity OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-72

Step

2) Dismount the TO sensor from its bracket. Refer to “TO

Sensor Removal and Installation in Section 1C

(Page 1C-3)”.

Action

2 1) Connect the ECM coupler and TO sensor coupler.

Yes

• R, B or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“11”, “22” or “29” connection.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

5) Measure the voltage at the wire side coupler between B and B/Br wire.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

TO sensor voltage (Normal)

0.4 – 1.4 V

((+) terminal: B – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(B)

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

• Loosen or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

No

• Open or short circuit.

• Replace the TO sensor with a new one. Refer to “TO

Sensor Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-3)”.

(A)

I718H1110189-03

6) Measure the voltage when it is leaned 65

°

and more to left and right, from the horizontal level.

TO sensor voltage (Leaning)

3.7 – 4.4 V

((+) terminal: B – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(B)

(A)

65

(B)

I718H1110190-03

Is the voltage OK?

1A-73 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C24” (P0351), “C25” (P0352), “C26” (P0353) or “C27” (P0354): Ignition System Malfunction

B718H11104017

NOTE

Refer to “No Spark or Poor Spark in Section 1H (Page 1H-3)” for details.

DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA) Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

The operation voltage does not reach the STVA.

ECM does not receive communication signal from the

STVA.

• STVA malfunction.

Possible Cause

• STVA circuit open or short.

• STVA motor malfunction.

B718H11104018

Wiring Diagram

STVA

B

P

G

W/Bl

B/Lg

P/W

G

W/B

ECM

19

STVA. 1B

2 STVA. 1A

18 STVA. 2B

1

STVA. 2A

I718H1110077-04

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Step Action

1 1) Remove the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator /

Rectifier Construction in Section 1J (Page 1J-8)”.

2) Check the STVA lead wire coupler for loose or poor contacts.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-74

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the B/Lg, P/W, W/B or G wire.

• If wire and connection are OK, go to Step 2.

I718H1110191-01

3) Move the air cleaner backward. Refer to “Air Cleaner

Element Removal and Installation in Section 1D

(Page 1D-6)”.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON to check the STV operation.

(STVA operating order: Full open

15% open)

I705H1110063-01

Is the operating OK?

1A-75 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Action

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Move the throttle body right side. Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-9)”.

3) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler.

4) Check the continuity between each terminal and ground.

Yes

• W/B, P/W, G and B/

Lg wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “1”,

“2”, “18” and “19” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Replace the STVA with a new one. Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section

1D (Page 1D-10)”.

STVA continuity

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

(Terminal – Ground)

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

No

(A)

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

I718H1110192-02

5) If OK, then measure the STVA resistance (between the

B wire “A” and P wire “B”) and (between the G wire “C” and W/Bl wire “D”).

STVA resistance

Approx. 7.0

(Terminal “A” – Ground “B”, Terminal “C” – Ground

“D”)

(A)

“B”

“C”

“A”

“D”

Is the resistance OK?

I718H1110193-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-76

Active Control Inspection

1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Click “Secondary throttle operating control” (1).

1

I718H1110247-01

4) Click each button (2).

At this time, if an operation sound is heard from the STVA, the function is normal.

2

2

I718H1110195-02

1A-77 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction

Possible Cause

• STP sensor maladjusted.

• STP sensor circuit open or short.

• STP sensor malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

B718H11104019

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C29

P1654

H

L

Detected Condition

Signal voltage is not within the following range.

Difference between actual throttle opening and opening calculated by ECM is larger than specified value.

0.15 V

Sensor voltage < 4.85 V

Sensor voltage is higher than specified value.

Sensor voltage is lower than specified value.

• STP sensor circuit shorted to Vcc or ground circuit open.

• STP sensor circuit open or shorted to the ground or Vcc circuit open.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

STP sensor

R

B/Br

Y/W

11

Vcc

29

E2

20 STP

I718H1110083-02

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

C29 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the STP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the STP sensor input voltage.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-78

Yes

Go to Step 4.

wire.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Open or short circuit in the R wire or B/Br

I718H1110253-01

3) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler.

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

5) Measure the voltage at the R wire and ground. Also, measure the voltage at the R wire and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

STP sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: R – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

I718H1110197-02

Is the voltage OK?

1A-79 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P1654-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the secondary throttle actuator position sensor data.

I718H1110198-01

Secondary throttle position approx. 100% and more OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the STP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the STP sensor lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 4.

Y/W wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110253-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-80

Step Action

2 3) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler.

4) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire and R wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Yes

Go to Step 4.

No

Y/W wire shorted to

Vcc, or B/Br wire open.

(A)

I718H1110088-04

5) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

6) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire “A” and terminal “20”. Also, check the continuity between the B/

Br wire “B” and terminal “29”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“B”

“A”

(A)

(B)

“20”

“29”

I718H1110089-04

Is the continuity OK?

1A-81 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P1654-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Click the data monitor button (1).

1

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Go to Step 4.

I718H1110251-01

2) Check the secondary throttle actuator position sensor data.

I718H1110199-01

Secondary throttle position approx. 0% OK?

2 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check the STP sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the STP sensor lead wire continuity.

Go to Step 3.

R or Y/W wire open, or

Y/W wire shorted to the ground.

3) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler.

I718H1110253-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-82

Step Action

2 4) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire and ground.

Also, check the continuity between the Y/W wire and B/

Br wire.

If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Yes

Go to Step 3.

R or Y/W wire open, or

Y/W wire shorted to the ground.

No

(A)

I718H1110092-03

5) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

6) Check the continuity between the Y/W wire “A” and terminal “20”. Also, check the continuity between the R wire “C” and terminal “11”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“C”

“A”

(A)

(B)

“20”

Is the continuity OK?

“11”

I718H1110093-02

1A-83 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

3 1) Connect the ECM coupler.

2) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler.

3) Turn the ignition switch ON.

4) Measure the input voltage at the R wire and ground.

Also, measure the input voltage at the R wire and B/Br wire.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

STP sensor input voltage

4.5 – 5.5 V

((+) terminal: R – (–) terminal: Ground, (+) terminal: R

– (–) terminal: B/Br)

Yes

Go to Step 4.

(A)

No

Open or short circuit in the R or B/Br wire.

I718H1110197-02

Is the voltage OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-84

Step Action

4 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Connect the ECM coupler and STP sensor coupler.

3) Move the air cleaner box backward. Refer to “Throttle

Body Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-

9)”.

4) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler. Refer to “DTC

“C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator

(STVA) Malfunction (Page 1A-73)”.

5) Insert the needle point probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Turn the ignition switch ON.

7) Measure the STP sensor output voltage at the coupler

(between the (+) Y/W wire and (–) B/Br wire) by turning the secondary throttle valve (close and open) with your finger.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Yes

• R, Y/W or B/Br wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“11”, “20” or “29” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

If check result is not satisfactory, replace the

STP sensor with a new one. Refer to “STP

Sensor Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-4)”.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

STP sensor output voltage

Secondary throttle valve is closed: Approx. 0.6 V

Secondary throttle valve is opened: Approx. 4.5 V

((+) terminal: Y/W – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(A)

(B)

I718H1110201-03

I705H1110071-01

Is the voltage OK?

1A-85 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C31” (P0705): GP Switch Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

No Gear Position switch voltage

Switch voltage is not within the following range.

Switch voltage > 0.6 V

Possible Cause

• Gear position switch circuit open or short.

• Gear position switch malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

B718H11104020

ECM

23

34

GP

E1

P

B/W

To the engine stop switch

Side-stand relay

Bl

P

6

GP switch

N

1

B/W

5

4

3

2

Neutral indicator light

Side-stand switch

Ignition switch

I718H1110097-03

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-86

Step

1

Action

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the GP switch coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the GP switch voltage.

I718H1110254-01

4) Support the motorcycle with a jack.

5) Fold the side-stand to up position.

6) Make sure the engine stop switch is in the “RUN” position.

7) Insert the needle pointed probe to the lead wire coupler.

8) Turn the ignition switch ON.

9) Measure the voltage at the wire side coupler between the P and B/W wire, when shifting the gearshift lever from 1st to Top.

Yes

• P wire open or shorted to the ground.

No

• P or B/W wire open, or P wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

• If wire and connection are OK, replace the GP switch with a new one. Refer to “Gear

Position (GP) Switch

Removal and

Installation in Section

5B (Page 5B-12)”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

GP switch voltage

0.6 V and more

((+) terminal: P – (–) terminal: B/W)

(A)

(B)

(B)

I718H1110203-03

Is the voltage OK?

1A-87 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C32” (P0201), “C33” (P0202), “C34” (P0203) or “C35” (P0204): Fuel Injector Circuit Malfunction

B718H11104021

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

CKP signal is produced but fuel injector signal is interrupted by 4 times or more continuity.

Possible Cause

• Injector circuit open or short.

• Injector malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

Gr/W

Fuel pump relay

Y/R

To the engine stop switch 44

43

42

41

#11

#21

#31

#41

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Gr/R

Gr/Y

Gr/B

#4 #3 #2

Fuel injector

#1

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110100-03

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

• Injector voltage can be detected only for 3 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-88

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the injector coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the injector resistance.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Replace the injector with a new one. Refer to

“Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-10)”.

I718H1110204-01

4) Disconnect the injector coupler and measure the resistance between terminals.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Injector resistance

11 – 13

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

(Terminal – Terminal)

(A)

I718H1110205-02

1A-89 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

1 5) If OK, then check the continuity between each terminal and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Injector continuity

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

(A)

No

Replace the injector with a new one. Refer to

“Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-10)”.

Are the resistance and continuity OK?

I718H1110206-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-90

Step Action

2 1) Turn the ignition switch ON.

2) Measure the injector voltage between the Y/R wire and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Injector voltage

Battery voltage

((+) terminal: Y/R – (–) terminal: Ground)

Is the voltage OK?

(A)

I718H1110207-03

Yes

• Gr/W wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “44” connection (#1 cylinder side).

• Gr/B wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “43” connection (#2 cylinder side).

• Gr/Y wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “42” connection (#3 cylinder side).

• Gr/R wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “41” connection (#4 cylinder side).

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

No

Open circuit in the Y/R wire.

1A-91 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C40” (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): ISC Valve Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C40/P0505

C40/P0506

Detected Condition

The circuit voltage of motor drive is unusual.

Idle speed is lower than the desired idle speed.

C40/P0507

Idle speed is high than the desired idle speed.

• Air passage clogged.

• ISC valve is fixed.

• ISC valve preset position is incorrect.

• Disconnect ISC valve hose.

• ISC valve is fixed.

• ISC valve preset position is incorrect.

B718H11104022

Possible Cause

• ISC valve circuit open or shorted to the ground.

Wiring Diagram

ISC valve

W/Y

W/Y

49

ECM

IS1B

Lbl

Lg

Dbr

Lbl

Lg

Dbr

36

48

IS1A

IS2B

35

IS2A

I718H1110105-03

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

• Be careful not to disconnect the ISC valve coupler at least 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF.

If the ECM coupler is disconnected within 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF, there is a possibility of an usual valve being written in ECM and causing an error of ISC valve operation.

• When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-92

2) Check the ISC valve coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the ISC valve lead wire continuity.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Lbl, W/Y, Dgr or Lg wire open.

I718H1110208-02

3) Disconnect the ISC valve coupler and ECM coupler.

Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C

(Page 1C-1)”.

4) Check the continuity between terminals “A” and “49”, terminals “B” and “36”, terminals “C” and “48”, terminals

“D” and “35”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“A”

“B”

“C”

“D”

(A)

(B)

Is the continuity OK?

“35”

“48”

“36”

“49”

I718H1110209-03

1A-93 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 1) Move the throttle body right side. Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-9)”.

2) Disconnect the ISC valve coupler.

Yes

If wire is OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

3) Check the continuity between each terminal and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

ISC valve continuity

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

(Terminal – Ground)

No

Replace the ISC valve with a new one. Refer to

“Throttle Body

Disassembly and

Assembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-10)”.

(A)

I718H1110210-02

4) If OK, then measure the resistance (between the Lbl wire “A” and W/Y wire “B”) and (between the Dbr wire

“C” and Lg wire “D”).

ISC valve resistance

Approx. 20

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

(Terminal: Lg – Terminal: W/Y, Terminal: Dbr –

Terminal: Lg)

(A)

“D”

“C”

“A”

“B”

I718H1110211-02

Is the resistance OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-94

ACTIVE CONTROL INSPECTION (ISC RPM CONTROL)

Check 1

1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

2) Check that the engine is running.

3) Click the “Active control”.

4) Click the “ISC rpm control” (1).

1

5) Check that the “Spec” (2) is idle speed 1 200

±

100 rpm.

6) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is within the specified idle rpm.

I718H1110246-01

2

3

I718H1110213-01

I718H1110214-02

1A-95 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Check 2

1) Click the button (4) and decrease the “Spec” (2) to 1 100 rpm slowly.

2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (2). At the same time, check that the number of steps (5) in the ISC valve position decreases.

3) Click the button (6) and increase the “Spec” (2) slowly.

4) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (2). Also, check that the number of steps (5) in the ISC valve position increases.

6

2 4

I718H1110215-01

3

5

I718H1110216-02

Check 3

1) Click the button (6) and increase the “Spec” (2) to 1 300 rpm slowly.

2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is nearly equal to the “Spec” (2). Also, check that the number of steps (5) in the ISC valve position increases.

6

2

I718H1110217-01

3

5

I718H1110218-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-96

Check 4

1) Click the button (6) and increase the “Spec” (2) to 1 400 rpm.

2) Check that the “Desired idle speed” (3) is approx. 1 400 rpm.

3) Check that the “Engine speed” (7) is close to 1 400 rpm.

NOTE

Be careful not to increase the “Spec” to 1 700 rpm, or the “Engine speed” may reach the upper limit.

6

2

I718H1110219-01

7

3

I718H1110220-02

If the ISC valve does not function properly, replace the ISC valve or inspect the ISC valve. Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-10)”.

1A-97 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

DTC “C41” (P0230-H/L): FP Relay Circuit Malfunction

B718H11104023

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C41

H

Detected Condition

No voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump relay is turned ON, or voltage is applied to fuel pump, although fuel pump relay is turned OFF.

Voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump relay is turned OFF.

P0230

L

No voltage is applied to fuel pump although fuel pump relay is turned ON.

Possible Cause

• Fuel pump relay circuit open or short.

• Fuel pump relay malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

• Fuel pump relay switch circuit is shorted to power source.

• Faulty pump relay (switch side).

• Fuel pump relay coil circuit open or short.

• Faulty pump relay (coil side).

Wiring Diagram

16

ECM

BATT

33

38

VM

FP relay

R/Bl

Fuel pump

M

Y/R

Y/B

Fuel pump relay

R/BI

B/R

Engine stop switch

To side-stand switch

Side-stand relay

ECM coupler (Harness side)

Ignition switch

I718H1110263-01

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-98

C41 (Use of mode select switch)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the FP relay coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the FP relay. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Relay Inspection in Section 1G (Page 1G-7)”.

Yes

• ECM power input signal malfunction.

Refer to “DTC “C41”

(P2505): ECM Power

Input Signal

Malfunction

(Page 1A-100)”.

No

Replace the FP relay with a new one.

Is the FP relay OK?

I718H1110221-03

• Y/B or B/R wire open or short or poor “38” connection.

• Y/R or R/Bl wire open, shorted or poor

“33” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

P0230-H (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the FP relay coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the FP relay. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Relay Inspection in Section 1G (Page 1G-7)”.

Yes

• Y/B wire shorted to power source.

• Y/B wire shorted to the ground.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

No

Replace the FP relay with a new a new one.

Is the FP relay OK?

I718H1110221-03

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

1A-99 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

P0230-L (Use of SDS)

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the FP relay coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the FP relay. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Relay Inspection in Section 1G (Page 1G-7)”.

Yes

• Y/B wire open or poor

“38” connection.

No

Replace the FP relay with a new one.

• B/R wire open or shorted to the ground.

• R/Bl or Y/R wire open or shorted to the ground or poor “33” connection.

Is the FP relay OK?

I718H1110221-03

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble of faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-100

DTC “C41” (P2505): ECM Power Input Signal Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

No voltage is applied to the ECM, although FP relay is turned ON.

C41/P2505

B718H11104031

Possible Cause

• Lead wire/coupler connection of ECM terminal to fuel fuse

• Fuel fuse

• Power source of speedometer shorted to ground

Wiring Diagram

To speedometer

ECM

16 BATT

R/Bl

Fuel pump

M

33

38

VM

FP relay

Y/R

Y/B

Fuel pump relay

R/BI

B/R

Engine stop switch

To side-stand switch

Side-stand relay

Ignition switch

I718H1110264-02

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

1A-101 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step

1

Action

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the ECM coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then measure the ECM input voltage.

Yes

• Fuel pump relay circuit malfunction.

Refer to “DTC “C41”

(P0230-H/L): FP

Relay Circuit

Malfunction

(Page 1A-97)”.

• R/Bl wire open or short or poor “16” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

Open or short circuit in the R/Bl wire.

I718H1110256-01

4) Disconnect the ECM coupler.

5) Insert the needle pointed probe to ECM coupler.

6) Measure the voltage between terminal “16” and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

ECM input voltage

Battery voltage

((+) terminal: “16” – (–) terminal: Ground)

(A)

Is the voltage OK?

(B)

“16”

I718H1110250-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-102

DTC “C42” (P1650): IG Switch Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

Ignition switch signal is not input in the ECM.

Possible Cause

• Ignition system circuit open or short.

• ECM malfunction.

B718H11104024

Troubleshooting

NOTE

• Refer to “Ignition Switch Inspection in Section 9C (Page 9C-10)” for details.

• After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

DTC “C44” (P0130/P0135): HO2 Sensor (HO2S) Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

C44/P0130

C44/P0135

Detected Condition

HO2 sensor output voltage is not input to

ECM during engine operation and running condition.

Sensor voltage > 1.0 V

The heater can not operate so that heater operation voltage is not supplied to the oxygen heater circuit.

Possible Cause

• HO2 sensor circuit open or short.

• ECM malfunction.

• HO2 sensor lead wire/coupler connection.

• Battery voltage supply to the HO2 sensor

B718H11104025

Wiring Diagram

ECM

29 E2

12

40

HO2

HO2.H

B/Br

W/G

W/B

Engine stop Side-stand switch relay

O/W

To Side- stand switch

Ignition switch

HO2 sensor

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110114-03

I718H1110240-01

1A-103 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Troubleshooting (When Indicating C44/P0130:)

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the HO2 sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then check the HO2 sensor lead wire continuity.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

W/G wire shorted to the power source, or W/G or B/Br wire open.

I718H1110223-01

4) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler.

5) Check the continuity between the W/G wire and O/W wire. If the sound is not heard from the tester, the circuit condition is OK.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

(A)

I718H1110265-02

Step Action

1 6) Disconnect the ECM coupler. Refer to “ECM Removal and Installation in Section 1C (Page 1C-1)”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-104

No

W/G wire shorted to the power source, or W/G or B/Br wire open.

7) Check the continuity between the W/G wire “A” and terminal “12”. Also, check the continuity between the B/

Br wire “B” and terminal “29”.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

(A)

“B”

“A”

(B)

“12”

Is the continuity OK?

“29”

I718H1110229-02

1A-105 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

2 1) Connect the ECM coupler and HO2 sensor coupler.

2) Warm up the engine enough.

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

4) Measure the HO2 sensor output voltage between the W/

G wire and B/Br wire, when idling condition.

Yes

• W/G or B/Br wire open or shorted to the power source, or poor “12” or “29” connection.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

Replace the HO2 sensor with a new one.

Refer to “Heated

Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

Removal and

Installation in Section

1B (Page 1B-5)”.

Tester knob indication

Voltage (

HO2 sensor output voltage at idle speed

0.3 V and less

((+) terminal: W/G – (–) terminal: B/Br)

(B)

)

(A)

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspection it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

I718H1110230-02

5) If OK, then pinch the PAIR hose (1) with a proper hose clamp.

1

I718H1110266-01

6) Measure the HO2 sensor output voltage while holding the engine speed at 3 000 r/min.

HO2 sensor output voltage at 3 000 r/min

0.6 V and more

((+) terminal: W/G – (–) terminal: B/Br)

Is the voltage OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-106

Troubleshooting (When Indicating C44/P0135:)

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the HO2 sensor for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the HO2 sensor resistance.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Replace the HO2 sensor with a new one.

Refer to “HO2 Sensor

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-6)”.

I718H1110223-01

4) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler and measure the resistance between terminals.

!

CAUTION

• Temperature of the sensor affects resistance value largely.

• Make sure that the sensor heater is in correct temperature.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

HO2 heater resistance

Approx. 8

at 23

°

C (73

°

F)

(W – W)

(A)

I718H1110243-01

Is the resistance OK?

1A-107 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step

NOTE

Battery voltage can be detected only before starting the engine.

Action

2 1) Connect the HO2 sensor coupler.

2) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

3) Turn the ignition switch ON and measure the heater voltage between the W/B wire and ground.

If the tester voltage indicates the battery voltage, it is good condition.

Yes

• O/W or W/B wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“40” connection.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Heater voltage

Battery voltage

((+) terminal: W/B – (–) terminal: Ground)

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

• Open or short circuit in the W/B wire or O/

W wire.

No

• Loose or poor contacts on the ECM coupler or HO2 sensor coupler.

(A)

Is the voltage OK?

(B)

I718H1110232-02

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-108

DTC “C49” (P1656): PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction

B718H11104028

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition Possible Cause

PAIR control solenoid valve ampere is not input to ECM. • PAIR control solenoid valve circuit open or short.

• PAIR control solenoid valve malfunction.

• ECM malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

39

PAIR

B/G

Engine stop switch

O/W

To side-stand switch

Side-stand relay

Ignition switch

PAIR control solenoid valve

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110124-02

I718H1110240-01

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

1A-109 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and

Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Check the PAIR control solenoid valve coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then measure the PAIR control solenoid valve resistance.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Replace the PAIR control solenoid with a new one. Refer to “PAIR

Control Solenoid Valve

Removal and

Installation in Section

1B (Page 1B-6)”.

I718H1110233-01

4) Disconnect the PAIR control solenoid valve coupler.

5) Measure the resistance between terminals.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

(Terminal – Terminal)

(A)

I718H1110234-02

Is the resistance OK?

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-110

Step Action

2 1) Turn the ignition switch ON.

2) Measure the voltage between the O/W wire and ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Yes

• B/G wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor “39” connection failure.

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

PAIR control solenoid valve voltage

Battery voltage

((+) terminal: O/W – (–) terminal: Ground)

(A)

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

No

Open or short circuit in the O/W wire.

I718H1110235-02

Is the voltage OK?

Active Control Inspection

1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to SDS operation manual for further details.)

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Click “PAIR Sol operating control” (1).

1

I718H1110245-01

1A-111 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

4) Click each button (2). At this time, if an operating sound is heard from the PAIR control solenoid valve, the function is normal.

DTC “C60” (P0480): Cooling Fan Relay Circuit Malfunction

Detected Condition and Possible Cause

Detected Condition

Cooling fan relay signal is not input to ECM.

Possible Cause

• Cooling fan relay circuit open or short.

• ECM malfunction.

Wiring Diagram

ECM

15

FAR

O/R

Cooling fan relay

Engine stop switch

O/W

To side-stand switch

Side-stand relay

Ignition switch

Cooling fan motor

2

I718H1110236-01

B718H11104029

I718H1110125-03

ECM coupler (Harness side)

I718H1110240-01

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-112

Troubleshooting

!

CAUTION

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

NOTE

After repairing the trouble, clear the DTC using SDS tool. Refer to “Use of SDS Diagnosis Reset

Procedures (Page 1A-13)”.

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Check the cooling fan relay coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then inspection the cooling fan relay. Refer to

“Cooling Fan Inspection in Section 1F (Page 1F-8)”.

Yes

• O/W and O/R wire open or shorted to the ground, or poor

“15” connection.

• If wire and connection are OK, intermittent trouble or faulty ECM.

No

Replace the cooling fan relay with a new one.

Is the cooling fan relay OK?

I718H1110255-01

• Recheck each terminal and wire harness for open circuit and poor connection.

• Replace the ECM with a known good one, and inspect it again. Refer to “ECM

Removal and

Installation in Section

1C (Page 1C-1)”.

1A-113 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Active Control Inspection

NOTE

Cooling fan relay and cooling fan motor operation can be checked until the engine coolant temperature is less than 100

°

C (212

°

F) after starting the engine.

1) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to SDS operation manual for further details.)

2) Start the engine and run it in idling condition.

3) Click “Cooling fan relay control” (1).

1

I718H1110244-01

4) Click the operate button (2).

At this time, if an operation sound is heard from the cooling fan relay and cooling fan motor is operated, the function is normal.

5) Click the stop button (3) to check the operation properly.

2

I718H1110237-02

3

I718H1110138-02

Service Data

Injector

Item

Injector resistance

FI Sensors

Item

CKP sensor resistance

CKP sensor peak voltage

IAP sensor input voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor input voltage (No.2)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.2)

TP sensor input voltage

TP sensor output voltage

ECT sensor input voltage

ECT sensor output voltage

ECT sensor resistance

IAT sensor input voltage

IAT sensor output voltage

IAT sensor resistance

TO sensor resistance

TO sensor output voltage

GP switch voltage

Injector voltage

Injection coil primary peak voltage

STP sensor input voltage

STP sensor output voltage

STV actuator resistance

ISC valve resistance

HO2 sensor resistance

HO2 sensor output voltage

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

EVAP purge control valve

Engine General Information and Diagnosis: 1A-114

Specifications

Specification

11 – 13

at 20

°

C (68 F

°

)

B718H11107001

Note

Closed

Opened

Normal

Leaning

Closed

Opened

Specification

90 – 150

2.0 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.7 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

2.0 – 3.0 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 1.1 V

Approx. 4.3 V

4.5 – 5.5 V

0.15 – 4.85 V

Approx. 2.45 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.4 V at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 2.56 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

16.5 – 22.3 k

0.4 – 1.4 V

3.7 – 4.4 V

0.6 V and more

Battery voltage

80 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 0.6 V

Approx. 4.5 V

Approx. 7.0

Approx. 20

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 8

at 23

°

C (73

°

F)

0.3 V and less at idle speed

0.6 V and more at 3 000 r/min

Approx. 18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

Approx. 32

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Note

When cranking

When leaning 65

°

From 1st to Top

When cranking

E-33 only

1A-115 Engine General Information and Diagnosis:

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1A-26) /

) (Page 1A-27) /

) (Page 1A-29) /

) (Page 1A-109) /

) (Page 1A-110) /

) (Page 1A-31) /

) (Page 1A-31) /

) (Page 1A-33) /

) (Page 1A-33) /

) (Page 1A-34) /

) (Page 1A-35) /

) (Page 1A-36) /

) (Page 1A-38) /

) (Page 1A-40) /

) (Page 1A-40) /

) (Page 1A-42) /

) (Page 1A-42) /

) (Page 1A-43) /

) (Page 1A-44) /

) (Page 1A-46) /

) (Page 1A-48) /

) (Page 1A-50) /

) (Page 1A-50) /

) (Page 1A-51) /

) (Page 1A-53) /

) (Page 1A-55) /

) (Page 1A-55) /

) (Page 1A-57) /

) (Page 1A-58) /

) (Page 1A-59) /

) (Page 1A-61) /

) (Page 1A-63) /

) (Page 1A-65) /

) (Page 1A-65)

09904–41010

SDS set

) (Page 1A-12) /

) (Page 1A-15)

) (Page 1A-66) /

) (Page 1A-68) /

) (Page 1A-69) /

) (Page 1A-70) /

) (Page 1A-71) /

) (Page 1A-71) /

) (Page 1A-72) /

) (Page 1A-75) /

) (Page 1A-78) /

) (Page 1A-80) /

) (Page 1A-80) /

) (Page 1A-82) /

) (Page 1A-82) /

) (Page 1A-83) /

) (Page 1A-84) /

) (Page 1A-86) /

) (Page 1A-88) /

) (Page 1A-89) /

) (Page 1A-90) /

) (Page 1A-92) /

) (Page 1A-93) /

) (Page 1A-101) /

) (Page 1A-103) /

) (Page 1A-104) /

) (Page 1A-105) /

) (Page 1A-106) /

) (Page 1A-107)

09917–47011

Vacuum pump gauge

) (Page 1A-36)

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

) (Page 1A-107) /

) (Page 1A-31) /

) (Page 1A-33) /

) (Page 1A-35) /

) (Page 1A-38) /

) (Page 1A-40) /

) (Page 1A-40) /

) (Page 1A-42) /

) (Page 1A-42) /

) (Page 1A-44) /

) (Page 1A-48) /

) (Page 1A-50) /

) (Page 1A-53) /

) (Page 1A-55) /

) (Page 1A-55) /

) (Page 1A-57) /

) (Page 1A-58) /

) (Page 1A-59) /

) (Page 1A-61) /

) (Page 1A-63) /

) (Page 1A-65) /

) (Page 1A-65) /

) (Page 1A-70) /

) (Page 1A-71) /

) (Page 1A-72) /

) (Page 1A-80) /

) (Page 1A-82) /

) (Page 1A-84) /

) (Page 1A-86) /

) (Page 1A-92) /

) (Page 1A-101) /

) (Page 1A-104) /

) (Page 1A-105)

09930–82720

Mode select switch

) (Page 1A-3) / ) (Page 1A-

11) / ) (Page 1A-11)

99565–01010–010

CD-ROM Ver.10

) (Page 1A-12) /

) (Page 1A-15)

B718H11108001

Emission Control Devices: 1B-1

Engine

Emission Control Devices

Precautions

Precautions for Emission Control Devices

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H11200001

General Description

Fuel Injection System Description

B718H11201001

GSF1250 motorcycles are equipped with a fuel injection system for emission level control. This fuel injection system is precision designed, manufactured and adjusted to comply with the applicable emission limits. With varying engine conditions, all of the fuel injection volumes are precisely controlled by the programmed injection maps in the ECM to reduce CO, NOX and HC. Adjusting, interfering with, improper replacement, or resetting of any of the fuel injection components may adversely affect injection performance and cause the motorcycle to exceed the exhaust emission level limits.

1

6

7

2

4

8

1. Fuel tank

2. Fuel pump

3. Fuel mesh filter (For low pressure)

4. Fuel feed hose

5. Fuel delivery pipe

6. Fuel pressure regulator

7. Fuel filter (For high pressure)

8. Fuel injector

3

5

“A”

“B”

“C”

“A”: Before-pressurized fuel

“B”: Pressurized fuel

“C”: Relieved fuel

I718H1170001-02

1B-2 Emission Control Devices:

Crankcase Emission Control System Description

B718H11201002

The engine is equipped with a PCV system to prevent discharging crankcase emissions into the atmosphere. Blow-by gas in the engine is constantly drawn into the crankcase, which is returned to the combustion chamber through the

PCV (breather) hose, air cleaner and throttle body.

1

2

1. Air cleaner box

2. Oil breather separator

“A”

“B”

“C”

“D”

3

3. Oil return

“A”: Fresh air

“B”: Fuel/Air mixture

“C”: Blow-by gas

“D”: Engine oil

I718H1120038-04

Emission Control Devices: 1B-3

Exhaust Emission Control System Description

B718H11201003

The exhaust emission control system is composed of the PAIR system, HO2 sensor, catalyst system and ISC system.

The fresh air is drawn into the exhaust port through the PAIR control solenoid valve and PAIR reed valve. The PAIR control solenoid valve is operated by the ECM, which is controlled according to the signals from TPS, ECTS, IATS,

IAPS and CKPS.

ISC valve adjusts the bypass air volume of the throttle body to control engine idling speed with various sensor signals by varying engine running conditions and the idling control contributes to reduce exhaust emission level.

“A”

4

1

2

3

5

“B”

“C”

1. PAIR control solenoid valve

2. PAIR reed valve

3. Fuel injector

4. ECM

5. HO2 sensor

6. Catalyst

6

“A”: From air cleaner box

“B”: Fresh air

“C”: Exhaust gas

I718H1120039-03

Noise Emission Control System Description

B718H11201004

TAMPERING WITH THE NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM PROHIBITED: Local law or federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:

• The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use, or

• The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.

Among Those Acts Presumed to Constitute Tampering are the Acts Listed Below:

• Removing or puncturing the muffler, baffles, header pipes, screen type spark arrester (if equipped) or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.

• Removing or puncturing the air cleaner case, air cleaner cover, baffles or any other component which conducts intake air.

• Replacing the exhaust system or muffler with a system or muffler not marked with the same model specific code as the code listed on the Motorcycle Noise Emission Control Information label.

1B-4 Emission Control Devices:

Schematic and Routing Diagram

PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram

“B”

“ a ”

“ a ”

1

“B”

“A”

1

“ a ”

“A”

“ a ”

“A”

“ a ”

2

“B”

“C”

“C”

B718H11202001

1. PAIR control solenoid valve

2. PAIR reed valve

“A”: Marking (Yellow)

“B”: Marking (White)

“C”: To air cleaner box

“a”: Approx. 0

°

I718H1120043-01

Emission Control Devices: 1B-5

Repair Instructions

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and

Installation

B718H11206005

Removal

!

WARNING

Do not remove the HO2 sensor while it is hot.

!

CAUTION

• Be careful not to expose the HO2 sensor to excessive shock.

• Do not use an impact wrench when removing or installing the HO2 sensor.

• Be careful not to twist or damage the sensor lead wires.

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

3) Move the regulator/rectifier assembly (1) by removing the regulator/rectifier bracket bolts.

6) Remove the HO2 sensor (3).

3

I718H1120020-01

Installation

Install the HO2 sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

Do not apply oil or other materials to the sensor air hole.

• Tighten the HO2 sensor to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

HO2 sensor (a): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft)

(a)

1

I718H1120018-01

4) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler (2).

5) Release the HO2 sensor lead wire from the clamps.

2

I718H1120021-01

• Route the HO2 sensor lead wire properly. Refer to

“Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A

(Page 9A-8)”.

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Inspection

B718H11206006

Refer to “DTC “C44” (P0130/P0135): HO2 Sensor

(HO2S) Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-

102)”.

I718H1120019-01

1B-6 Emission Control Devices:

PAIR Reed Valve Removal and Installation

B718H11206008

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Drain engine coolant and remove the thermostat connector. Refer to “Thermostat Connector /

Thermostat Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-9)”.

3) Disconnect the hoses (1) and remove the PAIR reed valve covers (2).

1

2

1

4) Remove the PAIR reed valves (3).

2

I718H1120023-01

1

(a)

I718H1120042-01

PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and

Installation

B718H11206001

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Drain engine coolant and remove the thermostat connector. Refer to “Thermostat Connector /

Thermostat Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-9)”.

3) Disconnect the PAIR control solenoid valve coupler

(1) and PAIR hoses (2).

4) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve (3).

3

3

2

2

I718H1120029-01

Installation

Install the PAIR reed valve in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the PAIR reed valves (1) as shown.

• Apply thread lock to the bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

PAIR reed valve cover bolt (a): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m,

8.0 lb-ft)

1

3

I718H1120007-02

Installation

Install the PAIR control solenoid valve in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• Connect the PAIR control solenoid valve coupler and

PAIR hoses securely. Refer to “PAIR System Hose

Routing Diagram (Page 1B-4)”.

PAIR System Inspection

B718H11206002

PAIR Hose

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Inspect the hoses for wear or damage. If it is worn or damaged, replace the PAIR hose with a new one.

Refer to “PAIR System Hose Routing Diagram

(Page 1B-4)”.

Emission Control Devices: 1B-7

PAIR Control Solenoid Valve

NOTE

PAIR control solenoid valve can be checked without removing it from the motorcycle.

Refer to “DTC “C49” (P1656): PAIR Control

Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction in Section

1A (Page 1A-108)”

1) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve. Refer to

“PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and

Installation (Page 1B-6)”.

2) Check that air flows through the air inlet port to the air outlet port. If air does not flow out, replace the

PAIR control solenoid valve with a new one.

I718H1120031-01

3) Reinstall the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

PAIR Reed Valve

NOTE

PAIR control solenoid valve can be checked without removing it from the motorcycle.

Refer to “DTC “C49” (P1656): PAIR Control

Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction in Section

1A (Page 1A-108)”.

1) Remove the PAIR reed valves. Refer to “PAIR Reed

Valve Removal and Installation (Page 1B-6)”.

2) Inspect the reed valves for the carbon deposit.

If the carbon deposit is found in the reed valve, replace the PAIR reed valve with a new one.

I718H1120033-01

3) Connect the 12 V battery to the PAIR control solenoid valve terminals and check the air flow. If air does not flow out, the solenoid valve is in normal condition.

12V

I718H1120034-01

I718H1120041-01

3) Reinstall the PAIR reed valve. Refer to “PAIR Reed

Valve Removal and Installation (Page 1B-6)”.

1B-8 Emission Control Devices:

4) Check the resistance between the terminals of the

PAIR control solenoid valve.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

4) Remove the PCV hose (1).

I718H1120036-01

1

I718H1120035-01

5) Reinstall the PAIR control solenoid valve. Refer to

“PAIR Control Solenoid Valve Removal and

Installation (Page 1B-6)”.

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose Inspection

B718H11206003

Inspect the PCV hose (1) for wear and damage.

If it is worn or damaged, replace the PCV hose with a new one.

Check that the PCV hose (1) is securely connected.

I718H1120037-01

5) Remove the crankcase breather (PCV) cover (2).

1

I718H1120022-01

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover /

Separator Removal and Installation

B718H11206009

Removal

1) Remove the throttle body. Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-

9)”.

2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

3) Remove the regulator/rectifier bracket bolts and move the regulator/rectifier assembly.

2

6) Remove the oil breather separator (3).

I718H1120011-02

3

I718H1120028-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply bond to the mating surface of the breather cover.

: Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1215 or equivalent)

NOTE

• Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

• Spread the sealant on surfaced thinly to form an even layer, and assembly the crankcases within a few minutes.

Emission Control Devices: 1B-9

• Fit the breather cover (1) and tighten the bolts.

• Connect the PCV hose (2) securely.

1

2

I718H1120014-02

Crankcase Breather (PCV) Cover Inspection

B718H11206010

Inspect the crankcase breather (PCV) cover in the following procedures.

1) Remove the crankcase breather cover. Refer to

“Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover /

Separator Removal and Installation (Page 1B-8)”.

2) Inspect the crankcase breather cover in the carbon deposit. If the carbon deposit is found in the crankcase breather cover, remove it.

I718H1120040-03

I718H1120015-02

3) Reinstall the crankcase breather cover. Refer to

“Crankcase Breather (PCV) Hose / Cover /

Separator Removal and Installation (Page 1B-8)”.

1B-10 Emission Control Devices:

Specifications

Service Data

FI sensors

Item

HO2 sensor resistance

HO2 sensor output voltage

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

Specification

Approx. 8

at 23

°

C (73 F

°

)

0.3 V and less at idle speed

0.6 V and more at 3 000 r/min

18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

B718H11207001

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

HO2 sensor

Fastening part

PAIR reed valve cover bolt

N

m

25

11

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.5

1.1

lb-ft

18.0

8.0

B718H11207002

Note

) (Page 1B-5)

) (Page 1B-6)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Sealant

Material

Thread lock cement

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or P/No.: 99000–31110 )

Note

(Page 1B-9) equivalent

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–32110 ) (Page 1B-6)

B718H11208001

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1B-8)

B718H11208002

Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-1

Engine

Engine Electrical Devices

Precautions

Precautions for Engine Electrical Device

B718H11300001

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00

(Page 00-2)”.

Component Location

Engine Electrical Components Location

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

B718H11303001

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Symptom Diagnosis

Refer to “Engine Symptom Diagnosis in Section 1A (Page 1A-7)”.

B718H11304001

Repair Instructions

ECM Removal and Installation

B718H11306023

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the battery (–) lead wire.

3) Remove the rubber band (1).

4) Disconnect the ECM couplers (2) and remove the

ECM (3).

CKP Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306004

Removal

1) Remove the generator cover. Refer to “Generator

Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-4)”.

2) Remove the CKP sensor (1) along with generator starter.

1

2

1

3

I718H1130020-01

Installation

Install the ECM in the reverse order of removal.

CKP Sensor Inspection

B718H11306003

Refer to “CKP Sensor Inspection in Section 1H

(Page 1H-7)”.

I718H1130012-01

Installation

Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section

1J (Page 1J-4)”.

IAP Sensor (No.1) Inspection

B718H11306005

Refer to “DTC “C13” (P0105-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.1)

Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-28)”.

1C-2 Engine Electrical Devices:

IAP Sensor (No.1) Removal and Installation

B718H11306035

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler (1) and vacuum hose (2).

3) Remove the IAP sensor (No.1) (3).

ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306011

Removal

1) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

2) Disconnect the coupler (1) and remove the ECT sensor (2).

!

CAUTION

Take special care when handling the ECT sensor. It may cause damage if it gets an excessive impact.

3

1

1

2

I718H1130013-01

Installation

Install the IAP sensor (No.1) in the reverse order of removal.

IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Inspection

B718H11306029

Refer to “DTC “C17” (P1750-H/L): IAP Sensor (No.2)

Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-52)”, “DTC

“C14” (P0120-H/L): TP Sensor Circuit Malfunction in

Section 1A (Page 1A-37)” and “DTC “C21” (P0110-H/L):

IAT Sensor Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-

60)”.

NOTE

IAP sensor (No.2)/TP sensor/IAT sensor are combined into one.

IAP / TP / IAT Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306006

Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly in

Section 1D (Page 1D-10)”.

!

CAUTION

• Never remove the IAP/TP/IAT sensor from the throttle body.

• The IAP/TP/IAT sensor, STVA and throttle body are available only as an assembly.

I718H1130015-01

Installation

Install the ECT sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Use the new gasket washer (1) to prevent engine coolant leakage.

Tightening torque

ECT sensor (a): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

1

2

(a)

I718H1130007-01

• Pour engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

ECT Sensor Inspection

B718H11306010

Refer to “DTC “C15” (P0115-H/L): ECT Sensor Circuit

Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-45)”.

Inspect the ECT sensor in the following procedures:

1) Remove the ECT sensor. Refer to “ECT Sensor

Removal and Installation (Page 1C-2)”.

2) Connect the ECT sensor (1) to a circuit tester and place it in the oil (2) contained in a pan, which is placed on a stove.

3) Heat the oil to raise its temperature slowly and read the column thermometer (3) and the ohmmeter.

If the ECT sensor ohmic valve does not change in the proportion indicated, replace it with a new one.

!

CAUTION

• Take special care when handling the ECT sensor. It may cause damage if it gets an excessive sharp impact.

• Do not contact the ECT sensor and the column thermometer with a pan.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Temperature sensor specification

Temperature

20

°

C (68

°

F)

50

°

C (122

°

F)

80

°

C (176

°

F)

110

°

C (230

°

F)

Standard resistance

Approx. 2.45 k

Approx. 0.811 k

Approx. 0.318 k

Approx. 0.142 k

Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-3

TO Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306019

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Move the battery case by removing the bolts and screws.

3) Disconnect the coupler (1) and remove the TO sensor (2).

1

2

I718H1130024-01

Installation

Install the TO sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following point:

• When installing the TO sensor, bring the “UPPER” letters and arrow mark “A” upward.

“A”

3

(A)

2

1

I718H1130014-01

4) Install the ECT sensor. Refer to “ECT Sensor

Removal and Installation (Page 1C-2)”.

I718H1130022-01

TO Sensor Inspection

B718H11306018

Refer to “DTC “C23” (P1651-H/L): TO Sensor Circuit

Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-67)”.

STP Sensor Inspection

B718H11306024

Refer to “DTC “C29” (P1654-H/L): Secondary Throttle

Position Sensor (STPS) Circuit Malfunction in Section

1A (Page 1A-77)”.

1C-4 Engine Electrical Devices:

STP Sensor Adjustment

B718H11306025

Adjust the STP sensor in the following procedures:

1) Remove the air cleaner cover and air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and

Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the STVA lead wire coupler (1).

6) Loosen the STP sensor mounting screw adjust the

STP sensor (2) until the output voltage comes within the specified value and tighten the STP sensor mounting screw.

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

Tightening torque

STP sensor mounting screw: 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgfm, 2.5 lb-ft)

2

1

3) Insert the needle pointed probes to the STP sensor coupler (between Y/W and B/Br wires).

4) Turn the ignition switch ON.

I718H1130002-01

5) Close the secondary throttle valve by finger and measure the STP sensor output voltage.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

STP sensor output voltage

ST valve is fully closed: Approx. 0.6 V ((+): Y/W –

(–): B/Br)

I718H1130003-01

7) Reinstall the removed parts.

STP Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306026

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Disconnect the coupler (1) and remove the STP sensor (2) with the special tool.

NOTE

Prior to disassembly, mark each sensor’s original position with a paint or scribe for accurate reinstallation.

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

I718H1130017-01

2

1

(A)

I718H1130004-01

(B)

I718H1130016-02

Installation

1) Remove the air cleaner cover and air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and

Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-6)”.

2) Close the secondary throttle valve by finger.

I718H1130017-01

3) With the STV fully closed, install the STP sensor (1) and tighten the STP sensor mounting screw to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring (2) with a new one.

NOTE

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the Oring.

• Align the secondary throttle shaft end “A” with the groove “B” of STP sensor.

• Apply grease to the secondary throttle shaft end “A” if necessary.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

Tightening torque

STP sensor mounting screw: 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgfm, 2.5 lb-ft)

“B”

“A”

Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-5

STV Actuator Inspection

B718H11306031

Refer to “DTC “C28” (P1655): Secondary Throttle Valve

Actuator (STVA) Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-

73)”.

STV Actuator Removal and Installation

B718H11306032

Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly in

Section 1D (Page 1D-10)”.

!

CAUTION

• Never remove the STVA from the throttle body.

• The STVA, IAP/TP/IAT sensor and throttle body are available only as an assembly.

ISC Valve Inspection

B718H11306027

Refer to “DTC “C40” (P0505 / P0506 / P0507): ISC Valve

Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-91)”.

ISC Valve Removal and Installation

B718H11306028

Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly in

Section 1D (Page 1D-10)”.

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to disconnect the ISC valve coupler at least 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF. If the ECM coupler or

ISC valve coupler is disconnected within 5 seconds after ignition switch is turned to

OFF, there is a possibility of an unusual valve position being written in ECM and causing an error of ISC valve operation.

NOTE

When the ISC valve is removed or replaced, the ISC valve or new one should be set to

Preset position. Refer to “ISC Valve Preset and Opening Initialization (Page 1C-6)”.

2

1

I718H1130009-01

4) Make sure the STP valve open or close smoothly.

5) Adjust the position of STP sensor. Refer to “STP

Sensor Adjustment (Page 1C-4)”.

6) Reinstall the removed parts.

1C-6 Engine Electrical Devices:

ISC Valve Preset and Opening Initialization

B718H11306036

When removing or replacing the ISC valve, set the ISC valve to the following procedures:

1) Turn the ignition switch ON.

2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

3) Click the “Active control”.

4) Click the “ISC learned value reset” (1).

NOTE

The leaned value of the ISC valve is set at

Preset position.

2

1

I718H1130018-01

5) Click the “Reset” button to clear the ISC leaned valve.

I718H1130019-01

6) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

NOTE

The ISC valve opening initialization is automatically started after the ignition switch is turned OFF position.

HO2 Sensor Inspection

B718H11306020

Refer to “DTC “C44” (P0130/P0135): HO2 Sensor

(HO2S) Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A (Page 1A-

102)”.

HO2 Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11306021

Refer to “Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Removal and

Installation in Section 1B (Page 1B-5)”.

GP Switch Inspection

B718H11306033

Refer to “Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts

Inspection in Section 1I (Page 1I-8)”.

GP Switch Removal and Installation

B718H11306034

Refer to “Gear Position (GP) Switch Removal and

Installation in Section 5B (Page 5B-12)”.

Yes No

I718H1130023-02

Engine Electrical Devices: 1C-7

Specifications

Service Data

FI Sensors

Item

CKP sensor resistance

CKP sensor peak voltage

IAP sensor input voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.1)

IAP sensor input voltage (No.2)

IAP sensor output voltage (No.2)

TP sensor input voltage

TP sensor output voltage

ECT sensor input voltage

ECT sensor output voltage

ECT sensor resistance

IAT sensor input voltage

IAT sensor output voltage

IAT sensor resistance

TO sensor resistance

TO sensor voltage

GP switch voltage

Injector voltage

Ignition coil primary peak voltage

STP sensor input voltage

STP sensor output voltage

STV actuator resistance

ISC valve resistance

HO2 sensor resistance

HO2 sensor output voltage

PAIR control solenoid valve resistance

EVAP purge control valve

Closed

Opened

Normal

Leaning

Closed

Opened

Specification

90 – 150

2.0 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.7 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

2.0 – 3.0 V at idle speed

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 1.1 V

Approx. 4.3 V

4.5 – 5.5 V

0.15 – 4.85 V

Approx. 2.45 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 2.4 V at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 2.56 k

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

16.5 – 22.3 k

0.4 – 1.4 V

3.7 – 4.4 V

0.6 V and more

Battery voltage

80 V and more

4.5 – 5.5 V

Approx. 0.6 V

Approx. 4.5 V

Approx. 7.0

Approx. 20

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Approx. 8

at 23

°

C (73

°

F)

0.3 V and less at idle speed

0.6 V and more at 3 000 r/min

18 – 22

at 20 – 30

°

C (68 – 86

°

F)

Approx. 32

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

B718H11307001

Note

When cranking

When leaning 65

°

From 1st to Top

When cranking

1C-8 Engine Electrical Devices:

Tightening Torque Specifications

ECT sensor

Fastening part

STP sensor mounting screw

N

m

18

3.5

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.8

lb-ft

13.0

0.35 2.5

B718H11307002

Note

) (Page 1C-2)

) (Page 1C-4) /

) (Page 1C-5)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1C-5) equivalent

B718H11308001

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1C-3) / ) (Page 1C-

4)

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

) (Page 1C-4)

B718H11308002

09930–11950

Torx wrench

) (Page 1C-4) / ) (Page 1C-

4) / ) (Page 1C-5)

Engine

Engine Mechanical

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Camshaft and Sprocket Assembly Diagram

Engine Mechanical: 1D-1

B718H11402001

I718H1140393-01

1D-2 Engine Mechanical:

Throttle Cable Routing Diagram

B718H11402002

“A”

2

1

1

3

4

2

“ a ”

“ a ”

1. Wiring harness

2. Cable guide (GSF1250S/SA only)

3. Throttle cable No.1

4. Throttle cable No.2

5. Handlebar switch lead wire (L)

6. Handlebar switch lead wire (R)

3

5

6

7

4

I718H1140308-03

7. Ignition switch lead wire

“a”: 0 mm (0 in)

“A”: Don’t contact the tip of cable guide with the upper bracket.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-3

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Mechanical Symptom Diagnosis

B718H11404002

Refer to “Engine Symptom Diagnosis in Section 1A

(Page 1A-7)”.

6) Keep the throttle grip in the fully-opened position.

Compression Pressure Check

B718H11404001

The compression pressure reading of a cylinder is a good indicator of its internal condition.

The decision to overhaul the cylinder is often based on the results of a compression test. Periodic maintenance records kept at your dealership should include compression readings for each maintenance service.

NOTE

• Before checking the engine for compression pressure, make sure that the cylinder head nuts are tightened to the specified torque values and the valves are properly adjusted.

• Make sure that the battery is in fullycharged condition.

1) Warm up the engine.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the frame head covers, left and right.

(GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

4) Remove all the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

5) Install the compression gauge and adaptor in the spark plug hole. Make sure that the connection is tight.

Special tool

(A): 09915–64512 (Compression gauge)

(B): 09915–63311 (Compression gauge attachment)

(A)

I718H1140381-01

7) Press the starter button and crank the engine for a few seconds. Record the maximum gauge reading as the cylinder compression.

8) Repeat this procedure with the other cylinders.

Compression pressure specification

Standard

1 300 – 1 700 kPa

(13 – 17 kgf/cm 2 ,

185 – 242 psi)

Limit

1 000 kPa

(10 kgf/cm psi)

2 , 142

Difference

200 kPa

(2 kgf/cm psi)

2 , 28

Low compression pressure can indicate any of the following conditions:

• Excessively worn cylinder walls

• Worn piston or piston rings

• Piston rings stuck in grooves

• Poor valve seating

• Ruptured or otherwise defective cylinder head gasket

Overhaul the engine in the following cases:

• Compression pressure in one of the cylinders is 1

000 kPa (10 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi) and less.

• The difference in compression pressure between any two cylinders is 200 kPa (2 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi) and more.

• All compression pressure readings are below 1

300 kPa (13 kgf/cm 2 , 185 psi) even when they measure 1 000 kPa (10 kgf/cm 2 more.

, 142 psi) and

9) After checking the compression pressure, reinstall the removed parts.

(B)

I718H1140380-01

1D-4 Engine Mechanical:

Repair Instructions

Engine Components Removable with the Engine in Place

B718H11406001

Engine components which can be removed while the engine is installed on the frame are as follows. For the installing and removing procedures, refer to respective paragraphs describing each component.

Center of Engine

Item

Air cleaner element

Exhaust pipes/Muffler

Oil filter

Oil cooler

Oil pan

Throttle body

Cam chain tension adjuster

Cylinder head cover

Camshafts

Cylinder head

Cylinder

Pistons

Starter motor

Crank balancer

Removal

Refer to “Air Cleaner

Element Removal and

Installation (Page 1D-6)”.

Refer to “Exhaust Pipe /

Muffler Removal and

Installation in Section 1K

(Page 1K-3)”.

Refer to “Engine Oil and

Filter Replacement in

Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

Refer to “Oil Cooler Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-7)”.

Refer to “Oil Pan / Oil

Strainer / Oil Pressure

Regulator Removal and

Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-4)”.

Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation

(Page 1D-9)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Starter Motor

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-4)”.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-53)”.

Inspection

Refer to “Air Cleaner

Element Inspection and

Cleaning in Section 0B

(Page 0B-3)”.

Installation

Refer to “Air Cleaner

Element Removal and

Installation (Page 1D-6)”.

Refer to “Exhaust System

Inspection in Section 1K

(Page 1K-6)”.

Refer to “Throttle Body

Inspection and Cleaning

(Page 1D-15)”.

Refer to “Cam Chain Tension

Adjuster Inspection

(Page 1D-39)”.

Refer to “Exhaust Pipe /

Muffler Removal and

Installation in Section 1K

(Page 1K-3)”.

Refer to “Engine Oil and

Filter Replacement in

Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

Refer to “Oil Cooler Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-7)”.

Refer to “Oil Pan / Oil

Strainer / Oil Pressure

Regulator Removal and

Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-4)”.

Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation

(Page 1D-9)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Camshaft

Inspection (Page 1D-36)”.

Refer to “Cylinder Head

Related Parts Inspection

(Page 1D-44)”.

Refer to “Cylinder Inspection

(Page 1D-50)”.

Refer to “Piston and Piston

Ring Inspection (Page 1D-

52)”.

Refer to “Starter Motor

Inspection in Section 1I

(Page 1I-6)”.

Refer to “Crank Balancer

Inspection (Page 1D-73)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Refer to “Starter Motor

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-4)”.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side

Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

Engine Right Side

Item

Clutch cover

Clutch plates

Clutch sleeve hub

Primary driven gear

Oil pump drive gear

Oil pump

Oil pressure switch

Gearshift shaft

Engine Left Side

Item

Generator

Engine sprocket

Driven chain

Gear position switch

Starter idle gear

Starter clutch

CKP sensor

Water pump

Engine Mechanical: 1D-5

Removal

Refer to “Clutch Removal in

Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

Inspection

Refer to “Clutch Removal in

Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

Refer to “Clutch Parts

Inspection in Section 5C

(Page 5C-18)”.

Refer to “Clutch Removal in

Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

Refer to “Clutch Removal in

Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

Refer to “Clutch Parts

Inspection in Section 5C

(Page 5C-18)”.

Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-11)”.

Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-11)”.

Refer to “Oil Pressure Switch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1E (Page 1E-7)”.

Refer to “Gearshift Shaft /

Gearshift Cam Plate

Removal and Installation in

Section 5B (Page 5B-15)”.

Refer to “Oil Pump

Inspection in Section 1E

(Page 1E-13)”.

Refer to “Oil Pressure

Indicator Inspection in

Section 9C (Page 9C-9)”.

Refer to “Gearshift Linkage

Inspection in Section 5B

(Page 5B-18)”.

Installation

Refer to “Clutch Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

Refer to “Clutch Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

Refer to “Clutch Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

Refer to “Clutch Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-11)”.

Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation in Section 1E

(Page 1E-11)”.

Refer to “Oil Pressure Switch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1E (Page 1E-7)”.

Refer to “Gearshift Shaft /

Gearshift Cam Plate

Removal and Installation in

Section 5B (Page 5B-15)”.

Removal

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Refer to “Engine Sprocket

Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

Refer to “Drive Chain

Replacement in Section 3A

(Page 3A-7)”.

Refer to “Gear Position (GP)

Switch Removal and

Installation in Section 5B

(Page 5B-12)”.

Refer to “Starter Clutch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

Refer to “Starter Clutch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Refer to “Water Pump

Removal and Installation in

Section 1F (Page 1F-13)”.

Inspection

Refer to “Generator

Inspection in Section 1J

(Page 1J-3)”.

Refer to “Drive Chain

Related Parts Inspection in

Section 3A (Page 3A-5)”.

Refer to “Drive Chain

Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”.

Refer to “Gear Position (GP)

Switch Inspection in Section

5B (Page 5B-12)”.

Refer to “Starter Clutch

Inspection in Section 1I

(Page 1I-12)”.

Refer to “CKP Sensor

Inspection in Section 1H

(Page 1H-7)”.

Refer to “Water Pump

Related Parts Inspection in

Section 1F (Page 1F-17)”.

Installation

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Refer to “Engine Sprocket

Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

Refer to “Drive Chain

Replacement in Section 3A

(Page 3A-7)”.

Refer to “Gear Position (GP)

Switch Removal and

Installation in Section 5B

(Page 5B-12)”.

Refer to “Starter Clutch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

Refer to “Starter Clutch

Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Refer to “Water Pump

Removal and Installation in

Section 1F (Page 1F-13)”.

1D-6 Engine Mechanical:

Air Cleaner Element Removal and Installation

B718H11406034

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the air cleaner cover screws.

3) Remove the air cleaner cover (1).

3) Release the drain hose from the clamp (1).

1

1

4) Remove the air cleaner element (2).

I718H1140310-04

I718H1140312-01

4) Disconnect the breather hose (2) and remove the air cleaner box (3).

3

2

I718H1140311-01

Installation

Installation in the reverse order of removal.

Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11406035

Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning in

Section 0B (Page 0B-3)”.

Air Cleaner Box Removal and Installation

B718H11406036

Removal

1) Remove the throttle body. Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation (Page 1D-9)”.

2) Remove the air cleaner cover and air cleaner element. Refer to “Air Cleaner Element Removal and

Installation (Page 1D-6)”.

2

I718H1140313-01

Installation

Install the air cleaner box in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• Route the hoses properly. Refer to “Throttle Body

Construction (Page 1D-8)”.

Throttle Cable Removal and Installation

B718H11406037

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the right handlebar switch box. Refer to

“Handlebar Removal and Installation in Section 6B

(Page 6B-3)”.

3) Remove the throttle cables as shown in the cable routing diagram. Refer to “Throttle Cable Routing

Diagram (Page 1D-2)”.

Installation

Install the throttle cables in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the throttle cables as shown in the cable routing diagram. Refer to “Throttle Cable Routing Diagram

(Page 1D-2)”.

• Check the throttle cable play and proper operation.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-7

Throttle Cable Inspection

B718H11406038

Check that the throttle grip moves smoothly from full open to full close. If it does not move smoothly, lubricate the throttle cables.

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment

B718H11406039

Refer to “Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

Throttle Body Components

B718H11406040

1

(b)

(a)

2

6

9

9

3

9

3

(a)

8

9

4

5

9

7

9

FW

D

FWD

1. Fuel injector cover

2. STP sensor

3. Fuel delivery pipe

4. Fuel injector

5. Cushion seal

6. Air screw

7. ISC valve

8. Vacuum hose

9. O-ring

: Apply engine oil

(a)

9

: 3.5 N

⋅ m (0.35 kgf-m, 2.5 Ib-ft)

: 5 N

⋅ m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.5 Ib-ft)

: Do not reuse.

I718H1140309-01

1D-8 Engine Mechanical:

Throttle Body Construction

1

Upper

LH

Air cleaner side

(a)

RH LH

(a)

Upper

Engine side

RH

B718H11406041

2

“A”

“B”

1. Clamp (Air cleaner side)

: After tighten the clamp band #2, 3 and tighten the clamp band #1, 4.

2. EVAP purge control valve (E-33 only)

“A”: White mark downward.

“B”: Clamp the drain hose at mark position.

: 1.5 N

⋅ m (0.15 kgf-m, 1.0 Ib-ft)

I718H1140314-01

Throttle Body Removal and Installation

B718H11406042

Removal

1) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to

“Battery Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-12)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the air cleaner box mounting bolts.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-9

7) Loosen the throttle body clamp screws and disconnect the ISC valve hose (6).

8) Move the air cleaner box backward.

6

I718H1140318-01

I718H1140315-01

4) Disconnect the STP sensor coupler (1) and IAP/TP/

IAT sensor coupler (2).

2

1

5) Disconnect the vacuum hose (3) and fuel injector coupler (4).

6) Remove the fuel feed hose (5).

I718H1140316-01

I718H1140319-01

9) Move the throttle body right side.

10) Disconnect the throttle cables and remove the throttle body.

!

CAUTION

After disconnecting the throttle cables, do not snap the throttle valve from the open to full close. It may cause damage to the throttle valve and throttle body.

4

3

5

I718H1140320-01

I718H1140317-01

1D-10 Engine Mechanical:

Installation

Install the throttle body in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Connect the throttle pulling cable (1) and throttle returning cable (2) to the throttle cable drum.

1

2

Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11406043

Refer to “Throttle Body Removal and Installation

(Page 1D-9)”.

Disassembly

!

CAUTION

Identify the position of each removed part.

Organize the parts in their respective groups so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.

1) Remove the injector covers (1) and disconnect the respective vacuum hoses (2) from each throttle body.

I718H1140321-01

• Tighten the throttle body clamp screws. Refer to

“Throttle Body Construction (Page 1D-8)”.

• Loosen each throttle cable lock-nut.

• Turn in each throttle cable adjuster fully and locate each outer cable so that the clearance “a” is 0 mm (0 in).

2

1

“ a ”

“ a ”

1

2

I718H1140324-01

2) Remove the clamps and disconnect the fuel injector couplers (3), STVA coupler (4) and ISC valve coupler (5).

5

4

I718H1140322-01

“a”: 0 mm (0 in)

• Tighten each lock-nut.

• Adjust the throttle cable play. Refer to “Throttle Cable

Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B

(Page 0B-12)”.

3

3

I718H1140325-01

3) Remove the fuel delivery pipe assembly (6).

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to twist the fuel delivery pipe’s

T-joint (7), when disconnecting the fuel feed hose or removing the fuel delivery pipes, or joint part “A” of the fuel delivery pipe get damage.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-11

6) Remove the plates and joint pipes (10).

10

10

“A”

7) Remove the ISC valve assembly (11).

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

I718H1140329-01

6

7

I718H1140326-01

4) Remove the fuel injectors (8) and fuel delivery pipes

(9) from the T-joint (7).

9

11

I718H1140330-02

8) Remove the joint pipes (12) from the ISC valve assembly (11).

7

8

5) Disconnect the ISC valve hoses (9).

8

I718H1140323-02

11

9

12

I718H1140031-01

9

I718H1140328-01

1D-12 Engine Mechanical:

9) Remove the STP sensor (13).

NOTE

Prior to disassembly, mark sensor’s original position with a paint or scribe for accurate reinstallation.

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

!

CAUTION

Never remove the throttle valve (15) and secondary throttle valve (16).

15

16

13

I718H1140327-02

!

CAUTION

Never remove the IAP/TP/IAT sensor (14) from the throttle body.

I718H1140333-03

!

CAUTION

These adjusting screws (17), (18) are factoryadjusted at the time of delivery and therefore avoid removing or turning them unless necessary.

17

18

14

I718H1140331-02

!

CAUTION

Never separate the throttle bodies, left and right.

I718H1140334-02

I718H1140332-01

Assembly

Assemble the throttle body in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-ring.

• With the STV fully closed, install the STP sensor (1) and tighten the STP sensor mounting screw to the specified torque.

NOTE

• Align the secondary throttle shaft end “A” with the groove “B” of STP sensor.

• Apply grease to the secondary throttle shaft end “A” if necessary.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

Tightening torque

STP sensor mounting screw: 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgfm, 2.5 lb-ft)

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-rings and install the ISC valve assembly.

!

CAUTION

Engine Mechanical: 1D-13

Replace the O-rings with new ones.

Special tool

: 09930–11950 (Torx wrench)

Tightening torque

ISC valve mounting screw (a): 3.5 N·m (0.35 kgfm, 2.5 lb-ft)

(a)

1

“B”

“A”

I718H1140335-01

NOTE

Make sure the STP valve open or close smoothly. If the STP sensor adjustment is necessary, refer to “STP Sensor Adjustment in Section 1C (Page 1C-4)”.

I718H1140337-02

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the O-rings and install the plate.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with new ones.

NOTE

The boss “C” of the outside.

“C”

• Connect the ISC valve hoses securely.

I718H1140338-01

I718H1140336-01

I718H1140339-02

1D-14 Engine Mechanical:

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the new cushion seal

(2) and the O-ring (3).

!

CAUTION

Replace the cushion seal and O-ring with the new ones.

• Install the fuel injector (5) by pushing it straight to the delivery pipe (6).

!

CAUTION

Never turn the injector while pushing it.

NOTE

Align the coupler “D” of injector with boss

“E” of the delivery pipe.

3

“D”

2

I718H1140340-02

• Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the new O-rings (4).

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with the new ones.

“E”

5

6

I718H1140404-01

• Connect the fuel injector couplers to the fuel injectors.

NOTE

Make sure that each coupler is installed in the correct position.

4

• Assemble the fuel delivery pipes as shown.

I718H1140341-02

I718H1140342-01

#4

#3

#2

#1

Coupler

#1

#2

#3

#4

I718H1140344-01

Wire color

Y/R and Gr/W

Y/R and Gr/B

Y/R and Gr/Y

Y/R and Gr/R

• Install the fuel delivery pipe assembly (7) to the throttle body assembly.

!

CAUTION

Never turn the fuel injectors while installing them.

• Tighten the fuel delivery pipe mounting screws to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Fuel delivery pipe mounting screw (a): 3.5 N·m (

0.35 kgf-m, 2.45 lb-ft)

(a)

(a)

7

I718H1140345-02

Throttle Body Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11406044

Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 1D-10)”.

Cleaning

!

WARNING

Some carburetor cleaning chemicals, especially dip-type soaking solutions, are very corrosive and must be handled carefully.

Always follow the chemical manufacturer’s instructions on proper use, handling and storage.

• Clean passageways with a spray-type carburetor cleaner and blow dry with compressed air.

!

CAUTION

• Never clean the main bore of throttle body to prevent come off molybdenum from the throttle valve.

• Do not use wire to clean passageways.

Wire can damage passageways. If the components cannot be cleaned with a spray cleaner it may be necessary to use a dip-type cleaning solution and allow them to soak. Always follow the chemical manufacturer’s instructions for proper use and cleaning of the throttle body components. Do not apply carburetor cleaning chemicals to the rubber and plastic materials.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-15

Inspection

Check following items for any defects or clogging.

Replace the throttle body if necessary.

• O-ring

• Throttle valve

• Secondary throttle valve

• Vacuum hose

ISC Valve Visual Inspection

Visually inspect the ISC valve if necessary.

1) Remove the screws.

2) Inspect the ISC valve for any carbon deposition defects. Clean or replace the ISC valve if necessary.

!

CAUTION

Normally, the removed O-ring must be replaced with a new one. However, this Oring is not available for the spare parts. If it is found to be damaged, replace the ISC valve assembly with new one.

I718H1140346-02

Throttle Valve Synchronization

B718H11406045

Use of SDS Tool

Check and adjust the throttle valve synchronization among four cylinders.

1) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-

9)”.

2) Disconnect the IAP sensor (No.1) coupler and vacuum hoses (1) from the throttle body.

1

1

1

I718H1140347-02

1D-16 Engine Mechanical:

3) Connect the respective vacuum tester hoses to each vacuum nipple on the throttle body.

8) Click “Active control”.

9) Click “ISC air volume control” (2).

I718H1140382-01

I718H1140389-01

4) Start the engine.

5) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

6) Click “Data monitor”.

7) Warm up the engine (Water temp. more than 80

°

(176

°

F)).

2

I718H1140384-01

10) Click “ON” button (3) to fix the ISC air volume of four cylinders.

NOTE

When making this synchronization, be sure that the water temperature is within 80 – 100

°

C (176 – 212

°

F).

“A”

“B”

3

I718H1140385-01

“A”: Engine speed: Approx. 1 200 rpm “B”: ISC valve position: Approx. 77 step

11) Check for the synchronization of vacuum from #1 to

#4 cylinders.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-17

Use of Mode Select Switch

The following procedure describes only difference between use of SDS tool and use of mode select switch.

1) 1), 2) and 3) are the same as the using SDS tool.

2) Connect the special tool (Mode select switch) and turn ON.

I718H1140390-01

12) Equalize the vacuum of the cylinders by turning each air screw and keep it running at idling speed.

NOTE

Always set the engine rpm at idle rpm.

I718H1140354-01

13) If the adjustment is not yet correct, remove each air screw and clean them with a spray-type carburetor cleaner and blow dry with a compressed air. Also, clean the air screw passageways.

NOTE

• Slowly turn the air screw in clockwise and count the number of turns until the screw is lightly seated.

• Make a note of how many turns were made in order that the screw can be reset correctly after cleaning.

14) Repeat the procedures from 4) to 12).

15) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

16) Disconnect the vacuum tester and reinstall the removed parts.

17) After compleating the throttle valve synchronization, clear the DTC and reset the ISC learned valve using

SDS tool. Refer to “ISC Valve Preset and Opening

Initialization in Section 1C (Page 1C-6)”.

I718H1140391-01

3) Start the engine and warm up it.

* Summer: Approx. 5 min. at idle speed

* Winter: Approx. 8 min. at idle speed

NOTE

• The ISC valve automatically is set at synchronization mode.

• Water temperature should be more than 80

°

C (176

°

F) and then wait 30 seconds.

4) This step is the same as the step 11) of the use of

SDS.

5) This step is the same as the step 12) of the use of

SDS.

6) This step is the same as the step 13) of the use of

SDS.

7) Repeat the procedures of 3).

8) Turn OFF the mode select switch.

9) Disconnect the vacuum tester and reinstall the removed parts.

Engine Assembly Removal

B718H11406002

Before taking the engine out of the frame, wash the engine using a steam cleaner. Engine removal is sequentially explained in the following steps:

1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

2) Remove the seat and frame covers. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the frame head covers (GSF1250/A) or cowling (GSF1250S/SA). Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

1D-18 Engine Mechanical:

4) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

5) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

6) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire.

11) Remove the throttle body assembly (5). Refer to

“Throttle Body Removal and Installation (Page 1D-

9)”.

5

I718H1140388-01

7) Disconnect the fuel feed hose (1).

8) Remove the thermostat connector (2) and its bracket. Refer to “Thermostat Connector /

Thermostat Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-9)”.

I718H1140358-01

12) Remove the radiator (6). Refer to “Radiator / Cooling

Fan Motor Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-5)”.

13) Remove the muffler and exhaust pipes (7) along with the HO2 sensor. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler

Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page 1K-3)”.

2

6

1

I718H1140356-01

9) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve (3) and hoses.

10) Disconnect all ignition coil/plug cap couplers and then remove the ignition coil/plug caps (4).

7

I718H1140359-01

14) Remove the air cleaner box (8). Refer to “Air Cleaner

Box Removal and Installation (Page 1D-6)”.

8

3

4

I718H1140360-01

4

I718H1140357-01

15) Disengage the gearshift link arm by removing the bolt.

NOTE

Mark the gearshift shaft head at which the gearshift link arm slit is set for correct reinstallation.

16) Remove the engine sprocket inner cover by removing the bolts.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-19

20) Loosen the rear axle nut (12) and chain adjusters

(13) to provide additional chain slack.

13

12

I718H1140363-01

21) Remove the engine sprocket (14).

I718H1140361-01

17) Remove the speed sensor rotor (9) while depressing the rear brake pedal.

18) Remove the engine sprocket nut (10) while depressing the rear brake pedal.

19) Remove the washer (11).

14

I718H1140364-01

22) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler (15), CKP sensor coupler (16) and generator coupler (17).

9

11

10

15

16

I718H1140362-01

17

I718H1140365-01

1D-20 Engine Mechanical:

23) Disconnect the engine ground wire coupler (18) and oil pressure switch coupler (19).

27) Remove the frame down tube (23) by removing their bolts and nuts.

18

19

I718H1140366-01

24) Disconnect the GP switch coupler (20) and starter motor lead wire (21).

22

23

I718H1140369-01

28) Remove the engine mounting brackets, No.1 (24) and No.2 (L) (25).

21

20

24

25

25) Support the engine with a proper jack.

I718H1140367-01 I718H1140370-01

29) Remove the engine mounting bolts and nuts.

I718H1140368-01

26) Remove the right engine mounting No.2 bracket

(22).

I718H1140371-01

30) Gradually lower the front side of the engine and remove the engine.

!

WARNING

Care should be taken not to drop the engine accidentally when the engine mounting bolts and nuts are removed.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-21

Engine Assembly Installation

Reinstall the engine in the reverse order of engine removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Insert the two mounting bolts from left side, and tighten their nuts.

B718H11406003

NOTE

The engine mounting nuts are self-locking. Once the nuts have been removed, they are no longer of any use.

I718H1140371-01

• Install the frame down tube and engine mounting brackets.

• Tighten the bolts and nuts to the specified torque.

NOTE

The frame down tube nuts are self-locking. Once the nuts have been removed, they are no longer of any use.

Tightening torque

Frame down tube bolt (a): 50 N·m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

Engine mounting No.1 bracket bolts (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Engine mounting No.2 bracket bolts (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

(a)

(a)

(a)

(c)

I718H1140373-01

(b)

(c)

I718H1140374-01

1D-22 Engine Mechanical:

• Tighten all engine mounting bolts and nuts to the specified torque, as shown in the following illustration.

Left Right

Left Right

1 “ a ”

(d)

4

“ c ”

(f)

2 “ b ”

(e)

1. Engine mounting bolt (Front upper)

2. Engine mounting bolt (Center lower)

3. Engine mounting bolt (Rear lower)

4. Engine mounting bolt (Rear upper)

2 “ b ”

(e)

“a”: 215 mm (8.5 in)

“b”: 50 mm (2.0 in)

“c”: 155 mm (6.1 in)

: 55 N

⋅ m (5.5 kgf-m, 40.0 lb-ft)

3

“ c ”

: 47 N

⋅ m (4.7 kgf-m, 34.0 lb-ft)

: 88 N

⋅ m (8.8 kgf-m, 63.5 lb-ft)

(f)

I718H1140375-02

• Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER to the driveshaft.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030 (THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1303 or equivalent)

• Tighten the engine sprocket nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Engine sprocket nut (g): 115 N·m (11.5 kgf-m, 83.0 lb-ft)

(g)

I718H1140376-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-23

• Tighten the speed sensor rotor bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Speed sensor rotor bolt (h): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft)

• Before installing the engine sprocket inner cover, apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the clutch push rod.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent)

(h)

• Install the engine sprocket inner cover. Refer to “Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in Section 3A (Page 3A-

2)”.

• Install the gearshift link arm to the gearshift shaft in the correct position.

I718H1140377-01

Gearshift lever height “d”

Standard: 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in)

“ a ”

I718H1140378-01

• Install the exhaust pipe assembly and muffler. Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation in Section

1K (Page 1K-3)”.

• Install the radiator. Refer to “Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor Removal and Installation in Section 1F (Page 1F-5)”.

• Install the throttle body. Refer to “Throttle Body Removal and Installation (Page 1D-9)”.

• After remounting the engine, route the wiring harness, cable and hoses properly. Refer to “Wiring Harness Routing

Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”, “Throttle Cable Routing Diagram (Page 1D-2)” and “Water Hose Routing

Diagram in Section 1F (Page 1F-3)”.

• Pour engine coolant and engine oil. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)” and “Engine

Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

• After finishing the engine installation, check the following items.

– Throttle cable play

Refer to “Throttle Cable Play Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

– Throttle valve synchronization

Refer to “Throttle Valve Synchronization (Page 1D-15)”.

– Drive chain slack

Refer to “Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”.

– Engine oil and coolant leakage

Refer to “Cooling Circuit Inspection in Section 1F (Page 1F-4)”.

1D-24 Engine Mechanical:

Engine Top Side Disassembly

B718H11406006

!

CAUTION

Identify the position of each removed part.

Organize the parts in their respective groups

(e.g., intake, exhaust) so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.

1) Remove the seat (1) and disconnect the battery (–) lead wire.

2) Remove the fuel tank (2). Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-

9)”.

3) Remove the frame head covers (3) (GSF1250/A) or cowling (GSF1250S/SA).

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

I718H1140007-01

PAIR System

1) Disconnect the PAIR hoses and lead wire coupler.

2) Remove the PAIR control solenoid valve (1).

2

1

1

3

I718H1140001-02

4) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

5) Disconnect the water hoses and remove the thermostat connector (4) along with bracket.

I718H1140008-01

3) Remove the PAIR reed valve covers (2) and reed valves.

2 2

4

I718H1140002-01

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap

1) Disconnect all lead wire couplers from ignition coil/ plug caps.

2) Remove the ignition coil caps. Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

I718H1140009-01

Cylinder Head Cover

Remove the cylinder head cover (1) and its gasket.

1

I718H1140010-01

Camshaft

1) Remove the right crankshaft cover (1).

1

Engine Mechanical: 1D-25

4) Remove the throttle body (2). Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation (Page 1D-9)”.

2

I718H1140011-01

2) Remove all of the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil

/ Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

Special tool

: 09930–10121 (Spark plug wrench set)

3) Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the match mark “A” on the crankshaft with the mating surfaces

“B” of the crankcases. Also position each of the camshaft as shown.

I718H1140022-01

5) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt (3) and spring.

6) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster (4).

3

4

“A” “B”

I718H1140012-02

I718H1140033-01

7) Remove the oil pipe (5) and camshaft journal holders

(6).

!

CAUTION

Be sure to loosen the camshaft journal holder bolts evenly by shifting the wrench in the descending order of numbers.

6

5

6

I718H1140394-01 I718H1140034-01

1D-26 Engine Mechanical:

6

FWD

3) Remove the water hoses (3).

6 6 5

I718H1140035-01

8) Remove the intake (7) and exhaust camshafts (8).

9) Remove the dowel pins.

8

7

3

I718H1140037-01

4) Remove the cylinder head bolts (L65) (4).

5) Remove the cylinder head bolts (L175) and washers.

NOTE

When loosening the cylinder head bolts, loosen each bolt little by little diagonally.

4

FWD

I718H1140036-01

Cylinder Head

1) Remove the radiator (1). Refer to “Radiator / Cooling

Fan Motor Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-5)”.

2) Remove the exhaust pipe assembly (2) and muffler.

Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and

Installation in Section 1K (Page 1K-3)”.

6) Remove the cylinder head (5).

I718H1140038-03

1

5

2

I718H1140032-01

I718H1140039-01

7) Remove the cylinder head gasket (6), O-ring (7) and dowel pins.

7

6

I718H1140040-01

Cam Chain No.1 Guide

Remove the cam chain No.1 guide (1).

Engine Mechanical: 1D-27

3) Remove the cylinder (3).

NOTE

If the cylinder does not come off easily, lightly tap it using a plastic hammer.

3

1

Cylinder

1) Disconnect the water hoses (1).

I718H1140041-01

I718H1140044-02

4) Remove the cylinder gasket (4) and dowel pins.

1

2) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler (2).

I718H1140042-01

2

4

I718H1140045-02

Piston

1) Place a clean rag over the cylinder base so as not to drop the piston pin circlips into the crankcase.

2) Remove each piston pin circlip (1).

I718H1140043-02

1

I718H1140046-02

1D-28 Engine Mechanical:

3) Draw out each piston pin (2) and remove the pistons

(3).

NOTE

Scribe the cylinder number on the piston head.

2

3

• Place a clean rag over the cylinder base so as not to drop the piston pin circlips (1) into the crankcase.

• Install the piston pin circlips (1).

!

CAUTION

Use new piston pin circlips (1) to prevent circlip failure which will occur when it is bent.

NOTE

End gap of the circlip (1) should not be aligned with the cutaway in the piston pin bore.

I718H1140047-02

Engine Top Side Assembly

B718H11406007

Assemble the engine top side in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

Piston

• When installing the piston pins, apply molybdenum oil solution onto each piston pin.

M/O: Molybdenum oil (MOLYBDENUM OIL

SOLUTION)

• Install the pistons and piston pins.

NOTE

• Be sure to install the pistons in the cylinders from which they were removed in disassembly, refer to the cylinder numbers, #1 through #4, scribed on the piston.

• When installing the pistons, the indent “A” on the piston head must be faced to each exhaust side.

1

I718H1140049-02

!

CAUTION

When turning the crankshaft, pull the cam chain upward, or the chain will be caught between the crankcase and the cam drive sprocket.

I718H1140050-01

“A”

I718H1140048-01

• Position the piston ring gaps as shown. Before inserting each piston into its cylinder, check that the gaps are properly positioned.

“B”

EX

“C”

Engine Mechanical: 1D-29

• Install each special tool to the #2 and #3 pistons.

NOTE

Do not overtighten the bands, or piston installation into the cylinders will be difficult.

Special tool

(A): 09916–74521 (Holder body)

(B): 09916–74550 (Band (Piston diam.: 73 –

85 mm))

IN

“D”

I718H1140051-01

“B”: 2nd ring and lower side rail

“C”: Upper side rail

“D”: 1st ring and spacer

Cylinder

• Install the dowel pins and cylinder gasket (1).

!

CAUTION

Replace the cylinder gasket (1) with a new one.

1

I718H1140052-03

• Apply molybdenum oil solution to the sliding surface of the pistons.

M/O: Molybdenum oil (MOLYBDENUM OIL

SOLUTION)

(A)

(B)

I718H1140054-02

• Apply engine oil to the sliding surface of the cylinder.

• Insert the #2 and #3 pistons into the cylinder.

NOTE

Some light resistance must be overcome to lower the cylinder.

• After inserting the #2 and #3 pistons in place, insert the #1 and #4 pistons in the same manner of the #2 and #3 pistons.

NOTE

When installing the cylinder, keep the cam chain taut. The cam chain must not be caught between cam drive sprocket and crankcase when turning the crankshaft.

I718H1140055-03

I718H1140053-02

1D-30 Engine Mechanical:

Cam Chain No.1 Guide

• Pull the cam chain out of the cylinder and install the cam chain guide (1).

!

CAUTION

Be sure that the cam chain guide (1) is installed properly.

• Place the cylinder head (3) on the cylinder.

NOTE

When installing the cylinder head (3), keep the cam chain taut.

3

1

I718H1140041-01

Cylinder Head

• Install the dowel pins, O-ring (1) and cylinder head gasket (2).

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring (1) and cylinder head gasket (2) with new ones.

1

2

I718H1140057-01

I718H1140058-01

• Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and both sides of washers.

• Tighten the cylinder head bolts (L175) to the specified two-step torque with a torque wrench sequentially and diagonally.

Tightening torque

Cylinder head bolt (L175) (initial): 25 N·m (2.5 kgfm, 18.0 lb-ft)

Cylinder head bolt (L175) (Final): 42 N·m (4.2 kgfm, 30.5 lb-ft)

• After firmly tightening the cylinder head bolts (L175), install the cylinder head bolts (L65) (4).

• Tighten the cylinder head bolts (4) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Cylinder head bolt (L65) (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

4

(a)

FWD

I718H1140392-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-31

Water Hose

• Install the water hoses (1). Refer to “Water Hose

Routing Diagram in Section 1F (Page 1F-3)”.

“A”

“B”

1

I718H1140060-01

Exhaust Pipe / Muffler

• Install the exhaust pipe assembly (1), muffler and radiator (2). Refer to “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page 1K-3)” and

“Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor Removal and

Installation in Section 1F (Page 1F-5)”.

I718H1140062-02

• Before replacing the camshafts on cylinder head, apply engine oil to their journals and cam faces.

• Apply engine oil to the camshaft journal holders.

NOTE

• Before installing the camshaft, check that the tappets are installed correctly.

• The camshafts are identified by the embossed letters.

2

1

I718H1140061-01

Camshaft

• Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the match mark “A” on the crankshaft with the mating surfaces

“B” of crankcases.

!

CAUTION

• Pull the cam chain upward, or the chain will be caught between crankcase and cam drive sprocket.

• To adjust the camshaft timing correctly, be sure to align the match mark “A” with the mating surfaces “B” and hold this position when installing the camshafts.

I718H1140063-01

• Pull the cam chain lightly.

• The exhaust camshaft sprocket has an arrow marked

“1” “C”. Turn the exhaust camshaft so that the arrow is aligned with the gasket surface of the cylinder head.

• Engage the cam chain with the exhaust camshaft sprocket.

“C”

I718H1140064-01

1D-32 Engine Mechanical:

• The other arrow marked “2” “D” should now be pointing straight up. Starting from the roller pin that is directly above the arrow marked “2” “D”, count out 16 roller pins (from the exhaust camshaft side going towards the intake camshaft side).

• Engage the 16th roller pin “E” on the cam chain with the marked “3” on the intake sprocket.

NOTE

The cam chain should now be on all three sprockets. Be careful not to move the crankshaft until the camshaft journal holders and cam chain tension adjuster are secured.

• Install the camshaft journal holders.

!

CAUTION

Damage to head or camshaft journal holder thrust surfaces may result if the camshaft journal holders are not drawn down evenly.

NOTE

Each camshaft journal holder is identified with an embossed letter.

A B

FWD

“E” “D”

• Install the dowel pins.

I718H1140065-01

I718H1140394-01

C

D

I718H1140068-01

• Fasten the camshaft journal holders evenly by tightening the camshaft journal holder bolts lightly, in the ascending order of numbers.

!

CAUTION

The camshaft journal holder bolts are made of a special material and much superior in strength, compared with other types of high strength bolts.

Take special care not to use other types of bolts.

NOTE

The ascending order of numbers are indicated on the camshaft journal holders.

• Tighten the camshaft journal holder bolts in the ascending order of numbers to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Camshaft journal holder bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140387-01

• Install the oil pipe and tighten the mounting bolts to specified torque.

NOTE

Fit the washer (1) to each oil pipe mounting bolt.

Tightening torque

Oil pipe mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-33

• Install the cam chain tension adjuster (3) and tighten its mounting bolts.

Tightening torque

Cam chain tension adjuster mounting bolt (a): 10

N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

(a)

1

(a)

1

I718H1140069-01

Cam Chain Tension Adjuster

• Retract the push rod by pushing the stopper (1).

3

2

(a)

I718H1140071-03

• Install the spring (4).

• Install the gasket (5) and cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt (6).

NOTE

Click sound is heard when the cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt is installed.

• Tighten the cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt (6) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt (b): 23 N·m (

2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

!

CAUTION

After installing the cam chain tension adjuster, check to be sure that the adjuster works properly by checking the slack of cam chain.

I718H1140070-03

• Install a new gasket (2).

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

6

(b)

5 4

I718H1140072-03

1D-34 Engine Mechanical:

• After installing the cam chain tension adjuster, rotate the crankshaft (some turns), and recheck the positions of the camshafts.

Right Crankshaft Cover

• Apply SUZUKI BOND lightly to the mating surfaces at the parting line between the upper and lower crankcases as shown.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond

1207B or equivalent)

I718H1140075-03

• Install the gasket and right crankcase cover (1).

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

1

I718H1140396-01

• Be sure to check and adjust the valve clearance.

Refer to “Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-5)”.

Throttle Body

• Install the throttle body (1). Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation (Page 1D-9)”.

1

I718H1140077-01

Spark Plug

• Install the spark plugs. Refer to “Ignition Coil / Plug

Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

Cylinder Head Cover

• Install a new gasket to the cylinder head cover.

!

CAUTION

Use the new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

I718H1140074-02

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the cam end caps of the gasket as shown.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond

1207B or equivalent)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-35

PAIR System

• Install the PAIR component parts. Refer to “PAIR

Reed Valve Removal and Installation in Section 1B

(Page 1B-6)”.

I718H1140076-01

• Apply engine oil to both sides of the gaskets.

!

CAUTION

Use the gaskets with new ones to prevent oil leakage.

• Tighten the cylinder head cover bolts (4) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Cylinder head cover bolt: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140079-01

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark

• Install the ignition coil/plug caps. Refer to “Ignition Coil

/ Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-4)”.

I718H1140078-01

I718H1140080-01

Thermostat Connector

• Install the thermostat connector and pour engine coolant. Refer to “Thermostat Connector / Thermostat

Removal and Installation in Section 1F (Page 1F-9)” and “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-12)”.

I718H1140151-01

1D-36 Engine Mechanical:

Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment

B718H11406008

Refer to “Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-5)”.

Camshaft Inspection

B718H11406009

Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Camshaft Identification

The exhaust camshaft has the embossed letters “EX” and the intake camshaft has the embossed letters “IN”.

Camshaft Runout

Measure the runout using the dial gauge. Replace the camshaft if the runout exceeds the limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Camshaft runout (IN & EX)

Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

(A)

(B)

I718H1140081-01

Cam Wear

Check the camshaft for wear or damage.

Measure the cam height “a” with a micrometer.

Replace a camshaft if the cams are worn to the service limit.

Special tool

: 09900–20202 (Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 – 50 mm))

Cam height “a”

Service limit: (IN) 34.98 mm (1.377 in)

Service limit: (EX) 33.88 mm (1.334 in)

(C)

(C)

I718H1140082-01

Camshaft Journal Wear

Inspect the camshaft journal wear in the following procedures:

1) Determine whether or not each journal is worn down to the limit by measuring the oil clearance with the camshaft installed in place.

2) Use the plastigauge to read the clearance at the widest portion, which is specified as follows.

Special tool

(A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 —

0.076 mm))

(B): 09900–22302 (Plastigauge (0.051 —

0.152 mm))

“a”

I649G1140199-02

(A)

/

(B)

I718H1140083-03

3) Install each camshaft journal holder to its original position. Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly

(Page 1D-28)”.

4) Tighten the camshaft journal holder bolts in ascending order of numbers to the specified torque.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

NOTE

Do not rotate the camshafts with the plastigauge in place.

Tightening torque

Camshaft journal holder bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-37

7) If the camshaft journal oil clearance exceeds the limit, measure the inside diameter of the camshaft journal holder and the outside diameter of the camshaft journal. Replace the camshaft or the cylinder head depending upon which one exceeds the specification.

Special tool

(C): 09900–20602 (Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 mm))

(D): 09900–22403 (Small bore gauge (18 –

35 mm))

Camshaft journal holder I.D. (IN & EX)

Standard: 24.012 – 24.025 mm (0.9454 – 0.9459 in)

Special tool

(E): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Camshaft journal O.D. (IN & EX)

Standard: 23.959 – 23.980 mm (0.9433 – 0.9441 in)

(C)

(D)

I718H1140084-01

5) Remove the camshaft journal holders and measure the width of the compressed plastigauge using the envelope scale.

6) This measurement should be taken at the widest part of the compressed plastigauge.

Camshaft journal oil clearance (IN & EX)

Service limit: 0.150 mm (0.0059 in)

I718H1140086-01

(E)

I649G1140204-03

I718H1140085-01

1D-38 Engine Mechanical:

Camshaft Sprocket Inspection

B718H11406010

Inspect the camshaft sprocket in the following procedures:

1) Remove the intake and exhaust camshafts. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Inspect the teeth of each camshaft sprocket for wear or damage.

If they are worn or damaged, replace the sprockets and cam chain as a set.

Installation

1) Set the camshaft sprocket to the camshafts.

NOTE

Align the arrow mark “3” on camshaft sprocket with the notch “A” on the camshaft.

“A”

“A”

I718H1140087-01

3) Install the camshafts. Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Camshaft Sprocket Removal and Installation

B718H11406011

Removal

1) Remove the camshafts. Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Remove the camshaft sprockets (1).

I718H1140089-02

2) Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER to the threads of the camshaft sprocket bolts and then tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030 (Thread

Lock Cement Super 1303 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Camshaft sprocket bolt (Initial): 16 N·m (1.6 kgfm, 11.5 lb-ft)

Camshaft sprocket bolt (Final): 25 N·m (2.5 kgfm, 18.0 lb-ft)

1

I718H1140088-02

I718H1140090-02

3) Install the camshafts. Refer to “Engine Top Side

Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Cam Chain Tension Adjuster Inspection

B718H11406012

The cam chain tension adjuster is maintained at the proper tension by an automatically adjusted.

1) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Check that the push rod slides smoothly when releasing stopper (1). If it does not slide smoothly, replace the cam chain tension adjuster with a new one.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-39

3) Remove the cylinder head. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

4) Remove the cam chain No.1 guide (2).

2

1

I718H1140091-01

3) Install the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Cam Chain Guide Removal and Installation

B718H11406013

Removal

1) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to “Engine

Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Remove the cam chain No.2 guide (1) from the cylinder head cover.

I718H1140056-02

Installation

Install the cam chain guides in the reverse order of removal.

Cam Chain Guide Inspection

B718H11406014

Inspect the cam chain guide in the following procedures:

1) Remove the cam chain guides. Refer to “Cam Chain

Guide Removal and Installation (Page 1D-39)”.

2) Check the contacting surface of the cam chain guide. If it is worn or damaged, replace it with a new one.

1

I718H1140092-01

I718H1140095-01

3) Install the cam chain guides. Refer to “Cam Chain

Guide Removal and Installation (Page 1D-39)”.

1D-40 Engine Mechanical:

Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection

B718H11406015

Inspect the cam chain tensioner in the following procedures:

1) Separate the crankcases, upper and lower. Refer to

“Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D-53)”.

2) Remove the crankshaft assembly from the upper crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-53)”.

3) Remove the dampers (1) of the cam chain tensioner.

4) Remove the cam chain tensioner (2) and pin.

1

Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11406016

Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

!

CAUTION

Identify the position of each removed part.

Organize the parts in their respective groups

(i.e., intake, exhaust, No.1 or No.2) so that they can be installed in their original locations.

Disassembly

1) Remove the tappet (1) and shim (2) by fingers or magnetic hand.

2

I718H1140096-01

5) Check the contacting surface of the cam chain tensioner. If it is worn or damaged, replace it with a new one.

1 2

I718H1140097-01

6) Install the pin, cam chain tensioner and dampers.

7) Reinstall the crankshaft assembly. Refer to “Engine

Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

8) Reassemble the crankcases, upper and lower. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

I718H1140098-01

2) Using the special tools, compress the valve spring and remove the two cotter halves (3) from the valve stem.

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to damage of the tappet sliding surface with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09916–14510 (Valve spring compressor)

(B): 09916–14521 (Valve spring compressor attachment)

: 09916–84511 (Tweezers)

3

(B)

(A)

I718H1140100-01

3) Remove the valve spring retainer (4) and valve spring (5).

4) Pull out the valve (6) from the combustion chamber side.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-41

9) Remove the oil gallery plugs (cylinder head) (10).

10

10

5

4

6

I718H1140101-01

5) Remove the oil seal (7) and spring seat (8).

I718H1140106-01

Assembly

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the oil gallery plugs (cylinder head) to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Replace the gasket with new ones.

7

8

(a)

6) Remove the other valves in the same manner as described previously.

7) Remove the water outlet pipes (9).

I718H1140102-01

9

8) Remove the intake pipes.

(a)

I718H1140103-01

Tightening torque

Oil gallery plug (cylinder head) (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

• Apply grease to O-ring of the intake pipe.

I718H1140107-01

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with new ones.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1140105-01

I718H1140109-01

1D-42 Engine Mechanical:

NOTE

• When replacing the intake pipes, identify the different intake pipes according to each I.D. code “A”.

(1-18H0 for cylinder #1 and #4)

(2-18H0 for cylinder #2 and #3)

• Make sure that the “1 UP” mark faces up.

(for cylinder #1)

• Make sure that the “4 UP” mark faces up.

(for cylinder #4)

“A” “A”

• Install the valve spring seat.

• Apply engine oil to the oil seal (1), and press-fit it into position.

!

CAUTION

Do not reuse the removed oil seal.

1

I718H1140112-04

• Apply engine coolant to O-rings of water outlet pipe.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with new ones.

I718H1140113-03

• Insert the valve, with its stem coated with

MOLYBDENUM OIL SOLUTION all around and along the full stem length without any break.

!

CAUTION

When inserting the valve, take care not to damage the lip of the oil seal.

M/O: Molybdenum oil (MOLYBDENUM OIL

SOLUTION)

I705H1140165-01

I718H1140114-01

• Install the valve spring with the small-pitch portion “B” facing cylinder head.

“E”

“D”

“C”

Engine Mechanical: 1D-43

• Be sure that the rounded lip “F” of the cotter fits snugly into the groove “G” in the stem end.

G

“F”

2

3

“B”

“B”: Small-pitch portion

“C”: Large-pitch portion

“D”: UPWARD

“E”: Paint

I718H1140004-01

• Put on the valve spring retainer (2), and using the special tools, press down the spring, fit the cotter halves to the stem end, and release the lifter to allow the cotter halves to wedge in between retainer and stem.

!

CAUTION

• Be sure to restore each spring and valve to their original positions.

• Be careful not to damage the valve and valve stem when handling them.

• Be careful to damage of the tappet sliding surface with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09916–14510 (Valve spring compressor)

(B): 09916–14521 (Valve spring compressor attachment)

: 09916–84511 (Tweezers)

2. Valve spring retainer 3. Cotter

I718H1140117-02

• Install the other valves and springs in the same manner as described previously.

• Install the tappet shims and the tappets to their original positions.

NOTE

• Apply engine oil to the stem end, shim and tappet before fitting them.

• When seating the tappet shim, be sure the figure printed surface faces the tappet.

2

(B)

(A)

I718H1140118-01

I718H1140116-02

1D-44 Engine Mechanical:

Cylinder Head Related Parts Inspection

B718H11406017

Refer to “Cylinder Head Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 1D-40)”.

Cylinder Head Distortion

1) Decarbonize the combustion chambers.

2) Check the gasket surface of the cylinder head for distortion. Use a straightedge and thickness gauge.

Take clearance readings at several places. If readings exceed the service limit, replace the cylinder head.

Special tool

: 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Cylinder head distortion

Service limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

Valve Head Radial Runout

Place the dial gauge at a right angle to the valve head face and measure the valve head radial runout. If it measures more than the service limit, replace the valve.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Valve head radial runout (IN. & EX.)

Service limit: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)

(A)

(B)

(C)

I718H1140119-01

Valve Stem Runout

Support the valve using V-blocks, as shown, and check its runout using the dial gauge. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the valve.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Valve stem runout (IN. & EX.)

Service limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

I649G1140232-03

Valve Face Wear

Visually inspect each valve face for wear. Replace any valve with an abnormally worn face. The thickness of the valve face decreases as the face wears. Measure the valve head “a”. If it is out of specification replace the valve with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, 200 mm))

Valve head thickness “a” (IN. & EX.)

Service limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 in)

(A)

“a”

I649G1140233-02

(B)

(C)

I649G1140231-03

Valve Stem Deflection

Lift the valve about 10 mm (0.39 in) “a” from the valve seat. Measure the valve stem deflection in two directions, “X” and “Y”, perpendicular to each other.

Position the dial gauge as shown. If the deflection exceeds the service limit, then determine whether the valve or the guide should be replaced with a new one.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

Valve stem deflection (IN. & EX.)

Service limit: 0.35 mm (0.014 in)

NOTE

Engine Mechanical: 1D-45

If valve guides have to be removed for replacement after inspecting related parts, carry out the steps shown in valve guide replacement. Refer to “Valve Guide

Replacement (Page 1D-47)”.

(A)

“Y”

“X”

(B)

I718H1140121-01

Valve Stem Wear

Measure the valve stem O.D. using the micrometer. If it is out of specification, replace the valve with a new one.

If the valve stem O.D. is within specification but the valve stem deflection is not, replace the valve guide. After replacing the valve or valve guide, recheck the deflection.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Valve stem O.D.

Standard (IN.): 4.475 – 4.490 mm (0.1762 – 0.1768 in)

Standard (EX.): 4.455 – 4.470 mm (0.1754 – 0.1760 in)

(A)

I718H1140122-01

Valve Spring

The force of the coil spring keeps the valve seat tight. A weakened spring results in reduced engine power output and often accounts for the chattering noise coming from the valve mechanism.

Check the valve springs for proper strength by measuring their free length and also by the force required to compress them. If the spring length is less than the service limit or if the force required to compress the spring does not fall within the specified range, replace the valve spring.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Valve spring free length (IN. & EX.)

Service limit: 39.6 mm (1.56 in)

Valve spring tension (IN. & EX.)

Standard: Approx. 147 N (15.0 kgf, 33.1 Ib-ft)/36.0 mm (1.42 in)

(A)

I649G1140237-03

1D-46 Engine Mechanical:

“ a ”

“ b ”

4) Check that the transferred red lead (blue) on the valve face is uniform all around and in center of the valve face.

If the seat width “a” measured exceeds the standard value, or seat width is not uniform reface the seat using the seat cutter. Refer to “Valve Seat Repair

(Page 1D-48)”.

Valve seat width “a” (IN. & EX.)

Standard: 0.9 – 1.1 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)

Tension “a”

Approx. 147 N

(15.0 kgf, 33.1 lbs)

I649G1140238-03

Length “b”

36.0 mm

(1.42 in)

Valve Seat Width

1) Visually check for valve seat width on each valve face. If the valve face has worn abnormally, replace the valve.

2) Coat the valve seat with a red lead (Prussian Blue) and set the valve in place.

3) Rotate the valve with light pressure.

Special tool

(A): 09916–10911 (Valve lapper set)

(A)

“a”

I649G1140246-02

Valve Seat Sealing Condition

1) Clean and assemble the cylinder head and valve components.

2) Fill the intake and exhaust ports with gasoline to check for leaks. If any leaks occur, inspect the valve seat and face for burrs or other things that could prevent the valve from sealing. Refer to “Valve Seat

Repair (Page 1D-48)”.

!

WARNING

Always use extreme caution when handling gasoline.

I718H1140123-01

I718H1140124-01

NOTE

After servicing the valve seats, be sure to check the valve clearance after the cylinder head has been reinstalled. Refer to “Valve

Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-5)”.

Valve Guide Replacement

B718H11406018

1) Remove the cylinder head. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Remove the valves. Refer to “Cylinder Head

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 1D-40)”.

3) Using the valve guide remover, drive the valve guide out toward the intake or exhaust camshaft side.

Special tool

(A): 09916–43211 (Valve guide remover/ installer)

NOTE

• Discard the removed valve guide subassemblies.

• Only oversized valve guides are available as replacement parts. (Part No. 11115-

17E70)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-47

5) Cool down the new valve guides in a freezer for about one hour and heat the cylinder head to 100 –

150

°

C (212 – 302

°

F) with a hot plate.

!

CAUTION

Do not use a burner to heat the valve guide hole to prevent cylinder head distortion.

6) Apply engine oil to each valve guide and valve guide hole.

7) Drive the guide into the guide hole using the valve guide installer.

!

CAUTION

Failure to oil the valve guide hole before driving the new guide into place may result in a damaged guide or head.

Special tool

(A): 09916–43211 (Valve guide remover/ installer)

(D): 09916–43230 (Attachment)

(A)

(A)

(D)

“ a ”

1

1. Cylinder head

I718H1140127-01

2. 19.0 mm (0.75 in)

I718H1140125-01

4) Refinish the valve guide holes in the cylinder head using the reamer and handle.

!

CAUTION

When refinishing or removing the reamer from the valve guide hole, always turn it clockwise.

Special tool

(B): 09916–34580 (Valve guide reamer (10.8 mm))

(C): 09916–34542 (Reamer handle)

(A)

(D)

I718H1140128-01

(B)

(C)

I718H1140126-01

1D-48 Engine Mechanical:

8) After installing the valve guides, refinish their guiding bores using the reamer. Be sure to clean and oil the guides after reaming.

NOTE

• Be sure to cool down the cylinder head to ambient air temperature.

• Insert the reamer from the combustion chamber and always turn the reamer handle clockwise.

Special tool

(C): 09916–34542 (Reamer handle)

(E): 09916–33210 (Valve guide reamer (4.5 mm))

(C)

(E)

I718H1140129-01

9) Reassemble the cylinder head. Refer to “Cylinder

Head Disassembly and Assembly (Page 1D-40)”.

10) Install the cylinder head assembly. Refer to “Engine

Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Valve Seat Repair

B718H11406019

The valve seats (1) for both the intake and exhaust valves are machined to three different angles. The seat contact surface is cut at 45

°

.

45 15

!

CAUTION

• The valve seat contact area must be inspected after each cut.

• Do not use lapping compound after the final cut is made. The finished valve seat should have a velvety smooth finish but not a highly polished or shiny finish. This will provide a soft surface for the final seating of the valve which will occur during the first few seconds of engine operation.

NOTE

After servicing the valve seats, be sure to check the valve clearance after the cylinder head has been reinstalled. Refer to “Valve

Clearance Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-5)”.

Cylinder Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11406031

Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the ECT sensor (1) and oil jet (for cam chain tension adjuster) (2).

1

2

I718H1140131-01

2) Remove the water inlet connector (3).

1

IN.

EX.

Seat angle

Seat width

Valve diameter

Valve guide

I.D.

Intake

15

°

/45

°

/60

°

0.9 – 1.1 mm

(0.035 – 0.043 in)

31 mm

(1.22 in)

4.500 – 4.512 mm

(0.1772 – 0.1776 in)

1

I718H1140130-01

Exhaust

15

°

/45

°

27 mm

(1.06 in)

3

I718H1140132-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-49

3) Remove the water jacket plugs (4).

4

I718H1140133-01

(a)

I718H1140136-01

• Apply engine coolant to O-ring of water inlet connector.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

4

4

I718H1140134-01

Assembly

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the water jacket plugs to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Replace the gaskets with new ones.

Tightening torque

Water jacket plug (a): 30 N·m (3.0 kgf-m, 21.5 lbft)

I718H1140137-01

• Tighten the water inlet connector bolts to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the “up” mark “A” face up.

Tightening torque

Water inlet connector bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

“A”

(a)

(a)

(a)

(a)

I718H1140135-01

I718H1140398-01

1D-50 Engine Mechanical:

• Apply engine oil to O-ring and install the oil jet.

• Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring and gasket with new ones.

Tightening torque

ECT sensor (b): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

Cylinder Bore

Measure the cylinder bore diameter at six places. If any one of the measurements exceed the limit, overhaul the cylinder and replace the piston with an oversize piston.

The remaining cylinders must also be rebored accordingly; otherwise, the imbalance might cause excessive vibration.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20530 (Cylinder gauge set)

Cylinder bore

Standard: 79.000 – 79.015 mm (3.1102 – 3.1108 in)

(A)

(b)

I718H1140138-01

Cylinder Inspection

B718H11406020

Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

Refer to “Engine Top Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Cylinder Distortion

Check the gasket surface of the cylinder for distortion.

Use a straightedge and thickness gauge. Take clearance readings at several places. If any reading exceeds the service limit, replace the cylinder.

Special tool

: 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Cylinder distortion

Service limit: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

I718H1140140-01

I718H1140141-01

Piston-to-cylinder Clearance

Refer to “Piston and Piston Ring Inspection (Page 1D-

52)”.

I718H1140139-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-51

Piston Ring Removal and Installation

B718H11406022

Removal

1) Draw out the piston pin and remove the piston. Refer to “Engine Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Carefully spread the ring opening with your thumbs and then push up the opposite side of the 1st ring (2) to remove it.

NOTE

Do not expand the piston ring excessively since it is apt to be broken down.

I705H1140170-02

“A”: INCORRECT “B”: CORRECT b) Install the 2nd ring (3) and 1st ring (4) to piston.

NOTE

1st ring (4) and 2nd ring (3) differ in shape.

4

I718H1140142-01

3) Remove the 2nd ring and oil ring in the same manner.

Installation

NOTE

• When installing the piston ring, be careful not to damage the piston.

• Do not expand the piston ring excessively since it is apt to be broken down.

1) Install the piston rings in the order of the oil ring, second ring and top ring.

a) The first member to go into the of the oil ring groove is a spacer (1).

After placing the spacer, fit the two side rails (2).

3

I718H1140144-01

NOTE

Face the side with the stamped mark “C” upward when assembling.

4

“C”

IN

3

“C”

N

I718H1140145-02

2

1

2

I718H1140143-02

!

CAUTION

When installing the spacer, be careful so that the both edges are not overlapped.

1D-52 Engine Mechanical:

2) Position the gaps of the three rings and side rails as shown. Before inserting piston into the cylinder, check that the gaps are so located.

“D”

EX

“E”

IN

“F”

I718H1140146-02

“D”: 2nd ring and lower side rail

“E”: Upper side rail

“F”: 1st ring and spacer

3) Install the piston and piston pin. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

Piston and Piston Ring Inspection

B718H11406023

Refer to “Piston Ring Removal and Installation

(Page 1D-51)”.

Piston Diameter

Measure the piston diameter using the micrometer at 15 mm (0.6 in) “a” from the skirt end. If the piston diameter is less than the service limit, replace the piston.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20204 (Micrometer (75 – 100 mm))

Piston diameter

Service limit: 78.880 mm (3.1055 in)

Piston-to-cylinder Clearance

Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder bore diameter. If the piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds the service limit, replace both the cylinder and the piston.

Piston-to-cylinder clearance

Service limit: 0.120 mm (0.0047 in)

Piston Ring-to-groove Clearance

Measure the side clearances of the 1st and 2nd piston rings using the thickness gauge. If any of the clearances exceed the limit, replace both the piston and piston rings.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Piston ring-to-groove clearance

Service limit: (1st): 0.180 mm (0.0071 in)

Service limit: (2nd): 0.150 mm (0.0059 in)

Piston ring groove width

Standard: (1st): 1.01 – 1.03 mm (0.040 – 0.041 in)

Standard: (2nd): 0.81 – 0.83 mm (0.032 – 0.033 in)

Standard: (Oil): 1.51 – 1.53 mm (0.059 – 0.060 in)

Piston ring thickness

Standard: (1st): 0.97 – 0.99 mm (0.038 – 0.039 in)

Standard: (2nd): 0.77 – 0.79 mm (0.030 – 0.031 in)

(A)

I649G1140263-03

“a”

I718H1140147-01

(B)

(A)

I649G1140262-03

I649G1140264-03

Engine Mechanical: 1D-53

Piston Ring Free End Gap and Piston Ring End Gap

Measure the piston ring free end gap using vernier calipers. Next, fit the piston ring squarely into the cylinder and measure the piston ring end gap using the thickness gauge. If any of the measurements exceed the service limit, replace the piston ring with a new one.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Piston ring free end gap

Service limit: (1st): 7.2 mm (0.28 in)

Service limit: (2nd): 7.6 mm (0.30 in)

Special tool

(B): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Piston ring end gap

Service limit: (1st): 0.50 mm (0.020 in)

Service limit: (2nd): 0.50 mm (0.020 in)

(B)

(A)

I649G1140267-03

Measure the piston pin outside diameter at three positions using the micrometer. If any of the measurements are out of specification, replace the piston pin.

Special tool

(C): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Piston pin O.D.

Service limit: 17.980 mm (0.7079 in)

(C)

(A)

(B)

I649G1140265-03

I649G1140268-03

Engine Bottom Side Disassembly

B718H11406024

NOTE

The crankcase must be separated to service the crankshaft and conrod.

1) Remove the engine assembly. Refer to “Engine

Assembly Removal (Page 1D-17)”.

2) Remove the water hose bracket (1) and water hoses

(2).

I718H1140148-01

Piston Pin and Pin Bore

Measure the piston pin bore inside diameter using the small bore gauge. If either is out of specification or the difference between these measurements surpass limits, replace the piston.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20602 (Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 mm))

(B): 09900–22403 (Small bore gauge (18 – 35 mm))

Piston pin bore I.D.

Service limit: 18.030 mm (0.7098 in)

2

2

1

2

I718H1140154-02

1D-54 Engine Mechanical:

3) Remove the water hoses (2) and regulator/rectifier bracket (3).

Clutch

Remove the clutch component parts (1). Refer to “Clutch

Removal in Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

1

2

3

I718H1140005-01

Engine Top Side

Disassemble the engine top side (1). Refer to “Engine

Top Side Disassembly (Page 1D-24)”.

I718H1140160-01

Oil Pump

1) Remove the spacer (1).

2) Remove the oil pump drive sprocket (2) and chain

(3).

3) Remove the thrust washer (4) and washer (5).

1

4

1

5

Starter Motor

Remove the starter motor (1).

1

I718H1140158-01

3

2

4) Remove the snap ring (6).

NOTE

Do not drop the snap ring (6) into the crankcase.

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

5) Remove the oil pump driven gear (7).

I718H1140161-01

I718H1140159-01

6

7

I718H1140162-02

Generator

Remove the generator component parts (1). Refer to

“Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-55

6) Remove the pin (8) and washer (9).

NOTE

Do not drop the pin (8) and washer (9) into the crankcase.

7) Remove the oil pump (10).

10

9

1

8

I718H1140163-03

Gearshift System

1) Remove the snap ring (1) and washer (2) from the gearshift shaft.

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

2) Remove the gearshift shaft assembly (3) and washer

(4).

I718H1140166-01

Starter

Remove the idle gear shaft (1), idle gear (2) and starter driven gear (3). Refer to “Starter Clutch Removal and

Installation in Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

3

1

2

4

1

3

I718H1140167-02

Water Pump

Remove the water pump (1).

2

I718H1140164-01

3) Remove the gearshift cam plate bolt (5) and gearshift cam plate (6).

4) Remove the gearshift cam stopper (7) and gearshift arm stopper (8).

1

8

I718H1140168-01

7

6

5

I718H1140165-02

1D-56 Engine Mechanical:

Gear Position Switch

Remove the gear position switch (1).

1

I718H1140169-01

Crankcase Breather Cover

Remove the crankcase breather cover (1) and oil breather separator (2).

1

2

Oil Filter

Remove the oil filter (1) with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09915–40610 (Oil filter wrench)

1

(A)

I718H1140172-01

Oil Cooler

Remove the oil cooler (1).

1

I718H1140170-02

Oil Pressure Switch

1) Disconnect the oil pressure switch lead wire (1) and remove the oil pressure switch (2).

Oil Pan

Remove the oil pan (1).

2

1

I718H1140171-01

1

I718H1140173-02

I718H1140174-01

Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer

1) Remove the oil pressure regulator (1).

2) Remove the oil strainer (2).

3) Remove the O-rings (3).

2

3) Draw out the balancer shaft (3) and remove the crank balancer assembly (4).

NOTE

Engine Mechanical: 1D-57

Disassemble the crank balancer assembly if necessary. Refer to “Crank Balancer

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 1D-72)”.

3

Crank Balancer

1) Remove the plate (1).

1

I718H1140175-01

3

Crankcase

1) Remove the crankcase bolts (M6).

2) Remove the crankcase bolts (M8).

4

I718H1140178-01

1

2) Remove the balancer shaft arm (2).

I718H1140176-01

I718H1140179-01

2

I718H1140177-02

I718H1140180-02

1D-58 Engine Mechanical:

3) Loosen the crankcase bolts evenly by shifting the wrench in the descending order of numbers.

11 7 2 1 5 9

12 8 4 3 6 10

I718H1140181-01

4) Make sure that all of the bolts are removed. Then, tap the sides of the lower crankcase using a plastic hammer to separate the upper and lower crankcase halves and then lift the lower crankcase off of the upper crankcase.

Crankshaft / Conrod / Cum Chain

1) Remove the crankshaft assembly (1) from the upper crankcase.

2) Remove the thrust bearings (2).

NOTE

The crankshaft thrust bearings (2) are located between the crankshaft assembly and upper crankcase.

1

2

I718H1140184-01

3) Remove the cam chain (3) from the crankshaft.

NOTE

Remove the conrod if necessary. Refer to

“Conrod Removal and Installation (Page 1D-

74)”.

5) Remove the dowel pins and O-rings.

I718H1140182-02

3

I718H1140183-01

I718H1140185-01

Cam Chain Tensioner

Remove the dampers (1), cam chain tensioner (2) and pin.

1

2

I718H1140186-01

Transmission

Remove the transmission component. Refer to

“Transmission Removal in Section 5B (Page 5B-3)”.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-59

3) Remove the oil gallery jet (2) from the upper crankcase.

2

I718H1140187-01

Oil Jet

1) Remove the oil jet (1) (for engine top side) from the upper crankcase.

I718H1140190-01

4) Remove the oil jet (for transmission) from the lower crankcase.

1

I718H1140188-01

2) Remove the piston cooling oil jets from the upper crankcase.

I718H1140191-01

Crankshaft Journal Bearing

Remove the crankshaft journal bearings, upper and lower.

!

CAUTION

• When removing the crankshaft journal bearings, be careful not to scratch the crankcase and the crankshaft journal bearings.

• Do not touch the bearing surfaces with your hands. Grasp the bearings by their edges.

I718H1140189-01

1D-60 Engine Mechanical:

NOTE

• Do not remove the crankshaft journal bearings unless absolutely necessary.

• Make a note of where the crankshaft journal bearings are removed from so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.

2) Remove the oil gallery plugs (2) from the lower crankcase.

2

2

I718H1140195-01

3) Remove the oil gallery plug (3) from the oil pan.

I718H1140192-01

I718H1140193-01

Oil Gallery Plug

1) Remove the oil gallery plug (1) from the upper crankcase.

3

I718H1140196-01

Oil seal /Bearing

Remove the oil seals and bearings if necessary. Refer to

“Transmission Removal in Section 5B (Page 5B-3)” and

“Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation in Section 5B (Page 5B-19)”.

I718H1140197-01

1

I718H1140194-01

I718H1140198-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-61

Engine Mount Bushing

Remove the engine mount bushings (1) if necessary.

1

(a)

I718H1140201-01

1

I718H1140199-02

Engine Bottom Side Assembly

B718H11406025

Assemble the engine bottom side in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

NOTE

Apply engine oil to each running and sliding part before reassembling.

Oil Seal / Bearing

• Install the oil seals and bearings. Refer to

“Transmission Installation in Section 5B (Page 5B-5)” and “Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation in Section 5B (Page 5B-19)”.

Oil Gallery Plug

• Tighten each plug to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Use each new gasket.

Tightening torque

Oil gallery plug (M6 and M8) (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

Oil gallery plug (M12) (b): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 11.0 lb-ft)

Oil gallery plug (M16) (c): 35 N·m (3.5 kgf-m, 25.5 lb-ft)

(b)

I718H1140202-01

Crankshaft Journal Bearing

• When fitting the crankshaft journal bearings to the upper and lower crankcases, be sure to fix the stopper part “A” first and press the other end.

!

CAUTION

Do not touch the bearing surfaces with your hands. Grasp by the edge of the bearing shell.

NOTE

Inspect and select the crankshaft journal bearing if necessary. Refer to “Crankshaft

Journal Bearing Inspection and Selection

(Page 1D-78)”.

“A”

(a)

(a)

(c)

I718H1140200-01

I718H1140203-01

1D-62 Engine Mechanical:

Oil Jet

• Fit the new O-ring (1) to each piston cooling oil jet as shown and apply engine oil to them.

!

CAUTION

Use the new O-rings to prevent oil pressure leak.

1

(b)

• Install the oil jets, (2) and (3).

I718H1140206-02

I718H1140204-01

• Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Piston cooling oil jet bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

(a)

2

3

I718H1140207-02

2. Oil jet (#14) 3. Oil jet (#18)

Transmission

• Install the transmission. Refer to “Transmission

Installation in Section 5B (Page 5B-5)”.

Cam Chain Tensioner

• Install the pin, cam chain tensioner (1) and two dampers (2) properly.

NOTE

Be sure to face the arrow mark on the damper towards the front and rear, not towards the left and right.

I718H1140205-02

• Apply THREAD LOCK to the oil gallery jet and tighten it to the specified torque.

NOTE

After tightening the jet, make sure that the jet end is flush with the cover mating surface.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Oil gallery jet (b): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

2

1

I718H1140208-01

• Before installing the crankshaft assembly, apply engine oil to each crankshaft journal bearing.

• Install the crankshaft assembly along with the cam chain into the upper crankcase.

I718H1140209-01

• Insert the right and left-thrust bearings with the oil grooves “A” facing towards the crankshaft web.

NOTE

• Right-thrust bearing has green painting.

• Inspect and select the crankshaft thrust clearance if necessary. Refer to

“Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Inspection and Selection (Page 1D-80)”.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-63

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the lower crankcase as follows.

NOTE

• Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

• Spread the sealant on surfaces thinly to form an even layer, and assemble the crankcases within a few minutes.

• Take extreme care not to apply any bond to the oil hole, oil groove and bearing.

• Apply to distorted surfaces as it forms a comparatively thick film.

: Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1215 or equivalent)

“A” “A”

I718H1140399-01

Crankcase

• Install the dowel pins and O-rings in the upper crankcase.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with new ones.

I718H1140213-01

• Tighten the crankshaft journal bolts (M9) in ascending order of numbers assigned to these bolts. Tighten each bolt a little at a time to equalize the pressure in the following two steps.

!

CAUTION

Fit new gasket washers to the bolts (“9”,

“10”, “11” and “12”) to prevent oil leakage.

Tightening torque

Crankcase journal bolt (M9) (Initial): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

Crankcase journal bolt (M9) (Final): 32 N·m (3.2 kgf-m, 23.0 lb-ft)

11 7 2 1 5 9

12 8 4 3 6 10

I718H1140181-01

I718H1140183-01

1D-64 Engine Mechanical:

• Tighten the other crankcase bolts a little at a time to equalize the pressure.

!

CAUTION

Fit new gasket washer to the bolt “A”.

NOTE

Fit the clamp to the bolt “B”.

Tightening torque

Crankcase bolt (M6) (Initial): 6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

Crankcase bolt (M6) (Final): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m,

8.0 lb-ft)

Crankcase bolt (M8) (Initial): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m,

11.0 lb-ft)

Crankcase bolt (M8) (Final): 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m,

19.0 lb-ft)

“B”

• After the crankshaft journal bolts and crankcase bolts have been tightened, check that the crankshaft rotates smoothly.

• Also check that the driveshaft and countershaft rotate smoothly.

I718H1140217-01

“A”

“A”

I718H1140215-02

I718H1140218-01

Clank Balancer

• Turn the crankshaft and align the drilled mark with the mating surface of crankcases.

I718H1140216-04

I718H1140219-02

• Hold the crankshaft and install the crank balancer assembly.

NOTE

Align the engraved line “A” on the crank balancer with the triangle mark “B” on the crankcase.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-65

• Install the balancer shaft arm.

• Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the balancer shaft arm bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Balancer shaft arm bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140220-01

“A”

“B”

I718H1140221-02

• Apply engine oil to the balancer shaft and O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring (1) with a new one.

• Insert the balancer shaft.

(a)

I718H1140223-02

• Slowly turn the balancer shaft (2) clockwise until it is stop (position “C”) with a (–) screwdriver.

• From this position, turn the balancer shaft (2) counterclockwise by 1.5 – 2 graduations “D” and tighten the balancer shaft mounting bolt (3).

Tightening torque

Balancer shaft mounting bolt (b): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

NOTE

If the balancer gear is noisy after starting the engine, turn in or out the balancer shaft with in 1 graduation from standard setting to reduce the gear noise.

1

I718H1140222-02

2

I718H1140402-01

1D-66 Engine Mechanical:

3

(b)

2

2

2

“C”

“a”

“D”

I718H1140401-03

“a”: 1.5 – 2 graduations

Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer / Oil Pan

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-rings (1) and install them.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings (1) with new ones.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1140227-02

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the oil pan.

NOTE

• Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

• Spread the sealant on surfaces thinly to from an even layer, and assemble the oil pan within a few minutes.

• Apply to distorted surfaces as it forms a comparatively thick film.

: Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1215 or equivalent)

1

I718H1140226-01

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-rings (2) and press in the oil strainer and oil pressure regulator to the crankcase.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings (2) with new ones.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1140228-01

• Tighten the oil pan bolts.

!

CAUTION

Fit a new gasket washer to the bolt (3).

(a)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-67

“A”

“B”

3

I718H1140229-01

Oil Cooler

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1140231-01

Oil Filter

• Install the oil filter with the special tool. Refer to

“Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B

(Page 0B-10)”.

Special tool

(A): 09915–40610 (Oil filter wrench)

(A)

I718H1140230-02

• Install the oil cooler to the crankcase and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

NOTE

When installing the oil cooler, fit the convex part “A” of lower crankcase onto the concave part “B” of the oil cooler.

Tightening torque

Oil cooler union bolt (a): 70 N·m (7.0 kgf-m, 50.5 lb-ft)

I718H1140232-01

Oil Pressure Switch

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the thread part of oil pressure switch and tighten oil pressure switch to the specified torque.

NOTE

Be careful not to apply SUZUKI BOND to the hole of thread end.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1207B or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Oil pressure switch: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140233-01

1D-68 Engine Mechanical:

• Connect the oil pressure switch lead wire as shown.

Tightening torque

Oil Pressure switch lead wire mounting bolt (a):

1.5 N·m (0.15 kgf-m, 1.1 lb-ft)

(a)

“ a ”

I718H1140234-01

“a”: 20

° ±

10

°

Crankcase Breather Cover

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the breather cover.

NOTE

• Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

• Spread the sealant on surfaces thinly to form an even layer, and assemble the breather cover within a few minutes.

• Apply to distorted surfaces as it forms a comparatively thick film.

: Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1215 or equivalent)

I718H1140236-01

Gear Position Switch

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

NOTE

Align the gear position switch pin “A” with the gearshift cam hole “B”.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

“A”

“B”

I718H1140237-01

• Apply THREAD LOCK to the gear position switch bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gear position switch mounting bolt (a): 6.5 N·m (

0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 lb-ft)

I718H1140235-01

• Tighten the breather cover bolts.

(a)

I718H1140238-01

Water Pump

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-69

Generator

• Install the generator component parts (1). Refer to

“Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

1

I718H1140239-01

• Tighten the water pump mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Water pump mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140243-01

Gearshift

• Install the gearshift cam stopper (1), bolt (2), washer

(3) and return spring (4).

NOTE

Hook the return spring end “A” to the stopper (1).

Tightening torque

Gearshift cam stopper bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

• Check the gearshift cam stopper moves smoothly.

• Locate the gearshift cam in the neutral position.

(a)

4

1

3

I718H1140403-01

Starter

• Install the starter component parts (1). Refer to

“Starter Clutch Removal and Installation in Section 1I

(Page 1I-10)”.

2

I718H1140244-01

“A”

1

1

(a)

I718H1140242-01

I718H1140018-02

1D-70 Engine Mechanical:

• Install the gearshift cam stopper plate (5).

NOTE

Align the gearshift cam pin “B” with the gearshift cam stopper plate hole “C”.

6

(c)

5

“C”

“B”

I718H1140245-01

• Apply a small quantity of THREAD ROCK to the gearshift cam stopper plate bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift cam stopper plate bolt (b): 13 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.5 lb-ft)

I718H1140247-02

• Install the gearshift shaft assembly (7) and washer (8) as shown.

NOTE

Pinch the gearshift arm stopper (6) with return spring ends “D”.

7

8

6

“D”

(b)

I718H1140246-03

• Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the gearshift arm stopper (6) and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1303 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift arm stopper (c): 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 13.5 lb-ft)

• Install the washer (9) and snap ring (10).

!

CAUTION

Never reuse a snap ring.

I718H1140248-03

10

9

I718H1140249-01

Oil Pump

• Install the O-ring to the oil pump and apply SUZUKI

SUPER GREASE to it.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

• Install the oil pump.

NOTE

Set the oil pump shaft end “A” to the water pump shaft.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-71

• Install the oil pimp driven gear (3).

• Install the snap ring (4).

!

CAUTION

Never reuse a snap ring.

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers (opening type))

3

4

“A”

I718H1140250-02

• Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Oil pump mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

• Install the washer (1) and pin (2).

NOTE

Be careful not to drop the washer (1) and pin

(2) into the crankcase.

I718H1140253-01

• Install the washer (5) and thrust washer (6) onto the countershaft.

NOTE

The chamfer side “B” of thrust washer should face the crankcase side.

1

“B”

5

6

I718H1140254-01

• Install the oil pump drive sprocket to the countershaft.

NOTE

Teeth “C” on the sprocket must face the clutch side.

• Pass the chain between the oil pump drive and driven sprockets.

2

I718H1140252-01

1D-72 Engine Mechanical:

• Install the spacer (7).

Engine Top Side

• Assemble the engine top side. Refer to “Engine Top

Side Assembly (Page 1D-28)”.

7

“C”

I718H1140255-01

Clutch

• Install the clutch component parts (1). Refer to “Clutch

Installation in Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

I718H1140258-01

Water Hose

• Connect the water hoses. Refer to “Water Hose

Routing Diagram in Section 1F (Page 1F-3)”.

1

I718H1140256-01

Starter Motor

• Install the starter motor (1). Refer to “Starter Motor

Removal and Installation in Section 1I (Page 1I-4)”.

1

I718H1140259-01

Crank Balancer Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11406032

Refer to“Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D-

53)”.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

NOTE

It is unnecessary to remove the engine assembly from the frame when removing the crank balancer.

I718H1140257-01

Disassembly

1) Remove the washers (1), bearings (2) and spacer

(3) from the crank balancer.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-73

• Apply engine oil to the bearings, spacer and washers.

3

1

2 1

I718H1140260-01

2) Remove the balancer gear (4) along with the dampers (5) from the crank balancer.

3) Remove the dampers (5) from the balancer gear (4).

I718H1140262-01

Crank Balancer Inspection

B718H11406033

Refer to “Crank Balancer Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 1D-72)”.

Damper

Inspect the damper for wear and damage, replace it if any defects are found.

5

4

I718H1140261-01

Assembly

Assemble the crank balancer in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following point:

• Apply engine oil to the dampers.

I718H1140264-01

Bearing and Washer

Inspect the bearings and the washers for wear or damage. Replace the bearing or the washer if there is anything unusual.

I718H1140263-01

I718H1140265-01

1D-74 Engine Mechanical:

Balancer Shaft

Inspect the balancer shaft for wear or damage. Replace the balancer shaft if there is anything unusual.

1

I718H1140267-01

Conrod Removal and Installation

B718H11406026

Removal

1) Remove the crankshaft assembly from the crankcase. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side

Disassembly (Page 1D-53)”.

2) Loosen the conrod cap bolts by using a 10 mm, 12 point socket wrench, and tap the conrod cap bolts lightly with plastic hammer to remove the conrod cap.

3) Remove the conrods and mark them to identify their respective cylinders.

I718H1140269-01

Installation

1) When installing the bearings into the conrod cap and conrod, be sure to install the tab “A” first, and then press in the opposite side of the bearing.

NOTE

Inspect and select the conrod crank pin bearing if necessary. Refer to “Conrod Crank

Pin Bearing Inspection and Selection

(Page 1D-76)”.

“A”

I718H1140272-01

2) Apply molybdenum oil solution to the crank pin and bearing surface.

!

CAUTION

Be sure to clean the conrod big end.

M/O: Molybdenum oil (Molybdenum oil solution)

I718H1140268-01

4) Remove the bearings (1).

NOTE

• Do not remove the bearings (1) unless absolutely necessary.

• Make a note of where the bearings are removed from so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.

!

CAUTION

When removing the bearings, be careful not to scratch the conrods and the bearings.

I718H1140273-01

3) When fitting the conrod cap, make sure that I.D. code “B” on each conrod faces intake side.

“B”

I718H1140274-01

Engine Mechanical: 1D-75

4) Apply engine oil to the conrod cap bolts.

5) Tighten the conrod cap bolt by using a 10 mm, 12 point socket wrench in the following two steps.

Tightening torque

Conrod cap bolt: 21 N

m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.0 Ib-ft) then turn in 1/4 (90

°

) turn.

(B)

(A)

I718H1140280-01

Conrod Big End Side Clearance

1) Check the conrod big end side clearance using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Conrod big end side clearance

Service limit: 0.3 mm (0.012 in)

I718H1140275-01

(A)

90˚

I718H1140279-01

6) Check that the conrod moves smoothly.

7) Install the crankshaft assembly to the crankcase.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-

61)”.

Conrod and Crankshaft Inspection

B718H11406027

Refer to “Conrod Removal and Installation (Page 1D-

74)”.

Conrod Small End I.D.

Measure the conrod small end inside diameter using the small bore gauge.

If the conrod small end inside diameter exceeds the service limit, replace the conrod.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20602 (Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 mm))

(B): 09900–22403 (Small bore gauge (18 – 35 mm))

Conrod small end I.D.

Service limit: 18.040 mm (0.7102 in)

I718H1140281-01

2) If the clearance exceeds the limit, remove the conrod and measure the conrod big end width and crank pin width. Refer to “Conrod Removal and Installation

(Page 1D-74)”. If any of the measurements are out of specification, replace the conrod or crankshaft.

Special tool

(B): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

(C): 09900–20605 (Dial calipers (1/100 mm,

10 — 34 mm))

Conrod big end width

Standard: 20.95 – 21.00 mm (0.825 – 0.827 in)

Crank pin width

Standard: 21.10 – 21.15 mm (0.831 – 0.833 in)

(C)

(B)

I718H1140282-01

1D-76 Engine Mechanical:

Crankshaft Runout

Support the crankshaft using V-blocks as shown, with the two end journals resting on the blocks. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and rotate the crankshaft slowly to read the runout. Replace the crankshaft if the runout exceeds the service limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Crankshaft runout

Service limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

2) Place the plastigauge axially along the crank pin, avoiding the oil hole, as shown.

Special tool

(A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 —

0.076 mm))

(A)

(B)

(A)

(C)

I718H1140283-01

Conrod Crank Pin Bearing Inspection and

Selection

B718H11406028

Refer to “Conrod Removal and Installation (Page 1D-

74)”.

Inspection

1) Inspect the bearing surfaces for any signs of fusion, pitting, burn or flaws. If any, replace them with a specified set of bearings.

I718H1140286-01

3) Tighten the conrod cap bolts to the specified torque, in two stages.

NOTE

• When installing the conrod cap to the crank pin, make sure that I.D code “A” on the conrod faces towards the intake side.

• Never rotate the crankshaft or conrod when a piece of plastigauge is installed.

Tightening torque

Conrod cap bolt: 21 N

m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.0 Ib-ft) then turn in 1/4 (90

°

) turn.

“A”

I718H1140287-01

I718H1140285-01

4) Remove the conrod caps and measure the width of the compressed plastigauge using the envelope scale. This measurement should be taken at the widest part of the compressed plastigauge.

If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select the specified bearings from the bearing selection table.

Conrod big end oil clearance

Standard: 0.032 – 0.056 mm (0.0013 – 0.0022 in)

Conrod big end oil clearance

Service limit: 0.080 mm (0.0031 in)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-77

2) Check the corresponding crank pin O.D. code numbers ([1], [2] or [3]) “B”.

(A)

I718H1140289-01

Selection

1) Check the corresponding conrod I.D. code numbers

([1] or [2]) “A”.

“B”

I718H1140291-02

3) Measure the conrod crank pin O.D. with the special tool. If any of the measurements are out of specification, replace the crankshaft.

Crank pin O.D. specification

Code “B”

1

2

3

O.D. specification

37.992 – 38.000 mm

(1.4957 – 1.4961 in)

37.984 – 37.992 mm

(1.4954 – 1.4957 in)

37.976 – 37.984 mm

(1.4951 – 1.4954 in)

Special tool

(A): 09900–20202 (Micrometer (1/100 mm,

25 – 50 mm))

(A)

“A”

I718H1140290-01

Conrod I.D. specification

Code “A”

1

2

I.D. specification

41.000 – 41.008 mm

(1.6142 – 1.6145 in)

41.008 – 41.016 mm

(1.6145 – 1.6148 in)

I718H1140292-01

1D-78 Engine Mechanical:

4) Select the specified bearings from the bearing selection table.

!

CAUTION

The bearings should be replaced as a set.

Bearing selection table

Conrod

I.D. “A”

Code

1

2

1

Green

Black

Crank pin O.D. “B ”

2

Black

Brown

3

Brown

Yellow

I718H1140293-01

Bearing thickness specification

Color “C” (Part No.)

Green

(12164-46E01-0A0)

Black

(12164-46E01-0B0)

Brown

(12164-46E01-0C0)

Yellow

(12164-46E01-0D0)

Thickness

1.480 – 1.484 mm

(0.0583 – 0.0584 in)

1.484 – 1.488 mm

(0.0584 – 0.0586 in)

1.488 – 1.492 mm

(0.0586 – 0.0587 in)

1.492 – 1.496 mm

(0.0587 – 0.0589 in)

Crankshaft Journal Bearing Inspection and

Selection

B718H11406029

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D-

53)”.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

Inspection

1) Inspect each upper and lower crankcase bearing for any damage.

I718H1140294-01

“C”

I718H1140295-01

I649G1140336-02

“C”: Color code

2) Install the plastigauge onto each crankshaft journal as shown.

Special tool

(A): 09900–22301 (Plastigauge (0.025 –

0.076 mm))

NOTE

Do not place the plastigauge on the oil hole.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-79

5) Remove the lower crankcase and measure the width of compressed plastigauge using the envelope scale. This measurement should be taken at the widest part of the compressed plastigauge. If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select the specified bearings from the bearing selection table.

Crankshaft journal oil clearance

Standard: 0.016 – 0.040 mm (0.0006 – 0.0016 in)

Crankshaft journal oil clearance

Service limit: 0.080 mm (0.0031 in)

(A)

I718H1140296-02

3) Mate the lower crankcase with the upper crankcase.

4) Tighten the crankshaft journal bolts (M9) in ascending order of numbers assigned to these bolts.

Tighten each bolt a little at a time to equalize the pressure in the following two steps.

NOTE

Do not rotate the crankshaft when a piece of plastigauge is installed.

Tightening torque

Crankcase journal bolt (Initial): 18 N·m (1.8 kgfm, 13.0 lb-ft)

Crankcase journal bolt (Final): 32 N·m (3.2 kgfm, 23.0 lb-ft)

I718H1140298-01

Selection

1) Check the corresponding crankcase journal I.D. codes ([A] or [B]) “A”, which are stamped on the rear of the upper crankcase.

11

12

7

8

2 1

4 3

5

9

6

10

A B A A A A

“A”

I718H1140299-02

Crankcase journal I.D. specification

Code “A”

A

B

I.D. specification

37.000 – 37.008 mm

(1.4567 – 1.4570 in)

37.008 – 37.016 mm

(1.4570 – 1.4573 in)

I718H1140297-01

1D-80 Engine Mechanical:

2) Check the corresponding crankshaft journal O.D. codes ([A], [B] or [C]) “B”, which are stamped on the crankshaft.

“B”

I718H1140300-02

3) Measure the crankshaft O.D. with the special tool. If any of the measurements are out of specification, replace the crankshaft.

Crankshaft journal O.D. specification

Code “B”

A

B

C

O.D. specification

33.992 – 34.000 mm

(1.3383 – 1.3386 in)

33.984 – 33.992 mm

(1.3380 – 1.3383 in)

33.976 – 33.984 mm

(1.3367 – 1.3380 in)

Special tool

(A): 09900–20202 (Micrometer (1/100 mm,

25 – 50 mm))

(A)

4) Select the specified bearings from the bearing selection table.

Bearing selection table

Crankcase

I.D. “A”

Code

A

B

A

Green

Crankshaft O.D. “B”

B

Black

C

Brown

Black Brown Yellow

I718H1140302-02

Bearing thickness specification

Color “C” (Part No.)

Green

(12229-34E00-0A0)

Black

(12229-34E00-0B0)

Brown

(12229-34E00-0C0)

Yellow

(12229-34E00-0D0)

Thickness

1.488 – 1.492 mm

(0.0586 – 0.0587 in)

1.492 – 1.496 mm

(0.0587 – 0.0589 in)

1.496 – 1.500 mm

(0.0589 – 0.0591 in)

1.500 – 1.504 mm

(0.0591 – 0.0592 in)

“C”

I718H1140301-01

I718H1140303-01

“C”: Color code

Crankshaft Thrust Clearance Inspection and

Selection

B718H11406030

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Disassembly (Page 1D-

53)”.

Refer to “Engine Bottom Side Assembly (Page 1D-61)”.

Inspection

1) With the crankshaft’s right-side and left-side thrust bearings inserted into the upper crankcase.

2) Measure the thrust clearance “a” between the leftside thrust bearing and crankshaft using the thickness gauge. If the thrust clearance exceeds the standard range, adjust the thrust clearance.

NOTE

Pull the crankshaft to the left (starter clutch side) so that there is no clearance on the right-side thrust bearing.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Crankshaft thrust clearance “a”

Standard: 0.055 – 0.110 mm (0.0022 – 0.0043 in)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-81

Selection

1) Remove the right-side thrust bearing and measure its thickness using the micrometer. If the thickness of the right-side thrust bearing is below standard, replace it with a new bearing and measure the thrust clearance again, as described above.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Right-side thrust bearing thickness

Standard: 2.425 – 2.450 mm (0.0955 – 0.0965 in)

(A)

2

1

“A”

1. Right side thrust bearing

2. Left side thrust bearing

“A”: Front side

I718H1140304-01

I649G1140343-02

2) If the right-side thrust bearing is within the standard range, reinsert the right-side thrust bearing and remove the left-side thrust bearing.

3) With the left-side thrust bearing removed, measure the clearance “a” using the thickness gauge as shown.

Special tool

(B): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(A)

“ a ”

(B)

“ a ”

I718H1140306-01

I718H1140307-01

1D-82 Engine Mechanical:

4) Select a left-side thrust bearing from the selection table.

NOTE

Right-side thrust bearing has the same specification as the GREEN (12228-17E00-0D0) of left-side thrust bearing.

Left-side thrust bearing selection table

Clearance before inserting the left-side thrust bearing

Color “A” (Part No.)

2.560 – 2.585 mm

(0.1008 – 0.1018 in)

White

(12228-17E00-0F0)

2.535 – 2.560 mm

(0.0998 – 0.1008 in)

2.510 – 2.535 mm

(0.0988 – 0.0998 in)

Yellow

(12228-17E00-0E0)

Green

(12228-17E00-0D0)

2.485 – 2.510 mm

(0.0978 – 0.0988 in)

2.460 – 2.485 mm

(0.0969 – 0.0978 in)

2.430 – 2.460mm

(0.0957 – 0.0969 in)

Blue

(12228-17E00-0C0)

Black

(12228-17E00-0B0)

Red

(12228-17E00-0A0)

Thrust bearing thickness

2.475 – 2.500 mm

(0.0974 – 0.0984 in)

2.450 – 2.475 mm

(0.0965 – 0.0974 in)

2.425 – 2.450 mm

(0.0955 – 0.0965 in)

2.400 – 2.425 mm

(0.0945 – 0.0955 in)

2.375 – 2.400 mm

(0.0935 – 0.0945 in)

2.350 – 2.375 mm

(0.0925 – 0.0935 in)

Thrust clearance

0.060 – 0.110 mm

(0.0024 – 0.0043 in)

0.055 – 0.110 mm

(0.0022 – 0.0043 in)

“A”

I649G1140345-02

“A”: Color code

5) After selecting a left-side thrust bearing, install it and then measure the thrust clearance again.

Engine Mechanical: 1D-83

Service Data

Valve + Guide

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Valve diam.

Valve clearance (when cold)

Valve guide to valve stem clearance

Valve stem deflection

Valve guide I.D.

Valve stem O.D.

Valve stem runout

Valve head thickness

Valve seat width

Valve head radial runout

Valve spring free length

Valve spring tension

IN.

EX.

IN.

EX.

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

Specifications

Standard

31 (1.22)

27 (1.06)

0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008)

0.20 – 0.30 (0.008 – 0.012)

0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015)

0.030 – 0.057 (0.0012 – 0.0022)

4.500 – 4.512 (0.1772 – 0.1776)

4.475 – 4.490 (0.1762 – 0.1768)

4.455 – 4.470 (0.1754 – 0.1760)

0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043)

Approx. 147 N (15.0 kgf, 33.1 lbs) at length 36.0 mm (1.42 in)

B718H11407001

Limit

0.35 (0.014)

0.05 (0.002)

0.5 (0.02)

0.03 (0.001)

39.6 (1.56)

Camshaft + Cylinder Head

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Cam height

Camshaft journal oil clearance

Camshaft journal holder I.D.

Camshaft journal O.D.

Camshaft runout

Cam chain pin (at arrow “3”)

Cylinder head distortion

Cylinder + Piston + Piston Ring

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Compression pressure

Compression pressure difference

Piston-to-cylinder clearance

Cylinder bore

Piston diam.

Cylinder distortion

Piston ring free end gap

Piston ring end gap

Piston ring-to-groove clearance

Piston ring groove width

Piston ring thickness

IN.

EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

IN. & EX.

Standard

35.28 – 35.33 (1.389 – 1.391)

34.18 – 34.23 (1.346 – 1.348)

0.032 – 0.066 (0.0013 – 0.0026)

24.012 – 24.025 (0.9454 – 0.9459)

23.959 – 23.980 (0.9433 – 0.9441)

16th pin

Standard

1 300 – 1 700 kPa (13 – 17 kgf/cm 2 , 185 – 242 psi)

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

1st

2nd

0.025 – 0.035 (0.0010 – 0.0014)

79.000 – 79.015 (3.1102 – 3.1108)

78.970 – 78.985 (3.1090 – 3.1096)

Measure 15 mm (0.6 in) from the skirt end.

IN

N

IN

N

Approx. 9 (0.35)

Approx. 9.5 (0.37)

0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008)

0.06 – 0.21 (0.002 – 0.008)

1.01 – 1.03 (0.040 – 0.041)

Oil

1st

2nd

0.81 – 0.83 (0.032 – 0.033)

1.51 – 1.53 (0.059 – 0.060)

0.97 – 0.99 (0.038 – 0.039)

0.77 – 0.79 (0.030 – 0.031)

Limit

34.98 (1.377)

33.88 (1.334)

0.150 (0.0059)

0.10 (0.004)

0.20 (0.008)

Limit

1 000 kPa

(10 kgf/cm 2 , 142 psi)

200 kPa

(2 kgf/cm 2 , 28 psi)

0.120 (0.0047)

Nicks or Scratches

78.880 (3.1055)

0.20 (0.008)

7.2 (0.28)

7.6 (0.30)

0.5 (0.020)

0.5 (0.020)

0.180 (0.0071)

0.150 (0.0059)

1D-84 Engine Mechanical:

Piston pin bore

Piston pin O.D.

Item

Conrod + Crankshaft

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Conrod small end I.D.

Conrod big end side clearance

Conrod big end width

Crank pin width

Conrod big end oil clearance

Crank pin O.D.

Crankshaft journal oil clearance

Crankshaft journal O.D.

Crankshaft thrust clearance

Crankshaft thrust bearing thickness

Crankshaft runout

Standard

18.002 – 18.008 (0.7087 – 0.7090)

17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087)

Right side

Left side

Standard

18.010 – 18.018 (0.7091 – 0.7094)

0.10 – 0.20 (0.004 – 0.008)

20.95 – 21.00 (0.825 – 0.827)

21.10 – 21.15 (0.831 – 0.833)

0.032 – 0.056 (0.0013 – 0.0022)

37.976 – 38.000 (1.4951 – 1.4961)

0.016 – 0.040 (0.0006 – 0.0016)

33.976 – 34.000 (1.3376 – 1.3386)

0.055 – 0.110 (0.0022 – 0.0043)

2.425 – 2.450 (0.0955 – 0.0965)

2.350 – 2.500 (0.0925 – 0.0984)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

STP sensor mounting screw

ISC valve mounting screw

Fuel delivery pipe mounting screw

Frame down tube bolt

Engine mounting No.1 bracket bolts

Engine mounting No.2 bracket bolts

Engine sprocket nut

Speed sensor rotor bolt

Cylinder head bolt (L175)

Cylinder head bolt (L175)

Cylinder head bolt (L65)

Camshaft journal holder bolt

Oil pipe mounting bolt

Cam chain tension adjuster mounting bolt

Cam chain tension adjuster cap bolt

Cylinder head cover bolt

Camshaft sprocket bolt

Camshaft sprocket bolt

Oil gallery plug (cylinder head)

Water jacket plug

Water inlet connector bolt

ECT sensor

Oil gallery plug (M6 and M8)

Oil gallery plug (M12)

Oil gallery plug (M16)

Piston cooling oil jet bolt

Oil gallery jet

Crankcase journal bolt (M9) (Initial)

Crankcase journal bolt (M9) (Final)

Crankcase bolt (M6) (Initial)

Crankcase bolt (M6) (Final)

Crankcase bolt (M8) (Initial)

Crankcase bolt (M8) (Final)

Balancer shaft arm bolt

N

m

3.5

3.5

3.5

50

23

23

115

25

25

42

10

10

35

10

22

18

10

18

10

15

16

25

10

30

10

10

23

14

32

6

11

15

26

10

1.0

1.8

1.0

1.5

3.5

1.0

2.2

1.8

1.0

1.0

2.3

1.4

1.6

2.5

1.0

3.0

3.2

0.6

1.1

1.5

2.6

1.0

Tightening torque kgf-m

0.35

0.35

0.35

5.0

2.3

2.3

11.5

2.5

2.5

4.2

1.0

1.0 7.0

lb-ft

2.5

2.5

2.45

36.0

16.5

16.5

83.0

18.0

18.0

30.5

7.0

7.0

13.0

7.0

11.0

25.5

7.0

16.0

13.0

7.0

7.0

16.5

10.0

11.5

18.0

7.0

21.5

23.0

4.5

8.0

11.0

19.0

7.0

Limit

18.030 (0.7098)

17.980 (0.7079)

Limit

18.040 (0.7102)

0.30 (0.012)

0.080 (0.0031)

0.080 (0.0031)

0.05 (0.002)

B718H11407002

Note

) (Page 1D-13)

) (Page 1D-13)

) (Page 1D-15)

) (Page 1D-21)

) (Page 1D-21)

) (Page 1D-21)

) (Page 1D-22)

) (Page 1D-23)

) (Page 1D-30)

) (Page 1D-30)

) (Page 1D-30)

) (Page 1D-32) /

) (Page 1D-37)

) (Page 1D-33)

) (Page 1D-33)

) (Page 1D-33)

) (Page 1D-35)

) (Page 1D-38)

) (Page 1D-38)

) (Page 1D-41)

) (Page 1D-49)

) (Page 1D-49)

) (Page 1D-50)

) (Page 1D-61)

) (Page 1D-61)

) (Page 1D-61)

) (Page 1D-62)

) (Page 1D-62)

) (Page 1D-63)

) (Page 1D-63)

) (Page 1D-64)

) (Page 1D-64)

) (Page 1D-64)

) (Page 1D-64)

) (Page 1D-65)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-85

Fastening part

Balancer shaft mounting bolt

Oil cooler union bolt

Oil pressure switch

Oil Pressure switch lead wire mounting bolt

Gear position switch mounting bolt

Water pump mounting bolt

Gearshift cam stopper bolt

Gearshift cam stopper plate bolt

Gearshift arm stopper

Oil pump mounting bolt

Conrod cap bolt

Crankcase journal bolt (Initial)

Crankcase journal bolt (Final)

N

m

10

70

14

1.5

6.5

10

10

13

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.0

7.0

1.4

0.15

0.65

1.0

1.0

1.3

lb-ft

7.0

50.5

10.0

1.1

4.7

7.0

7.0

9.5

19 1.9 13.5

10 1.0 7.0

21 N

⋅ m (2.1 kgf-m, 15.0 Ib-ft) then turn in 1/

4 (90

°

) turn.

18

32

1.8

3.2

13.0

23.0

Note

)

(Page 1D-65)

)

(Page 1D-67)

)

(Page 1D-67)

)

(Page 1D-68)

)

(Page 1D-68)

)

(Page 1D-69)

)

(Page 1D-69)

)

(Page 1D-70)

)

(Page 1D-70)

)

(Page 1D-71)

)

(Page 1D-75) /

)

(Page 1D-76)

)

(Page 1D-79)

)

(Page 1D-79)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Throttle Body Components (Page 1D-7)”

“Throttle Body Construction (Page 1D-8)”

“Engine Assembly Installation (Page 1D-21)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Sealant

Material

Molybdenum oil

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1D-13) / equivalent ) (Page 1D-23) /

) (Page 1D-41) /

) (Page 1D-66) /

) (Page 1D-66) /

) (Page 1D-67) /

) (Page 1D-68) /

MOLYBDENUM OIL SOLUTION —

) (Page 1D-69) /

) (Page 1D-71)

) (Page 1D-28) /

) (Page 1D-29) /

) (Page 1D-42) /

) (Page 1D-74)

P/No.: 99000–31110 ) (Page 1D-63) /

) (Page 1D-66) /

SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or equivalent

SUZUKI BOND No.1207B or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–31140

) (Page 1D-68)

) (Page 1D-67)

SUZUKI Bond 1207B or equivalent P/No.: 99000–31140 ) (Page 1D-34) /

) (Page 1D-35)

B718H11408001

1D-86 Engine Mechanical:

Material

Thread lock cement

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1303 or equivalent

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

Note

P/No.: 99000–32030

)

(Page 1D-22) /

)

(Page 1D-38) /

)

(Page 1D-70)

P/No.: 99000–32110

)

(Page 1D-62) /

)

(Page 1D-62) /

)

(Page 1D-65) /

)

(Page 1D-68) /

)

(Page 1D-70)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Throttle Body Components (Page 1D-7)”

Special Tool

09900–06107

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 1D-54) /

) (Page 1D-55) /

) (Page 1D-71)

09900–20102

Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm)

) (Page 1D-44) /

) (Page 1D-45) /

) (Page 1D-53)

B718H11408002

09900–20204

Micrometer (75 – 100 mm)

) (Page 1D-52)

09900–20202

Micrometer (1/100 mm, 25 –

50 mm)

) (Page 1D-36) /

) (Page 1D-77) /

) (Page 1D-80)

09900–20205

Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)

) (Page 1D-37) /

) (Page 1D-45) /

) (Page 1D-52) /

) (Page 1D-53) /

) (Page 1D-75) /

) (Page 1D-81)

09900–20602

Dial gauge (1/1000 mm, 1 mm)

) (Page 1D-37) /

) (Page 1D-53) /

) (Page 1D-75)

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm)

) (Page 1D-36) /

) (Page 1D-44) /

) (Page 1D-44) /

) (Page 1D-45) /

) (Page 1D-76)

09900–20530

Cylinder gauge set

) (Page 1D-50)

09900–20605

Dial calipers (1/100 mm, 10

– 34 mm)

) (Page 1D-75)

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

) (Page 1D-36) /

) (Page 1D-44) /

) (Page 1D-44) /

) (Page 1D-45) /

) (Page 1D-76)

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

)

(Page 1D-44) /

)

(Page 1D-50) /

)

(Page 1D-52) /

)

(Page 1D-53) /

)

(Page 1D-75) /

)

(Page 1D-81) /

)

(Page 1D-81)

09900–22301

Plastigauge (0.025 – 0.076 mm)

) (Page 1D-36) /

) (Page 1D-76) /

) (Page 1D-79)

09900–22403

Small bore gauge (18 – 35 mm)

) (Page 1D-37) /

) (Page 1D-53) /

) (Page 1D-75)

09915–63311

Compression gauge attachment

) (Page 1D-3)

09916–10911

Valve lapper set

) (Page 1D-46)

09916–14521

Valve spring compressor attachment

) (Page 1D-40) /

) (Page 1D-43)

09916–34542

Reamer handle

) (Page 1D-47) /

) (Page 1D-48)

09900–21304

V-block (100 mm)

)

(Page 1D-36) /

)

(Page 1D-44) /

)

(Page 1D-44) /

)

(Page 1D-76)

09900–22302

Plastigauge (0.051 – 0.152 mm)

) (Page 1D-36)

Engine Mechanical: 1D-87

09915–40610

Oil filter wrench

) (Page 1D-56) /

) (Page 1D-67)

09915–64512

Compression gauge

) (Page 1D-3)

09916–14510

Valve spring compressor

) (Page 1D-40) /

) (Page 1D-43)

09916–33210

Valve guide reamer (4.5 mm)

) (Page 1D-48)

09916–34580

Valve guide reamer (10.8 mm)

) (Page 1D-47)

1D-88 Engine Mechanical:

09916–43211

Valve guide remover/ installer

)

(Page 1D-47) /

)

(Page 1D-47)

09916–74521

Holder body

) (Page 1D-29)

09916–84511

Valve adjuster driver

) (Page 1D-40) /

) (Page 1D-43)

09930–11950

Torx wrench

) (Page 1D-11) /

) (Page 1D-12) /

) (Page 1D-13) /

) (Page 1D-13)

09916–43230

Attachment

)

(Page 1D-47)

09916–74550

Band (Piston diam.: 73 – 85 mm)

) (Page 1D-29)

09930–10121

Spark plug wrench set

) (Page 1D-25)

Engine

Engine Lubrication System

Precautions

Precautions for Engine Oil

Refer to “Fuel and Oil Recommendation in Section 0A (Page 0A-4)”.

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-1

B718H11500001

1E-2 Engine Lubrication System:

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Engine Lubrication System Chart Diagram

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT

JOURNAL HOLDER (B)

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT

JOURNAL HOLDER (A)

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT

CAMSHAFT JOURNALS,

CAMFACES, TAPPETS

INTAKE CAMSHAFT

CAMSHAFT JOURNALS,

CAMFACES, TAPPETS

INTAKE CAMSHAFT

JOURNAL HOLDER (C)

CAMSHAFT RIB AND

CAM DRIVE CHAIN

INTAKE CAMSHAFT

JOURNAL HOLDER (D)

OIL JET (#8)

CAM CHAIN

TENSION ADJUSTER

OIL JET (#14)

B718H11502002

GENERATOR COIL

#1 PISTON AND

CYLINDER WALL

#2 PISTON AND

CYLINDER WALL

COUNTERSHAFT

AND GEARS

GENERATOR COVER

#1 PISTON COOLING

OIL JET

OIL GALLERY JET

#2 PISTON COOLING

OIL JET

OIL JET (#18)

DRIVESHAFT

AND GEARS

CLUTCH PUSH PIECE AND

PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR BEARING

CLUTCH PLATES

#3 PISTON AND

CYLINDER WALL

#4 PISTON AND

CYLINDER WALL

#3 PISTON COOLING

OIL JET

#4 PISTON COOLING

OIL JET

STARTER DRIVEN

GEAR BEARING

#1 CRANK PIN

BEARING

#2 CRANK PIN

BEARING

#3 CRANK PIN

BEARING

#4 CRANK PIN

BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

CRANKSHAFT

JOURNAL BEARING

BALANCER SHAFT

BALANCER SHAFT

BEARING

MAIN-GALLERY

OIL FILTER

OIL COOLER

OIL PRESSUER

REGULATOR

OIL PUMP

OIL STRAINER

OIL PRESSURE

SWITCH

OIL PAN

I718H1150015-03

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-3

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Lubrication Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Engine overheats.

Exhaust smoke is dirty or thick.

Engine lacks power.

Possible cause

Insufficient amount of engine oil.

Defective oil pump.

Clogged oil circuit.

Clogged oil cooler

Incorrect engine oil.

Excessive amount of engine oil.

Excessive amount of engine oil.

B718H11504001

Correction / Reference Item

Check level and add.

Replace.

Clean.

Clean or replace.

Change.

Check level and drain.

Check level and drain.

Oil Pressure Check

B718H11504002

Check the engine oil pressure periodically. This will give a good indication of the condition of the moving parts.

NOTE

Before checking the oil pressure, check the following.

• Oil level (Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”)

• Oil leaks (If leak is found, repair it.)

• Oil quality (If oil is discolored or deteriorated, replace it.)

1) Start the engine and check if the oil pressure indicator light is turned on. If the light stays on, check the oil pressure indicator light circuit. If the circuit is

OK, check the oil pressure in the following manner.

2) Remove the main oil gallery plug (1).

3) Install the oil pressure gauge and attachment into the main oil gallery.

Special tool

(A): 09915–74521 (Oil pressure gauge hose)

(B): 09915–74540 (Oil pressure gauge attachment)

(C): 09915–77331 (Meter (for high pressure))

(C)

(B)

(A)

1

I718H1150018-01

I718H1150019-01

4) Warm up the engine as follows:

Summer: 10 min. at 2 000 r/min

Winter: 20 min. at 2 000 r/min

5) After warm up, increase the engine speed to 3 000 r/ min (Observe the tachometer), and read the oil pressure gauge.

If the oil pressure is lower or higher than the specification, the following causes may be considered.

Oil pressure specification

100 – 400 kPa (1.0 – 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 14 – 57 psi) at 3

000 r/min, Oil temp. at 60

°

C (140

°

F)

High oil pressure

• Engine oil viscosity is too high

• Clogged oil passage

Low oil pressure

• Clogged oil filter

• Oil leakage from the oil passage

• Combination of the above items

• Damaged O-ring

• Defective oil pump

• Combination of the above items

1E-4 Engine Lubrication System:

6) Stop the engine and remove the oil pressure gauge and attachment.

7) Reinstall the main oil gallery plug and tighten it to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to oil leakage.

Tightening torque

Main Oil gallery plug (M16) (a): 35 N·m (3.5 kgfm, 25.5 lb-ft)

(a)

I718H1150020-01

8) Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil and

Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

Repair Instructions

Engine Oil and Filter Replacement

B718H11506001

Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section

0B (Page 0B-10)”.

4) Remove the water hoses (3). Refer to “Water Hose

Routing Diagram in Section 1F (Page 1F-3)”.

Engine Oil Level Inspection

B718H11506002

Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section

0B (Page 0B-10)”.

Oil Pan / Oil Strainer / Oil Pressure Regulator

Removal and Installation

B718H11506015

Removal

1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

2) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

3) Remove the radiator (1), exhaust pipe assembly (2) and muffler. Refer to “Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor

Removal and Installation in Section 1F (Page 1F-5)” and “Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation in Section 1K (Page 1K-3)”.

3

I718H1150022-01

5) Remove the oil pan (4). Refer to “Engine Bottom

Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-53)”.

4

1

I718H1150023-01

2

I718H1150021-01

6) Remove the hose clamp plate (5) from the oil pan.

5

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-5

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the oil gallery plug to specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

Tightening torque

Oil gallery plug (M12) (a): 15 N·m (1.5 kgf-m, 11.0 lb-ft)

I718H1150064-01

7) Remove the oil gallery plug (6) from the oil pan.

(a)

6

I718H1150024-02

8) Remove the O-rings (7), oil pressure regulator (8) and oil strainer (9).

I718H1150026-01

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-rings and install them.

!

CAUTION

Use new O-rings to prevent oil leakage.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

8

7

9

I718H1150025-02

I718H1150027-01

I718H1150028-01

1E-6 Engine Lubrication System:

• Install the oil pressure regulator (1) and oil strainer (2).

NOTE

When installing the oil strainer, fit the concave part “A” of the oil strainer onto the convex part “B” of the crankcase.

• Tighten the oil pan bolts diagonally.

NOTE

Fit a new gasket washer to the oil pan bolt (3).

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket washer to prevent oil leakage.

“B”

1

“A”

3

2

I718H1150029-01

• Apply SUZUKI BOND to the mating surface of the oil pan.

NOTE

Use of SUZUKI BOND is as follows:

• Make surfaces free from moisture, oil, dust and other foreign materials.

• Spread the sealant on surfaces thinly to from an even layer, and assemble the oil pan within a few minutes.

• Apply to distorted surfaces as it forms a comparatively thick film.

: Sealant 99000–31110 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1215 or equivalent)

I718H1150032-01

• After installing the removed parts, pour engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)” and

“Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

12)”.

Oil Pressure Regulator / Oil Strainer Inspection

B718H11506006

Refer to “Oil Pan / Oil Strainer / Oil Pressure Regulator

Removal and Installation (Page 1E-4)”.

Oil pressure regulator

Inspect the operation of the oil pressure regulator by pushing on the piston with a proper bar.

If the piston does not operate, replace the oil pressure regulator with a new one.

I718H1150033-01

I718H1140228-01

Oil Strainer

Clean the oil strainer if necessary.

Inspect the oil strainer body for damage. If necessary, replace it with a new one.

I718H1150034-01

Oil Cooler Removal and Installation

B718H11506017

Removal

1) Drain engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to

“Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B

(Page 0B-10)” and “Cooling System Inspection in

Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

2) Remove the Oil filter. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

3) Disconnect the oil cooler hoses (1).

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-7

Installation

Install the oil cooler in the revers order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage.

NOTE

When installing the oil cooler, fit the concave part “A” of the oil cooler onto the convex part

“B” of the crankcase.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

“A”

“B”

I718H1150037-01

• Tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Oil cooler union bolt (a): 70 N·m (7.0 kgf-m, 50.5 lb-ft)

1

I718H1150035-01

4) Remove the washer (3) and oil cooler (4) by removing the union bolt (2).

2

3

(a)

4

I718H1150036-02

I718H1150038-01

Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation

B718H11506008

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A

(Page 0A-8)”.

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

1E-8 Engine Lubrication System:

3) Disconnect the oil pressure switch lead wire.

2) Connect the oil pressure switch lead wire securely.

Refer to “Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in

Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”.

Tightening torque

Oil pressure switch lead wire bolt (b): 1.5 N·m (

0.15 kgf-m, 1.1 lb-ft)

(b)

4) Remove the oil pressure switch (1).

I718H1150039-01

1

I718H1150040-01

Installation

1) Install the oil pressure switch, apply the SUZUKI

BOND to its thread and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond

1207B or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Oil pressure switch (a): 14 N·m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.0 lb-ft)

I718H1150042-01

3) Pour engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

Oil Pressure Switch Inspection

B718H11506009

Refer to “Oil Pressure Indicator Inspection in Section 9C

(Page 9C-9)”.

Oil Jet Removal and Installation

Oil Jet (For Cam Chain Tension Adjuster)

Removal

B718H11506018

1) Remove the cam chain tension adjuster. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-24)”.

2) Remove the oil jet (1).

(a)

1

I718H1150043-01

I718H1150041-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply engine oil to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage.

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-9

3) Remove the crankshaft assembly. Refer to “Engine

Bottom Side Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-

53)”.

4) Remove the piston cooling oil jets (1) from the upper crankcase.

1

I718H1150044-01

Oil Jet (For Cylinder Head)

Removal

1) Remove the cylinder. Refer to “Engine Top Side

Disassembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-24)”.

2) Remove the oil jet (1).

I718H1150046-01

5) Remove the oil jet (2) (for transmission) from the lower crankcase.

2

1

I718H1150045-02

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to

“Engine Top Side Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-

28)”.

Oil Jet (For the Piston Cooling and Transmission)

Removal

1) Remove the engine assembly. Refer to “Engine

Assembly Removal in Section 1D (Page 1D-17)”.

2) Separate the crankcases, upper and lower. Refer to

“Engine Bottom Side Disassembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-53)”.

I718H1150047-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Fit new O-ring (1) to each piston cooling oil jet as shown and apply engine oil to them.

!

CAUTION

Use new O-rings to prevent oil pressure leakage.

1

I718H1150048-01

1E-10 Engine Lubrication System:

• Apply a small quantity of THREAD LOCK to the bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Piston cooling oil jet bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

(a)

(a)

I718H1150049-02

Oil Gallery Jet Removal and Installation

B718H11506019

Removal

1) Remove the generator cover. Refer to “Generator

Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-4)”.

2) Remove the oil gallery jet (1).

I718H1150051-02

Oil Jet / Oil Gallery Jet Inspection

B718H11506020

Refer to “Oil Jet Removal and Installation (Page 1E-8)”.

Refer to “Oil Gallery Jet Removal and Installation

(Page 1E-10)”.

Oil Jet

Make sure that the oil jets are not clogged. If they are clogged, clean their oil passage using a wire of the proper size and compressed air.

4

3

2

1

1

I718H1150050-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• Apply THREAD LOCK to the oil gallery jet and tighten it to the specified torque.

NOTE

After tighten the jet, make sure that the jet end is flush with the cover mating surface.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Oil gallery jet (a): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

I718H1150052-01

1. Piston cooling jet

2. Oil jet (#14) (For cylinder head)

3. Oil jet (#18) (For transmission)

4. Oil jet (#8) (For can chain tension adjuster)

Oil Gallery Jet

Inspect the oil gallery jet for clogging. Clean the oil gallery if necessary.

I718H1150053-01

Oil Pump Removal and Installation

B718H11506016

NOTE

Do not drop the each parts into the crankcase.

Removal

1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

2) Remove the clutch. Refer to “Clutch Removal in

Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

3) Remove the spacer (1).

4) Remove the oil pump drive sprocket (2) and chain

(3).

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-11

6) Remove the snap ring (6) and oil pump driven gear

(7).

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

6

7

I718H1150055-01

7) Remove the pin (8) and washer (9).

8) Remove the oil pump (10).

1

2 3

10

9

I718H1150054-01

5) Remove the thrust washer (4) and washer (5).

5

4

8

I718H1150056-01

I718H1150057-01

Installation

Installation is in reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Use a new O-ring to prevent oil leakage.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

1E-12 Engine Lubrication System:

• Install the oil pump.

NOTE

Set the oil pump shaft end “A” to the water pump shaft.

4

3

“A”

I718H1150060-01

• Install the washer (5) and thrust washer (6) onto the countershaft.

NOTE

The chamfer side “B” of thrust washer faces inside.

I718H1150058-01

• Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Oil pump mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

• Install the washer (1) and pin (2).

NOTE

Be careful not to drop the washer (1) and pin

(2) into the crankcase.

“C”

“B”

7

5

(a)

1

2

(a)

I718H1150059-01

• Install the oil pump driven gear (3) and snap ring (4).

!

CAUTION

Never reuse a snap ring.

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

6

I718H1150061-01

• Install the oil pump drive sprocket (7) to the countershaft.

NOTE

Teeth “C” on the sprocket must face the clutch side.

• Pass the chain between the oil pump drive and driven sprockets.

• Install the spacer (8).

8

I718H1150062-01

• Reinstall the clutch. Refer to “Clutch Installation in

Section 5C (Page 5C-14)”.

Engine Lubrication System: 1E-13

Oil Pump Inspection

B718H11506014

Inspect the oil pump in the following procedures:

1) Remove the oil pump. Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and Installation (Page 1E-11)”.

2) Rotate the oil pump by hand and check that it moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, replace the oil pump assembly.

!

CAUTION

Do not attempt to disassemble the oil pump assembly.

The oil pump is available only as an assembly.

I718H1150063-01

3) Install the oil pump. Refer to “Oil Pump Removal and

Installation (Page 1E-11)”.

Specifications

Service Data

Oil Pump

Item

Oil pressure (at 60

°

C, 140

°

F)

Standard

100 – 400 kPa

(1.0 – 4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 14 – 57 psi) at 3 000 r/min

B718H11507001

Limit

Oil

Engine oil type

Item

Engine oil capacity

Specification

SAE 10W-40, API SF/SG or SH/SJ with JASO MA

Change

Filter change

Overhaul

3 000 ml (3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

3 500 ml (3.7/3.1 US/lmp qt)

3 700 ml (3.9/3.3 US/lmp qt)

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Main Oil gallery plug (M16)

Oil gallery plug (M12)

Oil cooler union bolt

Oil pressure switch

Oil pressure switch lead wire bolt

Piston cooling oil jet bolt

Oil gallery jet

Oil pump mounting bolt

N

m

35

15

70

14

1.5

10

22

10

Tightening torque kgf-m

3.5

1.5

7.0

1.4

0.15

1.0

2.2

1.0

lb-ft

25.5

11.0

50.5

10.0

1.1

7.0

16.0

7.0

B718H11507002

Note

) (Page 1E-4)

) (Page 1E-5)

) (Page 1E-7)

) (Page 1E-8)

) (Page 1E-8)

) (Page 1E-10)

) (Page 1E-10)

) (Page 1E-12)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

1E-14 Engine Lubrication System:

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Sealant

Material

Thread lock cement

B718H11508001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1E-5) / ) (Page 1Eequivalent

SUZUKI BOND No.1215 or P/No.: 99000–31110

7) /

)

) (Page 1E-11)

(Page 1E-6) equivalent

SUZUKI Bond 1207B or equivalent P/No.: 99000–31140 ) (Page 1E-8)

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–32110 )

)

(Page 1E-10) /

(Page 1E-10)

Special Tool

09900–06107

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 1E-11) /

) (Page 1E-12)

09915–74521

Oil pressure gauge hose

) (Page 1E-3)

B718H11508002

09915–74540

Oil pressure gauge attachment

) (Page 1E-3)

09915–77331

Meter (for high pressure)

) (Page 1E-3)

Engine Cooling System: 1F-1

Engine

Engine Cooling System

Precautions

Precautions for Engine Cooling System

!

WARNING

B718H11600001

• You can be injured by boiling fluid or steam if you open the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

After the engine cools, wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow pressure to escape and then turn the cap all the way off.

• The engine must be cool before servicing the cooling system.

• Coolant is harmful:

– If it comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush with water.

– If swallowed accidentally, induce vomiting and call physician immediately.

– Keep it away from children.

Precautions for Engine Coolant

Refer to “Engine Coolant Recommendation in Section 0A (Page 0A-5)”.

B718H11600002

General Description

Engine Coolant Description

B718H11601001

!

CAUTION

• Use a high quality ethylene glycol base anti-freeze, mixed with distilled water. Do not mix an alcohol base anti-freeze and different brands of anti-freeze.

• Do not put in more than 60% anti-freeze or less than 50%. (Refer to Fig. 1 and 2.)

At the time of manufacture, the cooling system is filled with a 50:50 mixture of distilled water and ethylene glycol anti-freeze. This 50:50 mixture will provide the optimum corrosion protection and excellent heat protection, and will protect the cooling system from freezing at temperatures above –31

°

C (–24

°

F).

If the vehicle is to be exposed to temperatures below –

31

°

C (–24

°

F), this mixing ratio should be increased up to 55% or 60% according to the figure.

Anti-freeze Proportioning Chart

Anti-freeze density

50%

55%

60%

Freezing point

–31

°

C (–24

°

F)

–40

°

C (–40

°

F)

–55

°

C (–67

°

F)

Fig.1: Engine coolant density-freezing point curve

I310G1160001-01

Fig.2: Engine coolant density-boiling point curve

I310G1160002-01

1F-2 Engine Cooling System:

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Cooling Circuit Diagram

RESERVOIR

TANK

THERMOSTAT CONNEECTOR

THERMOSTAT

B718H11602004

CYLINDER HEAD

CYLINDER

ECT SENSOR

OIL

COOLER

RADIATOR

WATER

PUMP

I718H1160029-03

Water Hose Routing Diagram

Engine Cooling System: 1F-3

B718H11602005

“Q”

“T”

“C”

“S”

“N”

“R”

“V”

“F”

“U”

“W”

“D”

“I”

1

2

“L”

“C”

“D”

“X”

“D”

“M”

“J”

“C”

“C”

“F”

“K”

3

“D”

6

5

4

“O”

6

“P”

“ a ”

90

“A”

90

90

“F”

“L”

“D” /

“E”

7

“C”

7 “B”

“C”

“H”

“E”

“G”

“G”

“E”

“C”

1. Jiggle valve

2. Thermostat

3. Reservoir tank

4. Radiator heat shield

5. Radiator cover molding (GSF1250/A only)

6. Tape (GSF1250/A only)

7: Radiator outlet hose

: Check that there is at least 20 mm (0.8 in) of clearance between the radiator outlet hose and the exhaust pipe.

“A”: Match mark

“B”: Marking position

“C”: White marking

“D”: Yellow marking

“E”: Red marking

“F”: The end of the clamp should face upward.

“G”: The end of the clamp should face forward.

“H”: The end of the clamp should face right side.

“I”: The end of the clamp should face left side.

“O”

“C”

“J”: The clamp screw head should face right backward.

“K”: The clamp screw head should face left backward.

“L”: The clamp screw head should face upward.

“M”: The clamp screw head should face left upward.

“N”: The clamp screw head should face right side.

“O”: The clamp screw head should face left side.

“P”: The clamp screw head should face forward.

“D”

I718H1160074-02

“Q”: Clamp the hose on yellow marking with the tail lamp harness.

“R”: Clamp the hose on white marking.

“S”: Pass through the hose under the wiring harness.

“T”: Pass through the hose under the seat lock plate.

“U”: Be careful not to pinch the hose between seat cushion and fender.

“V”: Pass through the hose between frame and reservoir tank. Be careful for the hose not to be slackened.

“W”: Pass through the hose under the helmet holder.

“X”: Clamp the hose with the fan motor lead wire. Be careful not to insert the coupler to the radiator heat shield hole.

“a”: Clearance

1F-4 Engine Cooling System:

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Engine Cooling Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Engine overheats

Engine over cools

B718H11604001

Possible cause

Not enough engine coolant.

Defective cooling fan relay, or open-orshort circuited.

Correction / Reference Item

Add engine coolant.

Radiator core clogged with dirt or scale.

Clean.

Faulty cooling fan.

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace

Clogged water passage.

Air trapped in the cooling circuit.

Defective water pump.

Use of incorrect engine coolant.

Clean.

Bleed air.

Replace.

Replace.

Defective thermostat.

Defective ECT sensor.

Defective ECM.

Damaged ISC valve.

ISC bad learning.

Defective cooling fan relay, or open-orshort circuited.

Extremely cold weather.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Reset learned value.

Repair or replace

Defective thermostat.

Defective ECT sensor.

Defective ECM

Put on radiator cover.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Repair Instructions

Cooling Circuit Inspection

!

WARNING

B718H11606012

• Do not open the radiator cap when the engine is hot, as you may be injured by escaping hot liquid or vapor.

• When removing the radiator cap tester, put a rag on the filler to prevent the engine coolant from spraying out.

Inspect the cooling circuit in the following procedures:

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the radiator cap (1) and connect the radiator tester (2) to the filler.

3) Pressurize the cooling system with 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/ cm, 17 psi) of pressure, and then check if it holds the pressure for 10 seconds.

!

CAUTION

Do not exceed the radiator cap release pressure, or the radiator cap and subsequently the radiator, can be damaged.

1

I718H1160032-01

I705H1160004-01

4) After finishing the cooling circuit inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Radiator Cap Inspection

B718H11606013

Inspect the radiator cap in the following procedures:

1) Remove the radiator cap. Refer to “Cooling Circuit

Inspection (Page 1F-4)”.

2) Attach the radiator cap (1) to the radiator tester (2) as shown.

Engine Cooling System: 1F-5

Radiator Cleaning

Blow out any foreign matter that is stuck in the radiator fins using compressed air.

!

CAUTION

• Make sure not to bend the fins when using compressed air.

• Always apply compressed air from the engine side of engine. If compressed air is applied from the front side, dirt will be forced into the pores of radiator.

I718H1160033-01

3) Slowly apply pressure to the radiator cap.

If the radiator cap does not hold the pressure for at least 10 seconds, replace it with a new one.

Radiator cap release pressure

93 – 123 kPa (0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm 2 , 13.2 – 17.5 psi)

4) After finishing the radiator cap inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Radiator Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11606015

Radiator Hose

Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-12)”.

Radiator

Inspect the radiator for water leaks. If any defects are found, replace the radiator with a new one.

If the fins are bent or dented, repair them by carefully straightening them with the blade of a small screwdriver.

I718H1160002-01

Radiator / Cooling Fan Motor Removal and

Installation

B718H11606014

Removal

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

3) Disconnect the radiator inlet hose (1).

1

I718H1160028-01

I718H1160001-01

1F-6 Engine Cooling System:

4) Disconnect the cooling fan motor coupler (2), water bypass hose (3) and radiator outlet hose (4).

7) Remove the spacers (7) and mounting bolt.

8) Remove the cooling fan motor from the radiator (8).

3

2

8

4

7

I718H1160034-01

5) Remove the radiator assembly (5) by removing the bolts.

I718H1160037-02

9) Remove the radiator covers (9), left and right.

5

9

9

6) Remove the radiator heat shield (6).

6

“A”

“A”

“A”

“A”: Hooked point

I718H1160035-01

I718H1160073-02

I718H1160038-02

Installation

Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Connect the radiator hoses securely. Refer to “Water

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

• Pour engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

• Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling

System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

Water Hose Inspection

B718H11606031

Inspect the water hoses in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat, right frame cover and fuel tank.

Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in

Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Check the water hoses for crack, damage or engine coolant leakage. If any defect is found, replace the radiator hose with a new one.

3) Any leakage from the connecting section should be corrected by proper tightening. Refer to “Water Hose

Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

I718H1160039-02

Engine Cooling System: 1F-7

Water Hose Removal and Installation

B718H11606016

Removal

1) Drain engine coolant. Refer to “Cooling System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the water hose as shown in the water hose routing diagram. Refer to “Water Hose Routing

Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

Installation

1) Install the water hose as shown in the water hose routing diagram. Refer to “Water Hose Routing

Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

NOTE

Check that there is at least 20 mm of clearance shown as “a” between the radiator outlet hose and the exhaust pipe.

I718H1160040-01

I718H1160041-02

“ a ”

I718H1160063-02

2) Pour engine coolant and bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in

Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

3) Reinstall the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

Radiator Reservoir Tank Inspection

B718H11606018

Inspect the radiator reservoir tank in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat tail cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

I717H1160013-01

4) After finishing the water hose inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

1F-8 Engine Cooling System:

2) Inspect the radiator reservoir tank cooling leaks. If any defects are found, replace the radiator reservoir tank with a new one.

I718H1160065-01

3) Reinstall the remored parts.

Radiator Reservoir Tank Removal and

Installation

B718H11606017

Removal

1) Remove the seat tail cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Remove the reservoir tank bolts.

3) Disconnect the hoses (1) and drain the engine coolant.

4) Remove the reservoir tank (2).

Installation

Install radiator reservoir tank in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply thread lock to the reservoir tank mounting bolts and tighten them.

NOTE

Fit the clamp to bolt (1).

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

• Fill the reservoir tank to the upper level “A”. Refer to

“Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

12)”.

1

“A”

1

2

I718H1160067-01

“A”: Upper level

Cooling Fan Inspection

B718H11606019

Cooling fan operating temperature

Standard

(ON

OFF): Approx. 100

°

C (212

°

F)

(OFF

ON): Approx. 105

°

C (221

°

F)

Inspect the cooling fan in the following procedures:

1) Disconnect the cooling fan motor coupler (1).

1

I718H1160066-01

1

I718H1160047-01

2) Test the cooling fan motor for load current with an ammeter connected as shown in the figure.

If the fan motor does not turn, replace the cooling fan assembly with a new one. Refer to “Radiator /

Cooling Fan Motor Removal and Installation

(Page 1F-5)”.

NOTE

• When making this test, it is not necessary to remove the cooling fan.

• The voltmeter is for making sure that the battery applies 12 V to the motor. With the fan motor with electric motor fan running at full speed, the ammeter should be indicating not more than 5 A.

Engine Cooling System: 1F-9

3) First check the insulation between “A” and “B” terminals with tester. Then apply 12 volts to “C” and

“D” terminals, (+) to “C” and (–) to “D”, and check the continuity between “A” and “B”.

If there is no continuity, replace it with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication set

Continuity test ( )

“A”

“C”

4

1

2

3

2. Fan motor 3. Ammeter

I718H1160048-01

4. Battery

3) Connect the cooling fan motor coupler.

Cooling Fan Relay Inspection

B718H11606021

Inspect the fan relay in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the cooling fan relay (1).

“B”

4) Reinstall the removed parts.

“D”

I718H1160006-03

ECT Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11606022

Refer to “ECT Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 1C (Page 1C-2)”.

ECT Sensor Inspection

B718H11606023

Refer to “ECT Sensor Inspection in Section 1C

(Page 1C-3)”.

Thermostat Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation

B718H11606024

Removal

1) Drain a small amount of engine coolant. Refer to

“Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

12)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the thermostat connector bracket bolts.

4) Disconnect the following parts from the thermostat connector (1).

• Water bypass hose (2)

• Cylinder outlet left hose (3)

• Cylinder outlet right hose (4)

• Radiator inlet hose (5)

• Reservoir tank inlet hose (6)

I718H1160005-01

1F-10 Engine Cooling System:

5) Remove the thermostat connector (1) along with bracket (7).

5

6

7

1

4

8) Remove the thermostat (9).

9

2

3

I718H1160004-02

6) Remove the bracket (7) from the thermostat connector (1).

7

I718H1160050-01

Installation

Install the thermostat in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the thermostat.

NOTE

The jiggle valve “A” of the thermostat faces upside.

“A”

1

7) Remove the connector cap (8).

I718H1160060-01

8

I718H1160049-01

I718H1160007-01

• Tighten the thermostat connector bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Thermostat connector bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

(a)

I718H1160069-01

• Connect the water hoses securely. Refer to “Water

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

• Pour engine coolant and bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling System Inspection in Section

0B (Page 0B-12)”.

Thermostat Inspection

B718H11606025

Inspect the thermostat in the following procedures:

1) Remove the thermostat. Refer to “Thermostat

Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation

(Page 1F-9)”.

2) Inspect the thermostat pellet for signs of cracking.

Engine Cooling System: 1F-11

5) Heat the water by placing the beaker on a stove and observe the rising temperature on a thermometer

(2).

I718H1160051-01

3) Test the thermostat at the bench for control action.

!

CAUTION

• Do not contact the thermostat (1) and the column thermometer (2) with a pan.

• As the thermostat operating response to water temperature change is gradual, do not raise water temperature too quickly.

• The thermostat with its valve open even slightly under normal temperature must be replaced.

4) Immerse the thermostat (1) in the water contained in a beaker and note that the immersed thermostat is in suspension.

I705H1160030-03

“A”: String “B”: Water

6) Read the thermometer just when opening the thermostat. If this reading, which is the temperature level at which the thermostat valve begins to open, is out of the standard value, replace the thermostat with a new one.

Thermostat valve opening temperature

Standard: Approx. 82

°

C (180

°

F)

7) Keep on heating the water to raise its temperature.

8) Just when the water temperature reaches specified value, the thermostat valve should have been lifted by at least 8 mm (0.31 in). A thermostat failing to satisfy either of the two requirements (start-to-open temperature and valve lift) must be replaced.

Thermostat valve lift “a”

Standard: 8 mm and over at 95

°

C (0.31 in and over at 203

°

F)

I705H1160031-04

9) Install the thermostat. Refer to “Thermostat

Connector / Thermostat Removal and Installation

(Page 1F-9)”.

1F-12 Engine Cooling System:

Water pump Components

B718H11606026

2

5

4

3

(b)

(c)

(a)

2

1

1. Water pump case

2. O-ring

3. Impeller

Water Pump Construction

4. Mechanical seal

5. Oil seal

: 8 N

⋅ m (0.8 kgf-n, 6.0 Ib-ft)

: 6 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-n, 4.5 Ib-ft)

: 13 N

⋅ m (1.3 kgf-n, 9.5 Ib-ft)

: Apply grease.

1

2

3

5

4

I718H1160062-01

: Apply engine coolant.

: Do not reuse.

B718H11606027

(a)

1. Impeller

2. Mechanical seal

3. Oil seal

4. Oil pump drive chain

5. Oil pump

6. Oil pump driven sprocket

6

: 8 N

⋅ m (0.8 kgf-n, 6.0 Ib-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply engine coolant.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1160052-02

Water Pump Removal and Installation

B718H11606028

Removal

NOTE

Before draining engine oil and engine coolant, inspect engine oil and coolant leakage between the water pump and crankcase. If engine oil is leaking, visually inspect the oil seal and O-ring. If engine coolant is leaking, visually inspect the mechanical seal and seal washer. Refer to

“Water Pump Related Parts Inspection

(Page 1F-17)”.

1) Drain engine oil and coolant. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)” and “Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-12)”.

2) Remove the engine sprocket covers, outer and inner. Refer to “Engine Sprocket Removal and

Installation in Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

3) Disconnect the water pump inlet hose (1).

Engine Cooling System: 1F-13

Installation

Install the water pump in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply grease to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with the a new one.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

• Install the water pump assembly with the slot on the pump shaft end “A” securely engaged with the flat “B” on the oil pump shaft.

“B”

“A”

1

I718H1160053-01

• Tighten the water pump mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Water pump mounting bolt (a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1160011-01

4) Remove the water pump (2).

(a)

2

I718H1160008-02

I718H1160071-01

• Connect the water hoses securely. Refer to “Water

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 1F-3)”.

• Pour engine oil and coolant. Refer to “Engine Oil and

Filter Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)” and

“Cooling System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

12)”.

• Bleed air from the cooling circuit. Refer to “Cooling

System Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-12)”.

1F-14 Engine Cooling System:

Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11606029

Refer to “Water Pump Removal and Installation

(Page 1F-13)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the air vent bolt (1) if necessary.

2) Remove the water pump case (2).

1

6) Remove the impeller shaft (6) and washer (7).

6

7

2

I718H1160054-01

3) Remove the O-ring (3).

4) Remove the impeller securing bolt by holding the impeller with a water pump pliers.

I718H1160014-01

7) Remove the mechanical seal with the special tool.

NOTE

If there is no abnormal condition, the mechanical seal removal is not necessary.

Special tool

(A): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)

(A)

3

I718H1160012-01

5) Remove the mechanical seal ring (4) and rubber seal (5) from the impeller (3).

I718H1160055-01

8) Remove the oil seal.

NOTE

If there is no abnormal condition, the oil seal removal is not necessary.

5

3

4

I718H1160013-01

I718H1160016-01

Assembly

1) Install the oil seal with the special tool.

!

CAUTION

Replace the oil seal with a new one.

NOTE

The stamped mark on the oil seal should face mechanical seal side.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

Engine Cooling System: 1F-15

3) Install a new mechanical seal using a suitable size socket wrench.

!

CAUTION

Replace the mechanical seal with a new one.

NOTE

On the new mechanical seal, the sealer “A” has been applied.

(A)

“A”

I718H1160058-01

I718H1160056-01

2) Apply a small quantity of the SUPER GREASE to the oil seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1160057-01

I718H1160059-01

4) Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the impeller shaft.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

5) Install the impeller shaft and washer (1) to the water pump body.

1

I718H1160017-01

1F-16 Engine Cooling System:

6) Install the rubber seal (2) into the impeller.

7) After wiping off the oily or greasy matter from the mechanical seal ring (3), install it into the impeller.

NOTE

The paint marked side “B” of mechanical seal ring faces the rubber seal.

10) Install a new O-ring (7) and apply engine coolant to it.

!

CAUTION

Use a new O-ring to prevent engine coolant leakage.

7

2

“B”

3

I718H1160018-01

8) Install the washer (4) and seal washer (5) onto the impeller securing bolt.

NOTE

The metal side “C” of seal washer and the curved side “D” of washer face the impeller securing bolt head.

5

4

I718H1160024-01

11) Fit the water pump case and tighten the water pump case screws to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Water pump case screw (b): 6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m,

4.5 lb-ft)

12) Tighten the water pump air vent bolt to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket washer to prevent engine coolant leakage.

Tightening torque

Water pump air vent bolt (c): 13 N·m (1.3 kgf-m,

9.5 lb-ft)

“C”

“D”

I718H1160019-02

9) Install the impeller (6) and tighten the impeller securing bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Impeller securing bolt (a): 8 N·m (0.8 kgf-m, 6.0 lb-ft)

(b)

(c)

(b)

I718H1160025-01

6

(a)

I718H1160021-02

Water Pump Related Parts Inspection

B718H11606030

Refer to “Water Pump Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 1F-14)”.

Mechanical Seal

Visually inspect the mechanical seal for damage, with particular attention given to the sealing face.

Replace the mechanical seal that shows indications of leakage.

Engine Cooling System: 1F-17

Seal Washer

Visually inspect the seal washer for damage, with particular attention given to the sealing face.

Replace the seal washer that shows indications of leakage.

I718H1160010-01

Oil Seal

Visually inspect the oil seal for damage, with particular attention given to the lip.

Replace the oil seal that shows indications of leakage.

I718H1160026-01

Impeller / Shaft

Visually inspect the impeller and its shaft for damage.

Replace the impeller or shaft if necessary.

I718H1160009-01

I718H1160015-01

Impeller Shaft Journal

Visually inspect the journal for damage or scratch.

Replace the water pump body if necessary.

I718H1160027-01

1F-18 Engine Cooling System:

Specifications

Service Data

Thermostat + Radiator + Fan + Coolant

Item

Thermostat valve opening temperature

Thermostat valve lift

ECT sensor resistance

Radiator cap valve opening pressure

Cooling fan operating temperature

Engine coolant type

Engine coolant

Specification

Approx. 82

°

C (180

°

F)

20

°

C

8 mm (0.31 in) and over at 95

°

C (203

°

F)

Approx. 2.45 k

(68

°

F)

50

°

C

(122

°

F)

80

°

C

(176

°

F)

110

°

C

(230

°

F)

Approx. 0.811 k

Approx. 0.318 k

Approx. 0.142 k

93 – 123 kPa

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

(0.93 – 1.23 kgf/cm 2 , 13.2 – 17.5 psi)

Approx. 105

°

C (221

°

F)

Approx. 100

°

C (212

°

F)

Use an antifreeze/coolant compatible with aluminum radiator, mixed with distilled water only, at the ratio of 50:50.

Reserve tank side

Approx. 250 ml

(0.3/0.2 US/lmp qt)

Engine side

Approx. 3 000 ml

(3.2/2.6 US/lmp qt)

B718H11607001

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Thermostat connector bolt

Water pump mounting bolt

Impeller securing bolt

Water pump case screw

Water pump air vent bolt

N

m

10

10

8

6

13

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.0

1.0

0.8

0.6

1.3

lb-ft

7.0

7.0

6.0

4.5

9.5

B718H11607002

Note

) (Page 1F-10)

) (Page 1F-13)

) (Page 1F-16)

) (Page 1F-16)

) (Page 1F-16)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Water pump Components (Page 1F-12)”

“Water Pump Construction (Page 1F-12)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Note

Engine Cooling System: 1F-19

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

Thread lock cement

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1F-13) / equivalent ) (Page 1F-15) /

) (Page 1F-15)

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–32110 ) (Page 1F-8)

B718H11608001

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Water pump Components (Page 1F-12)”

“Water Pump Construction (Page 1F-12)”

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1F-9)

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

) (Page 1F-15)

B718H11608002

09921–20240

Bearing remover set

) (Page 1F-14)

1G-1 Fuel System:

Engine

Fuel System

Precautions

Precautions for Fuel System

!

WARNING

B718H11700001

• Keep away from fire or spark.

• During disassembling, use care to minimize spillage of gasoline.

• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.

• Work in a well-ventilated area.

!

CAUTION

• To prevent the fuel system (fuel tank, fuel hose, etc.) from contamination with foreign particles, blind all openings.

• After removing the throttle body, tape the cylinder intake section to prevent foreign particles from entering.

Fuel System: 1G-2

General Description

Fuel System Description

B718H11701002

Fuel System

The fuel delivery system consists of the fuel tank (1), fuel pump (2), fuel filter (3), fuel feed hose (4), fuel delivery pipe

(5) (including fuel injectors) and fuel pressure regulator (6). There is no fuel return hose. The fuel in the fuel tank (1) is pumped up by the fuel pump (2) and pressurized fuel flows into the injector (8) installed in the fuel delivery pipe (5).

Fuel pressure is regulated by the fuel pressure regulator (6). As the fuel pressure applied to the fuel injector (8) (the fuel pressure in the fuel delivery pipe) is always kept at absolute fuel pressure of 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2 , 43 psi), the fuel is injected into the throttle body in conic dispersion when the injector (8) opens according to the injection signal from the ECM.

The fuel relieved by the fuel pressure regulator (6) flows back to the fuel tank (1).

1

6

7

2

1. Fuel tank

2. Fuel pump

3. Fuel mesh filter

4. Fuel feed hose

4

8

5. Fuel delivery pipe

6. Fuel pressure regulator

7. Fuel filter

8. Fuel injector

3

5

“A”

“B”

“C”

“A”: Before-pressurized fuel

“B”: Pressurized fuel

“C”: Relieved fuel

I718H1170001-02

1G-3 Fuel System:

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Fuel Tank Drain Hose and Breather Hose Routing Diagram

B718H11702002

1

2

Inside

8

1 2

4

“ a ”

“ b ”

“C”

“A”

“B”

7

6

“D”

3

5

1

1. Fuel tank drain hose

2. Fuel tank breather hose No.1

3. Fuel tank breather hose No.2

4. Fuel tank breather hose No.3

5. Fuel tank drain hose No.2

6. Frame

7. Drain hose guide

I718H1170040-02

8. Clamp

: Clamp end should face inside. Tip of clamp should face downward.

“A”: Be careful not to bind the fuel tank drain hose and fuel tank breather hose with the other hoses and wire harness.

“B”: Pass the breather hose and drain hose through outside the reservoir tank inlet hose.

“C”: Be careful for the hose not to be slackened.

“D”: Pass the breather hose and drain hose through outside the brake pipe.

Pass the breather hose and drain hose through ahead of connector.

“a”: 45

° ±

15

°

“b”: 30

±

10 mm (1.2

±

0.4 in)

Fuel System: 1G-4

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Fuel System Diagnosis

B718H11704001

Condition

Engine will not start or is hard to start (No fuel reaching the intake manifold)

Engine will not start or is hard to start (Incorrect fuel/air mixture)

Engine stalls often

(Incorrect fuel/air mixture)

Engine stalls often (Fuel injector improperly operating)

Engine runs poorly in high speed range

(Defective control circuit or sensor)

Engine lacks power

(Defective control circuit or sensor)

Possible cause

Clogged fuel filter or fuel hose.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Defective fuel injectors.

Defective fuel pump relay.

Defective ECM.

Open-circuited wiring connections.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective IAP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Defective ECT sensor.

Defective IAT sensors.

Dirty throttle body.

Defective ISC valve.

Defective IAP sensor or circuit.

Clogged fuel filter.

Defective fuel pump.

Defective fuel pressure regulator.

Damaged or cracked vacuum hose.

Defective ECT sensor.

Correction / Reference Item

Clean or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Check and repair.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Clean.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Clean or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Defective thermostat.

Defective IAT sensor.

Defective ISC valve.

Defective fuel injectors.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

No injection signal from ECM.

Open or short circuited wiring

Repair or replace.

Repair or replace.

connection.

Defective battery or low battery voltage.

Replace or recharge.

Low fuel pressure.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective IAT sensor.

Defective IAP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Defective GP switch.

Defective CKP sensor.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Low fuel pressure.

Defective TP sensor.

Defective IAT sensor.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective GP switch.

Defective IAP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Defective STP sensor or STVA.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

1G-5 Fuel System:

Fuel Pressure Inspection

!

WARNING

(B)

(A)

Repair Instructions

B718H11706042

• Keep away from fire or spark.

• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.

• Work in a well-ventilated area.

Inspect the fuel pressure in the following procedures:

1) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Place a rag under the fuel feed hose and disconnect fuel feed hose (1) from the fuel pump.

1

I718H1170017-04

3) Install the special tools between the fuel pump and fuel delivery pipe.

Special tool

(A): 09940–40211 (Fuel pressure gauge adapter)

(B): 09940–40220 (Fuel pressure gauge hose attachment)

(C): 09915–77331 (Meter (for high pressure))

(D): 09915–74521 (Oil pressure gauge hose)

4) Turn the ignition ON and check for fuel pressure.

Fuel pressure

Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2 , 43.5 psi)

If the fuel pressure is lower than the specification, check for the followings:

• Fuel hose leakage

• Clogged fuel filter

• Pressure regulator

• Fuel pump

If the fuel pressure is higher than the specification, check for the followings:

• Fuel pump

• Pressure regulator

5) Remove the special tools.

!

WARNING

Before removing the special tools, turn the ignition switch OFF and release the fuel pressure slowly.

6) Reinstall the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation (Page 1G-9)”.

Fuel Pump Inspection

B718H11706027

Turn the ignition switch ON and check that the fuel pump operates for a few seconds.

If the fuel pump motor does not make operating sound, inspect the fuel pump circuit connections or inspect the fuel pump relay and TO sensor. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Relay Inspection (Page 1G-7)” and “DTC “C23” (P1651-

H/L): TO Sensor Circuit Malfunction in Section 1A

(Page 1A-67)”.

If the fuel pump relay, TO sensor and fuel pump circuit connections are OK, the fuel pump may be faulty, replace the fuel pump with a new one. Refer to “Fuel

Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and

Installation (Page 1G-11)”.

(C)

(D)

I718H1170018-01

Fuel Discharge Amount Inspection

!

WARNING

B718H11706028

• Keep away from fire or spark.

• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.

• Work in a well-ventilated area.

Inspect the fuel discharge amount in the following procedures:

1) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Place a rag under the fuel feed hose (1) from the fuel pump.

1

I718H1170017-04

3) Connect a proper fuel hose (2) to the fuel pump.

4) Place the measuring cylinder and insert the fuel hose end into the measuring cylinder.

Fuel System: 1G-6

5) Disconnect the fuel pump lead wire coupler (3).

3

I718H1170043-01

6) Connect a proper lead wire into the fuel pump lead wire coupler (fuel pump side) and apply 12 V to the fuel pump (between (+) Y/R wire and (–) B/W wire) for 10 seconds and measure the amount of fuel discharged.

If the discharge amount is out of the specification, the probable cause may be failure of the fuel pump or clogged fuel filter.

NOTE

The battery must be in fully charged condition.

Fuel discharge amount

166 ml (5.6/5.8 US/lmp oz) and more/10 seconds

2

I718H1170014-01

I718H1170016-02

7) After finishing the fuel discharge inspection, reinstall the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and

Installation (Page 1G-9)”.

1G-7 Fuel System:

Fuel Pump Relay Inspection

B718H11706029

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A

(Page 0A-8)”.

Inspect the fuel pump relay in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuel pump relay (1).

1

Fuel Hose Inspection

B718H11706030

Refer to “Fuel Line Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

10)”.

Fuel Level Gauge Inspection

B718H11706031

Refer to “Fuel Level Gauge Inspection in Section 9C

(Page 9C-8)”.

Fuel Level Indicator Inspection

B718H11706032

Refer to “Fuel Level Indicator Inspection in Section 9C

(Page 9C-6)”.

Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor)

Inspection

B718H11706040

Refer to “Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor)

Inspection in Section 9C (Page 9C-7)”.

I718H1170041-01

3) First, check for insulation with the tester between terminals “A” and “B”. Next, check for continuity between “A” and “B” with 12 V voltage applied, positive (+) to terminal “C” and negative (–) to terminal “D”. If continuity does not exist, replace the relay with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“A”

“C”

“B”

“D”

I718H1170013-01

Fuel Tank Construction

3

“A”

2

Fuel System: 1G-8

B718H11706001

1

1. Fuel tank rear cushion

: Be careful not to mistake the assembling position and direction.

2. EVAP pipe cushion (E-33 only)

: Matched with cushion seat surface.

I718H1170020-03

3. Rear bracket cushion

: Be careful not to mistake the assembling position and direction.

“A”: Apply adhesive agent to the cushion rubber.

1G-9 Fuel System:

Fuel Tank Removal and Installation

B718H11706002

Removal

!

WARNING

• Keep away from fire or spark.

• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.

• Work in a well-ventilated area.

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank mounting bolts.

4) Disconnect the fuel tank breather hose (2) and drain hose (3).

5) Disconnect the fuel pump lead wire coupler (4).

6) Remove the fuel tank.

3

2

4

I718H1170042-01

Installation

Install the fuel tank in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to bend the hoses. Refer to

“Fuel Tank Drain Hose and Breather Hose

Routing Diagram (Page 1G-3)”.

• Connect the fuel feed hose (1) until it locks securely (a click is heard).

I718H1170021-01

3) Place a rag under the fuel feed hose and disconnect the fuel feed hose (1).

!

CAUTION

When removing the fuel tank, do not leave the fuel feed hose (1) on the fuel pump side.

1

I718H1170017-04

1

I718H1170017-04

Fuel Pump Components

5

7

4

7

Fuel System: 1G-10

B718H11706033

7

3

(a)

6

FW

D

FWD

1. Vessel

2. Fuel mesh filter

3. Fuel pump

4. Fuel pressure regulator assembly

7

5. Thermistor

6. Fuel level gauge

7. O-ring

: Apply engine oil.

2

1

: Apply grease.

: Do not reuse.

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1170002-03

1G-11 Fuel System:

Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge

Removal and Installation

B718H11706034

Removal

!

WARNING

• Spilled gasoline should be wiped off immediately.

• Keep away from fire or spark.

• Work in a well-ventilated area.

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Remove the fuel pump mounting bolts diagonally.

4) Remove the fuel level gauge (3) while pushing the pawl end “A”.

!

CAUTION

Do not pull the lead wire when removing the fuel gauge.

“A”

3

I718H1170023-04

3) Remove the fuel pump assembly (1) and disconnect the fuel level gauge lead wire coupler (2).

I718H1170026-02

Installation

Install the fuel pump assembly in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention the following points:

• Install the fuel level gauge (1) into the fuel tank.

NOTE

Push the lock position “A” fully until the clicking sound heard.

1

1

“A”

2

I718H1170024-02

I718H1170025-02

• Apply grease to the O-ring (2).

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Fuel System: 1G-12

Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11706041

Refer to “Fuel Pump Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge

Removal and Installation (Page 1G-11)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the vessel (1).

1

2

I718H1170027-02

• When installing the fuel pump assembly, first tighten all the fuel pump mounting bolts lightly and then to the specified torque as shown.

NOTE

Install the clamp (3) so that its base is located in parallel with the line “B” on the fuel pump.

Tightening torque

Fuel pump mounting bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

2) Remove the fuel mesh filter (2).

2

I718H1170029-01

I718H1170030-01

3) Disconnect the lead wire (BI) (3) and remove the connecting screw (4).

4) Remove the fuel pump assembly (5).

3

“B”

5

3

4

I718H1170031-02

I718H1170028-02

1G-13 Fuel System:

5) Remove the cup cover (6) and fuel pump (7) from the reservoir cup.

8) Disconnect the lead wire (BI) (11) and remove the fuel level gauge coupler (12).

7

6

11

I718H1170032-02

6) Remove the fuel pressure regulator assembly (8).

12

I718H1170036-03

9) Disconnect the lead wire (W) (13) and remove the thermistor (14).

13

8

14

I718H1170033-02

7) Remove the joint (9).

!

CAUTION

Never remove the fuel pressure regulator (10) from the holder.

10

9

I718H1170035-02

Assembly

Refer to “Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection and Cleaning

(Page 1G-14)”.

Assemble the fuel tank pump in the reverse order of the disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

• To prevent fuel leakage, each O-ring must be replaced with a new one.

• Apply engine oil lightly to each of the Orings.

I718H1170034-02

I718H1170038-02

Fuel System: 1G-14

2) If the fuel mesh filter is clogged with foreign particles, it hinders smooth gasoline flow resulting in loss of engine power. Such a filter should be cleaned by blowing with compressed air.

NOTE

When the fuel mesh filter is dirtied excessively, replace the fuel filter cartridge with a new one.

I718H1170039-01

• Connect all wiring couplers securely so as not to cause contact failure.

3

1

4

2

5

I718H1170037-01

1. Fuel pump (+) lead wire (BI)

2. Fuel level thermistor lead wire (W)

3. Fuel level gauge (+) lead wire (BI)

4. Fuel pump (–) lead wire (B)

5. Fuel level gauge (–) lead wire (B)

Fuel Mesh Filter Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11706036

Inspect the fuel mesh filter in the following procedures:

1) Remove the fuel mesh filter. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 1G-12)”.

I718H1170003-01

3) After finishing the fuel mesh filter inspection, reinstall the fuel mesh filter. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 1G-12)”.

Fuel Injector / Fuel Delivery Pipe / T-joint

Removal and Installation

B718H11706038

Refer to “Throttle Body Disassembly and Assembly in

Section 1D (Page 1D-10)”.

Fuel Injector Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11706039

Inspect the fuel injector in the following procedures:

1) Remove the fuel injector. Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-

10)”.

2) Check the fuel injector filter for evidence of dirt and contamination. If present, clean and check for presence of dirt in the fuel lines and fuel tank.

I718H1170012-01

3) Install the fuel injector. Refer to “Throttle Body

Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-

10)”.

1G-15 Fuel System:

Specifications

Service Data

Injector + Fuel Pump + Fuel Pressure Regulator

Item

Injector resistance

Fuel pump discharge amount

Fuel pressure regulator operating set pressure

Specification

11 – 13

at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

166 ml (5.6/5.8 US/lmp oz) and more/10 sec.

Approx. 300 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2 , 43 psi)

Fuel

Fuel type

Item

Fuel tank capacity

Specification

Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane or 91 octane (R/2 + M/2) or higher rated by the research method.

Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.

Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane or higher. An unleaded gasoline type is recommended.

Including reserve

18.5 L (4.9/4.1 US/lmp gal)

19 L (5.0/4.2 US/lmp gal)

B718H11707001

Note

Note

E-03, 28, 33

Others

E-33

Others

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Fuel pump mounting bolt

N

m

10

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.0

lb-ft

7.0

)

B718H11707002

Note

(Page 1G-12)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Fuel Pump Components (Page 1G-10)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Fuel System: 1G-16

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1G-12) equivalent

B718H11708001

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Fuel Pump Components (Page 1G-10)”

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1G-7)

09915–74521

Oil pressure gauge hose

) (Page 1G-5)

B718H11708002

09915–77331

Meter (for high pressure)

) (Page 1G-5)

09940–40220

Fuel pressure gauge hose attachment

) (Page 1G-5)

09940–40211

Fuel pressure gauge adapter

) (Page 1G-5)

1H-1 Ignition System:

Engine

Ignition System

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Ignition System Diagram

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

Engine stop switch

CKP sensor

ECM

#3

#4

#1

#2

Side-stand relay

Fuse

Ignition switch

Fuse

Battery

B718H11802001

TP sensor

ECT sensor

GP switch

Ignition System Components Location

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

I718H1180001-02

B718H11802002

Ignition System: 1H-2

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Ignition System Symptom Diagnosis

Condition Possible cause

Spark plug not sparking

Damaged spark plug.

Fouled spark plugs.

Wet spark plugs.

Defective ignition coil/plug caps.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Open-circuited wiring connections.

Engine stalls easily. (No spark)

Spark plug is wet or quickly becomes fouled with carbon.

Fouled spark plugs.

Defective CKP sensor.

Defective ECM.

Excessively rich air/fuel mixture.

Excessively high idling speed.

Incorrect gasoline.

Dirty air cleaner element.

Incorrect spark plug (Cold type).

Spark plug quickly becomes fouled with oil or carbon.

Spark plug electrodes overheat or burn.

Worn piston rings.

Worn pistons.

Worn cylinders.

Excessive valve-stem to valve-guide clearance.

Worn valve stem oil seals.

Incorrect spark plug (Hot type).

Overheated engine.

Loose spark plugs.

Excessively lean air/fuel mixture.

B718H11804001

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Clean or replace.

Clean and dry or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Clean or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Inspect FI system.

Inspect FI system.

Change.

Clean or replace.

Change to hot type spark plug.

Replace.

Replace.

Rebore or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Change to cold type spark plug.

Tune-up.

Tighten.

Inspect FI system.

1H-3 Ignition System:

No Spark or Poor Spark

Troubleshooting

B718H11804002

NOTE

Check that the transmission is in neutral and the engine stop switch is in the “RUN” position. Grasp the clutch lever. Check that the fuse is not blown and the battery is fully-charged before diagnosing.

Step Action

1 Check the ignition system couplers for poor connections.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Poor connection of couplers.

Is there connection in the ignition system couplers?

2 Measure the battery voltage between input lead wires at the

ECM with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. (E02, 19:

O/G and B/W, E03, 24, 28, 33: O/W and B/W)

Go to Step 3.

3

Is the voltage OK?

Measure the ignition coil primary peak voltage. Refer to

“Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Inspection (Page 1H-5)”.

Go to step 4.

• Faulty ignition switch.

• Faulty turn signal/ side-stand relay.

• Faulty engine stop switch.

• Broken wire harness or poor connection of related circuit couplers.

Go to step 5.

NOTE

This inspection method is applicable only with the multi-circuit tester and the peak volt adaptor.

Is the peak voltage OK?

4 Inspect the spark plugs. Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and

Cleaning in Section 0B (Page 0B-4)”.

Go to Step 5.

Faulty spark plug(-s).

Is the spark plug(-s) OK?

5 Inspect the ignition coil/plug cap(-s). Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap Inspection (Page 1H-5)”.

6

Is the ignition coil/plug cap(-s) OK?

Measure the CKP sensor peak voltage and its resistance.

Refer to “CKP Sensor Inspection (Page 1H-7)”.

NOTE

The CKP sensor peak voltage inspection is applicable only with the multi-circuit tester and peak volt adaptor.

Go to step 6.

• Faulty ECM.

• Open or short circuit in wire harness.

• Poor connection of ignition couplers.

• Faulty ignition coil/ plug cap(-s).

• Poor connection of the ignition coil/plug cap(-s).

• Faulty CKP sensor.

• Metal particles or foreign material being stuck on the CKP sensor and rotor tip.

Are the peak voltage and resistance OK?

Ignition System: 1H-4

Repair Instructions

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation

B718H11806014

Removal

!

WARNING

The hot engine can burn you.

Wait until the engine is cool enough to touch.

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the frame head cover. (GSF1250/A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

4) Disconnect all lead wire couplers (1) from ignition coil/plug caps.

!

CAUTION

Disconnect the lead wire coupler before removing the ignition coil/plug cap to avoid lead wire coupler damage.

5) Remove the ignition coils/plug caps (2).

!

CAUTION

• Do not pry up the ignition coil/plug cap with a screw driver or a bar to avoid its damage.

• Be careful not to drop the ignition coil/plug cap to prevent short/open circuit.

6) Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug wrench.

Special tool

(A): 09930–10121 (Spark plug wrench set)

(A)

I718H1180010-02

Installation

Install the spark plugs in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Screw the spark plugs into the cylinder head with fingers, and then tighten them to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

Do not cross thread or over tighten the spark plug, or such an operation will damage the aluminum threads of the cylinder head.

Special tool

(A): 09930–10121 (Spark plug wrench set)

Tightening torque

Spark plug: 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)

2

(A)

1

I718H1180009-01

I718H1180011-02

1H-5 Ignition System:

• Install the ignition coil/plug caps and connect their lead wire couplers.

!

CAUTION

Do not hit the ignition coil/plug cap with a plastic hammer when installing it.

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Inspection

B718H11806004

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A

(Page 0A-8)”.

Ignition Coil Primary Peak Voltage

1) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

2) Disconnect all ignition coil/plug cap and PAIR control solenoid valve coupler (1). Refer to “Ignition Coil /

Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and Installation

(Page 1H-4)”.

1

INCORRECT

I718H1180012-01

I718H1180013-01

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning

B718H11806003

Refer to “Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning in Section

0B (Page 0B-4)”.

I718H1180014-01

3) Connect new spark plug to each ignition coil/spark plug cap.

4) Connect all the ignition coil/plug cap lead wire couplers to the ignition coil/plug caps respectively, and ground them on the cylinder head.

NOTE

Be sure that all the spark plugs are connected properly and the battery used is in fully-charged condition.

I718H1180015-01

5) Insert the needle pointed probe to the lead wire coupler.

NOTE

Use the special tool, to prevent the rubber of the water proof coupler from damage.

6) Connect the multi-circuit tester with the peak voltage adaptor as follows.

!

CAUTION

Before using the multi-circuit tester and peak voltage adaptor, refer to the appropriate instruction manual.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication: Voltage ( )

Ignition coil/Plug cap #1

Ignition coil/Plug cap #2

Ignition coil/Plug cap #3

Ignition coil/Plug cap #4

((+) Probe) ((–) Probe)

Green wire terminal

Ground

W/BI wire terminal

Ground

Black wire terminal

Yellow wire terminal

Ground

Ground

Ignition System: 1H-6

7) Measure the ignition coil primary peak voltage in the following procedures.

!

WARNING

Do not touch the tester probes and spark plugs to prevent an electric shock while testing.

a) Shift the transmission into neutral, turn the ignition switch ON and grasp the clutch lever.

b) Press the starter button and allow the engine to crank for a few seconds, and then measure the ignition coil primary peak voltage.

8) Repeat the b) procedure several times and measure the highest peak voltage.

If the voltage is lower than standard range, inspect the ignition coil/plug cap and the CKP sensor.

Ignition coil primary peak voltage

80 V and more

9) After measuring the ignition coil primary peak voltage, reinstall the removed parts.

(A)

(B)

I718H1180003-02

3

“B”

2

2. ECM

3. Peak voltage adaptor

4. New spark plug

5. Ignition coil

“A”

“C”

5

4

I718H1180004-02

“A”: (+) probe

“B”: (–) probe

“C”: To engine stop switch

1H-7 Ignition System:

Ignition Coil / Plug Cap Resistance

1) Remove the ignition coil/plug caps. Refer to “Ignition

Coil / Plug Cap and Spark Plug Removal and

Installation (Page 1H-4)”.

2) Measure the ignition coil/plug cap for resistance in both primary and secondary coils. If the resistance is not within the standard range, replace the ignition coil/plug cap with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Ignition coil resistance

Primary: 1.1 – 1.9

((+) terminal – (–) terminal)

Secondary: 10.8 – 16.2 k

(Spark plug cap – (–) terminal)

(A)

CKP Sensor Inspection

B718H11806008

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A

(Page 0A-8)”.

CKP Sensor Peak Voltage

1) Remove the CKP sensor coupler (1).

NOTE

Be sure that all of the couplers are connected properly and the battery is fully-charged.

1

(

ޓ

) (

ޓ

)

(

ޓ

)

I718H1180005-01

I718H1180026-01

2) Connect the multi-circuit tester with the peak volt adaptor as follows.

!

CAUTION

Before using the multi-circuit tester and peak voltage adaptor, refer to the appropriate instruction manual.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication: Voltage ( )

CKP sensor

(+) Probe

BI/Y

(–) Probe

G

(

ޓ

)

I718H1180006-01

3) After measuring the ignition coil/plug cap resistance, reinstall the removed parts.

BI/Y

G

2

3

4

2. CKP sensor coupler

3. CKP sensor

(A)

I718H1180007-02

4. Peak voltage adaptor

3) Measure the CKP sensor peak voltage in the following procedure.

a) Shift the transmission into neutral, turn the ignition switch ON and grasp the clutch lever.

b) Press the starter button and allow the engine to crank for a few seconds, and then measure the

CKP sensor peak voltage.

4) Repeat the b) procedure several times and measure the highest CKP sensor peak voltage.

CKP sensor peak voltage

2.0 V and more (BI/Y – Green)

5) If the peak voltage is within the specification, check the continuity between the CKP sensor coupler and

ECM coupler.

!

CAUTION

Normally, use the needle pointed probe to the backside of the lead wire coupler to prevent the terminal bend and terminal alignment.

6) After measuring the CKP sensor peak voltage, connect the CKP sensor coupler.

CKP Sensor Resistance

1) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (1).

1

I718H1180026-01

Ignition System: 1H-8

2) Measure the resistance between the lead wires and ground. If the resistance is not within the standard range, replace the CKP sensor with a new one.

Refer to “CKP Sensor Removal and Installation

(Page 1H-8)”.

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

CKP sensor resistance

90 – 150

(Bl/Y – Green)

∞ Ω

(Bl/Y – Ground)

3

2

2. CKP sensor coupler 3. CKP sensor

I718H1180008-02

3) After measuring the CKP sensor resistance, connect the CKP sensor coupler.

CKP Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H11806009

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in Section

1J (Page 1J-4)”.

Engine Stop Switch Inspection

B718H11806010

Inspect the engine stop switch in the following procedures:

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

I718H1180017-01

1H-9 Ignition System:

4) Inspect the engine stop switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the right handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to

“Handlebar Removal and Installation in Section 6B

(Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Color

Position

OFF

( )

B/BI B/R

RUN

( )

I649G1180022-02

5) After finishing the engine stop switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Ignition Switch Inspection

B718H11806011

Refer to “Ignition Switch Inspection in Section 9C

(Page 9C-10)”.

Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

B718H11806015

Removal

1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.

2) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the ignition switch coupler (1) and clamp.

5) Remove the combination meter bracket bolts

(GSF1250/A) or cable guides (3) (GSF1250S/SA).

6) Dismount the handlebars by removing the handlebar holder set nuts.

NOTE

Place a rag on the fuel tank to prevent the fuel tank scratched.

3

I718H1180020-03

7) Loosen the front fork upper clamp bolts (4).

8) Remove the steering stem head nut and washer.

9) Remove the steering stem upper bracket (5) along with the ignition switch (6).

5

6

4

1

I718H1180018-01

4) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (GSF1250/S) or brake hose joint bolt (2) (GSF1250A/SA).

4

I718H1180021-03

10) Using a center punch, remove the ignition switch mounting bolts.

11) Remove the ignition switch (6) from the upper bracket.

6

I718H1180022-01

2

I718H1180019-01

Installation

Install the ignition switch in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the ignition switch and new bolts.

• Tighten each bolt until its head is broken off.

NOTE

The spare ignition switch comes equipped with the special bolts, however, the bolts are also individually available as spare parts.

Ignition System: 1H-10

• Tighten the handlebar holder set nuts (3) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Handlebar holder set nut (c): 45 N·m (4.5 kgf-m,

32.5 lb-ft)

• Route the cables, hoses and lead wires. Refer to

“Throttle Cable Routing Diagram in Section 1D

(Page 1D-2)”, “Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram in

Section 4A (Page 4A-1)” and “Wiring Harness Routing

Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”.

3

(c)

I718H1180025-02

I718H1180023-01

• First tighten the steering stem head nut (1), then tighten the front fork upper clamp bolts (2).

Tightening torque

Steering stem head nut (a): 65 N·m (6.5 kgf-m,

47.0 lb-ft)

Front fork upper clamp bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgfm, 16.5 lb-ft)

1

(a)

2

(b)

I718H1180024-04

1H-11 Ignition System:

Specifications

Service Data

Electrical

Unit: mm (in)

B718H11807001

Firing order

Spark plug

Item

Spark performance

CKP sensor resistance

CKP sensor peak voltage

Ignition coil resistance

Ignition coil primary peak voltage

Type

Gap

Primary

Secondary

Specification

1

2

4

3

NGK: CR7E

DENSO: U22ESR-N

0.7 – 0.8

(0.028 – 0.031)

Over 8 (0.3) at 1 atm.

90 – 150

2.0 V and more

1.1 – 1.9

10.8 – 16.2 k

80 V and more

Note

Terminal – Terminal

Plug cap – Terminal

When cranking

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Spark plug

Steering stem head nut

Front fork upper clamp bolt

Handlebar holder set nut

N

m

11

65

23

45

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.1

6.5

2.3

4.5

lb-ft

8.0

47.0

16.5

32.5

B718H11807002

Note

) (Page 1H-4)

) (Page 1H-10)

) (Page 1H-10)

) (Page 1H-10)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1H-6) / ) (Page 1H-

7) / ) (Page 1H-7) /

) (Page 1H-9)

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

) (Page 1H-6)

B718H11808001

09930–10121

Spark plug wrench set

) (Page 1H-4) / ) (Page 1H-

4)

Starting System: 1I-1

Engine

Starting System

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Starting System Diagram

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

B718H11902001

Starter motor

Starter relay

B/W

B/Y

Bl/B

Engine stop switch

B/O

Ignition switch

Fuse (30 A)

B/R

Fuse

(15 A)

Gear position switch

Starter button

B/Bl

Bl

Clutch lever position switch

Turn signal/ side-stand relay

G

Side-stand switch

I649G1190001-02

Component Location

Starting System Components Location

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

B718H11903001

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Starting System Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Engine does not turn though the starter motor runs

Starter button is not effective

Possible cause

Faulty starter clutch

Run down battery.

Defective switch contacts.

Brushes not seating properly on starter motor commutator.

Defective starter relay or starter interlock switch.

Defective main fuse.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

B718H11904001

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

1I-2 Starting System:

Starter motor will not run

B718H11904002

NOTE

Make sure the fuses are not blown and the battery is fully-charged before diagnosing.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Shift the transmission into neutral.

2) Grasp the clutch lever, turn on the ignition switch with the engine stop switch in the “RUN” position and listen for a click from the starter relay when the starter button is pushed.

Yes

Go to step 2.

No

Go to step 3.

Is a click sound heard?

2 Check if the starter motor runs when its terminal is connected to the battery (+) terminal. (Do not use thin “wire” because a large amount of current flows.)

Does the starter motor run?

• Faulty starter relay

• Loose or disconnected starter motor lead wire

3 Measure the starter relay voltage at the starter relay connectors (between B/Bl (+) and B/Y (–)) when the starter button is pushed.

• Loose or disconnected between starter relay and battery (+) terminal.

Go to Step 4.

Faulty starter motor.

• Faulty ignition switch

• Faulty engine stop switch

Is the voltage OK?

• Faulty clutch lever position switch

• Faulty gear position switch

4 Check the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay Inspection

(Page 1I-7)”.

Poor contact of the starter relay.

• Faulty turn signal/ side-stand relay

• Faulty starter button

• Faulty side-stand switch

• Poor contact of connector

• Open circuit in wire harness

Faulty starter relay.

Is the starter relay OK?

Starter Motor Runs but Does not Crank the Engine

B718H11904003

The starter motor runs when the transmission is in neutral, but does not run when the transmission is in any position other than neutral, with the side-stand up.

Step Action

1 Check the side-stand switch. Refer to “Side-stand / Ignition

Interlock System Parts Inspection (Page 1I-8)”.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Faulty side-stand switch.

Is the side-stand switch OK?

2 Check the starter clutch. Refer to “Starter Clutch Inspection

(Page 1I-12)”.

Is the starter clutch OK?

• Open circuit in wire harness

• Poor contact of connector

Faulty starter clutch.

Starter Motor Components

8

(a)

Repair Instructions

7

5

6

Starting System: 1I-3

B718H11906001

5

4

1. O-ring

2. Housing end (Inside)

3. O-ring

4. Armature

2

3

5. O-ring

6. Starter motor case

7: Housing end assembly (Outside)

: Never remove the brush, spring and brush holder.

8. Starter motor lead wire nut

1

(a)

I718H1190038-03

: 5 N

⋅ m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease to sliding surface.

: Apply moly past to sliding surface.

: Do not reuse.

1I-4 Starting System:

Starter Motor Removal and Installation

B718H11906002

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to “Battery Removal and

Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-12)”.

2) Remove the throttle body. Refer to “Throttle Body

Removal and Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-

9)”.

3) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

6) Disconnect the starter motor lead wire (2) and ECT sensor coupler (3).

7) Remove the starter motor (4).

2

3

1

I718H1190002-01

4) Remove the regulator/rectifier bracket mounting bolts.

4

I718H1190005-02

Installation

Install the starter motor in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply grease to the starter motor O-ring.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

5) Remove the starter motor mounting bolts.

I718H1190003-01

I718H1190006-01

• Connect the starter motor lead wire.

Tightening torque

Starter motor lead wire mounting nut (a): 5 N·m (

0.5 kgf-m, 3.5 lb-ft)

I718H1190004-01

(a)

I718H1190007-01

• Tighten the starter motor mounting bolt (1) with the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to “Wiring Harness

Routing Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”.

Starting System: 1I-5

• Apply a small quantity of moly paste to the armature shaft.

: Moly paste 99000–25140 (SUZUKI Moly paste or equivalent)

1

I718H1190008-01

Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly

B718H11906003

Refer to “Starter Motor Removal and Installation

(Page 1I-4)”.

Disassembly

Disassemble the starter motor as shown in the starter motor components diagram. Refer to “Starter Motor

Components (Page 1I-3)”.

Assembly

Reassemble the starter motor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings with new ones to prevent oil leakage and moisture.

• Apply grease to the lip of the oil seal.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1190011-01

• Align the match mark on the starter motor case with the match mark on the housing end.

• Tighten the starter motor housing bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Starter motor housing bolt (a): 5 N·m (0.5 kgf-m,

3.5 lb-ft)

(a)

I718H1190012-02

I718H1190009-01

1I-6 Starting System:

Starter Motor Inspection

B718H11906004

Refer to “Starter Motor Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 1I-5)”.

Carbon Brush

Inspect the carbon brushes for abnormal wear, cracks or smoothness in the brush holder.

If either carbon brush is defective, replace the housing end assembly (outside) with a new one.

Measure the length “a” of the carbon brushes using a vernier calipers. If the measurement is less then the service limit, replace the housing end assembly (outside) with a new one.

Brush length “a”

Service limit: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)

Special tool

: 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm, 200 mm))

Armature Coil

Measure for continuity between each segment. Measure for continuity between each segment and the armature shaft.

If there is no continuity between the segments or there is continuity between the segments and shaft, replace the armature with a new one.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity set ( )

?

“ a ”

I718H1190013-01

Commutator

Inspect the commutator for discoloration, abnormal wear or undercut “A”.

If the commutator is abnormally worn, replace the armature.

If the commutator surface is discolored, polish it with

#400 sandpaper and wipe it using a clean, dry cloth.

If there is no undercut, scrape out the insulator (1) with a saw blade.

I718H1190015-01

Bearing

Check the bearing of housing end for damage.

If any damage is found, replace the housing end.

“A”

1

I718H1190016-01

Oil Seal

Check the seal lip for damage.

If any damage is found, replace the housing end

(Inside).

I718H1190014-02

I718H1190018-01

Starter Relay Removal and Installation

B718H11906005

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire from the battery.

4) Disconnect the starter relay coupler (1) and remove the starter relay cover (2).

2

1

Starting System: 1I-7

Starter Relay Inspection

B718H11906006

Inspect the starter relay in the following procedures:

1) Remove the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay

Removal and Installation (Page 1I-7)”.

2) Apply 12 V to “A” and “B” terminals and check for continuity between the positive and negative terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the starter relay clicks and continuity is found, the relay is ok.

!

CAUTION

Do not apply battery voltage to the starter relay for five seconds and more, since the relay coil may overheat and get damaged.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

5) Disconnect the starter motor lead wire (3) and battery (+) lead wire (4).

6) Remove the starter relay (5).

I718H1190039-01

“A” “B”

(A)

4

To starter motor

+

To battery

I649G1190021-04

3

5

I718H1190019-01

Installation

Install the starter relay in the reverse order of removal.

“A”

“B”

I649G1190022-02

1I-8 Starting System:

3) Measure the relay coil resistance between the terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the resistance is not within the specified value, replace the starter relay with a new one.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Starter relay resistance

3 – 6

(A)

Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts

Inspection

B718H11906008

Check the interlock system for proper operation. If the interlock system does not operate properly, check each component for damage or abnormalities. If any abnormality is found, replace the component with a new one.

Side-stand Switch

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Disconnect the side-stand switch coupler (1).

I649G1190023-03

4) Install the starter relay. Refer to “Starter Relay

Removal and Installation (Page 1I-7)”.

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation

B718H11906007

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay (1).

1

1

I718H1190020-01

4) Measure the voltage between Green and Black/

White lead wires.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Diode test ( )

G

((+) probe)

ON

(Side-stand up)

OFF

(Side-stand down)

0.4 – 0.6 V

B/W

((–) probe)

1.4 V and more

(Tester’s battery voltage)

NOTE

If the tester reads 1.4 V and below when the tester probes are not connected, replace its battery.

I718H1190022-01

Installation

Install the turn signal/side-stand relay in the reverse order of removal.

I718H1190023-01

5) Connect the side-stand switch coupler.

6) Install the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay

The turn signal/side-stand relay is composed of the turn signal relay, side-stand relay and diode.

Starting System: 1I-9

4) Install the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to “Turn

Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation

(Page 1I-8)”.

Diode inspection

1) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to

“Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation (Page 1I-8)”.

2) Measure the voltage between the “A”, “B” and “C” terminals using the multi-circuit tester.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Diode test ( )

I649G1190027-02

Side-stand relay

1) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to

“Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation (Page 1I-8)”.

2) Check the insulation between “D” and “E” terminals using the multi-circuit tester.

3) Apply 12 V to terminals “D” and “C” ((+) to “D” and (–

) to “C”) and check the continuity between “D” and

“E”. If there is no continuity, replace the turn signal/ side-stand relay with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

“D” “C” “B” “A”

“A”

“B”

“C”

“B”

I649G1190029-02

“B”, “C”

+

Probe of tester to:

“B”, “C” “A”

1.4 V and more

(Tester’s battery voltage)

“A” 0.4

– 0.6 V

I649G1190046-04

NOTE

If the multi circuit tester reads 1.4 V and below when the tester probes are not connected, replace its battery.

3) Install the turn signal/side-stand relay. Refer to “Turn

Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and Installation

(Page 1I-8)”.

“E” “F” “G”

SIDE-STAND RELAY

DIODE

TURN

SIGNAL

RELAY

“C” “A”

“A” “B” “C” “D” “E” “F” “G”

I649G1190028-02

1I-10 Starting System:

Gear Position Switch

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Disconnect the gear position switch coupler.

!

CAUTION

When disconnecting and connecting the gear position switch coupler, make sure to turn off the ignition switch, or electronic parts may get damaged.

7) Measure the voltage between Pink and Black/White lead wires using the multi-circuit tester when shifting the gearshift lever from low to top.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Gear position switch voltage (Except neutral position)

0.6 V and more ((+) P – (–) B/W)

(A)

V

(B)

I718H1190024-01

3) Check the continuity between Blue and Black/White lead wires with the transmission in “NEUTRAL”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

BI B/W

ON (Neutral)

OFF (Except neutral)

I649G1190045-03

4) Connect the gear position switch coupler to the wiring harness.

5) Insert the needle pointed probes to the lead wire coupler.

6) Turn the ignition switch ON and side-stand to upright position.

I718H1190001-02

8) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

9) Install the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

Starter Clutch Removal and Installation

B718H11906010

Removal

1) Drain engine oil.

2) Remove the generator cover (1). Refer to “Generator

Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-4)”.

1

I718H1190025-01

3) Remove the idle gear shaft (2) and starter idle gear

(3).

4) Remove the generator rotor assembly (4). Refer to

“Generator Removal and Installation in Section 1J

(Page 1J-4)”.

Starting System: 1I-11

7) Remove the one way clutch (7) from the guide (8).

7

4

2

I718H1190026-01

5) Remove the key (5) and starter driven gear (6).

5

3

6

8

I718H1190029-01

Installation

Install the starter clutch in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• When inserting the one way clutch (1) into the guide

(2), fit the flange “A” in the step of the guide (2).

NOTE

Be sure to seat the flange “A” of the one way clutch (1) to the guide (2).

1

I718H1190027-01

6) Hold the generator rotor with the special tool and remove the starter clutch bolts.

Special tool

(A): 09930–44530 (Rotor holder)

(A)

“A”

2

I718H1190030-02

I718H1190031-01

I718H1190028-01

1I-12 Starting System:

• Install the guide (2) to the generator rotor.

NOTE

The arrow mark “B” must face to the generator rotor side.

“B”

2

Starter Clutch Inspection

B718H11906011

Refer to “Starter Clutch Removal and Installation

(Page 1I-10)”.

Starter Clutch

1) Install the starter driven gear onto the starter clutch.

2) Turn the starter driven gear by hand to inspect the starter clutch for a smooth movement. The gear turns in one direction only. If a large resistance is felt for rotation, inspect the starter clutch or the starter clutch contacting surface on the starter driven gear for wear or damage.

If they are found to be damaged, replace them with new ones.

I718H1190032-01

• Apply thread lock to the bolts, and then tighten them to the specified torque with the special tool.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1303 or equivalent)

Special tool

(A): 09930–44530 (Rotor holder)

Tightening torque

Starter clutch bolt (a): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lbft)

I718H1190035-01

Starter Driven Gear Bearing

Inspect the starter driven gear bearing for wear or damage.

(A)

(a)

I718H1190033-02

• Apply engine oil to the bushing of the starter driven gear.

I718H1190036-01

I718H1190034-01

• Install the generator rotor assembly onto crankshaft.

Refer to “Generator Removal and Installation in

Section 1J (Page 1J-4)”.

Starter Button Inspection

B718H11906012

Inspect the starter button in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the right handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

Starting System: 1I-13

3) Inspect the starter button for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the right handle switch assembly with a new one. Refer to

“Handlebar Removal and Installation in Section 6B

(Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Position

Color

B/R Bl/B B/Y

B/W

PUSH

I718H1190040-01

4) After finishing the starter button inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1190037-01

Specifications

Service Data

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Starter motor brush length

Starter relay resistance

Standard

Limit

Specification

12.0 (0.47)

3 – 6

6.5 (0.26)

B718H11907001

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Starter motor lead wire mounting nut

Starter motor housing bolt

Starter clutch bolt

N

m

5

5

25

Tightening torque kgf-m

0.5

0.5

2.5

lb-ft

3.5

3.5

18.0

B718H11907002

Note

) (Page 1I-4)

) (Page 1I-5)

) (Page 1I-12)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Starter Motor Components (Page 1I-3)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

1I-14 Starting System:

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

Moly paste

Thread lock cement

B718H11908001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 1I-4) / ) (Page 1I-5) equivalent

SUZUKI Moly paste or equivalent

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1303 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–25140 ) (Page 1I-5)

P/No.: 99000–32030 ) (Page 1I-12)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Starter Motor Components (Page 1I-3)”

Special Tool

09900–20102

Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm)

) (Page 1I-6)

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

) (Page 1I-10)

) (Page 1I-6) / ) (Page 1I-7)

/ ) (Page 1I-8) / ) (Page 1I-

8) / ) (Page 1I-9) /

) (Page 1I-9) / ) (Page 1I-

10) / ) (Page 1I-10) /

) (Page 1I-13)

09930–44530

Rotor holder

) (Page 1I-11) / ) (Page 1I-

12)

B718H11908002

Charging System: 1J-1

Engine

Charging System

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Charging System Diagram

Regulator/Rectifier

Generator

Ignition switch

B718H11A02001

IC

SCR

I718H11A0001-01

Component Location

Charging System Components Location

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

B718H11A03001

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Charging System Symptom Diagnosis

B718H11A04001

Condition

Generator does not charge

Possible cause

Open- or short-circuited lead wires, or loose lead connections.

Short-circuited, grounded or open generator coil.

Short-circuited or punctured regulator/ rectifier.

Lead wires tend to get short- or open-

Correction / Reference Item

Repair, replace or connect properly.

Replace.

Replace.

Generator does charge, but charging rate is below the specification

Unstable charging

circuited or loosely connected at terminals.

Grounded or open-circuited generator coil.

Poorly grounded regulator/rectifier.

Lead wire insulation frayed due to vibration, resulting in intermittent shortcircuiting.

Repair or retighten.

Replace.

Defective regulator/rectifier.

Defective cell plates in the battery.

Replace.

Replace the battery.

Generator overcharges

Internal short-circuit in the battery.

Replace the battery.

Damaged or defective regulator/rectifier.

Replace.

Clean and tighten ground connection.

Repair or replace.

Internally short-circuited generator.

Defective regulator/rectifier.

Replace.

Replace.

1J-2 Charging System:

Condition

Battery overcharges

Possible cause

Faulty regulator/rectifier.

Faulty battery.

Poor contact of generator lead wire coupler.

Battery runs down quickly

Trouble in charging system.

Battery “sulfation”

Replace.

Replace.

Repair.

Correction / Reference Item

Cell plates have lost much of their active materials a result of overcharging.

Internal short-circuit in the battery.

Too low battery voltage.

Too old battery.

Incorrect charging rate. (When not in use battery should be checked at least once a month to avoid sulfation.)

The battery was left unused in a cold climate for too long.

Check the generator, regulator/rectifier and circuit connections and make necessary adjustments to obtain specified charging operation.

Replace the battery and correct the charging system.

Replace the battery.

Recharge the battery fully.

Replace the battery.

Replace the battery.

Replace the battery if badly sulfated.

Battery Runs Down Quickly

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 Check accessories which use excessive amounts of electricity.

B718H11A04002

Yes No

Remove accessories.

Go to Step 2.

Are accessories being installed?

2 Check the battery for current leakage. Refer to “Battery

Current Leakage Inspection (Page 1J-3)”.

Is the battery for current leakage OK?

Go to Step 3.

3 Measure the regulated voltage between the battery terminals. Refer to “Regulated Voltage Inspection (Page 1J-

3)”.

• Faulty battery

• Abnormal driving condition

Is the regulated voltage OK?

4 Measure the resistance of the generator coil. Refer to

“Generator Inspection (Page 1J-3)”.

Go to Step 5.

Is the resistance of generator coil OK?

5 Measure the generator no-load performance. Refer to

“Generator Inspection (Page 1J-3)”.

Go to Step 6.

Is the generator no-load performance OK?

6 Inspect the regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Regulator / Rectifier

Inspection (Page 1J-8)”.

Go to Step 7.

• Short circuit of wire harness

• Faulty electrical equipment

Go to Step 4.

• Faulty generator coil

• Disconnected lead wires

Faulty generator

Faulty regulator/rectifier

Is the regulator/rectifier OK?

7 Inspect wirings.

Is the wirings OK?

Faulty battery • Short circuit of wire harness

• Poor contact of couplers

Charging System: 1J-3

Battery Current Leakage Inspection

B718H11A06001

Inspect the battery current leakage in the following procedures:

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire.

4) Measure the current between (–) battery terminal and the (–) battery lead wire using the multi-circuit tester. If the reading exceeds the specified value, leakage is evident.

!

CAUTION

• In case of a large current leak, turn the tester to high range first to avoid tester damage.

• Do not turn the ignition switch ON when measuring current.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Current ( , 20 mA)

Battery current (Leak)

Under 3 mA

Repair Instructions

Regulated Voltage Inspection

B718H11A06002

Inspect the regulated voltage in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Start the engine and keep it running at 5 000 r/min with the dimmer switch turned HI position.

3) Measure the DC voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals using the multi-circuit tester. If the voltage is not within the specified value, inspect the generator and regulator/rectifier. Refer to “Generator

Inspection (Page 1J-3)” and “Regulator / Rectifier

Inspection (Page 1J-8)”.

NOTE

When making this test, be sure that the battery is in fully charged condition.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Regulated voltage (Charging output)

Standard: 14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min

Battery

I649G11A0002-02

5) Connect the (–) battery terminal and install the seat.

Refer to “Battery Removal and Installation (Page 1J-

12)” and “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

(DCV)

Tester

I649G11A0003-02

4) Install the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

Generator Inspection

Generator Coil Resistance

1) Disconnect the generator coupler (1).

B718H11A06011

1

I718H11A0030-01

1J-4 Charging System:

2) Measure the resistance between the three lead wires.

If the resistance is out of specified value, replace the stator with a new one. Also, check that the generator core is insulated properly.

NOTE

When making this test, be sure that the battery is in fully charged condition.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Generator coil resistance

0.2 – 0.8

(B – B)

∞ Ω

(B – Ground)

B

B

B

3) Connect the generator coupler.

No-load Performance

1) Disconnect the generator coupler (1).

I718H11A0005-02

2) Start the engine and keep it running at 5 000 r/min.

3) Using the multi-circuit tester, measure the voltage between three lead wires.

If the tester reads under the specified value, replace the generator with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage (~)

Generator no-load performance (When engine is cold)

60 V (AC) and more at 5 000 r/min

B

B

B

I718H11A0006-02

Generator Removal and Installation

B718H11A06004

Removal

1) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire. Refer to

“Battery Removal and Installation (Page 1J-12)”.

2) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

3) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

1

1

I718H11A0030-01

I718H11A0007-01

4) Disconnect the CKP sensor coupler (2) and generator coupler (3).

2

3

I718H11A0031-01

5) Remove the generator cover (4).

4

6) Remove the gasket (5) and dowel pins.

I718H11A0010-01

Charging System: 1J-5

8) Hold the generator rotor with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09930–44530 (Rotor holder)

9) Loosen the generator rotor bolt.

NOTE

When loosen the rotor bolt, do not remove it.

The rotor bolt is used in conjunction with the rotor remover when removing the rotor.

(A)

5

I718H11A0011-01

7) Remove the idle gear shaft (6) and starter idle gear

(7).

6

I718H11A0013-01

10) Remove the generator rotor assembly (8) with the special tool.

NOTE

Remove the starter clutch if necessary. Refer to “Starter Clutch Removal and Installation in

Section 1I (Page 1I-10)”.

Special tool

(B): 09930–34970 (Rotor remover set)

7

8

(B)

I718H11A0012-01

I718H11A0014-02

11) Remove the key (9).

9

I718H11A0015-02

1J-6 Charging System:

12) Remove the generator stator (10) along with the

CKP sensor (11).

11

• Degrease the tapered portion “A” of generator rotor and also the crankshaft “B”. Use nonflammable cleaning solvent to wipe off oily or greasy matter and make these surfaces completely dry.

• Fit the key (2) in the key slot on the crankshaft.

• Install the generator rotor onto crankshaft.

10

2

“A”

I718H11A0016-02

Installation

Install the generator in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the generator starter set bolts and CKP sensor mounting bolts to the specified torque.

NOTE

Be sure the grommet (1) is set to the generator cover.

Tightening torque

Generator stator set bolt (a): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m,

8.0 lb-ft)

CKP sensor mounting bolt (b): 11 N·m (1.1 kgf-m,

8.0 lb-ft)

(b)

1

(a)

“B”

I718H11A0018-01

• Hold the generator rotor with the special tool and tighten its bolt to the specified torque.

Special tool

(A): 09930–44530 (Rotor holder)

Tightening torque

Generator rotor bolt (a): 120 N·m (12.0 kgf-m, 87.0 lb-ft)

(A)

(a)

I718H11A0017-01

I718H11A0019-01

• Apply molybdenum oil solution to the idle gear shaft holes.

I718H11A0020-01

• Apply bond lightly to the mating surfaces at the parting line between the upper and lower crankcases as shown.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI BOND

No.1207B or equivalent)

Charging System: 1J-7

• Install the generator cover and tighten the generator cover bolts.

!

WARNING

Be careful not to pinch the finger between the generator cover and the crankcase.

!

CAUTION

Fit new gasket washer to the bolt (4).

4

• Install the dowel pins and new gasket (3).

I718H11A0022-01

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

I718H11A0024-01

3

I718H11A0023-01

1J-8 Charging System:

Regulator / Rectifier Construction

(a)

B718H11A06013

3

(a)

1

4

(a)

2

5

(a)

1. Regulator/rectifier

2. Regulator/rectifier bracket No.1

3. Regulator/rectifier bracket No.2

4. Breather cover

5. Engine sprocket inner cover

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H11A0002-01

3) Disconnect the regulator/rectifier couplers (1).

Regulator / Rectifier Inspection

B718H11A06012

Inspect the regulator/rectifier in the following procedures:

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the clamp.

1

I718H11A0032-02

Charging System: 1J-9

4) Measure the voltage between the terminals using the multi-circuit tester as indicated in the following table. If the voltage is not within the specified value, replace the regulator/rectifier with a new one. Refer to “Regulator /

Rectifier Construction (Page 1J-8)”.

NOTE

If the tester reads 1.4 V and below when the tester probes are not connected, replace its battery.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Diode test ( )

B/R

1

B/R

2

B/W

1

B/W

2

B

2

B

1

B

3

I718H11A0034-01

Unit: V

(–) probe of tester to:

B/R

1

B/R

2

B

1

B

2

B

3

B/W

1

B/R

1

0

*

*

*

*

B/W

2

*

*1.4 V and more (tester’s battery voltage)

B/R

0

*

*

*

*

*

2

B

1

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

(+) probe of tester to:

0.6 – 1.2

0.6 – 1.2

0.3 – 1.0

0.3 – 1.0

5) Connect the regulator/rectifier couplers and bind the clamp.

B

2

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

0.6 – 1.2

0.6 – 1.2

0.3 – 1.0

0.3 – 1.0

B

3

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

0.4 – 1.0

0.6 – 1.2

0.2 – 0.8

0.6 – 1.2

0.3 – 1.0

0.3 – 1.0

B/W

1

0.4 – 1.0

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

0

Battery Components

3

4

5

6

7

B718H11A06007

B/W

2

0.4 – 1.0

0.4 – 1.0

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

0.2 – 0.8

0

Battery Charging

Initial Charging

Filling electrolyte

B718H11A06008

NOTE

When filling electrolyte, the battery must be removed from the vehicle and must be put on the level ground.

8

2

1

1. Anode plates

2. Separator (Fiberglass plate)

3. Cathode plates

4. Upper cover breather

I649G11A0046-03

5. Stopper

6. Filter

7. Terminal

8. Safety valve

1J-10 Charging System:

1) Remove the aluminum tape (1) which seals the battery filler holes “A”.

5) Make sure that air bubbles (4) rise to the top of each electrolyte container, and leave in this position for about more than 20 minutes.

1

“A”

I649G11A0039-03

2) Remove the caps (2) from the electrolyte container.

NOTE

• Do not remove or pierce the sealed areas

“B” of the electrolyte container.

• After filling the electrolyte completely, use the removed cap (2) as sealing caps of battery-filler holes.

2

“B”

4

I649G11A0042-03

NOTE

If no air bubbles come out from a filler port, tap the bottom of the electrolyte container two or three times.

Never remove the container from the battery.

I310G11A0024-01

I649G11A0040-03

3) Insert the nozzles of the electrolyte container (3) into the electrolyte filler holes of the battery.

4) Hold the electrolyte container firmly so that it does not fall.

NOTE

Do not allow any of the electrolyte to spill.

3

I649G11A0041-03

6) After confirming that the electrolyte has entered the battery completely, remove the electrolyte containers from the battery.

7) Wait for about 20 minutes.

8) Insert the caps (2) into the filler holes, pressing in firmly so that the top of the caps do not protrude above the upper surface of the battery’s top cover.

!

CAUTION

• Once the caps are installed to the battery, do not remove the caps.

• Do not tap the caps with a hammer when installing them.

2

Correct

Incorrect

I718H11A0027-01

Charging System: 1J-11

Charging

For initial charging, use the charger specially designed for MF battery.

!

CAUTION

• For charging the battery, make sure to use the charger specially designed for MF battery. Otherwise, the battery may be overcharged resulting in shortened service life.

• Do not remove the cap during charging.

• Position the battery with the cap facing upward during charging.

Battery Recharging

!

CAUTION

Do not remove the caps on the battery top while recharging.

NOTE

When the motorcycle is not used for a long period, check the battery every 1 month to prevent the battery discharge.

1) Remove the battery from the motorcycle. Refer to

“Battery Removal and Installation (Page 1J-12)”.

2) Measure the battery voltage using the multi-circuit tester.

If the voltage reading is less than the 12 V (DC), recharge the battery with a battery charger.

Recharging time

1.2 A for 5 to 10 hours or 5 A for 1 hour.

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to permit the charging current to exceed 5 A at any time.

I649G11A0047-02

1J-12 Charging System:

3) After recharging, wait at least 30 minutes and then measure the battery voltage using the multi-circuit tester.

If the battery voltage is less than 12.5 V, recharge the battery again.

If the battery voltage is still less than 12.5 V after recharging, replace the battery with a new one.

“A”

“B”

5) Remove the battery (4) from the motorcycle.

3

1

2

4

“A”: Charging period “B”: Stop charging

I649G11A0045-02

4) Install the battery to the motorcycle. Refer to “Battery

Removal and Installation (Page 1J-12)”.

I718H11A0033-01

Installation

Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to following points:

!

CAUTION

Never use anything except the specified battery.

• Install the rubber band.

!

CAUTION

Be careful not to slack the wiring harness between the battery and starter relay.

• Tighten the battery lead wire mounting bolts securely.

I310G11A0030-01

Battery Removal and Installation

B718H11A06009

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire (1).

3) Disconnect the battery (+) lead wire (2).

NOTE

Be sure to disconnect the battery (–) lead wire (1) first, then disconnect the battery (+) lead wire (2).

4) Remove the rubber band (3).

I718H11A0029-01

Battery Visual Inspection

B718H11A06010

Inspect the battery in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Visually inspect the surface of the battery container.

If any signs of cracking or electrolyte leakage from the sides of the battery have occurred, replace the battery with a new one.

If the battery terminals are found to be coated with rust or an acidic white powdery substance, clean the battery terminals with sandpaper.

3) Install the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

Charging System: 1J-13

Specifications

Service Data

Battery

!

CAUTION

Never use anything except the specified battery.

Item

Type designation

Capacity

Standard electrolyte S.G.

Specification

FT12A-BS

12 V, 36.0 kC (10 Ah)/10HR

1.330 at 20

°

C (68

°

F)

Generator

Item

Generator coil resistance

Generator maximum output

Generator no-load voltage

(When engine is cold)

Regulated voltage

Specification

0.2 – 0.8

Approx. 400 W at 5 000 r/min

60 V (AC) and more at 5 000 r/min

14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min

B718H11A07001

Note

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Generator stator set bolt

CKP sensor mounting bolt

Generator rotor bolt

N

m

11

11

120

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.1

1.1

12.0

lb-ft

8.0

8.0

87.0

B718H11A07002

Note

) (Page 1J-6)

) (Page 1J-6)

) (Page 1J-6)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Regulator / Rectifier Construction (Page 1J-8)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

1J-14 Charging System:

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Sealant

Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI BOND No.1207B or P/No.: 99000–31140 )

Note

(Page 1J-7) equivalent

B718H11A08001

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 1J-3) / ) (Page 1J-

3) / ) (Page 1J-4) /

) (Page 1J-4) / ) (Page 1J-

9)

09930–34970

Rotor remover set

) (Page 1J-5)

B718H11A08002

09930–44530

Rotor holder

) (Page 1J-5) / ) (Page 1J-

6)

Exhaust System: 1K-1

Engine

Exhaust System

Precautions

Precautions for Exhaust System

B718H11B00001

!

WARNING

To avoid the risk of being burned, do not touch the exhaust system when the system is hot. Any service on the exhaust system should be performed when the system is cool.

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the exhaust pipes and muffler have enough clearance from the rubber parts and plastic parts to avoid melting.

1K-2 Exhaust System:

Exhaust System Construction

Repair Instructions

B718H11B06001

2

7

(b)

4

(a)

3

6

(a)

“A”

“B”

5

(a)

1

8

(c)

1. Exhaust pipes

2. Muffler

3. Connector

4. Exhaust pipe bolt

5. Exhaust pipe mounting bolt

6. Muffler connecting bolt

7. Muffler mounting nut

8. HO2 sensor

“A”: Chamfer

“B”: Apply exhaust gas sealer.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

I718H11B0001-03

: 25 N

⋅ m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft)

: Do not reuse.

Exhaust Pipe / Muffler Removal and Installation

B718H11B06002

Removal

1) Loosen the muffler connecting bolts (1).

2) Remove the muffler (3) by removing the mounting bolt (2) and nut.

NOTE

Support the muffler to prevent it from falling.

Exhaust System: 1K-3

5) Disconnect the HO2 sensor coupler (4) and clamps.

4

2

3

I718H11B0007-03

6) Remove the exhaust pipe assembly (5) by removing the exhaust pipe bolts and mounting bolt.

NOTE

Support the exhaust pipe assembly to prevent it from falling.

1

I718H11B0005-03

3) Remove the radiator. Refer to “Radiator / Cooling

Fan Motor Removal and Installation in Section 1F

(Page 1F-5)”.

4) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover and regulator/rectifier bracket bolts. Refer to “Engine

Sprocket Removal and Installation in Section 3A

(Page 3A-2)”.

5

I718H11B0008-05

5

I718H11B0009-03

I718H11B0017-01

1K-4 Exhaust System:

7) Remove the HO2 sensor (6) from the exhaust pipe.

!

CAUTION

• Be careful not to expose it to an excessive shock.

• Be careful not to twist or damage the sensor lead wire.

6

• Install the exhaust pipe gaskets (1) and connector (2).

!

CAUTION

Replace the gaskets and connector with new ones.

NOTE

When installing a new connector, remove all of the old sealer from the exhaust pipe and muffler. Apply the exhaust gas sealer “A” to both the inside and outside of the new connector.

: Exhaust gas sealer (PERMATEX 1372

(commercially available))

2

“A”

I718H11B0010-03

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the HO2 sensor to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

HO2 sensor (a): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m, 18.0 lb-ft)

!

CAUTION

• Be careful not to expose it to an excessive shock.

• Do not use an impact wrench when installing the HO2 sensor.

• Be careful not to twist or damage the sensor lead wires.

• Do not apply oil or other materials to the sensor air hole.

(a)

1

I718H11B0012-03

I718H11B0011-01

• Tighten the exhaust pipe bolts and exhaust pipe mounting bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lbft)

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgfm, 16.5 lb-ft)

Exhaust System: 1K-5

• Route the HO2 sensor lead wire. Refer to “Throttle

Body Construction in Section 1D (Page 1D-8)” and

“Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A

(Page 9A-8)”.

• Tighten the muffler mounting nut and muffler connecting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Muffler mounting nut (c): 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

Muffler connecting bolt (d): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,

16.5 lb-ft)

(c)

(a)

(a)

(a)

I718H11B0016-02

(b)

(d)

I718H11B0014-01

I718H11B0015-02

1K-6 Exhaust System:

Exhaust System Inspection

B718H11B06003

Inspect the exhaust pipe connection and muffler connection for exhaust gas leakage and mounting condition. If any defect is found, replace the exhaust pipe assembly or muffler with a new one.

Check the exhaust pipe bolts, muffler connecting bolts and muffler mounting nut are tightened to their specified torque.

Tightening torque

Exhaust pipe bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,

16.5 lb-ft)

Muffler connecting bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Muffler mounting nut (d): 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lbft)

(a)

(a)

(c)

(b)

(d)

I718H11B0013-02

Specifications

Tightening Torque Specifications

HO2 sensor

Fastening part

Exhaust pipe bolt

Exhaust pipe mounting bolt

Muffler mounting nut

Muffler connecting bolt

N

m

25

23

23

26

23

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.5

lb-ft

18.0

2.3 16.5

2.3 16.5

2.6 19.0

2.3 16.5

B718H11B07001

Note

) (Page 1K-4)

) (Page 1K-5) /

) (Page 1K-6)

) (Page 1K-5) /

) (Page 1K-6)

) (Page 1K-5) /

) (Page 1K-6)

) (Page 1K-5) /

) (Page 1K-6)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Exhaust System Construction (Page 1K-2)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Material

Exhaust gas sealer

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

PERMATEX 1372 (commercially — available)

Note

) (Page 1K-4)

B718H11B08001

Table of Contents 2- i

Section 2

Suspension

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….2-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 2-1

Precautions for Suspension ……………………………. 2-1

Suspension General Diagnosis………….. 2A-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………2A-1

Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis …… 2A-1

Front Suspension ……………………………… 2B-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….2B-1

Front Fork Components ……………………………….. 2B-1

Front Fork Removal and Installation ………………. 2B-2

Front Fork Inspection …………………………………… 2B-3

Front Fork Adjustment …………………………………. 2B-4

Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly…………… 2B-4

Front Fork Parts Inspection…………………………… 2B-9

Specifications……………………………………………..2B-10

Service Data …………………………………………….. 2B-10

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….2B-10

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………2B-11

Recommended Service Material………………….. 2B-11

Special Tool ………………………………………………2B-11

Rear Suspension ………………………………. 2C-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….2C-1

Rear Suspension Components ………………………2C-1

Rear Suspension Assembly Construction………..2C-2

Rear Shock Absorber Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………2C-3

Rear Suspension Inspection ………………………….2C-3

Rear Shock Absorber Inspection ……………………2C-4

Rear Suspension Adjustment ………………………..2C-4

Rear Shock Absorber Disposal………………………2C-4

Cushion Lever Removal and Installation………….2C-5

Cushion Lever Inspection ……………………………..2C-6

Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………2C-6

Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and

Installation…………………………………………………2C-7

Swingarm Related Parts Inspection ………………..2C-9

Swingarm Bearing Removal and Installation ….2C-10

Specifications……………………………………………..2C-12

Service Data………………………………………………2C-12

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….2C-12

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………2C-13

Recommended Service Material …………………..2C-13

Special Tool ………………………………………………2C-13

Wheels and Tires ………………………………. 2D-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..2D-1

Precautions for Wheel and Tire………………………2D-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….2D-2

Front Wheel Components ……………………………..2D-2

Front Wheel Assembly Construction……………….2D-4

Front Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation …………………………………………………2D-6

Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection …………….2D-8

Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation …………………………………………..2D-9

Rear Wheel Components…………………………….2D-12

Rear Wheel Assembly Construction ……………..2D-14

Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation ……………………………………………….2D-16

Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection ……………2D-17

Rear Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation ……………………………………………….2D-18

Tire Removal and Installation……………………….2D-20

Wheel / Tire / Air Valve Inspection and

Cleaning ………………………………………………….2D-21

Air Valve Removal and Installation ……………….2D-22

Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment………….2D-23

Specifications……………………………………………..2D-23

Service Data………………………………………………2D-23

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….2D-24

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………2D-24

Recommended Service Material …………………..2D-24

Special Tool ………………………………………………2D-24

2

2-1 Precautions:

Suspension

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Suspension

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H12000001

!

WARNING

All suspensions, bolts and nuts are an important part in that it could affect the performance of vital parts. They must be tightened to the specified torque periodically and if the suspension effect is lost, replace it with a new one.

!

CAUTION

Never attempt to heat, quench or straighten any suspension part. Replace it with a new one, or damage to the part may result.

Suspension General Diagnosis: 2A-1

Suspension

Suspension General Diagnosis

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Suspension and Wheel Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Wobbly front wheel

Possible cause

Distorted wheel rim.

Worn front wheel bearings.

Defective or incorrect tire.

Loose front axle nut.

Loose front axle pinch bolt.

Incorrect fork oil level.

Front suspension too soft

Weak spring.

Insufficient fork oil.

wrong weight fork oil.

Front suspension too stiff

Excessively viscous fork oil.

Excessive fork oil.

Front suspension too noisy

Wobbly rear wheel

Bent front axle.

Insufficient fork oil.

Loose front suspension fastener.

Distorted wheel rim.

Worn rear wheel bearing.

Defective or incorrect tire.

Worn swingarm bearing.

Worn rear suspension bearing.

Loose rear suspension fastener.

Rear suspension too soft

Weak rear shock absorber spring.

Rear shock absorber leaks oil.

Improperly suspension setting.

Rear suspension too stiff

Improper suspension setting.

Bent rear shock absorber shaft.

Bent swingarm.

Worn swingarm and rear suspension

Rear suspension too noisy

related bearings.

Loose rear suspension fastener.

Worn rear suspension bearing.

Worn swingarm bearing.

B718H12104001

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Tighten.

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Adjust.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Replace.

Replace.

Tighten.

Tighten.

Adjust.

Replace.

Check level and add.

Replace.

Replace.

Check level and drain.

Replace.

Check level and add.

Tighten.

Replace.

Tighten.

Replace.

Replace.

2B-1 Front Suspension:

Suspension

Front Suspension

Front Fork Components

Repair Instructions

B718H12206001

17

14

15

16

(b)

20

21

18

19

(a)

13

22

11

1

6

5

4

3

2

FWD

1. Front fork protector

2. Dust seal

3. Oil seal stopper ring

4. Oil seal

5. Oil seal retainer

6. Outer tube slide metal

7. Outer tube

8. Gasket

9. Damper rod bolt

7

12

10

(b)

10. Front axle pinch bolt

11. Inner tube

12. Inner tube slide metal

13. Damper rod (Inner rod cylinder)

14. O-ring

15. Spring adjuster

16. Front fork cap bolt

17. O-ring

18. Inner rod lock-nut

8

9

(a)

I718H1220001-04

19. Spring seat

20. Spacer

21. Washer

22. Spring

: 20 N

⋅ m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.5 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Apply fork oil.

: Do not reuse.

Front Fork Removal and Installation

B718H12206002

NOTE

The right and left front forks are installed symmetrically and therefore the removal procedure for one side is the same as that for the other side.

Removal

1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

!

CAUTION

• Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.

• Do not operate the front brake lever with the front wheel removed.

2) Disconnect the brake hose clamp (1) from the front fender.

3) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (2).

4) Remove the front fender by removing the bolts (3), left and right.

GSF1250/S

Front Suspension: 2B-2

5) Loose the front fork upper clamp bolt (4).

NOTE

Slightly loosen the front fork cap bolt (5) to facilitate later disassembly.

4

5

I718H1220002-02

6) Loosen the front fork lower clamp bolts (6) and remove the front fork.

NOTE

Hold the front fork by the hand to prevent sliding out of the steering stem.

1

2

6

3

GSF1250A/SA

1

I718H1220003-03

I718H1220005-03

Installation

1) Set the front fork to the front fork lower bracket temporarily by tightening the lower clamp bolts (1).

2

1

3

I718H1220004-02

I718H1220006-03

2B-3 Front Suspension:

2) Tighten the front fork cap bolt (2) to the specified torque with the special tool.

Tightening torque

Front fork cap bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

3) Loosen the lower clamp bolts.

4) Set the front fork with the upper surface “T” of the inner tube positioned 1.8 mm (0.071 in) “a” from the upper surface of the upper bracket.

7) Set the front fender plate nut to the front fender.

NOTE

Face the triangle mark on the front fender brace to the front side “A”.

2

(a)

“ a ”

“A”

“ T ”

I718H1220007-06

“a”: 1.8 mm (0.71 in))

5) Tighten the front fork lower clamp bolts (1).

Tightening torque

Front fork lower clamp bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgfm, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1220010-02

8) Remount the front fender along with the fender plate nut.

9) Install the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

NOTE

Before tightening the front axle and front axle pinch bolts, move the front fork up and down four or five times.

!

WARNING

After remounting the brake caliper, pump the brake lever until the pistons push the pads correctly.

1

(b)

I718H1220008-05

6) Tighten the front fork upper fork clamp bolt (3).

Tightening torque

Front fork upper clamp bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgfm, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1240014-02

Front Fork Inspection

B718H12206004

Refer to “Front Fork Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-

20)”.

3

(c)

I718H1220009-03

Front Fork Adjustment

B718H12206006

Turn the adjustment (1) to the desired position.

!

CAUTION

Adjust the left and right front forks to the same setting.

STD position

3rd groove from top

Front Suspension: 2B-4

2) Remove the front fork cap bolt (3) from the outer tube.

3) Remove the spring seat (2).

4) Remove the front fork cap bolt (3) with spring adjuster by loosening the inner rod lock-nut (4).

2 4 3

I649G1220040-02

5) Remove the spacer (5), washer (6) and spring (7).

1

I718H1220014-01

[A] [B] [C]

0

0

1

2

3

0

1

2

3

4

5

I718H1220015-01

[A]: Position 0

[B]: Position 3 (STD)

[C]: Position 5

Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly

B718H12206003

Refer to “Front Fork Removal and Installation (Page 2B-

2)”.

NOTE

The right and left front forks are installed symmetrically and therefore the disassembly procedure for one side is the same as that for the other side.

Disassembly

1) Remove the front fork protector (1).

5

6

7

I649G1220041-02

6) Invert the fork and stroke it several times to drain out fork oil.

7) Hold the fork inverted for a few minutes to drain oil.

I649G1220012-02

1

I649G1220039-02

2B-5 Front Suspension:

8) Remove the dust seal (8).

12) Remove the oil lock piece (12).

12

8

9) Remove the oil seal stopper ring (9).

9

I649G1220013-03 I649G1220017-03

13) Remove the oil seal by slowly pulling out the inner tube.

NOTE

Be careful not to damage the inner tube.

10) Remove the damper rod bolt (10).

I649G1220014-03

10

11) Remove the inner rod cylinder (11).

I649G1220015-03

14) Remove the following parts.

• Oil seal (13)

• Oil seal retainer (14)

• Outer tube slide metal (15)

• Inner tube slide metal (16)

13

14 15

16

I649G1220018-02

I649G1220019-05

11

I649G1220016-03

Assembly

Assemble the front fork in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The outer and inner tube’s slide metals must be replaced along with the oil seal and dust seal when assembling the front fork.

Inner tube

• Install the following parts onto the inner tube.

– Oil seal (1)

– Oil seal retainer (2)

– Outer tube slide metal (3)

!

CAUTION

When installing the oil seal to inner tube, be careful not to damage the oil seal lip.

• Apply fork oil to the outer slide metal and oil seal lip.

: Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL

SS-08 or equivalent)

Front Suspension: 2B-6

• Apply fork oil to the inner tube slide metal.

: Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL

SS-08 or equivalent)

I649G1220021-02

• Insert the inner tube into the outer tube and install the oil seal (1) using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09940–52861 (Front fork oil seal installer)

3

2

1

(A)

1

I649G1220020-02

• Hold the inner tube vertically, clean the metal groove and install the inner tube slide metal by hand.

!

CAUTION

Do not damage the Teflon coated surface of the inner tube’s slide metal when mounting it.

I649G1220022-05

• Install the oil seal stopper ring (4).

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the oil seal stopper ring is fitted securely.

• Install the dust seal (5).

5

4

I649G1220023-03

2B-7 Front Suspension:

Damper rod bolt

• Insert the inner rod/damper rod (cartridge) (6) and the oil lock piece (7) into the inner tube.

7

Fork oil

• Place the front fork vertically without spring.

• Compress it fully.

• Pour specified front fork oil up to the top level of the inner tube.

: Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL

SS-08 or equivalent)

Capacity (each leg)

GSF1250/A: 472 ml (16.0/16.6 US/lmp oz)

GSF1250S/SA: 471 ml (15.9/16.0 US/lmp oz)

6

I649G1220024-02

• Apply thread lock to the damper rod bolt and tighten it to the specified torque with a 6-mm hexagon wrench and special tools.

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Front fork damper rod bolt: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m,

14.5 lb-ft)

I649G1220026-02

• Move the inner rod slowly with the special tool more than ten times until bubbles do not come out from the oil.

NOTE

Refill front fork oil up to the top of the inner tube to find bubbles while bleeding air.

Special tool

(A): 09940–52841 (Inner rod holder)

(A)

I718H1220012-03

I649G1220027-05

• Refill specified front fork oil up to the top level of the inner tube again. Move the inner tube up and down several strokes until bubbles do not come out from the oil.

• Keep the front fork vertically and wait 5 – 6 minutes.

NOTE

• Always keep oil level over the cartridge top end, or air may enter the cartridge during this procedure.

• Take extreme attention to pump out air completely.

Front Suspension: 2B-8

Fork spring

• Install the fork spring as shown.

NOTE

The smaller pitch “a” should face to the bottom side of the front fork.

“a”

I649G1220028-03

• Hold the front fork vertically and adjust fork oil level with the special tool.

NOTE

When adjusting the fork oil level, remove the fork spring and compress the inner tube fully.

Special tool

(A): 09943–74111 (Fork oil level gauge)

Fork oil level “a”

GSF1250/A: 143 mm (5.6 in.)

GSF1250S/SA: 144 mm (5.7 in)

(

A

)

I649G1220030-03

Inner rod and lock-nut

• Install the special tool and pull up the inner rod.

Special tool

(A): 09940–52841 (Inner rod holder)

(A)

I649G1220031-04

“ a ”

I649G1220029-03

2B-9 Front Suspension:

• Install the front fork cap (1).

NOTE

Before installing the front fork cap, turn the inner rod lock-nut (2) completely to the lower position as shown.

• Tighten the lock-nut (2) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Inner rod lock-nut (a): 20 N·m (2.0 kgf-m, 14.5 lbft)

• Install the front fork protector (4).

NOTE

Fit the projection of the front fork protector to the depression of the front fork outer tube.

4

1

2

(a)

I718H1220013-01

• Apply fork oil lightly to the O-ring (3).

!

CAUTION

Use a new O-ring (3) to prevent oil leakage.

: Oil 99000–99001–SS8 (SUZUKI FORK OIL

SS-08 or equivalent)

I649G1220034-02

Front Fork Parts Inspection

B718H12206005

Refer to “Front Fork Disassembly and Assembly

(Page 2B-4)”.

Inner and Outer Tubes

Inspect the inner tube sliding surface and outer tube sliding surface for scuffing.

3

I649G1220035-03

I718H1220016-01

Fork Spring

Measure the fork spring free length. If it is shorter than the service limit, replace it with a new one.

Front fork spring free length

Service limit: 382 mm (15.0 in.)

Front Suspension: 2B-10

Damper Rod

Move the inner rod by hand to inspect it if operating smoothly.

I649G1220037-02

I649G1220036-02

Specifications

Service Data

Front Fork

Unit: mm (in.)

Item

Front fork stroke

Front fork inner tube O.D.

Front fork spring free length

Front fork oil level (without spring, outer tube fully compressed )

Front fork spring adjuster

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/SA

Standard

130 (5.1)

43 (1.7)

390.4 (15.37)

143 (5.6)

144 (5.7)

3rd groove from top

Oil

Item

Front fork oil type

Front fork oil capacity (each leg)

Specification

Fork oil SS-08 or equivalent fork oil

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/SA

472 ml (16.0/16.6 US/lmp oz)

471 ml (15.9/16.6 US/lmp oz)

B718H12207001

Limit

382 (15.0)

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Front fork cap bolt

Front fork lower clamp bolt

Front fork upper clamp bolt

Front fork damper rod bolt

Inner rod lock-nut

N

m

23

23

23

20

20

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.0

2.0

lb-ft

16.5

16.5

16.5

14.5

14.5

B718H12207002

Note

) (Page 2B-3)

) (Page 2B-3)

) (Page 2B-3)

) (Page 2B-7)

) (Page 2B-9)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Front Fork Components (Page 2B-1)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

2B-11 Front Suspension:

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Oil

Material

Thread lock cement

B718H12208001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI FORK OIL SS-08 or equivalent

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–99001–

SS8

Note

) (Page 2B-6) / ) (Page 2B-

6) / ) (Page 2B-7) /

) (Page 2B-9)

P/No.: 99000–32110 ) (Page 2B-7)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Front Fork Components (Page 2B-1)”

Special Tool

09940–52841

Inner rod holder

) (Page 2B-7) / ) (Page 2B-

8)

09940–52861

Front fork oil seal installer

) (Page 2B-6)

B718H12208002

09943–74111

Fork oil level gauge

) (Page 2B-8)

Suspension

Rear Suspension

Rear Suspension Components

Repair Instructions

1

2

(a)

6

3

(b)

6

(b)

4

5

(b)

2

(a)

3

7

Rear Suspension: 2C-1

B718H12306001

12

(c)

9

10

8

11

1. Rear shock absorber

2. Rear shock absorber mounting nut

3. Cushion rod

4. Cushion lever

5. Cushion lever mounting nut

6. Cushion rod mounting nut

7. Chain case

8. Swingarm

9. Plate

10. Chain adjuster

11. Chain buffer

12. Swingarm pivot nut

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

: 78 N

⋅ m (7.8 kgf-m, 56.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease to the bearing.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1230001-01

2C-2 Rear Suspension:

Rear Suspension Assembly Construction

Left Right

1

(a)

2

(a)

1

6

5

)

4

(b)

4

2

5

(b)

3

B718H12306002

3

(b)

6

(c)

1. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Upper)

2. Rear shock absorber mounting nut (Lower)

3. Cushion rod mounting nut (Upper)

4. Cushion rod mounting nut (Lower)

5. Cushion lever mounting nut

6. Swingarm pivot nut

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m 36.0 lb-ft)

: 78 N

⋅ m (7.8 kgf-m 56.5 lb-ft)

I718H1230042-01

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m 72.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease to the bearing.

Rear Shock Absorber Removal and Installation

B718H12306003

Removal

1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand and support the motorcycle with a jack to be no load for the rear shock absorber.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt and nut, and cushion lever mounting bolt and nut.

Rear Suspension: 2C-3

Installation

Install the rear shock absorber in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Temporary install the rear shock absorber and cushion lever.

• Tighten the rear shock absorber upper/lower mounting bolts and nuts.

Tightening torque

Rear shock absorber mounting nut (a): 50 N·m (

5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

• Tighten the cushion lever mounting bolt and nut.

Tightening torque

Cushion lever mounting nut (b): 78 N·m (7.8 kgfm, 56.5 lb-ft)

I718H1230002-01

4) Remove the shock absorber upper mounting bolt and nut.

(b)

(a)

(a)

I718H1230005-03

Rear Suspension Inspection

B718H12306004

Refer to “Rear Suspension Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-20)”.

5) Remove the shock absorber.

I718H1230003-01

I718H1230004-01

2C-4 Rear Suspension:

Rear Shock Absorber Inspection

B718H12306005

Inspect the rear shock absorber in the following procedures:

1) Remove the rear shock absorber. Refer to “Rear

Shock Absorber Removal and Installation (Page 2C-

3)”.

2) Inspect the rear shock absorber for damage and oil leakage, and absorber bushing for wear and damage. If any defect is found, replace the rear shock absorber with a new one.

!

CAUTION

Do not attempt to disassemble the rear shock absorber. It is unserviceable.

Damping Force Adjustment

Turn the damping force adjuster (1) to the desired position.

NOTE

Turn the adjuster clockwise to stiffen the damping force and turn it counterclockwise to soften the damping force.

STD position

1-1/4 turns out from stiffest position

1

I718H1230006-01

3) Install the rear shock absorber. Refer to “Rear Shock

Absorber Removal and Installation (Page 2C-3)”.

Rear Suspension Adjustment

B718H12306006

After installing the rear suspension, adjust the spring pre-load and damping force as follows.

Spring Pre-load Adjustment

Turn the spring tension ring (1) to the desired position.

NOTE

Position 1 provides the softest spring tension and position 7 provides the stiffest.

STD position

GSF1250/A: 3rd position

GSF1250S/SA: 4th position

I649G1230007-02

Rear Shock Absorber Disposal

B718H12306007

Refer to “Rear Shock Absorber Removal and Installation

(Page 2C-3)”.

The rear shock absorber unit contains high-pressure nitrogen gas.

!

WARNING

• Mishandling can cause explosion.

• Keep away from fire and heat. High gas pressure caused by heat can cause an explosion.

• Release gas pressure before disposing.

Gas Pressure Release

Make sure to observe the following precautions.

!

WARNING

• Never apply heat or disassemble the damper unit since it can explode or oil can splash hazardously.

• When discarding the rear cushion unit, be sure to release gas pressure from the unit following the procedures.

1

I649G1230006-03

1) Mark the drill center at the location “A” using a center punch.

“ a ”

“A”

Rear Suspension: 2C-5

Cushion Lever Removal and Installation

B718H12306008

Removal

1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand and support the motorcycle with a jack to be no load for the cushion lever.

2) Remove the cushion lever by removing its related bolts and nuts.

“a”: 10 mm (0.39 in.) “A”: Mark the drill hole

I649G1230008-02

2) Wrap rear shock absorber (1) with a vinyl bag (2) and fix it on a vise as shown.

3) Drill a 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in.) hole at the marked drill center using a drilling machine and let out gas while taking care not to get the vinyl bag entangled with the drill bit.

!

WARNING

• Be sure to wear protective glasses since drilling chips and oil may fly off with blowing gas when the drill bit has penetrated through the body.

• Make sure to drill at the specified position.

Otherwise, pressurized oil many spout out forcefully.

I718H1230007-01

Installation

Install the cushion lever in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following point:

• Tighten each nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Cushion lever mounting nut (a): 78 N·m (7.8 kgfm, 56.5 lb-ft)

Cushion rod mounting nut (b): 78 N·m (7.8 kgf-m,

56.5 lb-ft)

Rear shock absorber mounting nut (c): 50 N·m (

5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

(a)

(b)

(c)

I718H1230008-01

1

2

I649G1230009-03

2C-6 Rear Suspension:

Cushion Lever Inspection

B718H12306009

Refer to “Cushion Lever Removal and Installation

(Page 2C-5)”.

Spacer

1) Remove the spacers from the cushion lever.

2) Inspect the spacers for any flaws or other damage. If any defects are found, replace the spacers with new ones.

Cushion Rod

Refer to “Swingarm Related Parts Inspection (Page 2C-

9)”.

Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and

Installation

B718H12306010

Removal

1) Remove the cushion lever. Refer to “Cushion Lever

Removal and Installation (Page 2C-5)”.

2) Remove the cushion lever bearings using the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09923–73210 (Bearing remover)

(B): 09930–30104 (Rotor remover slide shaft)

(C): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

I718H1230009-01

Cushion Lever Bearing

1) Insert the spacers into bearings.

2) Check the play by moving the spacers up and down.

If excessive play is noted, replace the bearing with a new one. Refer to “Cushion Lever Bearing Removal and Installation (Page 2C-6)”.

(B)

(A)

I718H1230012-01

(C)

I718H1230010-01

Cushion Lever

Inspect the cushion lever for damage. If any defect is found, replace the cushion lever with a new one.

I718H1230013-01

(C)

I718H1230015-01

I718H1230011-01

Installation

!

CAUTION

The removed bearings must be replaced with new ones.

1) Press the bearings into the cushion lever with the special tool.

NOTE

When installing the bearing, stamped mark on the bearing must face outside.

Special tool

(A): 09924–84521 (Bearing installer set)

Rear Suspension: 2C-7

Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and

Installation

B718H12306011

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the drive chain cover (1).

1

(A)

I718H1230014-02

2) Apply grease to the bearings.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

3) Remove the brake hose clamps.

I718H1230017-01

I718H1230018-01

4) Remove the cushion lever (2) and rear shock absorber (3). Refer to “Cushion Lever Removal and

Installation (Page 2C-5)” and “Rear Shock Absorber

Removal and Installation (Page 2C-3)”.

I718H1230016-01

3) Install the cushion lever. Refer to “Cushion Lever

Removal and Installation (Page 2C-5)”.

2

3

I718H1230019-01

2C-8 Rear Suspension:

5) Remove the pivot shaft end caps (4), left and right.

6) Remove the swingarm by removing the pivot shaft nut (5) and washer.

4

5

Installation

Install the swingarm in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Temporarily the cushion rod mounting nut.

NOTE

The stamped marks “A” on the cushion rod should be face out side.

I718H1230020-01

7) Remove the chain buffer (6).

6

8) Remove the cushion rods (7).

7

I718H1230021-02

“A”

I718H1230024-04

• Install the washer and swingarm pivot nut.

• Tighten the swingarm pivot nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Swingarm pivot nut (a): 100 N·m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

(a)

I718H1230025-02

I718H1230022-01

9) Remove the plates (8).

8

I718H1230023-01

• Tighten the cushion lever, cushion rod and rear shock absorber mounting nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Cushion rod mounting nut (b): 78 N·m (7.8 kgf-m,

56.5 lb-ft)

Cushion lever mounting nut (c): 78 N·m (7.8 kgfm, 56.5 lb-ft)

Rear shock absorber mounting nut (d): 50 N·m (

5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

Rear Suspension: 2C-9

Swingarm Related Parts Inspection

B718H12306012

Refer to “Swingarm / Cushion Rod Removal and

Installation (Page 2C-7)”.

Spacers

1) Remove the spacers from the swingarm.

2) Inspect the spacers for wear and damage. If any defects are found, replace the spacers with new ones.

(c)

(b)

(d)

I718H1230040-02

I718H1230028-01

Chain Buffer

Inspect the chain buffer for wear and damage. If any defect is found, replace the chain buffer with a new one.

(d)

(b)

I718H1230027-02

I718H1230041-01

I718H1230029-01

Swingarm Bearing and Cushion Rod Bearing

1) Insert the spacers into bearings.

2) Check the play by moving the spacers up and down.

If excessive play is noted, replace the bearing with a new one. Refer to “Swingarm Bearing Removal and

Installation (Page 2C-10)”.

I718H1230030-01

2C-10 Rear Suspension:

Swingarm

Inspect the swingarm for damage. If any defect is found, replace the swingarm with a new one.

Swingarm Bearing Removal and Installation

B718H12306013

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the swingarm. Refer to “Swingarm /

Cushion Rod Removal and Installation (Page 2C-7)”.

3) Draw out the swingarm pivot bearings (1) using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)

I718H1230031-01

Cushion Rod

Inspect the cushion rods for damage and bend. If any defects are found, replace the cushion rods with new ones.

1

(A)

I718H1230033-01

4) Remove the center spacer (2).

I718H1230032-01

Swingarm Pivot Shaft

Measure the swingarm pivot shaft runout using the dial gauge. If the runout exceeds the service limit, replace the pivot shaft.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Swingarm pivot shaft runout

Service limit: 0.3 mm (0.01 in)

2

I718H1230034-01

5) Remove the swingarm cushion rod bearings (3) using the special tools.

Special tool

(B): 09923–73210 (Bearing remover)

(C): 09930–30104 (Rotor remover slide shaft)

(A)

(B)

(B)

3

(C)

(C)

I649G1230034-03

I718H1230035-04

Installation

!

CAUTION

The removed bearings must be replaced with new ones.

1) Press the swingarm cushion rod bearings with the special tool.

NOTE

When installing the bearing, stamped mark on the bearing must face outside.

Special tool

(A): 09924–84521 (Bearing installer set)

Rear Suspension: 2C-11

2) Install the center spacer.

3) Press the bearings into the swingarm pivot with the special tool.

NOTE

When installing the bearing, stamped mark on the bearing must face outside.

Special tool

(B): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer)

(A)

I718H1230036-01

(B)

I649G1230039-04

4) Apply grease to the bearings.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1230038-03

5) Install the swingarm. Refer to “Swingarm / Cushion

Rod Removal and Installation (Page 2C-7)”.

6) Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

2C-12 Rear Suspension:

Specifications

Service Data

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Rear shock absorber spring adjuster

Rear shock absorber damping force adjuster

Rear wheel travel

Swingarm pivot shaft runout

GSF1250/A

GSF1250S/SA

Rebound

Standard

3rd position

4th position

1-1/4 turns out from stiffest position

136 (5.4)

B718H12307001

Limit

0.3 (0.01)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Rear shock absorber mounting nut

Cushion lever mounting nut

N

m

50

78

Tightening torque kgf-m lb-ft

5.0 36.0

7.8 56.5

B718H12307002

Note

) (Page 2C-3) /

) (Page 2C-5) /

) (Page 2C-9)

) (Page 2C-3) /

) (Page 2C-5) /

) (Page 2C-9)

) (Page 2C-5) /

) (Page 2C-9)

) (Page 2C-8)

Cushion rod mounting nut

Swingarm pivot nut

78

100

7.8 56.5

10.0 72.5

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Rear Suspension Components (Page 2C-1)”

“Rear Suspension Assembly Construction (Page 2C-2)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Rear Suspension: 2C-13

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

B718H12308001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 2C-7) / ) (Page 2Cequivalent 11)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Rear Suspension Components (Page 2C-1)”

“Rear Suspension Assembly Construction (Page 2C-2)”

Special Tool

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm)

) (Page 2C-10)

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

) (Page 2C-10)

B718H12308002

09900–21304

V-block (100 mm)

) (Page 2C-10)

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

) (Page 2C-6)

09921–20240

Bearing remover set

) (Page 2C-10)

09924–84521

Bearing installer set

) (Page 2C-7) / ) (Page 2C-

11)

09941–34513

Steering race installer

) (Page 2C-11)

09923–73210

Bearing remover

) (Page 2C-6) / ) (Page 2C-

10)

09930–30104

Rotor remover slide shaft

) (Page 2C-6) / ) (Page 2C-

10)

2D-1 Wheels and Tires:

Suspension

Wheels and Tires

Precautions

Precautions for Wheel and Tire

!

WARNING

B718H12400001

• Proper tire pressure and proper tire loading are important factors. Over loading tire can lead to tire failure and loss of motorcycle control.

• Under-inflated tires make smooth cornering difficult, and can result in rapid tire wear.

• Over-inflated tires have a smaller amount of tire in contact with the load, which can contribute to skidding and loss of control.

• Replace the wheel when wheel runout exceed the service limit or if find damage such as distortion, crack, nick or scratch.

• When tire replacement is necessary, the original equipment type tire should be used.

• Do not mix different types of tires on the same vehicle such as radial and bias-belted tires except in emergencies, because handling may be seriously affected and may result in loss of control.

• Replacement wheel must be equivalent to the original equivalent wheel.

Front Wheel Components

GSF1250/S

2

(a)

3

Repair Instructions

10

9

(b)

8

5

Wheels and Tires: 2D-2

B718H12406015

11

4

6

7

5

4

12

1

1. Front axle

2. Brake disc bolt

3. Brake disc

4. Dust seal

5. Bearing

6. Spacer

3

7. Front wheel

8. Collar

9. Front axle bolt

10. Tire

11. Wheel balancer

12. Air valve

2

(a)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1240050-02

2D-3 Wheels and Tires:

GSF1250A/SA

2

(a)

10

11

(b)

3

8

5

9

4

12

13

6

7

5

4

14

1

1. Front axle

2. Brake disc bolt

3. Brake disc

4. Dust seal

5. Bearing

6. Spacer

7. Front wheel

FW

D

FWD

3

8. Wheel speed sensor rotor

9. Sensor rotor bolt

10. Wheel speed sensor bracket

11. Front axle bolt

12. Tire

13. Wheel balancer

14. Air valve

2

(a)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1240001-04

Front Wheel Assembly Construction

GSF1250/S

Left Right

Wheels and Tires: 2D-4

B718H12406002

2

(b)

1

(a)

4

(a)

“ a ”

2

(b)

1

(a)

4

(a)

3

(c)

1. Brake disc bolt

2. Brake caliper mounting bolt

3. Front axle bolt

4. Front axle pinch bolt

“a”: Clearance

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

I718H1240044-02

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

2D-5 Wheels and Tires:

GSF1250A/SA

Left Right

2

(b)

1

(a)

4

(a)

“ a ”

2

(b)

1

(a)

“ b ”

5

3

(c)

4

(a)

1. Brake disc bolt

2. Brake caliper mounting bolt

3. Front axle bolt

4. Front axle pinch bolt

5. Front wheel speed sensor

“a”: Clearance

“b”: 0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1240002-02

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

Front Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

B718H12406003

Removal

1) Raise the front wheel off the ground and support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden block.

!

CAUTION

Do not carry out the work with the motorcycle resting on the side-stand. Do not support the motorcycle with the exhaust pipes. Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.

2) Remove the front wheel speed sensor by removing the mounting bolts. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Front

Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 4E (Page 4E-71)”.

3) Remove the brake calipers. Refer to “Front Brake

Caliper Removal and Installation in Section 4B

(Page 4B-3)”.

!

CAUTION

Do not operate the brake lever while removing the caliper.

Wheels and Tires: 2D-6

6) Loosen two axle pinch bolts (3) on the left front fork leg.

7) Draw out the front axle and remove the front wheel.

NOTE

After removing the front wheel, fit the calipers temporarily to the original positions.

3

I718H1240006-02

8) Remove the collar (4) (GSF1250/S) or front wheel speed sensor bracket (5) (GSF1250A/SA).

GSF1250/S

4

GSF1250A/SA

I718H1240008-02

4) Loosen two axle pinch bolts (1) on the right front fork leg.

5) Remove the front axle bolt (2).

I718H1240004-03

5

I718H1240007-02

2

1

I718H1240005-01

2D-7 Wheels and Tires:

Installation

1) Install the collar (1) (GSF1250/S) or front wheel speed sensor bracket (2) (GSF1250A/SA) into the right side of the wheel.

GSF1250/S

3) Install the front wheel with the front axle and tighten the front axle bolt temporarily.

!

WARNING

The directional arrow on the tire should point to the wheel rotation, when remounting the wheel.

1

I718H1240010-02

GSF1250A/SA

2

I718H1240009-02

2) Align the recess “A” on the speed sensor bracket with the stopper “B” on the right front fork.

(GSF1250A/SA)

I718H1240011-01

4) Tighten the brake caliper mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Front brake caliper mounting bolt (a): 26 N·m (

2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

!

WARNING

After remounting the brake calipers, pump the brake lever until the pistons push the pad correctly.

(a)

(a)

“B”

“A”

I718H1240046-01

I718H1240012-01

5) Hold the front axle with the special tool and tighten the front axle bolt to the specified torque.

Special tool

(A): 09900–18740 (Hexagon socket (24 mm))

Tightening torque

Front axle bolt (a): 100 N·m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lbft)

6) Tighten two axle pinch bolts on the right fork leg to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Front axle pinch bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

(A)

(a)

(b)

Wheels and Tires: 2D-8

Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection

B718H12406004

Refer to “Front Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-6)”

Tire

Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-19)”.

Front Brake Disc

Refer to “Front Brake Disc Inspection in Section 4B

(Page 4B-7)”.

Dust Seal

Inspect the dust seal lips for wear or damage. If any defects are found, replace the dust seal with the new ones. Refer to “Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing

Removal and Installation (Page 2D-9)”.

I718H1240013-01

7) Move the front fork up and down 4 or 5 times.

I718H1240014-02

8) Tighten two axle pinch bolts on the left front fork leg to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Front axle pinch bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1240017-02

Wheel Axle

Using a dial gauge, check the wheel axle for runout. If the runout exceeds the limit, replace the axle shaft.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

Wheel axle runout

Service limit: 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

(A)

(B)

(c)

I718H1240015-01

9) Install the front wheel speed sensor mounting bolts.

(GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Front Wheel Speed

Sensor Removal and Installation in Section 4E

(Page 4E-71)”.

10) Check the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to

“Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and

Installation in Section 4E (Page 4E-71)”.

(C)

I649G1240054-02

2D-9 Wheels and Tires:

Wheel

1) Remove the brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake Pad

Replacement in Section 4B (Page 4B-2)”.

2) Make sure that the wheel runout checked as shown does not exceed the service limit. An excessive runout is usually due to worn or loosened wheel bearings and can be reduced by replacing the bearings. If bearing replacement fails to reduce the runout, replace the wheel.

3) Install the brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake Pad

Replacement in Section 4B (Page 4B-2)”.

Wheel rim runout

Service limit (Axial and Radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation

B718H12406005

Removal

1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-6)”.

2) Remove the front wheel sensor speed sensor rotor by removing the mounting bolts. (GSF1250A/SA)

Refer to “Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation in Section 4E (Page 4E-72)”.

3) Remove the dust seals (1).

Special tool

(A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)

(A)

I649G1240014-02

Wheel Bearing

Inspect the play of the wheel bearings by finger while they are in the wheel. Rotate the inner race by finger to inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the bearing in the following procedure if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Front Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing

Removal and Installation (Page 2D-9)”.

1

I718H1240020-02

4) Remove the bearings (2) using the special tool.

Special tool

(B): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)

(B)

I649G1240015-02

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor (GSF1250A/SA)

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection in Section 4E (Page 4E-74)”.

5) Remove the spacer (3).

2

I718H1240018-02

3

I718H1240019-02

Installation

!

CAUTION

The removed dust seals and bearings must be replaced with new ones.

1) Apply grease to the wheel bearings.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Wheels and Tires: 2D-10

2) First install the right wheel bearing, then install the spacer (1) and left wheel bearing with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09924–84510 (Bearing installer set)

!

CAUTION

The sealed cover of the bearing must face outside.

(A)

I649G1240019-02

Left Right

I649G1240020-03

Left Right

(A)

1. Spacer

“ a ”

(A) )

1

“a”: Clearance

I649G1240021-06

2D-11 Wheels and Tires:

3) Install the dust seals with the special tool.

Special tool

(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

(B)

4) Apply grease to the lip of dust seals.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1240021-01 I718H1240022-01

5) Install the front wheel speed sensor rotor as the letters “50T” face outside. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to

“Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and

Installation in Section 4E (Page 4E-72)”.

6) Install the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-6)”.

Rear Wheel Components

GSF1250/S

14

(c)

13

12

11

10

Wheels and Tires: 2D-12

B718H12406006

17

18

7

9

8

15

16

1. Spacer

2. Rear sprocket

3. Dust seal

4. Bearing

5. Sprocket mounting drum

6. Retainer

7. Wheel damper

8. Bearing

9. Spacer

6

(b)

5

4

3

10. Bearing

11. Dust seal

12. Collar

13. Rear brake disc

14. Rear axle

15. Rear wheel

16. Air valve

17. Tire

18. Wheel balancer

2

1

(a)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 60 N

⋅ m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1240024-03

2D-13 Wheels and Tires:

GSF1250A/SA

16

(c)

14

15

13

12

11

10

19

20

7

9

8

17

18

1. Spacer

2. Rear sprocket

3. Dust seal

4. Bearing

5. Sprocket mounting drum

6. Retainer

7. Wheel damper

8. Bearing

9. Spacer

6

(b)

5

4

3

10. Bearing

11. Dust seal

12. Collar

13. Wheel speed sensor rotor

14. Sensor rotor bolt

15. Rear brake disc

16. Rear axle

17. Rear wheel

18. Air valve

2

1

(a)

19. Tire

20. Wheel balancer

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 60 N

⋅ m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1240025-03

Rear Wheel Assembly Construction

GSF1250/S

Left

1

(a)

Right

Wheels and Tires: 2D-14

B718H12406018

4

(d)

2

(b)

“ a ”

3

(c)

1. Rear sprocket nut

2. Rear axle nut

3. Brake caliper mounting bolt

4. Brake disc bolt

“a”: Clearance

: 60 N

⋅ m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

I718H1240027-03

2D-15 Wheels and Tires:

GSF1250A/SA

Left

1

(a)

Right

“ b ”

4

(d)

5

2

(b)

“ a ”

3

(c)

1. Rear sprocket nut

2. Rear axle nut

3. Brake caliper mounting bolt

4. Brake disc bolt

5. Rear wheel speed sensor

“a”: Clearance

“b”: 0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

: 60 N

⋅ m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft)

: 100 N

⋅ m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

I718H1240026-07

Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

B718H12406008

Removal

1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.

2) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor by removing the mounting bolts. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Rear

Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 4E (Page 4E-71)”.

3) Remove the rear axle nut (1) and draw out the rear axle.

Wheels and Tires: 2D-16

6) Remove the spacer (2) and collar (3).

2

3

I718H1240031-01

Installation

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection in Section 4E (Page 4E-74)”.

1) Install the spacer (1) and collar (2).

1

2

1

4) Remove the rear axle and disengage the drive chain from the rear sprocket.

5) Remove the rear wheel assembly.

I718H1240029-01

!

CAUTION

Do not operate the rear brake pedal with the rear wheel removed.

I718H1240033-01

2) Install the rear wheel with the rear axle and tighten the rear axle nut temporarily.

3) Adjust the drive chain slack after installing the rear wheel. Refer to “Drive Chain Inspection and

Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”.

4) Tighten the rear axle nut (3) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear axle nut (a): 100 N·m (10.0 kgf-m, 72.5 lbft)

!

WARNING

After remounting the rear wheel, pump the brake pedal several times to check for proper brake operation.

I718H1240030-02

3

(a)

I718H1240034-01

2D-17 Wheels and Tires:

5) Install the rear wheel speed sensor mounting bolts.

(GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Rear Wheel Speed

Sensor Removal and Installation in Section 4E

(Page 4E-71)”.

6) Check the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to

“Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation in Section 4E (Page 4E-71)”.

Rear Wheel Related Parts Inspection

B718H12406009

Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-16)”.

Tire

Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-19)”.

Rear Brake Disc

Refer to “Rear Brake Disc Inspection in Section 4C

(Page 4C-7)”.

Wheel Damper

Refer to “Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection in

Section 3A (Page 3A-5)”.

Sprocket

Refer to “Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection in

Section 3A (Page 3A-5)”.

Dust Seal

Inspect the dust seal lip for wear or damage. If any defects is found, replace the dust seal with a new one.

Refer to “Rear Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-18)”.

Wheel Axle

Using a dial gauge, check the wheel axle for runout, If the runout exceeds the limit, replace the axle shaft.

Wheel axle runout

Service limit: 0.25 mm (0.010 in.)

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

(C): 09900–21304 (V-block (100 mm))

(A)

(B)

(C)

I649G1230034-03

Wheel

1) Remove the brake pads. Refer to “Rear Brake Pad

Replacement in Section 4C (Page 4C-2)”.

2) Make sure that the wheel runout checked as shown does not exceed the service limit. An excessive runout is usually due to worn or loosened wheel bearings and can be reduced by replacing the bearings. If bearing replacement fails to reduce the runout, replace the wheel.

3) Install the brake pads. Refer to “Rear Brake Pad

Replacement in Section 4C (Page 4C-2)”.

Wheel rim runout

Service limit (Axial and Radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

I718H1240037-02

I649G1240014-02

Bearing

Inspect the play of the wheel bearings by hand while they are in the wheel. Rotate the inner race by hand to inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the bearing if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-18)”.

Wheels and Tires: 2D-18

3) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor rotor by removing the mounting bolts. (GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and

Installation in Section 4E (Page 4E-73)”.

4) Remove the dust seal (2).

Special tool

(A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)

I649G1240015-02

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor (GSF1250A/SA)

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection in Section 4E (Page 4E-74)”.

Rear Wheel Dust Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation

B718H12406010

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the rear sprocket mounting drum assembly

(1) from the rear wheel.

(A)

2

I718H1240038-04

5) Remove the bearings (3) on both sides using the special tool.

Special tool

(B): 09921–20240 (Bearing remover set)

(B)

3

1

I718H1240052-02

I718H1240040-03

6) Remove the spacer.

Installation

!

CAUTION

The removed dust seals and bearings must be replaced with new ones.

1) Apply grease to the wheel bearings.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I649G1240019-02

2D-19 Wheels and Tires:

2) First install the right wheel bearing, then install the spacer (1) and left wheel bearing with the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer)

(B): 09924–84510 (Bearing installer set)

!

CAUTION

The sealed cover of the bearing must face outside.

(A)

(B)

3) Install a new dust seal with the special tool.

Special tool

(C): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

(C)

I718H1240042-01

4) Apply grease to the dust seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Left Right

I649G1240030-02

(B)

Left Right

(A)

(B)

I718H1240043-01

5) Install the rear wheel speed sensor rotor.

(GSF1250A/SA) Refer to “Rear Wheel Speed

Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation in Section 4E

(Page 4E-73)”.

6) Install the rear sprocket mounting drum assembly.

(A)

(B) “ a ”

1. Spacer

1

“a”: Clearance

(B)

I649G1240034-03

I718H1240053-01

7) Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

Tire Removal and Installation

B718H12406011

Removal

The most critical factor of a tubeless tire is the seal between the wheel rim and the tire bead. For this reason, it is recommended to use a tire changer that can satisfy this sealing requirement and can make the operation efficient as well as functional.

1) Removal the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)” and “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the mounting drum from the rear wheel.

(For rear wheel)

Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-16)”.

3) Remove the valve core.

4) Remove the tire using the tire changer.

!

CAUTION

For operating procedures, refer to the instructions supplied by the tire changer manufacturer.

NOTE

When removing the tire in case of repair or inspection, mark the tire with a chalk to indicate the tire position relative to the valve position. Even though the tire is refitted to the original position after repairing puncture, the tire may have to be balanced again since such a repair can cause imbalance.

Wheels and Tires: 2D-20

Installation

!

CAUTION

Do not reuse the valve which has been once removed.

1) Apply tire lubricant to the tire bead.

!

CAUTION

Never use oil, grease or gasoline on the tire bead in place of tire lubricant.

I649G1240038-02

2) Install the tire onto the wheel.

!

CAUTION

For installation procedure of tire onto the wheel, follow the instructions given by the tire changer manufacturer.

NOTE

• When installing the tire, the arrow “A” on the side wall should point to the direction of wheel rotation.

• Align the chalk mark put on the tire at the time of removal with the valve position.

I649G1240037-02

“A”

I649G1240039-02

2D-21 Wheels and Tires:

3) Bounce the tire several times while rotating. This makes the tire bead expand outward to contact the wheel, thereby facilitating air inflation.

4) Install the valve core and inflate the tire.

!

WARNING

• Do not inflate the tire to more than 400 kPa

(4.0 kgf/cm 2 , 57 psi). If inflated beyond this limit, the tire can burst and possibly cause injury. Do not stand directly over the tire while inflating.

• In the case of preset pressure air inflator, pay special care for the set pressure adjustment.

5) In this condition, check the “grim line” “B” cast on the tire side walls. The line must be equidistant from the wheel rim all around.

6) If the distance between the rim line and wheel rim varies, this indicates that the bead is not properly seated. If this is the case, deflate the tire completely and unseat the bead for both sides. Coat the bead with lubricant and fit the tire again.

“B”

I649G1240040-02

7) When the bead has been fitted properly, adjust the pressure to specification.

8) As necessary, adjust the tire balance. Refer to

“Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment (Page 2D-

23)”.

Cold inflation tire pressure

Solo riding

Dual riding

Front

250 kPa

(2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

250 kPa

(2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

Rear

290 kPa

(2.90 kgf/cm psi)

290 kPa psi)

2

(2.90 kgf/cm 2

, 42

, 42

9) Install the mounting drum to the rear wheel.

(For rear wheel) Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly

Removal and Installation (Page 2D-16)”.

10) Install the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)” and “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

Wheel / Tire / Air Valve Inspection and Cleaning

B718H12406012

Refer to “Tire Removal and Installation (Page 2D-20)”.

Wheel

Wipe the wheel clean and check for the following points:

• Distortion and crack

• Any flaws and scratches at the bead seating area.

• Wheel rim runout. Refer to “Front Wheel Related

Parts Inspection (Page 2D-8)” and “Rear Wheel

Related Parts Inspection (Page 2D-17)”.

I649G1240041-02

Tire

Tire must be checked for the following points:

• Nick and rupture on side wall

• Tire tread depth (Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section

0B (Page 0B-19)”.)

• Tread separation

• Abnormal, uneven wear on tread

• Surface damage on bead

• Localized tread wear due to skidding (Flat spot)

• Abnormal condition of inner liner

I649G1240042-02

I649G1240043-02

Air Valve

Inspect the air valve for peeling and damage. If any defect is found, replace the air valve with a new one.

Refer to “Air Valve Removal and Installation (Page 2D-

22)”.

Wheels and Tires: 2D-22

Installation

Install the air valve in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Any dust or rust around the valve hole (1) must be cleaned off.

1

I649G1240044-02

Inspect the valve core seal (1) for wear and damage. If any defect is found, replace the valve core with a new one. Refer to “Air Valve Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-22)”.

1

I649G1240045-02

1. Seal

Air Valve Removal and Installation

B718H12406013

Removal

1) Remove the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)” and “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the tire. Refer to “Tire Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-20)”.

3) Remove the air valve (1) from the wheel.

I718H1240054-01

• Install the air valve (2) in the wheel (3).

!

CAUTION

• Be careful not to damage the lip (4) of the valve.

• Replace the air valve with a new one.

NOTE

To properly install the valve into the valve hole, apply a special tire lubricant or neutral soapy liquid to the valve.

3

2. Valve

4

3. Wheel

2

I718H1240055-01

4. Valve lip

1

I649G1240046-02

2D-23 Wheels and Tires:

Wheel Balance Check and Adjustment

B718H12406014

Check and adjust the wheel balance in the following procedures:

1) Removal the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)” and “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the mounting drum from the rear wheel.

(For rear wheel)

Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-16)”.

3) Check the wheel balance using the balancer and adjust the wheel balance if necessary.

!

CAUTION

For operating procedures, refer to the instructions supplied by the wheel balancer manufacturer.

4) When installing the balancer weight to the wheel, set the balancer weight on center rib of the wheel.

I718H1240051-01

5) Recheck the wheel balance.

6) Install the mounting drum to the rear wheel. (For rear wheel)

Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 2D-16)”.

7) Install the wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation (Page 2D-6)” and “Rear Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation

(Page 2D-16)”.

Specifications

Service Data

Wheel

Unit: mm (in.)

Item

Wheel rim runout

Wheel axle runout

Wheel rim size

Tire

Item

Cold inflation tire pressure

(Solo/Dual riding)

Tire size

Tire type

Tire tread depth

(Recommended depth)

Axial

Radial

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Standard

17 M/C x MT3.50

17 M/C x MT5.50

Standard

250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm 2 , 42 psi)

120/70 ZR17M/C (58 W)

180/55 ZR17M/C (73 W)

DUNLOP D218FT

DUNLOP D218N

B718H12407001

Limit

2.0 (0.08)

2.0 (0.08)

0.25 (0.010)

0.25 (0.010)

Limit

1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

Wheels and Tires: 2D-24

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Front brake caliper mounting bolt

Front axle bolt

Front axle pinch bolt

N

m

26

100

23

100

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.6

10.0

lb-ft

19.0

72.5

2.3 16.5

10.0 72.5

B718H12407002

Note

) (Page 2D-7)

) (Page 2D-7)

) (Page 2D-8) /

) (Page 2D-8)

) (Page 2D-16) Rear axle nut

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Front Wheel Components (Page 2D-2)”

“Front Wheel Assembly Construction (Page 2D-4)”

“Rear Wheel Components (Page 2D-12)”

“Rear Wheel Assembly Construction (Page 2D-14)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 2D-10) / equivalent ) (Page 2D-11) /

) (Page 2D-18) /

) (Page 2D-19)

B718H12408001

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Front Wheel Components (Page 2D-2)”

“Front Wheel Assembly Construction (Page 2D-4)”

“Rear Wheel Components (Page 2D-12)”

“Rear Wheel Assembly Construction (Page 2D-14)”

Special Tool

09900–18740

Hexagon socket (24 mm)

) (Page 2D-7)

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm)

) (Page 2D-8) / ) (Page 2D-

17)

B718H12408002

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

) (Page 2D-8) / ) (Page 2D-

17)

09900–21304

V-block (100 mm)

) (Page 2D-8) / ) (Page 2D-

17)

2D-25 Wheels and Tires:

09913–50121

Oil seal remover

)

(Page 2D-9) /

)

(Page 2D-

18)

09921–20240

Bearing remover set

) (Page 2D-9) / ) (Page 2D-

18)

09941–34513

Steering race installer

) (Page 2D-19)

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

)

(Page 2D-11) /

)

(Page 2D-19)

09924–84510

Bearing installer set

) (Page 2D-10) /

) (Page 2D-19)

Table of Contents 3- i

Section 3

Driveline / Axle

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….3-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 3-1

Precautions for Driveline / Axle ……………………….. 3-1

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft… 3A-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………3A-1

Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom

Diagnosis …………………………………………………. 3A-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….3A-1

Drive Chain Related Components………………….. 3A-1

Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation ……… 3A-2

Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting

Drum Removal and Installation …………………….3A-4

Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection ……………..3A-5

Sprocket Mounting Drum Dust Seal / Bearing

Removal and Installation……………………………..3A-6

Drive Chain Replacement ……………………………..3A-7

Specifications……………………………………………..3A-10

Service Data………………………………………………3A-10

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….3A-10

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………3A-11

Recommended Service Material …………………..3A-11

Special Tool ………………………………………………3A-11

3

3-1 Precautions:

Driveline / Axle

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Driveline / Axle

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

!

WARNING

Never inspect or adjust the drive chain while the engine is running.

B718H13000001

!

CAUTION

• Do not use trichloroethylene, gasoline or such similar solvent. These fluids will damage the O-rings of the drive chain.

• Clean the drive chain with a spray-type chain cleaner and blow dry with compressed air. If the drive chain cannot be cleaned with a spray cleaner, it may be necessary to use a kerosine. Always follow the chemical manufacturer’s instructions on proper use, handling and storage.

• Lubricate the drive chain with a heavy weight motor oil. Wipe off any excess oil or chain lubricant.

Do not use any oil sold commercially as “drive chain oil”. Such oil can damage the O-rings.

• The standard drive chain is RK GB50GSVZ3. Suzuki recommends to use this standard drive chain as a replacement.

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-1

Driveline / Axle

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Drive Chain and Sprocket Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Noisy Drive Chain

Possible cause

Worn sprocket.

Worn drive chain.

Stretched drive chain.

Too large drive chain slack.

Drive chain out of adjustment.

B718H13104001

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Adjust.

Repair Instructions

Drive Chain Related Components

B718H13106001

8

1. Engine sprocket

2. Drive chain

3. Rear sprocket

4. Dust seal

7

1

6

5,

4,

3

(b)

5. Bearing

6. Sprocket mounting drum

7. Retainer

8. Wheel damper

2

(a)

: 115 N

⋅ m (11.5 kgf-m, 83.0 lb-ft)

: 60 N

⋅ m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

I718H1310026-01

3A-2 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation

B718H13106002

Removal

1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.

2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

5) Remove the speed sensor (3).

6) Remove the engine sprocket inner cover (4) along with the clutch release cylinder.

3

1

I718H1310001-02

3) Remove the regulator/rectifier bracket mounting bolts.

4

I718H1310003-05

7) Remove the speed sensor rotor (5) by removing its bolt while depressing the rear brake pedal.

5

I718H1310033-01

4) Disengage the gearshift link arm (2) by removing the bolt.

NOTE

Mark the gearshift shaft head at which the gearshift link arm slit set for correct reinstallation.

8) Remove the engine sprocket nut (6) while depressing the rear brake pedal.

9) Remove the washer (7).

I718H1310005-04

6

7

I718H1310006-04

2

I718H1310034-01

10) Loosen the rear axle nut (8).

11) Loosen the chain adjusters (9) to provide additional chain slack.

8

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-3

• Tighten the speed sensor rotor bolt (2) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Speed sensor rotor bolt (b): 25 N·m (2.5 kgf-m,

18.0 lb-ft)

• Before installing the engine sprocket inner cover, apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the clutch push rod.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

9

I718H1310023-05

12) Remove the engine sprocket (10).

10

2

(b)

I718H1310008-02

Installation

Install the engine sprocket in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER to the driveshaft.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030 (Thread

Lock Cement Super 1303 or equivalent)

• Tighten the engine sprocket nut (1) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Engine sprocket nut (a): 115 N·m (11.5 kgf-m, 83.0 lb-ft)

• Install the engine sprocket inner cover (3).

I718H1310010-02

NOTE

Fit the clamp to the bolt “A”.

• Tighten the speed sensor mounting bolt (4) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Speed sensor bolt (c): 6.5 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 lbft)

“A”

4

(C)

3

I718H1310024-02

1

(a)

I718H1310035-02

3A-4 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

• Fit the gearshift link arm to the gearshift shaft so that the gearshift lever is located at height “a” above the footrest.

Gearshift lever height “a”

Standard: 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in)

4) Remove the retainer (3).

3

I718H1310015-02

5) Remove the wheel dampers (4).

“ a ”

I718H1310013-02

• Adjust the drive chain slack. Refer to “Drive Chain

Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-

15)”.

Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum

Removal and Installation

B718H13106003

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly by disengaging the drive chain. Refer to “Rear Wheel Assembly

Removal and Installation in Section 2D (Page 2D-

16)”.

2) Remove the rear sprocket nuts and separate the rear sprocket (1) from its mounting drum (2).

3) Draw out the mounting drum (2) from the wheel hub.

4

I718H1310016-02

Installation

Install the rear sprocket and rear sprocket mounting drum in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply grease to the contacting surface between the rear wheel hub and the mounting drum.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

1

2

I718H1310014-03

I718H1310036-01

• Tighten the rear sprocket nuts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear sprocket nut (a): 60 N·m (6.0 kgf-m, 43.5 lbft)

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-5

Bearing

Inspect the play of the sprocket mounting drum bearings by hand while they are in the wheel and drum. Rotate the inner race by hand to inspect for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the bearing if there is anything unusual.

(a)

(a)

I718H1310037-05

• Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D

(Page 2D-16)”.

Drive Chain Related Parts Inspection

B718H13106004

Refer to “Rear Sprocket / Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum

Removal and Installation (Page 3A-4)”

Dust Seal

Inspect the sprocket mounting drum dust seal for wear or damage. If any damage is found, replace the dust seal with a new one.

I649G1310015-02

Engine Sprocket and Rear Sprocket

Inspect the sprocket teeth for wear. If they are worn as shown, replace the engine sprocket, rear sprocket and drive chain as a set.

“A” “B”

“B”: Excessive wear

I649G1310016-02

“A”: Normal wear

Wheel Damper

Inspect the dampers for wear and damage. Replace the damper if there is anything unusual.

I718H1310028-02

I718H1310038-02

Drive Chain

Refer to “Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”.

3A-6 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

Sprocket Mounting Drum Dust Seal / Bearing

Removal and Installation

B718H13106005

Removal

1) Remove the rear sprocket mounting drum assembly from the rear wheel hub. Refer to “Rear Sprocket /

Rear Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal and

Installation (Page 3A-4)”.

2) Remove the retainer (1).

Installation

!

CAUTION

The removed dust seal and bearing must be replaced with new ones.

1) Apply grease to the bearing before installing.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

1

I718H1310029-01

3) Remove the sprocket mounting drum dust seal (2) using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–50121 (Oil seal remover)

(A)

I649G1310020-02

2) Install the bearing (1) and dust seal (2) to the sprocket mounting drum using the special tool.

!

CAUTION

The sealed cover of the bearing must face outside.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

(A)

(A)

2

I718H1310020-02

4) Remove the sprocket mounting drum bearing using the special tool.

Special tool

(B): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

1

2

I718H1310021-03

3) Apply grease to the dust seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

(B)

I718H1310025-01

I718H1310022-02

4) Install the rear sprocket mounting drum.

5) Install the rear sprocket mounting drum assembly to rear wheel hub. Refer to “Rear Sprocket / Rear

Sprocket Mounting Drum Removal and Installation

(Page 3A-4)”.

6) Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

Drive Chain Replacement

B718H13106006

Use the special tool in the following procedures, to cut and rejoin the drive chain.

NOTE

When using the special tool, apply a small quantity of grease to the threaded parts of the special tool.

Special tool

: 09922–22711 (Drive chain cutting and joining tool)

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-7

NOTE

The tip of pin remover (1) should be positioned inside “a” approximately 5 mm

(0.2 in) from the end face of pressure bolt [A]

(2) as shown in the illustration.

“ a ”

2

1

I649G1310025-02

“a”: 5 mm (0.2 in)

2) Place the drive chain link being disjointed on the holder part (8) of the tool.

3) Turn in both the adjuster bolt (6) and pressure bolt

[A] (3) so that each of their end hole fits over the chain joint pin properly.

4) Tighten the pressure bolt [A] (3) with the bar.

3

8

6

I649G1310023-02

Drive Chain Cutting

1) Set up the special tool as shown in the illustration.

1

6

8

7

3

4

2

5

I649G1310024-02

1. Tool body

2. Grip handle

3. Pressure bolt [A]

4. Pressure bolt [B]

5. Bar

6. Adjuster bolt (With through hole)

7. Pin remover

8. Chain holder (Engraved mark 500) with reamer bolt M5 x 10

I718H1310032-01

5) Turn in the pressure bolt [B] (4) with the bar (5) and force out the drive chain joint pin (9).

!

CAUTION

Continue turning in the pressure bolt [B] (4) until the joint pin should been completely pushed out of the chain.

NOTE

After the joint pin (9) is removed, loosen the pressure bolt [B] (4) and then pressure bolt

[A] (3).

3A-8 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

6) Remove the joint pin (9) of the other side of joint plate.

!

CAUTION

Never reuse joint pins, O-rings and plates.

4

5

Joint plate installation

1) Set up the special tool as shown in the illustration.

6

5

4

(C50)

3

1

6 9 7 3

I649G1310027-02

4

I649G1310028-02

Drive Chain Connecting

!

WARNING

Do not use joint clip type of drive chain. The joint clip may have a chance to drop which may cause severe damage to motorcycle and severe injury.

2

7

I718H1310027-03

1. Tool body

2. Grip handle

3. Joint plate holder (Engraved mark “C50”)

4. Wedge holder & wedge pin

5. Adjuster bolt (Without hole)

6. Pressure bolt [A]

7. Bar

2) Apply grease to the joint pins (8), O-rings (9) and plates (10).

!

CAUTION

Replace the joint pins (8), O-rings (9) and plates (10) with new ones.

3) Connect both ends of the drive chain with the joint pin (8) inserted from the wheel side “A” as installed on the motorcycle.

Joint set part number

RK: 27620 – 24F00

“A”

9

8

9

9

9

10

I649G1310030-02

4) Apply grease on the recessed portion of the joint plate holder (3) and set the joint plate (10).

NOTE

When positioning the joint plate (10) on the tool, its stamp mark must face the joint plate holder (3) side.

5) Set the drive chain on the tool as illustrated and turn in the adjuster bolt (5) to secure the wedge holder and wedge pin (4).

3

10

4

5

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-9

Joint pin staking

1) Set up the special tool as shown in the illustration.

3

1

5

4

I649G1310031-02

6) Turn in the pressure bolt [A] (6) and align two joint pins (11) properly with the respective holes of the joint plate (10).

7) Turn in the pressure bolt [A] (6) further using the bar

(7) to press the joint plate over the joint pins.

11

6

10

7

I649G1310032-02

8) Continue pressing the joint plate until the distance between the two joint plates comes to the specification.

Joint plate distance specification “a”

21.85 – 22.15 mm (0.860 – 0.872 in)

!

CAUTION

If pressing of the joint plate makes the dimension out of specification excessively, the work must be carried out again by using new joint parts.

2

6

I649G1310034-02

1. Tool body

2. Grip handle

3. Pressure bolt “A”

4. Adjuster bolt (Without hole)

5. Staking pin (Stowed inside grip handle behind rubber cap)

6. Bar

NOTE

Before staking the joint pin, apply a small quantity of grease to the staking pin (5).

2) Stake the joint pin by turning (approximately 7/8 turn) the pressure bolt [A] (3) with the bar until the pin end diameter becomes the specified dimension.

!

CAUTION

• After joining of the chain has been completed, check to make sure that the link is smooth and no abnormal condition is found.

• Should any abnormal condition be found, reassemble the chain link using the new joint parts.

Pin end diameter specification “a”

RK: 5.45 – 5.85 mm (0.215 – 0.230 in)

3

“a”

I649G1310033-03

I649G1310035-02

3A-10 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

3) Adjust the drive chain slack, after connecting it.

Refer to “Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment in

Section 0B (Page 0B-15)”.

“a”

I649G1310036-03

Specifications

Service Data

Drive Chain

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Final reduction ratio

Drive chain

Drive chain slack (on center stand)

Type

Links

20-pitch length

Standard

2.388 (43/18)

RK GB50GSVZ3

118 links

20 – 30 (1.8 – 2.2)

B718H13107001

Limit

319.4 (12.57)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Engine sprocket nut

Speed sensor rotor bolt

Speed sensor bolt

Rear sprocket nut

N

m

115

25

6.5

60

Tightening torque kgf-m

11.5

2.5

0.65

6.0

lb-ft

83.0

18.0

4.7

43.5

B718H13107002

Note

) (Page 3A-3)

) (Page 3A-3)

) (Page 3A-3)

) (Page 3A-5)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Drive Chain Related Components (Page 3A-1)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft: 3A-11

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

Thread lock cement

B718H13108001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 3A-3) / ) (Page 3Aequivalent 4) / ) (Page 3A-6) /

) (Page 3A-6)

Thread Lock Cement Super 1303 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–32030 ) (Page 3A-3)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Drive Chain Related Components (Page 3A-1)”

Special Tool

09913–50121

Oil seal remover

) (Page 3A-6)

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

) (Page 3A-6) / ) (Page 3A-

6)

B718H13108002

09922–22711

Drive chain cutting and joining tool

) (Page 3A-7)

3A-12 Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft:

Table of Contents 4- i

Section 4

Brake

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….4-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 4-1

Precautions for Brake System ………………………… 4-1

Brake Fluid Information………………………………….. 4-1

Brake Control System and Diagnosis … 4A-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………4A-1

Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram ……………….. 4A-1

Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram………………… 4A-5

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………4A-7

Brake Symptom Diagnosis……………………………. 4A-7

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….4A-7

Brake Pedal Height Inspection and

Adjustment ……………………………………………….. 4A-7

Front Brake Light Switch Inspection ………………. 4A-7

Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection ……………….. 4A-8

Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection and

Adjustment ……………………………………………….. 4A-8

Brake Fluid Level Check ………………………………. 4A-8

Brake Hose Inspection…………………………………. 4A-8

Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit ……………… 4A-8

Brake Fluid Replacement……………………………. 4A-10

Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation……4A-12

Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation ……4A-13

Front Brake Master Cylinder Components…….. 4A-14

Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly

Removal and Installation…………………………… 4A-14

Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever

Disassembly and Assembly ……………………….4A-15

Front Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection ..4A-17

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components …….. 4A-18

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly

Removal and Installation…………………………… 4A-18

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly ……………………………………………….. 4A-19

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection …4A-20

Specifications……………………………………………..4A-21

Service Data …………………………………………….. 4A-21

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….4A-21

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………4A-22

Recommended Service Material………………….. 4A-22

Special Tool ………………………………………………4A-22

Front Brakes …………………………………….. 4B-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….4B-1

Front Brake Components ………………………………4B-1

Front Brake Pad Inspection……………………………4B-2

Front Brake Pad Replacement……………………….4B-2

Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation…..4B-3

Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and

Assembly…………………………………………………..4B-4

Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection ………………4B-6

Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation ………4B-7

Front Brake Disc Inspection …………………………..4B-7

Specifications……………………………………………….4B-8

Service Data………………………………………………..4B-8

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………4B-8

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………..4B-9

Recommended Service Material …………………….4B-9

Special Tool ………………………………………………..4B-9

Rear Brakes………………………………………. 4C-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….4C-1

Rear Brake Components……………………………….4C-1

Rear Brake Pad Inspection ……………………………4C-2

Rear Brake Pad Replacement ……………………….4C-2

Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation …..4C-4

Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and

Assembly…………………………………………………..4C-4

Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection……………….4C-6

Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation……….4C-7

Rear Brake Disc Inspection……………………………4C-7

Specifications……………………………………………….4C-8

Service Data………………………………………………..4C-8

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………4C-8

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………..4C-9

Recommended Service Material …………………….4C-9

Special Tool ………………………………………………..4C-9

ABS ………………………………………………….. 4E-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..4E-1

Precautions for ABS……………………………………..4E-1

ABS Information …………………………………………..4E-1

General Description ………………………………………4E-1

Wheel Speed Sensor Description …………………..4E-1

4

4-ii Table of Contents

ABS Control Unit Description …………………………4E-2

Hydraulic Unit (HU) Description ……………………..4E-4

Self-diagnosis Function and ABS Indicator

Light Description ………………………………………..4E-5

Fail-safe Function Description………………………..4E-6

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………4E-7

ABS Wiring Diagram …………………………………….4E-7

ABS Unit Diagram ………………………………………..4E-8

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram…..4E-9

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram …4E-11

Component Location …………………………………..4E-12

ABS Components Location ………………………….4E-12

Diagnostic Information and Procedures……….4E-13

ABS Troubleshooting ………………………………….4E-13

Pre-diagnosis Inspection……………………………..4E-15

ABS Indicator Light Inspection ……………………..4E-17

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output …………4E-23

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting……….4E-25

SDS Check………………………………………………..4E-29

Active Control Inspection …………………………….4E-30

DTC Table…………………………………………………4E-34

DTC “13” (C1613): Wheel Speed Sensor

Rotor Malfunction (F) ………………………………..4E-35

DTC “14” (C1614): Wheel Speed Sensor

Rotor Malfunction (R) ………………………………..4E-37

DTC “22” (C1622): ABS Actuator Circuit

Malfunction (F) …………………………………………4E-39

DTC “23” (C1623): ABS Actuator Circuit

Malfunction (R)…………………………………………4E-41

DTC “25” (C1625): Wheel Speed Sensor

Related Malfunction ………………………………….4E-43

DTC “35” (C1635): ABS Motor Malfunction…….4E-45

DTC “41” (C1641): Wheel Speed Sensor

Signal Malfunction (F) ……………………………….4E-47

DTC “42” (C1642): Wheel Speed Sensor

Circuit Open (F) ……………………………………….4E-49

DTC “43” (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor

Circuit Short (F)………………………………………..4E-53

DTC “44” (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor

Signal Malfunction (R)……………………………….4E-55

DTC “45” (C1645): Wheel Speed Sensor

Circuit Open (R) ……………………………………….4E-57

DTC “46” (C1646): Wheel Speed Sensor

Circuit Short (R) ……………………………………….4E-61

DTC “47” (C1647): Supply Voltage

(Increased) ………………………………………………4E-63

DTC “48” (C1648): Supply Voltage

(Decreased) …………………………………………….4E-65

DTC “55” (C1655): ABS Control Unit

Malfunction………………………………………………4E-67

DTC “61” (C1661): ABS Solenoid Malfunction ..4E-69

Repair Instructions ……………………………………..4E-70

ABS Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and

Connect…………………………………………………..4E-70

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and

Installation ……………………………………………….4E-71

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and

Installation ……………………………………………….4E-71

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation …………………………………………4E-72

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and Installation …………………………………………4E-73

Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection………………………………………………..4E-74

ABS Control Unit/HU Removal and

Installation ……………………………………………….4E-74

Specifications ……………………………………………..4E-76

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….4E-76

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………4E-76

Special Tool ………………………………………………4E-76

Precautions: 4-1

Brake

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Brake System

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H14000001

Brake Fluid Information

!

WARNING

B718H14000002

• This brake system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid, such as silicone-based or petroleum-based.

• Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid left over from the last servicing or which has been stored for a long period of time.

• When storing brake fluid, seal the container completely and keep it away from children.

• When replenishing brake fluid, take care not to get dust into the fluid.

• When washing brake components, use new brake fluid. Never use cleaning solvent.

• A contaminated brake disc or brake pad reduces braking performance. Discard contaminated pads and clean the disc with high quality brake cleaner or neutral detergent.

!

CAUTION

Immediately and completely wipe off any brake fluid contacting any part of the motorcycle. The brake fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastics and rubber materials, etc., and will damage them severely.

4A-1 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Brake

Brake Control System and Diagnosis

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram

GSF1250

B718H14102001

3

(a)

(a)

1

3

28

5

4

6

2

1

5

4

3

2

42

14

(b)

(a)

1. Front brake hose No.1

2. Front brake hose No.2

3: Stopper

: After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

4: Clamp

: After positioning the clamp with the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt.

5: Brake hose

: Clamp the brake hose firmly.

(c)

(b)

42

3

2

(a)

I718H1410001-04

6: Clamp

: Insert the clamp to the hole of the front fender fully.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 7.5 N

⋅ m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-2

GSF1250S

7

3

(a)

3

1

3

49

(a)

1

5

5

4

2

42

14

(b)

(c)

4

(a)

2

6

42

(b)

2

3

(c)

1. Front brake hose No.1

2. Front brake hose No.2

3: Stopper

: After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

4: Clamp

: After positioning the clamp with the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt.

5: Brake hose

: Clamp the brake hose firmly.

(a)

I718H1410002-05

6: Clamp

: Insert the clamp to the hole of the front fender fully.

7: Front brake hose No.1

: Pass the front brake hose No.1 to the brake hose guide.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 7.5 N

⋅ m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

4A-3 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

GSF1250A

1 2

“A”

5

(a)

4

“B”

3

3

(c)

42

28

“C”

14

(b)

7

(b)

14

42

6

5

(a)

2

1. Brake hose No.1 (ABS)

2. Brake hose No.2 (ABS)

3. Rubber cushion

4. ABS control unit/HU

5. Stopper

:After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

6. Clamp

:After positioning the clamp with the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt.

7. Clamp

:Insert the clamp to the hole of the fender fully.

1

5

14

(a)

5

(a)

5

49

14

14

21

42

49

“A”: Clamp white paint part of brake hose.

“B”: White paint

“C”: Yellow paint

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

: 16 N

⋅ m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)

I718H1410003-07

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-4

GSF1250SA

1 2

5

6

7

“A”

8

(a)

4

“B”

3

3

(c)

49

42

“C”

42

(b)

10

8

(a)

5

(a)

5

9

14

42

(b)

(a)

8

1. Brake hose No.1 (ABS)

2. Brake hose No.2 (ABS)

3. Rubber cushion

4. ABS control unit/HU

5. Throttle cable

6. Brake hose No.1

7. Throttle cable guide

:Set the brake hose into the guide firmly.

8. Stopper

:After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

2

1

21

49

14

14

21

42

49

I718H1410004-05

9. Clamp

:After positioning the clamp with the stopper, tighten the clamp bolt.

10. Clamp

:Insert the clamp to the hole of the fender fully.

“A”: Clamp white paint part of brake hose.

“B”: White paint

“C”: Blue paint

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

: 16 N

⋅ m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)

4A-5 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram

GSF1250/S

1

2

42

3

(a)

2

B718H14102002

“B”

“A”

(c)

(b)

(a)

(d)

28

3

4

1. Brake hose clamp

: Brake hose clamp ends should face forward.

2. Brake hose clamp

: Brake hose clamp ends should face backward.

3: Stopper

: After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

4: Guide

: Position the guide with hole of swingarm before tightening.

“A”: Insert the brake hose firmly.

“B”: White paint

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 6 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 27 N

⋅ m (2.7 kgf-m, 19.5 lb-ft)

I718H1410062-03

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-6

GSF1250A/SA

1

4

“B”

(c)

(b)

(a)

(d)

28

3

“A”

3

5

2

1. Brake hose clamp

: Brake hose clamp ends should face forward.

2. Brake hose clamp

: Brake hose clamp ends should face backward.

3: Stopper

: After the brake hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

4: Clamp

: After positioning the clamp with hole of frame before tightening.

5: Guide

: Position the guide with hole of swingarm before tightening.

“A”: Insert the brake hose firmly.

(a)

14

“B” : White paint

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 6 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 27 N

⋅ m (2.7 kgf-m, 19.5 lb-ft)

I718H1410005-03

4A-7 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Brake Symptom Diagnosis

B718H14104001

Condition Possible cause

Insufficient brake power

Leakage of brake fluid from hydraulic

Correction / Reference Item

Repair or replace.

system.

Worn pads and disc.

Replace.

Oil adhesion on friction surface of pads.

Clean disc and pads.

Brake squeaking

Air in hydraulic system.

Bleed air.

Not enough brake fluid in the reservoir.

Replenish.

Carbon adhesion on pad surface.

Tilted pad.

Repair surface with sandpaper.

Correct pad fitting or replace.

Excessive brake lever stroke

Leakage of brake fluid

Damaged wheel bearing.

Loose front-wheel axle or rear-wheel

Replace.

Tighten to specified torque.

axle.

Worn pads and disc.

Foreign material in brake fluid.

Replace.

Replace brake fluid.

Clogged return port of master cylinder.

Disassemble and clean master cylinder.

Air in hydraulic system.

Insufficient brake fluid.

Improper quality of brake fluid.

Insufficient tightening of connection

Bleed air.

Replenish fluid to specified level; bleed air.

Replace with correct fluid.

Tighten to specified torque.

Brake drags

Brake locked (GSF1250A/

SA)

joints.

Cracked hose.

Worn piston and/or cup.

Worn piston seal and dust seal.

Rusty part.

Insufficient brake lever or brake pedal pivot lubrication.

Malfunctioning ABS, if equipped.

Replace.

Replace piston and/or cup.

Replace piston seal and dust seal.

Clean and lubricate.

Lubricate.

Inspect ABS.

Repair Instructions

Brake Pedal Height Inspection and Adjustment

B718H14106001

Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-17)”.

Front Brake Light Switch Inspection

B718H14106002

Inspect the front brake light switch in the following procedures:

1) Disconnect the front brake light switch lead coupler

(1).

1

I718H1410038-02

2) Inspect the switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the front brake light switch with a new one. Refer to “Front Brake

Master Cylinder / Brake Lever Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 4A-15)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Color

Position

OFF

Terminal (B/G) Terminal (B)

ON

I649G1410004-03

3) Connect the front brake light switch lead coupler.

Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection

B718H14106003

Inspect the rear brake light switch in the following procedures:

1) Disconnect the rear brake light switch lead coupler

(1).

1

I718H1410039-02

2) Inspect the switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the rear brake light switch with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Rear brake light switch

Color

Position

ON

Terminal (O/G) Terminal (W/B)

OFF

I649G1410006-03

3) Connect the rear brake light switch lead coupler.

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-8

Rear Brake Light Switch Inspection and

Adjustment

B718H14106004

Check the rear brake light switch so that the brake light will come on just before pressure is felt when the brake pedal is depressed. If the brake light switch adjustment is necessary, turn the adjuster nut (1) in or out while holding the brake pedal.

1

I718H1410008-02

Brake Fluid Level Check

B718H14106005

Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-17)”.

Brake Hose Inspection

B718H14106006

Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-17)”.

Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit

B718H14106007

Air trapped in the brake fluid circuit acts like a cushion to absorb a large proportion of the pressure developed by the master cylinder and thus interferes with the full braking performance of the brake caliper. The presence of air is indicated by “sponginess” of the brake lever and also by lack of braking force. Considering the danger to which such trapped air exposes the machine and rider, it is essential that after remounting the brake and restoring the brake system to the normal condition, the brake fluid circuit be purged of air in the following manner:

!

CAUTION

Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastic, rubber materials, etc.

4A-9 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Front Brake

1) Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the top of the inspection window. Place the reservoir cap to prevent dirt from entering.

I718H1410063-03

2) Attach a hose to the air bleeder valve, and insert the free end of the hose into a receptacle.

3) Squeeze and release the brake lever several times in rapid succession and squeeze the lever fully without releasing it.

5) Close the air bleeder valve, pump and squeeze the lever, and open the valve.

6) Repeat this process until the fluid flowing into the receptacle no longer contains air bubbles.

NOTE

While bleeding the brake system, replenish the brake fluid in the reservoir as necessary.

Make sure that there is always some fluid visible in the reservoir.

7) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect the hose.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Front brake): 7.5 N·m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

8) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the upper mark of the reservoir.

I718H1410010-01

4) Loosen the air bleeder valve by turning it a quarter of a turn so that the brake fluid runs into the receptacle, this will remove the tension of the brake lever causing it to touch the handlebar grip.

9) Install the reservoir cap.

I718H1410064-01

I718H1410040-01

Rear Brake

Bleed air from the rear brake system as the same manner of front brake.

NOTE

The only difference of bleeding operation from the front brake is that the rear master cylinder is actuated by a pedal.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Rear brake): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m,

4.5 lb-ft)

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-10

Brake Fluid Replacement

B718H14106008

!

CAUTION

Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastic, rubber materials, etc.

Front Brake

1) Place the motorcycle on a level surface and keep the handlebars straight.

2) Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap and diaphragm.

3) Suck up the old brake fluid as much as possible.

I718H1410068-02

I718H1410042-02

4) Fill the reservoir with new brake fluid.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

5) Connect a clear hose to the air bleeder valve and insert the other end of the hose into a receptacle.

I718H1410041-01

• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the upper mark of the reservoir.

I718H1410043-01

6) Loosen the air bleeder valve and pump the brake lever until the old brake fluid flows out of the brake system.

I718H1410065-02

• Install the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

I718H1410010-01

4A-11 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

7) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect the clear hose.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Front brake) (a): 7.5 N·m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

(a)

(a)

Rear Brake

1) Place the motorcycle on a level surface.

2) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap and diaphragm.

4) Suck up the old brake fluid as much as possible.

I718H1410044-01

8) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the upper mark of the reservoir.

I718H1410045-01

5) Fill the reservoir with new brake fluid.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

6) Connect a clear hose to the air bleeder valve and insert the other end of the hose into a receptacle.

7) Loosen the air bleeder valve and pump the brake pedal until the old brake fluid flows out of the brake system.

I718H1410066-01

9) Install the reservoir cap.

I718H1410041-01

I718H1410068-02

8) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect the clear hose.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Rear brake) (a): 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

(a)

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-12

GSF1250A/SA

Removal

1) Remove the seat and right frame cover. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

4) Remove the battery and battery case. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit/HU Removal and Installation in Section

4E (Page 4E-74)”.

5) Remove the fender lower cover (1).

1

I718H1410047-01

9) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the upper mark of the reservoir.

I718H1410067-02

Front Brake Hose Removal and Installation

B718H14106009

GSF1250/S

Removal

1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

2) Remove the front brake hoses as shown in the front brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Front Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-1)”.

Installation

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

1) Install the front brake hose as shown in the front brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Front Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-1)”.

2) Bleed air from the front brake system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

I718H1410019-03

6) Remove the front brake hose as shown in the front brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Front Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-1)”.

Installation

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

1) Install the front brake hose as shown in the front brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Front Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-1)”.

2) Bleed air from the front brake system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

3) Reinstall the removed parts.

4A-13 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Rear Brake Hose Removal and Installation

B718H14106019

GSF1250/S

Removal

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

3) Remove the rear brake hoses as shown in the rear brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Rear Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-5)”.

Installation

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

1) Install the front brake hose as shown in the rear brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Rear Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-5)”.

2) Bleed air from the rear brake system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

3) Reinstall the removed parts.

GSF1250A/SA

Removal

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the seat, battery and battery case. Refer to

“ABS Control Unit/HU Removal and Installation in

Section 4E (Page 4E-74)”.

3) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

4) Remove the fender lower cover (1).

1

I718H1410020-01

5) Remove the rear brake hose as shown in the rear brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Rear Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-5)”.

Installation

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

1) Install the rear brake hose as shown in the rear brake hose routing diagram. Refer to “Rear Brake

Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-5)”.

2) Bleed air from the rear brake system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

3) Reinstall the removed parts.

Front Brake Master Cylinder Components

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-14

B718H14106011

3

2

1

(b)

4

5

[A]

[B]

8

(c)

7

6

(a)

FW

D

FWD

1. Reservoir cap

2. Plate

3. Diaphragm

4. Master cylinder

5. Piston/Cup set

6. Brake hose union bolt

9

(c)

7. Brake lever

8. Brake lever pivot bolt

9. Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut

[A]: For GSF1250/A

[B]: For GSF1250S/SA

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation

B718H14106012

Removal

1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

2) Disconnect the front brake light switch lead coupler

(1).

3) Place a rag underneath the brake hose union bolt (2) on the master cylinder to catch any spilt brake fluid.

4) Remove the brake hose union bolt (2) and disconnect the brake hose.

5) Remove the right rear view mirror. (GSF1250/A)

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

: 6.0 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

: Apply brake fluid.

: Apply silicone grease.

: Do not reuse.

6) Remove the master cylinder assembly (3).

2

1

3

I718H1410070-01

I718H1410048-04

4A-15 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Installation

Install the front brake master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• When installing the master cylinder (1) onto the handlebars (2), align the master cylinder holder’s mating surface “A” with the punch mark “B” on the handlebars (2) and tighten the upper holder bolt first.

Refer to “Handlebar Construction in Section 6B

(Page 6B-2)”.

Tightening torque

Master cylinder holder bolt (Upper and Lower)

(a): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

1

• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

Tightening torque

Brake hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

“C”

(a)

2

“C”: Up mark

“A”

“B”

“A”

1

2

I718H1410051-04

(a)

“C”

(b)

I718H1410050-03

• Bleed air from the brake system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever

Disassembly and Assembly

B718H14106013

Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly

Removal and Installation (Page 4A-14)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the brake lever (1) and brake light switch

(2).

(a)

“ a ”

“B”

“a”: Clearance

I718H1410072-01

2

1

I718H1410052-01

2) Remove the reservoir cap (3), plate (4) and diaphragm (5).

5

4

3

I718H1410053-01

3) Pull out the dust boot (6) and remove the snap ring

(7).

Special tool

: 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers)

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-16

Assembly

Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

• Wash the master cylinder components with new brake fluid before reassembly.

• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified brake fluid. Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvents such as gasoline, kerosine, etc.

• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder bore and all of the master cylinder component to be inserted into the bore.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

7

6

I718H1410054-02

4) Remove the following parts from the master cylinder.

• Piston (8)

• Secondary cup (9)

• Primary cup (10)

• Spring (11)

I649G1410024-02

• When installing the brake light switch, align the projection on the switch with the hole in the master cylinder.

11 10 8 9

I649G1410023-02

I718H1410055-01

4A-17 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

• Apply grease to the brake lever pivot bolt.

• Apply grease to the contact point between piston and brake lever.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

Front Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

B718H14106014

Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder / Brake Lever

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 4A-15)”.

Master Cylinder

Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches or other damage.

I718H1410071-01

• Tighten the pivot bolt and lock-nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Brake lever pivot bolt: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lbft)

Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgfm, 4.5 lb-ft)

I649G1410027-02

Piston

Inspect the piston surface for any scratches or other damage.

Rubber Parts

Inspect the primary cup, secondary cup and dust boot for wear or damage.

I649G1410028-02

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-18

B718H14106015

1

2,

(a)

3

4

5

(a)

6

(b)

1. Reservoir tank

2. Brake hose union bolt

3. Brake hose connector

4. Master cylinder

5. Piston/Cup set

6. Push rod

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation

B718H14106016

Removal

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement

(Page 4A-10)”.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 18 N

⋅ m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

: Apply silicone grease.

I649G1410029-06

: Apply brake fluid.

: Do not reuse.

3) Remove the reservoir mounting bolt (1).

1

I718H1410056-01

4A-19 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

4) Place a rag underneath the brake hose union bolt (2) on the master cylinder to catch any spilt brake fluid.

5) Remove the brake hose union bolt (2) and disconnect the brake hose.

6) Loosen the lock-nut (3).

7) Remove the master cylinder mounting bolts (4).

8) Remove the master cylinder along with the reservoir by turning the push rod (5).

2

• Adjust the brake pedal height. Refer to “Brake System

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-17)”.

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly

B718H14106017

Refer to “Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly

Removal and Installation (Page 4A-14)”.

Disassembly

1) Disconnect the reservoir hose (1).

2) Remove the lock-nut (2).

3) Remove the brake hose connector (3) and O-ring

(4).

5

4

1

3

3

I718H1410057-01

Installation

Install the rear brake master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

• Tighten the master cylinder mounting bolts (1) to the specified torque.

• Tighten the lock-nut (2) to the specified torque.

• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt (3) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear master cylinder mounting bolt (a): 23 N·m (

2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

Rear master cylinder rod lock-nut (b): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

Brake hose union bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

3

(c)

4

2

I718H1410059-04

4) Pull out the dust boot (5) and remove the snap ring

(6).

Special tool

: 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers)

5 6

I718H1410060-01

5) Remove the push rod (7), piston/cup set (8) and spring (9).

9 8 7

I649G1410035-02

1

(a)

2

(b)

I718H1410058-01

• Bleed air from the system after reassembling the master cylinder. Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake

Fluid Circuit (Page 4A-8)”.

Assembly

Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

• Wash the master cylinder components with new brake fluid before reassembly.

• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified brake fluid. Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvents such as gasoline, kerosine, etc.

• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder bore and all of the master cylinder component to be inserted into the bore.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-20

• Install the O-ring (1).

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring (1) with a new one.

1

I718H1410061-01

Rear Brake Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

B718H14106018

Refer to “Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 4A-19)”.

Master Cylinder

Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches or other damage.

I649G1410036-02

• Apply grease to the push rod end.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

I649G1410038-02

Piston

Inspect the piston surface for any scratches or other damage.

Rubber Parts

Inspect the primary cup, secondary cup and dust boot for wear or damage.

I649G1410041-03

I649G1410039-02

4A-21 Brake Control System and Diagnosis:

Specifications

Service Data

Brake

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Rear brake pedal height

Master cylinder bore

Master cylinder piston diam.

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Standard

50 – 60 (2.0 – 2.4)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

Oil

Brake fluid type

Item Specification

DOT 4

B718H14107001

Limit

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Air bleeder valve (Front brake)

Air bleeder valve (Rear brake)

Master cylinder holder bolt (Upper and Lower)

Brake hose union bolt

Brake lever pivot bolt

Brake lever pivot bolt lock-nut

Rear master cylinder mounting bolt

Rear master cylinder rod lock-nut

N

m

7.5

6.0

10

23

6.0

6.0

23

18

Tightening torque kgf-m lb-ft

0.75 5.5

0.6 4.5

1.0 7.0

2.3 16.5

0.6

0.6

2.3

1.8

4.5

4.5

16.5

13.0

)

)

B718H14107002

Note

) (Page 4A-9) /

) (Page 4A-11)

) (Page 4A-10) /

) (Page 4A-12)

) (Page 4A-15)

) (Page 4A-15) /

) (Page 4A-19)

) (Page 4A-17)

) (Page 4A-17)

(Page 4A-19)

(Page 4A-19)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Front Brake Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-1)”

“Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram (Page 4A-5)”

“Front Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page 4A-14)”

“Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page 4A-18)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Brake Control System and Diagnosis: 4A-22

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Material

Brake fluid

Grease

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

DOT 4

SUZUKI Silicone Grease or equivalent

Note

) (Page 4A-10) /

) (Page 4A-11) /

) (Page 4A-16) /

) (Page 4A-20)

P/No.: 99000–25100 ) (Page 4A-17) /

) (Page 4A-20)

B718H14108001

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Front Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page 4A-14)”

“Rear Brake Master Cylinder Components (Page 4A-18)”

Special Tool

09900–06108

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 4A-16) /

) (Page 4A-19)

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 4A-8) / ) (Page 4A-

8)

B718H14108002

4B-1 Front Brakes:

Brake

Front Brakes

Front Brake Components

Repair Instructions

1,

2,

3,

4

3,

(a)

(b)

5

2,

(d)

(c)

6

B718H14206001

1. O-ring

2. Piston seal

3. Dust seal

4. Piston

5. Front brake pad set

(e)

6. Front brake disc

: 7.5 N

⋅ m (0.75 kgf-m, 5.5 lb-ft)

: 16 N

⋅ m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 26 N

⋅ m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Apply brake fluid.

: Do not reuse.

I649G1420001-05

Front Brake Pad Inspection

B718H14206002

The extent of brake pads wear can be checked by observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pads. When the wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads with new ones. Refer to “Front Brake Pad

Replacement (Page 4B-2)”.

!

CAUTION

Replace the brake pad as a set, otherwise braking performance will be adversely affected.

Front Brakes: 4B-2

2) Remove the brake pads (2) by removing the pad mounting pin (3).

NOTE

When removing the pads, push the piston all the way into the brake caliper.

3

2

Front Brake Pad Replacement

1) Remove the spring (1).

“A”

I718H1420001-03

B718H14206003

I718H1420012-03

!

CAUTION

Do not operate the brake lever while dismounting the pads.

3) Clean up the caliper especially around the caliper piston.

4) Install the new brake pads.

!

CAUTION

Replace the brake pads as a set, otherwise braking performance will be adversely affected.

1

I718H1420011-01

I718H1420003-01

4B-3 Front Brakes:

5) Tighten the pad mounting pin to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Front brake pad mounting pin (a): 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)

3) Remove the brake caliper by removing the caliper mounting bolts (2).

3

1

2

(a)

3

I718H1420013-01

NOTE

After replacing the brake pads, pump the brake lever several times to check for proper brake operation and then check the brake fluid level.

Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

B718H14206004

NOTE

The right and left calipers are installed symmetrically and therefore the removal procedure for one side is the same as that for the other side.

Removal

1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement in Section 4A (Page 4A-10)”.

2) Remove the brake hose from the caliper by removing the union bolt (1) and catch the brake fluid in a suitable receptacle.

NOTE

• Place a rag underneath the union bolt on the brake caliper to catch any spilt brake fluid.

• Slightly loosen the brake caliper housing bolts (3) to facilitate later disassembly, if necessary.

Special tool

: 09930–11920 (Torx bit (JT 40H))

: 09930–11940 (Bit holder)

I718H1420014-01

Installation

Install the brake caliper in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten each bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Front brake caliper mounting bolt (a): 26 N·m (2.6 kgf-m, 19.0 lb-ft)

Front brake caliper housing bolt (b): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

Tightening torque

Front brake hose union bolt (c): 23 N·m (2.3 kgfm, 16.5 lb-ft)

(c)

(b)

(b)

(a)

I718H1420015-01

• Bleed air from the brake system after installing the caliper. Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section 4A (Page 4A-8)”.

Front Brakes: 4B-4

• Check the brake fluid leakage and brake operation.

!

WARNING

Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe running and discolor painted surfaces.

Check the brake hose and hose joints for cracks and fluid leakage.

Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly

B718H14206005

Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

(Page 4B-3)”.

NOTE

The right and left calipers are installed symmetrically and therefore the disassembly procedure for one side is the same as that for the other side.

Disassembly

1) Remove the brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake Pad

Replacement (Page 4B-2)”.

2) Separate the caliper halves by removing the caliper housing bolts with special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09930–11920 (Torx bit (JT 40H))

(B): 09930–11940 (Bit holder)

3) Remove the O-ring.

I649G1420009-02

4) Place a rag over the pistons to prevent it from popping out and then force out the pistons using compressed air.

!

CAUTION

Do not use high pressure air to prevent piston damage.

I649G1420010-02

5) Remove the dust seals (1) and piston seals (2).

(B)

(A)

I649G1420021-02

2

1

I718H1420008-01

4B-5 Front Brakes:

Assembly

Assemble the caliper in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Wash the caliper bores and pistons with specified brake fluid. Particularly wash the dust seal grooves and piston seal grooves.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

!

CAUTION

• Wash the caliper components with fresh brake fluid before reassembly. Never use cleaning solvent or gasoline to wash them.

• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified brake fluid. Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvent such as gasoline, kerosine or the others.

• Apply the brake fluid to piston seals (1) and dust seals

(2).

!

CAUTION

Replace the piston seals (1) and dust seals

(2) with new ones.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

• Install the piston seals as shown.

2

1

I649G1420013-02

• Install a new O-ring and reassemble caliper halves.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

I649G1420012-02

I649G1420014-02

• Temporarily tighten the brake caliper housing bolts.

!

CAUTION

After installing the brake caliper to the front fork, tighten the brake caliper housing bolts to the specified torque. Refer to “Front Brake

Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4B-

3)”.

Special tool

(A): 09930–11920 (Torx bit (JT 40H))

(B): 09930–11940 (Bit holder)

Tightening torque

Front brake caliper housing bolt (a): 22 N·m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

Front Brakes: 4B-6

Brake Caliper Piston

Inspect the brake caliper piston surface for any scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the piston with a new one.

(a)

I649G1420016-02

Brake Pad Mounting Pin

Inspect the brake Pad mounting pin for wear and other damage. If any damage is found, replace the mounting pin with a new one.

(a)

(A)

(B)

I649G1420008-04

• Install the brake pads. Refer to “Front Brake Pad

Replacement (Page 4B-2)”.

Front Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

B718H14206006

Refer to “Front Brake Caliper Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 4B-4)”.

Brake Caliper Cylinder

Inspect the brake caliper cylinder wall for nicks, scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the caliper with a new one.

I718H1420018-03

Brake Pad Spring

Inspect the brake pad springs for damage and excessive bend. If any defects are found, replace them with new ones.

I718H1420019-03

I649G1420015-02

4B-7 Front Brakes:

Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation

B718H14206007

Removal

1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

2) Remove the front brake disc.

Front Brake Disc Inspection

B718H14206008

Brake Disc Thickness

Check the brake disc for damage or cracks and measure the thickness using the micrometer.

Replace the brake disc if the thickness is less than the service limit or if defect is found.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Brake disc thickness

Service limit (Front): 4.5 mm (0.18 in)

(A)

I718H1420016-01

Installation

Install the front brake disc in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Make sure that the brake discs are clean and free of any grease.

• Apply thread lock to the brake disc bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32130 (Thread

Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Brake disc bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

(a)

I649G1420019-03

Brake Disc Runout

1) Dismount the front brake caliper. Refer to “Front

Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4B-

3)”.

2) Measure the runout using the dial gauge.

Replace the disc if the runout exceeds the service limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

: 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

Brake disc runout

Service limit: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)

(A)

(a)

I718H1420017-01

I649G1420020-03

3) Remount the front brake caliper. Refer to “Front

Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4B-

3)”.

Front Brakes: 4B-8

Specifications

Service Data

Brake

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Brake disc thickness

Brake disc runout

Brake caliper cylinder bore

Brake caliper piston diam.

Front

Front

Front

Leading

Trailing

Leading

Trailing

Standard

4.8 – 5.2 (0.189 – 0.205)

27.050 – 27.126 (1.0650 – 1.0680)

30.280 – 30.356 (1.1921 – 1.1951)

26.920 – 26.970 (1.0598 – 1.0618)

30.150 – 30.200 (1.1870 – 1.1890)

B718H14207001

Limit

4.5 (0.18)

0.30 (0.012)

Oil

Brake fluid type

Item Specification

DOT 4

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Front brake pad mounting pin

Front brake caliper mounting bolt

Front brake caliper housing bolt

Front brake hose union bolt

Brake disc bolt

N

m

16

26

22

23

23

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.6

2.6

lb-ft

11.5

19.0

2.2 16.0

2.3

2.3

16.5

16.5

B718H14207002

Note

) (Page 4B-3)

) (Page 4B-3)

) (Page 4B-3) /

) (Page 4B-6)

) (Page 4B-3)

) (Page 4B-7)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Front Brake Components (Page 4B-1)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

4B-9 Front Brakes:

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Material

Brake fluid

Thread lock cement

B718H14208001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

DOT 4 —

Thread Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent

Note

) (Page 4B-5) / ) (Page 4B-

5)

P/No.: 99000–32130 ) (Page 4B-7)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Front Brake Components (Page 4B-1)”

Special Tool

09900–20205

Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)

) (Page 4B-7)

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm)

) (Page 4B-7)

B718H14208002

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

) (Page 4B-7)

09930–11920

Torx bit (JT40H)

) (Page 4B-3) / ) (Page 4B-

4) / ) (Page 4B-6)

09930–11940

Bit holder

) (Page 4B-3) / ) (Page 4B-

4) / ) (Page 4B-6)

Brake

Rear Brakes

Rear Brake Components

1

Repair Instructions

2

4,

3,

(a)

Rear Brakes: 4C-1

B718H14306001

(c)

(d)

(b)

(e)

5

1. Rear caliper bracket

2. Piston

3. Piston seal

4. Dust seal

5. Rear brake pad/Shim set

6. Rear brake disc

(f)

6

: 6.0 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

: 27 N

⋅ m (2.7 kgf-m, 19.5 lb-ft)

: 18 N

⋅ m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

: 2.5 N

⋅ m (0.25 kgf-m, 1.8 lb-ft)

: 22 N

⋅ m (2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I649G1430001-05

: Apply silicone grease to sliding surface.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Apply brake fluid.

: Do not reuse.

4C-2 Rear Brakes:

Rear Brake Pad Inspection

B718H14306002

The extent of brake pads wear can be checked by observing the grooved limit line “A” on the pads. When the wear exceeds the grooved limit line, replace the pads with new ones. Refer to “Rear Brake Pad

Replacement (Page 4C-2)”.

!

CAUTION

Replace the brake pad as a set, otherwise braking performance will be adversely affected.

2) Loosen the pad mounting pin (2).

3) Remove the caliper mounting bolt (3).

!

CAUTION

Do not operate the brake pedal while dismounting the pads.

2

3

“A”

I718H1430001-02

B718H14306003

I718H1430018-02

4) Remove the pad mounting pin (2) and brake pads with the rear caliper pivoted up.

NOTE

When removing the pads, push the piston all the way into brake caliper.

Rear Brake Pad Replacement

1) Remove the plug (1).

1

2

I718H1430017-02

I718H1430016-01

5) Clean up the caliper, especially around the caliper piston.

6) Assemble the new brake pad (4), insulator (5) and shim (6).

!

CAUTION

Replace the brake pads as a set, otherwise braking performance will be adversely affected.

4

5

6

Rear Brakes: 4C-3

8) Tighten the caliper mounting bolt (7) and pad mounting pin (8) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear brake caliper mounting bolt (a): 22 N·m (

2.2 kgf-m, 16.0 lb-ft)

Rear brake pad mounting pin (b): 18 N·m (1.8 kgf-m, 13.0 lb-ft)

8

(b)

7

(a)

I718H1430019-02

7) Install the new brake pads.

NOTE

Make sure that the detent of the pad is seated onto the retainer on the caliper bracket.

9) Install the plug (9) to the specified torque.

I718H1430021-02

Tightening torque

Pad pin plug (c): 2.5 N·m (0.25 kgf-m, 1.8 lb-ft)

NOTE

After replacing the brake pads, pump the brake pedal several times to check for proper brake operation and then check the brake fluid level.

9

(c)

I718H1430020-01

I718H1430022-01

4C-4 Rear Brakes:

Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

B718H14306004

Removal

1) Drain brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid Replacement in Section 4A (Page 4A-10)”.

2) Remove the brake hose from the caliper by removing the union bolt (1) and catch the brake fluid in a suitable receptacle.

NOTE

• Place a rag underneath the union bolt on the brake caliper to catch any spilt brake fluid.

• Slightly loosen the sliding pin (2) to facilitate later disassembly, if necessary.

• After setting the brake hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt (2) to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

Tightening torque

Brake hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

2

(b)

1

2

I718H1430023-01

3) Remove the brake pads. Refer to “Rear Brake Pad

Replacement (Page 4C-2)”.

4) Pivot the caliper up and remove the caliper from the caliper bracket.

1

(a)

I718H1430026-01

• Bleed air from the brake system after installing the caliper. Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section 4A (Page 4A-8)”.

• Check the brake fluid leakage and brake operation.

!

WARNING

Brake fluid, if it leaks, will interfere with safe running and discolor painted surfaces.

Check the brake hose and hose joints for cracks and fluid leakage.

Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and Assembly

B718H14306005

Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

(Page 4C-4)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the pad spring (1) and rubber boot (2).

1

I718H1430024-01

Installation

Install the brake caliper in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the brake pad and remount the brake caliper.

Refer to “Rear Brake Pad Replacement (Page 4C-2)”.

• Tighten the sliding pin (1) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear brake caliper sliding pin (a): 27 N·m (2.7 kgfm, 19.5 lb-ft)

2

I718H1430027-01

2) Remove the pad spring (3).

Rear Brakes: 4C-5

6) Remove the dust seal (7) and piston seal (8).

8

7

3

3) Remove the spacer (4) and rubber boot (5) from the caliper.

4) Remove the slide pin (6).

I649G1430014-02

5

4

6

I649G1430015-03

5) Place a rag over the piston to prevent it from popping out and then force out the piston using compressed air.

!

CAUTION

Do not use high pressure air to prevent piston damage.

I649G1430017-02

Assembly

Assemble the caliper in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Wash the caliper bore and piston with specified brake fluid. Particularly wash the dust seal groove and piston seal groove.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

!

CAUTION

• Wash the caliper components with fresh brake fluid before reassembly. Never use cleaning solvent or gasoline to wash them.

• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified brake fluid. Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvent such as gasoline, kerosine or the others.

I649G1430018-02

I649G1430016-02

4C-6 Rear Brakes:

• Apply the brake fluid to piston seal (1) and dust seal

(2).

!

CAUTION

Replace the piston seal (1) and dust seal (2) with new ones.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

• Install the piston seals as shown.

Rear Brake Caliper Parts Inspection

B718H14306006

Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 4C-4)”.

Brake Caliper Cylinder

Inspect the brake caliper cylinder wall for nicks, scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the caliper with a new one.

2

1

I649G1420013-02

• Apply grease to the inside of the boot.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

• Temporarily tighten the sliding pin (3) and apply grease to the sliding pin.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

• After mounting the caliper, tighten the sliding pin (3) to the specified torque. Refer to “Rear Brake Caliper

Removal and Installation (Page 4C-4)”.

Tightening torque

Rear brake caliper sliding pin (a): 27 N·m (2.7 kgfm, 19.5 lb-ft)

I649G1430020-02

Brake Caliper Piston

Inspect the brake caliper piston surface for any scratches or other damage. If any damage is found, replace the piston with a new one.

I649G1430021-02

Brake Caliper Sliding Pin

Inspect the brake caliper sliding pin for wear and other damage. If any damage is found, replace the sliding pin with a new one.

3,

(a)

I649G1430019-03

I649G1430022-02

Boot and Spacer

Inspect the boots and spacer for damage and wear. If any defects are found, replace them with new ones.

I649G1430023-02

Brake Pad Spring

Inspect the brake pad springs for damage and excessive bend. If any defects are found, replace them with new ones.

Rear Brakes: 4C-7

Installation

Install the rear brake disc in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Make sure that the brake discs are clean and free of any grease.

• Apply thread lock to the brake disc bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32130 (Thread

Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Brake disc bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

(a)

I649G1430024-02

Rear Brake Disc Removal and Installation

B718H14306007

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the rear brake disc.

(a)

I718H1430029-02

Rear Brake Disc Inspection

B718H14306008

Brake Disc Thickness

Check the brake disc for damage or cracks and measure the thickness using the micrometer.

Replace the brake disc if the thickness is less than the service limit or if defect is found.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20205 (Micrometer (0 – 25 mm))

Brake disc thickness

Service limit (Rear): 4.5 mm (0.18 in)

(A)

I649G1430027-03

I718H1430028-01

4C-8 Rear Brakes:

Brake Disc Runout

1) Dismount the rear brake caliper. Refer to “Rear

Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4C-

4)”.

2) Measure the runout using the dial gauge.

Replace the disc if the runout exceeds the service limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20607 (Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm))

(B): 09900–20701 (Magnetic stand)

Brake disc runout

Service limit: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)

(A)

I649G1430028-03

3) Remount the rear brake caliper. Refer to “Rear

Brake Caliper Removal and Installation (Page 4C-

4)”.

Specifications

Service Data

Brake

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Brake disc thickness

Brake disc runout

Brake caliper cylinder bore

Brake caliper piston diam.

Oil

Brake fluid type

Item

Rear

Rear

Rear

Standard

4.8 – 5.2 (0.189 – 0.205)

38.180 – 38.230 (1.5031 – 1.5051)

38.080 – 38.130 (1.4992 – 1.5012)

B718H14307001

Limit

4.5 (0.18)

0.30 (0.012)

Specification

DOT 4

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Rear brake caliper mounting bolt

Rear brake pad mounting pin

Pad pin plug

Rear brake caliper sliding pin

N

m

22

18

2.5

27

23

23

Tightening torque kgf-m

2.2

1.8

0.25

lb-ft

16.0

13.0

1.8

2.7 19.5

2.3

2.3

16.5

16.5

B718H14307002

Note

) (Page 4C-3)

) (Page 4C-3)

) (Page 4C-3)

) (Page 4C-4) /

) (Page 4C-6)

) (Page 4C-4)

) (Page 4C-7)

Brake hose union bolt

Brake disc bolt

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Rear Brake Components (Page 4C-1)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Rear Brakes: 4C-9

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Material

Brake fluid

Grease

Thread lock cement

B718H14308001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

DOT 4 —

SUZUKI Silicone Grease or equivalent

Thread Lock Cement Super 1360 or equivalent

Note

) (Page 4C-5) / ) (Page 4C-

6)

P/No.: 99000–25100 ) (Page 4C-6) / ) (Page 4C-

6)

P/No.: 99000–32130 ) (Page 4C-7)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Rear Brake Components (Page 4C-1)”

Special Tool

09900–20205

Micrometer (0 – 25 mm)

) (Page 4C-7)

09900–20607

Dial gauge (1/100 mm, 10 mm)

) (Page 4C-8)

B718H14308002

09900–20701

Magnetic stand

) (Page 4C-8)

4E-1 ABS:

Brake

ABS

ABS Information

!

WARNING

Precautions

Precautions for ABS

B718H14500001

Refer to “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in

Section 00 (Page 00-2)”.

B718H14500002

• Be sure to bleed air from the brake fluid circuit when the brake is felt spongy or when a brake relating part is replaced.

• Never ride the motorcycle before bleeding the air.

• Be sure to route the brake hoses correctly.

• The ABS does not shorten the motorcycle’s braking distance. When riding down slopes or on wet or bumpy roads the braking distance is lengthened as compared to a motorcycle without ABS. In addition, braking distance increases more, when the road is slippery.

• The ABS does not control slides which may occur when braking while turning. As with a motorcycle that does not have ABS, it is best not apply the brakes while turning.

• The brake levers may move by themselves when they are applied. This is not a malfunction.

• Only use the specified tires.

General Description

Wheel Speed Sensor Description

Wheel speed sensor consists of wheel speed sensor (1) and sensor rotor (2).

Front

B718H14501001

2

1

1

Rear

2

I718H1450005-01

I718H1450006-01

ABS: 4E-2

ABS Control Unit Description

B718H14501002

ABS control unit (1) calculates signals input from each one of front and rear wheel speed sensors, monitors the slipping conditions of the wheels and, at the same time, sends control signal to Hydraulic Unit (HU) (2).

This ABS control unit/HU can not be disassembled.

2

1

Front wheel speed sensor

Rear wheel speed sensor

Brake light switch

Mode selection switch

SDS

Ignition

Battery

I718H1450007-03

Input interface

Wheel speed sensor circuit

SW input circuit

Communication circuit

Power unit

ABS contorl unit/HU

ABS contorl unit

Output interface

Main

CPU

Watch IC

Reciprocal checking

Indicator light circuit

Solenoid valve circuit

Motor circuit

ABS indicator light

Front IN/V

Front OUT/V

Rear IN/V

Rear OUT/V

M Motor

OUT/V: Outlet solenoid valve

IN/V: Inlet solenoid valve

I718H1450008-01

4E-3 ABS:

ABS Control Unit Calculating Process

The ABS controls and its calculations, in addition to the self-diagnosing and the fail-safe processes, occur during the

ABS control unit calculating process. ABS control is performed in one cycle every 10/1 000 seconds. In addition, if a malfunction is detected by the self-diagnosis function, the brake stops being controlled by the ABS and a diagnostic trouble code is stored.

Calculating process when a malfunction occurs Normal calculating process

Ignition switch turned to ON

ABS control unit Initialization

Self-diagnosis

(during start up)

No malfunction

Malfunction indicated

Wheel speed sensor signal enters

ABS indicator light lights up

1 cycle

10/1 000 seconds

ABS control calculation

Hydraulic unit control signal output

Is ABS under control ?

NO

Prohibition of ABS control

YES

Interim ABS control

Self-diagnosis (while riding)

Malfunction indicated

Correct

Diagnostic trouble code memorized

I718H1450009-02

ABS: 4E-4

Hydraulic Unit (HU) Description

B718H14501003

The hydraulic unit operates the solenoid valves based upon the signal which is output from the ABS control unit. The brake fluid pressure is then adjusted accordingly. The hydraulic unit controls the front and rear brake systems individually by operating separate components for the front and the rear, except for the pump drive motor, which is shared by both systems.

Rear brake pedal/ master cylinder

Front brake lever/ master cylinder

Rear brake light switch

Front brake light switch

HU

Solenoid valve IN

Solenoid valve IN

One-way valve

One-way valve

Damper

M

Motor

Solenoid valve OUT

Solenoid valve OUT

Rear brake caliper

Reservoir Reservoir

ABS control unit

Front brake caliper

Rear wheel speed sensor

Front wheel speed sensor

Rear system

ABS indicator light

Front system

I718H1450010-01

4E-5 ABS:

Self-diagnosis Function and ABS Indicator

Light Description

B718H14501006

The ABS control unit performs the self-diagnosis and can store any electronically detected malfunctions as diagnostic trouble codes. If a malfunction has occurred, the indicator light lights up to inform the rider of the malfunction. The special tool, when connected to the mode select coupler, enables the ABS indicator light to display the diagnostic trouble codes.

ABS Indicator Light

The ABS indicator light informs the rider of any ABS malfunctions. If a malfunction occurred, the ABS indicator light flashes, during the self-diagnosis, to indicate the diagnostic trouble code so that the correct part can be repaired.

• When the ignition switch is turned to ON, the ABS indicator light lights up even if no malfunction has occurred, to indicate that the bulb is not burnt out. It will go off after the motorcycle is ridden at more than

10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).

• If an ABS malfunction has occurred, the ABS indicator light keeps lighting up.

FI

I718H1450122-04

NOTE

When a malfunction has occurred in the ABS, connect the special tool to the mode select coupler to display the diagnostic trouble code on the ABS indicator light. Refer to

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output

(Page 4E-23)”.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82710 (Mode select switch)

(A)

O

B/W

I718H1450042-03

ABS Operation and ABS Indicator Light

The ABS indicator light shows the ABS operating condition. During normal operation, the ABS indicator light lights up when the ignition switch is turned to ON and goes off after the motorcycle is ridden at more than 10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).

If a malfunction has occurred, the ABS indicator light keeps lighting up.

The ABS is normally activated.

The ABS indicator light goes off when the motorcycle is ridden at more than 10 km/h.

The ABS indicator light keeps lighting up even though the motorcycle is ridden at more than 10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).

The ABS indicator light does not light up when turning the ignition switch ON.

One or more malfunction has been found and ABS activation been hanged up.

Check the wire harness and combination meter. Refer to

“ABS Indicator Light Inspection (Page 4E-17)”.

FI

I718H1450122-04

ABS: 4E-6

Stored DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)

As for the diagnostic trouble code, the code of the first malfunction occurred during one ignition ON period will be stored. Pay attention to the fact that even though there may occur several malfunctions in one ON-period, only one code will be stored. Codes of malfunction that occurred in the past are all stored, but the same diagnostic trouble code will not be redundant.

Check and see if any diagnostic trouble code remains, by actually running the machine to activate ABS and by carrying out the self-diagnosis after deleting the diagnostic trouble code once the malfunctioned part is repaired.

Fail-safe Function Description

B718H14501007

If malfunction occurs in the ABS electric system, this sets fail-safe relay OFF. Consequently, motor relay will be set

OFF and the indicator light ON, and no current will be applied to motor solenoid valve inactivating ABS and turning

ABS indicator light ON. In this case, it functions as the normal brake. However, if malfunctions occurs while ABS is being activated, when ABS control unit diagnoses that the operation can continue, it will effectuate ABS provisional control (turning the ABS indicator light ON). Upon the moment when ABS provisional control is over, the fail-safe relay will be set OFF.

ABS control unit

Motor relay

M

Motor

Fail-safe relay

CPU

Ignition switch

ABS indicator light

Combination meter

I717H2450035-01

4E-7 ABS:

Schematic and Routing Diagram

ABS Wiring Diagram

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

B/W

Gr

R/Bl

R

B/R

B/R

R

R

B/W B/W

R

W/B

O/G

B/O

B/R

B/O

B/R

B

B/G

B

B/G

Br

O/Y

O

B/R

Br

Gr

R/B

R/Bl

W/Y

W/B

B/W

W/R

B/W

B/Y

R/B

R

W/R

B/R

W/Y

B/Y

O

B/W

W

B

W

B

B/O

O/Y

B/G

B718H14502001

I718H1450020-06

ABS Unit Diagram

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

Motor g

ABS: 4E-8

B718H14502002

“A”: Rear brake solenoid OUT

“B”: Rear brake solenoid IN

“C”: Front brake solenoid OUT

“D”: Front brake solenoid IN

“E”: Fail safe (+) B

“F”: Motor relay (+) B

“G”: Motor (+) B

I718H1450021-04

4E-9 ABS:

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

GSF1250A

B718H14502003

3

6

“B”

2

1

4

5

“C”

7

“D”

“E”

“F”

“H”

8

“G”

“I”

“A”

1. Clamp

2. Guide

3. Front brake hose No.1

4. Front brake hose No.1 (L)

5. Front brake hose No.2

6. Front brake hose No.2 (L)

7: Clamp

: Clamp the sensor lead wire at the white marking.

8. Front wheel speed sensor

“A”: Outside mark

“B”: Pass through the sensor lead wire between brake hose No.2 and brake hose No.2 (L).

“C”: Pass through the sensor lead wire in front of the brake hose.

“D”: Pass through the sensor lead wire outside of the brake hose.

I718H1450022-03

“E”: Clamp the sensor lead wire sleeve with the brake hose.

“F”: Pass through the sensor lead wire outside of the brake hose union bolt.

“G”: Clamp the sensor lead wire at front side of the brake hose. Make clearance from the front fender.

“H”: Clamp the sensor lead wire on the protector of brake hose.

“I”: Clamp the sensor lead wire at front side of the brake hose.

ABS: 4E-10

GSF1250SA

3

6

“B”

2

1

4

5

“C”

7

“D”

“E”

“F”

“H”

8

“G”

“I”

“A”

1. Clamp

2. Guide

3. Front brake hose No.1

4. Front brake hose No.1 (L)

5. Front brake hose No.2

6. Front brake hose No.2 (L)

7: Clamp

: Clamp the sensor lead wire at the white marking.

8. Front wheel speed sensor

“A”: Outside mark

“B”: Pass through the sensor lead wire between brake hose No.2 and brake hose No.2 (L).

“C”: Pass through the sensor lead wire in front of the brake hose.

“D”: Pass through the sensor lead wire outside of the brake hose.

I718H1450023-03

“E”: Clamp the sensor lead wire sleeve with the brake hose.

“F”: Pass through the sensor lead wire outside of the brake hose union bolt.

“G”: Clamp the sensor lead wire at front side of the brake hose. Make clearance from the front fender.

“H”: Clamp the sensor lead wire on the protector of brake hose.

“I”: Clamp the sensor lead wire at front side of the brake hose.

4E-11 ABS:

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

“G”

2

B718H14502004

3

“ a ”

1

1. Rear wheel speed sensor

2. Brake hose No.2

3. Brake hose No.1

4. Brake hose guide

“B”

“E”

“A”

“C”

2

“F”

4

2

2

“D”

“A”: Outside mark

“B”: After the clamp has contacted to the stopper, tighten the bolt.

“C”: Clamp sensor lead wire with white tape matched green paint of brake hose.

“D”: Pass through the sensor lead wire inside of the brake hose guide.

I718H1450118-03

“E”: Pass through the sensor lead wire on the brake hose.

“F”: Clamp the sensor lead wire upper side of brake hose.

“G”: Pass through the sensor lead wire inside of the brake hose.

“a”: 35 mm (1.4 in)

ABS Components Location

Component Location

2

1

3

ABS: 4E-12

B718H14503001

6

7

1. ABS control unit/HU

2. Mode select coupler

3. SDS coupler

4. Front wheel speed sensor

5. Front wheel speed sensor rotor

6. Rear wheel speed sensor

4

5

7. Rear wheel speed sensor rotor

I718H1450119-02

4E-13 ABS:

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

ABS Troubleshooting

B718H14504001

Many of the ABS malfunction diagnosing operations are performed by checking the wiring continuity. Quick and accurate detection of malfunctions within the complex circuitry assures the proper operation of the ABS. Before beginning any repairs, thoroughly read and understand this Supplementary Service Manual.

The ABS is equipped with a self-diagnosis function. The detected malfunction is stored as a diagnostic trouble code which causes the ABS indicator light to light up or flash in set patterns to indicate the malfunction.

Diagnostic trouble codes are stored even when the ignition switch is turned to OFF and they can only be erased manually. In order to repair the ABS correctly, ask the customer for the exact circumstances under which the malfunction occurred, then check the ABS indicator light and the output diagnostic trouble codes.

Explain to the customer that depending on how the motorcycle is operated (e.g., if the front wheel is off the ground), the ABS indicator light may light up even though the ABS is operating correctly.

4) and inspect the wiring. Refer to “ABS Wiring

Diagram (Page 4E-7)” and “ABS Unit Diagram

(Page 4E-8)”.

!

CAUTION

• When disconnecting couplers and turning the ignition switch ON, disconnect the ABS control unit coupler in order to prevent a

DTC from being stored.

• Each time a resistance is measured, the ignition switch should be set to OFF.

6) Inspect the ABS components. Refer to “Wheel

Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor Inspection

(Page 4E-74)”.

7) Delete the DTCs and check the brake operation.

Refer to “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting

(Page 4E-25)”.

Basic Troubleshooting Diagram

1) Gather information from the customer.

Troubleshooting Procedure

Troubleshooting should be proceed as follows. If the order is performed incorrectly or any part is omitted, an error in misdiagnosis may result.

1) Gather information from the customer.

2) Perform the pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to “Prediagnosis Inspection (Page 4E-15)”.

3) Inspect the ABS indicator light. Refer to “ABS

Indicator Light Inspection (Page 4E-17)”.

4) Output the DTCs stored in the ABS control unit.

Refer to “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output

(Page 4E-23)”.

5) Perform appropriate troubleshooting procedures according to the DTCs output. Refer to “DTC Table

(Page 4E-34)”.

If troubleshooting procedures cannot be performed, try to determine the cause of the malfunction according to the information gathered in 1) through

2) Perform the pre-diagnosis inspection.

3) Inspect the ABS indicator light.

4) Output the DTCs stored in the ABS control unit.

5) Perform appropriate troubleshooting procedures according to the DTCs output.

If troubleshooting procedures cannot be performed, try to determine the cause of the malfunction according to the information gathered in 1) through 4) and inspect the wiring.

6) Inspect the ABS components.

7) Delete the DTCs and check the brake operation.

I718H1450120-01

Information Gathering

To properly diagnose a malfunction, one must not make guesses or assumptions about the circumstances that caused it. Proper diagnosis and repair require duplicating the situation in which the malfunction occurred. If a diagnosis is made without duplicating the malfunction, even an experienced service technician may make a misdiagnosis and not perform the servicing procedure correctly, resulting in the malfunction not being repaired. For example, a malfunction that occurs only while braking on slippery surfaces will not occur if the motorcycle is ridden on a non-slippery surface.

Therefore, in order to properly diagnose and repair the motorcycle, the customer must be questioned about the conditions at the time that the malfunction occurred making “Information gathering” very important. In order that the information obtained from the customer to be used as a reference during troubleshooting, it is necessary to ask certain important questions concerning the malfunction. Therefore, a questionnaire has been created to improve the information-gathering procedure.

EXAMPLE: CUSTOMER PROBLEM INSPECTION FORM

User name:

Date Reg.

Model:

Date of problem:

VIN:

Mileage:

ABS operation

ABS does not work

ABS works so often with

Too long stopping distance

Other

Date of issue:

PROBLEM SYMPTOMS

Past malfunctions and repairs

ABS: 4E-14

CONDITION WHEN MALFUNCTION OCCURED

ABS indicator light

Does not light up

Lights up

Goes off after running over 10 km/h: Yes / No

Flashes

Riding conditions

While stopping

Over 10 km/h

When turning

Others

Tires

Abnormal air pressure

Less thread depth

No specified tires installed

Brake operating conditions

Usual braking

Quick/hard braking

Road surface

Paved road:

Dry / Wet / Others

Unpaved road:

Gravel / Muddy / Uneven / Others

Interface

Too big pulsations at brake levers

Too large brake lever strokes

Others

Others

Abnormal noise from the ABS control unit/HU

Skid noise from the calipers

Vibration at the brake levers

NOTE:

NOTE

This form is a standard sample. The form should be modified according to conditions and characteristic of each market.

4E-15 ABS:

Pre-diagnosis Inspection

B718H14504019

The mechanical and hydraulic components of the brake system should be inspected prior to performing any electrical checks. These inspections may find problems that the ABS could not detect; thus, shortening repair time.

Brake

Brake fluid level check

Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-17)”.

Brake pad inspection

Refer to “Brake System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-17)”.

Brake fluid circuit air bleeding

Refer to “Air Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section

4A (Page 4A-8)”.

Tire

Tire type

Tire type

Front: DUNLOP D218FT

Rear: DUNLOP D218N

Tire pressure

Refer to “Tire Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-19)”.

!

CAUTION

• The standard tire fitted on this motorcycle is 120/70ZR17M/C (58W) for front and 180/

55ZR17M/C (73W) for rear. The use of tires other than those specified may cause instability. It is highly recommended to use a SUZUKI Genuine Tire.

• Replace the tire as a set, otherwise the

DTC “25” (C1625) may be stored.

Wheel

Refer to “Front Wheel Related Parts Inspection in

Section 2D (Page 2D-8)” and “Rear Wheel Related Parts

Inspection in Section 2D (Page 2D-17)”.

Battery

Battery voltage inspection

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Measure the voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals using the multi-circuit tester.

If the voltage is less than 12.0 V, charge or replace the battery and inspect the charging system. Refer to

“Battery Runs Down Quickly in Section 1J (Page 1J-

2)”.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Battery voltage

12.0 V and more

4) Reinstall the seat.

( ޓ )

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450123-01

ABS Component

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance inspection

Inspect the clearance between the wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor for each wheel using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – Sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Front

ABS: 4E-16

ABS control unit/HU ground wire inspection

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the battery (–) lead wire.

4) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

5) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt (1).

I718H1450124-01

(A), (B)

Rear

I718H1450025-01

(A), (B)

1

I718H1450028-01

6) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler (2).

I718H1450026-01

2

I718H1450115-01

4E-17 ABS:

7) Check for continuity between “24” (B/W) at the coupler and the battery (–) terminal, also “25” (B/W) at the coupler and the battery (–) terminal.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(A)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

I718H1450030-03

ABS Indicator Light Inspection

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Check if the ABS indicator light lights up when turning the ignition switch ON.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

(A)

I718H1450125-01

B718H14504020

No

Go to Step 3.

FI

I718H1450122-04

Does the ABS indicator light up?

2

(The ABS indicator light lights up)

1) Ride the motorcycle at more than 10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).

Normal (No DTC exists) • DTC output (Refer to

“DTC (Diagnostic

Trouble Code) Output

(Page 4E-23)”)

• If DTC can not be output (the ABS indicator light does not flash), go to Step

7.

I718H1450033-02

Does the ABS indicator light go off?

Step Action

3

(The ABS indicator light does not light up)

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the fuse box (1) by removing the mounting bolt.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

1

ABS: 4E-18

No

Replace the ignition fuse.

I718H1450034-01

3) Open the fuse box and inspect the ignition fuse (2).

!

CAUTION

If a fuse is blown, find the cause of the problem and correct it before replacing the fuse.

Ignition fuse

15 A

2

I718H1450035-01

Is the ignition fuse OK?

4E-19 ABS:

Step Action

4 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

3) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between

“16” (O/Y) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 5.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“16” – “24”)

Battery voltage (12.0 V and more)

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

( ޓ )

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450036-04

Is the voltage between “16” and “24” normal?

5 1) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between

“21” (Brown) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“21” – “24”)

7.0 V and more

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Go to Step 6.

(A)

( ޓ )

(

ޓ

)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

Is the voltage between “21” and “24” normal?

I718H1450037-02

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition or ground wire)

• Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty indicator light wire)

• Signal fuse or indicator light is blown.

Step Action

6 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Check for continuity between “24” (B/W) at the coupler and body ground, also “25” (B/W) at the coupler and body ground.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

(A)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

I718H1450038-02

Are there continuity between “24”, “25” and body ground?

7

(The ABS indicator light does not go off)

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

4) Open the fuse box and inspect the ignition fuse (1).

Go to Step 8.

!

CAUTION

If a fuse is blown, find the cause of the problem and correct it before replacing the fuse.

Ignition fuse

15 A

1

ABS: 4E-20

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ground wire)

No

Replace the ignition fuse.

I718H1450039-01

Is the ignition fuse OK?

4E-21 ABS:

Step Action

8 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”

3) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between

“16” (O/Y) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 9.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“16” – “24”)

Battery voltage (12.0 V and more)

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

( ޓ )

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450036-04

Is the voltage between “16” and “24” normal?

9 1) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between

“21” (Brown) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“21” – “24”)

7.0 V and more

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Go to Step 10.

(A)

( ޓ )

(

ޓ

)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

Is the voltage between “21” and “24” normal?

I718H1450037-02

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition or ground wire)

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty indicator light wire)

Step Action

10 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Short the mode select coupler terminals (O – B/W) using the special tool.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82710 (Mode select switch)

ABS: 4E-22

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty mode select switch wire)

(A)

O

B/W

I718H1450042-03

4) Check for continuity between “13” (O) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

( ޓ )

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

( ޓ )

Is there continuity between “13” and “24”?

I718H1450043-02

4E-23 ABS:

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Output

B718H14504021

NOTE

• Even through the ABS is operating correctly, a DTC is memorized in any of the following conditions.

– If the motorcycle is put on its centerstand, the engine is started and only the rear wheel is rotated.

– Previous malfunctions were repaired, but the DTCs were not deleted.

• After carrying out DTC deleting and ABS operation check, explain to the customer that the ABS is operating correctly. Refer to “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)

Deleting (Page 4E-25)”.

Use of Mode Select Switch

Connect the special tool to the mode select coupler to output the memorized DTCs on the ABS indicator light.

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Connect the special tool to the mode select coupler

(1) (O – B/W).

Special tool

(A): 09930–82710 (Mode select switch)

4) Switch the special tool to ON.

I718H1450040-02

5) Turn the ignition switch ON.

The ABS indicator light starts flashing to indicate the

DTC. Refer to “DTC Table (Page 4E-34)”.

NOTE

• If there is a DTC, the ABS indicator light keeps flashing cyclically and repeatedly.

• If there is no DTC, the ABS indicator light keeps lighting on.

• If the DTCs are to be output for a long time, remove the HEAD-LO fuse in order to prevent the battery from discharging.

FI

1

I718H1450122-04

6) Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the special tool.

I718H1450044-02

(A)

I718H1450045-02

ABS: 4E-24

Understanding the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)

A two-digit DTC is shown through the flashing pattern of the ABS indicator light. A number between 1 and 9 is represented by the number of times that the ABS indicator light lights up in interval of 0.4 seconds and the separation between the tens and ones are indicated by the light staying off for 1.6 seconds. In addition, the separation between the start code and the DTC is indicated by the light being off for 3.6 seconds. After the start code is displayed, DTCs appear from the smallest number code.

If no DTCs are memorized, the ABS indicator light keeps lighting up.

Mode select switch

ON

Brake light switch

OFF

ON

Ignition switch

OFF

Output start

ABS indicator light

(Malfunction exists)

“a” “b”

Code 12

OFF

ON

“c”

“e”

“b”

“f”

“g”

“d”

Code 31

ABS indicator light

(No malfunction exists)

OFF

ON

“e”: Main-sub code interval (1.6 seconds)

“f”: Sub code light ON time (0.4 seconds)

“g”: Sub code light OFF time (0.4 seconds)

“a”: Initial minimum light ON time (About 2 seconds)

“b”: Error code interval (About 3.6 seconds)

“c”: Main code light ON time (0.4 seconds)

“d”: Main code light OFF time (0.4 seconds)

Use of SDS

NOTE

• Don’t disconnect couplers from ABS HU, the battery cable from the battery, ABS HU ground wire harness from the engine or main fuse before confirming the malfunction code (self-diagnostic trouble code) stored in memory. Such disconnection will erase the memorized information in ABS HU memory.

• DTC stored in ABS HU memory can be checked by the SDS.

Output finish

OFF

I718H1450129-01

4E-25 ABS:

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

Special tool

(A): 09904–41010 (SDS set)

(B): 99565–01010–010 (CD-ROM Ver.10)

(A)

I718H1450047-01

3) Read the DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) and show data when trouble (displaying data at the time of

DTC) according to instructions displayed on SDS.

NOTE

• Not only is SDS used for detecting

Diagnostic Trouble Codes but also for reproducing and checking on screen the failure condition as described by customers using the trigger.

• How to use trigger. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

4) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting

B718H14504022

Use of Mode Select Switch

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

(A)

I718H1450049-02

2) Connect the special tool to the mode select coupler

(O – B/W) and output the DTCs.

Special tool

(A): 09930–82710 (Mode select switch)

(B)

(A)

I718H1450045-02

I705H1110116-03

3) While the DTCs are being output, set the special tool to OFF.

!

CAUTION

The DTC deletion mode starts 12.5 seconds after the switch is set to OFF.

ABS: 4E-26

4) In the DTC deletion mode, switch the ABS test switch from OFF to ON three times, each time leaving it at ON for more than 1 second.

I718H1450051-01

I718H1450050-01

DTC Deleting Diagram

Permitted range of erasing DTC DTC indication

ON

ABS indicator light

OFF

Mode select switch

ON

OFF

5) After deleting the DTCs, repeat the code output procedure and make sure that no DTCs remain (the

ABS indicator light no longer flashes).

NOTE

If any DTCs remain, perform the appropriate procedures, then delete the codes. If DTCs are left stored, confusion may occur and unnecessary repairs may be made.

6) Disconnect the mode select switch and install the left frame cover.

Cleaning complete

1 sec.

0.4 sec. each

Cleaning start

Indicate signal

“Cleaning complete”

1 sec.

1 sec.

I718H1450052-01

7) Afterwards, ride the motorcycle at more than 30 km/ h (18.6 mile/h) and quickly apply the brakes to check that the ABS activates correctly.

I718H1450053-01

4E-27 ABS:

Use of SDS

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) After repairing the trouble, turn OFF the ignition switch and turn ON again.

3) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

Special tool

: 09904–41010 (SDS set)

: 99565–01010–010 (CD-ROM Ver.10)

4) Click the ABS button (1).

5) Click the “DTC inspection” button (2).

2

1

I718H1450054-01

I718H1450055-01

6) Check the DTC.

NOTE

The previous malfunction history code (Past

DTC) still remains stored in the ABS HU.

Therefore, erase the history code memorized in the ABS HU using SDS tool.

7) Click “Clear” (3) to delete history code (Past DTC).

NOTE

The DTC is memorized in the ABS HU also when the wire coupler of any sensor is disconnected. Therefore, when a wire coupler has been disconnected at the time of diagnosis, erase the stored malfunction history code using SDS.

3

I718H1450056-01

8) Follow the displayed instructions.

ABS: 4E-28

9) Check that both “Current DTC” (4) and “Past DTC”

(5) are deleted (NIL).

4

5

I705H1110006-01

I718H1450057-01

10) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

11) Disconnect the SDS tool and install the left frame cover.

12) Ride the motorcycle at more than 30 km/h (18.6 mile/h) and quickly apply the brakes to check that the ABS activates correctly.

I705H1110009-01

I718H1450053-01

4E-29 ABS:

SDS Check

B718H14504023

Using SDS, take the sample of data from the new motorcycle and at the time of periodic maintenance at your dealer.

Save the data in the computer or by printing and filing the hard copies. The saved or filed data are useful for troubleshooting as they can be compared periodically with changes over time or failure conditions of the motorcycle.

For example, when a motorcycle is brought in for service but the troubleshooting is difficult, comparison with the normal data that have been saved or filed can allow the specific ABS failure to be determined.

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to “SDS operation manual for further details.)

NOTE

• Before taking the sample of data, check and clear the Past DTC. Refer to “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble

Code) Deleting (Page 4E-25)”.

• A number of different data under a fixed condition as shown should be saved or filed as sample.

Special tool

: 09904–41010 (SDS set)

: 99565–01010–010 (CD-ROM Ver.10)

DATA sampled from ABS HU system

Check the rear wheel speed.

XX km/h

Check the battery voltage.

XX V

Check the brake switch ON and OFF.

I718H1450048-03

ABS: 4E-30

Active Control Inspection

B718H14504024

1) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

2) Set up the SDS tool. (Refer to the SDS operation manual for further details.)

3) Click “ABS” (1).

4) Click “Active control” (2).

1

5) Click “ABS HU operating” (3).

2

I718H1450058-01

3

I718H1450059-01

I718H1450054-01

4E-31 ABS:

6) Click “Next” according to the screen indication.

Return Next Cancel Help

Return Next Cancel

NOTE

Skip this screen as this vehicle is not equipped with parking brake.

Help

I718H1450060-02

Return Next Cancel Help

I718H1450121-01

ABS: 4E-32

NOTE

• If the front wheel is selected, place the motorcycle on the center stand and lift the front wheel off the ground using a jack.

• Two operators are needed in this work; One should apply a rotational force to the front wheel.

Return Next Cancel Help

Return Next Cancel Help

NOTE

• In normal cases, the front brake lever feels a reaction force and the front wheel turns discontinuously. At the same time, the ABS HU operating sound will be heard.

• The ABS HU motor operates for 6 seconds and then stops automatically.

I718H1450061-01

4E-33 ABS:

Return Finish Cancel Help

I718H1450062-01

NOTE

• Inspect the rear brake in the same manner of front brake.

• If the ABS does not function, the cause may lie in the ABS control unit/HU.

• In checking the rear brake at the time of pressure reduction drive (4/7), “brake lever” appears on the screen. This is because the present screen shares with other model having front brake only.

Therefore, in the case of rear brake pedal equipped vehicle, ignore this instruction and operate the rear brake pedal.

7) Close the SDS tool and turn the ignition switch OFF.

8) Disconnect the SDS tool and install the right frame cover.

ABS: 4E-34

DTC Table

DTC

None

13 (C1613)

14 (C1614)

22 (C1622)

23 (C1623)

25 (C1625)

35 (C1635)

41 (C1641)

42 (C1642)

43 (C1643)

44 (C1644)

45 (C1645)

46 (C1646)

47 (C1647)

48 (C1648)

55 (C1655)

61 (C1661)

Normal

Malfunction cause

Wheel speed sensor rotor malfunction (F)

Wheel speed sensor rotor malfunction (R)

ABS actuator circuit malfunction (F)

ABS actuator circuit malfunction (R)

Wheel speed sensor related malfunction

ABS motor malfunction

Wheel speed sensor signal malfunction (F) *

Wheel speed sensor circuit open (F) *

Wheel speed sensor circuit short (F) *

2

2

Wheel speed sensor signal malfunction (R) *

Wheel speed sensor circuit open (R) *

Wheel speed sensor circuit short (R) *

Supply voltage (Increased)

Supply voltage (Decreased)

ABS control unit malfunction

ABS solenoid malfunction

2

2

2

2

B718H14504002

Indicator status

ON * 1

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Reference

Refer to “DTC “13” (C1613): Wheel

Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction (F)

(Page 4E-35)”.

Refer to “DTC “14” (C1614): Wheel

Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction

(R) (Page 4E-37)”.

Refer to “DTC “22” (C1622): ABS

Actuator Circuit Malfunction (F)

(Page 4E-39)”.

Refer to “DTC “23” (C1623): ABS

Actuator Circuit Malfunction (R)

(Page 4E-41)”.

Refer to “DTC “25” (C1625): Wheel

Speed Sensor Related Malfunction

(Page 4E-43)”.

Refer to “DTC “35” (C1635): ABS

Motor Malfunction (Page 4E-45)”.

Refer to “DTC “41” (C1641): Wheel

Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

(F) (Page 4E-47)”.

Refer to “DTC “42” (C1642): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit Open (F)

(Page 4E-49)”.

Refer to “DTC “43” (C1643): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit Short (F)

(Page 4E-53)”.

Refer to “DTC “44” (C1644): Wheel

Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction

(R) (Page 4E-55)”.

Refer to “DTC “45” (C1645): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit Open (R)

(Page 4E-57)”.

Refer to “DTC “46” (C1646): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit Short (R)

(Page 4E-61)”.

Refer to “DTC “47” (C1647): Supply

Voltage (Increased) (Page 4E-63)”.

Refer to “DTC “48” (C1648): Supply

Voltage (Decreased) (Page 4E-

65)”.

Refer to “DTC “55” (C1655): ABS

Control Unit Malfunction (Page 4E-

67)”.

Refer to “DTC “61” (C1661): ABS

Solenoid Malfunction (Page 4E-

69)”.

* 1

* 2

: It goes off after running at more than 10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).

: The wheel speed sensor lead wire is connected to the ABS control unit, but a short-circuit or faulty continuity inside the ABS control unit caused this DTC to appear, therefore, the ABS control unit/HU assembly must be replaced. An insufficient wheel speed sensor output voltage is the cause of a malfunction in which the ABS is activated even if the brakes are not suddenly applied. If this occurs frequently even though the wheel speed sensor is operating correctly, the ABS control unit/HU assembly should be replaced.

4E-35 ABS:

!

CAUTION

When disconnecting couplers and turning the ignition switch ON, disconnect the ABS control unit coupler in order to prevent a DTC from being stored. Each time a resistance is measured, the ignition switch should be set to OFF.

DTC “13” (C1613): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction (F)

Possible Cause

• Front wheel speed sensor rotor distortion

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor or wiring discontinuity, etc.

B718H14504003

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

No

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

I718H1450063-01

Is the clearance OK?

2 1) Inspect the front wheel speed sensor rotor for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Go to Step 3.

Clean or replace the sensor rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Is the sensor rotor OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

ABS: 4E-36

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

I718H1450066-01

Is the sensor mounted securely?

4 1) Inspect the front tire and wheel.

Tire type and size

DUNLOP D218FT 120/70ZR17M/C (58W)

Cold inflation tire pressure (Solo riding)

250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm

2

, 36 psi)

Cold inflation tire pressure (Dual riding)

250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm

2

, 36 psi)

Wheel runout

Service limit (axial and radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Adjust or replace the front tire and wheel.

I718H1450067-01

Are the front tire type, tire pressure and wheel runout OK?

4E-37 ABS:

DTC “14” (C1614): Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Malfunction (R)

Possible Cause

• Rear wheel speed sensor rotor distortion

• Faulty rear wheel speed sensor or wiring discontinuity, etc.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

B718H14504004

No

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

I718H1450026-01

Is the clearance OK?

2 1) Inspect the rear wheel speed sensor rotor for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Go to Step 3.

Clean or replace the sensor rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Is the sensor rotor OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

ABS: 4E-38

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

I718H1450068-01

Is the sensor mounted securely?

4 1) Inspect the rear tire and wheel.

Tire type and size

DUNLOP D218N 180/55ZR17M/C (73W)

Cold inflation tire pressure (Solo riding)

290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm

2

, 42 psi)

Cold inflation tire pressure (Dual riding)

290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm

2

, 42 psi)

Wheel runout

Service limit (axial and radial): 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Adjust or replace the rear tire and wheel.

I718H1450069-01

Are the rear tire type, tire pressure and wheel runout OK?

4E-39 ABS:

DTC “22” (C1622): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction (F)

Possible Cause

• Wire harness discontinuity

• Front wheel locking, etc.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Raise the front wheel off the ground and support the motorcycle with a jack or wooden block.

2) Inspect the dragging of the front brake.

B718H14504005

Yes

Inspect the front brake master cylinder and the calipers.

No

Go to step 2.

I718H1450067-01

Is there any dragging in the front brake?

2 1) Inspect the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Go to Step 3.

Adjust the clearance.

Is the clearance OK?

(A), (B)

I718H1450025-01

Step Action

3 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

ABS: 4E-40

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

Is the sensor mounted securely?

I718H1450066-01

4E-41 ABS:

DTC “23” (C1623): ABS Actuator Circuit Malfunction (R)

Possible Cause

• Wire harness discontinuity

• Rear wheel locking, etc.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Support the motorcycle with its center stand.

2) Inspect the dragging of the rear brake.

B718H14504006

Yes

Inspect the rear brake master cylinder and the caliper.

No

Go to step 2.

I718H1450069-01

Is there any dragging in the rear brake?

2 1) Inspect the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Go to Step 3.

(A), (B)

Adjust the clearance.

I718H1450026-01

Is the clearance OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

ABS: 4E-42

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

Is the sensor mounted securely?

I718H1450068-01

4E-43 ABS:

DTC “25” (C1625): Wheel Speed Sensor Related Malfunction

• Incorrect tire size, poor tire pressure

• Deformed wheel, etc.

Possible Cause

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Check that the specified tires are installed.

Tire type and size

Front: DUNLOP D218FT 120/70ZR17M/C (58W)

Rear: DUNLOP D218N 180/55ZR17M/C (73W)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

B718H14504007

No

Use the specified tires.

I718H1450070-01

Are the tires OK?

2 1) Make sure the tire pressure for each tire. Refer to “Tire

Inspection in Section 0B (Page 0B-19)”.

Cold inflation tire pressure (Solo riding)

Front: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

Rear: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm 2 , 42 psi)

Cold inflation tire pressure (Dual riding)

Front: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm 2 , 36 psi)

Rear: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm 2 , 42 psi)

Go to Step 3.

Adjust the tire pressure.

Is the tire pressure for each tire correct?

I718H1450071-01

Step

3 1) Inspect both wheel speed sensor rotors for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Action Yes

Go to Step 4.

ABS: 4E-44

No

Clean or replace the rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Are the rotors OK?

4 1) Inspect the clearances of the front and rear wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Front

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

(A), (B)

Rear

I718H1450025-01

I718H1450026-01

Are the clearances OK?

4E-45 ABS:

DTC “35” (C1635): ABS Motor Malfunction

Possible Cause

• Faulty HU motor

• Faulty wiring, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect if the pump motor makes turning noise by setting the ignition switch to ON from OFF when the vehicle stands still.

Yes

• Faulty HU motor

• Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

B718H14504008

No

Go to Step 2.

I718H1450074-01

Does the pump motor make any turning noise?

2 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Inspect the ABS motor fuse.

Go to Step 3.

!

CAUTION

If a fuse is blown, find the cause of the problem and correct it before replacing the fuse.

ABS motor fuse

20 A

Replace the ABS motor fuse.

Is the ABS motor fuse OK?

I718H1450126-02

Step Action

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

5) Measure the voltage between “9” (R/B) and “25” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“9” – “25”)

Battery voltage (12.0 V and more)

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(A)

(

ޓ

)

ABS: 4E-46

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty motor power supply or ground wire)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

Is the voltage between “9” and “25” normal?

( ޓ )

I718H1450076-02

4E-47 ABS:

DTC “41” (C1641): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction (F)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

B718H14504009

No

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

I718H1450025-01

Is the clearance OK?

2 1) Inspect the front wheel speed sensor rotor for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Go to Step 3.

Clean or replace the sensor rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Is the sensor rotor OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the front wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

ABS: 4E-48

Yes

Go to DTC “42”

(C1642). (Refer to “DTC

“42” (C1642): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit

Open (F) (Page 4E-

49)”.)

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

Is the sensor mounted securely?

I718H1450066-01

4E-49 ABS:

DTC “42” (C1642): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open (F)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250A) Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

4) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

5) Check the ABS control unit coupler and front wheel speed sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

B718H14504010

No

Go to Step 2.

I718H1450077-01

6) Measure the resistance between “12” (B/R) and ground at the ABS control unit coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“12” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

(A)

10

18

2 3

12

4

13

21

16

24

8

25

9

ABS control unit coupler

(Harness end)

(B)

Is the resistance between “12” and ground OK?

I718H1450078-04

Step Action

2 1) Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

2) Measure the resistance between “A” (Black) and ground at the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty B/R wire)

Yes

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“A” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

ABS: 4E-50

No

Faulty front wheel speed sensor

Sensor side

“A”

(A)

I718H1450079-03

Is the resistance between “A” and ground OK?

3 1) Measure the resistance between “3” (W/R) and ground at the ABS control unit coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“3” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

Go to Step 5.

(A)

10

18

2 3

12

4

13

21

16

24

8

25

9

ABS control unit coupler

(Harness end)

(B)

Is the resistance between “3” and ground OK?

I718H1450080-04

Go to Step 4.

4E-51 ABS:

Step Action

4 1) Measure the resistance between “B” (White) and ground at the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty W/R wire)

Yes

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“B” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

No

Faulty front wheel speed sensor

Sensor side

“B”

(A)

I718H1450081-03

Is the resistance between “B” and ground OK?

5 1) Check for continuity between “12” (B/R) on the ABS control unit coupler and “C” (B/R) on the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Normal value (“12” – “C”)

Continuity ( )

Go to Step 6.

Harness side

“C”

(A)

(B)

10

18

2 3

12

4

13

21

16

24

8

25

9

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Is there continuity between “12” and “C”?

I718H1450082-04

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty B/R wire)

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty W/R wire)

ABS: 4E-52

Step

6 1) Check for continuity between “3” (W/R) on the ABS control unit coupler and “D” (W/R) on the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Normal value (“3” – “D”)

Continuity ( )

Yes

Go to Step 7.

“D”

Harness side

(A)

(B)

10

18

2 3

12 13

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

I718H1450083-04

7

Is there continuity between “3” and “D”?

1) Connect the front wheel speed sensor coupler.

2) Connect three 1.5 V dry cells “a” in series as shown and make sure that their total voltage is more than 4.5 V.

Measure the current between (+) dry cell terminal and

“12” (B/R) on the ABS control unit coupler.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Current ( , 20 mA)

Normal value

3 – 14 mA

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

10

18

2 3

12

4

13

21

16

24

8

25

9

(B)

(A)

DCmA

“a”

I718H1450084-03

Is the current OK?

Faulty front wheel speed sensor.

4E-53 ABS:

DTC “43” (C1643): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short (F)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the front wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step

1

Action

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

Yes

• Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor wire)

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

5) Check for continuity between “3” (W/R) and “12” (B/R) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(A)

B718H14504011

No

Go to Step 2.

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

Is there continuity between “3” and “12”?

I718H1450085-02

Step Action

2 1) Check for continuity between “2” (B/Y) and “3” (W/R) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Yes

• Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor wire)

• Faulty front wheel speed sensor

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

ABS: 4E-54

No

Go to Step 3.

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

I718H1450086-02

Is there continuity between “2” and “3”?

3 1) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between “3”

(W/R) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“3” – “24”)

0 V

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(

ޓ

)

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450087-02

Is the voltage between “3” and “24” normal value?

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor signal or power supply wire)

4E-55 ABS:

DTC “44” (C1644): Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Malfunction (R)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Yes

Go to Step 2.

B718H14504012

No

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

I718H1450026-01

Is the clearance OK?

2 1) Inspect the rear wheel speed sensor rotor for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Go to Step 3.

Clean or replace the sensor rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Is the sensor rotor OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the rear wheel speed sensor is mounted securely.

ABS: 4E-56

Yes

Go to DTC “45”

(C1645). (Refer to “DTC

“45” (C1645): Wheel

Speed Sensor Circuit

Open (R) (Page 4E-

57)”.)

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

Is the sensor mounted securely?

I718H1450068-01

4E-57 ABS:

DTC “45” (C1645): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Open (R)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the frame covers, left and right. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler and rear wheel speed sensor coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

Yes

Go to Step 3.

B718H14504013

No

Go to Step 2.

I718H1450116-01

5) Measure the resistance between “2” (B/Y) and ground at the ABS control unit coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“2” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

(A)

10

18

2 3

12

4

13

21

16

24

8

25

9

(B)

ABS control unit coupler

(Harness end)

Is the resistance between (2) and ground OK?

I718H1450088-03

Step Action

2 1) Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

2) Measure the resistance between “A” (Black) and ground at the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty B/Y wire)

Yes

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“A” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

ABS: 4E-58

No

Replace the rear wheel speed sensor.

Sensor side

“A”

(A)

I718H1450079-03

Is the resistance between “A” and ground OK?

3 1) Measure the resistance between “18” (W/Y) and ground at the ABS control unit coupler.

Go to Step 5.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“18” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

(A)

10

18

2 3

12 13

4

21

16

24

8

25

9

(B)

ABS control unit coupler

(Harness end)

Is the resistance between “18” and ground OK?

I718H1450089-03

Go to Step 4.

4E-59 ABS:

Step Action

4 1) Measure the resistance between “B” (White) and ground at the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty W/Y wire)

Yes

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Normal value (“B” – Ground)

∞ Ω

(Infinity)

No

Replace the rear wheel speed sensor.

Sensor side

“B”

(A)

I718H1450081-03

Is the resistance between “B” and ground OK?

5 1) Check for continuity between “2” (B/Y) on the ABS control unit coupler and “C” (B/Y) on the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Normal value (“2” – “C”)

Continuity ( )

Go to Step 6.

Harness side

“C”

?

(A)

(B)

10

18

2 3

12 13

4

21

16

24

8

25

9

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Is there continuity between “2” and “C”?

I718H1450090-03

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty B/Y wire)

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty W/Y wire)

ABS: 4E-60

Step

6 1) Check the continuity between “18” (W/Y) on the ABS control unit coupler and “D” (W/Y) on the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

Action

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity test ( )

Normal value (“18” – “D”)

Continuity ( )

Yes

Go to Step 7.

Harness side

“D”

?

(A)

(B)

10

18

2 3

12 13

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

I718H1450092-03

7

Is the resistance between “18” and “D”?

1) Connect the rear wheel speed sensor coupler.

2) Connect three 1.5 V dry cells “a” in series as shown and make sure that their total voltage is more than 4.5 V.

Measure the current between (+) dry cell terminal and

“2” (B/Y) on the ABS control unit coupler.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(B): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

Tester knob indication

Current ( , 20 mA)

Normal value

3 – 14 mA

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

10

18

2 3

12 13

4

21

(B)

(A)

DCmA

16

24

8

25

9

“a”

I718H1450091-04

Is the current OK?

Replace the rear wheel speed sensor.

4E-61 ABS:

DTC “46” (C1646): Wheel Speed Sensor Circuit Short (R)

Possible Cause

• Poor contact in the rear wheel speed sensor coupler

• Faulty rear wheel speed sensor, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step

1

Action

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

Yes

• Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor wire)

• Faulty rear wheel speed sensor

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

5) Check for continuity between “2” (B/Y) and “18” (W/Y) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(A)

B718H14504014

No

Go to Step 2.

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

Is there continuity between “2” and “18”?

I718H1450093-02

ABS: 4E-62

Step Action

2 1) Check for continuity between “12” (B/R) and “18” (W/Y) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Yes

• Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor wire)

• Faulty wheel speed sensor

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

No

Go to Step 3.

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

I718H1450094-03

Is there continuity between “12” and “18”?

3 1) Turn the ignition switch ON with the ABS control unit coupler disconnected, measure the voltage between “2”

(B/Y) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“2” – “24”)

0 V

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(

ޓ

)

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

(

ޓ

)

Is the voltage between “2” and “24” 0 V?

I718H1450095-02

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty sensor signal or power supply wire)

4E-63 ABS:

DTC “47” (C1647): Supply Voltage (Increased)

Possible Cause

• Faulty regulator/rectifier

• Faulty ABS control unit

• Faulty wire harness, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Measure the voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals using the multi-circuit tester.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Battery voltage

12.0 V and more

( ޓ )

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450123-01

Is the voltage over 12 V?

2 1) Start the engine at 5 000 r/min with the dimmer switch set to HI.

2) Measure the voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Regulated voltage

14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min

Is the voltage 14.0 – 15.5 V?

Go to Step 3.

B718H14504015

No

Charge or replace the battery.

Inspect the regulator/ rectifier. Refer to

“Regulator / Rectifier

Inspection in Section 1J

(Page 1J-8)”.

Step Action

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

5) Start the engine at 5 000 r/min with the dimmer switch set to HI.

6) Measure the voltage between “16” (O/Y) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

(

ޓ

)

(A)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

(

ޓ

)

Is the voltage same as Step 2?

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

I718H1450036-04

ABS: 4E-64

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition or ground wire)

4E-65 ABS:

DTC “48” (C1648): Supply Voltage (Decreased)

• Faulty generator or regulator/rectifier

Possible Cause

• Faulty ABS control unit

• Faulty wire harness, etc.

Wiring Diagram

Refer to “ABS Unit Diagram (Page 4E-8)”.

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Measure the voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals using the multi-circuit tester.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Battery voltage

12.0 V and more

( ޓ )

(A)

( ޓ )

I718H1450123-01

Is the voltage over 12 V?

2 1) Start the engine at 5 000 r/min with the dimmer switch set to HI.

2) Measure the voltage between the (+) and (–) battery terminals.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Regulated voltage

14.0 – 15.5 V at 5 000 r/min

Is the voltage 14.0 – 15.5 V?

Go to Step 3.

B718H14504016

No

Charge or replace the battery.

Inspect the generator and regulator/rectifier.

Refer to “Generator

Inspection in Section 1J

(Page 1J-3)” and

“Regulator / Rectifier

Inspection in Section 1J

(Page 1J-8)”.

Step Action

3 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt. Refer to “ABS

Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and Connect (Page 4E-

70)”.

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

4) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts. If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

5) Start the engine at 5 000 r/min with the dimmer switch set to HI.

6) Measure the voltage between “16” (O/Y) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

(

ޓ

)

(A)

18

10 12 13

2

3

4

21

(

ޓ

)

Is the voltage same as Step 2?

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

I718H1450036-04

ABS: 4E-66

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty ignition or ground wire)

4E-67 ABS:

DTC “55” (C1655): ABS Control Unit Malfunction

Possible Cause

Faulty ABS control unit

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Inspect the clearances of the front and rear wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Front

B718H14504017

No

Adjust the clearance.

(A), (B)

(A), (B)

Rear

I718H1450025-01

I718H1450026-01

Are the clearances OK?

2 1) Inspect both of the wheel speed sensor rotors for damage and check that no foreign objects are caught in the rotor openings.

Go to Step 3.

Clean or replace the rotor.

I718H1450064-01

Are the rotors OK?

Step Action

3 1) Check that the front and rear wheel speed sensors are mounted securely.

Yes

Go to Step 4.

ABS: 4E-68

No

Tighten the mounting bolts or replace the bracket if necessary.

I718H1450097-01

Are the sensors mounted securely?

4 1) Delete DTCs and repeat the code output procedure.

Refer to “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) Deleting

(Page 4E-25)” and “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)

Output (Page 4E-23)”.

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

Intermittent trouble.

FI

Is the DTC “55” (C1655) output again?

I718H1450122-04

4E-69 ABS:

DTC “61” (C1661): ABS Solenoid Malfunction

Possible Cause

Faulty solenoid valve or relay

Troubleshooting

Step Action

1 1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Inspect the ABS solenoid valve fuse.

Yes

Go to Step 2.

!

CAUTION

If a fuse is blown, find the cause of the problem and correct it before replacing the fuse.

ABS solenoid valve fuse

15 A

B718H14504018

No

Replace the ABS solenoid valve fuse.

Is the ABS solenoid valve fuse OK?

I718H1450127-01

Step Action

2 1) Check the ABS control unit coupler for loose or poor contacts.

If OK, then disconnect the ABS control unit coupler.

2) Measure the voltage between “8” (R/Bl) and “24” (B/W) at the coupler.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

Normal value (“8” – “24”)

Battery voltage (12.0 V and more)

ABS control unit coupler (Harness end)

Yes

Replace the ABS control unit/HU.

( ޓ )

(A)

10

18

2

12 13

3

4

21

16

24 25

8 9

(A)

(

ޓ

)

I718H1450096-02

Is the voltage between “8” and “24” normal?

ABS: 4E-70

No

Inspect the wire harness. (Faulty solenoid or ground wire)

Repair Instructions

ABS Control Unit Coupler Disconnect and

Connect

B718H14506003

Disconnect

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Remove the fuse box mounting bolt (1).

4) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler (2).

2

I718H1450029-01

Connect

Connect the ABS control unit coupler in the reverse order of disconnect.

1

I718H1450028-01

4E-71 ABS:

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and

Installation

B718H14506004

!

CAUTION

• The ABS is made up of many precision parts; never subject it to strong impacts or allow it to become dirty or dusty.

• The wheel speed sensor cannot be disassembled.

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor coupler (1).

Installation

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection (Page 4E-74)”.

Install the front wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the front wheel speed sensor as shown in the front wheel speed sensor routing diagram. Refer to

“Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

(Page 4E-9)”.

• Check the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

1

I718H1450100-01

4) Remove the front wheel speed sensor mounting bolts.

I718H1450103-02

5) Remove the front wheel speed sensor as shown in the front wheel speed sensor routing diagram. Refer to “Front Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

(Page 4E-9)”.

(A), (B)

I718H1450025-01

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and

Installation

B718H14506005

!

CAUTION

• The ABS is made up of many precision parts; never subject it to strong impacts or allow it to become dirty or dusty.

• The wheel speed sensor cannot be disassembled.

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the right frame cover. Refer to “Exterior

Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D

(Page 9D-6)”.

3) Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor coupler (1).

ABS: 4E-72

• Check the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

1

(A), (B)

I718H1450102-01

4) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor mounting bolts.

I718H1450101-02

5) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor as shown in the rear wheel speed sensor routing diagram. Refer to “Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

(Page 4E-11)”.

Installation

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection (Page 4E-74)”.

Install the rear wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the rear wheel speed sensor as shown in the rear wheel speed sensor routing diagram. Refer to

“Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Routing Diagram

(Page 4E-11)”.

I718H1450026-01

Front Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and

Installation

B718H14506006

!

CAUTION

• The ABS is made up of many precision parts; never subject it to strong impacts or allow it to become dirty or dusty.

• Do not hit the front wheel speed sensor rotor when dismounting the front wheel.

Removal

1) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

2) Remove the front wheel speed sensor rotor (1).

!

CAUTION

When replacing the tire, make sure not to damage the sensor rotor.

1

I718H1450104-01

4E-73 ABS:

Installation

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection (Page 4E-74)”.

Install the front wheel speed sensor rotor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the wheel speed sensor rotor as the letters

“50T” face outside.

50T

I718H1450105-02

• Install the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D

(Page 2D-6)”.

• Check the clearance between the front wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor Removal and

Installation

B718H14506007

!

CAUTION

• The ABS is made up of many precision parts; never subject it to strong impacts or allow it to become dirty or dusty.

• Do not hit the rear wheel speed sensor rotor when dismounting the rear wheel.

Removal

1) Remove the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-16)”.

2) Remove the rear wheel speed sensor rotor (1).

!

CAUTION

When replacing the tire, make sure not to damage the sensor rotor.

1

(A), (B)

I718H1450106-02

Installation

Refer to “Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection (Page 4E-74)”.

Install the rear wheel speed sensor rotor in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Install the wheel speed sensor rotor as the letters

“50T” face outside.

I718H1450025-01

50T

I718H1450107-02

• Install the rear wheel assembly. Refer to “Rear Wheel

Assembly Removal and Installation in Section 2D

(Page 2D-16)”.

• Check the clearance between the rear wheel speed sensor and sensor rotor using the thickness gauge.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

(B): 09900–20806 (Thickness gauge)

Wheel speed sensor – sensor rotor clearance

0.3 – 1.5 mm (0.012 – 0.059 in)

ABS: 4E-74

Wheel Speed Sensor Rotor

1) Raise the wheel off the ground and support the motorcycle with a jack or wooden block.

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.

2) Check that no wheel speed sensor rotor teeth are broken and that no foreign objects are caught in the wheel speed sensor.

(A), (B)

I718H1450026-01

Wheel Speed Sensor and Sensor Rotor

Inspection

B718H14506008

Wheel Speed Sensor

1) Remove the wheel speed sensor. Refer to “Front

Wheel Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

(Page 4E-71)” and “Rear Wheel Speed Sensor

Removal and Installation (Page 4E-71)”.

2) Inspect the wheel speed sensor for damage.

Clean the sensor if any metal particle or foreign material stuck on it.

I718H1450108-01

3) After finishing the speed sensor inspection, install the wheel speed sensor.

I718H1450064-01

ABS Control Unit/HU Removal and Installation

B718H14506009

Removal

!

WARNING

When storing the brake fluid, seal the container completely and keep away from children.

!

CAUTION

• This brake system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not mix different types of fluid such as siliconebased or petroleum-based.

• Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid left over from the last servicing or stored for long periods.

• Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastics, rubber materials etc. and will damage then severely.

• The ABS is made up of many precision parts; never subject it to strong impacts or allow it to become dirty or dusty.

• The ABS control unit/HU cannot be disassembled.

4E-75 ABS:

1) Remove the seat and frame covers. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the battery (1). Refer to “Battery Removal and Installation in Section 1J (Page 1J-12)”.

3) Remove the starter relay (2) from the battery case.

4) Remove the cooling fan relay (3) and fuel pump relay (4) from the battery case.

5) Remove the battery case.

2

3

1

4

I718H1450128-01

6) Drain the brake fluid. Refer to “Brake Fluid

Replacement in Section 4A (Page 4A-10)”.

7) Loosen the flare nuts (5) and disconnect the brake pipes.

8) Disconnect the ABS control unit coupler (6).

5

I718H1450112-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

• Route the brake hoses and pipes correctly.

Refer to “Front Brake Hose Routing

Diagram in Section 4A (Page 4A-1)” or

“Rear Brake Hose Routing Diagram in

Section 4A (Page 4A-5)”.

• Make sure to hold the brake pipe when tightening the flare nut, or it may be misaligned.

• Tighten the brake pipe flare nuts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Brake pipe flare nut (a): 16 N·m (1.6 kgf-m, 11.5 lb-ft)

6

5

I718H1450110-02

9) Remove the reservoir mounting bolt. Refer to “Rear

Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and

Installation in Section 4A (Page 4A-18)”.

10) Remove the ABS control unit/HU by removing the mounting bolts.

(a)

(a)

I718H1450113-03

• Bleed air from the brake fluid circuit. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Brake Fluid Circuit in Section 4A

(Page 4A-8)”.

I718H1450111-01

ABS: 4E-76

Specifications

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Brake pipe flare nut

N

m

16

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.6

lb-ft

11.5

B718H14507001

Note

)

(Page 4E-75)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

) (Page 4E-16) /

) (Page 4E-35) /

) (Page 4E-37) /

) (Page 4E-39) /

) (Page 4E-41) /

) (Page 4E-44) /

) (Page 4E-47) /

) (Page 4E-55) /

) (Page 4E-67) /

) (Page 4E-71) /

) (Page 4E-72) /

) (Page 4E-73) /

) (Page 4E-74)

09900–20806

Thickness gauge

) (Page 4E-16) /

) (Page 4E-35) /

) (Page 4E-37) /

) (Page 4E-39) /

) (Page 4E-41) /

) (Page 4E-44) /

) (Page 4E-47) /

) (Page 4E-55) /

) (Page 4E-67) /

) (Page 4E-71) /

) (Page 4E-72) /

) (Page 4E-73) /

) (Page 4E-74)

B718H14508001

4E-77 ABS:

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

)

(Page 4E-15) /

)

(Page 4E-17) /

)

(Page 4E-19) /

)

(Page 4E-19) /

)

(Page 4E-20) /

)

(Page 4E-21) /

)

(Page 4E-21) /

)

(Page 4E-22) /

)

(Page 4E-46) /

)

(Page 4E-49) /

)

(Page 4E-50) /

)

(Page 4E-50) /

)

(Page 4E-51) /

)

(Page 4E-51) /

)

(Page 4E-52) /

)

(Page 4E-52) /

)

(Page 4E-53) /

)

(Page 4E-54) /

)

(Page 4E-54) /

)

(Page 4E-57) /

)

(Page 4E-58) /

)

(Page 4E-58) /

)

(Page 4E-59) /

)

(Page 4E-59) /

)

(Page 4E-60) /

)

(Page 4E-60) /

)

(Page 4E-61) /

)

(Page 4E-62) /

)

(Page 4E-62) /

)

(Page 4E-63) /

)

(Page 4E-63) /

)

(Page 4E-64) /

)

(Page 4E-65) /

)

(Page 4E-65) /

)

(Page 4E-66) /

)

(Page 4E-70)

09904–41010

SDS set

) (Page 4E-25) /

) (Page 4E-27) /

) (Page 4E-29)

99565–01010–010

CD-ROM Ver.10

) (Page 4E-25) /

) (Page 4E-27) /

) (Page 4E-29)

09900–25009

Needle pointed probe set

)

(Page 4E-49) /

)

(Page 4E-50) /

)

(Page 4E-51) /

)

(Page 4E-52) /

)

(Page 4E-52) /

)

(Page 4E-57) /

)

(Page 4E-58) /

)

(Page 4E-59) /

)

(Page 4E-60) /

)

(Page 4E-60)

09930–82710

Mode select switch

) (Page 4E-5) / ) (Page 4E-

22) / ) (Page 4E-23) /

) (Page 4E-25)

Section 5

Transmission / Transaxle

Table of Contents 5- i

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….5-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 5-1

Precautions for Transmission / Transaxle…………. 5-1

Manual Transmission………………………… 5B-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………5B-1

Manual Transmission Symptom Diagnosis ……… 5B-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….5B-2

Transmission Components …………………………… 5B-2

Transmission Removal…………………………………. 5B-3

Transmission Installation ……………………………… 5B-5

Transmission Construction……………………………. 5B-8

Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear

Disassembly and Assembly ………………………… 5B-9

Transmission Related Parts Inspection………….5B-12

Gear Position (GP) Switch Inspection……………5B-12

Gear Position (GP) Switch Removal and

Installation……………………………………………….5B-12

Gearshift Lever Construction ……………………….5B-13

Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation ………5B-14

Gearshift Lever Height Inspection and

Adjustment ………………………………………………5B-14

Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate

Components……………………………………………. 5B-14

Gearshift Construction ………………………………..5B-15

Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate

Removal and Installation…………………………… 5B-15

Gearshift Linkage Inspection ……………………….5B-18

Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal and Installation…………………………………………5B-19

Specifications……………………………………………..5B-20

Service Data …………………………………………….. 5B-20

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….5B-20

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………5B-21

Recommended Service Material………………….. 5B-21

Special Tool ………………………………………………5B-21

Clutch ………………………………………………. 5C-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..5C-1

Precautions for Clutch System……………………….5C-1

Clutch Fluid (Brake Fluid) Information……………..5C-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………5C-2

Clutch Hose Routing Diagram………………………..5C-2

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………5C-3

Clutch System Symptom Diagnosis ………………..5C-3

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….5C-3

Clutch Lever Position Switch Inspection ………….5C-3

Clutch Fluid Level Check ………………………………5C-3

Clutch Hose Inspection …………………………………5C-3

Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit ……………..5C-4

Clutch Fluid Replacement ……………………………..5C-4

Clutch Hose Removal and Installation …………….5C-5

Clutch Control System Components ……………….5C-6

Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation …………………………………………..5C-7

Clutch Master Cylinder / Clutch Lever

Disassembly and Assembly …………………………5C-8

Clutch Master Cylinder Parts Inspection ………..5C-10

Clutch Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and Installation …………………………………………5C-10

Clutch Push Rod (Left) Inspection ………………..5C-11

Clutch Release Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly…………………………………………………5C-11

Clutch Release Cylinder Inspection ………………5C-11

Clutch Components…………………………………….5C-12

Clutch Removal………………………………………….5C-13

Clutch Installation……………………………………….5C-14

Clutch Parts Inspection ……………………………….5C-18

Specifications……………………………………………..5C-19

Service Data………………………………………………5C-19

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….5C-19

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………5C-20

Recommended Service Material …………………..5C-20

Special Tool ………………………………………………5C-20

5

5-1 Precautions:

Transmission / Transaxle

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Transmission / Transaxle

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H15000001

Manual Transmission: 5B-1

Transmission / Transaxle

Manual Transmission

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Manual Transmission Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Engine is noisy (Noise seems to come from the transmission).

Transmission will not shift.

Transmission will not shift back.

Transmission jumps out of gear.

Possible cause

Worn or rubbing gear.

Worn countershaft spline.

Worn driveshaft spline.

Worn or rubbing primary gear.

Worn bearing.

Broken gearshift cam.

Distorted gearshift fork.

Worn gearshift pawl.

Broken gearshift shaft return spring.

Rubbing or stuck gearshift shaft.

Worn or distorted gearshift fork.

Worn shifting gears on driveshaft or countershaft.

Worn or distorted gearshift fork.

Weakened gearshift stopper spring.

Worn gearshift cam plate.

B718H15204001

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Replace countershaft.

Replace driveshaft.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace.

5B-2 Manual Transmission:

Transmission Components

1

2

3

Repair Instructions

4

5

6

7

14

13

15

B718H15206001

16

8

17

18

9

10

19

11

12

1. 1st driven gear

2. 5th driven gear

3. 4th driven gear

4. 3rd driven gear

5. 6th driven gear

6. 2nd driven gear

7. Driveshaft

8. Countershaft/1st drive gear

9. 5th drive gear

10. 3rd/4th drive gear

11. 6th drive gear

12. 2nd drive gear

13. Gearshift fork No.1

14. Gearshift fork No.3

15. Gearshift fork shaft

16. Gearshift cam

17. Gearshift cam plate

18. Gear position switch

19. Gearshift cam stopper plate

: Apply oil.

: Apply molybdenum oil solution.

: Apply grease to oil seal lip.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1520076-02

Transmission Removal

B718H15206002

1) Remove the engine assembly from the frame. Refer to “Engine Assembly Removal in Section 1D

(Page 1D-17)”.

2) Disassemble the engine top side (1). Refer to

“Engine Top Side Disassembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-24)”.

Manual Transmission: 5B-3

2) Remove the bearing pin (2).

NOTE

Do not lose the bearing pin (2).

2

1

I718H1140158-01

3) Separate the upper and lower crankcases. Refer to

“Engine Bottom Side Disassembly in Section 1D

(Page 1D-53)”.

Gearshift Cam / Gearshift Fork

1) Remove the retainer screws (1).

1

I718H1520006-01

Driveshaft Assembly

1) Remove the driveshaft assembly (1).

I718H1520004-01

1

I718H1520007-01

2) Remove the gearshift fork shafts (2) and No.1 gearshift forks (3).

3

2

1

I718H1520005-01

I718H1520008-01

3) Remove the gearshift cam bearing and gearshift cam (4).

5B-4 Manual Transmission:

4) Remove the No.3 gearshift fork (5).

5

4

2) Remove the countershaft bearing (3) with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

3

I718H1520009-01

Countershaft Assembly

1) Remove the bearing retainer (1).

(A)

3) Remove the snap ring (4).

Special tool

: 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers)

I718H1520013-01

4

1

I718H1520010-01

2) By using suitable size bolts (2), pull out the countershaft assembly (3).

3

2

I718H1520014-01

4) Remove the gearshift cam bearing (5) with the special tools.

Special tool

(B): 09923–74511 (Bearing puller)

(C): 09930–30104 (Rotor remover slide shaft)

2

I718H1520011-01

Bearing / Oil Seal

1) Remove the oil seal retainer (1) and oil seal (2).

1

2

5

(B)

(C)

I718H1520015-01

I718H1520012-01

Transmission Installation

B718H15206003

Install the transmission in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

Bearing / Oil Seal

!

CAUTION

Replace the removed oil seal, bearings and snap ring with new ones.

• Install the bearings (1), (2) with the special tool.

NOTE

• The stamped mark side of gearshift cam bearing (1) faces inside.

• The sealed side of countershaft bearing (2) faces outside.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

(A)

Manual Transmission: 5B-5

• Install the oil seal with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

• Apply grease to the oil seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

(A)

I718H1520018-02

• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the oil seal bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Push rod oil seal bolt (a): 12 N·m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)

1

I718H1520016-02

(A)

(a)

2

I718H1520019-03

I718H1520017-02

5B-6 Manual Transmission:

Countershaft Assembly

• Apply grease to the O-rings.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings (1) with new ones.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Gearshift Cam and Gearshift Fork

• Install the No.3 gearshift fork (1) as shown.

1

1

I718H1520022-03

• Install the gearshift cam (2) with the bearing fitted.

• With engaging the fork end to the cam groove, insert the fork shaft (3).

I718H1520085-01

• Align the punch marks “A” on the countershaft bearing housing and bearing retainer.

• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the bearing retainer screw and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Countershaft bearing retainer screw (a): 12 N·m (

1.2 kgf-m, 8.5 lb-ft)

3

2

I718H1520023-01

• With engaging each fork end to the cam groove, insert the fork shaft (4).

“A”

(a)

4

(a)

I718H1520024-01

I718H1520021-02

• Apply thread lock to the screws and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift fork shaft retainer screw (a): 10 N·m (

1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

Gearshift cam retainer screw (b): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

Manual Transmission: 5B-7

• Install the driveshaft assembly on the upper crankcase.

NOTE

• Align the gearshift forks (2) with their grooves.

• Align the C-ring with the groove of bearing and the bearing pin with the indent on the bearing.

(a)

Driveshaft Assembly

• Install the bearing pin (1).

(b)

2

I718H1520025-02

I718H1520027-02

• Turn the bearing to fit the bearing dowel pin in the position “A”.

1

I718H1520026-01

“A”

I718H1520028-02

• Assemble the engine. Refer to “Engine Bottom Side

Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-61)” and “Engine

Top Side Assembly in Section 1D (Page 1D-28)”.

• Remount the engine assembly. Refer to “Engine

Assembly Installation in Section 1D (Page 1D-21)”.

5B-8 Manual Transmission:

Transmission Construction

“ a ”

3

3

3

B718H15206004

1

2

1. Counter shaft 2. Drive shaft

3

3

3. Snap ring

:Assemble snap ring with sharp edge side out.

3

I718H1520071-04

“a”: 0.2 mm (0.008 in)

Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear

Disassembly and Assembly

B718H15206005

Refer to “Transmission Removal (Page 5B-3)” and

“Transmission Installation (Page 5B-5)”.

Disassembly

!

CAUTION

Identify the position of each removed part.

Organize the parts in their respective groups

(i.e., drive or driven) so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions.

Disassemble the countershaft and driveshaft as shown in the transmission construction. Refer to “Transmission

Construction (Page 5B-8)”.

Pay attention to the following points:

Countershaft

• Remove the O-ring (1) and wave washer (2).

Manual Transmission: 5B-9

• Remove the countershaft bearing (8) along with the housing (9), using the hydraulic press.

8

9

I718H1520031-02

• Remove the countershaft bearing (8) from the housing

(9), using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

(A)

1

2

I718H1520072-01

• Remove the 6th drive gear snap ring (3) from its groove and slide it towards the 3rd/4th drive gears (4).

• Slide the 6th (5) and 2nd (6) drive gears toward the

3rd/4th drive gears (4), then remove the 2nd drive gear circlip (7).

4 5

6

8

9

I718H1520032-02

Driveshaft

• Remove the driveshaft bearing (1) along with the spacer (2), using the hydraulic press.

2

1

7

I718H1520033-01

3

I718H1520030-02

5B-10 Manual Transmission:

Assembly

NOTE

When reassembling the transmission gears, attention must be given to the locations and positions of washers and snap rings. The cross sectional view shows the correct position of the gears, bushings, washers and snap rings. Refer to “Transmission

Construction (Page 5B-8)”.

!

CAUTION

• Never reuse a snap rings. After a snap rings has been removed from a shaft, it should be discarded and a new snap rings must be installed.

• When installing a new snap rings, do not expand the end gap larger than required to slip the snap rings over the shaft.

• After installing snap rings, make sure that they are completely seated in their groove and securely fitted.

NOTE

• Rotate the bearing by hand to inspect if there are any abnormal noises and smooth rotation. Replace the bearing if there is anything unusual.

• Before installing the gears, apply engine oil to the driveshaft and countershaft.

• Before installing the oil seal, apply grease to the oil seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

• When installing a new snap ring (1), pay attention to its direction. Fit it to the side where the thrust is as shown in the illustration.

“A”

Driveshaft

• Install the driveshaft bearing (1), using the hydraulic press and special tool.

!

CAUTION

Never reuse driveshaft bearing (1).

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

1

(A)

I718H1520034-01

• Install the spacer (2), using the hydraulic press and special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

2

(A)

2

1

I718H1520035-01

1

“A”: Thrust

“B”

“B”: Sharp edge

I649G1520049-02

1. Snap ring

• When installing the gear bushing onto the driveshaft, align the shaft oil hole “A” with the bushing oil hole “B”.

Manual Transmission: 5B-11

• Install the countershaft bearing (1) to the countershaft, using the hydraulic press and special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

“B”

“A”

1

1

“B”

“A”

I718H1520036-01

(A)

I718H1520039-01

• When installing the gear bushing onto the countershaft, align the shaft oil hole “A” with the bushing oil hole “B”.

“A”

I718H1520037-01

Countershaft

• Install the countershaft bearing into the housing, using the special tool.

!

CAUTION

Never reuse countershaft bearing.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

“B”

• Apply engine oil to O-rings (4).

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-rings (4) with new ones.

I718H1520040-01

(A)

4

I718H1520038-01

I718H1520073-02

5B-12 Manual Transmission:

Transmission Related Parts Inspection

B718H15206007

Refer to “Transmission Removal (Page 5B-3)”,

“Transmission Installation (Page 5B-5)” and

“Countershaft Gear / Driveshaft Gear Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 5B-9)”.

Gearshift Fork to Groove Clearance

NOTE

The clearance for each gearshift fork plays an important role in the smoothness and positiveness of the shifting action.

Using a thickness gauge, check the gearshift fork clearance in the groove of its gear.

If the clearance checked is noted to exceed the limit specified, replace the fork or its gear, or both.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Gearshift fork to gearshift fork groove clearance

Standard: 0.1 – 0.3 mm (0.004 – 0.012 in)

Service limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 in)

Gearshift Fork Thickness

Measure the gearshift fork thickness using the vernier calipers.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Gearshift fork thickness

Standard: 4.8 – 4.9 mm (0.189 – 0.193 in)

(A)

I649G1520058-03

Gearshift Cam Bearing

Inspect the gearshift cam bearings, left and right for abnormal noise and smooth rotation.

Replace the bearing if there is anything unusual. Refer to “Transmission Removal (Page 5B-3)” and

“Transmission Installation (Page 5B-5)”.

(A)

I649G1520056-03

Gearshift Fork Groove Width

Measure the gearshift fork groove width using the vernier calipers.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Gearshift fork groove width

Standard: 5.0 – 5.1 mm (0.197 – 0.201 in)

(A)

I649G1520057-03

I718H1520041-01

Gear Position (GP) Switch Inspection

B718H15206008

Refer to “Side-stand / Ignition Interlock System Parts

Inspection in Section 1I (Page 1I-8)”.

Gear Position (GP) Switch Removal and

Installation

B718H15206009

Removal

1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.

2) Remove the left flame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

4) Disconnect the gear position switch coupler (1).

1

Manual Transmission: 5B-13

• Apply thread lock to the gear position switch bolts and tighten them to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

GP switch mounting bolt (a): 6.5 N·m (0.65 kgf-m,

4.7 lb-ft)

(a)

5) Remove the gear position switch (2).

I718H1520042-01

2

I718H1520043-01

Installation

Install the gear position switch in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• Apply grease to the O-ring.

!

CAUTION

Replace the O-ring with a new one.

NOTE

Align the gear position switch pin “A” with the gearshift cam hole “B”.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1520045-02

• Route the gear position switch lead wire. Refer to

“Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A

(Page 9A-8)”.

Gearshift Lever Construction

B718H15206016

3

2

1

“ a ”

“A”

(a)

“B”

“A”

(b)

I718H1520044-01

1. Gearshift lever

2. Gearshift link arm

3. Gearshift link rod

“A”: Footrest top surface

I718H1520074-02

“a”: 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in)

: 40 N

⋅ m (4.0 kgf-m, 29.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease.

5B-14 Manual Transmission:

Gearshift Lever Removal and Installation

B718H15206017

Removal

1) Place the motorcycle on the center stand.

2) Remove the gearshift lever as shown in the gearshift lever construction. Refer to “Gearshift Lever

Construction (Page 5B-13)”.

Installation

1) Install the gearshift lever as shown in the gearshift lever construction. Refer to “Gearshift Lever

Construction (Page 5B-13)”.

2) After installing the gearshift lever, check the gearshift lever height. Refer to “Gearshift Lever Height

Inspection and Adjustment (Page 5B-14)”.

Gearshift Lever Height Inspection and

Adjustment

B718H15206014

Inspect and adjust the gearshift lever height in the following procedures:

1) Inspect the gearshift lever height “a” between the pedal top face and footrest.

Adjust the gearshift lever height if necessary.

Gearshift lever height “a”

Standard: 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in.)

2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

3) Loosen the lock-nuts (1).

4) Turn the gearshift link rod (2) until the gearshift lever is 45 – 55 mm (1.8 – 2.2 in.) below the top of the footrest.

5) Tighten the lock-nuts securely.

2

1

1

6) Reinstall the engine sprocket outer cover.

I718H1520069-01

Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate

Components

B718H15206010

(a)

4

(b)

3

(a)

2

(c)

1

“ a ”

I718H1520068-01

1. Gearshift shaft

2. Gearshift cam drive plate

3. Gearshift cam plate

4. Gearshift cam stopper

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

: 13 N

⋅ m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.5 lb-ft)

: 19 N

⋅ m (1.9 kgf-m, 13.5 lb-ft)

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Apply grease to oil seal lip.

: Apply engine oil.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1520075-03

Gearshift Construction

4

5

B718H15206015

Manual Transmission: 5B-15

3) Remove the clutch components. Refer to “Clutch

Removal in Section 5C (Page 5C-13)”.

4) Remove the snap ring (1) from the gearshift shaft.

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

1

6

(a)

2

3

I718H1520002-02

1. Gearshift shaft

2. Washer

3. Snap ring

4. Gearshift shaft return spring

5. Gearshift plate return spring

6. Gearshift shaft end bolt

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

: Apply thread lock to thread part.

: Do not reuse.

Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Removal and Installation

B718H15206011

Removal

1) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

2) Disengage the gearshift link arm by removing the bolt.

NOTE

Mark the gearshift shaft head at which the gearshift link arm slit set for correct reinstallation.

3

1

I718H1520047-01

5) Remove the gearshift shaft assembly (2) and washers (3).

3

2

I718H1520048-02

6) Remove the following parts from the gearshift shaft

(4).

• Snap ring (5)

• Gearshift return spring (6)

• Gearshift cam drive plate (7)

• Plate return spring (8)

• Washer (9)

• End bolt (10)

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

4

I718H1520046-01

8

10

5

6

7

9

I718H1520049-02

5B-16 Manual Transmission:

7) Remove the gearshift cam plate bolt (11) and gearshift cam plate (12).

8) Remove the gearshift cam stopper (13).

11

12

13

• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the gearshift arm stopper and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32030

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1303 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift arm stopper (a): 19 N·m (1.9 kgf-m, 13.5 lb-ft)

9) Remove the gearshift arm stopper (14).

I718H1520050-01

(a)

14

I718H1520051-01

Installation

Install the gearshift shaft and gearshift cam plate in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The removed snap rings must be replaced with new ones.

I718H1520052-01

• Install the gearshift cam stopper (1), bolt (2), washer

(3) and return spring (4).

• Tighten the gearshift cam stopper bolt (2) to the specified torque.

NOTE

Hook the return spring end “A” to the stopper (1).

Tightening torque

Gearshift cam stopper bolt (b): 10 N·m (1.0 kgfm, 7.0 lb-ft)

1

4

2

3

I718H1520003-03

1

“A”

2

(a)

I718H1520082-01

• Check the gearshift cam stopper moves smoothly.

• Locate the gearshift cam in the neutral position.

• Install the gearshift cam stopper plate (5).

NOTE

Align the gearshift cam pin “B” with the gearshift cam stopper plate hole “C”.

Manual Transmission: 5B-17

• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the gearshift shaft end bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift shaft end bolt (d): 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m,

7.0 lb-ft)

“C”

“B”

5

I718H1520054-01

• Apply a small quantity of thread lock to the gearshift cam stopper plate bolt and tighten it to the specified torque.

: Thread lock cement 99000–32110

(THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER 1322 or equivalent)

Tightening torque

Gearshift cam stopper plate bolt (c): 13 N·m (1.3 kgf-m, 9.5 lb-ft)

(d)

I718H1520056-02

NOTE

The concave side of washer faces outside.

I718H1520084-01

• When installing the gearshift shaft return spring, position the stopper “D” of gearshift arm between the shaft return spring ends “E”.

(c)

I718H1520055-02

“E”

“D”

I718H1520057-01

5B-18 Manual Transmission:

• Install the gearshift shaft assembly (6) and washers

(7) as shown.

NOTE

Pinch the gearshift arm stopper (8) with return spring ends “F”.

Gearshift Linkage Inspection

B718H15206012

Refer to “Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Removal and Installation (Page 5B-15)”.

Gearshift Shaft

Check the gearshift shaft for bend or wear.

Check the return spring for damage or fatigue.

If any defects are found, replace the defective part(-s).

6

7

7

“F”

8

“F”

I718H1520058-02

I718H1520061-01

Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal

Inspect the gearshift shaft oil seal lip for damage or wear. If any defect is found, replace the oil seal with a new one.

• Install a new snap ring (10).

Special tool

: 09900–06107 (Snap ring pliers)

I718H1520059-02

10

I718H1520062-01

Gearshift Shaft Bearing

Inspect the gearshift shaft bearing for abnormal noise and smooth rotation. Replace the bearing if there is anything unusual.

I718H1520060-01

• After installing the gearshift lever, check the gearshift lever height. Refer to “Gearshift Lever Height

Inspection and Adjustment (Page 5B-14)”.

I718H1520063-01

Gearshift Shaft Oil Seal / Bearing Removal and

Installation

B718H15206013

Removal

1) Remove the gearshift shaft. Refer to “Gearshift Shaft

/ Gearshift Cam Plate Removal and Installation

(Page 5B-15)”.

2) Remove the gearshift shaft oil seal (1).

Manual Transmission: 5B-19

Installation

Install the oil seal and bearing in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The removed oil seal and bearings must be replaced with new ones.

• Install the bearings with the special tool.

NOTE

The stamped mark side of gearshift shaft bearing faces outside.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

1

I718H1520064-01

3) Remove the bearings (2), (3) with the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09921–20210 (Bearing remover) shaft)

(B): 09930–30104 (Rotor remover slide

(B)

(A)

2

(B)

(A)

3

(A)

(A)

I718H1520066-01

• Install the oil seal with the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09913–70210 (Bearing installer set)

• Apply grease to the oil seal lip.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1520065-01

(A)

I718H1520067-01

5B-20 Manual Transmission:

Specifications

Service Data

Transmission + Drive Chain

Unit: mm (in) Except ratio

Item

Primary reduction ratio

Final reduction ratio

Gear ratios

Low

2nd

3rd

4th

5th

Top

Gearshift-fork to gearshift-fork groove clearance

Gearshift fork groove width

Gearshift fork thickness

Gearshift lever height

Standard

1.537 (83/54)

2.388 (43/18)

3.076 (40/13)

2.058 (35/17)

1.550 (31/20)

1.304 (30/23)

1.160 (29/25)

1.071 (30/28)

0.1 – 0.3 (0.004 – 0.012)

5.0 – 5.1 (0.197 – 0.201)

4.8 – 4.9 (0.189 – 0.193)

45 – 55 (1.8 – 2.2)

B718H15207001

Limit

0.5 (0.020)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Push rod oil seal bolt

Countershaft bearing retainer screw

Gearshift fork shaft retainer screw

Gearshift cam retainer screw

GP switch mounting bolt

Gearshift arm stopper

Gearshift cam stopper bolt

Gearshift cam stopper plate bolt

Gearshift shaft end bolt

N

m

12

12

10

10

6.5

19

10

13

10

Tightening torque kgf-m

1.2

1.2

1.0

1.0

0.65

1.9

1.0

1.3

1.0

lb-ft

8.5

8.5

7.0

7.0

4.7

13.5

7.0

9.5

7.0

B718H15207002

Note

) (Page 5B-5)

) (Page 5B-6)

) (Page 5B-7)

) (Page 5B-7)

) (Page 5B-13)

) (Page 5B-16)

) (Page 5B-16)

) (Page 5B-17)

) (Page 5B-17)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Gearshift Lever Construction (Page 5B-13)”

“Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Components (Page 5B-14)”

“Gearshift Construction (Page 5B-15)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Manual Transmission: 5B-21

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

Thread lock cement

B718H15208001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 5B-5) / ) (Page 5Bequivalent 6) / ) (Page 5B-10) /

) (Page 5B-13) /

) (Page 5B-19)

P/No.: 99000–32030 ) (Page 5B-16) THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1303 or equivalent

THREAD LOCK CEMENT SUPER

1322 or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–32110 ) (Page 5B-5) /

6) / )

) (Page 5B-13) /

) (Page 5B-17) /

) (Page 5B-17)

) (Page 5B-

(Page 5B-7) /

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Transmission Components (Page 5B-2)”

“Gearshift Lever Construction (Page 5B-13)”

“Gearshift Shaft / Gearshift Cam Plate Components (Page 5B-14)”

“Gearshift Construction (Page 5B-15)”

Special Tool

09900–06107

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 5B-15) /

) (Page 5B-15) /

) (Page 5B-18)

09900–06108

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 5B-4)

B718H15208002

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

) (Page 5B-12)

09900–20102

Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm)

) (Page 5B-12) /

) (Page 5B-12)

09913–70210

Bearing installer set

)

(Page 5B-4) /

)

(Page 5B-

5) /

)

(Page 5B-5) /

)

(Page 5B-9) /

)

(Page 5B-

10) /

)

(Page 5B-10) /

)

(Page 5B-11) /

)

(Page 5B-11) /

)

(Page 5B-19) /

)

(Page 5B-19)

09923–74511

Bearing remover

) (Page 5B-4)

09921–20210

Bearing remover

)

(Page 5B-19)

09930–30104

Rotor remover slide shaft

) (Page 5B-4) / ) (Page 5B-

19)

5C-1 Clutch:

Transmission / Transaxle

Clutch

Precautions

Precautions for Clutch System

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H15300001

Clutch Fluid (Brake Fluid) Information

!

WARNING

B718H15300002

• This clutch system is filled with an ethylene glycol-based DOT 4 brake fluid. Do not use or mix different types of fluid such as silicone-based or petroleum-based.

• Do not use any brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid left over from the last servicing or stored for long periods.

• When storing brake fluid, seal the container completely and keep away from children.

• When replenishing brake fluid, take care not to get dust into fluid.

• When washing clutch components, use fresh brake fluid. Never use cleaning solvent.

!

CAUTION

Immediately and completely wipe off any brake fluid contacting any part of the motorcycle. The brake fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastics and rubber materials, etc., and will damage them severely.

Clutch Hose Routing Diagram

Schematic and Routing Diagram

1

3

2

8

(a)

35

21

49

5

6

9

“A”

“B”

7

Clutch: 5C-2

B718H15302001

10

2

1

4

“D”

“C”

1. Wiring harness

2. Clutch hose

3. Guide (GSF1250S/SA only)

4. Frame

5. Clutch hose clamp

: Insert the clutch hose clamp end to the hole of the frame fully.

6. Clutch hose No.2 clamp

: After positioning the clamp with stopper, tighten the bolt.

7. Clutch hose

: Pass through the clutch hose under the frame.

8. Union bolt

: After the clutch hose union has contacted the stopper, tighten the union bolt.

30

8

(a)

I718H1530005-05

9. Clutch hose No.3 clamp

: After positioning the clamp with stopper, tighten the bolt.

10. Grommet

: Install the grommet of the clutch hose to the clutch hose guide properly.

“A”: Pass the wiring harness through upper the clutch hose No.3 clamp.

“B”: Clutch hose

: Pass through the clutch hose between the frame and fuel tank rail.

Be careful not to contact the clutch hose and frame cover bracket.

“C”: pass the clutch hose through outside of the frame.

“D”: Pass the clutch hose through outside of the wiring harness.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

5C-3 Clutch:

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Clutch System Symptom Diagnosis

B718H15304001

Engine is noisy (Noise seems to come from the clutch).

Condition

Clutch slips.

Clutch drags.

Possible cause

Worn countershaft spline.

Worn clutch hub spline.

Worn clutch plate teeth.

Distorted clutch plate.

Worn clutch release bearing.

Weakened clutch damper.

Weakened clutch spring.

Correction / Reference Item

Replace countershaft.

Replace clutch hub.

Replace clutch plate.

Replace.

Replace.

Replace primary driven gear.

Replace.

Worn or distorted clutch pressure plate.

Replace.

Distorted clutch plate.

Replace.

Leakage of clutch fluid.

Worn or damaged clutch cylinder/

Repair or replace.

Replace.

release cylinder.

Some clutch springs are weak, while

Replace.

others are not.

Worn or distorted clutch pressure plate.

Replace.

Distorted clutch plate.

Leakage of clutch fluid.

Leakage of clutch fluid from system.

Excessive clutch lever stroke.

Air in hydraulic system.

Replace.

Repair or replace.

Bleed air.

Repair Instructions

Clutch Lever Position Switch Inspection

B718H15306001

Inspect the clutch lever position switch in the following procedures:

1) Disconnect the clutch lever position switch lead wires.

2) Inspect the switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the switch with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Clutch lever position switch

Position

Color

FREE

Terminal (B/Y) Terminal (B/W)

I718H1530007-01

I649G1530004-03

3) Connect the clutch lever position switch lead wires.

Clutch Fluid Level Check

B718H15306002

Refer to “Clutch System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-14)”.

Clutch Hose Inspection

B718H15306003

Refer to “Clutch System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-14)”.

Air Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit

B718H15306004

!

CAUTION

Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastics, rubber materials, etc.

The clutch fluid circuit may be purged of air in the following manner:

1) Keep the motorcycle upright and place the handlebars straight.

2) Fill up the master cylinder reservoir to the upper end of the inspection window. Replace the reservoir cap to prevent entry of dirt.

3) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

1

I718H1530008-01

4) Attach a pipe to the bleeder valve and insert the free end of the pipe into a receptacle.

Clutch: 5C-4

6) Loosen the bleeder valve by turning it a quarter of a turn so that the fluid runs into the receptacle; this will remove the tension of the clutch lever causing it to touch the handlebar grip.

7) Close the valve, pump and squeeze the lever, and open the valve.

8) Repeat this process until the fluid flowing into the receptacle no longer contains air bubbles.

9) Close the bleeder valve and disconnect the pipe.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Clutch): 6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

10) Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the upper end of the inspection window.

11) Reinstall the removed parts.

Clutch Fluid Replacement

B718H15306005

!

CAUTION

Handle brake fluid with care: the fluid reacts chemically with paint, plastic, rubber materials, etc.

1) Place the motorcycle on a level surface and keep the handlebars straight.

2) Remove the clutch fluid reservoir cap and diaphragm.

3) Suck up the old clutch fluid as much as possible.

I718H1530009-01

5) Squeeze and release the clutch lever several times in rapid succession, and squeeze the lever fully without releasing it.

I718H1530011-01

4) Fill the reservoir with new clutch fluid.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

5) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover (1).

1

I718H1530010-01

I718H1530012-01

5C-5 Clutch:

6) Connect a clear hose to the air bleeder valve and insert the other end of hose into a receptacle.

I718H1530009-01

7) Loosen the air bleeder valve and pump the clutch lever until old clutch fluid flows out of the bleeder system.

Clutch Hose Removal and Installation

B718H15306006

Removal

1) Drain clutch fluid. Refer to “Clutch Fluid

Replacement (Page 5C-4)”.

2) Remove the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

3) Remove the left frame cover and engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and

Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)” and “Engine

Sprocket Removal and Installation in Section 3A

(Page 3A-2)”.

4) Remove the clutch hose as shown in the clutch hose routing diagram. Refer to “Clutch Hose Routing

Diagram (Page 5C-2)”.

Installation

1) Install the clutch hose as shown in the clutch hose routing diagram. Refer to “Clutch Hose Routing

Diagram (Page 5C-2)”.

2) Bleed air from the clutch system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit (Page 5C-4)”.

3) Reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1530010-01

8) Close the air bleeder valve and disconnect a clear hose.

Tightening torque

Air bleeder valve (Clutch) (a): 6 N·m (0.6 kgf-m,

4.5 lb-ft)

(a)

9) Fill the reservoir with new fluid to the upper mark of the reservoir.

10) Reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1530015-01

Clutch Control System Components

Clutch: 5C-6

B718H15306007

4

5

6

2

1

[A]

[B]

7

8

9

(b)

(a)

1. Push rod

2. Piston/Cup set

3. Clutch hose

4. Reservoir cap

5. Plate

6. Diaphragm

7. Push rod

8. Clutch release cylinder set

9. Air bleeder

[A]: For GSF1250/A

[B]: For GSF1250S/SA

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

(a)

3

: 6 N

⋅ m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lb-ft)

: Apply brake fluid.

: Apply grease.

: Apply silicone grease.

: Do not reuse.

I718H1530065-02

5C-7 Clutch:

Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and

Installation

B718H15306008

Removal

1) Drain clutch fluid. Refer to “Clutch Fluid

Replacement (Page 5C-4)”.

2) Disconnect the clutch lever position switch lead wires (1).

Installation

Install the clutch master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

• When installing the master cylinder (1) onto the handlebars (2), align the master cylinder holder’s mating surface “A” with the punch mark “B” on the handlebars (2) and tighten the upper holder bolt first.

Refer to “Handlebar Construction in Section 6B

(Page 6B-2)”.

Tightening torque

Clutch master cylinder holder bolt (a): 10 N·m (

1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

1

I718H1530017-01

3) Place a rag under the clutch hose union bolt (2) on the master cylinder to catch any spilt brake fluid.

4) Remove the clutch hose union bolt (2) and disconnect the clutch hose.

2

I718H1530018-01

5) Remove the left rear view mirror. (GSF1250/A)

6) Remove the master cylinder assembly.

2

(a)

1

“A”

“B”

I718H1530020-01

2

1

(a)

“C”

(a)

“C”: “UP” mark

“ a ”

“B”

“A”

“a”: Clearance

I718H1530073-01

I718H1530019-01

• After setting the clutch hose union to the stopper, tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

Tightening torque

Clutch hose union bolt (b): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m,

16.5 lb-ft)

Clutch: 5C-8

2) Remove the reservoir cap (3), plate (4) and diaphragm (5).

5

4

3

(b)

I649G1530013-02

3) Pull out the push rod (6) and dust boot (7).

4) Remove the snap ring (8).

Special tool

: 09900–06108 (Snap ring pliers)

I718H1530021-01

• Bleed air from the clutch system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit (Page 5C-4)”.

Clutch Master Cylinder / Clutch Lever

Disassembly and Assembly

B718H15306009

Refer to “Clutch Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and

Installation (Page 5C-7)”.

Disassembly

1) Remove the clutch lever (1) and clutch lever position switch (2).

6

7

8

5) Remove the following parts from the master cylinder.

• Washer (9)

• Secondary cup (10)

I649G1530014-02

• Piston (11)

• Primary cup (12)

• Spring (13)

13 11

1

2

I649G1530012-02

12 10 9

I649G1530015-02

5C-9 Clutch:

Assembly

Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

• Wash the master cylinder components with new brake fluid before reassembly.

• Do not wipe the clutch fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified clutch fluid (Brake fluid). Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvents such as gasoline, kerosine, etc.

• Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder bore and to all of the master cylinder components to be inserted into the bore.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

• When installing the clutch lever position switch, align the projection on the switch with the hole in the master cylinder.

I649G1530018-02

• Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE to the clutch lever pivot bolt when installing.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

I649G1530016-02

• Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE to the push rod end.

: Grease 99000–25100 (SUZUKI Silicone

Grease or equivalent)

I718H1530069-01

Tightening torque

Clutch lever pivot bolt: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf-m, 4.5 lbft)

Clutch lever pivot bolt lock-nut: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgfm, 4.5 lb-ft)

I649G1530017-03

Clutch Master Cylinder Parts Inspection

B718H15306010

Refer to “Clutch Master Cylinder / Clutch Lever

Disassembly and Assembly (Page 5C-8)”.

Master Cylinder

Inspect the master cylinder bore for any scratches or other damage.

Clutch: 5C-10

4) Remove the clutch release cylinder (3).

1

2

3

5) Remove the dowel pins and push rod (4).

I718H1530070-01

I649G1530020-02

Piston

Inspect the piston surface for any scratches or other damage.

Rubber Parts

Inspect the primary cup, secondary cup and dust boot for wear or damage.

4

I649G1530021-02

Clutch Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and Installation

B718H15306011

Removal

1) Drain clutch fluid. Refer to “Clutch Fluid

Replacement (Page 5C-4)”.

2) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

3) Disconnect the clutch hose (1) by removing the union bolt (2).

I718H1530023-01

Installation

Install the clutch release cylinder in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The seal washers should be replaced with the new ones to prevent fluid leakage.

• Apply a small quantity of SUZUKI SUPER GREASE

“A” to the push rod.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

I718H1530024-01

• Install the clutch hose as shown in the clutch hose routing diagram. Refer to “Clutch Hose Routing

Diagram (Page 5C-2)”.

• Bleed air from the clutch system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit (Page 5C-4)”.

5C-11 Clutch:

Clutch Push Rod (Left) Inspection

B718H15306019

Inspect the push rod in the following procedures:

1) Remove the clutch push rod. Refer to “Clutch

Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and

Installation (Page 5C-10)”.

2) Inspect the push rod for wear or bend. If any defects are found, replace it with a new one.

Assembly

Assemble the clutch cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay attention to the following points:

• Wash the cylinder bore and piston with specified brake fluid.

BF: Brake fluid (DOT 4)

!

CAUTION

• Wash the cylinder components with fresh brake fluid before reassembly. Never use cleaning solvent or gasoline to wash them.

• Do not wipe the brake fluid off after washing the components.

• When washing the components, use the specified brake fluid. Never use different types of fluid or cleaning solvent such as gasoline, kerosine or the others.

I718H1530025-01

3) Reinstall the removed parts. Refer to “Clutch

Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and

Installation (Page 5C-10)”.

Clutch Release Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly

B718H15306012

Refer to “Clutch Release Cylinder / Push Rod Removal and Installation (Page 5C-10)”.

Disassembly

1) Place a rag over the piston to prevent popping up.

2) Force out the piston by using air gun.

!

CAUTION

Do not use high pressure air to prevent piston damage.

I718H1530066-02

• Bleed air from the clutch system. Refer to “Air

Bleeding from Clutch Fluid Circuit (Page 5C-4)”.

Clutch Release Cylinder Inspection

B718H15306013

Refer to “Clutch Release Cylinder Disassembly and

Assembly (Page 5C-11)”.

Inspect the clutch cylinder bore wall for nicks, scratches or other damage.

Inspect the piston surface for any scratches or other damage.

I718H1530026-01

I718H1530028-03

Clutch Components

(b)

1

2

(a)

6 / 7

4

7

4

7

4

7

4

7

3

4

7

4

7

6 / 7

4

5

Clutch: 5C-12

B718H15306014

1. Clutch pressure plate

2. Clutch push piece

3. No.3 drive plate

4. No.1 drive plate

5. No.2 drive plate

8

9

10

11

6. No.1 driven plate (0 – 2 pcs)

: The No.1 and No.2 driven plates are 8 in total.

7. No.2 driven plate (6 – 8 pcs)

8. Spring washer

9. Spring washer seat

10. Clutch sleeve hub

I718H1530067-03

11. Primary driven gear assembly

: 150 N

⋅ m (15.0 kgf-m, 108.5 lb-ft)

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

: Apply engine oil.

5C-13 Clutch:

Clutch Removal

B718H15306016

1) Drain engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

2) Remove the clutch cover (1).

5) Remove the clutch drive plates (4) and driven plates

(5).

5

1

4

I718H1530033-01

6) Remove the spring washer (6) and its seat (7).

3) Remove the gasket (2) and dowel pins.

I718H1530029-01

6

2

7

I718H1530030-01

4) Remove the clutch spring set bolts, clutch springs and pressure plate (3).

NOTE

Loosen the clutch spring set bolts little by little and diagonally.

I718H1530034-02

7) Remove the thrust washer (8), bearing (9) and clutch push piece (10).

10

9

8

I718H1530035-02

3

I718H1530071-01

12) Remove the conical spring washer (12), washer (13) and clutch sleeve hub (14).

Clutch: 5C-14

8) Remove the clutch push rod (11).

NOTE

If it is difficult to pull out the push rod (11), use a magnetic hand or a wire.

11

9) Unlock the clutch sleeve hub nut.

I718H1530036-01

13

12

14

I718H1530040-01

13) Remove the thrust washer (15), spacer (16) and bearing (17).

14) Remove the primary driven gear assembly (18).

NOTE

If it is difficult to remove the primary driven gear, rotate the crankshaft.

18

15

I718H1530037-01

10) Hold the clutch sleeve hub with the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09920–53740 (Clutch sleeve hub holder)

: 09920–31020 (Extension handle)

11) Remove the clutch sleeve hub nut.

(A)

17 16

I718H1530041-01

Clutch Installation

B718H15306017

1) Install the primary driven gear assembly (1).

NOTE

• If it is difficult to install the primary driven gear, rotate the crankshaft.

• Be sure to engage the oil pump drive sprocket with the primary driven gear.

I718H1530039-01

1

I718H1530043-01

5C-15 Clutch:

2) Install the spacers (2) and bearing (3), and apply engine oil to them.

3 2

5) Hold the clutch sleeve hub with the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09920–53740 (Clutch sleeve hub holder)

: 09920–31020 (Extension handle)

6) Tighten the clutch sleeve hub nut to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Clutch sleeve hub nut (a): 150 N·m (15.0 kgf-m,

108.5 lb-ft)

I718H1530042-01

3) Install the thrust washer (4).

(A)

(a)

4

I718H1530044-01

4) Install the clutch sleeve hub (5), washer (6) and spring washer (7)

NOTE

The conical curve side of spring washer (7) faces outside.

I718H1530047-01

7) Lock the clutch sleeve hub nut with a center punch.

I718H1530048-01

8) Install the clutch push rod (8) into the countershaft.

8

6 7

6

7

5

I718H1530045-01

I718H1530049-01

I718H1530068-02

9) Install the clutch push piece (9), bearing (10) and thrust washer (11) to the countershaft.

NOTE

Thrust washer (11) is located between the pressure plate and bearing (10).

Clutch: 5C-16

11) Insert the clutch drive plates and driven plates one by one into the clutch sleeve hub in the prescribed order.

NOTE

Insert the outermost No.2 drive plate claws

“A” to the other slits “B” of clutch housing as shown.

9

10

11

I718H1530050-01

10) Install the spring washer seat (12) and spring washer

(13) onto the clutch sleeve hub correctly.

12 13

“B”

“A”

14

15

I718H1530052-01

16

“C”

I718H1530051-01

17

I718H1530053-05

14. No.2 drive plate

15. No.1 drive plate

16. No.3 drive plate

17. No.1 driven plate (6 – 8 pcs)

: The No.1 and No.2 driven plates are 8 in total.

18. No.2 driven plate (0 – 2 pcs)

: The No.1 and No.2 driven plates are 8 in total.

“C”: Direction of outside

NOTE

For drive plate

Three kinds of the drive plate (No.1, No.2 and

No.3) are equipped in the clutch system, they can be distinguished by the inside diameter and clutch facing “D”.

“D”

I718H1530055-01

“D”: Clutch facing

: No.1 and No.2 drive plates resemble each other very closely in external appearance. Make sure to check the numbers of clutch facing, before installing them.

5C-17 Clutch:

Drive plate

No.1

No.2

No.3

I.D.

127 mm (5.0 in)

135 mm (5.3 in)

127 mm (5.0 in)

Clutch facing “D”

48 pcs

60 pcs

60 pcs

NOTE

For driven plate

Two kinds of the driven plate (No.1 and No.2) are equipped in the clutch system, they can be distinguished by the thickness. The No.1 and No.2 driven plates are 8 in total. The driven plate No.2 should be used within 2 pcs. The driven plate No.2 should be installed pressure plate side.

Driven plate

No.1

No.2

Thickness

2.0 mm (0.08 in)

2.3 mm (0.09 in)

12) Install the pressure plate and clutch springs.

13) Tighten the clutch spring set bolts to the specified torque.

NOTE

Tighten the clutch spring set bolts diagonally.

Tightening torque

Clutch spring set bolt: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lbft)

15) Install the dowel pins and gasket (19).

!

CAUTION

Use a new gasket to prevent oil leakage.

19

I718H1530059-01

16) Fit new gasket washer to the bolt (20).

!

CAUTION

Use the gasket washers to prevent oil leakage.

17) Install the clutch cover and tighten the clutch cover bolts.

20

I718H1530072-01

14) Apply a light coat of the SUZUKI BOND “1207B” to the clutch cover gasket mating surface as shown.

: Sealant 99000–31140 (SUZUKI Bond

1207B or equivalent)

I718H1530061-01

18) Pour engine oil. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter

Replacement in Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

I718H1530058-03

Clutch Parts Inspection

B718H15306018

Refer to “Clutch Removal (Page 5C-13)” and “Clutch

Installation (Page 5C-14)”.

Clutch Drive and Driven Plate

NOTE

Wipe off the engine oil from the drive and driven plates with a clean rag.

Measure the thickness of drive plates with a vernier calipers. If the drive plate thickness is found to have reached the limit, replace it with a new one.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Clutch drive plate thickness

Service limit (No.1, No.2 and No.3 drive plates): 3.42 mm (0.135 in)

(A)

Clutch: 5C-18

Measure each driven plate for distortion with a thickness gauge and surface plate.

Replace driven plates which exceed the limit.

Special tool

(B): 09900–20803 (Thickness gauge)

Clutch driven plate distortion

Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

(B)

I649G1530058-03

Clutch Spring

Measure the free length of each coil spring with a vernier calipers, and compare the length with the specified limit.

Replace all the springs if any spring is not within the limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Clutch spring free length

Service limit: 61.8 mm (2.43 in)

I649G1530056-03

Measure the claw width of drive plates with a vernier calipers. Replace the drive plates found to have worn down to the limit.

Special tool

(A): 09900–20102 (Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm))

Clutch drive plate claw width

Service limit (No.1, No.2 and No.3 drive plates): 13.1 mm (0.52 in)

(A)

(A)

I718H1530062-01

Clutch Release Bearing

Inspect the clutch release bearing for any abnormality, especially cracks. When removing the bearing from the clutch, decide whether it can be reused or if it should be replaced.

Smooth engagement and disengagement of the clutch depends on the condition of this bearing.

I649G1530057-03

I649G1530059-02

5C-19 Clutch:

Push Rod (Right)

Inspect the push rod for wear and damage.

If any defects are found, replace the push rod with a new one.

Clutch Sleeve Hub and Primary Driven Gear

Assembly

Inspect the slot of the clutch sleeve hub and primary driven gear assembly for damage or wear caused by the clutch plates. If necessary, replace it with a new one.

I718H1530063-01

I718H1530064-01

Specifications

Service Data

Clutch

Unit: mm (in)

Item

Clutch drive plate thickness

Clutch drive plate claw width

Clutch driven plate distortion

Clutch spring free length

Clutch master cylinder bore

Clutch master cylinder piston diam

Clutch release cylinder bore

Clutch release cylinder piston diam

Clutch fluid type

No.1, 2, 3

No.1, 2, 3

Standard

3.72 – 3.88 (0.146 – 0.153)

13.9 – 14.0 (0.547 – 0.551)

65.0 (2.56)

14.000 – 14.043 (0.5511 – 0.5529)

13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)

38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505)

38.08 – 38.13 (1.500 – 1.501)

Brake fluid DOT 4

B718H15307001

Limit

3.42 (0.135)

13.1 (0.52)

0.10 (0.004)

61.8 (2.43)

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Air bleeder valve (Clutch)

Clutch master cylinder holder bolt

Clutch hose union bolt

Clutch lever pivot bolt

Clutch lever pivot bolt lock-nut

Clutch sleeve hub nut

Clutch spring set bolt

N

m

6

10

23

6.0

6.0

150

10

Tightening torque kgf-m

0.6

1.0

2.3

0.6

0.6

15.0

1.0

lb-ft

4.5

7.0

16.5

4.5

4.5

108.5

7.0

B718H15307002

Note

) (Page 5C-4) /

) (Page 5C-5)

) (Page 5C-7)

) (Page 5C-8)

) (Page 5C-9)

) (Page 5C-9)

) (Page 5C-15)

) (Page 5C-17)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Clutch Hose Routing Diagram (Page 5C-2)”

“Clutch Control System Components (Page 5C-6)”

“Clutch Components (Page 5C-12)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Clutch: 5C-20

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Material

Brake fluid

Grease

Sealant

B718H15308001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

DOT 4 —

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or equivalent

Note

) (Page 5C-4) / ) (Page 5C-

9) / ) (Page 5C-11)

P/No.: 99000–25010 ) (Page 5C-10)

SUZUKI Silicone Grease or equivalent

P/No.: 99000–25100 )

9)

(Page 5C-9) /

SUZUKI Bond 1207B or equivalent P/No.: 99000–31140 ) (Page 5C-17)

) (Page 5C-

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Clutch Control System Components (Page 5C-6)”

“Clutch Components (Page 5C-12)”

Special Tool

09900–06108

Snap ring pliers

) (Page 5C-8)

09900–20102

Vernier calipers (1/20 mm,

200 mm)

) (Page 5C-18) /

) (Page 5C-18) /

) (Page 5C-18)

B718H15308002

09900–20803

Thickness gauge

) (Page 5C-18)

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 5C-3)

09920–31020

Extension handle

)

(Page 5C-14) /

)

(Page 5C-15)

09920–53740

Clutch sleeve hub holder

)

(Page 5C-14) /

)

(Page 5C-15)

5C-21 Clutch:

Table of Contents 6- i

Section 6

Steering

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………….6-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 6-1

Precautions for Steering ………………………………… 6-1

Steering General Diagnosis……………….. 6A-1

Diagnostic Information and Procedures…………6A-1

Steering Symptom Diagnosis………………………… 6A-1

Steering / Handlebar………………………….. 6B-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….6B-1

Handlebar Components ……………………………….. 6B-1

Handlebar Construction ……………………………….. 6B-2

Handlebar Removal and Installation ………………. 6B-3

Handlebars Inspection ………………………………….6B-4

Steering Components …………………………………..6B-5

Steering Removal and Installation ………………….6B-6

Steering Related Parts Inspection…………………..6B-9

Steering System Inspection …………………………..6B-9

Steering Stem Bearing Removal and

Installation …………………………………………………6B-9

Steering Tension Adjustment ……………………….6B-10

Specifications……………………………………………..6B-11

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….6B-11

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………6B-12

Recommended Service Material …………………..6B-12

Special Tool ………………………………………………6B-12

6

6-1 Precautions:

Steering

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Steering

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)”.

B718H16000001

Steering General Diagnosis: 6A-1

Steering

Steering General Diagnosis

Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Steering Symptom Diagnosis

Condition

Heavy Steering

Wobbly Handlebars

Possible cause

Over tightened steering stem nut.

Broken bearing in steering stem.

Distorted steering stem.

Not enough pressure in tires.

Loss of balance between right and left front forks.

Distorted front fork.

Distorted front axle or crooked tire.

Loose steering stem nut.

Worn or incorrect tire or wrong tire pressure.

Worn bearing/race in steering stem.

B718H16104001

Adjust.

Replace.

Correction / Reference Item

Replace.

Adjust.

Replace fork or adjust fork oil level or replace spring.

Repair or replace.

Replace.

Adjust.

Adjust or replace.

Replace.

6B-1 Steering / Handlebar:

Steering

Steering / Handlebar

Repair Instructions

Handlebar Components

8

4

B718H16206001

1

7

1

3

(b)

(a)

1. Throttle grip

2. Handlebars

3. Handlebar holder (Upper)

4. Grip rubber

2

(b)

“A”

5. Handle expander

6. Handle balancer expander

7. Right handlebar switch box

8. Left handlebar switch box

4

5

6

“A”: Apply handle grip bond.

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

I718H1620037-01

Handlebar Construction

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-2

B718H16206013

1

(a)

“B”

“A”

“ a ”

(a)

“ a ”

“A”

(a)

“B”

(a)

2

“A”

FWD

1. Clutch master cylinder

2. Front brake master cylinder

3. Handlebar holder

3

(b)

“A”

“A”: Punch mark

“B”: UP mark

“a”: Clearance

“ a ”

: 10 N

⋅ m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1620040-01

6B-3 Steering / Handlebar:

Handlebar Removal and Installation

B718H16206002

Removal

1) Remove the following parts from the left handlebar.

a) Rear view mirror (GSF1250/A) b) Clutch master cylinder/clutch lever (1)

!

CAUTION

Do not turn the clutch master cylinder upside down.

c) Left handlebar switch box (2) d) Handlebar balancer (3) e) Grip rubber (4)

4

1

3) Remove the caps and handlebar holder bolts.

I718H1620041-03

Installation

Install the handlebars in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Set the handlebars so that its punch mark “A” aligns with the mating surface of the left handlebar holder.

Refer to “Handlebar Construction (Page 6B-2)”.

• Set the handlebar holders with their punch marks “B” forward.

3

2

“B”

“A”

I718H1620001-03

2) Remove the following parts from the right handlebar.

a) Rear view mirror (GSF1250/A) b) Front brake master cylinder/Front brake lever (5)

!

CAUTION

Do not turn the front brake master cylinder upside down.

c) Right handlebar switch box (6) d) Handlebar balancer (7) e) Throttle grip (8)

5

8

I718H1620020-01

• Tighten the handlebar holder bolts.

NOTE

First tighten the handlebar holder bolts (1)

(front ones) to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Handlebar holder bolt (a): 23 N·m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

1,

(a)

(a)

“ a ”

6

7

I718H1620002-03

I649G1620006-02

“a”: Clearance

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the end of the throttle cables and cable pulley.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

• Insert the projection “C” of the right handlebar switch box into the hole of the handlebars.

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-4

• Insert the projection “E” of the left handlebar switch box into the hole of the handlebars.

“C”

I718H1620006-02

• Install the front brake master cylinder. Refer to “Front

Brake Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and

Installation in Section 4A (Page 4A-14)”.

• Apply a handle grip bond “D” onto the left handlebar before installing the handlebar grip.

: Handle grip bond (Handle Grip Bond

(commercially available))

“D”

“E”

I718H1620007-04

• Install the clutch master cylinder. Refer to “Clutch

Master Cylinder Assembly Removal and Installation in

Section 5C (Page 5C-7)”.

• After installing the steering, the following adjustments are required before driving.

– Cable routing (Refer to “Throttle Cable Routing

Diagram in Section 1D (Page 1D-2)”.)

– Throttle cable play (Refer to “Throttle Cable Play

Inspection and Adjustment in Section 0B (Page 0B-

12)”.)

Handlebars Inspection

B718H16206003

Refer to “Handlebar Removal and Installation (Page 6B-

3)”.

Inspect the handlebars for distortion and damage.

If any defect is found, replace the handlebars with a new one.

I649G1620008-03

I649G1620010-03

6B-5 Steering / Handlebar:

Steering Components

B718H16206004

[A]

6

5

4

(b)

7

8

9

7

8

(c)

[A]

2

1

(a)

3

16

12

13

11

10

15

14

16

1. Handlebar holder bolt

2. Handlebar holder (Upper)

3. Handlebars

4. Handlebar holder (Lower)

5. Steering stem head nut

6. Steering stem upper bracket

7. Washer

8. Rubber seat

9. Handlebar holder set nut

10. Steering stem nut

11. Dust seal

12. Steering stem upper bearing

13. Steering stem lower bearing

14. Steering stem lower bracket

15. Lower seal

16. Headlight housing bracket

[A]: For GSF1250/A

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

: 65 N

⋅ m (6.5 kgf-m, 47.0 lb-ft)

: 45 N

⋅ m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft)

: Apply grease to bearing.

I718H1620019-04

Steering Removal and Installation

B718H16206005

Removal

GSF1250/A

1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden block.

2) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

3) Remove the front forks. Refer to “Front Fork

Removal and Installation in Section 2B (Page 2B-2)”.

4) Remove the headlight. Refer to “Headlight Removal and Installation in Section 9B (Page 9B-2)”.

5) Remove the headlight housing brackets (1).

6) Remove the combination meter unit (2).

GSF1250

3

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-6

7) Dismount the handlebars and steering upper bracket. Refer to “Ignition Switch Removal and

Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-9)”.

NOTE

If necessary, remove the ignition switch from the upper bracket. Refer to “Ignition Switch

Removal and Installation in Section 1H

(Page 1H-9)”.

8) Remove the steering stem nut (3) using the special tool.

NOTE

When loosening the stem nuts, hold the steering stem lower bracket to prevent it from falling.

Special tool

(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut wrench)

2

2

2

(A)

GSF1250A

3

I718H1620023-08

I718H1620009-05

9) Remove the steering stem lower bracket.

10) Remove the dust seal (4) and steering stem upper bearing (5).

4

5

2

I718H1620022-04

I718H1620010-05

6B-7 Steering / Handlebar:

GSF1250S/SA

1) Support the motorcycle with a jack or a wooden block.

2) Remove the front wheel assembly. Refer to “Front

Wheel Assembly Removal and Installation in Section

2D (Page 2D-6)”.

3) Remove the brake hose clamp bolt (GSF1250S) or brake hose joint bolt (1) (GSF1250SA).

7) Remove the steering stem nut using the special tool.

NOTE

When loosening the stem nuts, hold the steering stem lower bracket to prevent it from falling.

Special tool

(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut wrench)

(A)

1

4) Remove the front forks. Refer to “Front Fork

Removal and Installation in Section 2B (Page 2B-2)”.

5) Remove the cable guides (2).

I718H1620038-01

I718H1620030-02

8) Remove the steering stem lower bracket.

9) Remove the dust seal (3) and steering stem upper bearing (4).

2

3

4

I718H1620027-01

6) Dismount the handlebars and steering upper bracket. Refer to “Ignition Switch Removal and

Installation in Section 1H (Page 1H-9)”.

NOTE

If necessary, remove the ignition switch from the upper bracket. Refer to “Ignition Switch

Removal and Installation in Section 1H

(Page 1H-9)”.

I718H1620031-02

Installation

Install the steering in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

Bearing

• Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE to the bearings, races and dust seals before remounting the steering stem.

: Grease 99000–25010 (SUZUKI SUPER

GREASE A or equivalent)

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-8

• Turn the steering stem lower bracket about five or six times to the left and right so that the angular ball bearings seat properly.

• Loosen the steering stem nut 1/4 – 1/2 turn “a”.

NOTE

This adjustment will vary from motorcycle to motorcycle.

“ a ”

I718H1620032-01

Steering stem nut

• Tighten the steering stem nut to the specified torque using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09940–14911 (Steering stem nut wrench)

Tightening torque

Steering stem nut (a): 45 N

m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lbft) then turn back 1/2 – 1/4

I649G1620026-02

Steering stem upper bracket

Install the front forks and steering stem upper bracket in the following steps:

1) Temporarily install the upper bracket, washer and steering stem head nut (1).

2) Set the headlight housing brackets. (GSF1250/A)

3) Temporarily install the front forks.

4) Tighten the steering stem head nut (1).

Tightening torque

Steering stem head nut (a): 65 N·m (6.5 kgf-m,

47.0 lb-ft)

(a)

(A)

1

(a)

I718H1620033-01

I718H1620034-02

5) Tighten the front fork upper and lower clamp bolts.

Refer to “Front Fork Removal and Installation in

Section 2B (Page 2B-2)”.

6B-9 Steering / Handlebar:

Handlebars

• Tighten the handlebar holder set nuts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Handlebar holder set nut (a): 45 N·m (4.5 kgf-m,

32.5 lb-ft)

If any abnormal points are found, replace defective parts with new ones.

I718H1620026-02

(a)

I718H1620035-04

Inspection after installation

• Check the steering tension. Refer to “Steering Tension

Adjustment (Page 6B-10)”.

Steering Related Parts Inspection

B718H16206011

Refer to “Steering Removal and Installation (Page 6B-

6)”.

Inspect the removed parts for the following abnormalities.

• Distortion of the steering stem

• Bearing wear or damage

• Abnormal bearing noise

• Race wear or damage

• Bearing lower seal damage

• Rubber seat and damper bushing wear or damage

I718H1620042-04

Steering System Inspection

B718H16206012

Refer to “Steering System Inspection in Section 0B

(Page 0B-20)”.

Steering Stem Bearing Removal and Installation

B718H16206008

Removal

1) Remove the steering stem lower bracket. Refer to

“Steering Removal and Installation (Page 6B-6)”.

2) Remove the dust seal (1) and steering stem upper bearing (2).

1

2

I718H1620039-02

3) Remove the steering stem lower bearing and inner race using a chisel.

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-10

Inner race

• Press in the lower inner race and bearing using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09941–74911 (Steering bearing installer)

(A)

I649G1620033-02

4) Remove the steering stem upper and lower bearing races using the special tools.

Special tool

(A): 09941–54911 (Bearing outer race remover)

(B): 09941–74911 (Steering bearing installer)

(B)

(A)

I649G1620034-03

Installation

Install the steering stem bearings in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following points:

!

CAUTION

The removed bearings and races should be replaced with new ones.

Outer race

• Press in the upper and lower outer races using the special tool.

Special tool

(A): 09941–34513 (Steering race installer)

(A)

I649G1620036-03

• Install the steering. Refer to “Steering Removal and

Installation (Page 6B-6)”.

Steering Tension Adjustment

B718H16206009

Check the steering movement in the following procedures:

1) By supporting the motorcycle with a jack, lift the front wheel unit is off the floor 20 – 30 mm (0.8 – 1.2 in).

2) Check to make sure that the cables and wire harnesses are properly routed.

3) With the front wheel in the straight ahead state, hitch the spring scale (special tool) on one handlebar grip end as shown in the figure and read the graduation when the handlebar starts moving.

Initial force

200 – 500 grams

Special tool

(A): 09940–92720 (Spring scale)

(A)

I649G1620040-02

I649G1620035-03

6B-11 Steering / Handlebar:

4) Do the same on the other grip end.

5) If the initial force read on the scale when the handlebar starts turning is either too heavy or too light, adjust it till it satisfies the specification.

a) First, loosen the front fork upper and lower clamp bolts, steering stem head nut and steering stem nut, and then adjust the steering stem nut by loosening or tightening it.

Special tool

(B): 09910–60611 (Universal clamp wrench)

b) Tighten the steering stem nut, stem head nut and front fork upper and lower clamp bolts to the specified torque and recheck the initial force with the spring scale according to the previously described procedure.

c) If the initial force is found within the specified range, adjustment has been completed.

NOTE

Hold the front fork legs, move them back and forth and make sure that the steering is not loose.

(B)

I718H1620043-02

Specifications

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Handlebar holder bolt

Steering stem nut

Steering stem head nut

Handlebar holder set nut

B718H16207001

N

m

Tightening torque kgf-m lb-ft

23 2.3 16.5

45 N

⋅ m (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 lb-ft) then turn back

1/2 – 1/4

65

45

6.5

4.5

47.0

32.5

Note

) (Page 6B-3)

) (Page 6B-8)

) (Page 6B-8)

) (Page 6B-9)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Handlebar Components (Page 6B-1)”

“Handlebar Construction (Page 6B-2)”

“Steering Components (Page 6B-5)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Steering / Handlebar: 6B-12

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

Grease

Material

Handle grip bond

B718H16208001

SUZUKI recommended product or Specification

SUZUKI SUPER GREASE A or P/No.: 99000–25010 )

Note

(Page 6B-4) / ) (Page 6Bequivalent

Handle Grip Bond (commercially available)

8)

) (Page 6B-4)

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Steering Components (Page 6B-5)”

Special Tool

09910–60611

Universal clamp wrench

) (Page 6B-11)

09940–14911

Steering stem nut wrench

) (Page 6B-6) / ) (Page 6B-

7) / ) (Page 6B-8)

B718H16208002

09940–92720

Spring scale

) (Page 6B-10)

09941–34513

Steering race installer

) (Page 6B-10)

09941–54911

Bearing outer race remover

) (Page 6B-10)

09941–74911

Steering bearing installer

) (Page 6B-10) /

) (Page 6B-10)

6B-13 Steering / Handlebar:

Section 9

Body and Accessories

CONTENTS

Table of Contents 9- i

Precautions ………………………………………….9-1

Precautions……………………………………………………. 9-1

Precautions for Electrical System ……………………. 9-1

Component Location ……………………………………… 9-1

Electrical Components Location ……………………… 9-1

Wiring Systems…………………………………. 9A-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………9A-1

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250)…………………………… 9A-1

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250S) ………………………… 9A-3

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250A) ………………………… 9A-5

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250SA)………………………. 9A-6

Wiring Harness Routing Diagram…………………… 9A-8

Specifications……………………………………………..9A-11

Service Data …………………………………………….. 9A-11

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….9A-11

Lighting Systems………………………………. 9B-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….9B-1

Headlight Components ………………………………… 9B-1

Headlight Removal and Installation ……………….. 9B-2

Headlight Bulb Replacement ………………………… 9B-3

Headlight Beam Adjustment …………………………. 9B-5

Rear Combination Light Components…………….. 9B-5

Rear Combination Light Construction …………….. 9B-6

Rear Combination Light Removal and

Installation………………………………………………… 9B-6

Brake Light Bulb / Taillight Bulb Replacement …. 9B-7

License Plate Light Components …………………… 9B-7

License Plate Light Removal and Installation ….. 9B-8

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement …………… 9B-8

Turn Signal Light Components ……………………… 9B-9

Front Turn Signal Light Removal and

Installation………………………………………………… 9B-9

Rear Turn Signal Light Removal and

Installation……………………………………………….9B-10

Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement …………….9B-10

Reflex Refractor Construction……………………… 9B-10

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Inspection …….. 9B-11

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation……………………………………………….9B-11

Hazard Switch Inspection …………………………… 9B-11

Turn Signal Switch Inspection……………………… 9B-11

Passing Light Switch Inspection ………………….. 9B-12

Dimmer Switch Inspection…………………………… 9B-12

Specifications……………………………………………..9B-13

Service Data………………………………………………9B-13

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….9B-13

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………9B-13

Special Tool ………………………………………………9B-13

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn.. 9C-1

General Description ………………………………………9C-1

Combination Meter System Description…………..9C-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….9C-2

Combination Meter Components ……………………9C-2

Combination Meter Removal and Installation …..9C-4

Combination Meter Disassembly and

Assembly…………………………………………………..9C-4

Combination Meter Inspection ……………………….9C-5

Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light

Inspection………………………………………………….9C-5

Engine Coolant Temperature Removal and

Installation …………………………………………………9C-6

Fuel Level Indicator Inspection ………………………9C-6

Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor)

Inspection………………………………………………….9C-7

Fuel Level Gauge Inspection …………………………9C-8

Speedometer Inspection ……………………………….9C-8

Speed Sensor Removal and Installation ………….9C-8

Speed Sensor Inspection ………………………………9C-9

Oil Pressure Indicator Inspection ……………………9C-9

Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation ..9C-10

Ignition Switch Inspection…………………………….9C-10

Ignition Switch Removal and Installation………..9C-10

Horn Inspection ………………………………………….9C-10

Horn Removal and Installation ……………………..9C-11

Specifications……………………………………………..9C-12

Service Data………………………………………………9C-12

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….9C-12

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………9C-12

Special Tool ………………………………………………9C-12

Exterior Parts ……………………………………. 9D-1

Schematic and Routing Diagram……………………9D-1

Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram………………….9D-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….9D-2

Exterior Parts Construction ……………………………9D-2

Front Fender Construction …………………………….9D-4

Frame Cover Cushion Construction………………..9D-4

9

9-ii Table of Contents

Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion

Construction ………………………………………………9D-5

Fastener Removal and Installation………………….9D-5

Exterior Parts Removal and Installation …………..9D-6

Seat Height Adjustment ………………………………..9D-9

Body Structure …………………………………..9E-1

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….9E-1

Body Frame Construction ……………………………..9E-1

Engine Mounting Bracket Bushing

Replacement ……………………………………………..9E-1

Engine Mount Bushing Replacement………………9E-2

Front Footrest Bracket Construction ……………….9E-2

Side-stand Construction………………………………..9E-3

Side-stand Removal and Installation……………….9E-4

Center Stand Construction…………………………….9E-4

Center Stand Removal and Installation……………9E-4

Specifications ……………………………………………….9E-5

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………9E-5

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………..9E-5

Recommended Service Material …………………….9E-5

Precautions: 9-1

Body and Accessories

Precautions

Precautions

Precautions for Electrical System

B718H19000001

Refer to “General Precautions in Section 00 (Page 00-1)” and “Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service in Section 00

(Page 00-2)”.

Component Location

Electrical Components Location

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A (Page 0A-8)”.

B718H19003001

9A-1 Wiring Systems:

Body and Accessories

Wiring Systems

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250)

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

B718H19102001

For E-02, 19

B/W

G

B

B/W

B/R

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/O

G/B

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/Y

B/W

Lg

Y

B

Bl/B

B/W

O/G

P

B/R

B/Lg

R/Bl

R/B

Y/Bl

B/G

G/Y

Br/B

B/G

B/W

G/B

B/O

B/R

P

B/W

B/R

O

G/B

B/O

B/G

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

Y

O/W

B

O/W

B/G

O/W

R

W/G

Y/Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

O/R

G/B

G

B/Lg

Y/W

O/G

B

P

G/B

R/Bl

P/B

B/G

W/Bl

Dg

B

W/Bl

G

Lg

W/Y

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl/W

B/W

Y

B/W

B/W

W/R

B/Y

B/Bl

Bl

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

W/B

B/G

Y/B

Bl/Y

Gr

Y/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

Dbr

Lbl

B/Br

W/B

P/W

R

Bl/Y

O/G

W/R

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl/W

B/Br

B/W

Gr

Wiring Systems: 9A-2

B

B/W

B

B

B

B

B

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

W/B

W/G

B/Br

O/W

Bl

B

B

Gr

W

W

B/Br

B/Bl

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/B

B/R

Y/B

Y/R

R/Bl

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

Br/B

B/Bl

B/Br

R

B/G

B/O

O/R

O/Y

Bl/B

Bl

O/Y

G

W

Y

Dg

Dbr

R

R/Bl

B/R

B/Y

B/W

B/W

B/R

B/R

B/R

B/R

Bl/B

B/Y

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

B

B

B

G

Bl/Y

B/W B/W

B/Y

B/W

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B/W

B/Y

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

Y/W

R

B/Br

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

G/B

Dg

R

P/B

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/Y

Y/R

Gr/R

Lg

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

I718H1910901-10

9A-3 Wiring Systems:

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250S)

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

For E-02, 19

B/W

G

B

B/W

B/R

B/W

Y/R

R/B

B/Lg

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

G/B

B/O

B/W

Y/R

R/B

B/Lg

P

B/R

Y/Bl

B/G

B/W

R/B

B/Lg

O/G

G/Y

B

B/G

B/R

Bl/B

B/Bl

B/Y

B/W

Lg

Y

B

Bl/B

R/Bl

B/G

B/W

B/O

B/R

G/B

Br/B

B/G

O

G/B

B/O

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

P

B/W

B/R

Y

O/W

B

O/W

B/G

O/W

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

W/Bl

Dg

B

W/Bl

G

Lg

W/Y

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl/W

Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

W/R

B/W

Y

B/W

B/W

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

W/B

Dbr

Lbl

Bl/Y

B/W

Gr

Y/R

B/R

Y/B

B/G

B/Br

B/W

R

W/G

Y/Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

G/B

P/B

O/R

B

P

G/B

G

B/Lg

Y/W

O/G

R/Bl

B/G

W/B

P/W

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl/W

B/Br

R

Bl/Y

O/G

B/W

Gr

W/R

B

B/W

B

B

B

B

B

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

W/B

W/G

B/Br

O/W

Bl

B

W

B

Gr

W

B/Br

B/Bl

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/R

Gr/B

B/R

Y/B

Y/R

R/Bl

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/R

Gr/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

G/B

R

Y

Dg

W

R/Bl

R

B/G

B/O

O/Y

O/R

Bl

Bl/B

O/Y

G

Br/B

B/Bl

B/Br

B/R

B/Y

B/W

B/W

B/R

B/R

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

B

B

B

G

Bl/Y

B/W

Bl/B

B/Y

B/R

B/R

B/W

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

G/B

B/W

Dg

B/Y

B/W

Dg

B/Y

Dbr

G/B

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

Y/W

R

B/Br

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

R

P/B

B/Br

G/B

Dg

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/Y

Y/R

Gr/R

W/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

Dbr

Lg

Lbl

W/Y

B718H19102004

I718H1910902-09

For E-03, 24, 28

Y

O/W

B

O/W

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

B/G

O/W

G

B/Lg

B

P

G/B

Y/W

O/W

R/Bl

O/R

B/Y

Y/Bl

W/G

R

B/Bl

G/B

P/B

B/G

W/Bl

Dg

B/W

Y

B/W

B/W

W/R

B/Y

B/Bl

Bl

Bl/W

Bl/B

B

W/Bl

G

Lg

W/Y

Bl/G

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

W/B

B/G

Y/B

Lbl

Bl/Y

Dbr

B/W

Gr

Y/R

B/R

B/W

B/Br

W/B

P/W

B/W

G

B

B/W

B/R

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

B

B/G

B/R

Bl/B

B/Bl

B/O

G/B

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

P

B/R

Y/Bl

B/G

B/W

R/B

B/Lg

G/Y

O/G

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/Y

B/W

Lg

Y

B

Bl/B

R/Bl

B/O

B/R

G/B

B/W

B/G

Br/B

P

B/W

B/R

O

G/B

B/O

B/G

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl/W

B/Br

R

Bl/Y

O/W

B/W

Gr

W/R

Wiring Systems: 9A-4

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

B

B/W

W/B

W/G

B/Br

O/W

Bl

B

B

Gr

W

W

B/Br

B/Bl

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

B/R

Y/B

Y/R

R/Bl

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/B

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

B/Br

Br/B

B/Bl

Bl

Bl/B

R

B/G

B/O

O/R

O/Y

O/Y

G

W

Y

Dg

G/B

R

R/Bl

B/R

B/Y

B/W

B/W

B/R

B/R

Bl/B

B/Y

B/R

B/R

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

B

B

B

G

Bl/Y

B/W B/W

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

G/B

B/W

Dg

B/Y

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B/W

B/Y

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/W

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

R

P/B

B/Br

G/B

Dg

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/Y

Y/R

Gr/R

Lg

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

I718H1910903-12

9A-5 Wiring Systems:

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250A)

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

For E-02, 19

ABS MO

O/Y

O

B/R

Br

Gr

R/B

R/Bl

W/B

W/Y

W/R

B/W

B/Y

B/W

B/W

G

B

B/W

B/R

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

B

B/G

B/R

Bl/B

B/O

G/B

B/Bl

R/B

B/Lg

B/W

Y/R

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/Y

B/W

Bl/B

Br

B

Lg

Y

B/W

O/G

R/B

B/Lg

P

B/R

R/Bl

Y/Bl

B/G

G/Y

B/W

G/B

B/G

B/O

B/R

Br/B

P

B/W

B/R

O

G/B

B/O

B/G

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

R/B

R

B

O/W

Y

O/W

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

B/G

O/W

W/Bl

Dg

Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

W/R

B/W

Y

B/W

B/W

Bl/W

Bl/B

B

W/Bl

G

Lg

W/Y

Bl/G

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

W/B

B/G

Y/B

Bl/Y

Gr

Y/R

B/W

B/R

Dbr

B/W

Lbl

B/Br

G

B/Lg

Y/W

B

P

G/B

O/G

R/Bl

R

W/G

Y/Bl

B/Y

O/R

B/Bl

G/B

P/B

B/G

W/B

P/W

B/W

Gr

W/R

R

Bl/Y

O/G

Bl/W

B/Br

Bl/G

Bl/B

B

B/W

B

B

B

B

B

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

B/Br

O/W

W/B

W/G

Bl

B

B

Gr

W

W

B/Br

B/Bl

R/Bl

R

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

Y/R

Gr/W

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

Gr/R

Gr/B

B/R

Y/B

Y/R

R/Bl

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

Gr/R

Gr/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

W/Y

B/Y

W/R

B/R

O

B/W

W

B

W

B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

Br/B

B/Bl

B/Br

Bl

Bl/B

O/R

R

B/G

B/O

O/Y

O/Y

G

Dbr

R

W

Y

Dg

R/Bl

B/R

B/Y

B/W

B/W

B/R

B/R

R

B/W

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

B

B

G

B

Bl/Y

Bl/B

B/Y

B/R

B/R

R

B/W

R

B/Y

B/W

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

B/Y

B/W

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

Y/W

R

B/Br

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

R

P/B

B/Br

G/B

Dg

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/Y

Y/R

Gr/R

Lg

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

B718H19102005

I718H1910905-12

Wiring Diagram (GSF1250SA)

Refer to “Wire Color Symbols in Section 0A (Page 0A-6)”.

For E-02, 19

ABS MO

B/W

G

O

B/R

O/Y

Br

Gr

R/B

W/Y

B/W

R/Bl

B/W

W/B

W/R

B/Y

B

B/W

B/R

B/W

Y/R

B/Lg

R/B

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/O

G/B

B/W

Y/R

B/Lg

R/B

B

B/G

B/R

Bl/B

B/Y

B/W

B/Bl

Lg

Y

B

R/Bl

Br

Bl/B

P

B/R

Y/Bl

B/G

B/W

R/B

B/Lg

G/Y

O/G

G/B

B/O

B/R

B/G

B/W

Br/B

P

B/W

B/R

B/G

O

G/B

B/O

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

R/B

R

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

Y

O/W

B

O/W

B/G

O/W

W/Bl

Dg

G

Lg

W/Bl

B

W/Y

Gr/W

Bl/G

Bl/B

Gr/B

Bl/W

Gr/Y

B/W

B/W

B/W

Y

Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

W/R

Gr

Y/R

B/W

B/R

Dbr

B/W

Lbl

Bl/Y

Y/B

B/G

W/B

B/Br

Gr/R

B

P

G/B

Y/W

B/Lg

Y/Bl

B/Y

R

W/G

O/R

R/Bl

O/G

G

B/Bl

G/B

P/B

B/G

W/B

P/W

Bl/B

Bl/W

B/Br

Bl/G

R

Bl/Y

O/G

B/W

Gr

W/R

B

B/W

B

B

B

B

B

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

W/B

W/G

B/Br

O/W

Bl

B

W

B

Gr

W

B/Br

B/Bl

R/Bl

R

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

Y/R

Gr/W

Gr/Y

Lbl

Dbr

Lg

Gr/R

W/Y

Gr/B

Y/R

B/R

Y/B

R/Bl

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Gr/Y

Lbl

Dbr

Lg

Gr/R

W/Y

Gr/B

G

P/W

W/B

B/Lg

W/R

B/R

W/Y

B/Y

O

B/W

W

B

W

B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

B/Br

Br/B

B/Bl

Bl

Bl/B

O/R

R

B/G

B/O

O/Y

O/Y

G

G/B

R

Y

Dg

W

R/Bl

B/W

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/R

B/Y

B/R

B/R

Bl/B

B/Y

R

R

B/W

B/W

B/W

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B

B

B

G

Bl/Y

B/W

R

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

G/B

B/W

Dg

B/Y

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B/Y

B/W

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

Y/W

R

B/Br

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

R

P/B

B/Br

G/B

Dg

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/R

Y/R

Gr/Y

G

P/W

W/B

B/Lg

Lbl

W/Y

Dbr

Lg

Wiring Systems: 9A-6

B718H19102006

I718H1910906-10

9A-7 Wiring Systems:

For E-03, 24, 28

B/W

G

Br

Gr

O

B/R

R/B

O/Y

R/Bl

W/Y

W/B

B/W

W/R

B/W

B/Y

B

B/W

B/R

B/W

Y/R

R/B

B/Lg

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/O

G/B

B/W

Y/R

R/B

B/Lg

P

B/R

Y/Bl

B/G

B/W

R/B

B/Lg

G/Y

O/G

Lg

Y

B

Bl/B

R/Bl

Br

B

B/G

B/R

B/Bl

Bl/B

B/Y

B/W

B/W

G/B

B/G

B/O

B/R

Br/B

P

B/W

B/R

O

G/B

B/O

B/G

B/R

Br/B

B/W

G

W/B

O/G

R/B

R

W/Bl

O/W

G

O/W

B

O/W

Y

O/W

B/G

O/W

O/W

G

B/Lg

R/Bl

B

P

G/B

Y/W

O/R

B/Y

Y/Bl

R

W/G

B/Bl

G/B

P/B

B/G

B

W/Bl

G

Lg

W/Y

Bl/G

Bl/B

Bl

B/Bl

B/Y

W/R

B/W

Y

B/W

B/W

Bl/W

Gr/W

Gr/B

Gr/Y

Gr/R

Dbr

Lbl

Bl/Y

B/W

Gr

Y/R

B/R

Y/B

B/G

W/B

B/W

B/Br

W/Bl

Dg

W/B

P/W

Bl/W

B/Br

Bl/G

Bl/B

R

Bl/Y

O/W

W/R

B/W

Gr

B

O/R

O/W

O/R

B

B/W

W/G

B/Br

O/W

W/B

Bl

B

B

Gr

W

W

B/Br

B/Bl

R/Bl

R

P

Bl

B/W

P

Bl

B/W

Y/R

Gr/W

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

Dbr

W/Y

Gr/R

Gr/B

B/R

Y/B

Y/R

R/Bl

W/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

B

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

Dbr

Lg

Gr/Y

Lbl

W/Y

Gr/B

Gr/R

W/B

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/Y

B/Y

W/R

B/R

O

B/W

W

B

W

B

O/G

B/Bl

G/Y

Br/B

B/Bl

B/Br

Bl

Bl/B

O/R

R

B/G

B/O

O/Y

O/Y

G

G/B

R

Dg

W

Y

R/Bl

B/R

B/Y

B/W

B/W

B/R

B/R

R

B/W

B

B

B

B/R

B/R

B/W

B/W

B

B

B

G

Bl/Y

Bl/B

B/Y

B/R

B/R

R

B/W

R

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

G/B

B/W

Dg

B/Y

Dg

Dbr

G/B

B/W

B/Y

B

B/Br

B/G

B/Bl

CLUTCH SWITCH

LIGHT SWITCH

B

W/Bl

B/Br

Y/W

R

B/Br

Y/R

Gr/W

R

P/B

B/Br

G/B

Dg

Y/R

Gr/B

Y/R

Gr/Y

Y/R

Gr/R

Dbr

Lg

Lbl

W/Y

G

P/W

B/Lg

W/B

I718H1910915-02

Wiring Harness Routing Diagram

Wiring Systems: 9A-8

B718H19102003

“C”

“A”

2

3

1

6

5

“B”

11

7

“ a ”

4

9

12

8

10

1. Battery

2. EVAP purge control valve (E-33 only)

3. Clamp (GSF1250/A only)

: Pass through the speed meter lead right side of ignition switch.

Cut the tip of clamp after clamping.

4. Clamp (GSF1250S/SA only)

: Clamp the handle switch right and left lead at the middle of blue taping.

5. Clamp

6. Clamp

: Clamp tip backward.

7. Clamp

: Cut the tip of clamp after clamping.

8. Wring harness

: Be careful not to pinch the wring harness with the frame and fender.

I718H1910910-05

9. Brake hose (ABS) (GSF1250A/SA only)

10. Rear wheel speed sensor coupler (GSF1250A/SA only)

11. Clamp

: Clamp the lead wire and ABS brake hose (GSF1250A/SA).

12. Clamp

: Clamp the handle bar lead wires, ignition switch lead wire and front wheel speed sensor lead wire (GSF1250A/SA).

“A”: Pass through the horn and fan lead wire upper the ABS brake hose

(GSF1250A/SA).

Pass through the EVAP purge control valve lead wire upper the clutch hose (E-33 only).

“B”: Pass through the lead wire under the water hoses.

“C”: Slack the lead wire downward.

“a”: 5 – 10 mm (0.2 – 0.4 in)

9A-9 Wiring Systems:

10

11

[A]

9

[B]

7

“ a ”

8

6

5

1 13 12

14

16

“B”

15

1. Clamp

: Clamp the speed sensor lead wire and HO2 sensor lead wire.

2. Side-stand switch

3. HO2 sensor coupler

4. ABS control unit/HU bracket (GSF1250A/SA only)

: Do not contact the ABS unit wiring harness with the bracket.

5. Frame

6. Wiring harness (GSF1250/A)

7. Wiring harness (GSF1250S/SA)

8. ICES Canada label (E-28 only)

9. Clamp

: Clamp the lead wire at the white marking.

10. Clamp

: Clamp the speed meter lead wire and turn signal lead wires.

11. Wiring harness

3

“A”

4

(a)

2

I718H1910916-01

12. Turn signal lead wire (RH)

13. Turn signal lead wire (LH)

14. Clamp

: Clamp the regulator/rectifier lead wire and generator lead wire.

15. Clamp

: Clamp the speed sensor lead wire, HO2 sensor lead wire and sidestand switch lead wire.

16. Clamp

: Clamp the lead wire inside of clutch hose.

“A”: Pass the regulator/rectifier lead wire behind hose.

“B”: Set the generator lead wire between starter motor and sprocket inner cover.

: 14 N

⋅ m (1.4 kgf-m, 10.0 lb-ft)

“a”: 20

±

5 mm (0.8

±

0.2 in)

[A]: For GSF1250/GSF1250A

[B]: For GSF1250S/GSF1250SA

(a)

2

1

(a)

Wiring Systems: 9A-10

(d)

(b)

“ b ”

(c)

“ a ”

3

“ A ”

(c)

3

4

1. Oil pressure lead wire

: Be careful not to slacken the oil pressure lead wire.

2. Generator cover

3. Clamp

: Push the clamp inside after clamping lead wire.

4. Battery (–) lead wire

: Set lead wire horizontally for right side.

: 11 N

⋅ m (1.1 kgf-m, 8.0 lb-ft)

: 120 N

⋅ m (12 kgf-m, 87 lb-ft)

(e)

: 6.5 N

⋅ m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 lb-ft)

: 1.5 N

⋅ m (0.15 kgf-m, 1.0 lb-ft)

: 5 N

⋅ m (0.5 kgf-m, 3.5 lb-ft)

“a”: 20

° ±

10

°

“b”: 60

° ±

10

°

“A”: Not slacken lead wire between sensor and clamp.

I718H1910913-02

9A-11 Wiring Systems:

Specifications

Service Data

Electrical

Fuse size

Item

Headlight

HI

LO

Fuel

Ignition

Signal

Fan

Main

ABS motor

(GSF1250A/SA only)

ABS valve

(GSF1250A/SA only)

Specification

10 A

10 A

10 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

30 A

20 A

15 A

B718H19107001

Note

Tightening Torque Specifications

B718H19107002

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Wiring Harness Routing Diagram (Page 9A-8)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Body and Accessories

Lighting Systems

Headlight Components

GSF1250/A

Repair Instructions

4

3

2

1

Lighting Systems: 9B-1

B718H19206001

1. Headlight rim

2. Headlight unit

GSF1250S/SA

5

3. Headlight bulb (12 V 60/55 W, H4)

4. Headlight housing

5. Position light bulb (12 V 5 W)

I718H1920047-02

3

1 2

4

4

3

1. Headlight low beam bulb (12 V 55 W, H7)

2. Headlight highbeam bulb (12 V 55 W, H7)

3. Position light bulb (12 V 5 W x 2)

4. Socket

I718H1920048-02

9B-2 Lighting Systems:

Headlight Removal and Installation

GSF1250/A

Removal

1) Removal the headlight mounting screws.

B718H19206024

5) Disconnect the respective couplers and remove the headlight housing (6).

GSF1250

6

5

3

GSF1250A

I718H1920040-04

I718H1920006-01

2) Disconnect the headlight coupler (1) and position light coupler (2).

2

6

5

1

I718H1920007-01

3) Remove the front brake hose clamp bolt (3)

(GSF1250) or front brake hose joint mounting bolt

(4) (GSF1250A).

4) Remove the headlight beam vertical adjuster plate mounting bolts (5).

4

I718H1920008-03

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• After installing, be sure to inspect the headlight beam.

Refer to “Headlight Beam Adjustment (Page 9B-5)”.

GSF1250S/SA

Removal

1) Remove the cowling. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Disconnect the headlight and position light couplers.

3) Remove the headlight assembly.

Lighting Systems: 9B-3

2) Disconnect the headlight coupler (1) and position light coupler (2).

2

1

3) Remove the position light socket (3) and replace the position light bulb.

4) Remove the bulb socket rubber cap (4).

I718H1920014-01

I718H1920002-01

Installation

Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• After installing, be sure to inspect the headlight beam.

Refer to “Headlight Beam Adjustment (Page 9B-5)”.

Headlight Bulb Replacement

B718H19206025

!

CAUTION

When you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol or soap water to prevent premature bulb failure.

GSF1250/A

1) Remove the headlight mounting screws.

3

4

I718H1920015-01

5) Replace the headlight bulb (6) by unhooking the bulb holder spring (5).

5

6

I718H1920016-01

I718H1920006-01

9B-4 Lighting Systems:

6) Reassemble the headlight.

7) Install the headlight assembly so that the hook “A” on the headlight bezel engages with “B” of the housing.

4) Remove the headlight bulb/socket (Low beam) (4) by unhooking the bulb holder spring (5).

4

“B”

“A”

I718H1920017-03

GSF1250S/SA

1) Remove the combination meter assembly. Refer to

“Combination Meter Removal and Installation in

Section 9C (Page 9C-4)”.

2) Remove the position light sockets (1) and replace the position light bulbs.

5

I718H1920011-02

5) Disconnect the headlight bulb (7) from the socket

(6).

6) Replace the headlight bulb with a new one.

7

6

1

I718H1920049-02

7) Replace the headlight bulb (High beam) in the same way as that of the low beam one.

I718H1920009-01

3) Disconnect the headlight (Low beam) coupler (2) and remove the bulb socket rubber cap (3).

3

I718H1920012-01

2

8) Reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1920010-02

Headlight Beam Adjustment

B718H19206026

GSF1250/A

Adjust the headlight beam, both horizontally and vertically.

NOTE

To adjust the headlight beam, adjust the beam horizontally first, then vertically.

Lighting Systems: 9B-5

GSF1250S/SA

1) Insert 5 mm hexagon wrench as shown and adjust the Low and High headlight beam horizontally.

NOTE

To adjust the headlight beam, adjust the beam horizontally first, then vertically.

2

1. Horizontal adjuster

1

“A”

I718H1920037-02

2. Vertical adjuster

“A”: Horizontal adjuster (For both Low and High beam)

I718H1920041-01

2) Adjust the Low and High headlight beam vertically from the lower side.

Rear Combination Light Components

“B”

“B”: Vertical adjuster (For both Low and High beam)

I718H1920042-01

B718H19206005

1

2

I649G1920017-03

1. Brake light/Taillight bulb (12 V 21/5 W) 2. Lens

9B-6 Lighting Systems:

Rear Combination Light Construction

3

B718H19206006

1

2

(a)

1. Seat tail cover 2. Cushion 3. Rear combination light

Rear Combination Light Removal and

Installation

B718H19206007

Removal

1) Remove the seat tail cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Remove the rear combination light (1) from the seat tail cover.

: 2.0 N

⋅ m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 lb-ft)

I649G1920018-02

Installation

Install the rear combination light in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• Tighten the rear combination light mounting bolts to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Rear combination light mounting bolt: 2.0 N·m (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 lb-ft)

1

I718H1920018-01

Brake Light Bulb / Taillight Bulb Replacement

B718H19206008

!

CAUTION

When you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol or soap water to prevent premature bulb failure.

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the tool set (1).

Lighting Systems: 9B-7

3) Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise.

I718H1920020-01

1

4) Replace the bulb (2).

2

I718H1920051-01

License Plate Light Components

5) Reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1920021-01

B718H19206009

1

2

3

1. License plate light bulb (12 V 5 W) 2. Lens cover 3. Lens

I649G1920023-03

9B-8 Lighting Systems:

License Plate Light Removal and Installation

B718H19206010

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the tool set (1) and disconnect the license plate light coupler (2).

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement

B718H19206011

1) Remove the license plate light. Refer to “License

Plate Light Removal and Installation (Page 9B-8)”.

2) Remove the lens by removing the screws.

1

2

I718H1920022-01

3) Remove the license plate light by removing the nuts.

3) Replace the bulb (1).

1

I718H1920024-01

I718H1920023-01

Installation

Install the license plate light in the reverse order of removal.

4) Reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1920026-01

Turn Signal Light Components

1

2

Lighting Systems: 9B-9

B718H19206012

2

1

I649G1920028-04

1. Turn signal light bulb (12 V 21 W x 4)

Front Turn Signal Light Removal and

Installation

B718H19206013

GSF1250/A

Removal

1) Remove the headlight housing. Refer to “Headlight

Removal and Installation (Page 9B-2)”.

2) Remove the front turn signal light (1) by removing the nut.

2. Lens

GSF1250S/SA

Removal

1) Remove the wind screen and upper panel. Refer to

“Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section

9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the turn signal light coupler and clamp.

3) Remove the front turn signal light (1) by removing the nut.

1

1

I718H1920027-01

Installation

Install the front turn signal light in the reverse order of removal.

I718H1920050-02

Installation

Install the front turn signal light in the reverse order of removal.

9B-10 Lighting Systems:

Rear Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation

B718H19206014

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the tool set (1) and disconnect the turn signal light coupler (RH: Black, LH: Gray) (2).

Turn Signal Light Bulb Replacement

B718H19206015

!

CAUTION

When you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol or soap water to prevent premature bulb failure.

1) Remove the lens by removing the screw.

1

2

I718H1920028-01

3) Remove the turn signal light (3) by removing the nut.

2) Replace the bulb (1).

1

3

I718H1920029-02

Installation

Install the rear turn signal light in the reverse order of removal.

Reflex Refractor Construction

3) Reinstall the lens.

(a)

(b)

I718H1920030-01

I718H1920031-01

B718H19206016

3

1

(a)

2 4

1. Front reflex refractor (For E-03, 24, 28, 33)

2. Front fork

3. Rear reflex refractor (For E-03, 28, 33)

4. Rear fender

I718H1920044-05

: 1.8 N

⋅ m (0.18 kgf-m, 1.3 lb-ft)

: 4.5 N

⋅ m (0.45 kgf-m, 3.25 lb-ft)

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Inspection

B718H19206017

Refer to “Electrical Components Location in Section 0A

(Page 0A-8)”.

NOTE

Make sure that the battery is fully charged.

Before removing the turn signal/side-stand relay, check the operation of the turn signal light.

If the turn signal light does not illuminate, inspect the bulb, turn signal switch and circuit connection.

If the bulb, turn signal switch and circuit connection are

OK, the turn signal relay may be faulty; therefore, replace the turn signal/side-stand relay with a new one.

Refer to “Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation (Page 9B-11)”.

Turn Signal / Side-stand Relay Removal and

Installation

B718H19206018

Removal

1) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

2) Remove the turn signal/side-stand relay (1).

Lighting Systems: 9B-11

Hazard Switch Inspection

B718H19206019

Inspect the hazard switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

1

I718H1920034-01

Installation

Install the turn signal/side-stand relay in the reverse order of removal.

I718H1920035-01

3) Inspect the hazard switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the left handlebar switch assembly with a new one. Refer to

“Handlebar Removal and Installation in Section 6B

(Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Position

Color

OFF

B B/Br B/G

ON

I718H1920045-01

4) After finishing the hazard switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Turn Signal Switch Inspection

B718H19206020

Inspect the turn signal switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

I718H1920035-01

9B-12 Lighting Systems:

3) Inspect the turn signal switch for continuity with a tester. If any abnormality is found, replace the left handlebar switch assembly with a new one.

Refer to “Handlebar Removal and Installation in

Section 6B (Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Color

Position

L

PUSH

B/G B/Br B

R

I649G1920037-02

4) After finishing the turn signal switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Passing Light Switch Inspection

B718H19206021

Inspect the passing light switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

4) After finishing the passing light switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Dimmer Switch Inspection

B718H19206022

Inspect the dimmer switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).

1

I718H1920035-01

3) Inspect the dimmer switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the left handlebar switch assembly with a new one.

Refer to “Handlebar Removal and Installation in

Section 6B (Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Position

Color

HI

Dbr Dg G/B

LO

I718H1920046-04

4) After finishing the dimmer switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

I718H1920035-01

3) Inspect the passing light switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the left handlebar switch assembly with a new one.

Refer to “Handlebar Removal and Installation in

Section 6B (Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Color

Position

G/B Dg

PUSH

I649G1920038-02

Lighting Systems: 9B-13

Specifications

Service Data

Wattage

Unit: W

Item

Headlight

Parking or position light

Brake light/Taillight

Turn signal light

License plate light

HI

LO

GSF1250/A

60

55

5

21/5

21 x 4

5

Specification

GSF1250S/SA

55

5 x 2

B718H19207001

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Rear combination light mounting bolt

N

m

2.0

Tightening torque kgf-m

0.2

lb-ft

1.5

)

B718H19207002

Note

(Page 9B-6)

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Rear Combination Light Construction (Page 9B-6)”

“Reflex Refractor Construction (Page 9B-10)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 9B-11) /

) (Page 9B-12) /

) (Page 9B-12) /

) (Page 9B-12)

B718H19208001

9C-1 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

Body and Accessories

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn

General Description

Combination Meter System Description

B718H19301001

This combination meter mainly consists of the stepping motor, LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and LED (Light Emitting

Diode).

The rpm pointer is driven by the stepping motor.

The LCDs indicate Speed, Odo / Trip A / Trip B, Fuel level indicator and Clock / FI (DTC) respectively.

LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LED is used for the illumination light and each indicator light.

LED is maintenance free. LED is less power consuming and more resistant to vibration resistance compared to the bulb.

2 4 3 5 7

FI

1. Adjust switch (Trip / Clock)

2. Tachometer

3. LCD (Speedometer)

4. LCD (Odo / Trip A / Trip B)

5. LCD (Fuel level indicator)

9 8 14 6 1 14

6. Select switch (Odo / Trip A / Trip B)

7. LCD (FI / Clock)

8. LED (ABS indicator light) [GSF1250A/SA only]

9. LED (FI indicator light)

10. LED (Neutral indicator light)

10 11 12 13

I718H1930048-01

11. LED (Oil pressure indicator light)

12. LED (Engine coolant temperature indicator light)

13. LED (High-beam indicator light)

14. LED (Turn signal indicator light)

Combination Meter Components

GSF1250/A

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-2

Repair Instructions

B718H19306001

FW

D

FWD

1

4

2

3

1. Upper case 2. Combination meter

5

3. Lower case 4. Cover 5. Bracket

I718H1930046-03

9C-3 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

GSF1250S/SA

1

2

3

1. Upper case 2. Combination meter 3. Lower case

I718H1930047-02

Combination Meter Removal and Installation

B718H19306002

GSF1250/A

Removal

1) Remove the combination meter mounting bolts.

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-4

2) Disconnect the combination meter coupler and remove the combination meter assembly.

3) Remove the combination meter (1).

I718H1930018-01

I718H1930057-01

2) Remove the headlight. Refer to “Headlight Removal and Installation in Section 9B (Page 9B-2)”.

3) Disconnect the combination meter couplers and remove the combination meter assembly (1).

1

1

I718H1930058-01

Installation

Install the combination meter in the reverse order of removal.

GSF1250S/SA

Removal

1) Remove the meter panel screws.

I718H1930019-01

Installation

Install the combination meter in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Fix the boot of the combination meter coupler properly.

Combination Meter Disassembly and Assembly

B718H19306003

Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and Installation

(Page 9C-4)”.

Disassembly

Disassemble the combination meter as shown in the combination meter components. Refer to “Combination

Meter Components (Page 9C-2)”.

Assembly

Assemble the combination meter as shown in the combination meter components. Refer to “Combination

Meter Components (Page 9C-2)”.

I718H1930017-02

9C-5 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

Combination Meter Inspection

B718H19306004

LED Inspection

Check that the LEDs (FI indicator light, ABS indicator

(GSF1250A/SA only), Oil pressure, Engine coolant temperature indicator light and Meter panel illumination) immediately light up when the ignition switch is turned to

ON.

Check that other LEDs (Neutral indicator light, Highbeam indicator light and Turn signal indicator lights) light up/go off by operating each switch.

If abnormal condition is found, replace the combination meter unit with a new one after checking its wire harness/coupler. Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and Installation (Page 9C-4)”.

2) With the adjuster switch (1) pressed, turn the ignition switch on.

3) Release the adjuster switch (1), 3 to 5 seconds after turning the ignition switch on.

4) Press the adjuster switch (1) twice (within 1 second).

Reset

FI

FI

I718H1930049-01

Stepping Motor Inspection and Adjustment

1) Check that the pointer calibrates itself immediately after turning the ignition switch on and stops at zero point.

If abnormal condition is found, replace the combination meter unit with a new one after checking its wire harness/coupler.

FI

I718H1930050-01

NOTE

• The pointer may not return to the proper position even turning the ignition switch on under low temperature condition. In that case, you can reset the pointer to the proper position by the following instruction.

• Complete the operation within 10 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned on.

1

1

I718H1930051-01

Time Ignition switch

OFF

Adjuster switch (1)

PUSH

0

ON

3 sec.

5 sec.

Release

Push

Push

Reset

10 sec.

I718H1930006-01

5) Pointer will return to the starting point right after the completion of the operation. In the case of the pointer not returning to the proper position after doing above, replace the combination meter unit.

Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and

Installation (Page 9C-4)”.

Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light

Inspection

B718H19306029

Inspect the engine coolant temperature indicator light in the following procedures:

1) Disconnect the ECT sensor coupler (1).

I718H1930059-01

2) Connect the variable resistor (2) between the terminals.

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-6

Fuel Level Indicator Inspection

B718H19306030

Inspect the fuel level indicator in the following procedures:

1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.

2) Lift and support the fuel tank. Refer to “Fuel Tank

Removal and Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”

3) Disconnect the fuel level gauge coupler (1).

2

I718H1930009-05

3) Turn the ignition switch ON.

4) Check the LED operations when the resistance is adjusted to the specified values.

If either one or all indications are abnormal, replace the combination meter with a new one. Refer to

“Combination Meter Removal and Installation

(Page 9C-4)”.

Resistance

2.45 k

and over

Approx. 0.811 k

Approx. 0.1 k

0

(Jumper wire)

LED (3) Water temperature

OFF 19

°

C and below

OFF

ON

ON

Approx. 50

°

C

120 – 139

°

C

140

°

C and over

1

I718H1930053-01

4) Connect variable resistor (2) between the R/B and B/

W lead wires from the wire harness.

2

FI

3

I718H1930052-03

5) Connect the ECT sensor coupler.

Engine Coolant Temperature Removal and

Installation

B718H19306018

Refer to “ECT Sensor Removal and Installation in

Section 1C (Page 1C-2)”.

I718H1930054-01

9C-7 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

5) Turn the ignition switch ON.

6) Check the display of fuel level indicator (LCD) as shown.

If any abnormality is found, replace the combination meter with a new one. Refer to “Combination Meter

Removal and Installation (Page 9C-4)”.

NOTE

It takes approx. 30 seconds that the fuel level indicator indicates the detected fuel level.

Resistance Thermistor Fuel level meter

ON

More than 212

OFF

Fuel Level Indicator Switch (Thermistor)

Inspection

B718H19306031

Inspect the fuel level indicator switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the fuel pump. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and

Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-11)”.

2) Remove the thermistor from the fuel pump. Refer to

“Fuel Pump Disassembly and Assembly in Section

1G (Page 1G-12)”.

3) Connect 12 V battery and test bulb (12 V, 3.4 W) to the fuel level indicator switch as shown in the figure.

The bulb should come on after one minutes if the switch is in good condition.

ON

Battery

Test bulb

ON

129 – 212

OFF

ON

76 – 160

OFF

ON

36 – 93

OFF

OFF

ON

Less than 36

I718H1930060-01

7) Connect the fuel level gauge coupler and reinstall the fuel tank.

Refer to “Fuel Tank Removal and Installation in

Section 1G (Page 1G-9)”.

I718H1930013-04

4) When the switch is immersed in kerosene, the bulb should go out. If the bulb remains lit, replace the unit with a new one.

NOTE

• When the bulb turns off, immediately pick up the switch from kerosene.

• After the check has been completed, wash the switch with gasoline.

OFF

Battery

Test bulb

Kerosene

I718H1930014-03

5) Reinstall the removed parts. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Disassembly and Assembly in Section 1G (Page 1G-

12)”.

Fuel Level Gauge Inspection

B718H19306006

Inspect the fuel level gauge in the following procedures:

1) Remove the fuel level gauge. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and

Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-11)”.

2) Measure the resistance at each fuel level gauge in float position. If the resistance is incorrect, replace fuel level gauge with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Resistance (

)

Float position

Full “a”

Empty “b”

Resistance

Approx. 10

Approx. 216

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-8

Speed Sensor Removal and Installation

B718H19306021

Removal

1) Remove the seat. Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the left frame cover. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation in Section 9D (Page 9D-

6)”.

3) Remove the engine sprocket outer cover. Refer to

“Engine Sprocket Removal and Installation in

Section 3A (Page 3A-2)”.

4) Move the regulator/rectifier assembly (1) by removing the regulator/rectifier bracket bolts.

1

“a”

73.5 mm

(2.89 in.)

“b”

“A”

14.4 mm

(0.57 in.)

15˚

“A”

I718H1930061-01

“A”: Horizontal

3) Install the fuel level gauge. Refer to “Fuel Pump

Assembly / Fuel Level Gauge Removal and

Installation in Section 1G (Page 1G-11)”.

Speedometer Inspection

B718H19306020

If the speedometer, odometer or tripmeter does not function properly, inspect the speed sensor and the coupler connections. If the speed sensor and coupler connections are OK, replace the combination meter unit with a new one. Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and Installation (Page 9C-4)”.

I718H1930056-01

5) Disconnect the speed sensor coupler (2).

6) Release the speed sensor lead wire from the clamps.

7) Remove the speed sensor (3).

2

I718H1930025-02

3

I718H1930024-03

9C-9 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

Installation

Install the speed sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Pay attention to the following points:

• Tighten the speed sensor mounting bolt to the specified torque.

Tightening torque

Speed sensor bolt (a): 6.5 N·m (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 lbft)

3) Move a screwdriver back and forth across the pickup surface of the speed sensor. The voltage readings should cycle as follows (0 V

12 V or 12 V

0 V). If the voltage reading does not change, replace the speed sensor with a new one.

NOTE

While testing, the highest voltage reading should be the same as the battery voltage (12

V).

(a)

I718H1930044-03

• Route the speed sensor lead wire. Refer to “Wiring

Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”.

Speed Sensor Inspection

B718H19306022

Inspect the speed sensor in the following procedures:

1) Remove the speed sensor. Refer to “Speed Sensor

Removal and Installation (Page 9C-8)”.

2) Connect a 12 V battery (between B and B/W), 10 k

Ω resistor (between B/R and B) and multi-circuit tester

(tester (+) probe to B and tester (–) probe to B/R) as shown.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Voltage ( )

I649G1930017-02

Oil Pressure Indicator Inspection

B718H19306023

Inspect the oil pressure indicator in the following procedures:

NOTE

Before inspecting the oil pressure switch, check if the engine oil level is correct. Refer to “Engine Oil and Filter Replacement in

Section 0B (Page 0B-10)”.

1) Disconnect the oil pressure switch lead wire (1) from the oil pressure switch.

B B/R

1

1. Speed sensor

I649G1930016-02

1

I718H1930039-01

2) Turn the ignition switch ON.

3) Check if the oil pressure indicator (LED) will light up when grounding the lead wire (1).

If the oil pressure indicator does not light up, replace the combination meter unit with a new one after checking the connection of couplers.

1

I718H1930036-02

Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation

B718H19306024

Refer to “Oil Pressure Switch Removal and Installation in

Section 1E (Page 1E-7)”.

Ignition Switch Inspection

B718H19306025

Inspect the ignition switch in the following procedures:

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the ignition switch coupler (1).

1

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-10

3) Inspect the ignition switch for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the ignition switch with a new one.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

Position

ON

Color

OFF

B/R B/O G/B B/W B/G Br/B

LOCK

P

I649G1180025-02

4) After finishing the ignition switch inspection, reinstall the removed parts.

Ignition Switch Removal and Installation

B718H19306026

Refer to “Ignition Switch Removal and Installation in

Section 1H (Page 1H-9)”.

Horn Inspection

B718H19306027

NOTE

If the horn sound condition is normal, it is not necessary to inspect the horn button continuity.

Horn Button Inspection

1) Remove the right frame head cover. (GSF1250/A)

Refer to “Exterior Parts Removal and Installation in

Section 9D (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Disconnect the left handlebar switch coupler (1).

I718H1930026-05

1

I718H1930045-01

9C-11 Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn:

3) Inspect the horn button for continuity with a tester.

If any abnormality is found, replace the left handlebar switch assembly with a new one.

Refer to “Handlebar Removal and Installation in

Section 6B (Page 6B-3)”.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

Tester knob indication

Continuity ( )

2) Connect a 12 V battery to terminal “A” and terminal

“B”. If the sound is not heard from the horn, replace the horn with a new one.

“A”

“B”

Horn Inspection

1) Disconnect the horn couplers (1).

1

I718H1930028-03

I718H1930040-02

3) Connect the horn coupler.

Horn Removal and Installation

B718H19306028

Removal

1) Disconnect the horn couplers (1).

2) Remove the horn (2) by removing the mounting bolt.

1

2

I718H1930030-01

I718H1930031-03

Installation

Install the horn in the reverse order of removal.

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn: 9C-12

Specifications

Service Data

Wattage

Unit: W

Item

Speedometer light

Tachometer light

Turn signal indicator light

High beam indicator light

Neutral position indicator light

Oil pressure indicator light

FI indicator light

Engine coolant temp. indicator light

ABS indicator light (GSF1250A/SA only)

GSF1250/A

LED

LED

LED x 2

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

Specification

GSF1250S/SA

B718H19307001

Tightening Torque Specifications

Fastening part

Speed sensor bolt

N

m

6.5

Tightening torque kgf-m

0.65

lb-ft

4.7

)

B718H19307002

Note

(Page 9C-9)

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Special Tool

09900–25008

Multi-circuit tester set

) (Page 9C-8) / ) (Page 9C-

9) / ) (Page 9C-10) /

) (Page 9C-11)

B718H19308001

9D-1 Exterior Parts:

Body and Accessories

Exterior Parts

Schematic and Routing Diagram

Seat Lock Cable Routing Diagram

1

B718H19402001

1. Screw 2. Seat lock cable

3

4

3. Seat lock 4. Plate

2

I718H1940028-01

Exterior Parts Construction

GSF1250/A

Repair Instructions

1

2

Exterior Parts: 9D-2

B718H19406006

1

3

3

1. Frame head cover 2. Headlight housing cover 3. Headlight housing stay

I718H1940033-01

9D-3 Exterior Parts:

GSF1250S/SA

2

5

6

1

3

7

4

8

1. Cowling body

2. Wind screen

3. Cowling brace

4. Lower panel

5. Upper panel

6. Meter panel lid

7. Head pipe

8. Bolt (Except E-33)

I718H1940026-02

Front Fender Construction

1

Exterior Parts: 9D-4

B718H19406007

FW

D

2

3

1

2

1. Front fender

Frame Cover Cushion Construction

2. Fender plate nut 3. Front fork

2

2

I718H1940029-01

B718H19406002

1. Frame cover

1

2. Cushion

: Clean an adhesive surface before adhering the tape cushion.

I718H1940030-01

9D-5 Exterior Parts:

Engine Sprocket Outer Cover Cushion Construction

B718H19406008

1 2

I718H1940031-01

1. Engine sprocket outer cover cushion

: Clear adhesive surface before adhering the tape cushion.

Fastener Removal and Installation

2) Pull out the fastener (2).

B718H19406003

Removal

1) Depress the head of fastener center piece (1).

2. Engine sprocket outer cover

Installation

1) Let the center piece stick out toward the head so that the pawls “A” closes.

“A”

1

I649G1940006-02

2

I649G1940005-02

2) Insert the fastener into the installation hole.

NOTE

To prevent the pawl “A” from damage, insert the fastener all the way into the installation hole.

3) Push in the head of center piece until it becomes flush with the fastener outside face.

Exterior Parts: 9D-6

Frame Cover

Removal

Remove the frame covers (1), left and right.

“A”

1

I649G1940007-02

Exterior Parts Removal and Installation

B718H19406004

Seat

Removal

1) Unlock the seat with the ignition key.

2) Remove the front and rear seats as an assembly.

I718H1940005-02

“A”: Hooked point

Installation

Install the frame covers in the reverse order of removal.

Pillion Rider Handle and Seat Tail Cover

Removal

1) Remove the seat.

2) Remove the frame covers, left and right.

3) Remove the pillion rider handle (1).

1

I718H1940004-01

Installation

Slide the seat hooks into the seat hook retainers and push down firmly until the seat snaps into the locked position.

I718H1940006-01

4) Remove the fasteners. Refer to “Fastener Removal and Installation (Page 9D-5)”.

I718H1940007-01

I718H1940032-03

9D-7 Exterior Parts:

5) Disconnect the brake light/taillight lead wire coupler

(2).

6) Unhook the seat lock cable (3). Refer to “Seat Lock

Cable Routing Diagram (Page 9D-1)”.

7) Remove the seat tail cover (4).

4

Headlight Housing Cover (GSF1250/A)

Removal

Remove the headlight housing cover (1).

1

2

3

I718H1940034-01

Installation

Install the seat tail cover and pillion rider handle in the reverse order of removal.

Frame Head Cover (GSF1250/A)

Removal

Removal the frame head covers (1), left and right.

I718H1940009-01

Installation

Install the headlight housing cover in the reverse order of removal.

Cowling and Cowling Brace (GSF1250S/SA)

Removal

1) Remove the caps.

2) Remove the rear view mirrors, left and right.

“A”

1

I718H1940008-01

“A”: Hooked point

Installation

Install the frame head covers in the reverse order of removal.

I718H1940011-01

3) Remove the combination meter assembly (1). Refer to “Combination Meter Removal and Installation in

Section 9C (Page 9C-4)”.

1

I718H1940013-01

4) Remove the wind screen (2) and upper panel (3).

2

Exterior Parts: 9D-8

7) Remove the lower panel (6) from the cowling (5).

3

6

5

I718H1940012-01

5) Remove the turn signal lights (4), left and right. Refer to “Front Turn Signal Light Removal and Installation in Section 9B (Page 9B-9)”.

I718H1940017-01

8) Disconnect the headlight and position light couplers.

9) Remove the headlight assembly (7).

7

4 4

I718H1940014-03

6) Remove the cowling (5) along with the lower panel

(6).

10) Remove the cowling brace (8).

I718H1940018-01

6

8

5

I718H1940015-01

I718H1940019-01

Installation

Install the cowling and cowling brace in the reverse order of removal. Pay attention to the following point:

• After installing, be sure to inspect the headlight beam.

Refer to “Headlight Beam Adjustment in Section 9B

(Page 9B-5)”.

Front Fender

Refer to “Front Fork Removal and Installation in Section

2B (Page 2B-2)”.

I718H1940016-02

9D-9 Exterior Parts:

Seat Height Adjustment

B718H19406005

Adjust the seat height in the following procedures:

1) Remove the seat assembly. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation (Page 9D-6)”.

2) Remove the seat height adjusting dampers.

5) Reinstall the front seat and adjust the seat height adjuster position “A” or “B”.

“B”

“A”

3) Remove the front seat from the rear seat.

I718H1940020-01

“A”: For low (Normal) position

I718H1940023-01

“B”: For high position

6) Install the seat height adjusting dampers.

NOTE

Dampers are used in two ways “A” or “B”.

Pay attention to the direction of dampers when installing them.

!

CAUTION

Position of adjuster and direction of dampers must be unified either “A” or “B”.

I718H1940021-02

4) Adjust the seat height adjuster position “A” or “B”.

“B”

“A”

“A”: For low (Normal) position

I718H1940024-01

“A”: For low (Normal) position

“A”

I718H1940022-01

“B”: For high position

“B”

I718H1940025-01

“B”: For high position

7) Reinstall the seat assembly. Refer to “Exterior Parts

Removal and Installation (Page 9D-6)”.

Body and Accessories

Body Structure

Body Frame Construction

Repair Instructions

Body Structure: 9E-1

B718H19506001

1

2

(a)

6

5

2

(a)

5

6

4

(b)

4

(c)

3

(b)

1. Frame

2. Frame down tube bolt

3. Engine mount No.1 bracket bolt

4. Bracket mounting bolt

5. Engine mounting bracket bushing

6. Engine mounting No.2 bracket

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

I718H1950003-08

Engine Mounting Bracket Bushing Replacement

B718H19506002

Replace the engine mounting bracket bushing if necessary, as shown in the body frame construction. Refer to “Body

Frame Construction (Page 9E-1)”.

9E-2 Body Structure:

Engine Mount Bushing Replacement

B718H19506003

Replace the engine mount bushing if necessary, as shown in the body frame construction. Refer to “Body Frame

Construction (Page 9E-1)”.

Front Footrest Bracket Construction

GSF1250/S

B718H19506005

1

2

3

4

(a)

1. Frame

GSF1250A/SA

2. Footrest bracket

3

3. Washer 4. Bolt

1

4

(a)

2

I718H1950001-04

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

1 2 3

4

(a)

1. Frame

2. Footrest bracket

3. Washer

4. Bolt

“ b ”

: 23 N

⋅ m (2.3 kgf-m, 16.5 lb-ft)

“a”: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

“b”: 16.4 mm (0.65 in)

I718H1950004-02

Side-stand Construction

(b)

1

2

(a)

Body Structure: 9E-3

B718H19506006

1. Side-stand

2. Spring

: 50 N

⋅ m (5.0 kgf-m, 36.0 lb-ft)

: 40 N

⋅ m (4.0 kgf-m, 29.0 lb-ft)

I718H1950005-05

: Apply grease to sliding surface.

9E-4 Body Structure:

Side-stand Removal and Installation

B718H19506007

Removal

1) Support the motorcycle with the center stand.

2) Remove the side-stand as shown in the side-stand construction. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”.

Installation

Install the side-stand as shown in the side-stand construction. Refer to “Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”.

Center Stand Construction

B718H19506008

2

1

3

1. Center stand 2. Spring 3. Center stand cushion

I718H1950002-02

: Apply grease to sliding surface.

Center Stand Removal and Installation

Removal

1) Support the motorcycle using a jack.

B718H19506009

!

CAUTION

Make sure that the motorcycle is supported securely.

2) Remove the center stand as shown in the center stand construction. Refer to “Center Stand Construction

(Page 9E-4)”.

Installation

Install the center stand as shown in the center stand construction. Refer to “Center Stand Construction (Page 9E-4)”.

Body Structure: 9E-5

Specifications

Tightening Torque Specifications

B718H19507001

NOTE

The specified tightening torque is also described in the following.

“Body Frame Construction (Page 9E-1)”

“Front Footrest Bracket Construction (Page 9E-2)”

“Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”

Reference:

For the tightening torque of fastener not specified in this section, refer to “Tightening Torque Specifications in Section

0C (Page 0C-7)”.

Special Tools and Equipment

Recommended Service Material

NOTE

Required service material is also described in the following.

“Side-stand Construction (Page 9E-3)”

“Center Stand Construction (Page 9E-4)”

B718H19508001

Prepared by

December, 2006

Part No. 99500-39300-01E

Printed in Japan

684

TOP

GSF1250/S/A/SA

9 9 5 0 0 — 3 9 3 0 0 — 0 1 E

Printed in Japan

K7

No.7761 GSF1250/S/A/SA 99500-39300-01E Cover14 for PS printing (30 mm) 2006.12.29

BOTTOM

DIC216

GSF1250/S/A/SA

9 9 5 0 0 — 3 9 3 0 0 — 0 1 E

FOREWORD

This manual contains an introductory description on the SUZUKI GSF1250/S/A/SA and procedures for its inspection/service and overhaul of its main components.

Other information considered as generally known is not included.

Read the GENERAL INFORMATION section to familiarize yourself with the motorcycle and its maintenance. Use this section as well as other sections to use as a guide for proper inspection and service.

This manual will help you know the motorcycle better so that you can assure your customers of fast and reliable service.

*This manual has been prepared on the basis of the latest specifications at the time of publication. If modifications have been made since then, differences may exist between the content of this manual and the actual motorcycle.

*Illustrations in this manual are used to show the basic principles of operation and work procedures. They may not represent the actual motorcycle exactly in detail.

*This manual is written for persons who have enough knowledge, skills and tools, including special tools, for servicing SUZUKI motorcycles. If you do not have the proper knowledge and tools, ask your authorized SUZUKI motorcycle dealer to help you.

!WARNING

Inexperienced mechanics or mechanics without the proper tools and equipment may not be able to properly perform the services described in this manual.

Improper repair may result in injury to the mechanic and may render the motorcycle unsafe for the rider and passenger.

© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2006

TABLE OF CONTENTS

00

0

Precautions

00-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………

00-1

1

General Information ……………………………………………

0-i

General Information

0A-1

Maintenance and Lubrication ……………………………

0B-1

Service Data…………………………………………………..

0C-1

2

Engine ……………………………………………………………….

1-i

Precautions

1-1

Engine General Information and Diagnosis ………..

1A-1

Emission Control Devices ………………………………..

1B-1

3

Engine Electrical Devices…………………………………

1C-1

Engine Mechanical………………………………………….

1D-1

Engine Lubrication System

1E-1

Engine Cooling System……………………………………

1F-1

4

Fuel System …………………………………………………..

1G-1

Ignition System……………………………………………….

1H-1

Starting System……………………………………………….

1I-1

……………………………………………..Charging System

1J-1

Exhaust System ……………………………………………..

1K-1

5

Suspension

2-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

2-1

…………………………Suspension General Diagnosis

2A-1

Front Suspension ……………………………………………

2B-1

6

Rear Suspension

2C-1

Wheels and Tires ……………………………………………

2D-1

…………………………………………………..Driveline / Axle

3-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

3-1

7

Drive Chain / Drive Train / Drive Shaft ……………….

3A-1

Brake …………………………………………………………………

4-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

4-1

Brake Control System and Diagnosis ………………..

4A-1

8

Front Brakes…………………………………………………..

4B-1

Rear Brakes …………………………………………………..

4C-1

ABS ………………………………………………………………

4E-1

Tranmission / Transaxle ……………………………………..

5-i

9

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

5-1

Manual Transmission ………………………………………

5B-1

Clutch ……………………………………………………………

5C-1

Steering……………………………………………………………..

6-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

6-1

10

Steering General Diagnosis ……………………………..

6A-1

Steering / Handlebar ……………………………………….

6B-1

Body and Accessories………………………………………..

9-i

Precautions ……………………………………………………..

9-1

11

Wiring Systems ………………………………………………

9A-1

Lighting Systems…………………………………………….

9B-1

Combination Meter / Fuel Meter / Horn………………

9C-1

Exterior Parts …………………………………………………

9D-1

Body Structure ……………………………………………….

9E-1

Table of Contents 00- i

Section 00

00

Precautions

CONTENTS

Precautions ………………………………………..

00-1

General Precautions …………………………………….

00-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..

00-1

Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service …………

00-2

Warning / Caution / Note……………………………….

00-1

00-1 Precautions:

Precautions

Precautions

Warning / Caution / Note

B718H10000001

Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully. To emphasize special information, the symbol and the words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE have special meanings. Pay special attention to the messages highlighted by these signal words.

! WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or injury.

! CAUTION

Indicates a potential hazard that could result in motorcycle damage.

NOTE

Indicates special information to make maintenance easier or instructions clearer.

Please note, however, that the warnings and cautions contained in this manual cannot possibly cover all potential hazards relating to the servicing, or lack of servicing, of the motorcycle. In addition to the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS stated, you must use good judgement and basic mechanical safety principles. If you are unsure about how to perform a particular service operation, ask a more experienced mechanic for advice.

General Precautions

B718H10000002

!WARNING

Proper service and repair procedures are important for the safety of the service mechanic and the safety and reliability of the motorcycle.

When 2 or more persons work together, pay attention to the safety of each other.

When it is necessary to run the engine indoors, make sure that exhaust gas is forced outdoors.

When working with toxic or flammable materials, make sure that the area you work in is well ventilated and that you follow all of the material manufacturer’s instructions.

Never use gasoline as a cleaning solvent.

To avoid getting burned, do not touch the engine, engine oil, oil cooler and exhaust system until they have cooled.

After servicing the fuel, oil, water, exhaust or brake systems, check all lines and fittings related to the system for leaks.

!CAUTION

If parts replacement is necessary, replace the parts with Suzuki Genuine Parts or their equivalent.

When removing parts that are to be reused, keep them arranged in an orderly manner so that they may be reinstalled in the proper order and orientation.

Be sure to use special tools when instructed.

Make sure that all parts used in reassembly are clean. Lubricate them when specified.

Use the specified lubricant, bond, or sealant.

When removing the battery, disconnect the negative (–) cable first and then the positive (+) cable.

When reconnecting the battery, connect the positive (+) cable first and then the negative (–) cable, and replace the terminal cover on the positive (+) terminal.

When performing service to electrical parts, if the service procedures do not require use of battery power, disconnect the negative (–) cable the battery.

When tightening the cylinder head or case bolts and nuts, tighten the larger sizes first. Always tighten the bolts and nuts diagonally from the inside toward outside and to the specified tightening torque.

Whenever you remove oil seals, gaskets, packing, O-rings, locking washers, selflocking nuts, cotter pins, circlips and certain other parts as specified, be sure to replace them with new ones. Also, before installing these new parts, be sure to remove any left over material from the mating surfaces.

Never reuse a circlip. When installing a new circlip, take care not to expand the end gap larger than required to slip the circlip over the shaft. After installing a circlip, always ensure that it is completely seated in its groove and securely fitted.

Precautions: 00-2

Use a torque wrench to tighten fasteners to the specified torque. Wipe off grease and oil if a thread is smeared with them.

After reassembling, check parts for tightness and proper operation.

To protect the environment, do not unlawfully dispose of used motor oil, engine coolant and other fluids: batteries, and tires.

To protect Earth’s natural resources, properly dispose of used motorcycle and parts.

Precautions for Electrical Circuit Service

B718H10000003

When handling the electrical parts or servicing the FI and ABS systems, observe the following points for the safety of the systems.

Electrical Parts

Connector / Coupler

When connecting a connector, be sure to push it in until a click is felt.

I310G1000001-01

With a lock type coupler, be sure to release the lock when disconnecting, and push it in fully to engage the lock when connecting.

When disconnecting the coupler, be sure to hold the coupler body and do not pull the lead wires.

Inspect each terminal on the connector/coupler for looseness or bending.

Inspect each terminal for corrosion and contamination. The terminals must be clean and free of any foreign material which could impede proper terminal contact.

I310G1000002-01

Inspect each lead wire circuit for poor connection by shaking it by hand lightly. If any abnormal condition is found, repair or replace.

I310G1000003-01

When taking measurements at electrical connectors using a tester probe, be sure to insert the probe from the wire harness side (rear) of the connector/coupler.

2

1

I649G1000013-01

When connecting meter probe from the terminal side of the coupler (where connection from harness side not being possible), use extra care not to force and cause the male terminal to bend or the female terminal to open. Connect the probe as shown to avoid opening of female terminal. Never push in the probe where male terminal is supposed to fit.

00-3 Precautions:

Check the male connector for bend and female connector for excessive opening. Also check the coupler for locking (looseness), corrosion, dust, etc.

4

“A

3

4

I649G1000030-01

3. Coupler

4. Probe

“A”: Where male terminal fits

Clamp

Clamp the wire harness at such positions as indicated in “Wiring Harness Routing Diagram in Section 9A (Page 9A-8)”.

Bend the clamp properly so that the wire harness is clamped securely.

In clamping the wire harness, use care not to allow it to hang down.

Do not use wire or any other substitute for the band type clamp.

I718H1000001-02

Fuse

When a fuse is blown, always investigate the cause to correct it and then replace the fuse.

Do not use a fuse of different capacity.

Do not use wire or any other substitute for the fuse.

I649G1000001-01

Switch

Never apply grease material to switch contact points to prevent damage.

ECM / ABS control unit / HU / Various sensors

Since each component is a high-precision part, great care should be taken not to apply any severe impacts during removal and installation.

I310G1000007-01

I649G1000003-01

Precautions: 00-4

Be careful not to touch the electrical terminals of the electronic parts (ECM, ABS control unit/HU, etc.). The static electricity from your body may damage them.

I310G1000008-01

When disconnecting and connecting the coupler, make sure to turn OFF the ignition switch, or electronic parts may get damaged.

1

I649G1000031-01

1.Ignition switch

Never allow dust or water to contact the ABS control unit/HU.

I649G1000004-01

The ABS control unit/HU cannot be disassembled. Replace the whole unit with a new one.

I649G1000005-01

Battery

Battery connection in reverse polarity is strictly prohibited. Such a wrong connection will damage the components of the FI and ABS systems instantly when reverse power is applied.

I718H1000004-01

Removing any battery terminal of a running engine is strictly prohibited. The moment such removal is made, damaging counter electromotive force will be applied to the electronic unit which may result in serious damage.

I310G1000011-01

00-5 Precautions:

Before measuring voltage at each terminal, check to make sure that battery voltage is 11 V or higher. Terminal voltage check with a low battery voltage will lead to erroneous diagnosis.

I310G1000012-01

Never connect any tester (voltmeter, ohmmeter, or whatever) to the electronic unit when its coupler is disconnected. Otherwise, damage to electronic unit may result.

Never connect an ohmmeter to the electronic unit with its coupler connected. If attempted, damage to ECM or sensors may result.

Be sure to use a specified voltmeter/ohmmeter. Otherwise, accurate measurements may not be obtained and personal injury may result.

Electrical Circuit Inspection Procedure

While there are various methods for electrical circuit inspection, described here is a general method to check for open and short circuit using an ohmmeter and a voltmeter.

Open circuit check

Possible causes for the open circuit are as follows. As the cause can exist in the connector/coupler or terminal, they need to be checked carefully.

Loose connection of connector/coupler

Poor contact of terminal (due to dirt, corrosion or rust, poor contact tension, entry of foreign object etc.)

Wire harness being open.

Poor terminal-to-wire connection.

When checking system circuits including an electronic control unit such as ECM, ABS control unit/HU, etc., it is important to perform careful check, starting with items which are easier to check.

1)Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.

2)Check each connector/coupler at both ends of the circuit being checked for loose connection. Also check for condition of the coupler lock if equipped.

“A”

“A”

I718H1000005-02

1. Sensor

“A”: Check for loose connection

3)Using a test male terminal, check the female terminals of the circuit being checked for contact tension.

Check each terminal visually for poor contact (possibly caused by dirt, corrosion, rust, entry of foreign object, etc.). At the same time, check to make sure that each terminal is fully inserted in the coupler and locked.

If contact tension is not enough, rectify the contact to increase tension or replace. The terminals must be clean and free of any foreign material which could impede proper terminal contact.

“B”

“C”

I649G1000027-01

“B”: Check contact tension by inserting and removing.

“C”: Check each terminal for bend and proper alignment.

4)Using continuity inspect or voltage check procedure as described below, inspect the wire harness terminals for open circuit and poor connection. Locate abnormality, if any.

“D” “F”

“E”

I649G1000028-01

”D”: Looseness of crimping

“E”: Open

“F”: Thin wire (A few strands left)

Precautions: 00-6

Continuity check

1)Measure resistance across coupler “B” (between “A” and “C” in figure).

If no continuity is indicated (infinity or over limit), the circuit is open between terminals “A” and “C”.

“A”

“B” ECM

“C”

I705H1000006-02

2)Disconnect the coupler “B” and measure resistance between couplers “A” and “B-1”.

If no continuity is indicated, the circuit is open between couplers “A” and “B-1”. If continuity is indicated, there is an open circuit between couplers “B-2” and “C” or an abnormality in coupler “B-2” or coupler “C”.

“A”

“B-2”

ECM

“B” “C”

“B-1”

I705H1000010-02

Voltage check

If voltage is supplied to the circuit being checked, voltage check can be used as circuit check.

1)With all connectors/couplers connected and voltage applied to the circuit being checked, measure voltage between each terminal and body ground.

2)If measurements were taken as shown in the figure and results were listed in the following, it means that the circuit is open between terminals “A” and “B”.

Voltage between

“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V “B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V “C” and body ground: 0 V

3)Also, if measured values are as listed following, a resistance (abnormality) exists which causes the voltage drop in the circuit between terminals “A” and “B”.

Voltage between

“A” and body ground: Approx. 5 V

“B” and body ground: Approx. 5 V – 2 V voltage drop

“C” and body ground: 3 V – 2 V voltage drop

“A”

ECM

“B”

“C”

5V

5V

0V 5V

“A” “B” “C”

I705H1000007-01

Short circuit check (Wire harness to ground)

1)Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.

2)Disconnect the connectors/couplers at both ends of the circuit to be checked.

NOTE

If the circuit to be checked branches to other parts as shown, disconnect all connectors/ couplers of those parts. Otherwise, diagnosis will be wrong.

00-7 Precautions:

3)Measure resistance between terminal at one end of circuit (“A” terminal in figure) and body ground. If continuity is indicated, there is a short circuit to ground between terminals “A” and “C”.

“A”

“D”

“B” ECM

“C”

“E”

5V

“A” “C”

I705H1000008-01

“D”: To other parts

“E”: Other parts

4)Disconnect the connector/coupler included in circuit (coupler “B”) and measure resistance between terminal “A” and body ground. If continuity is indicated, the circuit is shorted to the ground between terminals “A” and “B”.

“A”

“D”

ECM

“B” “C”

I705H1000009-02

“D”: To other parts

Using The Multi-Circuit Testers

Use the Suzuki multi-circuit tester set.

Use well-charged batteries in the tester.

Be sure to set the tester to the correct testing range.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

(A)

I649G1000024-02

Using the testers

Incorrectly connecting the (+) and (–) probes may cause the inside of the tester to be burned.

If the voltage and current are not known, make measurements using the highest range.

When measuring the resistance with the multi-circuit tester (1), f will be shown as 10.00 M: and “1” flashes in the display.

Check that no voltage is applied before making the measurement. If voltage is applied the tester may be damaged.

Precautions: 00-8

After using the tester, turn the power off.

Special tool

: 09900–25008 (Multi-circuit tester set)

I649G1000002-01

NOTE

When connecting the multi-circuit tester, use the needle pointed probe to the back side of the lead wire coupler and connect the probes of tester to them.

Use the needle pointed probe to prevent the rubber of the water proof coupler from damage.

When using the multi-circuit tester, do not strongly touch the terminal of the ECM coupler with a needle pointed tester probe to prevent the terminal damage or terminal bend.

Special tool

(A): 09900–25009 (Needle pointed probe set)

(A)

I649G1000025-02

00-9 Precautions:

Table of Contents 0- i

Section 0

General Information

0

CONTENTS

General Information …………………………..

0A-1

General Description ………………………………………

0A-1

Symbols ……………………………………………………..

0A-1

Abbreviations ………………………………………………

0A-1

SAE-to-Former SUZUKI Term ……………………….

0A-2

Vehicle Side View ………………………………………..

0A-3

Vehicle Identification Number ………………………..

0A-4

Fuel and Oil Recommendation ………………………

0A-4

Engine Coolant Recommendation ………………….

0A-5

BREAK-IN Procedures………………………………….

0A-5

Cylinder Identification……………………………………

0A-5

Country and Area Codes ………………………………

0A-6

Wire Color Symbols ……………………………………..

0A-6

Warning, Caution and Information Labels

Location ……………………………………………………

0A-7

Component Location …………………………………….

0A-8

Electrical Components Location …………………….

0A-8

Specifications……………………………………………..

0A-10

Specifications (GSF1250/S)…………………………

0A-10

Specifications (GSF1250A/SA)…………………….

0A-12

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………

0A-14

Special Tool ………………………………………………

0A-14

Maintenance and Lubrication……………..

0B-1

Precautions…………………………………………………..

0B-1

Precautions for Maintenance …………………………

0B-1

General Description ………………………………………

0B-1

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants……………..

0B-1

Scheduled Maintenance ………………………………..

0B-1

Periodic Maintenance Schedule Chart…………….

0B-1

Lubrication Points ………………………………………..

0B-2

Repair Instructions ……………………………………….

0B-3

Air Cleaner Element Replacement………………….

0B-3

Air Cleaner Element Inspection and Cleaning ….

0B-3

Exhaust Pipe Bolt and Muffler Bolt Inspection ….

0B-4

Spark Plug Replacement ………………………………

0B-4

Spark Plug Inspection and Cleaning ……………….

0B-4

Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment ……

0B-5

Fuel Line Inspection ……………………………………

0B-10

Evaporative Emission Control System

Inspection (E-33 Only) ………………………………

0B-10

Engine Oil and Filter Replacement ……………….

0B-10

Throttle Cable Play Inspection and

Adjustment ………………………………………………

0B-12

Throttle Valve Synchronization …………………….

0B-12

PAIR System Inspection ……………………………..

0B-12

Cooling System Inspection…………………………..

0B-12

Clutch System Inspection…………………………….

0B-14

Clutch Hose Replacement …………………………..

0B-15

Clutch Fluid Replacement ……………………………

0B-15

Drive Chain Inspection and Adjustment …………

0B-15

Drive Chain Cleaning and Lubricating……………

0B-16

Brake System Inspection …………………………….

0B-17

Tire Inspection……………………………………………

0B-19

Steering System Inspection …………………………

0B-20

Front Fork Inspection ………………………………….

0B-20

Rear Suspension Inspection ………………………..

0B-20

Chassis Bolt and Nut Inspection …………………..

0B-21

Compression Pressure Check ……………………..

0B-22

Oil Pressure Check …………………………………….

0B-22

SDS check ………………………………………………..

0B-22

Specifications……………………………………………..

0B-23

Tightening Torque Specifications………………….

0B-23

Special Tools and Equipment ………………………

0B-23

Recommended Service Material …………………..

0B-23

Special Tool ………………………………………………

0B-23

Service Data ………………………………………

0C-1

Specifications……………………………………………….

0C-1

Service Data………………………………………………..

0C-1

Tightening Torque Specifications……………………

0C-7

0A-1 General Information:

General Information

General Description

Symbols

B718H10101001

Listed in the table below are the symbols indicating instructions and other information necessary for servicing. The meaning of each symbol is also included in the table.

Symbol

Definition

Torque control required.

Data beside it indicate specified torque.

Apply oil.

Use engine oil unless otherwise specified.

Apply molybdenum oil solution.

(Mixture of engine oil and SUZUKl MOLY PASTE in a ratio of 1:1).

Apply SUZUKI SUPER GREASE “A” or equivalent.

99000-25010

Apply SUZUKI MOLY PASTE or equivalent.

99000-25140

Apply SUZUKI SILICONE GREASE or equivalent.

99000-25100

Apply SUZUKI BOND “1207B” or equivalent.

99000-31140

Apply SUZUKI BOND “1215” or equivalent.

99000-31110

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1303” or equivalent.

99000-32030

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1322” or equivalent.

99000-32110

Apply THREAD LOCK SUPER “1360” or equivalent.

99000-32130

Use engine coolant or equivalent.

99000-99032-11X

Use fork oil or equivalent.

99000-99001-SS8

Apply or use brake fluid.

Use special tool.

Do not reuse.

Note on reassembly.

Abbreviations

B718H10101002

A:

ABDC: After Bottom Dead Center ABS: Anti-lock brake system AC: Alternating Current

ACL: Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Box

API: American Petroleum Institute ATDC: After Top Dead Center A/F: Air Fuel Mixture

B:

BBDC: Before Bottom Dead Center BTDC: Before Top Dead Center B+: Battery Positive Voltage

C:

CKP Sensor: Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) CKT: Circuit

CLP Switch: Clutch Lever Position Switch (Clutch Switch)

CO: Carbon Monoxide

CPU: Central Processing Unit

D:

DC: Direct Current

DMC: Dealer Mode Coupler

DOHC: Double Over Head Camshaft DRL: Daytime Running Light

DTC: Diagnostic Trouble code

E:

ECM: Engine Control Module Engine Control Unit (ECU) (FI Control Unit)

ECT Sensor: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)

Water Temp. Sensor (WTS)

F:

FI: Fuel Injection, Fuel Injector FP: Fuel pump

FPR: Fuel Pressure Regulator

General Information: 0A-2

FP Relay: Fuel Pump Relay

G:

GEN: Generator GND: Ground

GP Switch: Gear Position Switch

H:

HC: Hydrocarbons

HO2 sensor: Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)

I:

IAP Sensor: Intake Air Pressure Sensor (IAPS) IAT Sensor: Intake Air Temperature Sensor (IATS) IG: Ignition

ISC Valve: Idle Speed Control Valve (ISCV)

J:

JASO: Japanese Automobile Standards Organization

L:

LCD: Liquid Crystal Display

LED: Light Emitting Diode (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) LH: Left Hand

M:

MAL-CODE: Malfunction Code (Diagnostic Code) Max: Maximum

MIL: Malfunction Indicator Lamp (LED) Min: Minimum

N:

NOx: Nitrogen Oxides

O:

OHC: Over Head Camshaft

OPS: Oil Pressure Switch

P:

PAIR: Pulsed Secondary Air Injection

PCV: Positive Crankcase Ventilation (Crankcase Breather)

R:

RH: Right Hand

ROM: Read Only Memory

S:

SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers SDS: Suzuki Diagnosis System

STC System: Secondary Throttle Control System (STCS)

STP Sensor: Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS)

ST Valve: Secondary Throttle Valve (STV)

STV Actuator: Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA)

T:

TO Sensor: Tip-over Sensor (TOS)

TP Sensor: Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

SAE-to-Former SUZUKI Term

B718H10101012

This list shows SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) J1930 terms and abbreviations which may be used in this manual in compliance with SAE recommendations, as well as their former SUZUKI names.

Ex. SAE term (Abbreviation): Former SUZUKI term

A:

Air Cleaner (ACL): Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Box

B:

Battery Positive Voltage (B+): Battery Voltage, +B

C:

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP Sensor):

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS), Crank Angle

D:

Data Link Connector (DLC): Dealer Mode Coupler Diagnostic Test Mode (DTM):

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC): Diagnostic Code, Malfunction Code

E:

Electronic Ignition (EI):

Engine Control Module (ECM): Engine Control Module (ECM), Fl Control Unit, Engine Control Unit (ECU)

Engine Coolant Level (ECL): Coolant Level Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT): Coolant

Temperature, Engine Coolant Temperature, Water Temperature

Engine Speed (RPM): Engine Speed (RPM) Evaporative Emission (EVAP): Evaporative Emission Evaporative Emission Canister (EVAP Canister):

(Canister)

F:

Fan Control (FC):

Fuel Level Sensor: Fuel Level Sensor, Fuel Level Gauge

Fuel Pump (FP): Fuel Pump (FP)

G:

Generator (GEN): Generator

Ground (GND): Ground (GND, GRD)

H:

Hydrocarbons (HC): Hydrocarbons

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S): Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S), O2 sensor

I:

Ignition Control Module (ICM):

Intake Air Temperature (IAT): Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Air Temperature

Idle Speed Control (ISC):

Ignition Control (IC): Electronic Spark Advance (ESA)

Ignition Control Module (ICM):

Intake Air Temperature (IAT): Intake Air Temperature (IAT), Air Temperature

M:

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL): LED Lamp, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP): Intake Air Pressure (IAP), Intake Vacuum

Mass Air Flow (MAF): Air Flow

O:

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD): Self-Diagnosis Function, Diagnostic

Open Loop (OL):

P:

Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM): Pulsed Secondary Air Injection (PAIR): Pulse Air

Control (PAIR)

Purge Valve (Purge Valve): Purge Valve (SP Valve)

R:

Random Access Memory (RAM):

SUZUKI GSF 1250 Bandit User Manual

0A-3 General Information:

Read Only Memory (ROM): ROM

S:

Secondary Air Injection (AIR):

Secondary Throttle Control System (STCS): STC

System (STCS)

Secondary Throttle Valve (STV): ST Valve (STV)

Secondary Throttle Valve Actuator (STVA): STV

Actuator (STVA)

T:

Throttle Body (TB): Throttle Body (TB)

Throttle Body Fuel Injection (TBI): Throttle Body Fuel

Injection (TBI)

Throttle Position Sensor (TP Sensor): TP Sensor

(TPS)

V:

Voltage Regulator (VR): Voltage Regulator

Volume Air Flow (VAF): Air Flow

Vehicle Side View

B718H10101003

NOTE

Difference between illustration and actual motorcycles may exist depending on the markets.

SUZUKI GSF1250 (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010001-01

Left Side

I718H1010002-02

SUZUKI GSF1250S (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010003-01

Left Side

I718H1010004-02

SUZUKI GSF1250A (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010005-01

General Information: 0A-4

Left Side

I718H1010006-01

SUZUKI GSF1250SA (2007-model)

Right Side

I718H1010009-02

Left Side

I718H1010010-03

Vehicle Identification Number

B718H10101004

The frame serial number or V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number) “A” is stamped on the right side of the steering head pipe. The engine serial number “B” is located on the right side of the crankcase. These numbers are required especially for registering the machine and ordering spare parts.

“A”

I718H1010011-03

“B”

I718H1010012-03

Fuel and Oil Recommendation

B718H10101005

Fuel (For USA and Canada)

Use only unleaded gasoline of at least 87 pump octane (R/2 + M/2) or 91 octane or higher rated by the research method.

Gasoline containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether), less than 10% ethanol, or less than 5% methanol with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitor is permissible.

Fuel (For Other Countries)

Gasoline used should be graded 91 octane (Research Method) or higher. Unleaded gasoline is recommended.

Engine Oil (For USA)

Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and life. Always select good quality engine oil.

Suzuki recommends the use of SUZUKI PERFORMANCE 4 MOTOR OIL or equivalent engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil. If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select and alternative according to the chart.

0A-5 General Information:

Engine Oil (For Other Countries)

Oil quality is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and life. Always select good quality engine oil. Use of SF/SG or SH/SJ in API with MA in JASO. Suzuki recommends the use of SAE 10W-40 engine oil. If SAE 10W-40 engine oil is not available, select an alternative according to the chart.

I310G1010005-01

Brake Fluid

Specification and classification: DOT 4

! WARNING

Since the brake system of this motorcycle is filled with a glycol-based brake fluid by the manufacturer, do not use or mix different types of fluid such as silicone-based and petroleum-based fluid for refilling the system, otherwise serious damage will result.

Do not use any brake fluid taken from old or used or unsealed containers.

Never reuse brake fluid left over from a previous servicing, which has been stored for a long period.

Front Fork Oil

Use fork oil SS8 or an equivalent fork oil.

Engine Coolant Recommendation

B718H10101011

Engine Coolant

Use an anti-freeze/engine coolant compatible with an aluminum radiator, mixed with distilled water only.

Water for mixing

Use distilled water only. Water other than distilled water can corrode and clog the aluminum radiator.

Anti-freeze/Engine coolant

The engine coolant perform as a corrosion and rust inhibitor as well as anti-freeze. Therefore, the engine coolant should be used at all times even though the atmospheric temperature in your area does not go down to freezing point.

Suzuki recommends the use of SUZUKI COOLANT antifreeze/engine coolant. If this is not available, use an equivalent which is compatible with an aluminum radiator.

Liquid amount of water/Engine coolant

Solution capacity (total)

3 250 ml (3.4/2.9 US/Imp qt)

For engine coolant mixture information, refer to “Engine Coolant Description in Section 1F (Page 1F-1)”.

! CAUTION

Mixing of anti-freeze/engine coolant should be limited to 60%. Mixing beyond it would reduce its efficiency. If the anti-freeze/engine coolant mixing ratio is below 50%, rust inhabiting performance is greatly reduced. Be sure to mix it above 50% even though the atmospheric temperature does not go down to the freezing point.

BREAK-IN Procedures

B718H10101006

During manufacture only the best possible materials are used and all machined parts are finished to a very high standard but it is still necessary to allow the moving parts to “BREAK-IN” before subjecting the engine to maximum stresses. The future performance and reliability of the engine depends on the care and restraint exercised during its early life. The general rules are as follows.

1)Keep to these break-in engine speed limits:

Speed limits

Initial 800 km (500 miles): Below 4 500 r/min Up to 1 600 km (1 000 miles): Below 7 000 r/min Over 1 600 km (1 000 miles): Below 9 500 r/min

2)Upon reaching an odometer reading of 1 600 km (1 000 miles) you can subject the motorcycle to full throttle operation. However, do not exceed 9 500 r/ min at any time.

Cylinder Identification

B718H10101007

The four cylinders of this engine are identified as #1, 2, 3 and #4 cylinder, as counted from left to right (as viewed by the rider on the seat).

# 1

# 2

# 3

# 4

I718H1010013-01

Loading…

Djebel 250XC и DR-Z 400 S описание приборной панели (RU, 0.2 MB)

DRZ-250 Service Manual (RU, 43.4 MB)

GSX1250fa-Руководство пользователя (RU, 3.7 MB)

Service Manual Suzuki GSF 400 (RU, 4.8 MB)

Service Manual Suzuki Hayabusa K8+ (EN, 35.2 MB)

Susuki GSX 1300 BK Service manual (EN, 37.0 MB)

Suzuki Boulevard C50 2009 (EN, 2.9 MB)

Suzuki Boulevard M109R сервис мануал (RU, 2.7 MB)

Suzuki Boulevard M90 сервис мануал (EN, 40.1 MB)

Suzuki Burgman (AN400) service manual (EN, 18.1 MB)

Suzuki DL 1000 V-Strom руководство пользователя (RU, 3.5 MB)

Suzuki DR250RX SJ45A Djabbel 250 Parts Catalogue 2004-2 (EN, 17.1 MB)

Suzuki GN250 Service Manual (EN, 30.1 MB)

Suzuki GSF 1200 S 2001-2002 Repair Manual (EN, 18.6 MB)

Suzuki GSF 1250 service manual (EN, 35.2 MB)

Suzuki GSF 400 Service Manual `91-`97 (EN, 49.8 MB)

Suzuki GSF 600 S 2000-02 Manual (RU, 26.2 MB)

Suzuki GSF 650 S K7 Manual (RU, 21.3 MB)

Suzuki GSF1250 service manual (EN, 43.1 MB)

Suzuki GSF600/1200 1996-2001 Haynes service manual (EN, 50.8 MB)

Suzuki GSF650A(SA) 2009г -Руководство пользователя (RU, 4.8 MB)

SUZUKI GSF650A/SA (K9) 2009-Руководство пользователя (RU, 4.8 MB)

Suzuki GSF650A/SA 2009-2012 руководство пользователя (RU, 4.8 MB)

Suzuki GSR 600 — Руководство пользователя (RU, 4.6 MB)

Suzuki GSR 750 technical information (EN, 3.0 MB)

Suzuki GSX 1250 FA Manual (RU, 3.7 MB)

Suzuki GSX 1300 BKA руководство пользователя (RU, 3.7 MB)

Suzuki GSX-R 1100W 93-98 Microfiches (EN, 25.3 MB)

Suzuki GSX-R 1100W 93-98 Service Manual (EN, 61.2 MB)

Suzuki GSX-R 600 K8-K9 Servise Manual (EN, 20.6 MB)

Suzuki GSX-R750 2000-2003 (Y-K3) Parts Catalog (EN, 2.5 MB)

Suzuki GSX-R750 K4-K5 (2004) Service Manual (EN, 20.2 MB)

Suzuki GSX650F Service Manual (EN, 43.1 MB)

Suzuki gsxr 750 К6/К7 — Service Manual (EN, 46.0 MB)

Suzuki Intruder 1400 Reparaturanleitung (DE, 12.5 MB)

Suzuki intruder VS 700/750/800 (1987-2008) (RU, 19.9 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 Service Repair Maintenance Manual (EN, 0.4 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 10 (EN, 0.8 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 11 (EN, 0.5 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 12 (EN, 0.6 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 13 (EN, 0.2 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 14 (EN, 0.1 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 15 (элетросхемы) (EN, 1.0 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 2 (EN, 0.3 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 3 (EN, 0.7 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 4 (EN, 1.9 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 5 (EN, 0.6 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 6 (EN, 0.5 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 7 (EN, 0.6 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 8 (EN, 0.6 MB)

Suzuki Intruder VS700-800 часть 9 (EN, 0.3 MB)

Suzuki RF 400 -Manual (JP, 22.1 MB)

Suzuki RF 400 Каталог запчастей (JP, 50.4 MB)

Suzuki RF600R service manual (EN, 43.4 MB)

Suzuki TL1000S — Руководство пользователя (English) (EN, 44.5 MB)

Suzuki VL 1500 Intruder service manual (98-00) (EN, 34.2 MB)

Suzuki VL 1500 Intruder руководство пользователя (RU, 6.7 MB)

Suzuki VL1500 Service Manual 1998-2000 (EN, 33.1 MB)

Suzuki VL1500 service manual 1998-2000 (EN, 33.1 MB)

Suzuki VL1500 service manual 1998-2000 (EN, 33.1 MB)

Suzuki VL800 Manual (RU, 3.7 MB)

Suzuki VL800-Руководство пользователя (RU, 3.7 MB)

Suzuki VX 800 Service Manual (EN, 7.7 MB)

Suzuki VZ1500 owner’s manual (EN, 1.7 MB)

Suzuki XF 650 Freewind (ccm 644 Engine) Service Manual (EN, 12.7 MB)

Suzuku AN650 Service Manual (EN, 31.4 MB)

User Manual Suzuki Hayabusa K8-L13 (RU, 3.3 MB)

User Manual Suzuki SV 650 1GEN 1/2 (EN, 5.1 MB)

User Manual Suzuki SV 650 1GEN 2/2 (EN, 4.5 MB)

Каталог запчастей на GSF 750. (JP, 8.3 MB)

Мануал Suzuki SV 650 S (RU, 1.8 MB)

Руководство по сервисному обслуиванию SFV400 (RU, 4.8 MB)

Руководство пользователя SUZUKI GSFA(SA) 2009 (RU, 4.8 MB)

Руководство пользователя Suzuki GSX 650 F 08г-12г (RU, 3.2 MB)

Руководство пользователя Suzuki GSX1250fa (RU, 3.7 MB)

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF400 Bandit.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 1990
  • Страниц: 319
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 44,1 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF400VV с 1997 года выпуска.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания:
  • Страниц: 49
  • Формат: JPG
  • Размер: 6,2 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF600.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 1995
  • Страниц: 358
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 47,7 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF600 и GSF600S.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 1999
  • Страниц: 333
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 378,2 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по техническому обслуживанию и ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF600 и GSF1200 Bandit 1995-2001 годов выпуска.

  • Издательство: Haynes Publishing
  • Год издания: 2001
  • Страниц: 281
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 50,8 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF650, GSF650S и GSX650F.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 2007
  • Страниц: 620
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 28,9 Mb

Сборник руководств на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF1200 и GSF1200S.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 1996/1996/2000
  • Страниц: -/387/368
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 118,0 Mb

Руководство на английском языке по ремонту мотоциклов Suzuki GSF1250/GSF1250A/GSF1250S/GSF1250SA.

  • Издательство: Suzuki Motor Corporation
  • Год издания: 2006
  • Страниц: 685
  • Формат: PDF
  • Размер: 40,2 Mb

Доп информация

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Свечи анальдим для детей инструкция цена
  • Неуробекс инструкция по применению таблетки цена в беларуси
  • Полькортолон аэрозоль инструкция по применению аналоги
  • Руководство по обслуживанию тигуана
  • Выкройка юбки карандаш со шлицей для начинающих пошаговая инструкция